Preface

Fundamental safety
instructions 1

Functional scope 2
SINUMERIK
Basic commissioning and
configuration 3
SINUMERIK 840D sl
Tool management
Machine data 4

PLC programming 5
Function Manual

NC programming 6

Description of functions 7
SINUMERIK Operate user
interface 8
Code carrier connection -
Tool Ident Connection 9
(option)

Alarms 10

Appendix A

Valid for

Control system
SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl

CNC software version 4.93

12/2019
6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2009 - 2019.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 12/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

SINUMERIK documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized into the following categories:
● General documentation/catalogs
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation

Additional information
You can find information on the following topics at the following address (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108464614):
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
If you have any questions regarding the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions,
corrections), please send an e-mail to the following address
(mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com).

mySupport/Documentation
At the following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation),
you can find information on how to create your own individual documentation based on
Siemens' content, and adapt it for your own machine documentation.

Training
At the following address (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain), you can find information about
SITRAIN (Siemens training on products, systems and solutions for automation and drives).

FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product
Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/ps/faq).

SINUMERIK
You can find information about SINUMERIK at the following address (http://www.siemens.com/
sinumerik).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 3
Preface

Target group
The Function Manual is intended for:
● Project engineers
● Technologists (from machine manufacturers)
● System and machine commissioning engineers
● Programmers

Benefits
The Function Manual describes the functions so that the target group knows them and can
select them. It provides the target group with the information required to implement the
functions.

Standard scope
This documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. Additions or changes
made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This
does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.
Furthermore, for the sake of clarity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information
about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation
or maintenance.

Note regarding the General Data Protection Regulation

Siemens observes standard data protection principles, in particular the principle of privacy by
design. That means that
this product does not process / store any personal data, only technical functional data (e.g. time
stamps). If a user links this data with other data (e.g. a shift schedule) or stores personal data
on the same storage medium (e.g. hard drive) and thus establishes a link to a person or
persons, then the user is responsible for ensuring compliance with the relevant data protection
regulations.

Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet at the
following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2090) in the "Contact"
area.
If you have any technical questions, use the online form in the "Support Request" area.

Tool management
4 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Table of contents

Preface .........................................................................................................................................................3
1 Fundamental safety instructions.................................................................................................................15
1.1 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................15
1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples ......................................................................16
1.3 Industrial security ...................................................................................................................17
2 Functional scope ........................................................................................................................................19
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................19
2.2 System overview ....................................................................................................................21
2.3 Function structure of tool management..................................................................................25
2.4 Magazine management..........................................................................................................26
2.5 Data structure HMI/PLC - NC (OPI) .......................................................................................28
2.6 PLC – NC interfaces...............................................................................................................30
2.7 Access protection, protection levels.......................................................................................32
3 Basic commissioning and configuration .....................................................................................................33
3.1 Input of the machine data.......................................................................................................33
3.1.1 Settings with/without magazine management........................................................................33
3.1.2 Configuration via machine data..............................................................................................34
3.1.3 Additional settings ..................................................................................................................38
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate ...................................................................................42
3.2.1 Function overview of the tool management editor .................................................................42
3.2.2 Editing the tool management .................................................................................................43
3.2.3 Parameterizing the tool management ....................................................................................45
3.2.3.1 Create tool unit.......................................................................................................................45
3.2.3.2 Define buffer locations ...........................................................................................................46
3.2.3.3 Define loading location...........................................................................................................47
3.2.3.4 Create magazine configuration ..............................................................................................48
3.2.3.5 Link assignments ...................................................................................................................49
4 Machine data ..............................................................................................................................................53
4.1 NC-specific machine data ......................................................................................................53
4.2 Channel-specific machine data ..............................................................................................77
4.3 Machine data for function replacement ..................................................................................98
4.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data .............................................................................103
5 PLC programming ....................................................................................................................................105
5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................105
5.2 PLC description....................................................................................................................106

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 5
Table of contents

5.2.1 Interfaces .............................................................................................................................106

5.2.2 Jobs from the NC tool management ....................................................................................109
5.2.3 Asynchronous transfer .........................................................................................................110
5.2.4 Definitions of the acknowledgement status..........................................................................111
5.2.5 Simplified acknowledgement of tool management commands ............................................115
5.2.6 Diagnostics for communication between NC and PLC ........................................................116
5.2.7 Function blocks ....................................................................................................................119
5.2.8 Sample programs.................................................................................................................119
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks.................................................122
5.3.1 Overview of the blocks .........................................................................................................122
5.3.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine ............................................................................123
5.3.3 Interface for spindle as change position...............................................................................128
5.3.4 Interface for turrets as change position................................................................................134
5.3.5 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (multitool) (DB1071) ...........................................139
5.3.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB1072) ............................................................................140
5.3.7 Interface for turret (multitool) (DB1073) ...............................................................................144
5.3.8 Interface NC channels..........................................................................................................148
5.3.9 Interface magazine configuration .........................................................................................149
5.3.10 Delete pending tasks............................................................................................................150
5.3.11 FC6: TM_TRANS2 - transfer block for tool management and multitool ...............................151
5.3.12 FC7: TM_REV - transfer block for tool change with revolver ...............................................152
5.3.13 FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management ......................................................155
6 NC programming ......................................................................................................................................163
6.1 Overview of OPI and system variables ................................................................................163
6.2 Use of the magazine data ....................................................................................................166
6.3 Use of the tool and cutting edge data ..................................................................................168
6.4 Cutting edge data.................................................................................................................170
6.4.1 Cutting edge data.................................................................................................................170
6.4.2 Cutting edge parameter $TC_DP.........................................................................................170
6.4.3 User cutting edge data $TC_DPC........................................................................................172
6.4.4 Cutting edge-related tool monitoring $TC_MOP ..................................................................173
6.4.5 User cutting edge monitoring $TC_MOPC...........................................................................174
6.4.6 Location of use-dependent offsets fine (additive offsets) $TC_SCP....................................175
6.4.7 Location-dependent offsets coarse (setting-up offsets) $TC_ECP ......................................175
6.5 Tool data ..............................................................................................................................177
6.5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................177
6.5.2 Tool-related data $TC_TP....................................................................................................177
6.5.3 Tool-related grinding data $TC_TPG ...................................................................................183
6.5.4 Tool-related user data $TC_TPC .........................................................................................183
6.6 Magazine data......................................................................................................................185
6.6.1 Overview of magazine data..................................................................................................185
6.6.2 Magazine description data $TC_MAP..................................................................................185
6.6.3 Magazine user data $TC_MAPC..........................................................................................188
6.6.4 Magazine location data $TC_MPP.......................................................................................188
6.6.5 Magazine location user data $TC_MPPC ............................................................................192
6.6.6 Magazine location type hierarchy $TC_MPTH.....................................................................193
6.6.7 Distance to change position $TC_MDP ...............................................................................194
6.6.8 Magazine blocks $TC_MAMP ..............................................................................................197

Tool management
6 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Table of contents

6.6.9 Assignment of buffers to spindles $TC_MLSR.....................................................................204

6.7 Multitool data........................................................................................................................207
6.7.1 $TC_MTP - multitool data ....................................................................................................207
6.7.2 $TC_MTPP - Multitool location data.....................................................................................216
6.7.3 Multitool-related user data....................................................................................................220
6.7.4 Multitool-location-related user data ......................................................................................221
6.8 User-definable variables ......................................................................................................222
6.9 NC language commands......................................................................................................224
6.9.1 CHKDNO - Uniqueness check for D number .......................................................................224
6.9.2 CHKDM - Uniqueness check within a magazine..................................................................225
6.9.3 GETACTTD - Determining the tool number of a unique D No. ............................................226
6.9.4 GETDNO - Read out D numbers .........................................................................................227
6.9.5 SETDNO - Set or change D number....................................................................................228
6.9.6 DZERO - Invalidate D numbers ...........................................................................................228
6.9.7 DELDL - Delete additive offsets ...........................................................................................229
6.9.8 NEWT - Create new tool ......................................................................................................229
6.9.9 NEWMT Create new multitool..............................................................................................230
6.9.10 DELT Delete tool..................................................................................................................232
6.9.11 DELMT - Delete multitool .....................................................................................................232
6.9.12 $TC_MTPN - Delete one or all multitools.............................................................................233
6.9.13 Reading the GETT - T no.....................................................................................................234
6.9.14 SETPIECE - decrementing the workpiece counter ..............................................................235
6.9.15 GETSELT - Read the selected T number ............................................................................237
6.9.16 GETEXET - Reading of the loaded T number......................................................................240
6.9.17 $P_MTHSDC - master tool holder with regard to the D offset selection ..............................244
6.9.18 $P_TH_OF_D - master tool holder to which the current D offset refers ...............................245
6.9.19 GETACTT - Read the active internal T number ...................................................................246
6.9.20 SETMS - Set master spindle................................................................................................248
6.9.21 SETMTH - Set master toolholder number............................................................................248
6.9.22 POSM - Positioning the magazine .......................................................................................251
6.9.23 POSMT - position multitool on toolholder to location number ..............................................253
6.9.24 MVTOOL - NC command to move tool ................................................................................256
6.9.25 SETTA - Activate tool from wear group................................................................................259
6.9.26 SETTIA - Deactivate tool from wear group ..........................................................................261
6.9.27 RESETMON - NC command for setpoint activation.............................................................263
6.9.28 DELTC - Delete toolholder data record................................................................................267
6.9.29 TCA - tool selection/tool change irrespective of tool status .................................................268
6.9.30 TCI - Load tool from buffer into magazine............................................................................271
6.9.31 GETFREELOC - Search for empty location.........................................................................273
6.9.32 DELMLRES - Delete location status "reserved for tool in the buffer"...................................279
6.9.33 DELMLOWNER - Delete owner magazine location of the tool ............................................280
6.9.34 $P_USEKT - Tool change only with tools of subgroup ........................................................282
6.9.35 TOOLGNT/TOOLGT - Tool groups......................................................................................285
6.9.36 $P_TMNOIS - is number, T number, magazine number, or MT number .............................286
6.9.37 $P_TOOLEXIST - Determine existence of a tool .................................................................287
6.9.38 $A_TOOLMN - read magazine no. from tool........................................................................288
6.9.39 $P_MTOOLN / $P_MTOOLMT- determine number of multitools / MT number ...................289
6.9.40 $P_MTOOLNT / $P_MTOOLT - Number of tools in the multitool ........................................290
6.9.41 $A_TOOLMLN - Read magazine location No. of tool ..........................................................291
6.9.42 $P_TOOLND - Read number of cutting edges for tool.........................................................292
6.9.43 $A_MONIFACT - factor for tool life monitoring.....................................................................292

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 7
Table of contents

6.9.44 $AC_MONMIN - Factor for tool search ................................................................................294

6.9.45 $P_TOOLNG - Number of tool groups .................................................................................297
6.9.46 $A_MYMN / $A_MYMLN - Owner magazine/location of the tool .........................................298
6.9.47 $A_MYMTN / $A_MYMTLN - $A_TOOLMTN / $A_TOOLMTLN - tools in multitool.............299
6.9.48 $P_TOOLNT / $P_TOOLT - T numbers...............................................................................300
6.9.49 $P_TOOLD - D numbers......................................................................................................301
6.9.50 $P_TOOLNDL - Number of defined DL offsets ....................................................................301
6.9.51 $A_USEDND - Workpiece counting ....................................................................................302
6.9.52 $A_USEDT - Workpiece counting ........................................................................................303
6.9.53 $A_USEDD - Workpiece count ............................................................................................304
6.9.54 $A_TOOLADAPT - Assignment of tool to adapter ...............................................................305
6.9.55 $TC_ADPTx - adapter description .......................................................................................306
6.9.56 $P_MAGNA / $P_MAGA - Tool adapter...............................................................................308
6.9.57 $P_MAGN / $P_MAG - Magazine ........................................................................................309
6.9.58 $P_MAGNDIS / $P_MAGDISS / $P_MAGDISL - magazine distance tables .......................310
6.9.59 $P_MAGNS / $P_MAGS - Toolholder..................................................................................311
6.9.60 $P_MAGNREL / $P_MAGREL - Assigned buffer.................................................................312
6.9.61 Example of magazine configuration system variables .........................................................313
6.9.62 $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT / $P_MAGHLT - Location type hierarchies ...........................315
6.9.63 Additional language commands ...........................................................................................318
6.9.64 Variables for subroutine replacement technique..................................................................325
6.9.65 Variables for tool change in synchronized action.................................................................326
6.10 Definitions when programming data.....................................................................................328
6.10.1 Tool change .........................................................................................................................328
6.10.2 Cutting edge selection..........................................................................................................329
6.10.3 Tool transfer from program test............................................................................................330
6.11 Programming T=location number.........................................................................................331
6.12 Call multiple turrets with "T=location number"......................................................................333
6.13 Programming examples .......................................................................................................334
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management ................................................335
6.14.1 Magazine data, directory......................................................................................................335
6.14.2 Tool data, directory ..............................................................................................................335
6.14.3 Parameterization, return parameters _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC.......................................336
6.14.4 Working offsets ....................................................................................................................337
6.14.5 PI services and language commands for tool management ................................................337
7 Description of functions ............................................................................................................................343
7.1 Magazines............................................................................................................................343
7.1.1 Magazine configuration ........................................................................................................343
7.1.2 Magazine types ....................................................................................................................344
7.1.3 Loading magazine................................................................................................................345
7.1.4 Buffer....................................................................................................................................346
7.1.5 Box-type and chain magazines ............................................................................................347
7.1.6 Circular magazine ................................................................................................................350
7.1.7 Other magazine types ..........................................................................................................352
7.1.8 Wear group ..........................................................................................................................352
7.1.9 Background magazine .........................................................................................................354
7.1.10 Consider adjacent location...................................................................................................355
7.2 Loading ................................................................................................................................357

Tool management
8 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Table of contents

7.2.1 Loading sequence................................................................................................................357

7.2.2 Function of the PLC when loading? .....................................................................................359
7.2.3 Loading by directly assigning the T number.........................................................................362
7.2.4 Load tools via a part program ..............................................................................................362
7.2.5 Retroload tool data...............................................................................................................363
7.3 Unloading .............................................................................................................................366
7.3.1 Unloading sequence ............................................................................................................366
7.3.2 PLC function when unloading ..............................................................................................367
7.3.3 Unloading by deleting the T number from the magazine location ........................................370
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines ................................................................371
7.4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................371
7.4.2 General tool change sequence ............................................................................................372
7.4.3 Preparing a tool change via T command .............................................................................376
7.4.4 Execution of the tool change................................................................................................377
7.4.5 Tool change for chain and box-type magazines ..................................................................378
7.4.5.1 PLC function during preparation (chain, box type)...............................................................378
7.4.5.2 PLC function during tool change (chain, box type) ..............................................................381
7.4.5.3 PLC sample programs tool change......................................................................................384
7.4.5.4 Example structure of the PLC program for a tool change ....................................................386
7.4.6 Tool change with turret.........................................................................................................388
7.4.7 Selecting a tool and a cutting edge ......................................................................................389
7.4.8 Predecoding (preprocessing) and block execution (main run).............................................391
7.4.9 Traverse axes while tool is being changed ..........................................................................393
7.4.10 Special cases "T0", empty spindle, multiple T selection ......................................................393
7.4.11 Number of replacement tools ...............................................................................................394
7.4.12 Tool changing errors ............................................................................................................395
7.4.13 Monitoring the maximum speed of a tool .............................................................................396
7.4.14 Tool changes in the NC using synchronized actions ...........................................................402
7.4.15 Replacing functions with subprograms ................................................................................405
7.4.15.1 Function replacement...........................................................................................................405
7.4.15.2 Replacement of the TCA command .....................................................................................409
7.4.16 Block search.........................................................................................................................411
7.4.17 Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management.........................................413
7.4.18 System variables for state before block search ...................................................................416
7.4.18.1 Description of the variables..................................................................................................416
7.4.18.2 Example ...............................................................................................................................417
7.4.19 Program test.........................................................................................................................420
7.4.20 Several spindles in one channel or TO unit .........................................................................422
7.4.21 Decoupling the tool management from the spindle number.................................................423
7.4.22 Several spindles/toolholders ................................................................................................428
7.4.23 Several magazines in one channel or one TO unit ..............................................................429
7.4.24 Reset and start mode...........................................................................................................429
7.4.25 Repeating a tool change with the same tool identifier..........................................................437
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine....................................................................440
7.5.1 Relocating sequence............................................................................................................440
7.5.2 Relocation by the PLC .........................................................................................................442
7.5.3 Positioning the magazine .....................................................................................................445
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)...................................................................448
7.6.1 Brief description ...................................................................................................................448
7.6.2 Programming........................................................................................................................451

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 9
Table of contents

7.6.3 Tool change with a tool from a multitool...............................................................................452

7.6.4 Tool change and tool number for multitools .........................................................................458
7.7 Using manual tools...............................................................................................................468
7.7.1 Manual tools (adding tools during machining)......................................................................468
7.7.2 Tool change with manual tools.............................................................................................472
7.7.3 Role of the PLC for manual tools .........................................................................................474
7.8 Search for tool......................................................................................................................478
7.8.1 Strategies for tool searches .................................................................................................478
7.9 Empty location search..........................................................................................................481
7.9.1 Empty location search for a tool – from spindle to magazine...............................................481
7.9.2 Search strategy for empty locations.....................................................................................482
7.9.3 Search procedure for empty locations .................................................................................483
7.9.4 Search strategy, 1:1 exchange (old for new) .......................................................................483
7.9.5 Tool search in wear group....................................................................................................485
7.10 Location type hierarchies .....................................................................................................489
7.10.1 Hierarchies of location types in magazines..........................................................................489
7.10.2 Conventional location type hierarchy $TC_MAMP2, Bit15=0...............................................491
7.10.3 Alternative location type hierarchy $TC_MAMP2, Bit15=1...................................................492
7.10.4 Search strategy across magazines ......................................................................................494
7.10.5 Mini hierarchies ....................................................................................................................495
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)................................................................497
7.11.1 Monitoring types...................................................................................................................497
7.11.2 Tool life monitoring...............................................................................................................500
7.11.3 Workpiece count monitoring.................................................................................................501
7.11.4 Wear monitoring...................................................................................................................502
7.11.5 Signals to and from the PLC ................................................................................................504
7.12 Tool monitoring without active tool management.................................................................508
7.12.1 Tool monitoring overview .....................................................................................................508
7.12.2 Tool life monitoring...............................................................................................................509
7.12.3 Workpiece count monitoring.................................................................................................510
7.12.4 Wear monitoring...................................................................................................................511
7.12.5 Monitoring the additive offset ...............................................................................................511
7.12.6 Working with replacement tools ...........................................................................................511
7.12.7 Examples .............................................................................................................................511
7.12.8 NC language commands......................................................................................................512
7.13 Variants of D-number assignments......................................................................................513
7.13.1 Free selection of D numbers for every T..............................................................................513
7.13.2 Location-dependent offsets (additive offsets) ......................................................................515
7.14 Tool adapter .........................................................................................................................518
7.14.1 Machine data for setting adapters of type 1 and type 2 .......................................................518
7.14.2 Creating/deleting adapters ...................................................................................................518
7.14.3 Constraints for adapters.......................................................................................................519
7.14.4 Managing adapter data ........................................................................................................520
7.14.4.1 Managing adapter data for type 1 and type 2 ......................................................................520
7.14.5 Adapter type 1......................................................................................................................520
7.14.5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................520
7.14.5.2 Description of function..........................................................................................................521
7.14.5.3 Activation..............................................................................................................................522

Tool management
10 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Table of contents

7.14.5.4 Adapter data $TC_ADPT .....................................................................................................531

7.14.5.5 Transformed data of the active tool $P_ADT[n] ...................................................................532
7.14.6 Adapter type 2 (angle head adapter) (option) .....................................................................532
7.14.6.1 Assigning an angle head adapter.........................................................................................532
7.14.6.2 Angle head adapter - tool and adapter separate (type 2) ....................................................533
7.14.7 Offset values ........................................................................................................................539
7.14.7.1 Base length for the adapter..................................................................................................539
7.14.7.2 Cutter radius compensations and setup offsets for adapters...............................................540
7.14.7.3 Cutting edge data for the orientation type 2 adapter............................................................541
7.14.8 OPI block ADN .....................................................................................................................541
7.15 Power failure while tool command is in progress .................................................................543
8 SINUMERIK Operate user interface.........................................................................................................545
8.1 Configuring the user interface ..............................................................................................545
8.1.1 General settings ...................................................................................................................548
8.1.2 Configuring tool lists.............................................................................................................553
8.1.2.1 Tool parameter identifiers ....................................................................................................557
8.1.2.2 Cutting edge parameter identifiers .......................................................................................559
8.1.2.3 Monitoring parameter identifiers...........................................................................................562
8.1.2.4 Grinding parameter identifiers..............................................................................................563
8.1.2.5 Magazine location parameter identifiers ..............................................................................564
8.1.2.6 Magazine location adapter parameter identifiers .................................................................565
8.1.2.7 Multitool parameter identifiers ..............................................................................................565
8.1.2.8 Multitool location parameter identifiers.................................................................................566
8.1.3 Configuring list parameters ..................................................................................................567
8.1.4 List of tool types ...................................................................................................................571
8.1.5 Configure tool types .............................................................................................................573
8.1.6 Configuring the "Additional Data" window ............................................................................575
8.1.7 Configure the "New tool - favorites" window ........................................................................577
8.1.8 Configuring the "New Tool" window .....................................................................................578
8.1.9 Configuring the "New Multitool" window...............................................................................578
8.1.10 Configuring the "New Tool from Code Carrier" window .......................................................579
8.1.11 Configuring the "New Tool from File" window ......................................................................579
8.1.12 Configuring default values for new tools ..............................................................................580
8.1.13 Configuring the "Details" window .........................................................................................584
8.1.14 Assigning a name for magazines and magazine locations ..................................................585
8.1.15 Configuring the "Assign Tooltips for Multitool Locations" window ........................................587
8.1.16 Assigning a name for magazine location types....................................................................588
8.1.17 Assignment of magazines and magazine locations to channels..........................................589
8.1.18 Assignment between magazines and magazine locations and coordinate systems............591
8.1.19 Disabling the softkey depending on filters............................................................................592
8.1.20 Configuring the "Load Station Selection" window ................................................................593
8.1.21 Coolant and tool-specific functions ......................................................................................594
8.1.22 Reason for the tool change when reactivating .....................................................................597
8.1.23 Configure the code carrier connection .................................................................................601
8.1.24 Configuring Save to file ........................................................................................................604
8.2 Creating OEM texts..............................................................................................................606
8.2.1 Identifiers of the standard texts ............................................................................................607
8.2.2 Examples of OEM texts........................................................................................................609
8.3 Examples .............................................................................................................................612
8.3.1 Example: Configuring an OEM tool list ................................................................................612

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 11
Table of contents

8.3.1.1 Adapting the configuration file..............................................................................................612

8.3.1.2 Adaptation of the customer text file......................................................................................614
8.3.2 Example: Configuring magazine location types with names ................................................616
8.3.2.1 Adapting the configuration file..............................................................................................616
8.3.2.2 Adaptation of the customer text file......................................................................................617
8.4 Working with two tool holders ..............................................................................................620
9 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)........................................................................623
9.1 Installation ............................................................................................................................623
9.1.1 System requirements ...........................................................................................................623
9.1.2 Installation of Tool Ident Connection....................................................................................624
9.1.2.1 Activation of Tool Ident Connection .....................................................................................624
9.1.2.2 Installation of Wkonvert wizard ............................................................................................625
9.2 Configuration........................................................................................................................631
9.2.1 Configuration schematic.......................................................................................................631
9.2.2 Configuration of the tool lists................................................................................................631
9.2.3 TDIIdentCfg.xml ...................................................................................................................631
9.2.4 Read/write device at the PLC...............................................................................................634
9.2.5 Data conversion ...................................................................................................................635
9.2.5.1 Using the Wkonvert wizard ..................................................................................................637
9.2.5.2 Messages of the Wkonvert wizard .......................................................................................638
9.2.6 Conversion files wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt ................................................................639
9.2.6.1 Structure of the description file wkonvert.txt ........................................................................639
9.2.6.2 Examples for the description files wkonvert.txt ....................................................................644
9.2.6.3 Tool data initialization file DefToolDat.txt .............................................................................647
9.2.7 Conversion rule based on the MCIS-C script language .......................................................649
9.2.7.1 Structure of the conversion rule ...........................................................................................649
9.2.7.2 Access to tool data...............................................................................................................651
9.2.7.3 Auxiliary functions for numerical coding...............................................................................653
9.2.7.4 Configuration of ToolSpec.xml .............................................................................................659
9.2.7.5 Error handling.......................................................................................................................660
9.2.7.6 Description of the MCIS-C script language ..........................................................................661
9.2.7.7 Help functions in conversion specifications..........................................................................662
9.2.8 Examples .............................................................................................................................663
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19....................................................................................................668
9.3.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................668
9.3.2 Function call of the PLC interface ........................................................................................668
9.3.3 Assignment of the PLC for transfer parameters...................................................................669
9.3.4 Assignment of the PLC for return values .............................................................................670
9.3.5 Executing functions ..............................................................................................................670
9.3.5.1 General sequence when executing functions ......................................................................670
9.3.5.2 Pulse diagram for positive execution of a function...............................................................671
9.3.5.3 Pulse diagram when negative execution of a function .........................................................672
9.3.5.4 Pulse diagram "Ident_Ready" signal ....................................................................................672
9.3.6 PLC interface for the Parameter operating area ..................................................................673
9.3.6.1 Assignment of the PLC interface for the Parameter area ....................................................673
9.3.6.2 Load the tool ........................................................................................................................674
9.3.6.3 Sequence ............................................................................................................................675
9.3.6.4 Sequence when canceled by the PLC .................................................................................676
9.3.6.5 Unloading a tool ...................................................................................................................677
9.3.6.6 Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................677

Tool management
12 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Table of contents

9.3.6.7 Restrictions ..........................................................................................................................679

9.3.6.8 Error messages....................................................................................................................679
9.3.7 PLC data types.....................................................................................................................679
9.4 Command codes ..................................................................................................................681
9.4.1 Functional scope of the PLC interface (K codes).................................................................681
9.4.2 Parameter description ..........................................................................................................681
9.4.3 Loading from the code carrier (K code = 0)..........................................................................682
9.4.4 Unload to code carrier (K code = 1) .....................................................................................683
9.4.5 Loading of production host computer (K code = 4) ..............................................................684
9.4.6 Unload to the production host computer (K code = 5)..........................................................685
9.4.7 Loading a tool from the tool list (K code = 7)........................................................................686
9.4.8 Unloading a tool in the tool list (K code = 8).........................................................................687
9.4.9 Empty location search (K code = 9) .....................................................................................688
9.4.10 Delete tool in NC (K code = 10) ...........................................................................................690
9.4.11 Updating the code carrier (K code = 14) ..............................................................................690
9.4.12 Reading data from the code carrier (K code = 15) ...............................................................691
9.4.13 Error codes...........................................................................................................................692
9.5 Examples .............................................................................................................................698
9.5.1 Loading the code carrier via PLC interface ..........................................................................698
9.5.2 Unloading to the code carrier via PLC interface...................................................................701
10 Alarms ......................................................................................................................................................703
10.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................703
10.2 Alarm description .................................................................................................................706
A Appendix...................................................................................................................................................739
A.1 List of abbreviations .............................................................................................................739
A.2 Documentation overview......................................................................................................741
A.3 Available IPCs......................................................................................................................742
Index.........................................................................................................................................................743

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 13
Table of contents

Tool management
14 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Danger to life if the safety instructions and residual risks are not observed
If the safety instructions and residual risks in the associated hardware documentation are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.
● Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
● Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.

WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
● Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
● Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 15
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples

1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples

Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding configuration,
equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not represent specific
customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are operated
correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe handling when
using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.

Tool management
16 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Industrial security

1.3 Industrial security

Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Products and solutions from Siemens constitute one element of such a
concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the Internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and
only when appropriate security measures (e.g. using firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented, please
visit:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they become
available, and that only the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are
no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed at:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)

Further information is provided on the Internet:

Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/108862708)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 17
Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Industrial security

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states
in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
● Keep the software up to date.
● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
● Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
● Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
● On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.
● Protect the drive against unauthorized changes by activating the "Know-how protection"
converter function.

Tool management
18 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Functional scope 2
2.1 Introduction

Overview
The "Tool management" (TOOLMAN) function ensures that at any given time the correct tool
is selected and that the data assigned to the tool is up to date. The function is used on machine
tools with circular magazines, chain magazines or box magazines. Tool management also
enables the following functions:
● Optimum tool staging for tool change.
● Avoidance of waste by monitoring tool operation (function "Tool monitoring function").
● Avoidance of machine downtimes by using replacement tools.
● Search for a suitable magazine location for the tool being replaced (with function Magazine
management).

Note
If only "TMMO" is active, magazine management must be implemented by the machine
manufacturer in the PLC user program.

Function versions of tool management

There are 3 different function versions when handling tools:
● TMMO: ToolManagement Tool (Monitoring)
(English: TMMO = Tool Management Tool Monitoring)
● TMMG: ToolManagementMagazines (only available with active tool management)
(English: TMMG = Tool Management Magazines)
● TMMO and TMMG
Combination of the two function types

Quantity structure

Quantity structure NCU 730 NCU 720 NCU 710

Number of magazines 64 32 32
Number of cutting edges 3000 1500 1500
Number of tools per multitool 64 32 32

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 19
Functional scope
2.1 Introduction

Option
Tool management with more than 4 real magazines is an OPTION.

Tool management
20 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Functional scope
2.2 System overview

2.2 System overview

System overview
The following diagram shows an overview of tool management.

6\VWHPVWUXFWXUH

+0, 7',
706HUYLFH &RGHFDUULHU

23,LQWHUIDFH

1& ,QWHUIDFH 3/& 3/&

/DQJXDJH %DVLFSURJUDP 8VHUSURJUDP
GDWDPDQDJH )%
3/&
PHQW
8VHULQWHUIDFH
VHTXHQWLDO
'%
FRQWUROV\VWHP
ORJLF

Figure 2-1 System overview diagram Tool management

Magazine management
Special functions of the tool management include magazine management, tool and empty
location search. These additional functions are only available when tool management is active.
Without active tool management, the magazine management must be implemented by the
machine manufacturer in the PLC user program.

Tool monitoring
The tool monitoring function is used to monitor tool lifetime, unit quantity or wear values.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 21
Functional scope
2.2 System overview

OPI variables
Additional functions are available using OPI variables on the PLC or HMI side. You can use OPI
variables (NC variables) by choosing them with the NC-VAR selector.

Further information
● SINUMERIK 840D sl: Function Manual PLC

System variables
NC programs (e.g. cycle, ASUB) provide corresponding NC commands to achieve optimum
adaptation of the tool management to the machine environment. You can obtain a clear
overview about the data structures that form the basis of the tool management. They are
represented in the form of NC data blocks.

Operator panels
The following operator panels can be used for tool management:
● OP177, e.g. for loading magazines
● OP8T, e.g. for box-type magazines

Data
Data storage and management is carried out in the NC and SINUMERIK Operate. All data can
be read and written manually via the NC program or by data transfer.

Operation via system screens

Operation is mainly performed via system screens. There are system screens for
commissioning and for tool management operation (magazine lists, tool lists, loading/
unloading).

Configuration of user-specific screens

Tool-specific data that is not displayed via SINUMERIK Operate system screens can be
displayed and changed in configurable user-specific screens.
The configuration of user-specific screens is described in:

Further information
● SINUMERIK 840D sl: Commissioning Manual, Base Software and Operating Software;
SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens (BE2)

Programming in the NC part program

The tool management function makes it possible to call a tool in the part program using a name
(identifier), e.g. T = "end mill 120 mm".

Tool management
22 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Functional scope
2.2 System overview

Tool call is still possible via the T no. (tool number). The T no. is then the name of the tool
(e.g. T=T12345678).
A tool is uniquely defined by its internal T number or identifier and its duplo number.
Furthermore, each tool can be uniquely identified by its name. The internal T number
is generally assigned by the NC, and is not used for programming a tool change in the part
program.
Using a machine data, it can be set as to whether the change is realized using the T command
(typical for lathes) or whether the tool is prepared using T programming and only changed with
M06. This machine data setting is independent of the magazine type.
The following characters are permitted for the identifier:
[ _ ] [ a...z ] [ A...Z ] [ 0...9 ] ; [ + - . , ]
Identifiers are case-sensitive, i.e. differentiate between upper-case and lower-case characters.

PLC
There are data blocks (DB71-73) as well as DB1071-1073 for receiving tool management
commands and function blocks (FC6, FC7, FC8) for acknowledging the tool management
commands. A "fast acknowledgement" is implemented for simple applications in data blocks
DB71...73.
Another block, FC22, is used as a direction selection for magazines.
Tool management data can also be read and written via FB2 and FB3. Complex tool
management services can be initiated via FB4.

Location coding
Fixed location coding as well as variable location coding are supported for the tools.

Location type
The location type defines the type and shape of the location. By assigning location types to
magazine locations it is possible to subdivide a magazine into areas. This means that different
types of special tools, e.g. "especially_large", "especially_heavy" can be assigned to specific
locations.
The location types can be placed in ascending order - a so called hierarchy. This order
determines that a tool that is supposed to be inserted in a "small" location type can also be
placed in a "larger" location type if no "smaller" location type is vacant.

Monitoring functions
In tool management, it is possible to select either workpiece counts or tool life monitoring (with
reference to the cutting edges). Further, a wear monitoring function is available. Replacement
tools (duplo tools) are differentiated by means of a duplo number.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 23
Functional scope
2.2 System overview

Search strategy
Various strategies are possible for tool search and to search for the empty location of the "old
tool". The "old tool" is the tool to be replaced.
The empty location search strategy is used for loading tools.

Tool groups
Tools with the same identifier are combined in tool groups. Using duplo numbers, a distinction
can be made between tools - and used as replacement tools ("sister tool") within the framework
of the tool management.

Excerpt from TOOLMAN basic data

Term Data/Range
Magazine configuration per channel 1
Total number of magazines Max. 64
Total number of magazine locations Max. 1500
Total number of tools Across all TO units max. 1500
Programming tools (names) in the NC program e.g. T="angled mill_32"
using 32 alphanumeric characters
Duplo number 1) 1 – 32000
Total number of cutting edges Max. 3000
Location type definition Assigning location types to magazine locations
Viewing adjacent locations in half locations 2dimensional
Location coding Fixed or variable
Strategy for tool search can be set (programmable) via system variables
Strategy for empty location search can be set (programmable) via system variables
M06 command for tool change M code, settable via MD, channel-specific
Tool change with M06 or T command settable via MD, channel-specific
Wear monitoring For every cutting edge
Wear monitoring according to tool life Resolution in ms
Wear monitoring according to number of workpie‐ Counter
ces
Access to tool management data via NC program System variables
Automatic decoding stop until tool is selected Yes
T=Location No. settable via MD

1) The duplo number or the duplo tool is called "sistertool" in SINUMERIK Operate.

Tool management
24 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Functional scope
2.3 Function structure of tool management

2.3 Function structure of tool management

HMI
● Tool list
● Tool wear list
● OEM tool list
● Magazine list
NC
● Tool data management
– State
– Monitoring
– Corrections
● Magazine data management
– Magazines
– Magazine locations
● Tool management
– Search for tool
– Find empty location
– Change tool
– Load, unload
PLC
● Magazine control
● Gripper control
● Spindle control
● Safety interlocks
● Execute tool change
● Calculation of position, if necessary
● Own change strategy, if applicable

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 25
Functional scope
2.4 Magazine management

2.4 Magazine management

Tool magazine management - TMMG

Magazine management administers the magazine locations. The locations have the following
properties:
● The locations are free.
● The locations are occupied with tools.
● These locations are occupied by oversized tools in adjacent locations.
● The locations are reserved for a tool in a buffer or loading magazine.
The tool magazine management offers the following functions:
● Magazine management provides extended functions such as load, unload, position tools or
position magazines.
● It also includes search functions for tools, magazine locations, and search strategies for
replacement tools.
● For the tool monitoring functions, while the activated monitoring is running, tools are
disabled and no longer used.
● For further machining, if a similar tool (replacement tool) is present which is not disabled,
then this tool is used automatically.
● When tool management is active, you define the configuration of magazines, loading
magazines, spindles, grippers, etc. The NC defines the interfaces (DB 71 to DB 73) in the
PLC via the configuration data.
Task-related tool motions (e.g. position chain, swivel gripper) are derived from the interface
processing. After tool movements, the positions and task status should be acknowledged via
basic program blocks (FC6, FC7 and FC8). The acknowledgement procedure is described in
detail in Definitions of the acknowledgement status (Page 111) and Simplified
acknowledgement of tool management commands (Page 115).
If necessary, create another cycle (or ASUP) for the NC program where tool changing is
programmed with the required travel motions. An identifier is programmed for the tool change
or tool preselection when the TOOLMAN system is active. A duplo number is also available to
support unique identification of replacement tools. Tool identifier and duplo numbers are
always mapped on an internally assigned T number. This internally assigned T number is used
for addressing the variables described in the following.

Magazine types in the magazine management

Magazine management manages the following real magazines.
● Circular magazine (Page 350)
● Box-type and chain magazines (Page 347)
Other magazine types, e.g. pick-up magazines, are mapped onto these.
Real magazines can be defined as a circular, chain or box-type. Loading points or loading
stations shall be used as the magazine type for loading and unloading.

Tool management
26 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Functional scope
2.4 Magazine management

A magazine buffer combines all other locations in which tools can be placed (spindle,
gripper, ...).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 27
 0DJD]LQHGDWD 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD

28
0DJD]LQHGLUHFWRU\

2.5
707&B0$3[>\@ 7367&B033[>[\@
709
1RRI 0DJD]LQHQR /RFDWLRQQXPEHU 7RROGDWDLQJHQHUDO 7 LGHQWLILHU
PDJV
,GHQWLILHU /RFDWLRQW\SH 7'7&B73[>\@
0DJ1R 0DJ,' 7\SH /RFDWLRQW\SH 7QR 787&B73&[>\@
6WDWH 7QR ,GHQWLILHU
0DJ1R 0DJ,'
Functional scope

PDQDJ &RQVLGHUDGMORF\Q 'XSORQXPEHU

7RROVL]H 8VHUGDWDSHUWRRO
PDQDJ 6WDWH 0DJ/RFDWLRQW\SH
1XPEHURIORFDWLRQV 0DJ'HVFULSWLRQ 6WDWH
&XUUHQWORFDWLRQ 7\SHLQGH[ HJVSLQGOH 0RQLWRULQJW\SH
6XEVWLWXWHVHTXHQFH 07'7&B073&[>\@

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ 07GDWD
/RFDWLRQQXPEHU 8VHUGDWDIRUHDFK
0DJD]LQHFRQWUROEORFN 07'7&B073[>\@ PXOWLWRRO
7807&B0$3&[>\@ /RFDWLRQW\SH
70&7&B0$03[ /RFDWLRQW\SH ,GHQWLILHU
1XPEHURIORFDWLRQV
8VHUGDWDSHU 7QR
2.5 Data structure HMI/PLC - NC (OPI)

1RRIORDGLQJ 7RROVL]H 07'7&B0733[>\]@

PDJD]LQH PDJD]LQH &RQVLGHUDGMORF\Q 6WDWH
6WDWH 0DJ/RFDWLRQW\SH 0XOWLWRRO
1REXIIHU 0DJ'HVFULSWLRQ  ORFDWLRQGDWD
0XOWLSOHDVVLJQPHQWV 7\SHLQGH[ HJVSLQGOH
1XPEHURIORFDWLRQV 07837&B0733&[>\]@
7307&B0'3[>\]@
7837&B033&B[>\]@
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ 0XOWLWRROXVHU
'LVWDQFHVW,QW0DJ ORFDWLRQGDWD
8VHUGDWDSHU
ORFDWLRQ
'LVWDQFHQG,QW0DJ 3HUHGJH
7RROGDWDGLUHFWRU\ 767&B023[>\]@
Data structure (structure of magazine data and tool data)

7RROFXWWLQJHGJHGDWD
$'
79 727&B'3[>\]@ 6HUYLFHOLIHFRXQW
Data structure HMI/PLC - NC (OPI)

SUHZDUQLQJOLPLW
,QWHUQDOFRPPXQLFD '
*HRPHWU\FXWWLQJHGJH
WLRQZLWK+0, $GDSWHUGDWD
$VVLJQPHQWRIEXIIHU


ORFDWLRQVWRVSLQGOH
7&B0/65>[\@ 7827&B023&[>\]@
'
*HRPHWU\FXWWLQJHGJH 8VHUGDWD
0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQKLHUDUFK\ PRQLWRULQJ
777&B037+>[\@ 78(7&B'3&[>\]@
$VVLJQPHQWRIPDJD]LQH
72(726
ORFDWLRQRIWKHEXIIHU
/RFDWLRQW\SH ' 7&B(&37&B6&3
PDJD]LQHWRDVSLQGOH 8VHUGDWDFXWWLQJHGJH
KLHUDUFK\
IRUHDFKORFDWLRQ /RFDWLRQ


GHSHQGHQWRIIVHWV
6HWXSYDOXH
' 8VHU'DWDFXWWLQJHGJH ZHDUYDOXH

Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0

Tool management
 Functional scope
2.5 Data structure HMI/PLC - NC (OPI)

Blue fields Blue fields describe the data of multitools

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 29
Functional scope
2.6 PLC – NC interfaces

2.6 PLC – NC interfaces

Overview
The core of the tool management is located on the NC. The PLC merely contains the interfaces
for the machine-specific part.

3/& 1&
'%
'% 3DUDPH
WHUV
/RDGLQJ DVVLJQPHQW 0DFKLQH
XQORDGLQJVW '% EXIIHUHWF GDWD

/RDGLQJXQO
RDGLQJVW 72GDWD
'%

6SLQGOH 7RROPDQDJH
'% %DVLF PHQW
SURJUDP
6SLQGOH )%

'% 0DJD]LQH
GDWD
7XUUHW
'%

7XUUHW

)&
/RFWRROROG 70B75$16
/RFWRROQHZ
)&
6HWSRLQWSRV 70B',5 'LUHFWLRQ
$FWXDOSRV 6HOHFWLRQRI
'LVWDQFHWRJR
GLUHFWLRQ

Figure 2-2 Data structure and PLC - NC interface

Tool management
30 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Functional scope
2.6 PLC – NC interfaces

3& 3/& 1&

1&9$5[\PGE 8VHU'%

1&9$5 $GGUHVVHVRI1&
7RROPDQDJH YDULDEOHV
VHOHFWRU
PHQWYDULDEOHV 72GDWD
7RROPDQDJHPHQW
YDULDEOHV

)%

5HDG*(7
0DJD]LQH
1&YDULDEOH
GDWD

)%

:ULWH387
1&YDULDEOH

7RROPDQDJH
PHQW
'% )%)%

7RRO
PDQDJH
PHQW3,
VHUYLFHV

Figure 2-3 Extended interface for tool management between PLC and NC

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 31
Functional scope
2.7 Access protection, protection levels

2.7 Access protection, protection levels

The access to programs, data and functions is protected via 8 hierarchical levels according to
customer requirements. These are subdivided into
● Four password levels for Siemens, machine manufacturers and end users
● Four keyswitch positions for end users

Protec‐ Locked by: User

tion level
0 Password Siemens
1 Password Machine manufacturer: Development
2 Password Machine manufacturer: Commissioning engineer
3 Password End user: Service
4 Keyswitch, position 3 End user: Programmer, machine setter
5 Keyswitch, position 2 End user: Qualified operator, who does not program
6 Keyswitch, position 1 End user: Selected operator, who does not program
7 Keyswitch, position 0 End user: Semi-skilled operator

Examples of functions that can be disabled with SINUMERIK Operate:

● Loading
● Unloading
● Magazine list, tool list display
● Tool cabinet, tool catalog
● Loading the magazine configuration

Tool management
32 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Basic commissioning and configuration 3
3.1 Input of the machine data

3.1.1 Settings with/without magazine management

Setting without magazine management

Make the following settings if you are commissioning the tool management without NC
magazine management:

MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Memory for the tool management is re‐

(Page 61) served step by step (SRAM).
= 02H
Bit 1 Provide monitoring data.

MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Activating the tool management functions.

(Page 89)
= 02H
Bit 1 Monitoring functions of tool management active.

MD17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER Marking the changed tool data for HMI.

(Page 56)
= 1FH
Bit 0 Tool status change.
Bit 1 Tool remaining unit quantity change.
Bit 2 Tool data change service.
Bit 3 Magazine data in the change service.
Bit 4 ISO data in the change service.

MD28450 $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF_SIZE Buffer for changing tool data (DRAM).

= 400 Number of entries in the buffer for the OPI change service for tool data. Dynamic memory is
used. This buffer is only created if either bit 2 or bit 3 is set in MD17530 $MN_TOOL_DA‐
TA_CHANGE_COUNTER (default setting).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 33
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

Setting with magazine management

Make the following settings if you are commissioning the tool management with NC magazine
management:

MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Memory for the tool management is re‐

(Page 61) served step by step (SRAM).
= 03H
Bit 0 Provide tool management data.
Bit 1 Provide monitoring data.

MD20310 $MC_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Activating the tool management functions.

(Page 89)
= 03H
Bit 0 Magazine management active.
Bit 1 Monitoring functions of tool management active.

MD17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER Marking the changed tool data for HMI.

(Page 56)
= 1FH
Bit 0 Tool status change.
Bit 1 Tool remaining unit quantity change.
Bit 2 Tool data change service.
Bit 3 Magazine data in the change service.
Bit 4 ISO data in the change service.

MD28450 $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHG_BUFF_SIZE Buffer for changing tool data (DRAM).

= 400 Number of entries in the buffer for the OPI change service for tool data. Dynamic memory is
used. This buffer is only created if either bit 2 or bit 3 is set in MD17530 $MN_TOOL_DA‐
TA_CHANGE_COUNTER (default setting).

See also
NC-specific machine data (Page 53)
Channel-specific machine data (Page 77)

3.1.2 Configuration via machine data

General machine data

Machine data for memory partitions, assignment of channels to TO units have to be set for tool
management. Also, memory will be needed in the battery-buffered RAM.

Tool management
34 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

Configuration via machine data

Option: More than four magazines (if required)

MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Activate the memory for tool management

MD17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS
Maximum number of replacement tools
MD17510 TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK
Behavior of tool data at unloading
MD17515 TOOL_RESETMON_MASK
Behavior of tool data at RESETMON
MD17520 TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
Create new tool: Data default setting
MD17530 TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER
Identifying tool data change for HMI
MD17540 TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED
Permitted tool types
MD18074 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ
Maximum size of the tool management diagnostics ring buffer
MD18075 MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS
Max. number of tool holders
MD18076 MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE
Max. number of magazine locations per TOA with distance connections
MD18077 MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC
Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location
MD18078 MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
Maximum number of definable hierarchies for magazine location types
MD18079 MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES
Maximum permissible number of entries in a magazine-location-type hierarchy.
Definition of number of magazines and magazine locations

MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
Maximum number of magazines that NC can manage (minimum of 3 maga‐
zines). Buffer and loading magazines must be added (i.e. for 2 real magazines,
"4" must be specified)!
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
Number of magazine locations the NC can manage. Buffer and loading loca‐
tions must be added!

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 35
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

Definition of tools and tool cutting edges

MD18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
Number of tools to be managed by the NC
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Number of cutting edges in NC, tool offsets per TOA block
MD1806: MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
Maximum number of cutting edges (D offset) per tool (per T number)
Options for providing additional user data for magazines, magazine locations, tools and tool
edges

MD18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of additional magazine data $TC_MAPCx[n]
MD18091 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Type definition for magazine-oriented user data
MD18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of additional magazine location data $TC_MPPCx[n,m] generated
MD18093 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Type definition for magazine location-oriented user data
MD18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
Number of additional tool-specific data per tool $TC_TPPCx[t] generated
MD18095 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM
Type definition for tool-oriented user data
MD18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
Number of additional data per tool edge $TC_DPCx[t,d] generated
MD18097 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM
Type definition for cutting edge-oriented user data
MD18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Number of additional monitoring data per tool edge $TC_MOPCx[t,d] generated
MD18099 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM
Type definition for monitoring-related user data

Channel-specific machine data

Enabling of channel-specific functions for tool management.

MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific activation of tool management
Specification of spindle number for tool life monitoring.

MD20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
Activation of tool life monitoring for the spindle specified here (tool holder num‐
ber)

Tool management
36 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

Tool change turret or spindle.

MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Change with M06 or with T selection
MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_MODE
M function for tool change
Cutting edge selection after tool change.

MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT
Offset selection or deselection at tool change
Definition of tool with which tool offset is to be selected as a function of MD20110 and MD20112
during power-up and reset.

MD20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME
Definition for selection of tool length compensation
Definition of the active tool holder number.

MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
Definition of the active tool holder number
Assignment of TO units to channels.

MD28085 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
Allocation of a TOA range to a channel
Definition of initial setting for control after boot, reset, end of part program in relation to G
commands, tool length offsets, and transformation.

MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
Definition of the control basic setting. Relevant bit = 0: The actual value remains
valid.

Note
For machine data 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and 18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bits 0-3 must always be set the same.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 37
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

3.1.3 Additional settings

Additional settings
You can enable further functions on the user interface via the following machine data / setting
data:

MD52270 $MCS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK
Bit 0 Creating a tool at the magazine location is not permitted.
Bit 1 Load/unload lock if the machine is not in the reset state.
Bit 2 Load/unload lock for emergency stop.
Bit 3 Loading/unloading or relocating tool in/out of buffer.
Bit 4 Tool loaded directly into spindle.
Bit 5 Using the grinding configuration file.
Bit 6 Relocating a tool in/out of buffer is permitted despite lock (see bit 3).
Bit 7 Tool is created using the number.
Bit 8 Hide tool relocation.
Bit 9 Hide magazine positioning.
Bit 10 Reactivate tool with magazine positioning.
Bit 11 Reactivate tool in all monitoring types.
Bit 12 Hide reactivating tool.

SD54215 $SNS_TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET
Bit 0 Diameter display for rotating tools.
Cutting edge parameters 6 (tool nose radius) and 15 (wear radius) are not displayed as a
radius value, but as a diameter value for the following tool types: Types 100 to 299, 580, 710,
711, 712, 713, 714 and 725.
Cutting edge parameter 7 (outside radius) is not displayed as a radius value, but as a diam‐
eter value for the following tool types: Types 140 and 714.
Bit 1 M4 is the standard direction of rotation for all turning tools. When creating turning tools, the
direction of rotation is pre-assigned with M4.
Bit 2 A name is not suggested when creating a tool.
Bit 3 Input lock, tool name and tool type for loaded tools. For loaded tools, the tool name and the
tool type can no longer be changed.
Bit 4 Input lock for loaded tools if the channel is not in the reset state.
Bit 5 Tool wear entries are added: Wear data is entered in addition to the already existing wear
value.
Bit 6 Only numerical entries are permitted in the "Tool identifier".
Bit 7 Hide tool monitoring parameters. The tool monitoring parameters are hidden in the user
interface.
Bit 8 Diameter display for face axis - geometry. The geometry value of the transverse axis is
displayed as a diameter value, if a transverse axis is defined in MD20100 $DIAME‐
TER_AX_DEF and SD42940 $TOOL_LENGTH_CONST is set to 18 and SD42950
$TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE is set to 2.

Tool management
38 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

Bit 9 Diameter display for face axis - wear. The wear value of the transverse axis is displayed as
a diameter value, if a transverse axis is defined in MD20100 $DIAMETER_AX_DEF and
SD42940 $TOOL_LENGTH_CONST is set to 18 and SD42950 $TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE is
set to 2.
Bit 10 Enable tool load/relocate to buffer storage locations. The magazine number can be entered
into the load dialog box. It is therefore possible to access the buffer storage via magazine
number 9998.
Bit 11 Creating new tools at gripper locations is blocked.
Bit 12 Measuring tools are not unloaded with the "Unload all" function.
Bit 13 The wear value is not deleted when a tool geometry value is entered.
Bit 14 Load or relocate tool. Empty location search performed without default value with the tool
magazine last used.
= 0 Empty location always starts with the tool magazine last used.
= 1: Empty location search follows the set search strategy.

Dependencies
The setting data SD54215 $TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET and the machine data MD20360
$TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK have the following dependencies:

Dependency Description Recommendation

SD54215 ⇔ MD20360
Bit 9 ⇔ Bit 0 If bit 0 is set in MD20360, then SD54215 bit It is recommended that the setting MD20360
9 has no effect because the NC already bit 0 and bit 1 not be used.
returns the linear wear value of the trans‐ Instead, use SD4215 bit 9 and bit 8.
verse axis as a diameter value. MD20360 bit 0 and bit 1 are effective only for
Bit 8 ⇔ Bit 1 If bit 1 is set in MD20360, then SD54215 bit turning and grinding tools. This setting there‐
8 has no effect because the NC already fore cannot be used on a turning/milling ma‐
returns the linear geometry value of the chine because the linear component of the
transverse axis as a diameter value. transverse axis applies for turning tools in the
diameter and for milling tools in the radius.
When the setting data is used, only the display
goes to diameter, the internal value in the NC
remains at radius.
Bit 0 ⇔ Bit 11 If bit 11 is set in MD20360, then SD54215 It is recommended that the setting MD20360
bit 0 has no effect with regard to cutting bit 11 and bit 12 not be used.
edge parameter 6 (tool nose radius) be‐ Instead, set bit 0 in SD54215.
cause the NC already returns the tool nose MD20360 bit 11 and bit 12 apply to all tool
radius as a diameter value. types, i.e. also to turning tools. This setting
Bit 0 ⇔ Bit 12 If bit 12 is set in MD20360, then SD54215 therefore cannot be used on a turning/milling
bit 0 has no effect with regard to cutting machine because the tool nose radius of a
edge parameter 15 (wear radius) because turning tool should never be specified in the
the NC already returns the wear radius as diameter.
a diameter value. When the setting data is used, only the display
goes to diameter, the internal value in the NC
remains at radius.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 39
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

Enabling the graphic tool and magazine display function

Make the following settings when the tools and the magazine should be represented
graphically:

MD52271 $MCS_TM_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE Distance between individual magazine lo‐

cations in the unit of measurement of the
basic NC system.
>0 The tools and magazine locations are displayed graphically.
=0 The tools and magazine locations are not displayed graphically.

You must make the following settings on the user interface:

1. Press the "Settings" softkey in the "Tool list" window.
The "Settings" window opens.
2. Activate the "Switch on graphical magazine display" checkbox.
This checkbox is offered only when the MD52271 $MCS_TM_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE
machine data has a value > 0.
Supplementary conditions:
● MD52200 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY = 2 (milling)
● MD52201 $MCS_TECHNOLOGY_EXTENSION = 0

Default settings for unloading/loading and relocating

MD52272 $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine for loading tools.

=0 No default magazine, default value

MD52273 $MCS_TM_TOOL_MOVE_DEFAULT_MAG Default magazine for relocating tools.

=0 No default magazine, default value

MD52274 $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION Number of loading station.

=0 All configured stations are considered, default value

Input limits for wear input

MD51212 $MNS_TM_WRITE_WEAR_ABS_LIMIT Maximum value of the tool wear.

MD51213 $MNS_TM_WRITE_WEAR_DELTA_LIMIT Maximum differential value of restricted tool
wear input.
MD51214 $MNS_TM_WRITE_LIMIT_MASK Range of validity of the restricted tool wear
input.

Tool management
40 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.1 Input of the machine data

Setting the manual tool function

MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Response when errors occur at tool

change.
Bit 1 = 1 Manual tools can be loaded.
Bit 2 = 1 Active D No. > 0 and active T No. = 0 generate an alarm message.
Active D No. > 0 and active D No. = 0 generate an alarm message.

Note
If, in machine data MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE bit 2 = 1, then you have
the option, using a correction selection (D No.) in the program, to stop the machine until the PLC
signals that the tool change has been completed. To do this, machine data MD20270
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT must be set to = 0.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 41
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

3.2.1 Function overview of the tool management editor

The tool management allows you to define all real tool magazines and internal magazines with
the appropriate properties through the operating software and to link them channel-specifically
to the tool unit. You can configure the relationships between tool magazine, griper and spindle
via a tree view.

Calling the tool management

You open the tool management window as follows:

1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.

2. Press the "NC" and "Tool management" softkeys.

The "Tool management" window opens.

General sequence
The following steps are required to create a tool management:
● Create tool unit
● Define buffer locations
● Define loading location
● Create magazine configuration
● Link assignments

Note
When you create a new tool unit, a buffer location with a spindle location, a loading magazine
with a loading location and a real magazine with five locations are created by default.

Meaning of the symbols

Symbol Description
Folder for the actively used tool units
Folder with access to templates

Tool management
42 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Symbol Description
Tool spindle / tool holder
Tool gripper 1
Tool gripper 2
Shows the changes in the the "Active data" folder that has not been activated yet

Meaning of the tree view

The following folders are available in the tree view:
● Active data: Configure and activate the magazine management.
● Examples: Copy templates into the "Active data" folder.
● Network/USB: Copy the new magazine managements into the "Active data" folder or use
existing ones for other systems.

See also
Loading sequence (Page 357)

3.2.2 Editing the tool management

For the tree view of the tool management, functions are available with which you can
parameterize magazine data items and link them with each other.

Note
If you position the cursor on an element, only those functions possible for this element are
active. All other functions are inactive which is indicated with grayed-out softkeys.

Procedure

The "Tool management" window is open.

Adding a new tool unit

1. Position the cursor on the "Active data" folder element.
2. Press the "New element" softkey.
A folder element with the standard designation <tool unit> is inserted and
the "TO unit" input window opens.
3. You can make changes in the input window of the folder element.
4. Press the "OK" softkey to insert the folder element with the settings.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 43
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Inserting a new magazine

1. Position the cursor on the "Active data" folder element.
2. Navigate with the <Cursor right> and <Cursor down> keys to the folder
element of the tool unit.

3. Press the "New element" softkey.

A folder element with the standard designation <magazine> is inserted
and the "Magazine" input window opens.
4. You can make changes in the input window of the folder element.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to insert the folder element with the settings.

Editing an element
1. Position the cursor on the "Active data" folder element.
2. Navigate with the <Cursor right> and <Cursor down> keys to the element
that you want to edit.

3. Press the <Cursor right> or <INPUT> key.

The input window for the element settings opens.

4. Enter the desired changes and press the "OK" softkey to confirm the
entries.

Note
You define the number of buffer and magazine locations in the input window of the higher-level
<Magazine> folder element with the "Locations" parameter.

Activating Data
1. Press the "Activate data" softkey.
All changed parameterizations are transferred to the NC and activated.
All of the error messages are displayed again, and you have the option of
specifically resolving these by modifying the data.

Tool management
44 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Note
Once you have made changes to the tool management, the data is marked with "*". This data
is not yet in the NC and so does not have any effect.

If you want to create a tool management that is similar to an already existing element, then you
can save time if you copy the existing elements and insert them at a different position. You have
the option, for example of also copying inactive subtrees into the active tree.

Copying/cutting and pasting elements

1. Position the cursor on the desired element.
2. Press the "Copy" softkey.

- OR -
Press the "Cut" softkey.

3. Position the cursor at the required position and press the "Paste" softkey.
If the element exists already at the desired location, you receive further
insertion options.
4. Press the "OK" softkey if you wish to attach the element to the tree view
as the next element.
The element is inserted.
Note:
You have the option of changing the name of the element in the associ‐
ated input window.

Deleting elements
1. Place the cursor on the desired element and press the "Delete element"
softkey.

2. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm the deletion.

The selected object is removed.

3.2.3 Parameterizing the tool management

3.2.3.1 Create tool unit

A tool unit is the grouping of tools and magazines to form a unit. A tool unit can be assigned one
or more channels. The tools and magazines must be unique within a tool unit. For a tool unit,
specify the search parameters and the channel in the "TO unit" window.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 45
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Directory values
You are currently located under the "Active data" → <tool unit> directory in the "Commissioning"
→ "NC" →"Tool management" operating area.
You can set the following parameters in the "TO unit" window from the tool unit directory:

Parameters Description
Name Designation that is displayed in the tree structure.
Channel number The channel to which the tool unit is assigned.
Tool search Search strategy:
● Without search strategy
● Active tool
● Shortest way
Empty location search Search strategy:
● Without search strategy
● First location forwards
● Current location forwards
● Current location backwards
● Last location backwards
● Symmetric current location
● 1:1 exchange

3.2.3.2 Define buffer locations

Buffer locations are spindles, grippers, loaders and transfer locations. All buffer locations are
managed in an internal buffer magazine with the number 9998. The number of buffer locations
is defined from the "Magazine" window. The buffer location type is defined from the "Location"
window.

Directory values
You are currently located under the "Active data" → <tool unit> → <buffer> directory in the
"Commissioning" → "NC" →"Tool management" operating area.
You can define the following parameters in the "Magazine" window from the buffer directory:

Parameters Description
Name Designation of the buffer magazine
The designation is displayed in the tree structure.
Magazine number 9998 (cannot be changed)
Locations Number of the buffer locations

Tool management
46 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Element values
You can change the buffer location type with the parameters in the "Location" window:

Parameters Description
(Selection menu) Select a buffer type
● Tool spindle / tool holder
● Loader
● Gripper
● Transfer location
Index The index counts the locations of a type.

3.2.3.3 Define loading location

Loading location are loading points or loading stations. All loading locations are stored in an
internal loading magazine with the number 9999. The number of loading locations is defined
from the "Magazine" window. The loading location type is defined from the "Location" window.

Directory values
You are currently located under the "Active data" → <tool unit> → <loading magazine> directory
in the "Commissioning" → "NC" →"Tool management" operating area.
You can define the following parameters in the "Magazine" window from the loading magazine
directory:

Parameters Description
Name Designation of the loading magazine
The designation is displayed in the tree structure.
Magazine number 9999 (cannot be changed)
Locations Number of loading locations

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 47
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Element values
You can change the loading location type with the parameters in the "Location" window:

Parameters Description
(Selection menu) Select a loading location type:
● Load location
Load locations are areas on the machine at which the direct loading
in the magazine is possible. The tool can be inserted directly into the
magazine at this location. The magazine location to be loaded is
moved to the loading point. For example, chain magazines have
loading points.
● Loading station
A loading station is a location outside the magazine onto which the
tool to be loaded is placed. The tool is then transported from that
location to the magazine via a transport mechanism. Loading sta‐
tions are generally used for box or chain magazines.
Index The index counts the locations of a type.

Note
Loading point 1 is always set automatically as loading/unloading point for spindle 1 (manual
loading point).

3.2.3.4 Create magazine configuration

You can define several magazines in a tool unit. You define the magazine configuration via the
"Magazine" window. The magazine location type is defined from the "Location" window.

Directory values
You are currently located under the "Active data" → <tool unit> → <magazine> directory in the
"Commissioning" → "NC" →"Tool management" operating area.
You can define the following parameters in the "Magazine" window from the magazine
directory:

Parameters Description
Magazine type Selection menu:
● Chain magazine
● Box magazine
● Revolver
Name Designation of the magazine.
The designation is displayed in the tree structure.
Magazine number Specifies the number of the magazine
Locations Number of magazine locations

Tool management
48 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Parameters Description
Tool search Search strategy:
● Without search strategy
● Take from the TOA
● Active tool
● Shortest way
Empty location search Search strategy:
● Without search strategy
● Take from the TOA
● First location forwards
● Current location forwards
● Current location backwards
● Last location backwards
● Symmetric current location
● 1:1 exchange
Location coding ● Variable
● Fixed-location coded
Location type Identification for the magazine location type
(Changes the value globally for all locations in the magazine)
Consider adjacent location ● Yes
● No
(Changes the value globally for all locations in the magazine)

Note
If one of the Location type or Consider adjacent location parameters is changed individually and
the value is not identical for all locations, the "Variable" definition appears in the display.

Element values
You can change the magazine location type with the parameters in the "Location" window:

Parameters Description
Location type Identification for the magazine location type
Consider adjacent location ● Yes
● No

3.2.3.5 Link assignments

You can establish the mechanical relationship between the individual components of the tool
unit in the "Assignment" window.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 49
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Element values
You are currently located under the "Active data" → <tool unit> directory in the "Commissioning"
→ "NC" →"Tool management" operating area.
You can link the following parameters with each other from the selection list via the
Assignments element:
● Spindle/gripper/loader for magazine
● Gripper/loader for spindle
● Loading point for magazine

Note
The separation as number of locations from the magazine zero point of the affected magazine
to the internal magazine location must be defined for each magazine assignment.

Example
If, for example, tools on a spindle must be replaced from a magazine, the following assignment
can result:

7UDQVIHUBORFDWLRQB /RDGBVWDWLRQB
*ULSSHUB
/RDGBVWDWLRQB
 
 


6SLQGOHB *ULSSHUB 0DJD]LQHB



Location Type/Index
1 Tool spindle Spindle_1
2 Gripper Gripper_1
3 Gripper Gripper_2
4 Transfer location Transfer_location_1

1 Load station Load_station_1

2 Load station Load_station_2

Tool management
50 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Parameters Assignment
Spindle/gripper/loader for ● Tool spindle location 1 for magazine (separation 0)
magazine ● Gripper location 2 for magazine (separation 0)
● Gripper location 3 for magazine (separation 0)
● Transfer location 4 for magazine (separation 0)
Gripper/loader for spindle ● Tool spindle location 1 for gripper 2
● Tool spindle location 1 for gripper 3
Loading point for magazine ● Loading point location 1 for magazine (separation 0)
● Loading point location 2 for magazine (separation 3)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 51
Basic commissioning and configuration
3.2 Configuration in SINUMERIK Operate

Tool management
52 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Machine data 4
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-1 $MN_MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS

17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS
MD number Maximum number of tools in a tool group
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Only meaningful if tool management function or tool monitoring function are active
0: The number of tools in a tool group is not monitored
3: A maximum of 3 tools can exist in a tool group
This data does not affect memory requirements, but merely has a monitoring function.
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Additional references:

Table 4-2 $MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL

17504 $MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
MD number Multitool function. Number of tool locations per multitool
Default setting: 6 Min. input limit: 2 Max. input limit: 72
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: "Several tools at a magazine location" function (multitool). Maximum number of locations or
tools per multitool.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-3 $MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK

17510 $MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK
MD number Behavior of tool data at unloading
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xF
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 53
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

17510 $MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK
Meaning: When the tool is unloaded, some tool data can be assigned fixed values:
Bit 0 = 0: Tool status "active" remains unchanged
Bit 0 = 1: Tool status "active" is deleted ($TC_TP8, bit 0)
Bit 1 = 0: Tool status "was in use" remains unchanged
Bit 1 = 1: Tool status "was in use" is deleted ($TC_TP8, bit 7)
Bit 2 = 0: Tool parameter $TC_TP10 remains unchanged
Bit 2 = 1: Tool parameter $TC_TP10 is set to value 0. This means the tool replacement strategy
is reset.
Bit 3 = 0: Tool parameter $TC_TP11 remains unchanged
Bit 3 = 1: Tool parameter $TC_TP11 is set to value 0. This means the assignment to the tool
subgroup is canceled.
If a multitool is unloaded, then also the tools contained in it corresponding to MD
$MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK are unloaded from the magazine location and therefore the
tools states are also changed according to the specifications of the MD. When unloading the
MT, the tools remain in the MT.
Data defined in the MD, which is also defined for the MT - that is previously the MT state
$TC_MTP8, bit 7 "was in use" - is also changed for the unloaded MT.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-4 $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK

17515 $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK
MD number Behavior of tool data at RESETMON
Default setting: 0x14 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x69F
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
54 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

17515 $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK
Meaning: The RESETMON command specifies in the 5th parameter which tool status is to be reset. If the
5th parameter is omitted, it is replaced with the value from this MD. This value is always used
with PI service "_N_TRESMON".
The bits are assigned like the bits in tool status $TC_TP8[x].
Bit 0 = 0: Tool status "active" remains unchanged
Bit 0 = 1: Tool status "active" is deleted
Bit 1 = 0: Tool status "enabled" remains unchanged
Bit 1 = 1: Tool status "enabled" is set
Bit 2 = 0: Tool status "disabled" remains unchanged
Bit 2 = 1: Tool status "disabled" is deleted if permitted by the monitoring data and the 4th
parameter is set accordingly.
Bit 3 = 0: Tool status "measured" remains unchanged
Bit 3 = 1: Tool status "measured" is set.
Bit 4 = 0: Tool status "prewarning limit" remains unchanged
Bit 4 = 1: Tool status "prewarning limit" is deleted if permitted by the monitoring data and the
4th parameter is set.
Bit 5: Not permitted (tool status "tool being changed")
Bit 6: Not permitted (tool status "tool is fixed-location-coded")
Bit 7 = 0: Tool status "was in use" remains unchanged
Bit 7 = 1: Tool status "was in use" is deleted
Bit 8 = 0 not permitted (tool status "being transported back")
Bit 9: Not permitted
Bit 10 = 0: Tool status "to unload" remains unchanged
Bit 10 = 1: Tool status "to unload" is deleted
Bit 11: Not permitted (tool status "to load")
Bit 12 = 0: Not permitted (tool status "master tool")
Bit 13: Not permitted
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange (not permitted)
Bit 15: Manual tool (not permitted)
Bit 16: Tool is at a disabled magazine location (not permitted)
The default setting corresponds to behavior up to now.
The bits that are not permitted are filtered and hidden by the limit screen.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-5 $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK

17520 $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
MD number Create new tool: Data default setting
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x1F
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 55
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

17520 $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
Meaning: When a tool is redefined, some tool data can be assigned fixed default values. This way simple
applications do not need to process data which does not necessarily need to be assigned
individual values.
Bit 0 = 0: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), Bit1=0="not enabled"
Bit 0 = 1: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), Bit1=1="enabled"
Bit 1 = 0: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), bit 6=0="not fixed-location-coded"
Bit 1 = 1: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), bit 6=1="fixed-location-coded"
Bit 2 = 0: The tool is only included in the tool group with the explicit write command for the tool
name. Only then can it be loaded at change using the appropriate programming.
Bit 2 = 1 The tool is automatically included in the tool group when redefined. (Now the tool
change can be performed with the default name ("t"=t no.))
The "tool name" ($TC_TP2) can be hidden to the user. (This only makes sense if replacement
tools are not being used for machining or if the tool name is not explicitly written. Then, data
inconsistency problems could occur.)
Bit 3 = 0: Only with TMMG: Default value of location type ($TC_TP7)=9999=not defined
Bit 3 = 1: Significance, only with TMMG: Default value of location type ($TC_TP7)=1 and
associated default values of magazine location type (TC_MPP2)=1. All magazine locations
can now accept all tools.
Bit 4 = 0: Only significant with TMMG + active adjacent location consideration: When setting/
resetting the magazine location status "disabled", the magazine location status "overlapping
permitted" remains unchanged.
Bit 4 = 1: Only significant with TMMG + active adjacent location consideration: When setting/
resetting the magazine location status "disabled", the magazine location status "overlapping
permitted" is also automatically set/reset.
If a multitool is generated, then the data defined by MD $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
and for the MT are set to the required values.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-6 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER

17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER
MD number Identifying tool data change for HMI
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xF
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
56 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER
Meaning: HMI display support. This data allows explicit inclusion/exclusion of individual data in the OPI
variables (block C/S) toolCounter, toolCounterC, toolCounterM to be taken into account.
Bit 0 = 0: Value changes to tool status ($TC_TP8) are not taken into account in toolCounterC.
Bit 0 = 1: Value changes to the tool status ($TC_TP8) are taken into account in toolCounterC.
Bit 1 = 0: Value changes to remaining tool count ($TC_MOP4) are not taken into account in
toolCounterC.
Bit 1 = 1: Value changes to the remaining tool count ($TC_MOP4) are taken into account in
toolCounterC.
Bit 2 = 0: Value changes to the tool data is not taken into account in the tool data update service.
Bit 2 = 1: Value changes to the tool data is taken into account in the tool data update service.
Bit 3 = 0: Value changes to the magazine data is not taken into account in the tool data update
service.
Bit 3 = 1: Value changes to the magazine data is taken into account in the tool data update
service.
Bit 4 = 0: Value changes to the ISO tool offset data are not taken into account in the tool data
update service.
Bit 4 = 1: H10' Value changes to the ISO tool offset data are taken into account in the tool data
update service.
"Value changes to tool status" and "Value changes to remaining tool count" are relative to the
value changes which are caused by internal processes in the NC, as well as to value changes
caused by writing the respective system variables.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-7 $MN_TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED

17540 $MN_TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED
MD number Permitted tool types
Default setting: 0x3FF Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x3FF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 57
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

17540 $MN_TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED
Meaning: Definition of tool types (see $TC_DP1) permitted in the NC for tool offset selection. This means
tools of any tool type can be loaded to the NC, however, only the tool types specified here can
be defined in the tool determining the offset. A bit value = 1 means that the specified tool type
range is permitted for the offset selection. A bit value = 0 means that the specified tool type
range is not permitted for the offset selection. When an attempt is made to select an offset for
a cutting edge of this type, the selection is rejected and an offset-capable alarm is issued.
Value = 0, 9999 for the tool type means "not defined". In general, it is not possible to select tool
offsets with this value for the tool type.
Bit 0 = 0x1: Tool types 1 to 99 permitted
Bit 1 = 0x2: Tool types 100 to 199 permitted (milling tools)
Bit 2 = 0x4: Tool types 200 to 299 permitted (drilling tools)
Bit 3 = 0x8: Tool types 300 to 399 permitted
Bit 4 = 0x10: Tool types 400 to 499 permitted (grinding tools)
Bit 5 = 0x20: Tool types 500 to 599 permitted (turning tools)
Bit 6 = 0x40: Tool types 600 to 699 permitted
Bit 7 = 0x80: Tool types 700 to 799 permitted
Bit 8 = 0x100: Tool types 800 to 899 permitted
Bit 9 = 0x200: Tool types 900 to 999 permitted
Corresponding to... MD18100 $MN_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

Table 4-8 $MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ

18074 $MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ
MD number Maximum size of the tool management diagnostics ring buffer
Default setting: 25, 25 Min. input limit: 4 Max. input limit: 500
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of entries in the diagnostics ring buffer of the tool management.
Index 0 = buffer size of the IPO trace.
Index 1 = buffer size of the prep trace
There is a dedicated IPO trace buffer in each channel, and there is only a prep trace buffer in
channel 1.
The memories are only allocated if bit 0 (0x0001) for a warm restart is at ON - and more
precisely in both MD18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and MD20310: TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_MASK for each channel.
Trace data is written to the buffer if bit 13 (0x2000) is at ON in MD20310: TOOL_MANAGE‐
MENT_MASK for each channel.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Tool management
58 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-9 $MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS

18075 $MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS
MD number Max. number of tool holders per TOA
Default setting: 16 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 128
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum number of definable tool holders per TO area.
The maximum value is 20. The number 20 is derived from the maximum number of axes per
channel in the 840D sl.
The address extension e of the commands Te=T, Me=6 (*) is the number of the tool holder.
t=T number / tool name - depending on the function, which is activated in the NC.
(*) if the following applies: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1 and
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE=6
In milling machines, the tool holder is generally not a spindle, see also
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.
In turning machines, the tool holder is generally not a spindle axis, see also $MC_TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
Then the following should apply $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS greater or equal to
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND/$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
If bit 0 = 1 in $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and $MC_TOOL_MANAGE‐
MENT_MASK is set (= magazine management (TMMG)) is only applicable for sensible values
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS less than or equal to $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DIS‐
TANCE. Then, a maximum of $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS buffer locations, type spindle
($TC_MPP1[9998,x]=2) can be defined.
Example: TMMG not active
Assuming $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND=3, $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS = 3.
Then T1=t, T2=t, T3=t, T=t can be programmed.
Example: TMMG active, milling machine with Me=6 as tool change command
Assuming $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS=14, $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DIS‐
TANCE=20, 10 channels are active, all channels have TMMG active and have the same tool
and machine data (=one TO area for all channels). $MC_SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND=1,....,10 for the channels. Then, in the magazine buffer, up to 14 locations, type
"tool holder"/"spindle" can be defined.
In addition, 6 other grippers or similar can be defined.
These locations (a maximum of 20) can be linked to magazines.
T1=t,....T14=t and Tt or M1=6,....M14=6 and M06 can be programmed in the channels
The PLC version used can limit the maximum number of tool holders.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-10 $MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE

18076 $MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE
MD number Max. number of magazine locations per TOA with distance connection
Default setting: 32 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 128
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 59
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18076 $MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE
Meaning: The machine data makes sense if the magazine management function TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK; in each
case bit 0 = 1.
Maximum number of magazine locations (spindles, loading locations, etc.) per TOA, that can
have a distance connection to a magazine defined using $TC_MDPx[n,m].
Example: TMMG is active: $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE is = 5 and
$MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 2.
Two TOA units are defined each with three tool holders / spindles, two loading points.
Further, there are two grippers defined in each TO unit.
This means that in total there are 14 locations defined in the buffer magazine / loading mag‐
azine for which distances and assignments should be defined. TO unit 1 has 4 magazines
defined, TO unit 2 has 6 magazines defined.
With the set value of $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE = 5, each tool holder and
each loading point can be linked; (see $TC_MDP1 and $TC_MDP2) and up to two grippers can
be additionally assigned to each tool holder ($MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC =
2); (see $TC_MLSR).
As a consequence, a tool holder / a spindle location can have two tables - a distance table to
magazines and an assignment table to grippers and similar locations.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-11 $MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC

18077 $MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC
MD number Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location
Default setting: Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The machine data is only active, if the magazine management function, TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Two quantities are defined with the data:
1.) Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location (spindle, loading
location, etc.)
2.) Maximum number of locations (gripper, ...) in the connection table of a spindle / tool holder.
Example: $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 3.
Two TOA units are defined each with two tool holders / spindles and one loading point each.
Further, four grippers are defined in each TO unit.
TO unit 1 has 4 magazines defined, TO unit 2 has 6 magazines defined.
Then, each tool holder can define up to three distances to the magazines (see $TC_MDP2)
and in addition, can define up to three relationships to grippers ($TC_MLSR).
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Tool management
60 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-12 $MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES

18078 $MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
MD number Maximum number of definable hierarchies for magazine location types
Default setting: 8 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The machine data is only active, if the magazine management function, TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Maximum number of definable hierarchies for magazine location types
The permissible value of index n of system parameter $TC_MPTH[n,m] is from 0 to
"$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES - 1".
(The maximum of index m can be specified using machine data $MN_MM_MAX_HIERA‐
CHY_ENTRIES.)
A value = 0 means that the "Magazine location type hierarchy" function is not available.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-13 $MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES

18079 $MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES
MD number Maximum permissible number of entries in a magazine-location-type hierarchy.
Default setting: 8 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 32
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The machine data is only active, if the magazine management function, TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK - and if
$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES is greater than zero.
Maximum number of entries in a magazine location type hierarchy.
The permissible value of index m of system parameter $TC_MPTH[n,m] is from 0 to
"$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES - 1".
(The maximum of index n can be specified using machine data $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HI‐
ERARCHIES.)
A value = 0 means that the "Magazine location type hierarchy" function is not available.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-14 $MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

18080 $MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD number Memory for the tool management is reserved step-by-step
Default setting: 0x2 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 61
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18080 $MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Meaning: Activation of the tool management memory with "0" means:
The set tool management data does not occupy any memory, tool management is not avail‐
able.
Bit 0=1: Memory for data specific to tool management is available; the MDs for reserving
memory must be set accordingly (MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION, MD18084
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE)
Bit 1=1: Memory is available for monitoring data (TMMO)
Bit 2=1: Memory is available for user data (CC data)
Bit 3=1: Memory is available for considering the adjacent location
Bit 4=1: Memory and function release for PI service _N_TSEARC = "Complex search for tools
in magazine" is available.
Bit 5=1: Wear monitoring active
Bit 6=1: Wear group available
Bit 7=1: Reserve memory for adapter of magazine locations
Bit 8=1: Memory for machining and/or setting up offsets
Bit 9=1: Reserved
Bit 10 = 1: The multitool function is available. The configuration can be changed by other
machine data.
Bit 10=0: The multitool function is not available. The function version set by other machine data
is not active.
The coded type of memory reservation enables economic use of memory management for the
functionality provided.
Example:
Standard memory reservation for tool management:
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 3 (Bit 0 + 1=1) means tool management and tool mon‐
itoring data is made available
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 2 means tool management without tool monitoring
function data
Special cases, errors,...

Table 4-15 $MM_NUM_TOOL

18082 $MM_NUM_TOOL
MD number Number of tools the NC can manage
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The NC can manage as a maximum the number of tools entered in the MD. A tool has at least
one cutting edge.
A buffered (backed-up) user memory is used.
The maximum number of tools possible correspond to the number of cutting edges. The MD
should also be set even if no tool management is being used.
If this machine data is altered the buffered data is lost.
A maximum of 1500 tools are possible per TO unit and in the entire NC.
Special cases, errors,...:

Tool management
62 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18082 $MM_NUM_TOOL
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7), tool offset (W1)

Table 4-16 $MM_NUM_MULTITOOL

18083 $MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
MD number Multitool function. Number of multitools that the NC can manage
Default setting: 15 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 750
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: "Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)" function. Number of multitools (multiple tools)
that the NC can manage.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-17 $MM_NUM_MAGAZINE

18084 $MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
MD number Number of magazines the NC can manage
Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Tool management (TMG or TMMG) only if MD tool management and option tool management
are set:
Number of magazines that the NC can manage (active and background magazines).
The buffered memory for the magazines is reserved with this machine data.
Important: One load magazine and one buffer magazine are set up in the tool management for
each TOA unit. These magazines must be taken into account.
Value = 0: Tool management cannot be activated because no data can be created.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Table 4-18 $MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS

18085 $MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS
MD number Multitool function. Number of multitool locations that the NC can manage
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 63
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18085 $MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS
Meaning: "Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)" function. Number of multitool locations that
the NC can manage.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-19 $MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION

18086 $MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
MD number Number of magazine locations the NC can manage
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: TMMG - only if MD for tool management and tool management option are set:
Number of magazine locations the NC can manage.
The buffered memory for the magazine locations is reserved with this MD.
Important: The number of all buffer locations and loading points must be taken into account
here.
Value = 0: Tool management cannot be activated because no data can be created.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Table 4-20 $MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

18088 $MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
MD number Maximum number of defined tool holders
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 600
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum number of definable tool holders for tools that can be oriented in the TO area. The
value is divided by the number of active TO units. The integer result indicates how many tool
holders can be defined per TO unit.
The data to define a tool holder is set using the system variables
$TC_CARR1, ...$TC_CARR14. The data is located in the buffered memory.
Example:
2 channels are active, with one channel per TO unit (=default).
3 holders must be defined in channel 1 and one holder in channel 2. The value to be set is 6
because 6/2 = 3. This means a max. of 3 holder definitions in each TO unit.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (S7)

Tool management
64 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-21 $MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM

18090 $MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM magazine data
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of magazine parameters (of the integer type) that are made available to the user or the
Compile Cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(int) *
max. number of magazines.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
Additional references:

Table 4-22 $MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM[n]

18091 $MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM magazine data type
Default setting: 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can have values between
0 and the value in machine data MD18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM. Type of
magazine-specific user data configured with MD18090 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGA‐
ZINE_PARAM. Every parameter can be allocated its own type.
The following types are permissible:
Type Value of the machine data
● BOOL 1
● CHAR 2
● INT 3
● REAL 4
● STRING 5 (not allowed, not supported by the OPI.)
● AXIS 6
● FRAME not defined
Example:
$MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZIN_PARAMETER=4
can then be programmed for the parameter $TC_MAPC1[MagNo]=12,325.
A buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result in
reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
Additional references:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 65
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-23 $MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM

18092 $MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM magazine location data
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of magazine location data parameters that are available to the user or the compile
cycle. The data type is defined by the machine data MD 18093 $MM_TYPE_CC_MA‐
GLOC_PARAM.
With MD 18092, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof() * max. number
of magazine locations.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
Additional references:

Table 4-24 $MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM[n]

18093 $MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM magazine location data type
Default setting: 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can have values between
0 and the value in MD18092 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM. Type of magazine-spe‐
cific user data configured with MD18092 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM. Every pa‐
rameter can be allocated its own type.
The following types are permissible:
Type Value of the machine data
● BOOL 1
● CHAR 2
● INT 3
● REAL 4
● STRING 5 (not allowed, not supported by the OPI.)
● AXIS 6
● FRAME not defined
Example:
$MN_MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM[0]=4
then $TC_MPPC1[MagNo]=12.325 can be programmed for the parameter.
A buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result in
reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
Additional references:

Tool management
66 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-25 $MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM

18094 $MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM tool data
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of tool-specific data that can be created for each tool (of type integer) and are available
to the user or compile cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(dou‐
ble) * max. number of tools.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
Additional references:

Table 4-26 $MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM[n]

18095 $MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM tool data type
Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Type of tool-specific user data configured with MD18094 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM.
Every parameter can be allocated its own type. The following types are permissible:
The following types are permissible:
Type Value of the machine data
● BOOL 1
● CHAR 2
● INT 3
● REAL 4
● STRING 5 (Permits identifiers of up to 31 characters)
● AXIS 6
● FRAME not defined
Example:
MD18094: MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM=1
MD18095: MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM=5
Then "A" can be programmed for parameter $TC_TPC1.
A buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result in
reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
Additional references:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 67
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-27 $MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM

18096 $MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD number Number of data per tool cutting edge for compile cycles
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of TOA data that can be created for each tool (of type Double) and are available to the
user or compile cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(dou‐
ble) * max. number of cutting edges.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

Table 4-28 $MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM[n]

18097 $MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM data type per cutting edge
Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can have values between
0 and the value of MD18096 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM. Type of cutting-edge-spe‐
cific user data configured in MD18096 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM. Every parameter
can be allocated its own type.
The following types are permissible:
Type Value of the machine data
● BOOL 1
● CHAR 2
● INT 3
● REAL 4
● STRING 5 (not allowed, not supported by the OPI.)
● AXIS 6
● FRAME not defined
Example:
$MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZIN_PARAMETER=4
can then be programmed for the parameter $TC_MAPC1[MagNo]=12,325.
The buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result
in reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

Tool management
68 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-29 $MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM

18098 $MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
MD number Number of monitoring data per tool for compile cycles
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of monitoring data that is created for each tool (of type integer) and is available to the
user or compile cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(int) *
max. number of cutting edges.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

Table 4-30 $MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM[n]

18099 $MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM monitor data type
Default setting: 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: User or OEM data in the tool management. Type of the multitool-specific user data
$TC_MTPCn configured with MD18192 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM. Every
parameter can be allocated its own type.
The following types are permissible:
Type Value of the machine data
● BOOL 1
● CHAR 2
● INT 3
● REAL 4
● STRING 5 (not allowed, not supported by the OPI.)
● AXIS 6
● FRAME not defined
Example:
$MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM=4
then $TC_MOPC1[MagNo]=12.325 can be programmed for the parameter.
The buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result
in reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Additional references:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 69
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-31 $MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA

18100 $MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD number Tool cutting edges per TO area
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Defines the number of tool cutting edges in a TO area.
For each tool edge approx. 250 bytes per TOA block of the battery-backed memory are re‐
served with this machine data irrespective of the tool type.
Tools with type 400-499 cutting edges (=grinding tools) also occupy the location of a cutting
edge.
Example:
Define 10 grinding tools with one cutting edge each.
Then, as a minimum, the following must apply:
MM_NUM_TOOL = 10
MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA = 20
See also MM_NUM_TOOL
A buffered (backed-up) user memory is used.
Special cases, errors,...: If this machine data is altered the buffered data is lost!
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Table 4-32 $MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER_TYPE2

18103 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER_TYPE2
MD number Tool adapter of type 2 in all TO areas (SRAM)
Default setting: Min. input limit: - Max. input limit:-
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of tool adapters of type 2 (angle head adapter) in all TO areas.
This function can only be used if magazine locations are available in the NCK.
In order to activate the setting, bit 7 (=0x80) must also be set in MD18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Adapter data records or the cutting edge-specific basis dimensions mutually exclude one
another.
This means that if adapters of type 2 can be created, then the values of the following param‐
eters are internally filled by the NCK:
Base length: $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22, $TC_DP23.
Meaning of values:
0: No adapter data definitions are possible.
The cutting edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21-23, DPV3-5 and DPVN3-5 can be written.
> 0: Number of adapter data records.
An additional step following the definition of the data assigns the adapters to the multitool
locations.
In this way, for example, one adapter can be assigned to several multitool locations.

Tool management
70 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18103 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER_TYPE2
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references: MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK,
MD18085 $MC_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS

Table 4-33 $MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER

18104 $MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
MD number Tool adapter in TO area
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 600
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of tool adapters in the TO area.
This function can only be used if magazine locations are available in the NC. The tool man‐
agement function must be active. In order to activate the setting, bit 7 (=0x80) must be set in
MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT _MASK.
Adapter data records and the cutting-edge-specific basis / adapter data records mutually ex‐
clude one another. i.e. when adapter data is defined, then parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22,
$TC_DP23 or their values in NC are available.
-1:
Every magazine location is automatically assigned an adapter.
This means that internally there are just as many adapters foreseen as are foreseen by the
magazine locations set in machine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION.
-2
Every magazine location and each multitool location is automatically assigned an adapter. This
means that internally there are just as many adapters foreseen as are foreseen by the mag‐
azine locations set in machine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION and multitool
locations set in $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS.
0:
No adapter-data definition possible. Cutting-edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22
and $TC_DP23 are available in cases where adapters are utilized outside the active TM.
> 0:
Number of adapter data records. By this, adapters can be defined independently of magazine
locations. An additional step following definition of the data assigns the adapters to magazine
locations.
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
Additional references:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 71
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-34 $MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO

18105 $MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
MD number Maximum value of D number
Default setting: 9 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum value of D number.
The maximum number of D numbers per cutting edge is not affected by this.
The monitoring of the D number assignment associated with this value is only effective for new
definitions of D numbers. This means the existing data records are not checked later - if the MD
is changed.
Advisable setting:
$MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO equal to $MN_MM_MAX_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_PER_TOOL. If $MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO > $MN_MM_MAX_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_PER_TOOL is set, you should familiarize yourself with the difference between
offset number D and the tool edge number CE.
See also language commands CHKDNO, CHKDM, GETDNO, SETDNO, DZERO.
The MD can change the memory requirements:
A change from "less than equal to" to "greater than" - or vice versa - in the values of both the
above mentioned MDs can influence the demand for non-buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18106 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Table 4-35 $MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL

18106 $MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
MD number Maximum number of D numbers per tool
Default setting: 9 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 12
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum number of cutting edges (D offset) per tool (per T number)
This allows greater security with the data definition. A value of 1 can be set if only tools with one
cutting edge are to be used. This will avoid the problem of assigning more than one cutting
edge to the tool when data is defined.
Logically the same value is set for MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO as for MM_MAX_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_PER_TOOL. If MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO is set greater than
MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL, you should familiarize yourself with the difference
between offset number D and the tool edge number CE.
See also language commands CHKDNO, CHKDM, GETDNO, SETDNO, DZERO.
The MD can change the memory requirements:
A change from "less than equal to" to "greater than" - or vice versa - in the values of both the
above mentioned MDs can influence the demand for non-buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18105 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Tool management
72 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

Table 4-36 $MM_NUM_SUMCORR

18108 $MM_NUM_SUMCORR
MD number Additive offsets in the TO area
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 9000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Total number of additive offsets in NC.
A value of -1 means that the number of additive offsets equals the number of cutting edges *
number of additive offsets per cutting edge.
A value > 0 and < "Number of cutting edges * number of additive offsets per cutting edge"
means that per cutting edge, a maximum "Number of additive offsets per cutting edge" additive
offsets can - but does not need to - be defined, i.e. this provides an option of using the buffered
memory sparingly. Only the cutting edges defined for the explicit data have a additive offset
data record.
Buffered memory is reserved. The memory requirements for additive offset are doubled if
"Setup offset" is also configured and active; see MD $MN_MM__KIND_OF_SUMCORR.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGE_IN_TOA
MD18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Table 4-37 $MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE

18110 $MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
MD number Maximum number of additive offsets per cutting edge
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum number of additive offsets per cutting edge
The following applies for MM_NUM_SUMCORR > 0:
This data does not define the memory, but is used for monitoring purposes only.
The following applies to MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1:
This data defines the memory.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Table 4-38 $MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR

18112 $MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
MD number Properties of additive offsets in the TO area
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x1F
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 73
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18112 $MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
Meaning: Properties of additive offsets in NC.
Bit 0=0: "Additive offsets fine" are saved when the tool data is backed up.
Bit 0=1: "Additive offsets fine" are saved when the tool data is not backed up.
Bit 1=0: Set-up offsets are saved when the tool data is backed up.
Bit 1=1: Set-up offsets are not saved when the tool data is backed up.
Bit 2=0: If the function tool management (TMMG) or tool monitoring (TMMO) are used, then
setting the tool status to "active" has no effect on the "additive offsets fine"/setup offsets al‐
ready in use.
Bit 2=1 When the tool status is set to "active", the existing additive offsets are set to the value
0. This does not influence the setup offsets.
Bit 3=0: If the functions "TMG" = "Adapter" are in use: "Additive offsets fine"/setup offsets are
transformed.
Bit 3=1: "Additive offsets fine"/setup offsets are not transformed.
Bit 4=0: No setting up offset data records.
Bit 4=1: Setting up offset data records are additionally created. The additive offset is thus the
sum of the setting up offset + additive offset fine.
Changing the states of bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 does not alter the memory configuration. Changing the
status of bit 4 causes the buffered memory to be reconfigured with the next POWER ON.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR
MD18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
MD18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Table 4-39 $MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM

18192 $MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
MD number Number of multitool-specific parameters $TC_MTPCn per multitool
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of multitool-specific parameters $TC_MTPCn, that can be created for each multitool
and that are available to users or the compile cycle.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-40 $MM_TYPE_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM

18193 $MM_TYPE_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
MD number OEM multitool data type
Default setting: 3, 3, 3, 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 10

Tool management
74 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18193 $MM_TYPE_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: User or OEM data in the tool management.
Type of the multitool-specific Siemens user data $TC_MTPCn configured using MD18192
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM.
Every parameter can be allocated its own type.
The following types are permissible:
Type Value of the machine data
● BOOL 1
● CHAR 2
● INT 3
● REAL 4
● STRING 5 (not allowed, not supported by the OPI.)
● AXIS 6
● FRAME not defined
A buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can result in the reconfiguration of the
buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18192 MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
MD18083 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
Additional references:

Table 4-41 $MM_TYPE_CC_MTLOC_PARAM

18194 $MM_TYPE_CC_MTLOC_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM multitool location data parameters $TC_MTPPCn per multitool location
Default setting: 3, 3, 3, 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of multitool location-specific parameters $TC_MTPPCn that can be created for each
multitool location and that are available to users or the compile cycle.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-42 $MM_TYPE_CC_MTLOC_PARAM

18195 $MM_TYPE_CC_MTLOC_PARAM
MD number OEM multitool location data type
Default setting: 3, 3, 3, 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 10
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 75
Machine data
4.1 NC-specific machine data

18195 $MM_TYPE_CC_MTLOC_PARAM
Meaning: User or OEM data in the tool management.
Type of the multitool location-specific Siemens user data $TC_MTPCn configured using
MD18194 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM.
Every parameter can be allocated its own type.
The following types are permissible:
Type Value of the machine data
● BOOL 1
● CHAR 2
● INT 3
● REAL 4
● STRING 5 (not allowed, not supported by the OPI.)
● AXIS 6
● FRAME not defined
A buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can result in the reconfiguration of the
buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18194 MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM
MD18085 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS
Additional references:

Tool management
76 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

4.2 Channel-specific machine data

Table 4-43 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND[<channel>]

20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND[<channel>]
MD number Initial setting of master spindle in channel
Default setting: 1, 1, … Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 20
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE
Meaning: Definition of master spindle in channel. The number of the spindle is set.
Example:
1 corresponds to spindle S1. When S is programmed, the current master spindle is automat‐
ically addressed.
The SETMS(n) command can be programmed to declare the spindle number as the master
spindle. SETMS declares the spindle defined in the MD to be the master spindle again.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Spindles (S1)

Table 4-44 $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO[<channel>]

20096 $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO[<channel>]
MD number Meaning of the address extension with T, M tool change
Default setting: FALSE Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit:
Data type: Boolean
Meaning: The MD is only relevant when the "Tool management" function is disabled.
FALSE
The contents of the address extension of the NC addresses T and M "change-command
number" are not evaluated by the NC. The PLC determines the meaning of the programmed
extension
TRUE
The address extension of NC addresses T and M "tool change command number" - "tool
change command number" = TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE with 6 as default value - are inter‐
preted as spindle number. NC handles the extension essentially the same as the active func‐
tion "Tool management".
This means that the programmed D number always refers to the T number of programmed
main-spindle numbers.
Corresponding to... MD20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 77
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

Table 4-45 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK[<channel>]

20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK[<channel>]
MD number Determination of basic control settings after Reset/TP End
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x7FFFF
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the basic PLC setting after booting and reset/end of part program with respect to
the G commands (especially current level and settable work offset), tool length compensation
and transformation by setting the following bits:
Bit 0: Reset mode
Bit 1: Suppress auxiliary function output for tool selection
Bit 2: Selection of the reset response after Power On; e.g. of tool offset
Bit 3: Only of significance without active tool management: Selection of the reset response at
the end of the test mode for active tool offsets. The bit is only of significance if bits 0 and 6 are
set.
It defines to what "current setting for the active tool length compensation" refers;
- the program that was active at the end of test mode
- the program that was active before switching-on test mode
Bit 4: Reserved! Setting is now made via $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[.]
Bit 5: Reserved! Setting is now made via $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[.]
Bit 6: Reset behavior, "active tool length compensation"
Bit 7: Reset behavior, "active kinematic transformation"
Bit 8: Reset behavior, "coupled-motion axes"
Bit 9: Reset behavior, "tangential tracking"
Bit 10: Reset behavior, "synchronous spindle"
Bit 11: Reset behavior, "revolutional feed rate"
Bit 12: Reset behavior, "geo axis exchange"
Bit 13: Reset behavior, "master value coupling"
Bit 14: Reset behavior, "basic frame"
Bits 4 to 11 are evaluated only if bit 0=1.
Bit 15: Function for electronic gears, not relevant for tool management.
Bit 16=0: After end of program/reset, the number given by the MD SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND is the number of the master spindle
Bit 16=1: The programmed value of SETMS is retained after end of program/reset
Bit 17=0: After end of program / reset, the tool holder number provided in MD TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER is the number of the master tool holder
Bit 17=1: The programmed value of SETMTH is retained after end of program / reset
Bit 18: Reset behavior, "reference axis for G96/G961/G962"
The bits 4 to 11, 16 and 17 are only evaluated for bit 0=1. Bit value=0 is set so that the behavior
applicable up to now is retained with bit 0=1. (The effect of bit 0=0 was and is that the values
programmed for SETMTH/SETMS are retained at end of program.)
Bit 20=1: Reset behavior, "$P_USEKT"

Tool management
78 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK[<channel>]
Corresponding to... MD20120 TOOL_RESET_VALUE
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES
MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE
MD20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
MD20121 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
MD20118 GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Table 4-46 $MC_START_MODE_MASK[<channel>]

20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK[<channel>]
MD number Definition of the initial state of the control after part program start
Default setting: 0x400 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x7FFFF
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 79
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK[<channel>]
Meaning: Definition of the initial state of the control for part program start with respect to the G commands
(especially current level and adjustable work offset), tool length compensation, transformation
and axis coupling setting the following bits (only the bits in bold are relevant for tool manage‐
ment):
Bit 0: Not assigned: $MC_START_MODE_MASK is evaluated every time the part program is
started
Bit 1: Suppress auxiliary function output for tool selection
Bit 4: Start behavior G command "current level"
Bit 5: Start behavior G command "settable work offset"
Bit 6: Starting behavior, "active tool length compensation"
Bit 7: Starting behavior, "active kinematic transformation"
Bit 8: Starting behavior, "coupled-motion axes"
Bit 9: Starting behavior, "tangential tracking"
Bit 10: Starting behavior, "synchronous spindle"
Bit 11: Reserved
Bit 12: Starting behavior, "geo axis exchange"
Bit 13: Starting behavior, "master value coupling"
Bit 14: Starting behavior, "basic frame"
Bit 15: Function for electronic gears, not relevant for tool management.
Bit 16=0: The current value SETMS is retained (depends on the settings in RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK)
Bit 16=1: At program start, the spindle defined in MD $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND is
the master spindle.
Bit 17=0: The current value SETMTH is retained (depends on the settings in RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK)
Bit 17=1: At program start, the number defined in MD $MC_Tool_Management_Toolholder is
the number of the master tool holder
Bit 18=1: Reference axis for G96/G961/G962
Bit value=0 is set so that the behavior applicable up to now is retained.
Bit 2: Reserved
Corresponding to... MD20120 TOOL_RESET_VALUE
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES
MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE
MD20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20121 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
MD20118 GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Table 4-47 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE[<channel>] (only w/o tool management)

20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE[<channel>] (only w/o tool management)

MD number Tool length compensation at power-up (Reset/TP end)
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32000

Tool management
80 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE[<channel>] (only w/o tool management)

Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the tool where the tool length compensation is selected at power up and for reset
or TP end depending on MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK and for TP depending on MD
20112: START_MODE_MASK.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Table 4-48 $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE[<channel>] (only w/o tool management)

20121 $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE[<channel>] (only w/o tool management)

MD number Preselect tool on Reset
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the preselected tool with MD 20310=1. A tool is preselected after power-up and at
reset or end of part program depending on MD20110 and on start of part program depending
on MD20112.
This data is only valid without tool management.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Table 4-49 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME[<channel>]

20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME[<channel>]
MD number Active tool at reset/start with tool management
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: This data is valid only if the TM function is active.
Definition of the tool holder with which the tool length compensation is selected during power
up and for a reset or an end of the part program depending on MD20110 RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK and for a part program start depending on MD20112
START_MODE_MASK.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
Additional references:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 81
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

Table 4-50 $MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]

20123 $MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Preselected value of $P_USEKT at RESET
Default setting: 0x0,... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xF
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit:
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: This data is valid only if the TM function is active.
The system variable $P_USEKT is preassigned with the value of this MD:
- after reset or part program end: depending on $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
Additional references:

Table 4-51 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER[<channel>]

20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER[<channel>]
MD number Tool holder number
Default setting: 0,0,0,... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 16
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: This MD is only of significance when tool management is active.
Tool management must know on which tool holder the tool is to be loaded. The data is only
evaluated if the value is greater than zero.
Then, $TC_MPP5 numbers are no longer seen as "spindle numbers", but as tool holder num‐
ber.
The automatic address extension of T and of M06 is then the value for this MD and no longer
the value of $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND. The MD is used to define the master tool
holder number to which a tool preparation or a tool change refers.
When determining the tool on the tool holder for the setting "keep old offset" of MD $MC_RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK, then reference is also made to this value.
If a machine has several tool holders, but no specific master spindle, then the MD serves as a
default value to determine the tool holder to which the tool should be loaded at a tool change
(reset, start, T="identifier", M06). When defining the magazine locations of internal magazines,
locations, type "spindle" - $TC_MPP1=2=spindle-location - are assigned a "location type in‐
dex" ($TC_MPP5). This allocates a specific tool holder to the location.
The tool holder with number n can be declared the master tool holder using the language
command SETMTH(n). This means that the offsets of a tool that is loaded to a buffer location,
type "SPINDLE" and with the value $TC_MPP5=n, correct the tool path.
Tool management change to "SPINDLE" locations with $TC_MPP5 not equal to the number of
the master tool holder have no effect on the path.
The command SETMTH is used to declare the tool holder defined in the MD as the master tool
holder again.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
MD20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Tool management
82 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

Table 4-52 $MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]

20126 $MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Operative tool holder on Reset
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: Reset Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the tool holder with which the tool length compensation is selected during power
up and for a reset or an end of the part program as a dependency on the machine data
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and for a main program start as a dependency on the machine
data $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
This data is valid without tool management.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Table 4-53 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE[<channel>]

20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE[<channel>]
MD number Tool change commands to the PLC after block search
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: immediately Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: This MD is only of significance when magazine management is active.
($MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK)
It determines whether, after a block search with calculation of the tool change command, tool
preparation commands (general tool change commands) are output to the PLC or not.
1: Tool change commands and tool preparation commands are collected and output to the PLC
when the program starts after the search target has been reached
0: All tool/magazine-specific commands, which were collected in the block search, are not
output to the PLC with the subsequent program start! This means that also programmed
POSM, TCI, TCA commands are also not output.
Comment 1:
Without active magazine management the tool change M code is not collected if it is not
assigned to any auxiliary function group. With active magazine management, the machine
data value corresponds to =0
Comment 2:
The value =0 is, e.g. practical, if, after reaching the search target, the collected tool change
commands are output to the PLC in an ASUP program using the commands GETSELT, GE‐
TEXTET.
Corresponding to... MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 83
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

Table 4-54 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]

20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Tool cutting edge length compensation at power-up (Reset/TP end)
Default setting: 0, 0, 0, ... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the tool cutting edge with which the tool length compensation is selected during
power up and for a reset or an end of the part program depending on MD20110 $MC_RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK and for a part program start depending on MD20112
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.
When tool management is active and bits 0 and 6 set in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, the last
offset of the tool which was active on power-off - generally the tool in the spindle - is operative
after power up
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Table 4-55 $MC_SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]

20132 $MC_SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Additive offset effective at reset
Default setting: 0, 0, ... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the additive offset with which the additive offset is selected during power up and
for a reset or an end of the part program as a dependency on the machine data $MC_RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK and for a part program start as a dependency on the machine data
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.
Machine data 18110 $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE determines the maximum
meaningful value which can be entered.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references:

Table 4-56 $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]

20140 $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Transformation data record at power up (Reset/TP end)
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 20
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE
Meaning: Definition of the transformation data record selected during power up and for a reset or an end
of the part program depending on MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and for a part pro‐
gram start depending on MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK.

Tool management
84 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20140 $MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Axes, coordinate systems,... (K2)

Table 4-57 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][n]

20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][n]
MD number Initial setting of G group
Default setting:{2, 0, 0, 1, 0...} Min. input limit:- Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 85
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][n]
Meaning: Specification of the G command of every G group that takes effect at:
● Run-up, reset and end of part program depending on MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● Start of part program depending on MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][<G group index>] = <group-specific number of the G command>
with:
● <G group index> = (number of the G group) - 1
● <Group-specific number of the G command>: Additional information: "NC Programming" Programming
Manual
Machine data Group Default value for 840D sl
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[0] 1 2 (G01)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[1] 2 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[2] 3 2 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[3] 4 2 (STARTFIFO)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[4] 5 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5] 6 1 (G17)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[6] 7 1 (G40)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[7] 8 1 (G500)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[8] 9 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[9] 10 1 (G60)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[10] 11 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[11] 12 1 (G601)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[12] 13 2 (G71)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13] 14 1 (G90)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[14] 15 2 (G94)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15] 16 1 (CFC)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[16] 17 1 (NORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[17] 18 1 (G450)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[18] 19 1 (BNAT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[19] 20 1 (ENAT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[20] 21 1 (BRISK)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[21] 22 1 (CUT2D)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[22] 23 1 (CDOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[23] 24 1 (FFWOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[24] 25 1 (ORIWKS)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[25] 26 2 (RMI)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[26] 27 1 (ORIC)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[27] 28 1 (WALIMON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[28] 29 1 (DIAMOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[29] 30 1 (COMPOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[30] 31 1 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[31] 32 1 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[32] 33 1 (FTCOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[33] 34 1 (OSOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[34] 35 1 (SPOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[35] 36 1 (PDELAYON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[36] 37 1 (FNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[37] 38 1 (SPIF1)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[38] 39 1 (CCPRECOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[39] 40 1 (CUTCONOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[40] 41 1 (LFOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[41] 42 1 (TCOABS)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[42] 43 1 (G140)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[43] 44 1 (G340)

Tool management
86 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][n]
Meaning: GCODE_RESET_VALUES[44] 45 1 (SPATH)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[45] 46 1 (LFTXT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[46] 47 1 (G290 Sinumerik mode)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[47] 48 3 (G460)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[48] 49 1 (CP)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[49] 50 1 (ORIEULER)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[50] 51 1 (ORIVECT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[51] 52 1 (PAROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52] 53 1 (TOROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[53] 54 1 (ORIROTA)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[54] 55 1 (RTLION)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[55] 56 1 (TOWSTD)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[56] 57 1 (FENDNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[57] 58 1 (RELIEVEON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[58] 59 1 (DYNNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[59] 60 1 (WALCS0)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[60] 61 1 (ORISOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[61] 62 1 (not defined)
....
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[69] 70 1 (not defined)
Corresponding MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
to... MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional refer‐ (K1, G2)
ences: The complete list of all G groups with the G commands contained therein can be found in:
NC Programming Programming Manual

Table 4-58 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[n]

20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[n]
MD number Reset behavior of G groups
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 87
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[n]
Meaning: This MD is only evaluated if bit 0 is set in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
This MD is used to define for each entry in MD $MN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (i.e. for each
G group), whether a setting according to the $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES is undertaken
again for a reset/part program end (MD=0) or whether the current setting is retained (MD=1).
Example:
The normal position of the 6th G group (current level) is read from the machine data
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES for each reset / part program end here:
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5]=1; reset value of 6th G group is M17
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[5]=0; initial state for the 6th G group after
;reset/part program end according to
;$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5]
However, if the current setting of the 6th G group (current level) is to be retained beyond reset /
part program end, the following setting is required:
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5]=1; reset value of 6th G group is M17
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[5]=1; current setting for the 6th G group
; is also kept after reset/part program end
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Axes, coordinate systems,... (K2)

Table 4-59 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT

20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT
MD number Initial state of tool cutting edge without programming
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: -2 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Default tool cutting edge after tool change
If no cutting edge is programmed after a tool change, then the edge number preset in CUT‐
TING_EDGE_DEFAULT is applied.
Value = 0: No cutting edge is initially active after a tool change. Cutting-edge selection only
takes place at D programming.
Value = 1: No. of the cutting edge
Value = -1: Cutting edge number of old tool also applies to new tool
Value = -2: Cutting edge (offset) of the old tool remains active until D is programmed.
Example:
MD: CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = 1;
after a tool change, without programming a cutting edge, the first cutting edge is active
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Tool management
88 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

Table 4-60 $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT

20272 $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT
MD number Initial state of additive offset without programming
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The number of the additive offset for the cutting edge that is active when a new cutting-edge
offset is activated without a programmed DL value.
The MD18110 $MN_MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTEDGE determines the maximum
meaningful value which can be entered.
Value: Meaning
> 0: Number of additive offset
= 0: No additive offset active with D programming
= -1: The additive offset number for the previously programmed D is used.
Corresponding to... MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Note
The output of the DL number is controlled by the MD22252 $MC_AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE.

Table 4-61 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD number Channel-specific activation of tool management functions
Default setting: 0x2,... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFFFF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: MD = 0: Tool management inactive
Bit 0=1: Tool management active
The tool management functions are enabled for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: TM monitoring function active
Functions for monitoring tools (tool life and workpiece count) are enabled.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active
The memory can be used for the user data (see also M 18090 to18098)
Bit 3=1: Adjacent location consideration active
Bit 0 to bit 3 must be set just like MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Meaning: Bit 4=1: The PLC has the option to request another T preparation with modified parameters.
Acknowledgement status "2", "7" and "103" is enabled with this bit. This causes the tool se‐
lection to be repeated in the NC

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 89
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Bits 5 to 8
Bit 5 and bit 7 refer to the main spindle
Bit 6 and bit 8 refer to the secondary spindles
Bit 5 = 1: The command output is considered completed if the internal transport acknowledge‐
ment + the transport acknowledgement are present, i.e. if the command was received by the
basic PLC program.
Bit 19=1 additionally allows the block change to be prevented (main run) until the required
acknowledgements are received.
Bit 7 = 1: The command output is not considered completed until the end acknowledgement
from the PLC is received, i.e. the command was acknowledged by the PLC user program with
status "1".
Bit 19=1 additionally allows the block change to be prevented (main run) until the required
acknowledgements are received.
Bit 5 and bit 7 (alternatively bit 6 and bit 8) are mutually exclusive!
Only the following combinations are permitted:
Bit 5: …0…1…0
Bit 7: …0…0…1
With the default setting, i.e. bit 5 to 8 = 0, synchronization is performed in the block in which a
cutting edge was first selected.
Setting these bits delays block processing.
Meaning: Bit 9: Reserved for test purposes
(no command output to the PLC)
can also be used by the machine manufacturer in the test phase, as long as the PLC program
does not yet change tools
Meaning: Bit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the preparation is taken over by the PLC user program.
The change command is only output when the preparation acknowledgement is received. This
can be, for example status "1" or "105".
Bit 10=0: The change command is output without delay, immediately after the preparation
command.
Meaning: Bit 11=1: The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers = 2, 4, 5) is carried out even
if the same tool preparation command has taken place! (Commands 4, 5 contain the tool
preparation)
Example: (tool change takes place with M06 (PLC command number=3):
T="Tool1"; Tool preparation
M06; tool change
T="Tool2"; 1st tool preparation after M6 (for the same toolholder)
; is always output to PLC
T="TOOL2"; 2nd tool preparation, is only output as command to PLC if bit 11 = 1
; This tool preparation counts as the first one if the status of the tool has changed since the
previous tool preparation such that it can no longer be used.
A possible reason for this would be, e.g. asynchronous unloading of a tool. This tool prepara‐
tion then attempts to select a replacement tool.
Bit 11=0: The preparation command can be output only once for each tool.

Tool management
90 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Meaning: Bit 12=1: The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers = 2, 4, 5) is carried out even
if the tool is already positioned in the spindle /tool holder.
T="Tool1"; Tool preparation
M06; tool change
T="Tool1"; Tool is already placed on the tool holder
; 1st Tool preparation after M06 (for the same toolholder)
; is only output to PLC if bit 12 = 1
; A tool that cannot be used (e.g. disabled due to tool monitoring) on the tool holder does not
count as if placed on the tool holder. This tool preparation then attempts to select a replace‐
ment tool.
T="TOOL2"; 2nd tool preparation - the following rules applies for bit 11 for output
Bit 12=0: The preparation command is not executed if the tool is already positioned in the
spindle.
Bit 13=1: Trace
For reset, the command output of the NC and the acknowledgements of the PLC are saved in
a trace file (TCTRAxx.mpf, xx=channel no.).
Corresponds with $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ..
Bit 14=1: Reset mode
Tool and offset selection according to the settings in MD $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.
Bit 14=0: No reset mode
Meaning: Bit 15=1: The tool is not returned if several preparation commands have been issued (Tx->Tx).
Bit 15=0: Tool is returned from possibly defined buffers.
Bit 16=0: T = "Tool name" (identifier only)
Bit 16=1: T = Location number (identifier or location number)
Bit 17=1: Tool life monitoring is controlled by the PLC (DB21.DBX1.3).
Bit 18=1: Activation of monitoring "last tool of tool group"
Bit 18 extends the search for a suitable tool, especially if there are many disabled replacement
tools.
Bit 18=0: No monitoring for "Last tool in tool group"
Bit 19=1: The synchronizations defined by bits 5...8 are relative to the main run block, i.e. there
is no block change until the required acknowledgements are received
Bit 19 in conjunction with bits 5, 6, 7, 8 set delays the block processing.
Bit 19=0: The synchronizations defined by bits 5...8 are relative to the tool management com‐
mand output, i.e. there is no block change delay
Meaning: Bit 20=0: The commands generated on PLC signal "program testing active" are not output to
the PLC. NC acknowledges the commands automatically. Magazine and tool data is not
changed.
Bit 20=1: The commands generated for PLC signal "program testing active" are output to the
PLC. Depending on the type of acknowledgement, tool/magazine data can be changed in the
NC. If the acknowledgement parameters for the "target magazine" are set to the same values
as the "source magazine", the tool is not transported and thus no data modified in the NC.
Bit 21=0: Default setting: Ignore the tool status "W" at tool selection
Bit 21=1: Tools with status "W" cannot be selected by another tool change, tool preparation
command, or tool transport (e.g. MVTOOL).
Bit 22=1: "Tool subgroups" function
$TC_TP11[x] is the grouping or selection parameter

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 91
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Bit 23=0: Default setting
The tool management optimally and reliably selects the tool in the main run, i.e. the Interpreter
may have to wait for the end of the tool selection for offset selection.
Bit 23=1: For basic applications
The Interpreter selects the tool itself, i.e. no synchronization is required with the main run for
offset selection. (If the tool becomes no longer useable after selection, but before loading, an
uncorrectable alarm may result.)
Bit 24=0: Default setting
If the PLC commands 8 and 9 (asynchronous transfer) want to move a tool to a location that is
reserved for another tool, this is rejected and an alarm is issued.
Bit 24=1: If the PLC commands 8 and 9 are to move a tool to a location that is reserved for
another tool with "Reserved for tool from buffer" (bit values="H4"), this is possible. This location
reservation is then removed before the movement is executed ("Reserved for new tool to be
loaded" (bit value="H8") remains effective).
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
MD20122 MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20124 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references:

Table 4-62 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK

20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
MD number Time monitoring for tool in the tool holder
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Activation of tool time monitoring for tool holder or spindle 1....x.
As soon as the path axes are moved (not for G00, always for G63), the tool time monitoring
data for the tool which is located in the selected tool holder – which is at the same time the
master tool holder – is updated.
Bit 0...x-1: Monitoring of active tool in spindle 1...x
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Table 4-63 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE

22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
MD number New tool offset for M function
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE

Tool management
92 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Meaning: A tool is selected in the program with the T function. The setting in this machine data deter‐
mines whether the new tool is loaded immediately on execution of the T function:
MD: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0
The new tool data becomes effective directly when T or D is programmed.
This setting is used mainly for turning machines with tool turret.
If there is no D programmed in the block with T, the tool offset which is defined in $MC_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_DEFAULT becomes effective.
MD: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. This setting is used mainly on milling
machines with a tool magazine, in order to bring the new tool into the tool change position
without interrupting the machining process. With the M function set in MD 22560:
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE, the old tool is removed from the spindle and the new tool is loaded
into the spindle. According to DIN 66025, this tool change must be programmed with the M
function M06.
Corresponding to... MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Table 4-64 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE

22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD number M function for tool change
Default setting: 6 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 99999999
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: If the T function is used only to prepare a new tool for a tool change (this setting is used mainly
on milling machines with a tool magazine, in order to bring the new tool into the tool change
position without interrupting the machining process), the tool change must be initiated with an
additional M function. The M function entered in TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE initiates the tool
change (remove old tool from the spindle and load the new tool in the spindle).
This tool change is required to be programmed with M function M06, in accordance with
DIN66025.
Corresponding to... MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Additional references: Functional description for tool offset (W1)

Table 4-65 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE

22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
MD number Behavior when errors occur at tool change
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 93
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
Meaning: Behavior in the case that faults/problems occur for a programmed tool change.
Bit 0=0: Standard behavior: Stop on faulty NC block
Bit 0=1: If the error occurs in the block containing the tool change preparation command, the
alarm activated by the preparation command (T) is delayed until the program run reaches the
point at which the associated tool change command (M06) is interpreted. Only then is the alarm
output that is triggered by the preparation command. The operator can make corrections in this
block. When execution of the program is continued, the faulty NC block is interpreted again and
the preparatory command is internally executed again automatically.
The value = 1 is only of significance if the setting MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1 is
used.
Bit 1 is only meaningful if magazine management is active.
Bit 1=0: Standard behavior: During the tool-change preparation only those tools are recog‐
nized whose data is assigned to a magazine.
Bit 1=1: Manual tools can be loaded at change.
A tool will also be loaded at change if its data is registered in the NC, but not assigned to a
magazine. In this case, the tool data is automatically assigned to the programmed tool holder.
The user is prompted to place tools into the tool holder or remove tools from it.
Bit 2 Qualifying the offset programming
Bit 2=0: Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 results in offset 0
Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 result in additive offset 0
Bit 2=1: Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 generates an alarm message
Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 generates an alarm message
Bits 3 and 4 are only meaningful if tool management is active.
Function:
Control of the behavior of the Init block generation at program start if disabled tool is positioned
on the spindle and needs to be activated.
For further details, see: MD 20112: START_MODE_MASK, MD 20110: RESET_MODE_MASK
At RESET the behavior of "keep disabled tool on spindle active" is not affected by this.
Bit 3=0: Default: If the tool on the spindle is disabled: Generate a tool-change command that
requests a replacement tool. If there is no replacement, then an alarm is produced.
Bit 3=1: The status of the disabled spindle tool is ignored (exception: tools that are not re‐
leased). The tool is active. The following part program should be formulated such that no parts
are machined with the disabled tool.
Bit 4=0: Default: An attempt is made to activate the spindle tool or the replacement tool
Bit 4=1: If the tool on the spindle is disabled, T0 is programmed in the start init block.
The following statements are made for the combination of bit 3 and bit 4:
0 / 0: Behavior as before, automatic change at NC start if a disabled tool is in the spindle.
1 / 0: This is not always changed automatically
0 / 1: A T0 is automatically generated for a disabled tool in the spindle at NC Start
1 / 1: No statement

Tool management
94 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 6=0: Default: with T0 or D0 then precisely only T0 or D0 are programmed. In other words,
the MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT define the value of
D, DL when T0 is programmed.
For example, $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=1, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT=2,
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0 (tool change with T programming)
N10 T0; T no. 0 has active number D1 and DL=2 which results in an offset of zero. If, in addition,
bit 2 is also set:
Programming of
a) T0; to deselect tool
b) D0; for offset deselection
generates an alarm, if
a) At least one of MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT is not
equal to zero (T0 D0 DL=0 is the correct programming).
b) The MD $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT is not equal to zero (D0 DL=0 is the correct program‐
ming).
Bit 6=1: Controls the NC behavior with programming of (x, y, z all greater than zero), if at least
one of MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT is not equal to
zero.
a) Tx Dy -> T0
with T0 - D0 or D0 DL=0 is automatically programmed in the NC; i.e. values not equal to zero
for MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT are processed as if
the value were equal to zero.
b) Tx Dy >T0 Dy, or T0 DL =z, or T0 Dy DL=z, or T0 D0 DL=z explicitly programmed values of
D, DL are not influenced.
c) Dy DL=z -> D0
with D0 - DL=0 is automatically programmed in the NC; i.e. values not equal to zero for MD
$MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT are processed as if the value were equal to zero.
d) Dy DL=z -> D0 DL=z
explicitly programmed values of DL are not influenced.
If in addition bit 2 is also set:
only T0/D0 have to be programmed for tool/offset deselection and therefore no alarm is output.
The statements regarding $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT or DL are only valid if the additive
offset function is active (see $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 8).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 95
Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
Bit 7=0: Programming Tx checks whether a tool with the T number x is known in the TO unit of
the channel. If it is not, processing stops in this block and alarm 17190 is issued.
Bit 7=1: Only if tool basic functionality is active ($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit
0.1=0) and ($MN_MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE=0):
If Tx is programmed, any unknown Tx is first ignored and the alarm for the preparation com‐
mand (Tx) is ignored until D selection is interpreted in the program execution. Only then is
alarm 17191 output that was triggered by the preparation command. This means that in this
block, the operator could use the D selection to make corrections. When execution of the
program is continued, the faulty NC block is interpreted again and the preparatory command
is internally executed again automatically.
(It is interesting for cutting edge default=0 or =-2 or D0 programming, otherwise when changing
the tool, the D from cutting edge default is deselected.)
This variant can be required if you want to program "Tool number=Location" (turret as tool
holder) without tool management. The turret can only be positioned at a location for which there
is no tool defined (yet).
If bit 0=1 is set, this bit is irrelevant.
Bit 8=0: A tool that is on a disabled magazine location is not taken into account for the tool
selection, i.e. it cannot be selected (default setting).
Bit 8=1: Also a tool that is on a disabled magazine location is taken into account for the tool
selection (corresponds to the earlier behavior).
Bit 9=0: The tool status "to be unloaded" ($TC_TP8[T_No] Bit10=1) is not relevant. (default
setting)
Bit 9=1: A tool that has the status "to be unloaded" ($TC_TP8[T_No] Bit10=1) is not selected
within the scope of T programming.
Bit 9=1: If a multitool or one of the tools on the multitool has the status "to be unloaded"
($TC_MTP8[MT_No] or $TC_TP8[T_No] Bit10=1), the tools on the multitool are not selected
within the scope of T programming.
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool offset (W1)

Table 4-66 $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT

28085 $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
MD number Allocation of a TO unit to a channel
Default setting: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ... Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 10
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit:
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
96 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.2 Channel-specific machine data

28085 $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
Meaning: The area T0 includes all tool, magazine, ... data blocks, which the NC knows. The maximum
number of units in the TO area match the maximum number of channels.
If MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT = default, then each channel is individually assigned a TO unit.
The channel is assigned to the TO unit i with MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT = i. It is thus possible to
assign one TO unit to several channels.
Notice
The upper limit value does not imply that the value is always meaningful or without conflict. If
one channel (the first) is active and the other not on a system with a total of 2 channels, the MD
on channel 1 can be formally set to a value of 2. However, the NC cannot work with this setting.
This setting would mean that channel 1 possesses no data blocks for tool offsets since a
channel with Id=2 does not exist.
The NC detects this conflict during power-on or a warm restart and reacts by independently
changing the (incorrect) setting to the default setting for the MD.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 97
Machine data
4.3 Machine data for function replacement

4.3 Machine data for function replacement

Table 4-67 $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME

15710 TCA_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Name of subprogram for TCA replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: Program name for the replacement program when calling the TCA command. If the TCA
command is programmed in a part program block, then the subprogram defined in
$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME is called at the end of the block. The programmed tool can be
queried in the replacement program using the system variables $C_TS_PROG / $C_TS, the
duplo number using $C_DUPLO_PROG / $C_DUPLO and the tool holder / spindle number
using $C_THNO_PROG / $C_THNO. The system variable $C_TCA returns the value TRUE in
the replacement program.
If $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME contains an empty string, then the replacement is deactivated
(default setting).
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Table 4-68 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE

10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD number M function to be replaced by a subprogram
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
98 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.3 Machine data for function replacement

10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
Meaning: M number with which the subprogram is called.
The name of the subprogram is stored in $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n]. If the M func‐
tion defined using $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] is programmed in a part program block, then
the subprogram defined in M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] is started at the end of block.
If the M function is re-programmed in the subprogram, then there is no longer any replacement
by a subprogram call.
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] acts both in the Siemens mode G290 as well as in the external
language mode G291.
The subprograms configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] and
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME may not be effective in one block (part program line) at the
same time, i.e. max. one M/T function replacement can be effective per block. Neither an M98
nor a modal subprogram call may be programmed in the block with the M function replacement.
A subprogram return jump or end of part program is also not permitted. Alarm 14016 is gen‐
erated in the case of a conflict.
Constraints:
M functions with a fixed meaning and configurable M functions are checked for competing
settings. A conflict is signaled with an alarm. The following M functions are checked:
- M0 to M5,
- M17, M30,
- M40 to M45,
- M function for selecting spindle/axis mode according to $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAP‐
PING_M_NR (default M70)
- M functions for nibbling/punching as configured in $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE if activated
by $MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION.
- for applied external language ($MN_MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE) M19, M96-M99.
Exception: The M functions defined by $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE for the tool change.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

Table 4-69 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME

10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Subprograms for M function replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -
Data type: STRING

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 99
Machine data
4.3 Machine data for function replacement

10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Meaning: The cycle name is stored in the machine data. This cycle is called if the M function was
programmed from machine datum $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE.
If the M function is programmed in a motion block, then the cycle is executed after the motion.
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE acts both in the Siemens mode G290 as well as in the external
language mode G291.
If a T number is programmed in the calling block, the programmed T number
can be queried in the cycle under the variable $P_TOOL.
M and T function replacement may not be effective in one block at the same time, i.e. max. one
M/T function replacement can be effective per block. Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram
call may be programmed in the block with the M function replacement. A subprogram return
jump or end of part program is also not permitted.
Alarm 14016 is generated in the case of a conflict.
Corresponding to... MD10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

Table 4-70 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME

10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Name of tool change cycle for T function replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: Cycle name for tool change routine during call via T function.
If a T function is programmed in a part program block, then the subprogram defined in
t_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is called at the end of block.
The programmed T number can be queried in the cycle via the system variables $C_T/
$C_T_PROG as decimal value and via $C_TS / $C_TS / $C_TS_PROG as string (only in tool
management).
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME acts both in the Siemens mode G290 as well as in the ex‐
ternal language mode G291.
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME and $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME may not be effec‐
tive in one block at the same time, i.e. max. one M/T function replacement can be effective per
block.
Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call may be programmed in the block with the T
function replacement. A subprogram return jump or end of part program is also not permitted.
Alarm 14016 is generated in the case of a conflict.
Corresponding to... MD10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

Tool management
100 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.3 Machine data for function replacement

Table 4-71 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR

10718 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR
MD number M function replacement with parameters
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: If a M function replacement was configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] /
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n], then $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR can be used for
specifying parameter transfer for one of these M functions per system variable as is the case
for the T function replacement. The parameters stored in the system variables always refer to
the part program line in which the M function to be replaced is programmed.
The following system variables are available:
$C_ME: Address extension of the substituted M function
$C_T_PROG: TRUE if address T has been programmed
$C_T: Value of address T (integer)
$C_TE: Address extension of address T
$C_TS_PROG: TRUE if address TS has been programmed
$C_D_PROG: TRUE if address D has been programmed
$C_D: Value of address D
$C_DL_PROG: TRUE if address DL has been programmed
$C_DL: Value of address DL
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

Table 4-72 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE

10719 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE
MD number Parameter assignment for T function replacement
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 7
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 101
Machine data
4.3 Machine data for function replacement

10719 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE
Meaning: Processing of the substitution program is parameterized in this MD for the tool selection/tool
offset selection.
Bit 0 = 0:
The D or DL number is transferred to the substitution program (default value)
Bit 0 = 1:
The D or DL number is not transferred to the substitution program if the following conditions are
fulfilled: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1 programming of D/DL with T or M function with
which the tool change cycle is called, in one part program line
Bit 1 = 0:
Execution of substitution subprogram at end of block (default value)
Bit 1 = 1:
Processing of substitution subprogram at start of block
Bit 2 = 0:
Processing of substitution subprogram according to setting for bit 1
Bit 2 = 1:
Execution of substitution subprogram at start of block and end of block
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

Table 4-73 $MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME

11717 $MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Subprogram name for D function replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: Cycle name for D function replacement routine.
If a D function is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined with
$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is called in accordance with the machine data
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME, $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE and
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR.
The programmed D number can be queried in the cycle via the system variables $C_D /
$C_D_PROG.
$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME can only run in Siemens mode (G290).
A maximum of one M/T/D function replacement can be effective for each part program line. A
modal subprogram call may not be programmed in the block with the D function replacement.
It is also not permissible to program a subprogram return jump or end of part program.
Alarm 14016 is generated in the case of a conflict.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

Tool management
102 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Machine data
4.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data

4.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data

The numbers of the Siemens machine data are listed in the following. This data is defined by
Siemens and must not be used by users. No detailed description of them is given for this reason.
18200
18201
18202
18203
18204
18205
18206
18207
18208
18209
Multitool machine data
18196
18197
18198
18199

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 103
Machine data
4.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data

Tool management
104 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
PLC programming 5
5.1 Overview

Overview

1& 3/&

'% 3/&XVHUSURJUDP
,QWHUQDO'%IRU 2%
WRROPDQDJH &DOO)%
PHQW &UHDWHWRRO
PDQDJHPHQW'%V

0DFKLQHGDWD '%ORDGLQJXQORDGLQJ 3/&XVHUSURJUDP

FKDLQER[W\SHPDJD]LQH 2%

'%PXOWLWRROGDWD
)XQFWLRQVIRU
ORDGLQJXQORDGLQJ
'%FKDQJHSRLQW DQGWRROFKDQJH
VSLQGOH
&DOO)&
7RRO '%PXOWLWRROGDWD $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW
PDQDJH %DVLF VSLQGOH RIWUDQVIHUVWHSV
PHQW SURJUDP
)% '%FKDQJHSRLQW 25
WXUUHW
'%
'%PXOWLWRROGDWD VWDQGDUGHQG
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW

0DJD]LQH
GDWD )&)&)& $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW
7UDQVIHUEORFNV VWDWXV

Figure 5-1 Commissioning the PLC Program

The basic program supplies the tool management interfaces (data blocks DB71-DB73) with
information for the new and old tool. The user must process this data from the active interface
in the user program and ensure that the tools (old and new) are placed on the respectively
associated positions (magazine, location). In order for the tool management to always know
where a tool is located, each time a tool changes location the new location must be transferred
to the tool management via the FC7 or FC8/FC6 acknowledgement status.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 105
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

5.2 PLC description

5.2.1 Interfaces

Overview
The interfaces in the PLC consist of data blocks that are updated by the basic program. Tasks
such as "Load tool" or "Prepare tool change" are stored for each tool in data blocks along with
the source and target. For the interfaces for a spindle or turret, in addition to the tool numbers
(internal number, which is assigned by the NC when creating a tool), tool size and tool status
are transferred.
If the position of the tool changes (e.g. from magazine to gripper...), the new positions must be
transferred to the tool management on the NC. Three function blocks FC6 (TM_TRANS2), FC7
(TM_REV) and FC8 (TM_TRANS) are provided for this purpose. The PLC programmer can call
these blocks and supply them with the required parameters.
FC18 is available if positioning is performed using an auxiliary axis of the controller.

Commissioning tool management

The precondition for commissioning the PLC is that the NC commissioning has been
completed. The machine data must be correctly and completely set and the magazine
configuration loaded. The basic program sets up the user interface (DB 71 ... DB 73, DB1071 ...
DB1073) when it boots. The information about this - i.e. which magazine, number of loading
points - is automatically entered by the NC. The automatically determined configuration is
optionally used or the configuration runs via data block DB4.

Note
If data blocks DB71...DB73 are already available, the basic program first automatically deletes
them, and then the new data blocks are set up.
Data blocks DB1071 - DB1073 are automatically set up by the basic program for the multitool.
This means that the blocks are also set up if the "Multitool" function has not been set using the
appropriate machine data.

Overview of data blocks

Block number Length in bytes Meaning

DB71 4 + 30 BYTE * B Interface for loading/unloading points
DB72 4 + 48 BYTE * W Interface for spindle as change position
DB73 4 + 44 BYTE * R Interface for tool turrets as change position
DB1071 20 BYTE * B Extended data for the multitool
DB1072 50 BYTE * W Extended data for the multitool
DB1073 50 BYTE * R Extended data for the multitool

Tool management
106 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

B = number of loading locations

W= number of spindles as change positions
R= number of turrets
DB71 to DB73 occupy approximately 550 bytes for simple configurations of magazines, buffers
and loading/unloading points.
There is one interface (data record) per data block for each loading/unloading point, spindle
and turret. The data blocks are assigned to the respective tasks.

DB71
DB71 (Page 123) assumes the functions of loading and unloading, positioning and relocating.
The relocating and positioning functions (no matter from which NC channel) are generally
mapped on the 1st interface.

DB72
DB72 (Page 128) is the interface for changing tools into the spindle. This change procedure
also includes preparation of the tool. (Setting: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1)

DB73
DB73 (Page 134) is the interface for tool changes with a circular magazine. (Setting:
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0)

DB1071
DB1071 (Page 139) Loading/unloading the multitool
Loading/unloading, relocating and positioning. The structure is analogous to DB 71.

DB1072
DB72 (Page 140) is the interface for changing tools into the spindle for multitool.

DB1073
DB1073 (Page 144) Loading/unloading with turret for multitool

Interfaces within DB71 to DB73

A bit field for the active/passive status of each interface is contained in bytes 0 and 1 of the
respective data block (DB71 to DB73). DBX 0.0 represents the first interface, DBX 0.1 the
second, etc. A total of 16 interfaces can be addressed. If one of these bits is set to the value =
1 by the tool management, the associated interface is activated. If set to 0, the interface may
not be processed by the user.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 107
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Principle of interfaces DB71-73

No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1

No. 16 No. 15 No. 14 No. 13 No. 12 No. 11 No. 10 No. 9
1st interface
2nd interface
....................................
14th interface
15th interface
16th interface

If the value = 1, the user must evaluate the commands at this interface and initiate the
necessary actions (e.g. position magazines, change tools, etc.). After activation, user
programmers can also write access this interface (e.g. in order to delete the "prepare change"
bit). Communication with the tool management is realized exclusively via FC8 or FC7 or FC6,
not via DB 71, 72, 73, ... (the only exception is the fast acknowledgement). For each change to
tool positions and/or status information of an interface request, FC8/FC6 should be called with
these modified values.

Further interfaces in the channel interfaces for the ToolMan function

DBD348 T number for tool pre-alarm limit

DBD352 T number for tool limit value
DBD356 T number of the new replacement tool
DBD360 T number of the last replacement tool

Change bits in DBB344

The information can be evaluated within one OB 1 cycle on the basis of a change bit. The PLC
can use this information to derive appropriate measures.

Note
The last replacement tool monitoring must be set in machine data
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Other signals are as follows:

Channel DB
Tool missing DBX317.7 from the NC
Do not disable tool (ignore disabled state) DBX29.7 to the NC
Deactivate wear monitoring DBX29.6 to the NC
Deactivate workpiece counter DBX29.5 to the NC
Activate time monitoring by PLC DBX1.3 to the NC
The function must be set in machine data
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

Tool management
108 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Additional interfaces in the NC interface (DB10) for the tool management function

DB10.DBX105.0 Abort of all tool commands in the NC

The signal is intended for commissioning. While the negative acknowledgment
(status 3) specifically interrupts a command, with DB10.DBX105.0, all NC com‐
mands are interrupted, i.e. in all channels.

See also
Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks (Page 122)

5.2.2 Jobs from the NC tool management

Overview

Tasks Interface Acknowledgement Applications, special features

Loading (Page 357) DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo = NewToolPlace = target destination of the
interface no. tool
NewToolMag = target magazine
OldToolPlace = No. of the loading or un‐
loading point
OldToolMag = 9999
or:
OldToolMag/OldToolPlace = 0
Status = 1
Unloading (Page 366) DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo = NewToolPlace = No. of the loading or un‐
interface no. loading point
NewToolMag = 9999
OldToolPlace = Location of the tool to be
unloaded.
OldToolMag = Magazine No. of the tool to
be unloaded (real or also buffer maga‐
zine)
or: OldToolMag/OldToolPlace = 0, status
=1
Relocating (Page 442) DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo= NewToolPlace = target position of the tool
1 NewToolMag = target magazine
OldToolPlace source location
OldToolMag = source magazine
Status = 1
Positioning (Page 445) DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo = Positioning on loading magazine accord‐
interface no. ing to interface number. Any positioning,
always via interface 1
NewToolPlace = LMG or BL
NewToolMag = 9999 or 9998
OldToolPlace = magazine location to be
positioned
OldToolMag = magazine to be positioned
Status = 5

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 109
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Tasks Interface Acknowledgement Applications, special features

Prepare change for tool DB72 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 2, TaskIdentNo = Position NewTL at change point, OldTL
in spindle interface no. remains in spindle. To complete status 1
in order that the change command can be
output.
OldToolPlace = BL (spindle)
NewToolPlace = NewTool location
Change in spindle DB72 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 2, TaskIdentNo = OldTool is unloaded (gripper or directly
interface no. into magazine), NewTool is loaded to
spindle. Status 1 required, so that part
program processing is continued.
NewToolPlace = BL (spindle)
OldToolPlace = OldTool location

Change with turret DB73 Normally FC7 or FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = When turret has finished swiveling, FC 7
3, TaskIdentNo = turret no. is called with turret No. As parameter
ChgdRevNo.

LMG: Loading point

BL: Buffer location
T: Tool
NewToolPlace: FC8/FC6 parameter NewToolMag, NewToolLoc
OldToolPlace: FC8/FC6 parameter OldToolMag, OldToolLoc

5.2.3 Asynchronous transfer

Position changes of tools without task from NC

Tasks Acknowledgement Applications, special features

Asynchronous transfer FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 4, General tool transport from the PLC
TaskIdentNo = channel no. NewToolMag/NewToolLoc = target
Status = 1 OldToolMag/OldToolLoc = source
Asynchronous transfer with location res‐ FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 5, Tool transport from PLC
ervation for tool transport from a real TaskIdentNo = channel no. NewToolMag/NewToolLoc = buffer
magazine into the buffer Status = 1 OldToolMag/OldToolLoc = source in the
real magazine
Asynchronous transfer without tool FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 4, Communicates the actual magazine po‐
movement to align the magazine posi‐ TaskIdentNo = channel no. sition (e.g. after turret cycles) to the NC
tion Status = 5 NewToolMag/NewToolLoc = actual lo‐
cation
OldToolMag/OldToolLoc = change or
loading point
Without NC command: Return OldTool FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 4, TaskIdentNo = The OldTool may need to be transferred
to magazine channel asynchronously to the location specified
in the prepare change command to
move the tool from the gripper back to
the magazine.

Tool management
110 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

5.2.4 Definitions of the acknowledgement status

Magazine identifier
Real magazines
The number range from 1 ...9997 is available for the real magazine, defined when generating
the magazine configuration (the numbering must not be ascending).
Buffer magazine
The buffer magazine always has the number 9998. The number of locations in the buffer
magazine is defined using the magazine configuration. The locations with the "spindle / tool
holder" identifier correspond to an interface.
Loading magazine
The loading magazine always has the number 9999. A magazine location corresponds to a
loading point (defined when generating the magazine configuration), every loading point
corresponds to an interface (loading point 1 = interface 1, etc.). Loading point 1 has a special
significance. Every relocation operation, unloading and loading a manual tool and manual
loading, unloading is generally managed via this as basis.
Status value 1 - 10
The status information 1 to 10 (upper limit 10) leads to the command being terminated. As a
consequence, the "active bit" of the interface is reset to 0 and the operation is completed.
Status value > 100
When acknowledging this status information (FC8/FC6), the "active" bit of the relevant interface
remains at "1". Further processing is required by the user program in the PLC (e.g. continuation
of magazine positioning). This item of status information is generally used to transfer changes
in position of one or both tools while the operation is still in progress.

Synchronization
There are various methods by which the PLC and NC can be synchronized. Synchronization is
forced by MD20310 $MC_ TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK using bits 5, 6, 7, 8 and 19. For
internal communication between the PLC and NC, the devices wait for acknowledgement after
each command. Two acknowledgement options are available:
● Transport acknowledgement
The transport acknowledgement indicates to the NC that the issued command has been
accepted by the basic PLC program. Before a new command is output, the system checks
whether the previous command was accepted. If this is not the case, no output is made. The
NC waits for the acknowledgement before a new command is output.
● End acknowledgement
Status feedback signal of the PLC for an NC command that has been accepted with
acknowledgement status 1, 10 or acknowledgement status 3.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 111
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Output of the command

Synchronization of the NC and PLC is implemented in three steps:
● The interpolation task from NC has prepared a command on the basis of the programming
and outputs this to the NC-internal image of the VDI interface.
● The NC-internal image of the VDI interface is transferred in the same cycle to the VDI.
● The basic PLC program accepts the command from the VDI interface.
7UDQVSRUWDFNQRZ
OHGJHPHQWJLYHQ"
7UDQVSRUWDFNQRZ
OHGJHPHQWJLYHQ"

&RPPDQG

&RPPDQG
,QWHUQDOWUDQVSRUW
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW &RPPDQG

7UDQVSRUW
DFNQRZ &RPPDQG
OHGJHPHQW
(QGDFNQRZOHGJH
PHQW

1& 1&LQWHUQDO9', %DVLF3/& 3/&XVHUSURJUDP

9',
,327$6. LPDJH SURJUDP

Figure 5-2 Transport and end acknowledgement

Acknowledgement of output commands

Acknowledgements from the basic PLC program and from the VDI are returned while the
command that has been output is being executed.
● The basic PLC program outputs the transport acknowledgement to the NC once the
command has been accepted.
● An NC-internal transport acknowledgement is issued after the internal VDI image has been
transmitted.
The PLC user program can only process one command at a time. It determines how long it
takes until a command is processed. If the NC provides the command faster than can be
processed by the PLC user program, then the NC is put into the waiting state.
The NC can also output commands which do not originate from the part program over the
interface. Included here are PI services that are synchronously superimposed over the part
program processing.

Tool management
112 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Completion of the command

Depending on how bits 5-8 and 19 of the MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MNAGEMENT_MASK are
set, the command output is considered to have been completed at various points in time.
● If bit 5 (or bit 6 for the secondary spindle) is set, the command output is completed when the
internal transport acknowledgement and the transport acknowledgement are available. The
command has been accepted by the basic PLC program.
● If bit 7 is set (or 8 for the secondary spindle), this means that the command output is only
completed when the end acknowledgement is received from the PLC.
● If the bits are not set, then the output of the command is considered as being completed
when the NC has output the command to the NC-internal VDI image. This is the default
setting.
Note
From the viewpoint of the tool-change command, the block change can take place as soon
as the NC has output the command.
The set bit 19 in conjunction with set bits 5-8 permit a block change to be prevented as long
as the extended acknowledgements are not present.

Changing the acknowledgement data

When acknowledging a command from the NC, the PLC can change the parameters of this
command in the acknowledgement data.
The following sequence is implemented to allow acknowledged commands from the PLC to be
assigned in the NC:
● Using the ID number in the acknowledgement command (this is tracked by the basic
program), the tool in the NC is determined.
● The data of the current tool location are obtained from the tool.
● This current tool location is checked against the address specified in the command.
● If this data does not match, then after the acknowledgement data of the PLC has been
checked, it is accepted in the NC data management.
● Acknowledgement of the command in the NC is continued.
Note
If the tool to be loaded at change is transported from the magazine to the tool holder in
multiple individual steps, the PLC acknowledgement number 105 applies.
With the PI command _N_TMMVTL or the analog NC command "MVTOOL", a tool in status
"being changed" cannot be moved.
The following applies for loading, relocating, reloading and positioning: The PLC must not
change the target positions specified by the NC for the NewTool as they have to be identical
with those in the NC.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 113
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Example 1
A tool is being prepared and already with the preparation is to be brought into gripper_1
(preparation). The change moves the new tool from gripper_1 to the spindle and moves the old
tool into gripper_2. This completes the change.
The NC command looks like this:
Bring the new tool (T No.6) from magazine_3, location_6 to the spindle and the old tool from the
spindle (9998/1) into magazine_3, location_11.
ID:00000/00000-------- CMD:00002
NewTool:
from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00006 Spindle: 00001
OldTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00003 P: 00011
As a result of this change sequence, this task is not executed like this. When acknowledging,
the PLC program must change the data shown in bold.
There are two options to do this:
Case_1
The PLC synchronously acknowledges the preparation command
ID:00000/00001-------- ACK:00002 St: 00001
NewTool:
from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00002
OldTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
Case_2
The PLC asynchronously transports the prepared tool to the gripper and now synchronously
acknowledges the preparation command to the end.
ID:00000/00001-------- ACK:00008 St: 00001
NewTool:
from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00002
OldTool:
from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
ID:00000/00002-------- ACK:00002 St: 00001
NewTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00002 to M: 09998 P: 00002
OldTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
In both cases, using the end acknowledgement, the NC checks the tool data acknowledged by
the PLC against the data in the command - and after an internal command assignment, corrects
the command data, in order that additional acknowledgements are made with valid data (new
tool located on 9998/2). The source file ("from") for the old tool and the new tool are managed
by the basic program, a change is not possible.

Tool management
114 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

See also
PLC function when unloading (Page 367)

5.2.5 Simplified acknowledgement of tool management commands

Overview
It is possible to acknowledge tool management commands via the user program with FC8/FC6
or FC7. For the standard acknowledgement with the end status per interface, there is a bit
available within DB71, DB72, DB73 which can be used to acknowledge the command using the
cyclic basic program. For this purpose, acknowledgement bits are defined in DB71, DB72,
DB73 in DBW2, which the user program must set to acknowledge an active command for one
PLC cycle. When the acknowledgement bit is set for the pending task, then end
acknowledgements are generated.
The acknowledgement parameters used are described in the following table:

Function New tool Old tool Status

Loading Target position (n+24, n+26) 0 1
Unloading 0 Specified loading point 1
Relocating Target position (n+24, n+26) 0 1 or 6
Positioning Target position (n+24, n+26) 0 5
Prepare change Actual position or 0 Actual position or 0 1
Change Target position (n+16, n+18) or 0 (for T0) Target position (n+24, n+26) 1
Change with preparation Target position (n+16, n+18) or 0 (for T0) Target position (n+24, n+26) 1
Change with turret Target position (n+16, n+18) or 0 (for T0) Target position (n+24, n+26) 1

If active commands with fault are to be acknowledged, this can also be realized using the
acknowledgement bit in DBW2. In addition, for the particular task, in DBX(n+1.0) the value 1
must be connected in parallel to set the acknowledgement bit. The acknowledgement
parameters are listed in the following table.
For DBX(n+1.0), n is the start address of the interface in the particular data block.

Function New tool Old tool Status

Loading Current position 0 3
Unloading 0 Current position 3
Relocating Current position 0 3
Positioning Current position 0 3
Prepare change Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3
Change Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3
Change with preparation Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3
Change with turret Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 115
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

When processing an acknowledgement using the acknowledgement bits, the

acknowledgement bit and also DBX(n+1.0) are automatically reset by the basic program.

Note
Before setting the acknowledgement bit, additional intermediate acknowledgements (with the
status > 100), are realized from the user program via the FC8/FC6 (e.g. re-storing in the
gripper).
Relocating
If a tool is relocated from the real magazine into the spindle or to a buffer location,
acknowledgement is with Status_6, i.e. the source location in the real magazine is reserved for
the tool. No tool or offset selection is connected to this.

5.2.6 Diagnostics for communication between NC and PLC

General
Communication between the NC and the PLC can be logged in a file as part of the tool change
procedure.

Note
The diagnostics data is saved with the reset or cancel key.

Precondition
● Bit 13 of MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK must be set.
● The trace is a ring buffer (_NTCTRA'xx'MPF, with 'xx' = channel number 01, 02, ...). Free
memory space must be available on the NC for saving the data. The number of files in the
file system must be below the maximum number of files.
● The trace size can be set using the machine data
$MN_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_BUFFER_SZ[Index] = number of commands
– Index 0 = buffer size of the IPO trace (prepare, change commands and
acknowledgements, asynchronous transfers).
– Index 1 = buffer size of the preparatory trace (commands and acknowledgements due to
PI services).
The Trace representation with index 0 also assumes the commands and
acknowledgements due to PI services. The trace file with index 1 is then irrelevant.

Tool management
116 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Example
Milling machine with a chain magazine, a spindle and double gripper (any tool is located on the
spindle)

T="Miller_30mm" - The tool remains at its location, after positioning the mag-
azine, the preparation is acknowledged with "end"
M06 Step 1 (is acknowledged with Status_105)
- Old tool comes from the spindle into Gripper_1
- New tool comes from the magazine into Gripper_2
Step 2 (is acknowledged with Status_1 (end))
- New tool comes from the Gripper_2 into the spindle
- Old tool comes from the Gripper_1 into the magazine

The recorded trace (TCTRA'xx'_MPF), looks like this:

ID:00002/00002 ------------ CMD:00002
NewTool: from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00006 Spindle: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00003 P: 00002
ID:00002/00003 ------------ ACK:00002 St: 00001
NewTool: from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 00003 P: 00006
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
ID:00003/00003 ------------ CMD:00003
NewTool: from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00006 Spindle: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00003 P: 00002
ID:00003/00004 ------------ ACK:00003 St: 00105
NewTool: from: M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00003
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00002
ID:00003/00005 ------------ ACK:00003 St: 00001
NewTool: from: M: 09998 P: 00003 to M: 09998 P: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00002 to M: 00003 P: 00002
Explanation
The ID number is used by the NC to assign acknowledgements. The first number specifies the
command ID of the output command. The second number specifies the command identification
with which the PLC had acknowledged the command.
Definition of command identification: Every command via the tool management interface from
the NC to the PLC is allocated a unique identification number. PLC (the basic program, not the
user program) acknowledges a command with this command number. This means that it is
possible to assign the acknowledged command to the command that was output.
Every NC command (CMD) has the following structure:
1. The command ID (this is incremented at each command output)
2. The command no. (CMD preparation, change, ...)
3. The transport for the tool to be loaded at change (from - to)
4. The internal T No. of the tool to be loaded at change
5. The number of the requesting spindle or tool holder
6. The transport for the tool to be replaced (from - to)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 117
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Every PLC acknowledgement (ACK) has the following structure:

1. From the ID No. The ID of the NC is returned + a PLC ID
2. The command no. (NC sends a CMD:00002, PLC responds with an ACK:00002)
3. The acknowledgement status (see FC8/FC6 description)
4. The transport for the tool to be loaded at change (from - to)
5. The transport for the tool to be replaced (from - to)

List of values and meanings for CMD and ACK

CMD Explanation
1 A tool is transported from ... to ... . Loading, unloading, relocating, positioning.
2 Tool change is to be prepared (setting MD22550 = 1)
3 Tool change is to be executed (setting MD22550 = 1)
4 Tool change is to be prepared and carried out (setting MD 22550 = 0)
5 Tool change is to be prepared and carried out (setting MD 22550 = 1)

ACK Explanation
1 Tool is/was transported. Loading, unloading, relocating, positioning.
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 1
2 Tool is/was prepared (setting MD22550 = 1)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 2
3 Tool is/was executed (setting MD22550 = 1)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 2
4 Tool change is/was prepared (setting MD22550 = 0)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 3
5 Tool change is/was prepared (setting MD22550 = 1)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 2
7 Terminate canceled tool command
DB10.DBX105.0=1
8 Tool was transported. If a tool is present at the source address, its data is transported to the target address.
Otherwise, only the current magazine position is changed. If the tool transport is from a real magazine, the location
to which the source address points is reserved.
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 5
9 Tool was transported. If a tool is present at the source address, its data is transported to the target address.
Otherwise, only the current magazine position is changed.
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 4

Tool management
118 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

5.2.7 Function blocks

Overview

Block number Meaning

FC6 (Page 151) Transfer blocks for the tool management, call at position and status changes FC
FC8 (Page 155) 6 is required for the "multitool" function. The block corresponds to the FC8. It has
an additional parameter "MultitoolPosition". The FC6 includes the complete
FC8 functionality, so that the FC6 can completely replace the FC8.
FC7 (Page 152) Transfer block for tool change with turret

All function blocks are described in: /FB1/ P3, Basic PLC Program

Additional PLC services

In addition to the function blocks given above, there are further PLC services available for more
complex requirements on the part of the PLC user program to influence tool management.
These services are possible using FB2, FB3, FB4 and FB7 (read and write variables or PI
services). A description of these function blocks is part of the basic PLC program description.
The PI services (program instances) of the tool management are also described in the basic
PLC program description regarding FB4 and FB7. The tool management variables are
described in the lists in the section on variables.

5.2.8 Sample programs

Overview
The following example shows the various blocks that are helpful for acknowledging with basic
tool management functions.
● User block FC150
● Data block DB150
● OB1
User block FC150 must be cyclically called via a call command from the organization block. The
function block contains the various networks that are necessary to acknowledge the functions
Load, Unload, Relocate or Position.
Data block DB150 contains the structure that is used to reference the various variables of the
interface (e.g. DB71).

Example user data block DB150

Example: Definition of a data block DB150

Address Name Type Initial value Comment

+0.0 task BYTE B#16#0 TaskIdent

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 119
PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

+1.0 no BYTE B#16#0 TaskID-No

+2.0 magnew INT 0 New tool, current magazine
+4.0 locnew INT 0 New tool, current location
+6.0 magold INT 0 Old tool, current magazine
+8.0 locold INT 0 Old tool, current location
+10.0 stat INT 0 Status information
+12.0 multitool INT 0 Multitool location
+14.0 error INT 0 Error information
+16.0 start BOOL FALSE Start
+16.1 ready BOOL FALSE FC6 ready
+18.0 rec_magnew INT 0 New tool, saved magazine
+20.0 rec_locnew INT 0 New tool, saved Location
+22.0 rec_magold INT 0 Old tool, saved magazine
+24.0 rec_locold INT 0 Old tool, saved Location
=26.0 END_STRUCT

Tool management
120 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.2 PLC description

Example user function FC150

The following example shows an excerpt from a user function (STL). The data is buffered in
DB150.

Sample program "Load magazine"

.....
......
NETWORK TITLE = Acknowledgement loading interface 2
U E 86.0; //acknowledgement is done here via the terminal E 86.0
U DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 2 active
U DB71.DBX 34.0; //Loading active
FP M 150.0;
SPBN M100;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 2
L DB71.DBW 58;
T DB150.DBW 1; //Target magazine for loading
L DB71.DBW 60;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target location for loading
L 0;
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M100: NOP 0;
.....
//Definition of the transfer via FC6
NETWORK TITLE =Tool management status transfer
CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TaskID := DB150.DBB 0,
......

See also
Function of the PLC when loading? (Page 359)
PLC function when unloading (Page 367)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 121
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

5.3.1 Overview of the blocks

Overview of data blocks

The table below shows an overview of the data blocks used for data management.

DB71 For loading/unloading points

DB1071 Extended data for multitools
DB72 For spindle as change position
DB1072 Extended data for multitools
DB73 For turret as change position
DB1073 Extended data for multitools
DB74 Internal data block of basic program for tool management.

1. There is a separate interface area in DB71 for each loading point configured in the magazine
configuration. The interface area for loading point 1 generally has the task of loading into the
spindle.
Relocation- and positioning tasks are always handled via loading point_1 (spindle loading
point).
2. DB72 contains a separate interface area for every spindle defined in the tool management
function.
3. A separate interface area is provided in DB73 for each turret of the magazine configuration.
The turret numbers are numbered without any gaps from the lowest up to the highest
magazine number.
4. Data for multitools is available in data blocks DB1071, DB1072 and DB1073 (analog to
DB71, DB72 and DB73 loading and unloading, spindle change positions, turret).
All interfaces are designed for receiving tool-management commands (load, tool change, ...).
Basic program blocks FC6 (multitool), FC7 and FC 8 are used to communicate the current
positions of tools.
One of the interfaces is updated by the NC via the basic program after a command (e.g. by
operating the function "Load" or by part program function "Tool change").

Note
If the configuration is changed (number of spindles, loading/unloading points, number of
magazines and numbers, ...), the PLC must also be adapted.
This happens automatically on the next Power On or when DB4 is changed. On the next restart,
the basic PLC program automatically clears DB71 ... DB73, DB1071 ... 1073, DB74 and creates
the blocks again.

Tool management
122 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Overview of the transfer blocks

FC6 Block FC6 "TM_TRANS2" is used for position changes of the tools, status changes, and multitool.
FC7 Block FC7 "TM_REV" is used for tool changing on a turret.
FC8 Block FC8 "TM_TRANS" is used for position changes of the tools and status changes.

5.3.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

DB71 Signals of loading/unloading points

Data block NC -> PLC interface
BYTE Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Interfaces
DBB0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB2 Ackn INT 8 Ackn INT 7 Ackn INT 6 Ackn INT 5 Ackn INT 4 Ackn INT 3 Ackn INT 2 Ackn INT 1
DBB3 Ackn INT 16 Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT 9
15 14 13 12 11 10
DBB(n+0) Res. Position a Position Position a Relocating Unloading Loading
multitool with an NC magazine
program
DBB(n+1) Data in the Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Acknowl‐
extended edgement
range status = 3
(DB 1071)
DBB(n+2) Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBB(n+3) Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DBB(n+4) Reserved
DBD(n+8) Reserved
DBD(n+12) Reserved
DBW(n+16) Identifier for loading/unloading point (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBW(n+18) Location no. of loading/unloading point (Int)
DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBW(n+22) Location no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBW(n+26) Location no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBW(n+28) Loading/
unloading with‐
out moving
magazine
DBW(n+29) Spare

Starting addresses of loading/unloading points:

Loading/unloading point 1: n = 4
Loading/unloading point 2: n = 34
Loading/unloading point 3: n = 64

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 123
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Loading/unloading point 4: n = 94
...
Loading/unloading point 16:...
Example of calculating address DBWn+24 (magazine no. target)
n=(m-1)*len+4 m = location no. of loading station/point
len = 30 (length of loading point)
m = 2; len = 30 n= (2-1)*30+4 --> n = 34
DBW (34+24) = DBW 58
Address for magazine no. Target of 2nd loading point is DBW 58.
Loading point 1 is intended for loading/unloading in all spindles. Loading point is also used to
relocate/position tools in any location (e.g. buffer location).

DB71.DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interface 1 - 16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1 The active interface has a valid data record. A task bit has been set
in DBB(n+0). There are 16 interfaces. Address "n" must always be
calculated for the active interface.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC8 or FC6.

DB71.DBX2.0 - 3.7 "auto" acknowledgement of interface 1 - 16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the pending command is acknowl‐
edged with status_1. Unless it is a relocation operation from a real
magazine to a buffer. Then acknowledgement is with status_6. This
reserves the source location.
For example
U DB71.DBX0.0
U DB71.DBX4.1 (unloading)
S DB71.DBX2.0
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.

DB71.DBX(n+0).0 Command: Loading

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Loading operation for a tool is initiated. The magazine location into
which the tool is to be loaded is defined in DBW(n+26). The loading
point in question is the location number of the loading point. It is also
located in DBW(n+18)
Corresponding to... DB71.DBX(n+16) and (n+18) and (n+26)

Tool management
124 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB71.DBX(n+0).1 Command: Unloading

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Unloading operation is initiated for a tool; the magazine location
from which it is to be unloaded is in DBW (n+20) and DBW (n+22).
The number of the unloading point is in DBW(n+18).
Corresponding to... DB71.DBX(n+16) and (n+18) or (n+20) and (n+22)

DB71.DBX(n+0).2 Command: Relocating

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Relocate operation for a tool is initiated. From magazine/location (n
+20, n+22=source) to magazine/location (n+24, n+26=target)

Note
The bits in DBB(n+0) (loading, unloading,....) are not updated by the basic program until a new
task exists for this interface. They are current only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0 is
set to "1''. If required, the user can reset bits DBB(n+0).

DB71.DBX(n+0).3 Command: Positioning to the loading point

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning A magazine location is to be positioned at the loading point (maga‐
zine no. 9999). The magazine location that is to be moved to the
loading point is in DB71.DBW(n+20) and (n+22). The loading point
is in DB71.DBWn+18.

DB71.DBX(n+0).4 Command: Task comes from the NC program

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The signal is set if the task is received from the part program or via
a cycle.
1. Positioning task with the language command POSM
2. A relocation task or tool transport using the language command
MVTOOL
3. Positioning a multitool using the language command POSMT

DB71.DBX(n+0).5 Command: Position a multitool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Positioning a multitool has been initiated.
This can be realized using a language command, PI service or the
HMI user interface.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 125
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB71.DBX(n+1).0 "auto" ackn negative

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set,
then the auto acknowledge is negative, i.e. with status_3.

DB71.DBX(n+1).7 Command: Data in the extended range

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The signal is set if a multitool is loaded, unloaded or positioned. The
multitool data are then available in DB1071.

DB71.DBB(n+2) Assigned channel

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Number of the channel for which the active interface is valid.

DB71.DBB(n+3) Tool management no.

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Associated tool management number; corresponds to the number of
the TO area.

DB71.DBW(n+16) Identifier for loading/unloading point (fixed value 9999)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The identifier for the loading/unloading point is fixed to the value
9999.

DB71.DBW(n+18) Location no. of the loading/unloading point

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The location no. of the loading/unloading point is displayed.

DB71.DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Unloading: Magazine from which the tool is to be unloaded
Relocating: Magazine from which the tool comes
Positioning: Magazine that is to be positioned
Corresponding to... DBW(n+22)

Tool management
126 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB71.DBW(n+22) Location no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Unloading: Location from which the tool is to be unloaded
Relocating: Location from where the tool comes
Positioning: Location that should be positioned
Corresponding to... DBW(n+20)

DB71.DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Loading: Magazine into which the tool is to be loaded
Relocating: Magazine into which the tool comes
Positioning: Magazine to be positioned to
Tool remains in the original magazine
Only meaningful for interface 1. If values other than 0 are entered
here, the data define the magazine or location for positioning (lan‐
guage command POSM).
Corresponding to... DBW(n+26)

DB71.DBW(n+26) Location no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Loading: Location into which the tool is to be loaded
Relocating: Location into which the tool comes
Positioning: Location to be positioned to
Tool remains at the original location
Only meaningful for interface 1. If values other than 0 are entered
here, the data define the magazine or location for positioning (lan‐
guage command POSM).
Corresponding to... DBW(n+24)

DB71.DBX(n+28) Bit0 Loading/unloading without moving magazine

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning HMI / Jobshop sets/deletes this signal when requested by the oper‐
ator. If the bit is active, there must be no traversing motion of the
magazine, only a mechanical unlocking/locking of the location. The
loading/unloading command must be acknowledged after the ac‐
tion. For a positioning and relocating request, this signal is not valid
for a traversing movement.

See also
Interfaces (Page 106)
PLC function when unloading (Page 367)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 127
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

5.3.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72 Spindle as change position

data block Interface NC -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Interfaces
DBB0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB2 Ackn INT 8 Ackn INT 7 Ackn INT 6 Ackn INT 5 Ackn INT 4 Ackn INT 3 Ackn INT 2 Ackn INT 1
DBB3 Ackn INT 16 Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT 9
15 14 13 12 11 10
DBB(n+0) Tool remains Unload Load man‐ OldTool in T0 Prepare Change Obligatory
in spindle manual tool ual tool BL no. (n change tool (initi‐ change
+42) ated by
M06)
DBB(n+1) Data in the Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Acknowl‐
extended edgement
range (DB status = 3
1072)
DBB(n+2) Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBB(n+3) Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DBD(n+4) $P_VDITCP[0]
User-definable parameter 0 (DWord)
DBD(n+8) $P_VDITCP[1]
User-definable parameter 1 (DWord)
DBD(n+12) $P_VDITCP[2]
User-definable parameter 2 (DWord)
DBW(n+16) Buffer identifier (Int), (fixed value 9998)
corresponds to "Target position for new tool"
DBW(n+18) Relative location (target) in buffer magazine (Int)
DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (Source) for new tool (Int)
DBW(n+22) Location no. (Source) for new tool (Int)
DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (Target) for old tool (Int)
DBW(n+26) Location no. (Target) for old tool (Int)
DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type (Int)
DBW(n+30) New tool: Size on left (Int)
DBW(n+32) New tool: Size on right (Int)
DBW(n+34) New tool: Size at top (Int)
DBW(n+36) New tool: Size at bottom (Int)
DBB(n+38) Tool status for new tool
Tool was Tool fixed- Tool is be‐ Prewarn‐ Measure Tool disa‐ Tool ena‐ Active tool
in use location- ing ing limit tool bled bled
coded changed reached
DBB(n+39) Tool status for new tool
Manual 1:1 ex‐ Master tool Tool to be Tool to be Disabled, Identifier for
tool change loaded unloaded but ignore tools in the buf‐
fer

Tool management
128 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB72 Spindle as change position

data block Interface NC -> PLC
DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T number
DBW(n+42) If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then the buffer location of the old tool must be entered here
DBW(n+44) Original magazine of new tool
DBW(n+46) Original location of the new tool

Start address of the spindle:

Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
...
Spindle 16:...
n = (m-1)*len + 4
m = location number of the change position
len = 48

Note
If only M06 is programmed, only free parameters, channel, tool management number and the
bit for "Perform change" are updated.

DB72.DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interface 1 - 16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid data record, a tool change request
of tool preparation has been initiated.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC 8/FC 6.

DB72.DBX2.0-3.7 "auto" acknowledgement of interface 1-16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the pending command is acknowl‐
edged with status_1.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.

DB72.DBX(n+0).0 Command code: Obligatory change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The new tool is fixed-location-coded.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 129
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB72.DBX(n+0).1 Command code: Perform change with M06

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning M06 command was programmed for tool change, the tool change
can now take place

DB72.DBX(n+0).2 Command code: Prepare change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Prepare new tool for change. If necessary, move location for old tool
to spindle.

DB72.DBX(n+0).3 Command code: T0

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Indicates that T0 has been programmed (no-load traversing of spin‐
dle).

DB72.DBX(n+0).4 Command code: Old tool in buffer

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The buffer number of the tool to be changed is written in DB72.DBW
(n+42)

DB72.DBX(n+0).5 Command code: Load manual tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning A manual tool is to be loaded. The HMI displays the tool which is to
be loaded.

DB72.DBX(n+0).6 Command code: Unload manual tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The tool is to be changed via manual operation.

DB72.DBX(n+0).7 Command code: Tool remains in spindle

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The bit is set at change from spindle to spindle. Initiated, e.g. by
reset and start mode or block search.

Note
The bit in DBB (n+0).2 (prepare change) is not reset by the system with a change command.
The bits in DBB(n+0) ... are current only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0 is set to "1''.
However, the user can reset the bits when required.
If DBX(n+0).1 and DBX(n+0).2 are present at the same time, it means that T and M06 were
programmed in one block.

Tool management
130 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB72.DBX(n+1).0 "auto" ackn negative

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set,
the AUTO acknowledge is negative, i.e. with status_3.

DB72.DBX(n+1).7 Command: Data in the extended range

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The signal is set if a tool is prepared in a multitool or is loaded into
a multitool. DB 72 contains the data of the multitool, the data of the
selected tool is available in DB 1072.
For T0 the signal is not set.

DB72.DBB(n+2) Assigned channel

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Number of channel for which active interface applies.

DB72.DBB(n+3) Tool management no.

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Associated tool management no. (TO area).

DB72.DBD(n+4) User-definable parameter 0 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[0];. Values are trans‐
ferred at T call.

DB72.DBD(n+8) User-definable parameter 1 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[1];.

DB72.DBD(n+12) User-definable parameter 2 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[2]

DB72.DBW(n+16) Buffer magazine no. (fixed value 9998)

Target position for new tool
Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Magazine no. 9998 (buffer magazine); target magazine for new tool.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 131
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB72.DBW(n+18) Location in buffer magazine (spindle)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location no. of buffer magazine to which the new tool must be loa‐
ded. This is normally the spindle. The location number defined for
this particular buffer during commissioning is output.

DB72.DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (source) for new tool to be loaded

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning No. of magazine from which the new spindle tool comes.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+22)

DB72.DBW(n+22) Location no. (source) for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location no. of the magazine from which the new spindle tool
comes.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+20)

DB7.2DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (target) for old tool to be removed

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Number of magazine in which the tool to be removed at change will
be placed.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+26)

DB72.DBW(n+26) Location no. (target) for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Magazine location for tool that is unloaded at change.

DB72.DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The location type of the new spindle tool is entered here.
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom.

DB72.DBW(n+30) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size left in half locations for the new spindle
tool.

Tool management
132 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB72.DBW(n+32) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size right in half locations for the new spin‐
dle tool.

DB72.DBW(n+34) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size top in half locations for the new spindle
tool.

DB72.DBW(n+36) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size bottom in half locations for the new
spindle tool.

DB72.DBW(n+38) Tool status for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Tool disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool is being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool

DB72.DBW(n+40) New tool: internal T number of NC

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Display of internal T number of NC for the new spindle tool.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 133
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB72.DBW(n+42) Buffer location of old tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning If DB72.(n+0.4) = 1, the buffer location of the old tool must be en‐
tered here. This can be any buffer (also a gripper).

DB72.DBW(n+44) Original magazine of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Owner magazine of the new tool
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMN[T no.]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper) then the mag‐
azine no. is entered here from where the tool originally came.

DB72.DBW(n+46) Original location of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Owner location of the new tool
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMLN[T no.]

5.3.4 Interface for turrets as change position

DB73 Turret as change position

data block Interface NC -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Interfaces
DBB0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB2 Ackn INT 8 Ackn INT 7 Ackn INT 6 Ackn INT 5 Ackn INT 4 Ackn INT 3 Ackn INT 2 Ackn INT 1
DBB3 Ackn INT 16 Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT 9
15 14 13 12 11 10
DBB(n+0) Res. Unload Res. Res. T0 Res. Perform Obligatory
manual tool change, ini‐ change
tiation: T
no.
DBB(n+1) Data in the Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Acknowl‐
extended edgement
range status = 3
(DB1073)
DBB(n+2) Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBB(n+3) Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DBD(n+4) $P_VDITCP[0]
User-definable parameter 0 (DWord)

Tool management
134 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB73 Turret as change position

data block Interface NC -> PLC
DBD(n+8) $P_VDITCP[1]
User-definable parameter 1 (DWord)
DBW(n+12) $P_VDITCP[2]
User-definable parameter 2 (DWord)
DBW(n+16) Reserved
DBW(n+18) Reserved
DBW(n+20) Magazine no. of turret (Int)
DBW(n+22) Location no. of new tool (Int)
DBW(n+24) Reserved
DBW(n+26) Location no. of old tool (Int)
DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type (Int)
DBW(n+30) New tool: Size on left (Int)
DBW(n+32) New tool: Size on right (Int)
DBW(n+34) New tool: Size at top (Int)
DBW(n+36) New tool: Size at bottom (Int)
DBB(n+38) Tool status for new tool
Tool was Tool, fixed- Tool being Prewarn‐ Measure Tool disa‐ Tool ena‐ Active tool
in use location- changed ing limit tool bled bled
coded reached
DBB(n+39) Tool status for new tool
Manual 1:1 ex‐ Master tool Tool to be Tool to be Disabled, Identifier for
tool change loaded unloaded but ignore tools in the buf‐
fer
DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T no. of NC (Int)
DBW(n+42) Original location of new tool in this circular magazine

Start address of the turret:

Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
...
Turret 16:...
n = (m-1)*len + 4
m = location no. of the change position
len = 44
Example for change position 3: n = (3-1)*44 + 4 = 2*44 + 4= 88 + 4 = 92

DB73.DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interfaces 1-16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid data record.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC7.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 135
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB73.DBX2.0 - 3.7 "auto" acknowledgement of interface 1-16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the pending command is acknowl‐
edged with status_1.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.

DB73.DBX (n+0).0 Command: Obligatory change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1
Signal state 0
Corresponding to ... Position of participating tools

DB73.DBX(n+0).1 Command: Perform change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Execute tool change

DB73.DBX(n+0).3 T0
Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Indicates that T0 has been programmed

DB73.DBX(n+1).0 "auto" ackn negative

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set,
the AUTO acknowledge is negative, i.e. with status_3.

DB73.DBX(n+1).7 Command: Data in the extended range

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The signal is set if a tool is loaded into a multitool. DB 73 contains
the data of the multitool, the data of the selected tool is available in
DB 1073.
For T0 the signal is not set.

DB73.DBB(n+2) Assigned channel

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Number of channel from which the T word was programmed.

DB73.DBB(n+3) Tool management number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Associated tool management number (TO area) of channel.

Tool management
136 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Note
The bits in DBB(n+0) (obligatory change, execute change, ...) are not reset by the system. They
are current only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0 is set to "1''. However, the bits can
be reset by the user if necessary.

DB73.DBD(n+4) User-definable parameter 0 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[0] = value. Parame‐
ters 0-2 are transferred with the T command.

DB73.DBD(n+8) User-definable parameter 1 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[1] = value.

DB73.DBD(n+12) User-definable parameter 2 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[2] = value.

DB73.DBW(n+20) Magazine no. of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Magazine no. of the new tool, which should be processed.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+22)

DB73.DBW(n+22) Location no. of new tool to be loaded at change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location no. of the new tool, which should be processed.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+20)

DB73.DBW(n+26) Location no. of old tool to be unloaded

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location no. of the old tool (used up to now for machining).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 137
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB73.DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning The location type of the new tool is entered here.
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

DB73.DBW(n+30) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size left in half locations for the new tool.

DB73.DBW(n+32) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size right in half locations for the new tool

DB73.DBW(n+34) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size top in half locations for the new tool

DB73.DBW(n+36) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size bottom in half locations for the new tool

DB73.DBW(n+38) Tool status for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool

Tool management
138 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB73.DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T no. of NC

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Display of internal T no. of NC for the new tool. Tool management
variables can be read/written via FB2/FB3 using this T no.

DB73.DBW(n+42) Original location of new tool in this circular magazine

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location that owns the new tool. Corresponds to NC variables
$A_MYMLN[T no.]

5.3.5 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (multitool) (DB1071)

DB1071 Magazine, loading/unloading (multitool)

Data block NC -> PLC interface
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBW(n+0) Distance coding
DBW(n+2) Multitool location number
DBD(n+4) Multitool distance
DBW(n+8) Multitool number
DBW(n+10) Multitool location number
DBW(n+12) Tool holder
DBW(n+14) Reserved
DBW(n+16) Reserved
DBW(n+18) Reserved

Starting address of loading/unloading points:

Loading/unloading point 1: n = 0
Loading/unloading point 2: n = 20
Loading/unloading point 3: n = 40
Loading/unloading point 4: n = 60
...
Loading/unloading point 16:...

DB1071.DBW(n+0) Distance coding

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to
$TC_MTP_KD)
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 139
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1071.DBW(n+2) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Number of locations of the multitool

DB1071.DBD(n+4) Multitool location distance

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference
location (real value). In accordance with the distance coding

DB1071.DBW(n+8) Multitool number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Internal T number of the multitool

DB1071.DBW(n+10) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location number within the multitool (which the system positions to)

DB1071.DBW(n+12) Tool holder

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Spindle or tool holder number

5.3.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB1072)

DB1072 Spindle (multitool)

Data block Interface NC -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBW(n+0) Distance coding
DBW(n+2) Multitool location number
DBD(n+4) Multitool distance
DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)
DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)
DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)
DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)
DBW(n+16) Location type
DBW(n+18) Tool size, left
DBW(n+20) Tool size, right
DBW(n+22) Tool size, top
DBW(n+24) Tools size, bottom
DBW(n+26) Tool status

Tool management
140 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1072 Spindle (multitool)

Data block Interface NC -> PLC
DBW(n+28) T number of the tool
DBW(n+30) Tool holder
DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool
DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool
DBW(n+36) Reserved
to
DBW(n+48)

Start addresses of the spindles:

Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100
...
Spindle 16: ...

DB1072.DBW(n+0) Distance coding

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to
$TC_MTP_KD)
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle

DB1072.DBW(n+2) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Number of locations of the multitool.

DB1072.DBD(n+4) Multitool location distance

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference
location (real value). In accordance with the distance coding.

DB1072.DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Internal T number of the (new) multitool.

DB1072.DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location number within the multitool where the new tool is located.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 141
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1072.DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Internal T number of the (old) multitool.
The T number is entered here if the preparation or the change to a
tool is realized within the same multitool (which, due to a previous
change, is located on the tool holder). It is identical with
DB1072.DBW(n+8).

DB1072.DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location number within the multitool where the old tool is located.
The location number - where the old tool is located - is entered here
if the preparation or the change to a tool is realized within the same
multitool (which, due to a previous change, is located on the tool
holder).

DB1072.DBW(n+16) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location type of the new tool (of the programmed tool in the multi‐
tool).
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

DB1072.DBW(n+18) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the left in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1072.DBW(n+20) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the right in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1072.DBW(n+22) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the top in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1072.DBW(n+24) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Signal state 1 Specification of the tool size to the bottom in half locations of the
new tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

Tool management
142 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1072.DBW(n+26) Tool status for new tool:

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Tool status of the programmed tool in the multitool.
Corresponds to parameter $TC_TP8[T_No]
Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Tool disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool is being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool

DB1072.DBW(n+28) New tool: internal T number of NC

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Display of internal T number of NC for the new spindle tool (of the
programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1072.DBW(n+30) Tool holder

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Spindle or tool holder number to which the change refers (the mul‐
titool that is to be changed).

DB1072.DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled

Meaning Magazine that owns the new tool.
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMN[T no.]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper), the number of
the magazine from which the tool originally came is entered here.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 143
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1072.DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled

Meaning Location that owns the new tool.
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMLNT[T no.]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper), the number of
the magazine from which the tool originally came is entered here.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.

5.3.7 Interface for turret (multitool) (DB1073)

DB1073 Turret (multitool)

Data block Interface NC -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBW(n+0) Distance coding
DBW(n+2) Multitool location number
DBD(n+4) Multitool distance
DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)
DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)
DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)
DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)
DBW(n+16) Location type
DBW(n+18) Tool size, left
DBW(n+20) Tool size, right
DBW(n+22) Tool size, top
DBW(n+24) Tools size, bottom
DBW(n+26) Tool status
DBW(n+28) T number of the tool
DBW(n+30) Tool holder
DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool
DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool
DBW(n+36) Reserved
to
DBW(n+48)

Start addresses of the turrets:

Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50

Tool management
144 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Spindle 3: n = 100
...
Spindle 16:...

DB1073.DBW(n+0) Distance coding

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to
$TC_MTP_KD)
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle

DB1073.DBW(n+2) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Number of locations of the multitool

DB1073.DBD(n+4) Multitool location distance

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference
location (real value). In accordance with the distance coding.

DB1073.DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Internal T number of the (new) multitool

DB1073.DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location number within the multitool where the new tool is located.

DB1073.DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Internal T number of the (old) multitool.
The T number is entered here if the preparation or the change to a
tool is realized within the same multitool (which, due to a previous
change, is located on the tool holder). It is identical with
DB1072.DBW(n+8).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 145
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1073.DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location number within the multitool where the old tool is located.
The location number - where the old tool is located - is entered here
if the preparation or the change to a tool is realized within the same
multitool (which, due to a previous change, is located on the tool
holder).

DB1073.DBW(n+16) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Location type of the new tool (of the programmed tool in the multi‐
tool).
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

DB1073.DBW(n+18) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the left in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1073.DBW(n+20) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the right in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1073.DBW(n+22) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the top in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1073.DBW(n+24) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the bottom in half locations of the
new tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool).

Tool management
146 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1073.DBW(n+26) Tool status for new tool:

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Tool status of the programmed tool in the multitool
Corresponds to parameter $TC_TP8[T_No]
Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Tool disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool is being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool

DB1073.DBW(n+28) New tool: internal T number of NC

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Display of internal T number of NC for the new spindle tool (of the
programmed tool in the multitool).

DB1073.DBW(n+30) Tool holder

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning Spindle or tool holder number to which the change refers (the mul‐
titool that is to be changed).

DB1073.DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled

Meaning Magazine that owns the new tool.
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMN[T no.]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper), the number of
the magazine from which the tool originally came is entered here.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 147
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB1073.DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled

Meaning Location that owns the new tool.
Corresponds to NC variables $A_MYMLNT[T no.]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer magazine (e.g. gripper), the number of
the magazine from which the tool originally came is entered here.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.

5.3.8 Interface NC channels

Signals are also contained in the channel data blocks for tool management functions. The data
relevant for tool management is in bold formatting.

DB21-30 Signals to/from NC channel

Data block Interface PLC -> NC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBB1 Activate PLC action CLC over‐ CLC stop Time moni‐ Synchron‐ Release Activate ref‐
program completed ride toring active ized action protection erencing
test off areas
DBB29 Tool disa‐ Disable Deactivate Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
ble not ef‐ wear moni‐ workpiece PTP traver‐ fixed feed 4 fixed feed 3 fixed feed 2 fixed feed 1
fective toring counter sal
Cyclic signals from NC channel
DBB317 Tool miss‐ PTP traver‐ External
ing sal active language
mode active
Change signals TM functions
DBB344 Last re‐ Transition Tool pre‐ Tool pre-
placement to new re‐ warning lim‐ warning lim‐
tool of the placement it reached it reached
tool group tool
Transferred tool management functions
DBD348 T number for tool management prewarning limit (DInt)
DBD352 T number for tool limit value (DInt)
DBD356 T number of new replacement tool (DInt)
DBD360 T number of last replacement tool (DInt)

DB21.DBX1.3 The user can start and stop tool life monitoring time using PLC signal "Time monitor active". The effec‐
tiveness of this control is set via MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 17.

Tool management
148 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

DB21.DBX29.5 Switches workpiece count monitoring on/off.

DB21.DBX29.6 Switches wear monitoring on/off.

DB21.DBX29.7 VDI signal "Tool disable ineffective" (bit value=1) means that the NC does not process the tool status
"Disabled" during tool search.
The signal is not effective, if the tool selection is realized using the Init blocks (Reset- and
Start_Mode_Mask). If, for instance, it is to be possible to select a disabled spindle tool, then this must be
set in machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE.

DB21.DBX317.7 Display in PLC that the programmed tool is missing. (Tool is either not available or cannot be used.)

DB21.DBX 344.0 - 344.3 Modification signals of the tool management functions

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: job-controlled
Meaning A T number for tool prewarning limit, limit value, new replacement
tool, last replacement tool has been output with a value at the in‐
terface at the beginning of an OB1 cycle together with the associ‐
ated modification signal. In this case, the change signal indicates
that the appropriate value is valid.

5.3.9 Interface magazine configuration

DB4 Interface HMI -> PLC

Address Meaning Data type
DBB64 Number of magazines including buffer magazines BYTE
and loading magazines
< Beginning of rerun loop; number of reruns from
DB4.DBB64
DBW65 (70, 75, ...) Magazine number INT
DBB67 (...) Magazine type BYTE
DBW68 (...) Number of locations INT
> Return loop end
Address = Number of spindles BYTE
(contents DBB64*5) +65

Checks during run-up

During run-up, the NC checks the magazine configuration in all channels and transfers the
magazine description via the VDI interface directly to the basic PLC program.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 149
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

The following sequence is defined:

● Is the magazine description from the NC available (and no entry in DB4)?
This is used and set up accordingly; the magazine description is NOT copied to DB4.
● Is a magazine description available in DB4?
– This is used and the user interface set up accordingly.
This means that the entry in DB4 has priority. This ensures full compatibility.
● If there is neither a magazine description from the NC nor one in DB4, the user interface is
set-up with the maximum configuration (16 interfaces each).

5.3.10 Delete pending tasks

General
The communication initiated by the NC yet interrupted by the PLC task "Delete pending task"
(DB10.DBX105.0) can be terminated by the PLC during commissioning.

DB10 General signals

Data block
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBB105 Cancel TM
GP -> PLC command

The function cancels all pending tool management tasks from the NC (compare NC switch-on).
The NC tool management is reset in a defined manner. This is intended to be a pure
commissioning function. If a command must be cancelled in regular operation, then this is done
using FC8/FC6 and acknowledgement status "3" (negative acknowledgement).
This function enables direct intervention by the operator to, for example, take a tool out of the
gripper where a change is just about to take place, or if there is no acknowledgement from the
PLC program.

Note
Please ensure that the data consistency in the NC is maintained.

Boundary condition
The "Delete pending task" function can be activated only if the NC is in the "Channel not active"
state.

Tool management
150 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

5.3.11 FC6: TM_TRANS2 - transfer block for tool management and multitool

Function
The block FC6 "TM_TRANS2" is used for position changes of the tools, state changes, and
multitool.
The FC6 block has the same functionality as the FC8 block, plus the multitool functionality.
The description of FC6 only contains the multitool functionality.
The functionality of FC8 is described in "FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management
(Page 155)".

Declaration of the function

FUNCTION FC6: VOID
VAR_INPUT
Start: BOOL;
TaskIdent: BYTE ;
TaskIdentNo: BYTE ;
NewToolMag: INT;
NewToolLoc: INT;
OldToolMag: INT;
OldToolLoc: INT;
Status: INT;
MtoolPlaceNum: INT;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
Ready: BOOL;
Error: INT;
END_VAR
BEGIN
END_FUNCTION

Description of formal parameters

Signal Type Type Value range Description

Start: I BOOL 0 (FALSE), 1 See block description FC8
(TRUE)
TaskIdent: I BYTE See block description FC8
TaskIdentNo: I BYTE See block description FC8
NewToolMag: I INT See block description FC8
NewToolLoc: I INT See block description FC8
OldToolMag: I INT See block description FC8
OldToolLoc: I INT See block description FC8
Status: I INT See block description FC8

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 151
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Signal Type Type Value range Description

MtoolPlaceNum: I INT Multitool location No.
Ready: O BOOL 0 (FALSE), 1 See block description FC8
(TRUE)
Error: O INT See block description FC8

See also
FC7: TM_REV - transfer block for tool change with revolver (Page 152)
Function blocks (Page 119)

5.3.12 FC7: TM_REV - transfer block for tool change with revolver

Function
After a revolver has been changed, the user calls block FC7 "TM_REV". The revolver number
corresponding to interface number in DB73 must be specified in parameter "ChgdRevNo" for
this purpose. As this block is called, the associated "Interface active" bit in data block
DB73.DBW0 of FC7 is reset after parameter "Ready" == TRUE is returned.

Job executed correctly

If the job was executed correctly, "Ready" == 1. The user must then set the parameter
"Start" = 0 or no longer call FC7.

Job executed with errors

If the job was executed with errors, parameter "Ready" == 0 and parameter "Error" == 1. The
job must be repeated in the next PLC cycle. Since the parameter "Start" does not need a
positive edge for a subsequent job, "Start" = 1 remains, because the job has not yet been
completed. See "Call example" and "Pulse diagram" below.

Constraints
● Block FC7 may only be started with parameter "Start" = 1 if an activation signal for the
associated interface (DB73.DBW0) for this transfer has been supplied by the tool
management function.
● A cancellation of a transfer, e.g. by a channel reset, is not permitted.
● Parameter "Start" = 1, until parameter "Ready" == 1 or "Error" == 1

Further information
● PI services for tool management, see:
– FB4: PI_SERV - request PI service, see Function Manual PLC.
– FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management (Page 155)

Tool management
152 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Manual turret switching

If the turret is rotated in manual operation, neither a tool change nor an offset selection is
associated with this operation. The first step is the removal of the tool from the tool carrier back
to its location in the turret. An asynchronous transfer must be performed with FC8 (alternative:
FC6). The associated parameter settings are shown below:

TaskIdent = 4
TaskIdentNo = Channel no.
NewToolMag = Magazine no. of the turret
NewToolLoc = Original location of the tool
OldToolMag = Magazine no. of the buffer storage (spindle) = 9998
OldToolLoc = Buffer storage no. of the spindle
Status = 1

If the turret is now turned to any position at which a tool is located, this tool must be activated.
This is done easiest by the new T programming in the part program. However, if this should take
place, for example, at the end of turret switching from the PLC user program, an ASUB must be
started for this purpose. The current turret position must be transferred to the ASUB. Thus the
tool is determined on this location in the ASUB and this is selected.

Declaration of the function

FUNCTION FC7: VOID
//NAME :TM_REV
VAR_INPUT
Start : BOOL;
ChgdRevNo : BYTE ;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
Ready : BOOL;
Error : INT;
END_VAR
BEGIN
END_FUNCTION

Description of formal parameters

Signal Typ Type Value range Meaning

e
Start: I BOOL 0 (FALSE), 1 = start transfer
1 (TRUE)
ChgdRevNo: I BYTE 1, 2, 3, ... Number of turret interface

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 153
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Signal Typ Type Value range Meaning

e
Ready: O BOOL 0 (FALSE), 1 = Transfer complete
1 (TRUE)
Error: O INT 0, 1 , 2, 3 Error checkback
0: No error has occurred
1: No turret present
2: Illegal turret number in parameter "ChgdRevNo"
3: Illegal job ("interface active" signal for selected
turret = "FALSE")

Pulse diagram

     


6WDUW
  
5HDG\

(UURU !

① User: Set request, Start = 0 → 1

② FB4: PI service successfully completed, Ready = 1
User: Reset request, IF Ready == 1 THEN Start = 0
③ User: IF Ready == 1 THEN reset request: 1 → 0
④ FB4: Reset job confirmation, Ready = 0
⑤ User: IF Ready == 0 AND Error == 0 THEN reset request Start = 1 → 0 not permissible
⑥ FB4: PI service completed with errors, Error = 1
User: Reset request, IF Ready == 1 OR Error == 1 THEN Start = 0, possible further error handling

Call example
CALL // Tool management: Transfer block for turret
FC7(
Start := m 20.5, // Start := "1 " => initiate the
transfer
ChgdRevNo := DB61.DBB1,
Ready := m 20.6,
Error := DB61.DBW12
};
u m 20.6; // Poll ready
r m 20.5; // Reset start

Tool management
154 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

spb m001; // Jump, if everything OK

l db61.dbw 12; // Error information
ow w#16#0; // Evaluate error
spn error; // Jump to troubleshooting, if <> 0
m001: // Start of another program
error:
r m 20.5; // Start reset, if an error has
occurred

5.3.13 FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management

Function
The user calls this block FC TM-TRANS when the position of the tool or the status of the transfer
operation changes. The parameter "TaskIdent" specifies the transfer job for the block FC8 at
the tool management interface:
● For loading/unloading positions
● For spindle change positions
● For turret change positions as transfer identifier
● Asynchronous transfer
● Asynchronous transfer with location reservation
The interface number is indicated in parameter "TaskIdentNo".
Example for loading point 5:
Parameter "TaskIdent":= 1 and "TaskIdentNo":= 5.
Furthermore, the current tool positions and status data (list of "Status" parameter in the
following text) are also transferred for this transfer function.

Note
FC8 informs the NC of the current positions of the old tool.
The NC knows where the old and the new tool were located until the position change.

In the case of a transfer without a so-called "old tool" (e.g. on loading), the value 0 is assigned
to parameters "OldToolMag", "OldToolLoc".
Block FC TM_TRANS may be started only with "Start" parameter = "TRUE" if an activation
signal for the appropriate interface (DB71, DB72, DB73 in word 0) for this transfer has been
supplied by the tool management function.
When this job is executed correctly, the output parameter "Ready" contains the value TRUE.
The user must then set the "Start" parameter to FALSE or not call the block again.
If the "Ready" parameter = FALSE, the error code in the "Error" parameter must be interpreted
(see Call example FC8 and pulse diagram).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 155
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

If the error code = 0, this job must be repeated in the next PLC cycle (e.g. "Start" remains set
to "TRUE"). This means that the transfer operation has not yet been completed.
If the user assigns a value of less than 100 to the "Status" parameter, the associated interface
in data block DB71 or DB72 or DB73, word 0 is deactivated (process completed). The
appropriate bit for the interface is set to 0 by FC8.
The "Start" parameter does not need a signal edge for a subsequent job. This means that new
parameters can be assigned with "Start = TRUE" immediately when "Ready = TRUE" is
received.

Asynchronous transfer
To ensure that changes in the position of a tool are automatically signaled from the PLC to the
tool management (e.g. power failure during an active command or independent changes in the
position by the PLC), FC8 is called with "TaskIdent" = 4 or 5. This call does not require interface
activation by the tool management.
If parameter "TaskIdent" = 5, the tool management reserves the location in addition to changing
the position. The location is only reserved if the tool has been transported from a real magazine
to a buffer storage.
A relevant NC channel must be parameterized in the "TaskIdentNo" parameter.
The previous location of the tool is specified in the parameters "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc".
The current location of the tool is specified in the parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc".
"Status" = 1 must be specified.
With "Status" = 5, the specified tool remains at location "OldToolMag", "OldToolLoc". This
location must be a buffer (e.g. spindle). The real magazine and location must be specified in the
parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc"; the location is at the position of the buffer. This
procedure must always be used if the tool management is to be informed of the position of a
specific magazine location. This procedure is used for alignment in search strategies.

Supplementary conditions
● A cancellation of a transfer, e.g. by a channel reset, is not permitted.
● Parameter "Start" = 1, until parameter "Ready" == 1 or "Error" == 1

Further information
● PI services for tool management
– FB4: PI_SERV - request PI service, see Function Manual PLC.
– FC7: TM_REV - transfer block for tool change with revolver (Page 152)

Declaration of the function

FUNCTION FC8: VOID
//NAME :TM_TRANS
VAR_INPUT
Start : BOOL;
TaskIdent: BYTE ;
TaskIdentNo: BYTE ;

Tool management
156 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

NewToolMag: INT;
NewToolLoc: INT;
OldToolMag: INT;
OldToolLoc: INT;
Status: INT;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
Ready BOOL;
Error : INT;
END_VAR
BEGIN
END_FUNCTION

Description of formal parameters

Signal Type Type Range of values Meaning

Start: I BOOL 0 (FALSE), 1: Start transfer
1 (TRUE)
TaskIdent: I BYTE 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Interface or task identifier
1: Loading/unloading location
2: Spindle change position
3: Turret change position
4: Asynchronous transfer
5: Asynchronous transfer with location reserva‐
tion
TaskIdentNo: I BYTE 1, 2, 3 ... 10 Number of the associated interface or channel
number.
NewToolMag: I INT -1, 0, 1, 2 ... Current magazine number of tool to be replaced
-1: Tool remains at its location
NewToolLoc = any value
Only permissible if TaskIdent = 2
NewToolLoc: I INT 0, 1, 2 … max. Current location number of new tool
location no.
OldToolMag: I INT -1, 0 ... Current magazine number of tool to be replaced
-1: The tool remains at its previous location. "Old‐
ToolLoc" = <any value>. Only permissible if "Tas‐
kIdent" = 2.
OldToolLoc: I INT Max. location Current location number of tool to be replaced
number
Status: I INT 1, 2, 3 ... 7, 103, Status information about transfer operation
104, 105

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 157
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Signal Type Type Range of values Meaning

Ready: O BOOL 0 (FALSE), 1: Transfer completed
1 (TRUE)
Error: O INT 0 ... 65535 Error checkback
0: No error has occurred
1: Unknown "TaskIdent"
2: Unknown "TaskIdentNo"
3: Impermissible job, ("Interface active" signal for
selected turret == 0)
Other value: The number corresponds to the er‐
ror message of the tool management function in
the NC caused by this transfer.

Pulse diagram

     


6WDUW
  
5HDG\

(UURU !

① Activation of function by means of a positive edge

② Positive acknowledgement: Tool management has been transferred
③ Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgement
④ Signal change using FC
⑤ This signal chart is not permissible. The job must generally be terminated since the new tool
positions must be conveyed to the tool management in the NC.
⑥ Negative acknowledgement: Error occurred, error code in the output parameter Error

Tool management
158 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Status

Table 5-1 Status bits

Status Description
1 The tool management job has been completed.
The parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc", "OldToolMag", "OldToolLoc" of the FC8 block
should be parameterized to the actual positions of the tools involved. Except in the case of
preparing the change, they are normally the specified target positions of the tools of the asso‐
ciated tool management interface, see also "Explanations of the formal parameters".
1. In the case of loading/unloading/reloading, the tool has arrived at the required target ad‐
dress. If the bit in the interface in DB 71.DBX (n+0).3 "position at loading point" is enabled,
status 1 cannot be used for the function termination. Status 5 must be used for correct
termination.
2. In the case of "Prepare change", the new tool is now available. The tool may, for example,
be positioned in a buffer (gripper). In some cases, the target (magazine, location) of the old
tool has been moved to the tool change position after placement of the new tool in a buffer.
However, the old tool still remains in the spindle. The preparations for a tool change are thus
complete. After this acknowledgement, the "Change" command can be received. The po‐
sitions in parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc", "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc" cor‐
respond to the current tool positions.
3. In the case of "Change" (spindle or turret), the tools addressed in the interface have now
reached the required target addresses.
The tool change operation is thus completed.
2 The "new" tool cannot be made available
This status is only admissible in conjunction with the "Change tool" command. When this status
is applied, the PLC must be prevented from making a change with the proposed tool. The
proposed (new) tool is disabled by the tool management function in the NC. A new command
is then output by the tool management with a duplo tool. The positions in parameters "New‐
ToolMag", "NewToolLoc", "OldToolMag", and "OldToolLoc" correspond to the original tool po‐
sitions.
The status is provided as first synchronous acknowledgment. This means that receipt status 2
must be implemented immediately after the tool preparation.
A previous intermediate acknowledgement, e.g. with Status_105, is not permissible.
3 An error has occurred
The tool positions must not have been changed. Any changes to the magazine positions of the
tool that have taken place in the meantime must be notified beforehand, for example, with
status = 105 via FC8 transfer block. Only then will the tool positions be taken into account by the
tool management function.
4 It would be better to position the "old" tool in the magazine position specified in parameters
"OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc"
This status is permissible only in conjunction with preparation for tool change (change into
spindle). The magazine location specified for the "old" tool must be free. Once this status has
been passed to the tool management in the NC, a new preparation command is generated
(Status_4 = final acknowledgment) and output to the DB72, for which the requested magazine
position of the old tool is considered.
No new tool search is performed explicitly, the positions for "NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc"
are taken from the original preparation command. But this is done only when this position is
free. Parameters "NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" are not taken into account.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 159
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Status Description
5 The operation is complete
The "new" tool is in the position specified in parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc". In this
case, the specified tool is not really in this position, but is still in the same magazine location.
However, this magazine location has been moved to the position set in the parameters (e.g. tool
change position). This status may be used only for turrets, chain-type magazines and disk
magazines. The status enables the tool management function to adjust the current position of
a magazine and to improve the search strategy for subsequent commands. This status is
permissible only in conjunction with loading, unloading, and reloading operations and with
preparations for a tool change. The "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc" parameters must be par‐
ameterized with the data of a buffer.
● Loading, reloading:
On loading or reloading, a location for the tool is already reserved in the NC. The machine
operator must then insert the tool at the target location. Notice: The location reservation is
canceled when the control system is switched on again.
● Tool-change preparation:
Tool motions still to be executed are not carried out until after the tool has been changed.
● Positioning to the loading point:
If the bit in the interface in DB 71.DBX (n+0).3 "position at loading point" is enabled, only
status 5 be used for the function termination (not status 1).
6 The tool management job has been completed
This status has the same function as status 1, but, in addition, a reservation of the source
location is carried out. This status is only permitted when reloading. The command is ended and
the source location of the tool is reserved if the target location is in a buffer magazine.
7 Initiate repetition of the command "Prepare Tool"
This status is only admissible in conjunction with the "Change tool" command. This status is
intended for use when the "new" tool has changed its position (e.g. via an asynchronous com‐
mand of the "new" tool). After "Ready = 1" has been provided by FC8, the "Prepare Change"
command is repeated automatically with the same tool. For the automatic repetition, a new tool
search is carried out. The positions in parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc", "OldTool‐
Mag", and "OldToolLoc" correspond to the original tool positions.
The status is provided as first synchronous acknowledgment. This means that receipt status 7
must be implemented immediately after the tool preparation.
A previous intermediate acknowledgement, e.g. with Status_105, is not permissible.
103 The "new" tool can be inserted
This status is permitted only in the tool change preparation, when the PLC may reject the new
tool (e.g. in case of MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 4 = 1 for the possibility,
request changed parameter from PLC once again). The tool positions have remained un‐
changed. This status is therefore necessary, when the processing is to be continued in the NC
without an unnecessary stop.

Tool management
160 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

Status Description
104 The "new" tool is in the position specified in parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc"
This status is only permissible if the tool is still in the magazine in the same location. The "old"
tool is in the position (buffer) specified in parameters "OldToolMag", "OldToolLoc". In this case,
however, the new tool is not really in this position, but is still in the same magazine location.
However, this magazine location has been moved to the position set in the parameters (e.g. tool
change position). This status may be used only in conjunction with turrets, chaintype maga‐
zines and disk magazines for the "Tool change preparation" phase. The status enables the tool
management to adjust the current position of a magazine and to improve the search strategy for
subsequent commands.
105 The specified buffer location has been reached by all tools involved
Standard case if the operation has not yet been completed.
The tools are in the specified tool positions (parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc", "Old‐
ToolMag", "OldToolLoc").

Status definition
A general rule for the acknowledgement status is that the status information 1 to 7 leads to the
termination of the command. If FC8 receives a status information, the "Interface active bit" of
the interface specified in FC8 is reset to "0" (see also interface lists DB 71 to DB 73), thus
completing the operation. The behavior is different in the case of status information 103 to 105.
When the FC8 receives a status information, the "Interface active bit" of this interface remains
at "1". Further processing is required by the user program in the PLC (e.g. continuation of
magazine positioning). This status information is generally used to transfer changes in position
of one or both tools while the operation is still in progress.

Call example
CALL FC8( //Tool management transfer block
Start := m 20.5, // Start := "1 " => initiate the transfer
TaskIdent := DB61.DBB0,
TaskIdentNo := DB61.DBB1,
NewToolMag := DB61.DBW2, // Current position of new tool
NewToolLoc := DB61.DBW4,
OldToolMag := DB61.DBW6, // Current position of old tool
OldToolLoc := DB61.DBW8,
Status := DB61.DBW10, // Status
Ready := m 20.6,
Error := DB61.DBW12);
u m 20.6; // Poll ready
r m 20.5; // Reset start
spb m001; // Jump if everything OK
l DB61.dbw12; // Error information
ow w#16#0; // Evaluate error
JC error; // Jump to troubleshooting

m001: // Normal branch

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 161
PLC programming
5.3 Signal description of the PLC interface and transfer blocks

error: //Troubleshooting
r m 20.5: // Reset start

Tool management
162 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
NC programming 6
6.1 Overview of OPI and system variables

Fundamentals
All the data required for the purpose of tool management (e.g. to define a magazine or load a
tool...) is stored in the NC. This data can be read and written via part programs with system
variables and via the PLC with FB2 and FB3. When configuring the machine, the user (machine
manufacturer) must determine the most efficient method of reading and writing tool
management data, i.e. in the PLC, the NC or in an ASUP.
Read and write access can generally be made to system variables.
When language commands are used, it may be necessary to program the "STOPRE"
command.
The $TC variables do not generate a preprocessing stop.
Tool identifiers can consist of the following characters:
a...z
A...Z
0...9
+-_.,
The names are case-sensitive, i.e. uppercase and lowercase characters are considered
different characters.

Note
Additional information on OPI variables can be found in the Help file for the NC-VAR selector.

Execution of the commands

The initial writing of data for tools or magazines causes the creation of the corresponding
objects with their default data. Examples include:
● $TC_TP1 creates a tool.
● $TC_MAP1[x] creates a magazine.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 163
NC programming
6.1 Overview of OPI and system variables

Note
Not enabled/active functions
If data of unreleased functions are written, NO alarm is output and the write command is not
executed.
The attempt to read data from inactive functions causes an alarm to be output.

Overview
The following diagram shows an overview of all cutting edge, tool and magazine data ($TC_...)
when tool management is active.
Note:
The sequence of system variables shown corresponds to the OPI numbering sequence.

&877,1*('*('$7$
(&3 /RFDWLRQGHSHQGHQWRIIVHWVFRDUVH
6&3 /RFDWLRQGHSHQGHQWRIIVHWVILQH
023& 8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
023 &XWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
'3&
8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHGDWD
'3 &XWWLQJHGJHGDWD

722/'$7$
73& 7RROUHODWHGXVHUGDWD
73* 7RROUHODWHGJULQGLQJGDWD
73 7RROUHODWHGGDWD

0$*$=,1('$7$ 0/65 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQDVVLJQPHQWWRVSLQGOHV

0$03 0DJD]LQHEORFNGDWD
0'3 'LVWDQFHWRFKDQJHSRVLWLRQ
037+ 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQW\SHKLHUDUFK\
033& 8VHUPDJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
033 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
0$3& 8VHUPDJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD
0$3 0DJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD

Figure 6-1 Overview of cutting edge, tool and magazine data

Tool management
164 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.1 Overview of OPI and system variables

The identifiers (DP,...TP,...MOP,...) are taken from the NC language. They are part of the
names of the system variables $TC_DP,...

Note
The gray data fields are only available if tool management is active.
Dark gray data fields are also available without tool management, but with monitoring function.
White data fields are available when the TOOLMAN function is not active.

$'$37(5'$7$

$'37

Figure 6-2 Adapter data

722/+2/'(5'$7$

&$55

2IIVHWFRPSRQHQWVRIWRROKROGHUV
Figure 6-3 Tool holder data

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 165
NC programming
6.2 Use of the magazine data

6.2 Use of the magazine data

Sequence for defining data

The "Assign tool to a magazine location" sequence creates an interdependency between the
tool data and the magazine/magazine location data.

Example:
The tool contains the magazine location type for which it is intended. The magazine type
contains its own magazine location type. If the tool is assigned to the magazine location, as a
rule the location type cannot be changed again as this can cause inconsistencies.
The resulting requirement is for tools and magazines to be loaded by a special routine into the
PLC and that the structure-determining definitions may no longer be changed during the
preparation (these are e.g. magazine dimension, magazine location type, duplo no., tool
name, ...). They do not include: Cutting edge data, magazine location status, tool status, ...

Use of the magazine data

Action Program command Description

Creating a new magazine $TC_MAPx[y] = value; Value <>0, y = magazine no. of a magazine not yet set up
Delete a magazine $TC_MAP1[y] = 0; The data of the magazine and its magazine locations as
well as any defined distances to change positions are
deleted. The associated memory is released.
Delete a magazines and the $TC_MAP6[y] = 0; The data of the magazine and its magazine locations as
tools contained in it well as any defined distances to change positions are
deleted. Any tools contained in the magazine are also
deleted.
The associated memory is released
Delete all magazines $TC_MAP1[0] = 0; All of the data of all magazines of the selected TO area
unit is deleted and the associated memory is released
again. The magazine data block is then empty.
Create new magazine location $TC_MPPx[y,z] = value; Value <>0, y = location number not yet available.
Before the data of the first location can be created, the
associated magazine must be defined.
When the first parameter of the first magazine location to
be set up is written, then all magazine locations belonging
to the magazine are set up using their default values in
accordance with the requirements for number of lines and
columns for the magazine.
Set magazine location type hi‐ $TC_MPTHx[y] = value;
erarchy
Set magazine distances (dis‐ $TC_MPTHx[y] = value;
tance to change position)
Delete magazine distances $TC_MDPx[y,0] = 0 Delete all defined distances of the magazine with the
(distance to change position) number "y", I.e. the magazine is no longer "seen" during
a tool search and an empty location search.
$TC_MDPx[0,0] = 0; Delete all defined distances of all magazines of the TO
unit.

Tool management
166 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.2 Use of the magazine data

Action Program command Description

Delete the assignments of the $TC_MLSR[x,0] = 0; Delete all defined assignments of a buffer location with
buffer to the spindles the number "x", I.e. the magazine is no longer "seen"
during the tool search.
$TC_MLSR[0,0] = 0; Delete all defined assignments of buffer locations of the
TO unit to spindles
Set magazine block data $TC_MAMPx = value;

Loading data
Because tools are linked to magazines via magazine location parameter $TC_MPP6, the
following rules for correct definition of tools and magazines must be adhered to:
1. Load tool data
2. Load magazine data
3. Load $TC_MPP6 parameters (⇒ places tool in magazine location)
The same sequence is used for data backup.
The grinding data of a tool cannot be written until tool type = "grinding tool" has been defined
for at least one cutting edge.
The distance parameter ($TC_MDPx) and the buffer assignment parameter ($TC_MLSR)
cannot be written until the magazines and their locations have been defined.

Delete data
A tool cannot be deleted while it is still contained in a magazine. The following sequence of
operations must be followed when deleting:
1. Delete the magazine data (this removes tools from the magazine); or remove the tool
explicitly from the magazine.
2. Delete tool data
In addition, a magazine cannot be deleted if it has the state $TC_MAP3[i]= 8 (motion is active).
The delete command is rejected for all magazines even if only one magazine is preventing the
command from being executed.

Note
If a single tool is to be deleted it must first be removed from the magazine location with an
unload operation and then it can be deleted.
Tools that are currently selected cannot be deleted! You can ensure that no tool is selected
beyond a part program by programming T0 before the end of a part program independently of
the settings in the machine data (see MD for selecting tools beyond the end of a program).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 167
NC programming
6.3 Use of the tool and cutting edge data

6.3 Use of the tool and cutting edge data

Overview
If a parameter for a cutting edge, tool or magazine that does not exist is written, a new cutting
edge, tool or magazine is created.

Note
When a tool is created, all the cutting-edge-specific data of cutting edge D1 are created with it.
(DP, DPC, MOP, MOPC are preset to "0".) The grinding-specific tool data ($TC_TG1...) is not
created until one of the tool types ($TC_DP1) 400-499 has been programmed for one of the
cutting edges of the tool.

Use of the tool and cutting edge data with tool management
Magazine management and monitoring are active (TMMG and TMMO)

Action Program command Description

Create a tool T_NO = NEWT("tool identifier",
duplo number)
or
$TC_TP1[y] = duplo number;
$TC_TP2[y] = "tool identifier" y = tool number
Create a cutting $TC_DPx[y,z] = value Create cutting edge D = z if D = z does not yet exist!
edge y = tool number
z = cutting edge number
Set tool data $TC_TPx[y] = value;
or y = tool number
$TC_TPx[GETT("DRILL",DUPLO NO)] Write tool-related user data
= value;
or Write tool-related grinding data
$TC_TPCx[y] = value;
$TC_TGx[y] = value;
Set data of a cutting $TC_DPx[y,z] = value Write offset data
edge $TC_DPCx[y,z] = value Write cutting edge-related user data
$TC_MOPx[y,z] = value Write cutting edge-related monitoring data
$TC_MOPCx[y,z] = value Write CC (OEM) cutting edge monitoring data
y = tool number
z = cutting edge number

Tool management
168 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.3 Use of the tool and cutting edge data

Action Program command Description

Deletion of the tool $TC_TP1[0,0]; When deleting tools, the entries for the location data
and cutting edge da‐ must also be corrected.
ta
Deletion of a tool $TC_TP1[y] = 0;
or All tool-related data is set to "0" (user data, hierarchy
$TC_TP1[GETT("tool identifier", data, ...). When deleting a tool, the entries for the loca‐
duplo number)] = 0; tion data must also be corrected.
or
DELT["tool identifier", duplo
number]

Use of the tool and cutting edge data without tool management

Action Program command Description

Create a tool $TC_DPx[y,z] = value; Create tool T if T does not yet exist!
y = tool number
$TC_TP2[y] = "Number" z = cutting edge number
Create a cutting $TC_DPx[y,z] = value Create cutting edge D = z if D = z does not yet exist!
edge y = tool number
z = cutting edge number
Set data of a cutting $TC_DPx[y,z] = value Write offset data
edge $TC_DPCx[y,z] = value Write cutting edge-related user data
$TC_MOPx[y,z] = value Write cutting edge-related monitoring data
$TC_MOPCx[y,z] = value Write CC (OEM) cutting edge monitoring data
y = tool number
z = cutting edge number
Deletion of the tool $TC_DP1[0,0] = 0; All tools of the channel are deleted, the memory is re‐
and cutting edge da‐ leased.
ta

Deleting data
When deleting, the memory area is deleted and automatically released again.
A tool can only be deleted if it is not active (offset-determining) and is not in a magazine, i.e. it
must have been removed or unloaded.

Note
If tool management is active you must ensure that the tool being deleted is not assigned to a
magazine location ($TC_MPP6). This assignment must be removed before the tool is deleted.

The grinding-specific tool data ($TC_TG1...) is created as soon as one of the tool types
($TC_DP1) 400-499 has been programmed for any of the cutting edges of the tool.
If the tool type is set from the current value taken from the range 400-499 to a value outside this
range, the grinding data memory released again, i.e. the grinding-specific data is lost.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 169
NC programming
6.4 Cutting edge data

6.4 Cutting edge data

6.4.1 Cutting edge data

Cutting edge data

023&
023 8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
&XWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
'3&
'3 8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHGDWD
&XWWLQJHGJHGDWD

Figure 6-4 Overview of cutting edge data

This data exists for each cutting edge that is created (D1-D12). Tool management includes the
geometry and user data as well as the optional monitoring data for the cutting edges.
If the cutting edges are created via HMI, the D number is counted up from 1. It is possible to
program the D no. with gaps, e.g. D1, D3, D6 if cutting edges are set up using an NC program.

6.4.2 Cutting edge parameter $TC_DP

$TC_DPx[t,D]
Cutting edge parameters for geometry, technology and tool type.
Parameters:
● x: Parameters 1...25
The maximum value for x is displayed in the OPI variable "numCuttEdgeParams" in block
Y.
● t: T number 1...32000
● D: Cutting edge number 1...12 or D number
Depending on the tool type, up to 25 cutting edge parameters can be programmed for each tool
cutting edge.
Further information: Function Manual Tools, tool offset

OPI block TO
Address calculations:
● Line = (D - 1) * "numCuttEdgeParams" + parameter number
● Column = T number

Tool management
170 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.4 Cutting edge data

Tool offset parameters (system variables)

NC identifier Type Designation OPI varia‐ Type De‐
bles fault2)
$TC_DP1 INT Tool type edgeData REAL 9999
$TC_DP2 Double Cutting edge position* edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP3 Double Geometry length 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP4 Double Geometry length 2 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP5 Double Geometry length 3 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP6 Double Radius geometry edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP7 Double Geometry - corner radius edgeData REAL 0
(tool type 700; slotting saw)
$TC_DP81) Double Geometry length 4 edgeData REAL 0
(tool type 700; slotting saw)
$TC_DP91) Double Geometry length 5 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP10 1)
Double Geometry - angle 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP111) Double Geometry – angle 2 for tapered mill‐ edgeData REAL 0
ing tools
$TC_DP12 Double Wear - length 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP13 Double Wear - length 2 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP14 Double Wear - length 3 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP15 Double Wear - radius edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP16 Double Wear - slot width b/rounding radius edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP17 Double Wear - projection k edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP18 Double Wear - length 5 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP19 Double Wear - angle 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP20 Double Wear - angle 2 for conical milling edgeData REAL 0
tools
$TC_DP21 Double Adapter length 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP22 Double Adapter length 2 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP23 Double Adapter length 3 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP24 Double Clearance angle edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP25 Double ManualTurn: Cutting speed edgeData REAL 0
ShopMill: Status value of tool of type
1xx and 2xx.
$TC_DPCE [t,d] INT System variable of an offset data re‐ - - 0
cord with T=t and D=d containing
cutting edge number CE. (Unique D
no. or user assignment of D no. for
cutting edge numbers)
Value range for permissible cutting
edge numbers: 1, 2, 3 ... MD18106.
$TC_DPH [t,d] INT H parameter (Y / extraCuttEdgePar‐ - - 0
ams), Bit0=1
$TC_DPV Double Tool cutting edge orientation - - -

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 171
NC programming
6.4 Cutting edge data

Tool offset parameters (system variables)

NC identifier Type Designation OPI varia‐ Type De‐
bles fault2)
$TC_DPV3 L1 component of the tool cutting - - -
edge orientation
$TC_DPV4 L2 component of the tool cutting - - -
edge orientation
$TC_DPV5 L3 component of the tool cutting - - -
edge orientation
$TC_DPNT INT Number of teeth, cutting edge pa‐ - - -
rameter 34
$TC_DPROT Double Tool clamping angle for turning tools - - -
$TC_DPVNx Double Component of the orientation nor‐ - - -
mals
1) The meaning of this data is different depending on the tool type.

$TC_DP11
$TC_DP11 contains the identification for the main direction of machining as is defined and
required by the Siemens Cycle950. $TC_DP11 assumes an intermediate position between tool
OEM parameter and NC system variable:
● $TC_DP11 is a tool OEM parameter in so far as NC does not evaluate the contents of the
value.
● $TC_DP11 is an NC system variable in so far as when accessing via $P_ADT[ n ], with n=11,
NC is subject to the special values 1, 2, 3, 4 of the tool adapter transformation if TMMG and
the subfunction "Tool adapter" are active. This system parameter property is also used with
the analog OPI block TOT.

6.4.3 User cutting edge data $TC_DPC

$TC_DPCx[t,D]
Up to 64 additional cutting edge parameters can be programmed for each cutting edge. Setting
with MD18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2=1)
X = Parameter 1...64
T = T number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12
D = D number

OPI block TUE/TUO

Calculation of line:(d-1)*numCuttEdgeParams_tu+parameter no.

Tool management
172 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.4 Cutting edge data

Calculation of column: T number

User-related cutting edge data

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default setting
$TC_DPC1 Double CC_Cutting edge parameter edgeData REAL 0
1
... Double ... edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DPC64 Double CC_Cutting edge parameter edgeData REAL 0
64

Note
The data is displayed in the tool management. Here you could store "Max. cutting rate",
for example, which is then evaluated in the part program.

6.4.4 Cutting edge-related tool monitoring $TC_MOP

$TC_MOPx[t,D]
Tool cutting edges are monitored according to tool life, workpiece count and/or wear.
X = Parameter 1...15
T = T_Number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12
D = D number

OPI block TS
Calculation of line: (d-1)*numCuttEdgeParams_ts+parameter no.
Calculation of column: T number

Tool management monitoring data

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MOP1 Double Prewarning limit for tool life in data REAL 0
min.
$TC_MOP2 Double Residual tool life in minutes data REAL 0
$TC_MOP3 INT Prewarning limit for count data REAL 0
$TC_MOP4 INT Residual unit quantity data REAL 0
$TC_MOP11 Double Setpoint for tool life data REAL 0
$TC_MOP13 INT Setpoint for workpiece count data REAL 0

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 173
NC programming
6.4 Cutting edge data

Tool management monitoring data

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MOP5 Double Wear prewarning limit - or loca‐ data REAL 0
tion-dependent offset fine pre‐
warning limit
$TC_MOP6 Double Actual wear or location-depend‐ data REAL 0
ent offset, fine actual value
$TC_MOP15 Double Wear setpoint - or location-de‐ data REAL 0
pendent offset, fine setpoint

6.4.5 User cutting edge monitoring $TC_MOPC

$TC_MOPCx[t,D]
Tool monitoring user data (edge-specific)
Up to 64 additional tool monitoring parameters can be programmed for each cutting edge. (V4.7
and higher). Setting with MD18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
X = Parameter 1....64
T = T_Number 1....32000
D = Cutting edge number 1....12
D = D number

OPI block TUS

Calculation of line: (d-1)*numCuttEdgeParams_tus+parameter no.
Calculation of column: T number

Tool monitoring user data (edge-specific)

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MOPC1 Int CC monitoring parameters userdata REAL 0
... Int ... userdata REAL 0
$TC_MOPC64 Int CC monitoring parameters userdata REAL 0

Tool management
174 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.4 Cutting edge data

6.4.6 Location of use-dependent offsets fine (additive offsets) $TC_SCP

$TC_SCPx[t,D]
Location-dependent offsets fine (the term "additive offsets" is also frequently used) comprise
all the magnitudes of error which contribute to the total deviation between the actual workpiece
and the specified dimensions. The parameters for the location-dependent offsets refer to the
geometrical data of a cutting edge. DL: Location-dependent; offsets regarding the location of
use.
X = Parameter for DL=1...DL=6
T = T number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12
D = D number

OPI block TOS, TOST

Calculation of line: (d-1)*(maxnumEdgeSC*numParams_SC) +
((EdgeSC_1)*numParams_SC)+Parameter no.
Calculation of column: T number

Location-dependent offsets
Name Type Designation OPI variables Type
$TC_SCPx
x = 13-21 Double Can be activated with DL=1 edgeSCData REAL
x = 23-31 Double Can be activated with DL=2 edgeSCData REAL
x = 33-41 Double Can be activated with DL=3 edgeSCData REAL
x = 43-51 Double Can be activated with DL=4 edgeSCData REAL
x = 53-61 Double Can be activated with DL=5 edgeSCData REAL
x = 63-71 Double Can be activated with DL=6 edgeSCData REAL
Transformed location-dependent edgeSCData REAL
offsets fine, block TOST

6.4.7 Location-dependent offsets coarse (setting-up offsets) $TC_ECP

$TC_ECPx[t,D]
The location-dependent offsets, coarse (also setting-up offsets) can be set by the machine
setter before the machining operation (see also $TC_SCP (Page 175)).
X = Parameter for DL=1...DL=6
T = T number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12
D = D number

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 175
NC programming
6.4 Cutting edge data

OPI block TOE, TOET

Calculation of line: (d-1)*(maxnumEdge_SC*numParams_SC)+
((EdgeSC-1)*numParams_SC)+Parameter no.
Calculation of column: T number

Setting-up offsets
Name Type Designation OPI variables Type
$TC_ECPx edgeECData REAL
x = 13-21 Double Can be activated with DL=1 edgeECData REAL
x = 23-31 Double Can be activated with DL=2 edgeECData REAL
x = 33-41 Double Can be activated with DL=3 edgeECData REAL
x = 43-51 Double Can be activated with DL=4 edgeECData REAL
x = 53-61 Double Can be activated with DL=5 edgeECData REAL
x = 63-71 Double Can be activated with DL=6 edgeECData REAL
Transformed setting-up offsets, edgeECData REAL
block TOET

Tool management
176 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.5 Tool data

6.5 Tool data

6.5.1 Overview

73& 7RROUHODWHGXVHUGDWD

73* 7RROUHODWHGJULQGLQJGDWD

73 7RROUHODWHGGDWD

Figure 6-5 Overview of tool data

6.5.2 Tool-related data $TC_TP

$TC_TPx[t]
General tool data
This data describes the tool in the magazine.
Programming of general tool data with tool management
x: = Parameter 1...11
t: = T number 1...32000

OPI block TD
Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: n.a.

Tool-related data, tool management

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_TP2 String Tool identifier toolldent String "T No."
$TC_TP1 INT Duplo number duploNo WORD T No.
$TC_TP3 INT Size on left toolsize_left WORD 1
$TC_TP4 INT Size on right toolsize_right WORD 1
$TC_TP5 INT Size above toolsize_upper WORD 1
$TC_TP6 INT Size below toolsize_down WORD 1
$TC_TP7 INT Magazine location type toolplace_spec WORD 9999

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 177
NC programming
6.5 Tool data

Tool-related data, tool management

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_TP8 INT Status toolState WORD 0=not
Value 0 not enabled enabled
Bit 0 active tool
Bit 1 enabled
Bit 2 disabled
Bit 3 measure
Bit 4 prewarning limit reached
Bit 5 tool being changed
Bit 6 fixed-location coded
Bit 7 tool was in use
Bit 8 identifier for tools in buffer
Bit 9=1 ignore disabled state
Bit 9=0 do not ignore
Bit 10 to be unloaded
Bit 11 to be loaded
Bit 12 reserved
Bit 13 reserved
Bit 14 1:1 exchange
Bit 15, manual tool
Bit 17 tool is at a disabled magazine loca‐
tion
$TC_TP9 INT Tool monitoring method toolMon WORD 0
Value 0 no tool monitoring
Bit 0 tool life
Bit 1 workpiece count
Bit 2 wear monitoring active
Bit 3 wear monitoring, location-dependent
offset fine active
$TC_TP10 INT Number for a replacement tool. toolSearch WORD 0
$TC_TP11 INT Tool information: toolInfo Integer 0
Allows tool groups to be divided into sub‐
groups. Tool selection, only with tools of
the lower group
$A_TOOLMN INT Magazine assignment tool toolInMag WORD
$A_TOOLMLN INT Location assignment tool toolInPlace WORD
$P_TOOLND INT Number of cutting edges numCuttEdges WORD
- Adapter No. Assignment adaptNo WORD
$A_MYMN INT Owner magazine for tool toolMyMag WORD
$A_MYMLN INT Owner magazine location for tool toolMyPlace WORD
$TC_TP_PROTA string Name of the three-dimensional protection
area for the tool or name of the file that
contains the description of the protection
area for the tool.

Tool management
178 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.5 Tool data

Tool-related data, tool management

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_TP_MAX_VELO real Maximum speed of the tool, if the value is toolMaxVelo
> 0. If a speed limit is not defined (=0), then
no monitoring is performed
$TC_TP_MAX_ACC real Maximum acceleration of the tool, if the toolMaxAcc
value is > 0. If an acceleration speed limit
has not been defined (=0), then no moni‐
toring is performed

$TC_TP1 and $TC_TP2

Like the T No. is sufficient to identify a tool, a tool is equally unique in terms of its duplo number
and its tool name (identifier).
TO units may therefore only contain names that have different duplo numbers. The write
operations of $TC_TP1 and $TC_TP2 are checked for the above and rejected if collisions are
found.

$TC_TP3 to TP6
Size in terms of half locations:
Size 1 means that the tool exactly completely occupies its own magazine location. If the size
increases in one direction by 1, half an adjacent location is reserved in this direction for the tool.
The maximum programmable size is 11. This means that no more than five whole adjacent
locations can be reserved by the tool in one direction.
The tool size (half locations) can only be written or changed if the tool does not have an owner
location. This applies to the following situations:
● The tool has yet not been loaded
● During loading, as long as the tool is not at its target location in a real magazine
● If the tool is at a location of the buffer or loading magazine and beforehand, the owner
location as well as the reservation in the magazine was deleted (exclusively using the NC
commands DELMRES and DELMOWNER).

$TC_TP7
The magazine location type can only be written or changed if the tool does not have an owner
location. This applies to the following situations:
● The tool has yet not been loaded
● During loading, as long as the tool is not at its target location in a real magazine
● If the tool is at a location of the buffer or loading magazine and beforehand, the owner
location as well as the reservation in the magazine was deleted (exclusively using the NC
commands DELMRES and DELMOWNER).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 179
NC programming
6.5 Tool data

$TC_TP8
The tool status is described with system variable $TC_TP8. The system variable is bit-coded.
In other words, a particular state of the tool is assigned to each bit of this data.
The status of a tool must be bit 1=1 ("enabled") so that it can be loaded within the scope of a
programmed tool change for machining in the toolholder.
During tool selection, the status of a tool that is loaded onto the toolholder (spindle, ...) is set by
the NC to bit 0 ("active").
A tool cannot be loaded if its status is bit 2=1 ("disabled"). The status is set automatically by the
tool monitoring function, when the monitoring value of at least one cutting edge reaches the limit
value. The status bit 2=4 of the tool on the toolholder can or will be ignored when generating the
INIT blocks (see MD 20110 and 20112). The PLC also has the option to make NC ignore the
status during tool selection.
The status bit 4=1 ("prewarning") is mainly for information purposes. With this status the tool
can still be loaded.
The status bit 7=1 ("was in use") is set by the NC if the tool is removed from a magazine location
of the type spindle or toolholder.
The tool status bit 5=1 (="W"= is being change) is always reset by the software during buffered
booting. A tool receives/loses this status within the scope of a programmed tool change.
The following applies: All tools (new and old) involved in the tool change are given the status
bit 5=1 by the tool selection. The status is reset again by the end acknowledgement for each
tool command.
The following applies in particular:
The end acknowledgement of the PLC command 2 (programming the T address with
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1), resets the status "W" of the old tool.
With the end acknowledgement of the PLC command 3, 4, 5
(programming M06 in a block with $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, T, M06 in a block with
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1
T address with $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0)
the status bit 5=1 of the old and the new tool is reset.
Tools that are in the buffer can also be used for a new programmed tool command if they have
the status bit 5=1 (alternating).
Tools that are in the real magazine and have this status can be used depending on bit 21 of the
MD 20310 or cannot be used for a competing tool-change command for another spindle.
The status bit 5=1 is generally not taken into consideration for a tool selection within the scope
of a block search or for init block generation.
For a RESET, the status is reset for those tools that are involved in a tool change at that point
in time.
The status bit 5=1 is not evaluated when a manual tool is selected.
The tool status bit 8=1 ("return transport") ensures that during the next tool change, a tool that
is at a buffer location and not intended for the next job in machining is returned to the real
magazine.
Bit 9 ignores disabled state.

Tool management
180 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.5 Tool data

If this bit is set, the disabled state of this tool is ignored. This means the disabled tool can be
used (depending on the search strategy).
This state acts independently of the PLC interface signal:
"Tool disable not effective" (DB21.DBx29.7).
Status bit 11 (to be loaded)
Bit 11 is set for tools that are not in a magazine and are to be loaded. The following definitions
apply:
● The state remains for Power On.
● It is included in the data back-up and rewritten when transferred back to the NC.
● When assigning a tool to a real magazine the tool status is reset by the NC (applies to
locations of location type 1, i.e. not to internal magazines such as the loading magazine,
buffer magazine, etc).

Bit Value Meaning

11 0 "Not to be loaded"
1 "To be loaded"

Status bit 10 (to be unloaded)

Bit 10 is set for tools that are located in a magazine and are to be unloaded. The following
definitions apply:
● The state remains for Power On.
● It is included in the data back-up and rewritten when transferred back to the NC.
● Unloading a tool via an unloading location causes the NC to reset the tool status.

Bit Value Meaning

10 0 "Not to be unloaded"
1 "To be unloaded"

For $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, Bit 9 = 1:

A tool that has the status "to be unloaded" ($TC_TP8, Bit 10 = 1) is treated like a disabled tool,
i.e. it is no longer taken into consideration during a tool search and can no longer be selected
within the scope of T programming.
Status bit 12 (reserved)
Bit 12 is reserved.
State bit 14 (tool marked for 1:1 exchange)
NC-internal state, that indicates (for a selected search strategy, 1:1 interchange), that the new
and old tool should be interchanged 1:1.

Note
Take care when "manually" changing the tool status via the OPI during machining. This could
undo internal state changes by the NC and result in incorrect machining.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 181
NC programming
6.5 Tool data

Status bit 17 (tool is at a disabled magazine location)

Tools in a subsequently disabled magazine location are assigned, with $TC_TP8 Bit 17=1, the
identifier indicating that they are located in a disabled magazine location. With instruction
$TC_MPP6, tools identified in this way can be placed in disabled magazine locations or
disabled adjacent locations. Oversize tools that project beyond the edge of the magazine are
not taken into account.

$TC_TP9
If a monitoring type is activated for the tool with $TC_DP9, the current monitoring parameters
are evaluated and, if necessary, the tool status set to "disabled" or "prewarning limit reached".
An existing tool disable is however not withdrawn. Not even then when the monitoring function
for this tool has been deactivated.

$TC_TP11
Tool subgroups
The system variable is bit-coded. Only bits 0...3 are evaluated. A tool group (the same identifier,
different duplo No.) can be split into a maximum of 4 subgroups in this way. A tool can also be
included in several subgroups.
If no bit is set, so $TC_TP11[x]=0, this means the same as "all bits set", i.e. the tool belongs to
all the defined subgroups.
Selection of the tool subgroup
1. With the NC command $P_USEKT (UseKindofTool)
(only possible when not working with the setting T=location)
During tool search, only tools that have one of these bits in system variable $TC_TP11, can
be found. This means that it is possible to form so-called "Technology Groups", to
differentiate between tools with the same identifier and specifically release them for
machining.
Example 1:
$P_USEKT=4
This means that the only tools to be taken into account are those with bit 2 in $TC_TP11 or
Example 2:
$P_USEKT=9
This means that the only tools to be taken into account are those with bit 3 or 0 in $TC_TP11
2. By programming a tool
with the function T=location $P_USEKT is set automatically at every tool change and in fact
at the $TC_TP11 value of the loaded tool.
Example: T3 M06
The bit value of $TC_TP11 of T3 is now valid (is accepted in "USEKT").
During the transition to a spare tool (and there only) the only tools to be taken into account
are those with one of these bits set in system variable $TC_TP11.

Tool management
182 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.5 Tool data

6.5.3 Tool-related grinding data $TC_TPG

$TC_TPGx[t]
Technology-specific grinding data
The default setting for grinding data is "0". Tools with tool type 400 to 499 are always grinding
tools, i.e. additionally have these data which take up additional memory space. If a tool of type
400-499 is set to a value outside this range, then its loses its grinding-specific data - the
associated memory is released again and can be used for other tools.
x: = parameter 1....9
t: = T number 1...32000

OPI block TG
Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: N/A

Tool-related grinding data

Name Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_TPG 1 INT Spindle number spinNoDress REAL
$TC_TPG 2 INT Chaining rule conntectPar REAL
$TC_TPG 3 Double Minimum grinding wheel radius minToolDia REAL
$TC_TPG 4 Double Minimum grinding wheel width minToolWide REAL
$TC_TPG 5 Double Current grinding wheel width actToolWide REAL
$TC_TPG 6 Double Max. speed maxRotSpeed REAL
$TC_TPG 7 Double Maximum peripheral speed maxTipSpeed REAL
$TC_TPG 8 Double Inclination angle of inclined wheel inclAngle REAL
$TC_TPG 9 INT Parameter number for radius calcu‐ paramNrCCV REAL
lation

6.5.4 Tool-related user data $TC_TPC

$TC_TPCx[t]
User-related tool data
An additional 64 tool-specific parameters can be set up per tool (V4.7 and higher). Setting with
MD18094 MM_CC_TDA_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
x: = Parameter 1...64
t: = T number 1...32000

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 183
NC programming
6.5 Tool data

OPI block TU/TUD

Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: Parameter number

Tool-related OEM user data

NC identifier Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_TPC1 Double data REAL
... Double data REAL
$TC_TPC64 Double data REAL

Note
The data is displayed in the tool management. Additional tool status information, for example,
can be stored here.

Tool management
184 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

6.6 Magazine data

6.6.1 Overview of magazine data

Magazine data
0$*$=,1('$7$
 0/65 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQDVVLJQPHQWWRVSLQGOHV
 0$03 0DJD]LQHEORFNGDWD
 0'3 'LVWDQFHWRFKDQJHSRVLWLRQ
 037+ 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQW\SHKLHUDUFK\
 033& 8VHUPDJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
 033 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
 0$3& 8VHUPDJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD
 0$3 0DJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD

Figure 6-6 Overview of magazine data

6.6.2 Magazine description data $TC_MAP

$TC_MAPx[n]
Magazine description data
This data identifies the real magazine:
x: = Parameter 1...10
n: = Magazine number 1...3200

OPI block TM
Calculation of line: Magazine number
Calculation of column: N/A

Magazine description data, tool management

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default set‐
ting
Magazine number magNo WORD 0
$TC_MAP2 String Identifier of the magazine magIdent String ""

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 185
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Magazine description data, tool management

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default set‐
ting
$TC_MAP1 INT Type of magazine magKind WORD 0
1 = Chain
3 = Turret
5 = Box magazine
7 = Tool buffer magazine
9 = Loading magazine
$TC_MAP3 INT Status of magazine magState WORD 2
Bit 0: Active magazine
Bit 1: Disabled
Bit 2: Magazine is at load position
Bit 3: Tool motion is active
Bit 4: Magazine or tool may be moved. Enabled for
loading
Bit 6: Magazine is fixed-location-coded, i.e. tools
in this magazine are considered fixed-location-co‐
ded tools and treated accordingly
Bit 8: Edge location must not be overlapped left
Bit 9: Edge location must not be overlapped right
Bit 10: Edge location must not be overlapped top
Bit 11: Edge location must not be overlapped bot‐
tom
$TC_MAP4 INT Reserved -1
$TC_MAP5 INT Reserved -1
$TC_MAP6 INT Number of lines (box magazines only) magDim WORD 1
$TC_MAP7 INT Number of columns - -
- - Number of locations for the magazine, corre‐ magNrPlaces WORD 0
sponds to $TC_MAP6*$TC_MAP7
$TC_MAP8 INT Current magazine position relative to change po‐ magActPlace WORD 0
sition
- magCmd WORD
- magCmdState WORD
- magCmdPar1 WORD
- magCmdPar2 WORD
$TC_MAP9 INT Current wear grouping number magWearCom‐ DINT 0
poundNo
$TC_MAP10 INT Current tool search strategies of magazine (see magToolSearch‐ WORD 0
(bit 0...7) $TC_MAMP2) Strat
$TC_MAP10 INT Current empty location search strategy of maga‐ magPlace‐ WORD 0
(bit 8...15) zine SearchStrat

Tool management
186 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

$TC_MAP3
The magazine status bit 3 (tool motion is active) is always reset when the software is booted
with backup.
A magazine that has the status "Tool motion is active" cannot be deleted.
Empty locations are not sought in magazines with the "disabled" status. If a disabled magazine
is explicitly defined for the empty location search, then the process is aborted with an error
message.
A tool that is in a "disabled" magazine cannot be loaded into the spindle or the tool holder.
Overlapping edge locations (bit 8...11=1)
For default setting (Bit 8 ...11 = 0), an oversized tool extends beyond the magazine edge
locations. If this has to be prevented (e.g. due to the mechanical situation at the machine), then
one or several of these bits can be set.
Example: Bits 8 and 9 are set, bits 10 and 11 are not set.
This means that an oversized tool must not overlap the magazine (typically a box-type
magazine) on its left and right sides, but an oversized tool may overlap / extend beyond the
magazine on its top and bottom sides.
The following applies:
Left and top regarding a reference location is where the magazine locations with the lower
magazine numbers are.
Right and bottom regarding a reference location is where the magazine locations with the
higher magazine numbers are.

$TC_MAP8
The current magazine position $TC_MAP8 is refreshed by the NC every time the magazine is
moved.
When the magazine configuration has been loaded, variable $TC_MAP8 is assigned the value
zero. The position value is the number of the magazine location that is located at the zero
position of the magazine. As a maximum, the magazine position can have the number of
magazine locations in the magazine. Larger or negative values are rejected.

$TC_MAP10
Magazine-specific tool search
The bit settings correspond precisely to the system variables $TC_MAMP2.
The default setting "0" always applies to buffer magazines, that is to say the search is made
forwards from the 1st magazine location.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 187
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

6.6.3 Magazine user data $TC_MAPC

$TC_MAPCx[n]
Magazine user data
Up to 64 user data can be additionally created for each magazine (V4.7 and higher). Setting in
the MD18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
x: = Parameter 1...64
n: = Magazine number 1...32000

OPI block TUM

Calculation of line: Parameter number
Calculation of column: Magazine number

Magazine description data OEM user

Name Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_MAPC1 userData DINT
... userData DINT
$TC_MAPC64 userData DINT

6.6.4 Magazine location data $TC_MPP

$TC_MPPx[n,m]
Magazine location data
The following data describes the magazine location
x: = Parameter 1..7
n: = Physical magazine number 1...32000
m: = Physical location number 1...1500
The maximum value of x is stored in OPI variable numMagPlaceParams in block Y.

OPI block TP
Calculation of line: (magazinLocNo-1)*numMagPlaceParams+parameterNo.

Tool management
188 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Calculation of column: Magazine number

Magazine location data, tool management

NC identifier Typ Designation OPI variables Type Default
e setting
$TC_MPP1 INT Location type placeData WORD 0
1 = Magazine location
2 = Spindle, tool holder
3 = Gripper
4 = Loader
5 = Transfer location
6 = Loading station
7 = Loading point
$TC_MPP2 INT Location type placeData WORD 9999
> 0: Location type for virtual location
= 0: Every tool fits in this location
9999: Not defined
$TC_MPP3 BO Consider adjacent location on/off placeData WORD FALSE
OL
$TC_MPP4 INT Location state placeData WORD 1
Bit 0: Disabled
Bit 1: Free to accept a tool (occupied)
Bit 2: Reserved for tool from buffer
Bit 3: Reserved for new tool to be loaded
Bit 4: Occupied in left half location
Bit 5: Occupied in right half location
Bit 6: Occupied in upper half location
Bit 7: Occupied in lower half location
Bit 8: Left half location reserved
Bit 9: Right half location reserved
Bit 10: Top half location reserved
Bit 11: Lower half location reserved
Bit 12: Wear group disabled
Bit 13: Overlapping permitted. Tools can
overlap disabled magazine locations. On‐
ly possible if consider adjacent location is
active (see also MD 17520).
- Reference of phys. magazine (r.t.) placeData WORD 0
$TC_MPP5 INT Location type index (location type num‐ placeData WORD 0
bering) or wear group number
$TC_MPP6 INT T No. of tool at this location placeData WORD 0
$TC_MPP7 INT No. of adapter in mag. location placeData WORD 0

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 189
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Magazine location data, tool management

NC identifier Typ Designation OPI variables Type Default
e setting
$TC_MPP_SP INT For tool speed and acceleration monitor‐ placeData
ing
Only relevant when $MC_TOOLHOLD‐
ER_MANAGEMENT > 0. Spindle no.
which is linked to the tool holder.
$TC_MPP66 INT T No. of the tool, for which the identifica‐ placeData
tion "reserved for tool in buffer" is set.
If a tool is transported into the spindle
within the scope of changing from the
magazine, the magazine location is re‐
served (identifier "reserved for tool in the
buffer"), the T No. of this tool is entered
into $TC_MPP6 and the tool has entered
this location in the variable $A_MYMN/
MYMLN.

Writing magazine location data

Points to be noted about writing magazine location data:
When writing to a $TC_MPP... parameter for the first time, all of the magazine locations defined
by magazine parameters are created with their default values (the memory for the locations is
therefore "used up"). I.e. the magazine must have been defined by this time ($TC_MAP...
parameter).

$TC_MPP1 (location type)

Only magazine locations of the type "Magazine location" ($TC_MPP1 = 1) may be defined at
magazines that are not of the type "internal" ($TC_MAP1 = 7 or = 9).
Location types:
● 1 = Magazine location
Only locations of type "1" can be defined on real magazines.
● 2 = Spindle / tool holder
● 3 = Gripper
● 4 = Loader
● 5 = Transfer location
The distinction gripper / loader / transfer location is intended for HMI applications. Here, NC
does not make a distinction, loader and transfer location are treated just like a gripper.
● 6 = Loading station
After the tool moves to this location, the tool stays there. It can only be removed by explicit
operation (unloading).
● 7 = Loading point
If a tool is moved from the magazine or buffer to this location, after the PLC acknowledgement
of this motion command, the tool is automatically removed from this location.

Tool management
190 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Please note when writing the location status and number of the tool in this location that the
following dependencies on $TC_MPP2 to $TC_MPP4 apply; these are checked during the
write operation:
● If the location already contains a tool, the location type to be written must be checked
against the tool location type.
● The status "not occupied" may only be written when none of the "assigned" states is set and
there is no tool at the location.
● The "Disabled" state can be set irrespective of the other states.
● If there is no tool contained then the state "free" is automatically active; i.e. the state "not
free" cannot be set by the NC program or PLC, HMI.
● "Occupied" states can only be set by the NCK within the scope of the adjacent location
consideration; i.e. these states are ignored during writing by the NC program or PLC, HMI.
● The state "Reserved for tool from buffer" is set when a tool is removed by the NC from the
real magazine during a tool change. This location is then not designated as "free" for tools
other than the tool removed.
● The states "reserved for tool from buffer" and "reserved for new tool to be loaded" of a
location are automatically reset when a tool is placed in this location.
● The states "reserved for tool from buffer" and "reserved for new tool to be loaded" of a real
magazine location are automatically reset when a tool from this location is placed at a
location in the loading/unloading magazine.
● The state "reserved for tool from buffer" is reset during an empty location search if the tool
for which the empty location is being sought is assigned a magazine location other than its
previous real magazine location. The newly found empty location is assigned the state
"Reserved for tool from buffer" and becomes the new owner of the tool being sought.
The magazine location state "Reserved for tool to be loaded" is always reset when the control
system is restarted. If "Consider adjacent location" is active, reservations of adjacent locations
are also considered.
Users only have to deal with these rules if they wish to define the magazine directly at the NC
program level. Data back-up is such that the rules are observed when data is imported to the
NC.

$TC_MPP5 (location type index)

This data contains the spindle number for magazine locations of type "spindle" ($TC_MPP1)
and is thus made known to the tool management.
The value cannot be changed for location type = 1 ($TC_MPP1; i.e. for all locations of internal
magazines) if there is a tool at the location.

$TC_MPP6 (T No.)
● Tools can only be placed in magazine locations when both the tool and the magazine, plus
its magazine locations, have been defined.
The tool may occupy only one magazine location!
Procedure:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 191
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

It first attempts to find the tool associated with the T No.

● If it is already defined, then an attempt is made - subject to appropriate check procedure -
to add it to the magazine location.
● If it is not yet defined, then an error has occurred.
Checks:
● The type of the tool to be placed must match the type of the location. If the type has not been
set explicitly at the time of writing (default = 9999 = "Not defined"), then the tool is not placed.
● The state of the location must be "free" and must not be "disabled".
● If the value T No.=0 is programmed, then this means that the present tool will be removed
from the magazine location.
Notice: $TC_MPP6 = 0 also changes the state of the location: a tool can only be placed in
a magazine location if the location does not already contain a tool. The old tool might first
have to be removed with $TC_MPP6 = 0.
Note
Because of this dependency of the individual data, it is mandatory for the T number of the
tool to be written as the last data in a magazine configuration. If you do not adhere to this
sequence, default values might be set which may result in unwanted data.

6.6.5 Magazine location user data $TC_MPPC

$TC_MPPCx[n,m]
Magazine location user data
Up to 64 user data can be additionally created for each magazine (V4.7 and higher). Setting for
number of parameters in MD18092 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and enable with
MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
x: = Parameter 1...64
n: = Magazine number 1...30
m:= Magazine location number 1...32000

OPI block TUP

Calculation of line: (m-1)*numMagLocParams_u+ParameterNo.
Calculation of column: Magazine number

OEM user magazine location data

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MPPC1 INT userplaceData DINT 0
... INT userplaceData DINT 0
$TC_MPPC64 INT userplaceData DINT 0

Tool management
192 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

6.6.6 Magazine location type hierarchy $TC_MPTH

$TC_MPTH[n,m]
Magazine location type hierarchy
The location types can be organized in a hierarchy by programming these system variables.
n: = index of hierarchy, from 0...$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
m: = index within hierarchy n, location type 0...$MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES
Magazine location types, refer also to $TC_TP7 and $TC_MPP2.

OPI block TT
Calculation of line: Number of location type+1
Calculation of column: Number of the location hierarchy+1

Magazine data: Magazine location type hierarchy

NC identifier Typ Designation OPI variables Type Default set‐
e ting
$TC_MPTH[n,m INT Location type hierarchy placeType WOR 9999
] n: Hierarchy 0...$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERAR‐ D
CHIES - 1
m: Location type 0...$MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_EN‐
TRIES - 1

If a tool is to be loaded into the magazine, then the location type determines the availability of
locations, i.e. $TC_TP7 and $TC_MPP2 must be defined.
If the location type of the tool is part of the location type hierarchy, then the location assignment
is carried out in accordance with this hierarchy.
Several such hierarchies can be set up in one TO-area unit, With a conventional hierarchy, a
location type may only be entered in one hierarchy.
Example
A chain magazine is to be split into 6 location types and the following hierarchy defined (the
magazine No. is "1", the numbers of the location types are selected at random).
Location type_124 < Location type_3 < Location type_15 < Location type_1080 < Location
type_5 <Location type_18
Definitions:
Magazine:
$TC_MPP2[magazine no., location]
$TC_MPP2[1,1...6] = 124
$TC_MPP2[1,7...12] = 3
$TC_MPP2[1,13...18] = 15
$TC_MPP2[1,19...24] = 1080

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 193
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

$TC_MPP2[1,25...30] = 5
$TC_MPP2[1,31...36] = 18
Hierarchy:
$TC_MPTH[0,0] = 124
$TC_MPTH[0,1] = 3
$TC_MPTH[0,2] = 15
$TC_MPTH[0,3] = 1080
$TC_MPTH[0,4] = 5
$TC_MPTH[0,5] = 18
If a tool of type_15 ($TC_TP) is loaded, it is preferable for it to be stored at locations 13...18. If
none of these locations are free, the search for an empty location continues, in accordance with
the hierarchy, at locations of type_1080.

See also
Hierarchies of location types in magazines (Page 489)

6.6.7 Distance to change position $TC_MDP

$TC_MDPx[n,m]
Distance from magazine zero
$TC_MDPx[n,m]=value
x: = 1: Loading magazine: Loading points, loading station (1st int. mag.)
x: = 2: Buffer magazine: Spindle, gripper,..(2nd int. mag.)
n: = Magazine no. of real magazine
m: = Location no. of internal magazine (loading point,..).
Value: = Distance in number of locations

OPI block TPM

Calculation of line:
(LocNo.-1)*numPlaceMulti*numPlaceMultiParams+ParameterNo.

Tool management
194 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Calculation of column: Magazine number

Magazine data: Distance to change position

NC identifier Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_MDP1 INT Distance between tool change po‐ multiPlace WORD
sition of magazine n and location m
of 1st internal magazine (loading
magazine, 9999)
$TC_MDP2 INT Distance between tool change po‐ multiPlace WORD
sition of magazine n and location m
of 2nd internal magazine (loading
magazine, 9998)

Description
Magazine position
The current magazine position is required for tool change, loading and unloading. This position
refers to the magazine zero point established by the machine manufacturer. This is usually at
the change position.
The number of the location at the magazine zero point has to be given during initialization.
Otherwise, it is assumed that the non-existent location 0 is at the change position.
If the magazine is moved by a task, the current position is changed accordingly. The NC does
not know how many positions the magazine has moved but knows the targets of the relevant
commands. On the basis of the defined distance between and object (e.g. spindle 2) and the
change position, the NC is able to update the current position.
Comment:
The value of the distance and the current magazine position are also evaluated for box
magazines.
For empty location searches and tool searches, search strategies based on reference to the
current magazine position convert the position contained in system variable $TC_MAP8 to the
change position, loading point in each case at which the search is started. With search tasks,
the NC always specifies internally which change position, loading point is to be used as
reference for the search.
Assignment
By defining $TC_MDPx[n,m], a connection or assignment (distance relationship) is established
between the real magazine and the buffers or the loading points. The HMI can only display
assigned buffer locations and loading points. A tool transport within the scope of a t preparation
or a change can only be realized via an assigned buffer (exception: asynchronous transfers).
The tool search, for T preparation and change is also only made in those magazines assigned
to a spindle or tool holder.
The maximum number of these distance relationships can be defined with machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 195
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Example: 1st TO unit, 1 magazine, 1x spindle, double gripper, 2x loading point. This is a total
of 5 distance relationships (3x $TC_MDP2 to assign the real magazine to the 3 buffers, 2x
$TC_MDP1 to assign the real magazine to the two loading points).

Note
Command $TC_MDP2[n,m]=9999 can be used to dissolve a distance relationship.

Example:

%XIIHUORFDWLRQ %XIIHUORFDWLRQ

6SLQGOH 6SLQGOH

' '

   
  


  

0DJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH
  


7&B0$3>@  7&B0$3>@ 
   

   
   

/RDGLQJVWDWLRQIRUPDJD]LQHDQG
PDJD]LQH
/RFDWLRQLQORDGLQJPDJD]LQH

0DJD]LQH]HURSRLQW

D1 = Distance from magazine zero point to loading station -> 5 locations = $TC_MDP1[1,1]
D2 = Distance from magazine zero point to loading station -> 6 locations = $TC_MDP1[2,1]
Figure 6-7 Distance to change position $TC_MDPx[y,z]=value

The magazine zero point is usually the change position of the spindle. Therefore, the following
applies:
● If location 1 is located at zero position, the current magazine position = 1 ($TC_MAP8[1]).
Examples for programming the distance to the zero position:

$TC_MDP1[1,1] = 5 Distance between location 1 of the loading station and the zero position of mag‐
azine 1
$TC_MDP1[2,1] = 6 Distance between the same location and the zero position of magazine 2

Tool management
196 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

$TC_MDP2[1,1] = 0 Distance between location 1 of 2nd internal magazine and zero position of mag‐
azine 1
$TC_MDP2[2,2] = 0 Distance between location 2 of 2nd internal magazine and zero position of mag‐
azine 2

6.6.8 Magazine blocks $TC_MAMP

$TC_MAMPx
Magazine block data
x: = Parameter 1, 2, 3

OPI block TMC

Calculation of line: N/A
Calculation of column: N/A

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP1 String Identifier of the configuration magCBIdent String ""
magazine
Number of the loading magazine magBLMag WORD
Number of the buffer magazine magZWMag WORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 197
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP2 INT Type of tool search (bits 0...7) magSearch 0
and type of empty location
search (bits 8...16)
Bit 0=0: Default strategy
Take the first available tool found
in the tool group. First search in
the magazine from which the last
change took place.
Bit 0=1: Select the "active" tool in
the magazine of the previously
changed tool; otherwise search
for replacement tool with lowest
duplo number. If no tool is found
in this magazine, the search is
continued in the other associ‐
ated magazines.
Bit 1: Search for the next replace‐
ment tool at the shortest possible
distance from the current maga‐
zine position.
Bit 2: Select the "active" tool, oth‐
erwise the replacement tool with
the lowest number in $TC_TP10
(does not work with manual
tools).
Bit 3: Search for the tool in the
group with the lowest actual val‐
ue of the monitored quantity.
Bit 4: Search for tool in the group
with the highest actual value of
the monitored quantity.
$TC_MAMP2 INT Bit 5: Reserved magSearch 0
Bit 6: First search in the maga‐
zine currently being considered
(this is only effective in conjunc‐
tion with bit 7=1)
Bit 7=0: Start the tool search in
the magazine where the tool last
changed came from
Bit 7=1: Always start the search
in the 1st magazine of the dis‐
tance table
Bit 7= 1 + bit 0=1 or bit 2=1, if no
"activeTool" is found in the mag‐
azine, - if available - the active
tool is selected from another
magazine linked with the tool
holder

Tool management
198 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP2 Bit 8
Search forwards starting at first
location number
Bit 9
Search forwards starting at cur‐
rent magazine position
Bit 10
Search backwards starting at
last location number
$TC_MAMP2 Bit 11
Search backwards starting at
current magazine position
Bit 12
Symmetrical search starting at
the current magazine position
Bit 13
(1:1 exchange) behavior
If the 1:1 exchange is not possi‐
ble, the search strategy for an
empty location is considered
"symmetrical".
The 1:1 exchange acts in addi‐
tion to other set search strat‐
egies. If possible, the 1:1 ex‐
change is treated as a priority.
Bit 14 = 0
Search within individual maga‐
zines first. If no possible location
is found, search in the next mag‐
azine for a free location for the
tool.
Bit 14 = 1
Search in all magazines for the
best location according to the hi‐
erarchy for the tool.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 199
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
Bit 15 = 0 (conventional hierar‐
chy type): For this type, the loca‐
tion type of the tool conducting
the search is searched for in the
table of system variable
$TC_MPTH. If the location type
is found, this hierarchy is taken
and evaluated from this level to
the end.
Bit 15 = 1 (alternative hierarchy
type): Location type hierarchies
can be defined for the listed lo‐
cation types 1, ...,
$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HI‐
ERARCHIES. The hierarchy for
location type 1 is defined by
$TC_MPTH[0,n], for location
type 2 by $TC_MPTH[1,n], and
so on. (n: index within a hierar‐
chy). With this setting, a location
type can be defined in different
hierarchies.
$TC_MAMP2 INT Bit16:
The mini hierarchy, which con‐
sists only of the location type it‐
self and location type 0, cancels
consideration of hierarchy. In
this case, the empty location
search does not distinguish be‐
tween a suitable location type
( $TC_TP7 == $TC_MPP2) and
the general location type "0" of
the magazine location.
$TC_MAMP3 INT Procedure for tools in a wear mode‐ WORD 0
group (bit 0...7) WearGroup
Search strategies for wear
groups (bit 8...15)
Bit 0=0: When a wear group is
activated, the tool status re‐
mains unchanged
Bit 0=1: When a wear group is
activated, the tool status is
changed. One tool from each
tool group becomes active

Tool management
200 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NC identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP3 Bit 1=0: When a wear group is
disabled, the tool status remains
unchanged
Bit 1=1: When a wear group is
disabled, the tool status is
changed
Bit 2...7 reserved
Search strategy for next wear
group
Bit 8=0: Find the next possible
wear group
Bit 8=1: Find the wear group with
the next highest group number
that can be activated
Bit 9...11 reserved
$TC_MAMP3 Search strategy within the tool
group for the tool to be set to ac‐
tive (NC command SETTA or
PI_SETTST)
Bit 12=0: Lowest possible duplo
number
Bit 12=1: Lowest possible maga‐
zine location number
Bit 13=1: Lowest number con‐
tained in $TC_TP10 (substitute
order)

Interaction of the bits for the tool search strategy

The following strategies always start the search in the first magazine of the distance table.

$TC_MAMP2 = Meaning
Bit Hex value
7+0 'H80' Otherwise, the same as value 0
7+0 'H81' Otherwise, the same as value 1 - however, if an "active" tool is not found in the
magazine, - if available - the "active" tool is selected from another magazine linked
with the tool holder. If no tool with the "active" state is available, a search is made
for the replacement tool with the lowest duplo number.
7+6+0 'HC1' Otherwise, the same as value 1 - however, if an "active" tool is not found in the
magazine, a search is made in the same magazine for any tool that can be used;
if no tool is available, a search is made in another magazine linked with the tool
holder.
7+1 'H82' Otherwise, the same as bit 1 =1 ('H2')
7+6+1 'HC2'

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 201
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

$TC_MAMP2 = Meaning
7+2 'H84' Otherwise, the same as bit 2 = 1 ('H4') - however, if an "active" tool is not found in
the magazine, - if available - the "active" tool is selected from another magazine
linked with the tool holder. If no tool with the "active" state is available, a search is
made for the replacement tool with the lowest number in $TC_TP10.
7+6+2 'HC4' Otherwise, the same as bit 2 =1 ('H4') - however if no "active" tool is found in the
magazine, a search is made in the same magazine for a tool that can be used, if
available, a search is made for the replacement tool in another magazine linked
with the tool holder with the lowest number in $TC_TP10.
7+3 'H88' Otherwise, the same as bit 3 =1 ('H8')
7+6+3 'HC8'
7+4 'H90' Otherwise, the same as bit 4 =1 ('H10')
7+6+4 'HD0'

Search operation for $TC_MAMP2, bit 0=1, bit 6=0, bit 7=1
A search is made for the appropriate tool in the magazine according to the tool search strategy
that has been set (defined using parameter $TC_MAMP2). The search is considered to have
been successful if a tool was found according to the search strategy.
Search operation for $TC_MAMP2, bit 0=1, bit 6=1, bit 7=1
A search is first made for the appropriate tool in the magazine according to the tool search
strategy that has been set (defined using parameter $TC_MAMP2). The search is considered
to have been successful if a tool according to the search strategy was found - or all tools of the
group were checked and no tool was found according to the search strategy - but in spite of this,
a tool that can be used was found among the tools that were searched.
If a search is made according to the strategy, bit 2=1 (sequence of use $TC_TP10) then the
same principle applies. The criterion is also "active tool" and instead of the duplo number, the
number in $TC_TP10.

Example to clarify the principle of operation of bit 6 and bit 7

0DJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH

7RRO 7RRO
 
0LOOB 0LOOB
 
7RRO 7RRO DFWLYH
7RRO 7RRO
 
7RRO 7RRO
7RRO 7RRO DFWLYH
 

6SLQGOH

7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

Tool management
202 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Assumption:
● All tools can be used
● Basic setting of the search strategy is bit 0 = 1 - search for the active tool, if there is no active
tool, take the tool with the lowest duplo No.
● Spindle_1 is linked to both magazines, magazine_1 is the first in the distance table
Example_1:
Bit 6 = 0
Bit 7 = 0

T="Mill_15" M06 There is only one "Mill_15" tool, it was found in magazine_1 and was
loaded
...
T="Tool3" M06 The last change was performed from magazine_1. Therefore, the
search is first made in magazine_1. There is no active "Tool3" there,
but there are two tools in this group that can be used. The tool with the
lowest duplo no. is selected. Magazine_2 is no longer considered.
Example_2:
Bit 6 = 0
Bit 7 = 1

T="Mill_20" M06 There is only one "Mill_20" tool, it was found in Magazine_2 and was
loaded
...
T="Tool3" M06 The last change was performed from Magazine_2. As a result of bit
7 = 1, the tool search is however started in Magazine_1. But this
setting also means that the search strategy "active tool" has priority
over a magazine-specific approach. This means that: No active tool
from the group "Tool3" was found in Magazine_1, i.e. the search is
continued in the next magazine (corresponding to the sequence in
the distance table). An active "Tool3" is there - and this is selected.
Example_3:
Bit 6 = 1
Bit 7 = 1

T="Mill_20" M06 There is only one "Mill_20" tool, it was found in Magazine_2 and was
loaded
...
T="Tool3" M06 The last change was performed from Magazine_2. As a result of bit
7 = 1, the tool search starts in Magazine_1. However, no tool of this
group is present there. As a result of bit 6 = 1 (considers the actual
magazine with priority), a search is now made for a "Tool3" that can
be used in Magazine_1 (for this search, this is also the actual mag‐
azine); this tool is also found.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 203
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

$TC_MAMP2
For software releases less than 2.5, the tool search is always made magazine for magazine,
starting in the magazine from which the last change was made.
With bit 7 there is an additional option to select the tool search.
Bit 7 = 1
The search always starts in the 1st magazine of the distance table. If the search for the active
tool is set using either bit 0 or bit 2, a search is made for the active tool across all of the
magazines linked with the spindle. A search is only made for a replacement tool if no active tool
was found in all of these magazines.

Note
The tool sequence in a tool group is not defined (e.g. ascending duplo number). This means,
if the default strategy is used for the search (MAMP2=0), any tool that is capable of being used
is found.

6.6.9 Assignment of buffers to spindles $TC_MLSR

$TC_MLSR[x,y]
Assignment of buffer locations to spindles - $TC_MLSR[x,y]
x: = Location no. in buffer 1 ... 32000
y: = Location no. of the spindle in buffer magazine 1 ... 32000

OPI block n.a.

Calculation of line: N/A
Calculation of column: N/A

NC identifier Type Designation OPI varia‐ Type Default set‐

bles ting
$TC_MLSR[x,y] INT System variable for assigning maga‐ - - 0
zine locations of the buffer magazine
to the spindle

Description
This assignment is important when searching for tools. The search is always made, viewed
from the requesting spindle, initially in the associated buffers, then in the assigned magazines.
This means that a tool, which is located in the buffer, can only be found if there is an assignment
to the spindle via parameter $TC_MLSR.
The number of possible links between the spindle and the buffer can be set using machine data
$MN_MM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC.

Tool management
204 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

Example: 1st TO unit, 1 magazine, 1x spindle, double gripper, 2x loading point. The double
gripper is linked to the spindle via $TC_MLSR[2,1]=0 and $TC_MLSR[3,1]=0. The correct value
for the MD is "2".
The sequence when programming is decisive for the sequence when automatically returning
tools.

Note
The content value of the system variable is not evaluated. The assignment is defined via indices
x and y. In order to check via the part program whether a certain assignment exists, a read
operation has to return the value zero.

Note
No more than 16 magazines or buffer locations can be assigned to one spindle.

Magazine distance to buffer via tool holder / spindle

$TC_MDP2 and $TC_MLSR establish a relationship between the buffer locations and
magazines.

0DJD]LQH EXIIHUPDJD]LQH

*ULSSHU
0DJD]LQH /RFDWLRQ 

7&B0/65>@ 

7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 
0DJD]LQH 7RROKROGHU 7RROKROGHU
/RFDWLRQ  /RFDWLRQ 

7&B0'3>@ 

7&B0/65>@ 
7&B0/65>@ 

*ULSSHU
/RFDWLRQ 

Figure 6-8 Magazine distance to the buffer

Configuration
Two magazines are defined with numbers 1 and 2.
Four locations 1, 2, 3 and 4 are defined in buffer 9998; two tool holders 5, 7 and two grippers
4, 5.

$TC_MPP1[9998,1] = 2 ;Location type = spindle or tool holder

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 205
NC programming
6.6 Magazine data

$TC_MPP5[9998,1] = 7 ;Tool holder no. = 7

$TC_MPP1[9998,2] = 3 ;Location type = gripper
$TC_MPP5[9998,2] = 4 ;Gripper no. = 4
$TC_MPP1[9998,3] = 3 ;Location type = gripper
$TC_MPP5[9998,3] = 5 ;Gripper no. = 5
$TC_MPP1[9998,4] = 2 ;Location type = spindle or tool holder
$TC_MPP5[9998,4] = 5 ;Tool holder no. = 5

Both grippers are linked to tool holder 5 via $TC_MLSR. They do not require their own distance
definition for the magazines. They are linked to the magazines via tool holder 5 with the
distance relations defined there. However, it is also possible to define separate distance
relationships for the grippers.
Tool holder 5 is linked with both magazines via $TC_MDP2.
Tool holder 7 is only linked with magazine 2; gripper 5 is assigned to it.

Tool management
206 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

6.7 Multitool data

6.7.1 $TC_MTP - multitool data

Overview
A multitool is a combination of several tools to form a unit. The following parameters allow a
multitool to be described so that it fits into the systemology of the tool magazine function.
All of the parameters in the following table have no physical units. The default access right is
"key-operated switch position 0" - for access operations from the NC program as well as for
access operations from the OPI. Access rights can be restricted using the REDEF command.
$TC_MTPx[y]
x: Parameters 1 …8, …PROTA
y: = Multitool number MT = 1 …32000

NC identifier Description Format Preassignment, limit values

$TC_MTPN The number of locations INT 2
is defined as delete com‐ 2-$MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
mand
$TC_MTP2 Identifiers STRING MT number
$TC_MTP3 Size to the left in half lo‐ INT 1
cations (= towards a low‐ 1 - 11
er location number)
$TC_MTP4 Size to the right in half lo‐ INT 1
cations (= towards a 1 - 11
higher location number)
$TC_MTP5 Size upwards in half lo‐ INT 1
cations (= towards a low‐ 1 - 11
er location number)
$TC_MTP6 Size downwards in half INT 1
locations (= towards a 1 - 11
higher location number)
$TC_MTP7 Magazine location type INT 9999 (not defined)
0 - 32000
$TC_MTP8 State; bit-coded INT 0 (not enabled)
0 - "0x3FFFF"
$TC_MTP_POS MT position. The follow‐ INT 0 (not defined)
ing applies: Position 1 is 0-$MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
defined as "location 1 in
the machining position"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 207
NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

NC identifier Description Format Preassignment, limit values

$TC_MTP_KD Type of distance coding INT 0 (not defined)
1 (= location number)
2 (= length)
3 (= angle)
$TC_MTP_PROTA Name of the protection STRING ""(= not defined)
zone or name of the file,
which contains the de‐
scription of the protec‐
tion zone.

$TC_MTPN - number of MT locations

The multitool does not have a duplo number like the tool. The parameter $TC_MTPN contains
the number of locations, which the multitool offers to accept tools. In addition, by programming
$TC_MTPN[mtNo] = 0 the multitool is deleted. After MT locations have been generated, the
parameter can no longer be changed.
A multitool is similar to a chain magazine with regard to its locations, i.e. if there are tool search
strategies or empty location search strategies with results that depend on the type of magazine,
the property can be like that of a chain magazine.

$TC_MTP2 - MT name
Multitools can be assigned names so that a multitool can be uniquely defined by its name or by
its number. The rules that apply when assigning names are the same as those that apply to tool
names. Multitool names must be different from tool names and magazine names within a TO
unit.

$TC_MTTP3 $TC_MTP6 - MT size

The size data of a multitool is essentially the same as the size data of a tool - and is used to find
an optimally suitable magazine location for the multitool when loading into the magazine (empty
location search) when consider adjacent location is active.
The rules for changing the multitool size are the same as the rules for changing the tool size,
i.e. the MT size of a multitool can be changed so long as the MT is not assigned to an owner
location.

$TC_MTP7
The magazine location type of the multitool is essentially the same as the magazine location
type of a simple tool and is required for the empty location search, empty location check
(loading operations into the magazine, tool change). The permitted values and rules to change
data correspond to those that apply for the corresponding data in the tool. The value cannot be
changed if the multitool is loaded into the magazine.
For multitools that are contained in the loading magazines or buffer magazines and still do not
have an owner location (i. e. that are logically valid as unloaded – $A_MYMN=0,
$A_MYMLN=0), the magazine location type can be changed. The magazine location type of a
multitool can be changed, as long as the multitool is still not assigned to an owner location.

Tool management
208 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

$TC_MTP8 - MT state
The state of a multitool corresponds to the state of an individual tool. The defined states are the
same as those of an individual tool as defined under $TC_TP.
The following additional definitions apply:

Bit Meaning Comment

0 Active Reserved
Multitools do not have the "active" state defined. Only tools contained in them can
assume the state.
1 Released Equipped multitools have this state, so that a tool in them can be selected.
2 Blocked Multitool can be disabled. Independent of the state of the contained tools, the
selection of these tools can be prevented. The PLC signal "ignore disabled state"
also ignores the disabled state of the multitool. The tool change command TCA for
a tool ignores the disabled state of the multitool.
3 measured Reserved
Multitools cannot be measured. Only tools contained in them can assume the
state.
4 Prewarning limit reached Reserved
Multitools cannot be monitored. Only tools contained in them can assume the
state.
5 is being changed Protect the multitool during tool selection from competing additional tool selection/
MT motion. This means that it is not possible to select a tool within the MT, as long
as this state is set due to the selection of a tool in the MT.
If the state is set, it is permitted to select another tool from the MT, if this selection
regarding the same toolholder is realized just like the selection, that had set the
state of the MT. In this case, there is no competing tool selection, but instead a
replacing one. If the state is set, then a tool in this MT also has this state set. The
state is reset again together with that of the tool. Bit 21 from $TC_TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_MASK refers to the tool and the MT.
The state is reset at POWER ON.
6 fixed-location-coded Multitools can be fixed-location-coded
7 was in use The state of multitools is defined the same as that of the tool. After unloading a tool
from the tool holder, the MT and the old tool are assigned the state.
8 autom. return transport Regarding the tool transport, multitools behave just the same as basic tools.
$TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit15 also refers to this state.
9 ignore locked The state is internally set and reset. The rules are essentially the same as the rules
for the tool.
10 MT is to be unloaded Multitools can be selected for unloading
11 MT is to be loaded Multitool can be selected for loading
12 Reserved Reserved
13 Reserved Reserved
14 Selected for 1:1 exchange Multitool is selected for the pending 1:1 exchange. The rules as for the tool apply.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 209
NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

Bit Meaning Comment

15 Manual tool The multitool is used as manual tool. The state is set and reset again for the MT as
part of the tool selection. The tool to be selected and its MT change state syn‐
chronously. The tools not involved with the tool selection do not experience a state
change.
16 MT is locked if a tool in the MT If a tool contained in the MT has made the state transition to "disabled", then the
is locked MT also assumes this state (bit 2). After a tool has made the state transition to "not
disabled", and then there is no longer any tool in the multitool that has the "disa‐
bled" state, then the MT itself also loses the "disabled" state.
Loading/removing a disabled / enabled tool to the MT or from the MT can change
the MT state "disabled/enabled".
Example: Loading to a disabled tool corresponds to an MT state transition to
"disabled".

Note
Reserved or non-defined MT state bits cannot be written to. Writing to such a bit results in Alarm
17050 "illegal value".

Interdependencies between the tool and multitool states

Tools, which are loaded in the multitool, can influence the state of the multitool and for MT
transport operations, the MT can influence the tool status of the loaded tool.

Bit Meaning Comment

1 Released Users allocate tools and multitools a status independent of one another. (Enabled
tools can be loaded into a multitool that has not been enabled. Tools that have not
been enabled can be loaded into an enabled MT.)
2 Blocked Changing this state is initiated from the tool as part of the tool monitoring and the
command RESETMON . Examples 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b at the end of this table show how
the state of loaded tools can influence that of the multitool.
User-specific changes to the MT state are not transferred to the loaded tools.
5 is being changed The state is set and reset again for the MT as part of the tool selection. The tool to
be selected and its MT change the state synchronously. The tools not involved
with the tool selection do not experience a state change.
The state is always reset at POWER ON.
6 fixed-location-coded Tools loaded in the MT are implicitly fixed-location-coded, i.e., the state has no
significance for the tool in the MT. For the MT itself, the state is defined; however,
this has no influence on the loaded tools. If the tool state changes, this has no
effect on the state of the multitool.
7 was in use The state is automatically set as part of the tool change for the MT and the tool in
the MT involved in the change. Tools in the MT, not involved in the tool change, do
not change the state.
The user is responsible for the reset. If the last tool contained in the MT loses this
state, the MT also loses this state. If the user deletes the multitool state, then the
states of all of the tools contained in it are also deleted.
If the user sets this MT state, it has no effect on the loaded tools in the MT.
8 autom. return transport At the tool change, the state is automatically set and reset for the MT only, however
not for the tools contained in the MT.

Tool management
210 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

Bit Meaning Comment

9 ignore locked The state is set and reset automatically. The state is set and reset for the tool to be
loaded and for the MT in which this tool is loaded. For the other tools not involved
in the change, the state remains unchanged.
10 MT is to be unloaded When unloading from the magazine, the MT and the its loaded tools lose this state.
If a tool that has this state set is removed from the MT, then the state in the tool that
has been removed is reset.
11 MT is to be loaded When loaded to a magazine location, the MT and the tools loaded in it lose this
state. If a tool that has this state set is loaded into an MT, then the tool state:
– is not changed, if the MT has the state set
– is reset, if the MT does not have this state set.
12 Master tool The user allocates the state. The tool state does not influence the MT – and vice
versa.
14 selected for 1:1 exchange This state is not required for tools loaded in the MT. As part of the empty location
search, it is only automatically set for the MT and reset again at the end of the
command.
16 MT is locked if a tool in the See examples 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b at the end of this table.
MT is locked Notice
If tools are in the MT at the time of the state change, the following applies: When
the state is changed, the state of the loaded tools is checked and the MT state
"disabled" set or reset.
Notice
The loading/removing of a tool to the MT / from the MT causes the states of the
tools loaded in the MT to be checked loading/removing has been completed and
the MT state "disabled" is set accordingly. See examples 4a, 4b.

Example 1a:
Bit 2 = 0 and bit 16 = 1
The MT has three tools that are not disabled and have been enabled. The MT itself is also not
disabled and has been enabled. Bit 16 is set to 1.
If the "disabled" state of any tool in this MT is set (either manually or automatically), the
"disabled" state will also be set in the MT, although there are still two tools for which the
"disabled" state has not been set (i.e., these tools can still be used).
Example 1b:
Bit 2 = 1 and bit 16 = 1
The MT has three tools that are disabled and have been enabled. The MT itself is also disabled
and has been enabled. Bit 16 = 1 is set.
If the "disabled" state of two of the three tools is deleted in the MT, then the "disabled" state of
the multitool itself remains unchanged. If, for the last tool with the "disabled" state, the
"disabled" state is deleted (either manually or automatically), then the "disabled" state is also
deleted in the MT.
Example 2a:
Bit 2 = 0 and bit 16 = 0
The MT has three tools that are not disabled and can be used. The MT itself is also not disabled
and has been enabled. Bit 16 = 0 is set.
If the "disabled" state of two of the three tools is set in the MT (either manually or automatically),
then the status value of bits 2 in the MT remain unchanged. This means that the last "not

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 211
NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

disabled" tool of the multitool can still be loaded. The MT is only set to the "disabled" state when
this last tool also enters the "disabled" state.
Example 2b:
Bit 2 = 1 and bit 16 = 0
The MT has three tools that are disabled and can be used. The MT itself is also disabled and
has been enabled. Bit 16 = 0 is set.
If the "disabled" state of a tool in the MT is deleted (either manually or automatically), then in
addition, the "disabled" state in the MT is also deleted, independent of the state of the other
tools in the MT.
Bit 16 = 0 is advantageous, for example, if the MT only contains identical tools. All tools can then
be used until their relevant monitoring limit has been reached.
Bit 16 = 1 is advantageous, for example, if an MT is to be loaded and the tools it contains are
different and have to perform various machining operations. If one of these tools is now
disabled due to the monitoring function, then another MT must be loaded, which contains a
complete set of tools that are ready for use for this particular machining operation.
A graphic representation of the "disabled" state coupling is again shown in the following two
diagrams:

07VWDWH7&B073 7RROVWDWH7&B73

'LVDEOHG * 'LVDEOHG  *
1RWGLVDEOHG ) 1RWGLVDEOHG  )

) ) ) * ) )

) ) * * * )

) * * * * *
) ) ) * ) )

7&B073ELW 
6TXDUHPHDQVPXOWLWRROFLUFOHLQVTXDUHPHDQVWRRO
Figure 6-9 Automatic state change of the multitool depending on the state of the loaded tools and bit 16 of $TC_MTP8

Example 3a:
Bit 16 = 0:
If in the figure above bit 16 is changed from 0 to 1 at the time when the state is the same as
shown in the fifth MT state figure from the left (MT with F), then the state of the MT changes from
F to G because at least one tool with the state G has been loaded after the bit value change and
therefore the MT also assumes the state G. When the bit value changes from 0 to 1, the figure
changes to the following.
Example 4a:
Bit 16 = 0:

Tool management
212 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

If in the third MT state figure from the left (MT with F), the tool with F is removed from the
multitool, the state of the MT changes from F to G because only two tools with the state G are
loaded after the tool removal and therefore the MT also assumes the state G.

07VWDWH7&B073 7RROVWDWH7&B73

'LVDEOHG * 'LVDEOHG  *
1RWGLVDEOHG ) 1RWGLVDEOHG  )

) ) ) * ) )

) ) * * * )

) * * * * *
) * * * * *

7&B073ELW 
6TXDUHPHDQVPXOWLWRROFLUFOHLQVTXDUHPHDQVWRRO

Figure 6-10 Automatic state change of the multitool depending on the state of the loaded tools and bit 16 of $TC_MTP8

Example 4b:
Bit 16 = 1:
If in the second MT state figure from the left (MT with G), the tool with G is removed from the
multitool, the state of the MT changes from G to F because only two tools with the state F are
loaded after the tool removal and therefore the MT also assumes the state F.

$TC_MTP_POS - MT position
The position of the multitool is the MT location number of the location, which is in the machining
position, and which typically contains the machining (active) tool; see the next figure.
With the final acknowledgement (PLC status value = 1) of a tool change command for a tool in
the MT, the MT position is set to the value of the MT location number of the MT location, which
contains the tool that was loaded. The other PLC status values (e.g. status_105) do not change
the MT position value.
With the end acknowledgement (PLC status value = 1) of an MT positioning command
(POSMT, _N_POSMT), the MT position is set to the value of the programmed MT location
number. The other PLC status values are not permitted for the MT positioning command and
are rejected with Alarm 6405 "incorrect acknowledgement data".
With an asynchronous transfer control, the PLC can position the multitool.
If a command output to the PLC is not acknowledged with "end" (e.g. cancel, status_3), then the
MT position in the NC is not updated (even if the positioning has already been mechanically
carried out).
The MT position of a multitool, which is not located in a toolholder, has no further significance.
The exception is programming T="magazine location number", which is typically used for
revolvers.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 213
NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW 'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW

7&B073B326>@ 
7&B073B326>@ 
/RFDWLRQ

  


 
 

07SRVLWLRQ 
  

Figure 6-11 The location on the machining position determines the MT position

Example 1:
An MT is moved to the tool holder with a tool motion command (e.g. MVTOOL). The parameters
are set according to the current MT position. With the final acknowledgement of the MT motion
command, the PLC can inform the NC whether and how the position of the multitool is to be
updated.
● The FC6 is parameterized with MultitoolLoc=0. NC does not perform a position
synchronization, the mechanical position can differ from the data position.
● The FC6 is parameterized with MultitoolLoc=1 (valid MT location number). This means that
the NC synchronizes the MT position with the acknowledged position.
If subsequently a tool change is programmed for a tool of this MT on the tool holder, a tool
change command is output to the PLC with which the MT positioning data is sent to the PLC.
With the final acknowledgement of the tool change, the MT position is updated to the value that
belongs to the tool that is to be loaded. The PLC must have performed the MT positioning
before the final acknowledgement is sent to the NC. The PLC must not change the MT position
for the tool selection, tool change commands specified by the NC in the acknowledgement
data. The attempt is rejected with alarm 6405 "Command has invalid PLC acknowledgement
parameter".
Example 2:
An MT is moved to the tool holder with a tool motion command (e.g. MVTOOL). As in example
1, the MT positioning/synchronization depends on the PLC application.
If subsequently a RESET is executed, then – when RESET is configured with "Activate tool on
the master tool holder" – a tool change command is output to the PLC with which the data of the
tool to be activated and the MT positioning data is sent to the PLC. With RESET, the tool to be
activated is specified in the NC as the tool at the MT location displayed at the MT position output
to the PLC. This means that in this example, it depends on the PLC logic for the tool motion on
the master tool holder, which tool is activated at RESET. If a different tool is to be activated, this
must be specified in the application , for example by positioning the MT appropriately first with
the NC program command POSMT (or similar PI _N_POSMT by the HMI or PLC). It is also
possible to set the MT position in the NC directly to the desired value before the RESET (by
programming parameter $TC_MTP8 or by writing the position via the operator panel interface
(by the HMI or PLC), or the PLC positions the multitool with an asynchronous transfer).

Tool management
214 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

$TC_MTP_KD - type of distance coding for the MT locations

The location distances (KindOfDistance) within the multitool can be defined in a variety of ways:

$TC_MTP_KD[y] = 1 The distance coding uses the MT location number. The location
number is automatically allocated when creating the MT locations.
$TC_MTPPL, $TC_MTPPA cannot be written except with the value
0.0.
$TC_MTP_KD[y] = 2 The distance coding is via length specifications. $TC_MTPPL can be
written, $TC_MTPPA cannot be written, except
$TC_MTPPA[...]=0.0.
$TC_MTP_KD[y] = 3 The distance coding is via angle specifications. $TC_MTPPA can be
written, $TC_MTPPL cannot be written, except
$TC_MTPPL[...]=0.0.
The type of distance coding can only be changed as long as no MT locations have been
created. Otherwise Alarm 6438 "Inconsistent data modification is not permitted" is generated.
Example:
If, for distance coding, the location number has been defined ($TC_MTP_KD[ y ] = 1), then
writing $TC_MTPPL, $TC_MTPPA with values other than 0.0 results in alarm 6464 "Command
cannot be programmed for the current multitool distance coding".
Example:
The multitool is defined. Although the number of MT locations has been defined, they have still
not been created.

$TC_MTP_KD[200] = 1 ;subsequently writing to $TC_MTPPL or $TC_MTPPA results in

;Alarm "Command cannot be programmed for the defined multi‐
tool distance coding"
$TC_MTP_KD[300] = 2 ;subsequently writing to $TC_MTPPL is permitted.
;subsequently writing to $TC_MTPPA results in Alarm
;"Command cannot be programmed for the defined
;multitool distance coding"
The MT locations are now created, e.g. by writing to the system of parameters:

$TC_MTPPL[300, 1] = 30.0 ; all MT locations are implicitly created using the command
Then an attempt is made to change the distance type (that was previously defined using
$TC_MTP_KD[300] = 2):

$TC_MTPPL[300, 1] = 3 ;After the MT locations have been created, the type of

;distance coding must no longer be changed:
;Alarm "Inconsistent data change not permitted"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 215
NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

6.7.2 $TC_MTPP - Multitool location data

Overview
The default access right of the following parameters is "key switch position 0" (everyone has
access), for access operations from the NC program as well as for access operations from the
OPI. Access rights can be restricted using the REDEF command.
$TC_MTPPx[y, z]
x:= 2, 4, 6, 7, L, A (see table)
y: = multitool numer MT=1...32000
z: = n-th location in the multitool; 1,...$MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
The x parameter numbers are based on the values of the magazine location parameters.
The x numbers of the parameters are based on the numbers of the $TC_MPP1,... magazine
location parameters.

NC identifier Description Format Physic. unit Pre-assigned

limit values
$TC_MTPP2 Multitool location type INT None 0 (=every tool fits the
(corresponds to the significance of the mag‐ location)
azine location type) 0 - 32000
$TC_MTPP4 MT location state INT None 0 (=every tool fits the
location)
0-3
$TC_MTPP6 T number of the tool contained INT None 0
0 - 32000
$TC_MTPP7 Adapter number of the tool adapter at this INT None 0
multitool location 0 - 32000
$TC_MTPPL Distance to the reference location; "length" REAL Length 0
unit (L stands for length) [mm/inch] 0 - 1000
$TC_MTPPA Distance to the reference location; "angle" REAL Angle 0
unit (A stands for angle) [degrees] 0 - 360

Example:Transporting a multitool (loading into the magazine or onto the spindle)

"Multitool_2" has been created (T-no. 25), with six locations and distance coding "location".
The multitool is directly loaded onto the spindle, e.g. via the user interface. This means that no
positioning is involved.
The NC generates a transport task (CMD1)
ID:00000/00000 ------ CMD:00001
NewTool: from M: 09999 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00025
TMMVTL-chan: 00000
isMultitool: 00001 MTPN: 00006 MT-Dist:
00000/0.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
The multitool is loaded just like an individual tool.

Tool management
216 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

Additional information is contained in the command: Multitool, distance coding "location"

The user interface looks like this:

DB71 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBBn 00000001 Loading
DBB(n+1) 10000000 Data available in the extended range, i.e. it
is a multitool

DBW(n+20) 0 Magazine no. (source)

DBW(n+22) 0 Location no. (source)
DBW(n+24) 9998 Magazine no. (target)
DBW(n+26) 1 Location no. (target)

DB1071 DBW(n+0) 1 Multitool, distance coding is "location"

....
All other data is "0" – there is no additional information from the NC
There are now two options for acknowledging:
● The multitool position remains undetermined, i.e. the init blocks do not output a command
and no offset is selected. This option makes sense if the tool is loaded into the magazine (the
multitool position is not evaluated) or if the tool is loaded via the spindle. The multitool must
be positioned if a tool in the multitool is now to be brought into the machining position (from
a data perspective).
● The PLC specifies a position. This means that the NC synchronizes to the acknowledged
position. An init block can activate the tool that is at this location.
FC6 can be parameterized as follows:

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 Target for the new tool: Magazine DB71.DBW(n+24) –
NewToolLoc 1 Target for the new tool: Location DB71.DBW(n+26)
OldToolMag 0 Source for the old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Source for the old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Operation completed
MultitoolLoc 0/x In case_1, "0" should be entered here. The multitool position remains undeter‐
mined, alternatively "-1"
In case_2, the multitool location, which is in the machining position, is entered
here.
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 217
NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

Positioning a multitool
It is only possible to position a multitool, if
a) It is located on a tool holder
b) No offset is active. This means that none of the tools in this multitool may be active.
Positioning can be performed via the language command POSMT or the similar PI service
(POSMT). Positioning from the PLC via an asynchronous transfer is also possible.
The multitool loaded onto the spindle in the previous example is now positioned to location_5
using a part program.
N10 POSMT(state 5,1); position the multitool on tool holder_1 at
position 5
NC generates a command 1
ID:00001/00000 ------ CMD:00001
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00025
Spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 00001 MTPN: 00006 MT-Dist:
00005/5.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
New tool from spindle to spindle, i.e. it is already on the spindle. T-No=25, spindle=1
Multitool with distance coding "location", number of locations of the multitool=6, target
position=5.
There is no old tool
The user interface looks like this:

DB71 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBBn 00110000 Positioning the multitool / command
comes from the part program
DBB(n+1) 10000000 Data available in the extended range, i.e. it
is a multitool

DBW(n+20) 9998 Magazine no. (source)

DBW(n+22) 1 Location no. (source)
DBW(n+24) 9998 Magazine no. (target)
DBW(n+26) 1 Location no. (target)

DB1071 DBW(n+0) 1 Multitool, distance coding is "location"

DBW(n+2) 6 Number of locations of the multitool
DBD(n+4) 5.0 Location distance
DBW(n+8) 25 T no. of the multitool
DBW(n+10) 5 Location no. in the multitool
....
All other data is "0"

Tool management
218 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

FC6 can be parameterized as follows:

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 Target for the new tool: Magazine DB71.DBW(n+24) –
NewToolLoc 1 Target for the new tool: Location DB71.DBW(n+26)
OldToolMag 0 Source for the old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Source for the old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Operation completed
MultitoolLoc 5 Multitool position - DB1071.DBW(n+10)
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

$TC_MTPP2 - MT location type

The location type of a tool must match the location type of the MT location. It is checked when
the multitool is loaded by writing parameter $TC_MTPP6.
The location type may only be changed when the new value is compatible with the value of the
location type of a loaded tool.
The default value is selected (each tool fits the MT location) in such a way that, when the
"Location type check" function is not required in the specific application for the tool loading
operation, the parameter does not have to be considered, and therefore the default setting is
already suitable.

$TC_MTPP4 - MT location state

The following location states have been defined (bit numbers and definition based on the state
of the magazine location; $TC_MPP4):
0 Disabled
1 Free to accept a tool

$TC_MTPP6 - T number of the loaded tool

The locations of the multitools can be loaded with tools. The loading can only be defined with
the aid of parameter $TC_MTPP6. In particular, loading involving the PLC has not been
defined. (The OPI PI service _N_TMMVTL and the NC language command MVTOOL are
exclusively for the loading/unloading of tools and multitools to and from magazines.) With
$TC_MTPP6[MT no., loc. no.] = T number, loading is performed. With $TC_MTPP6[MT no.,
loc. no.] = 0, a tool is removed from the multitool.
The multitool can contain tools with the same or different names. Each tool fits into each
location of a multitool with the default value of $TC_MTPP2. Generally, it is assumed that a
multitool is a mechanical entity whose correct loading is the sole responsibility of the user.
If $TC_MTP8, bit 16 = 1 has been set for the MT state, the following must be considered:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 219
NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

When loading a tool to an MT or removing a tool from an MT, the MT state "disabled"/"not
disabled" can change. The following applies:
● After loading, the states of the tools in the MT determine whether and how the state of the
multitool is changed automatically.
When removing a tool from an MT, the following applies:
● After removing the tool, the states of the remaining tools in the MT determine whether and
how the state of the MT is changed automatically.
Formally, a tool can be loaded to an MT or removed from an MT at any time. It is the
responsibility of the user to ensure compliance with the application. For example, the user must
know what it means to remove an MT loaded on a tool holder from the tool holder, or to remove
and active tool from an MT.
A tool can be assigned either to a magazine or to an MT, but not to both at the same time. Such
an attempt is rejected with alarm 17260 "Illegal magazine location definition".
When loading a tool to an MT, the magazine location type of the tool and the MT location are
checked for compatibility if the MT location type does not have the value "Every tool fits the
location" (this is the default value). A tool can only be loaded to an MT location when the state
of the MT location is "Free".

Note
Multitools do not have a "Consider adjacent location" function for oversized tools. This means
that the tool size is not evaluated when loading a tool to an MT location.

$TC_MTPPL, $TC_MTPPA - Location distance

The distance between the tools in the multitool is defined alternatively with one of these
parameters. Which parameter is to be defined for the specific multitool is determined via the MT
parameter $TC_MTP_KD. The change rules for the date are those that have also been defined
for the multitool sizes. System parameters are not required for the distance coding "MT location
number". When creating the locations for an MT, the locations are automatically assigned the
numbers 1, 2, ...

6.7.3 Multitool-related user data

$TC_MTPCx[t]
User-related multitool tool data
An additional 64 multitool-specific parameters can be set up per multitool. Set with MD18192
MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
x: = Parameter 1...64
t: = T number 1...32000

Tool management
220 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.7 Multitool data

OPI block MTUD

Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: Parameter number

Tool-related OEM user data

NC identifier Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$ TC_MTPC1 Double data REAL
... Double data REAL
$TC_MTPC64 Double data REAL

Note
The data is displayed in the tool management. Additional tool status information, for example,
can be stored here.

6.7.4 Multitool-location-related user data

$TC_MTPPCx[t]
User-related multitool tool data
An additional 64 multitool-location-specific parameters can be set up per multitool. Set with
MD18194 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
x: = Parameter 1...64
t: = T number 1...32000

OPI block MTUP

Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: Parameter number

Tool-related OEM user data

NC identifier Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$ TC_MTPPC1 Double data REAL
... Double data REAL
$TC_MTPPC64 Double data REAL

Note
The data is displayed in the tool management. Additional tool status information, for example,
can be stored here.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 221
NC programming
6.8 User-definable variables

6.8 User-definable variables

User-definable parameters
These programmable variables provide the user with three user-definable parameters. These
system variables are transferred via the user interface with the T selection signal and the
change command to the PLC. They allow the user to send additional tool management
information to the PLC. The parameters can be read and written by the NC program. They are
not buffered and are set to "0" on Reset or end of program.

$P_VDITCP[x]
x: = Parameter 0, 1, 2

NC identifier Description Format

$TC_VDITCP[0] Tool management VDI user-definable parameter 0 int
$TC_VDITCP[1] Tool management VDI user-definable parameter 1 int
$TC_VDITCP[2] Tool management VDI user-definable parameter 2 int

Interface DB72, DB73

The user parameters are output in DB72 and DB73 on the tool management interface. They are
only valid when the status of the interface is active. The format is DINT.

Example
$P_VDITCP[0]=12; DB72.DBD(n+4) =12 or
$P_VDITCP[1]=33; DB72.DBD(n+8) =33 or
$P_VDITCP[2]=2000; DB72.DBD(n+12) =2000
T="Tool"
The variables must be set in the part program before the T call or M06 if these shall be
transferred for a tool to the PLC as well.

Programming
The parameters can be programmed as required in the NC program. The output to the PLC is
however always realized in conjunction with the tool preparation or change command
programmed in the following.
Example:
T= "Tool1"
$P_VDITCP[0] = 1
M06
$P_VDITCP[0] = 2
T= "Tool2"

Tool management
222 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.8 User-definable variables

Exactly the value = 2 is also given to the PLC with the command output of T = "Tool2" to the PLC
and not the value 1 when the M06 command is output to the PLC.
The output of the programmed value also takes place when M6 is programmed, i.e. the output
can now also be realized with the command number 3 provided $MC_CHANGE_MODE=1 has
been set.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 223
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9 NC language commands

6.9.1 CHKDNO - Uniqueness check for D number

If tool management is active, the function CHKDNO checks the uniqueness of the D number.
Uniqueness of the D number here (no replacement tools) means that the D numbers of all tools
defined in the TO unit can occur only once. D numbers in the TO unit are unique and absolute.

Syntax
State = CHKDNO(T1, T2,D)

Meaning

CHKDNO The function returns the value of state as the return value.
Data Bool
type:
T1 T number of tool 1 (optional)
Data INT
type:
T2 T number of tool 2 (optional)
Data INT
type:
D D number (optional); without parameter D, all D numbers of the named tools
are checked.
Data INT
type:
Return value
state state shows whether a D number collision occurs
Data BOOL
type:
FALSE = D number collision
TRUE = D numbers are unique

D numbers of replacement tools

Replacement tools can be defined and used when tool management is active. The machining
part program does not generally indicate whether any replacement tools are available. As a
rule, the machining program addresses tools with T="Identifier". (Programming T="location
number" is referred back to T="identifier" internally). The program otherwise only contains the
actual programming of the offset (the D number). Therefore, the D number for the tool and
replacement tool must be identical.

Tool management
224 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Example
Active tool and replacement tools for T="drill_5mm"
● T No. = 10 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (active)
● T No. = 11 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
● T No. = 12 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
Active tool and replacement tools for T="drill_3mm"
● T No. = 20 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (active)
● T No. = 21 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
● T No. = 22 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
CHKDNO - without parameters specified - detects a collision of D numbers 1, 2 and 3 for
"drill_5mm" with D numbers 1, 2 and 3 for "drill_3mm", but not between the D numbers of the
active and replacement tools.
The collisions are displayed as individual alarms, e.g.:
● "Channel 1 D number 1 defined for tool T no. 10 and 20"
● "Channel 1 D number 1 defined for tool T no. 10 and 21"
The state = FALSE is also returned in the event that the parameterization is invalid. (The T or
D number called is not defined in the channel.)
If the following applies: MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO ≤ MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL ,
CHKDNO always returns the TRUE state, irrespective of the parameter settings.

6.9.2 CHKDM - Uniqueness check within a magazine

With active tool management, the command CHKDM checks the data in NC for D number
uniqueness within one or more magazines. The functionality corresponds to CHKDNO. The
parameters are optional.

Syntax
state = CHKDM (magazine no., D no., tool holder no.)

Meaning

CHKDM Checks the uniqueness of a D number within a magazine

Data type: Bool
MagNo Magazine number of magazine to be checked
Data type: INT
Omitting the parameter or programming with a value=0 means that the tools
of all the connected magazines of the spindle numbers or tool holder numbers
specified in Tool holder no. are checked.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 225
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Dno D number against which the check will be made.

Data type: INT
Omitting the parameter or programming with a value=0 means that all D num‐
bers of the specified magazine are checked for uniqueness.
Tool holder no. Specifies the spindle number or tool holder number for which the magazines
are checked
Unit INT
Omission of the parameter means that the magazines are obtained for the
check from the distance table of the spindle location for the master spindle or
the master tool holder.
Return value
state Result of the check:
Data type Bool
TRUE Checked D numbers are unique
FALSE Check not OK

6.9.3 GETACTTD - Determining the tool number of a unique D No.

If tool management is active (e.g. in measuring cycle programs), command GETACTTD
provides the associated T number of the active tool in the tool group based on a D number.

Syntax
status = GETACTTD (Tno, Dno)

Meaning

GETACTTD returns the T number of the active tool in the tool group
Data type: INT
Dno D number for which the T number shall be searched. The D numbers are not
checked for uniqueness.
Data type: INT
If the same D numbers are defined in different tool groups of the same TO unit,
then the T number of the first tool group that is found determines the tools that
have the specified number.
Tno T number found
Data type: INT
Return value

Tool management
226 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

status Result of search

Data type: INT
0 T number found, Tno is assigned the value
-1 No T number exists for the specified D number, Tno
assigned the value 0.
-2 D number is not unique; Tno is assigned the value of
the D number that was first determined.
-3 The tool group does not contain any tools that have the
desired status and the specified D number, Tno is as‐
signed the value 0.
-4 The tool group contains several tools that have the de‐
sired status and the D number that has been
sought; Tno contains the value of the first tool found with
the desired D number.
-5 Function could not be executed for other reasons.

6.9.4 GETDNO - Read out D numbers

Function GETDNO reads out the offset number d of a tool with T number t and cutting
edge ce.

Syntax
d = GETDNO(t, ce)

Meaning

GETDNO Reads out offset number d

Data type: INT
t T number of the tool
Data type: INT
ce Cutting edge ce of the tools
Data type: INT
Return value
d Return value offset number d
Data type: INT
If t or ce are parameters which have no data record, d=0 is returned. Any
parameters violating the syntax rules will generate an alarm.

Dependencies
● The command is only available if $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO >
$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL.
● $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO ≤ $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
returns GETDNO d=ce as D number.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 227
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.5 SETDNO - Set or change D number

With function SETDNO, offset number d of cutting edge ce of tool t can be set or changed.

Syntax
state = SETDNO(t, ce, d)

Meaning

SETDNO Function for editing offset number d of cutting edge ce of tool t

Data type: INT
t T number of the tool
Data type: INT
ce Cutting edge ce of the tools
Data type: INT
d Offset number d
Data type: INT
If t or ce are parameters that have no data record, state = FALSE is
returned. Any parameters violating the syntax rules will generate an alarm.
Return value
state Status of the function
Data type: INT
FALSE (0) Machining was not successful
TRUE (1) Machining was successful

Dependencies
t, ce, d must be specified as > 0; d=0 cannot be set.

See also
DZERO - Invalidate D numbers (Page 228)

6.9.6 DZERO - Invalidate D numbers

Function DZERO identifies all D numbers of the TO unit as invalid. This command is used for
support during setup. Offset data sets tagged with this command are no longer checked by
the CHKDNO NC command. The D numbers have to be set with SETDNO to make these
accessible again, see also SETDNO - Set or change D number (Page 228).

Syntax
DZERO

Tool management
228 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.7 DELDL - Delete additive offsets

Function DELDL deletes the additive offsets for the cutting edge of a tool (to release memory
space). Both the defined wear values and the setup values are deleted.

Syntax
status = DELDL(t, d)

Meaning

DELDL Deletes all sum offsets of cutting edge d of tool t

Data type: INT
t Number of the tool (optional); if t and d are not specified, all sum offsets of all
cutting edges of all tools of the TO unit are deleted.
Data type: INT
d Number of the cutting edge (optional); if d is not specified, all sum offsets of all
cutting edges on tool t are deleted.
Data type: INT
Return value
status Delete result
Data type: INT
0 Offsets have been successfully deleted
-1 Offsets have not been deleted (if the parameter settings
specify exactly one cutting edge), or not deleted com‐
pletely (if the parameter settings specify multiple cutting
edges)

6.9.8 NEWT - Create new tool

With function NEWT, you can create a new tool without specifying a T number.
The function returns the automatically generated tool number, with which the tool can
subsequently be addressed. The new tool is automatically given a cutting edge with CE number
= 1 and D number = 1. All offsets are set to 0 by default. You can change the CE number with
function SETDNO, see SETDNO - Set or change D number (Page 228).
An alarm is output if the attempt to create a new tool fails.

Syntax
tno = NEWT ("TO", Duplono.)

Meaning

NEWT Creates a new tool with name "TO" and duplo no. Duplono. and returns the
T number of the new tool as the return value.
Data type: INT

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 229
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Tool Tool label

Data type: STRING
Duplo no. Duplo number of tool (optional); if not otherwise specified, duplo number no.
= old duplo no. +1 is used.
Data type: INT
Return value
tno T number of new tool
Data type: INT

Examples
Example 1: Create new tool with the function NEWT and CE/D numbers = 2, 47

Program code Comment

def int tno
tno = NEWT("tool", 111) ;Tool with Ident/DuploNo.="Steel"/111, T
no.=tno=1 in the example and a cutting
edge CE=1, D=1 is created
;the cutting edge is to be changed to
CE=2, D=47
$TC_DPCE[tno, 1]=2 ;Rename the CE number
SETDNO(tno,2,47) ;Rename the D number
;Assign the remaining data of the tool /
cutting edge

Example 2: Create tool "Steel"/111, T No.=tno=1 with $TC... and CE numbers = 2 4 (let us
assume that T No.=1 does not yet exist)

Program code Comment

$TC_TP1[1] = 111 ;Create new tool with T no.=1, duplo
no.=111
$TC_TP2[1] = "Steel" ;Assign tool identifier="Steel"
$TC_TPCE[1,47] = 2 ;Create new offset, D=47, assign CE no.=2
;Assign the remaining data of the tool /
cutting edge

The function is used for creating tools in a loading program (load cycle).

6.9.9 NEWMT Create new multitool

Function NEWMT is available with TMMG.
With function NEWMT, a new multitool with the specified name "name" and the MT number of
locations = "number of locations" is created.
An implicit STOPRE is initiated at the end of the block.

Tool management
230 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Messages:
● If the "Several tools at magazine location" function is not activated, Alarm 6436 "Command
cannot be programmed. Function is not activated" is generated.
● If parameter name is already in use, alarm 14020 "Illegal parameter value" is output.
● If parameter Number of locations is outside the permissible range, alarm 14020
"Illegal parameter value" is output.
● If the function NEWMT is interrupted with an alarm, the value "0" is returned for mtNo.

Syntax
mtNo = NEWMT(name, location number)

Meaning

NEWMT Creates a new multitool of name "name" and number of locations Number
of locations.
Data type: INT
name Multitool label
Data type: STRING
Number of Number of multitool locations
locations Data type: INT
Return value
mtNo MT number of the multitool; the number is created automatically and returned
as the result value.
Data type: INT

Examples
A tool with the name "A" and the T number 1 and a magazine with the name "B" and the number
2 already exist. The following is now programmed:

Program code Comment

def int mtNo ;
mtNo = NEWMT("C", 2) ;

The command is executed successfully, mtNo has the value 3. The multitool has been created
for 2 locations. However, the locations have not been created yet. A call with the name "A" or
"B" would have resulted in an alarm, as the names have already been allocated to a tool and
a magazine.
After creating using NEWMT additional parameters of the multitool can be defined, e.g.

Program code Comment

$TC_MTP7[ 3 ] = 12 ; Multitool can be loaded to magazine lo-
cation with this location type number
$TC_MTP_POS[ 3 ] = 2 ; Position value = location 2
$TC_MTP_KD[ 3 ] = 3 ; Angle-coded distance

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 231
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Program code Comment

$TC_MTPPA[ 3, 1 ] = 0.0 ; The two locations are created with this
write operation
$TC_MTPPA[ 3, 2 ] = 180.0 ;
$TC_MTP8[ 3 ] = 2 ; Released (multitool definition has been
completed)

The two parameters $TC_MTPN and $TC_MTP2 were already defined using the NEWMT
command. Parameters $TC_MTP3,..., 6 were not programmed. The default values are
effective.

6.9.10 DELT Delete tool

With function DELT, a tool can be deleted by specifying the tool identifier and the duplo
number. Only tools that have been unloaded can be deleted.
All tool-related data is set to 0 (user data, hierarchy data, ...).

Syntax
DELT("TL",DUPLO_NO)

Meaning

DELT Deletes the specified tool.

Data type: -
Tool Tool label
Data type: STRING
DUPLO_NO Duplo number of the tool
Data type: INT
Return value -

Examples
The function is used for deleting tools in the part program.

Program code Comment

T=GETT("DRILL", DUPLO_NR) ;
;

6.9.11 DELMT - Delete multitool

Function DELMT is available with TMMG.
A multitool is deleted with function DELMT.

Tool management
232 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

A multitool can only be deleted if it is not contained in a magazine (is unloaded) and none of the
tools contained in the multitool are the active tool for offset selection. If there are still tools in the
multitool at the time of deletion, they are automatically removed from the multitool before the
delete operation. The following tools are not deleted:
If a name is specified for which a multitool has not been defined, the command is rejected with
Alarm 17220 "Tool does not exist".

Note
After the multitool was unloaded, the tools contained in it are also unloaded. After the multitool
has been deleted, the tools contained in it are again available for loading into a magazine - or
into another multitool.

Syntax
DELMT (name)

Meaning

DELMT Deletes the multitool of name name

name Multitool label
Data type: STRING

6.9.12 $TC_MTPN - Delete one or all multitools

It is possible to delete one or several multitools with $TC_MTPN analogously to $TC_TP1[TNo]
= 0 The delete command is defined as follows:
● $TC_MTPN[MTNo.] = 0 ; Delete multitool with the number MTNo > 0
● $TC_MTPN[0] = 0 ; Delete all multitools
For MTNo > 0, the multitool with the number MTNo is deleted. For MTNo = 0, all multitools are
deleted. The same rules apply as defined for the DELMT command, see also DELMT - Delete
multitool (Page 232).

Syntax
$TC_MTPN[MTNo]

Meaning

$TC_MTPN[MTNo] Returns the multitool number or deletes a multitool.

Data type: INT
MTNo Number of the multitool
Data type: INT
Value range: 0 < x < SLMAXTOOLNUMBER

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 233
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Note
The delete commands to delete all tools ($TC_TP1[0] = 0 and $TC_DP1[0,0] = 0) also delete
all multitools.
Only with the deletion of the multitool, are the MT locations also deleted.

6.9.13 Reading the GETT - T no.

The GETT function returns the T number associated with the tool identifier and its duplo number
as a return value.
The command can be used for tools as well as for multitools. A duplo number cannot be
programmed for multitools.
If the tool identifier or duplo number cannot be assigned to a tool, value -1 is returned.
This function is used, for example, to retroload tools via the part program.

Syntax
tNo = GETT("TL", DUPLO_NO)

Meaning

GETT Returns the T number of a tool or multitool

Data type: INT
Tool Tool label
Data type: STRING
DUPLO_NO Duplo No. of the tool (optional)
Data type: INT
If a duplo number has not been specified, the T number of any tool from the
group of tools with the specified identifier or the number of a multitool is re‐
turned. (The sequence is not defined within a tool group.)
Return value
tNo T number of the tool
Data type: INT
>0 Tool or multitool number associated with the program‐
med name
-1 The name is neither a tool nor a multitool name
-2 A multitool name was programmed with duplo number

Tool management
234 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Examples
Determine the T number for drill with duplo number.

Program code Comment

R10=GETT("DRILL", DUPLO_NO) ;The T number is in R10
$TC_TPx,[GETT("DRILL",DUPLO_NO)]=value ;Write tool-related data

6.9.14 SETPIECE - decrementing the workpiece counter

With the SETPIECE function, the user can update the count monitoring data of the tools
associated with the machining process. Each tool that has been loaded since the last activation
of SETPIECE is acquired. The function serves as a rule for programming at the end of the NC
part program to decrement the count from all the tools associated with count monitoring.

Note
The command is not active in the block search (with/without calculation). If the value for the
count = 0, the internal table for flagged tools/cutting edges is deleted.

Note
SETPIECE works through the table "blindly". This means that every cutting edge entered in the
table is recorded. It is irrelevant where the tool is located at the time of the SETPIECE
programming, whether it is stored in the magazine, remains on the spindle, or has been
unloaded.
If it is set that the tool remains active after a reset and there is a tool in the spindle at the start
of the program, this tool is selected internally and an entry is made in the Setpiece table.

Syntax
SETPIECE(x,y)

Meaning

SETPIECE Updates the workpiece count monitoring data

Data type: -
x := 0 ... 32000 Value used when decrementing
Data type: INT
y := 0...8 Spindle index, value 0 means index of main spindle (does not have to be
programmed)
Data type: INT

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 235
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Examples
Program code Comment
SETPIECE(1); Workpiece counter of main spindle is decremented by 1
SETPIECE(1,1); Workpiece counter of spindle no. or tool holder no. 1 is
decremented by 1
SETPIECE(4,2); Workpiece counter of spindle no. or tool holder no. 2 is
decremented by 4

Example of SETPIECE with M06 tool change command:

The tools involved in a workpiece (program) should be decremented by a value of 1.

Program code Comment

T1 ;T1 is preselected (with regard to main spindle)
M06 ;T1 is changed
D1 ;D1 becomes active
T2 ;T2 is preselected
: ;Machining program
:
M06 ;T2 is changed
D1 ;D1 from T2 is activated
T3 ;T3 is preselected
: ;Machining program
:
:
M06
T0 ;Preparation for clearing the spindle
:
M06 ;Clearing the spindle
SETPIECE(1) ;SETPIECE on all tools
M30

The counter is to be decremented for each tool

In this example, tools T1, T2 and T3 are to machine a program. All three tools are monitored for
workpiece count. The aim is to decrement tool T1 by the value 1, T2 by the value 2 and not to
decrement T3.
The following programming is required:

Program code Comment

N500 T1
N600 M06
N700 D1 ;With the offset selection, the tool that was loaded is
stored in the SETPIECE memory
N900 T2 ;Prepare next tool
;Machining command

Tool management
236 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Program code Comment

:
N1000 setpiece(1) ;SETPIECE acts on T1, SETPIECE memory is cleared
N1100 M06
N1200 D1
N1400 T3
: ;Machining commands
:
N1500 setpiece(2) ;Only acts on T2
N1600 M06
N1700 D1
: ;Machining commands
:
N1800 setpiece(0) ;Only acts on T3, not decremented
N1900 T0
N2000 M06
N2100 D0
N2300 M30

6.9.15 GETSELT - Read the selected T number

The function GETSELT is available with TMMO and TMMG.
The GETSELT function returns the T number of the selected tool with regard to the individual
tool holders or spindles from the NC program viewpoint and is used to access the offset data
of the selected tool during T programming and cutting edge selection.
During preprocessing or while the NC program is running, the selected T number is not
available until after the next cutting edge selection. The task of the function GETSELT is to
establish synchronization with the main run earlier.

NOTICE
Alarm delay
If an alarm delay is active ($MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 0 = 1) and an alarm
occurs during the tool preparation, which is to be delayed until after M06 and programmed
before the programming of M06 GETSELT, the T number found by GETSELT has the value
= –1.

Syntax
GETSELT (Tno, th, ssl)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 237
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Meaning

GETSELT Reads out the selected T number

Data type: -
Tno T number of the tool
Data type: INT
=0 There is no selected T number or the tool has been de‐
leted in the meantime (occurs only with ssl="S").
= -1 If the alarm delay is active and GETSELT is called be‐
tween the T and the M06 programming.
th= 0,1, ..., ≤ 20 Number of spindle or of the tool holder (optional). If th is not specified,
this acts as th=0.
Data type: INT
● If ssl="" or is not set, the command refers to the currently active main
spindle / active main tool holder
● If ssl="S", during the block search and test mode, the command
refers to the tool holder that determined the D offset before the block
search
ssl Block search (optional)
Data type CHAR
= "" Function as previously, i.e. the current state after the NC
program
= "S" Block search: Returns the tool selected before block
search or test mode

If "ssl" is set (="S" for "searchrun"), during the block search or test mode, the GETSELT NC
command returns the tool number of the selected tool on the specified tool holder before the
block search or before the test mode. At the end of the block search or test mode, the GETSELT
NC command returns the value irrespective of ssl after the first T programming for the specified
tool holder.
After program end / abort, the T numbers of all the tool holders that were returned with
GETSELT are set to the value = 0. For the master tool holder, the value is then set to the
corresponding setting in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, or after a program restart to the
corresponding setting in $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
If required, the function makes an implicit preprocessing stop if the main run has not received
the tool preparation command.

OPI variable
The values supplied by the "GETSELT" function are available in the OPI variable
"toolHolderData" of the C/S block.
Parameter no. 2 returns the value of GETSELT(tNo, Th).
Parameter no. 4 returns the value of GETSELT(tNo, Th, "S").
The OPI variable is available in all versions of the tool management.

Tool management
238 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Example (1)
There is no tool holder location in the magazine management for the programmed value of tool
holder no. = 3.

Program code Comment

N110 GETSELT ( tNo, 3 ) ; tNo = 0 is the result.

Example (2)
Tool preparation has not been programmed for the programmed tool holder number = 4, and
no tool has been loaded.

Program code Comment

N110 GETSELT ( tNo, 4 ) ; tNo = 0 is the result.

Example (3)
There is a tool with the name "disabled" and the T number = 5.

Program code Comment

def int tNo
N100 T=”disabled” ; Alarm 'No tool ready for use' is
; delayed until the associated M06 is programmed
; or until T is programmed again.
N110 GETSELT ( tNo ) ; tNo = –1 is the result
N120 M06 ; The delayed alarm from N100 is output

OPI:
In this case, the OPI variable "progTNumber" in the C/S variable block displays the previously
programmed T number or the value = 0 if no other T selection has been programmed before the
faulty T selection.

Example (4)
In the reset state, the tool with the T number = 5 is loaded into the main spindle. A block search
is started on block "N100" in the following NC program.

Program code Comment

def int tNo, tNo1
N70 T7
N80 GETSELT( tNo ) ; tNo = 7
N90 GETSELT(tNo1,,"S") ; tNo1=5
N100 X1 G0 ; Target block
N110 GETSELT( tNo ) ; tNo = 7
N120 GETSELT(tNo1,,"S") ; tNo1=5, because no new T has been programmed
; after the target block
N130 T8
N140 GETSELT( tNo ) ; tNo = 8

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 239
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Program code Comment

N150 GETSELT(tNo1,,"S") ; tNo1=8, because a new T has been programmed

OPI:
In this case, the OPI variable "progTNumberSSL" in the C/S variable block displays the
previously programmed T number or the value = 0 if no other T selection has been programmed
before the faulty T selection.
See also chapter Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management

See also
Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management (Page 413)

6.9.16 GETEXET - Reading of the loaded T number

The function GETEXET is available with TMMO and TMMG.
The function GETEXET is specifically designed for block search. Its parameters are set in the
same way as for GETSELT. It returns the T number of the tool that is active from the point of
view of the NC program.

Syntax
GETEXET(Tno, th, ssl)

Meaning

GETEXET Reads out the selected T number

Data type: -
Tno T number of the tool
Data type: INT
=0 There is no loaded T number or the tool has been deleted in the
meantime (occurs only with ssl="S").
th= 0,1, ..., ≤ 20 Number of spindle or of the tool holder (optional). If th is not specified, GETEXET refers to the
current master spindle.
Data type: INT
= 0: If ssl="" or is not set, the command refers to the currently active main
spindle / tool holder.
If ssl="S", the command refers to the tool holder that determined the
D offset before the block search.
ssl Block search (optional)
Data type CHAR
= "": Function as previously, i.e. the current state after the NC program
= "S": Block search function: Returns the tool loaded before the block
search or test mode.

Tool management
240 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

If "ssl" is set (="S" for "searchrun"), during the block search or test mode, the GETEXET NC
command returns the T number of the loaded tool on the specified tool holder before the block
search or before the test mode. At the end of the block search or test mode, the GETEXET NC
command returns the value independent of ssl after the first programming of a tool change for
the specified tool holder.
If required, the function makes an implicit preprocessing stop if the main run has not received
the tool change command.
After the program end / abort, the "getexet" T numbers of all tool holders are set to the value =
0. For the master tool holder, the value is then set to the corresponding setting in
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, or after a program restart to the corresponding setting in
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.

Note
If the tool change is only programmed with T ($MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE), GETSELT and
GETEXET return the same T number.
If the tool change is programmed with T (selection) and M06 (change), the two commands have
different contents.

OPI variable
The values supplied by the "GETEXET" function are available in the OPI variable
"toolHolderData" of the C/S block.
Parameter no. 3 returns the value of GETEXET(tNo, Th).
Parameter no. 5 returns the value of GETEXET(tNo, Th, "S").
The OPI variable is available in all versions of the tool management.

Example (1)
Three tools are defined with Tno. = 5 / Name = "Tool5" , Tno. = 7 / Name = "Tool7" and Tno. =
9 / Name = "Tool9".
The tool change is programmed with T + M6.
Two tool holders have been defined. Tool holder 2 is the master tool holder.
At the start, there is neither a tool on the tool holder nor a tool active or programmed:

Program code Comment

def int tNo1, tNo2
T="Tool5" ; tool selection for master
too holder
getselt ( tNo2, 2 ) ;tNo2 = 5 preselected tool for master
tool holder
getselt ( tNo1, 1 ) ;tNo1 = 0

getexet ( tNo2, 2 ) ;tNo2 = 0 no active tool for master tool

holder
getexet ( tNo1, 1 ) ;tNo1 = 0

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 241
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Program code Comment

M6 ; tool change for master tool holder

getselt ( tNo2, 2 ) ;tNo2 = 5
getexet ( tNo2, 2 ) ;tNo2 = 5

T="Tool9" ; tool selection for master

tool holder
getselt ( tNo2, 2 ) ;tNo2 = 9
getexet ( tNo2, 2 ) ;tNo2 = 5

T1="Tool7" ; tool selection for secon-

dary tool holder
getselt ( tNo2, 2 ) ;tNo2 = 9 preselected tool for master
tool holder
getselt ( tNo1, 1 ) ;tNo1 = 7 preselected tool for secondary
tool holder

M1=6 ; tool change for secondary tool

holder
getexet ( tNo1, 1 ) ;tNo1 = 7 active tool for secondary tool
holder

Example (2)
In the reset state, the tool with the T number = 5 is loaded into the main spindle. A block search
is started on block "N100" in the following NC program.

Program code Comment

def int tNo, tNo1
N70 T7 M6
N75 T8
N80 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo =7
N90 GETSELT(tNo1,,"S") ;tNo1=5
N100 X1 G0 ;target block
N110 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo =7
N120 GETEXET(tNo1,,"S") ;tNo1=5, because no new tool has been programmed
;after the target block
N130 M6
N140 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo=8
N150 GETEXET(tNo1,,”S”) ;tNo1=8, because a new tool has been loaded

OPI:
In this case, the OPI variable "progTNumberSSL" in the C/S variable block displays the
previously programmed T number or the value = 0 if no other T selection has been programmed
before the faulty T selection.

Tool management
242 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Use of $P_TOOLNO - GETEXET

With active tool management, GETEXET should generally be used.
If the following specification are complied with, $P_TOOLNO can also be used:
After programming D, $P_TOOLNO always returns the correct value of the active T number.

Program code Comment

T2 M6 D1 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;r1 = 2

For $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-1, >0, $P_TOOLNO always returns the correct value

of the active T number.

Program code Comment

T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;r1 = 2

There are exceptions for $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-2 and 0.

a) $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = 0

Program code Comment

T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;!!!r1 = ? - the T no. is not defined until the main run.
;!!!This means that it is generally not available here.

def int tNo

T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
GETEXET(tNo, $PMTHSDC) ;Safe determination of the active Tno. tNo = 2

b) $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2

Program code Comment

N10 T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;!!!r1 = 22 - if T no.=22 was the active tool before
N10

def int tNo

N10 T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
GETEXET(tNo, $P_MTHSDC) ;Safe determination of the active Tno. to be loaded
;tNo =2 - the Tno. becomes the active Tno. at the
;next programming of D>0.

This means that for $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-2, $P_TOOLNO and also GETEXET

can be used, and with a different meaning.
See also chapter Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management.

See also
Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management (Page 413)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 243
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.17 $P_MTHSDC - master tool holder with regard to the D offset selection
System variable $P_MTHSDC is provided with TMMG.
The system variable $P_MTHSDC (Master tool holder regarding selected D correction) returns
the number of the tool holder/spindle on which the last tool change was performed on a master
tool holder/spindle. This means that this is the tool holder on which the tool is located that
determines the next D offset and therefore becomes the active tool (if this tool was not already
active).

Syntax
$P_MTHSDC

Meaning

$P_MTHSDC Supplies the number of the tool holder/spindle.

Data type: INT
Return value
>0 Successful read access
=0 No tool holder or spindle available
-1 TMMG not available

Examples
Settings:
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2,
i.e. the old tool offset remains active with M06 if D has not been explicitly programmed.
$MN_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 2

Program code Comment

N10 SETMTH ( 1)
N20 T="Tool5" ;T no. = 5 is the only tool in the tool group
;tool change to the current master tool holder (tool hold-
er 1)
N30 D5 ;Offset of the tool last changed on a master tool holder
;(T no. 5 in this case)
N100 SETMTH ( 2) ;Change master tool holder
N110 T="Tool7" ;T no. = 7 is the only tool in the tool group
;tool change to the current master tool holder (tool hold-
er 2)
N120 SETMTH ( 1) ;Change master tool holder
... ;Further blocks without T, M6, D
N130 D5 ;Offset with D5 of the tool that was loaded last on to a
;master tool holder (T=7 on tool holder 2
;in this case). Only now is a new active tool defined

Tool management
244 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

To ensure that after a block search on a block between N120 and N130 the D selection in N130
refers to the correct tool ("Tool7" here), the tool change for "Tool7" on tool holder 2 must be
performed as master tool holder and must be performed as the last tool change. This may have
to be ensured via ASUBs. This information cannot be determined with the previously available
NC commands and variables. The variable contains the information on which tool holder the
last tool change was performed as this was master tool holder.
In the above case, the variable $P_MTHSDC has the value 2, because on this tool holder the
last tool change was performed on a master tool holder. With the aid of GETEXET(TNo,2) or
if ($P_MTHSDC > 0) GETEXET(TNo,$P_MTHSDC), the tool can be determined that belongs
on this tool holder so that the program can be continued correctly.
$P_MTHSDC = 0 means that currently no tool holder has been defined that has the active tool
after D programming.

6.9.18 $P_TH_OF_D - master tool holder to which the current D offset refers
System variable $P_TH_OF_D is available with TMMO and TMMG.
The system variable $P_TH_OF_D (Tool holder of active D correction) returns the number of
the tool holder / spindle on which the tool is or was located that determines the active D offset.

Syntax
$P_TH_OF_D

Meaning

$P_TH_OF_D Supplies the number of the tool holder/spindle

Data type: INT
>0 successful read access
0 No tool holder available
-1 Function not available

Examples
Settings:
$MC_CUTTINGEDGE_DEFAULT = -2, i.e. the old tool offset remains active with M06 if D has
not been explicitly programmed.
$MN_TOOLCHANGE_MODE = 0
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 2

Program code Comment

N00 ;No tool active → $P_TH_OF_D =
N10 SETMTH(1)
N20 T="Tool5" ;T no. = 5 is the only tool in the tool group;tool
change to the current master tool holder (tool holder
1)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 245
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Program code Comment

N30 D5 ;Offset is of the tool that is located on tool holder
1;→ $P_TH_OF_D = 1
N100 SETMTH(2) ;Change master tool holder
N110 T="Tool7" ;T no. = 7 is the only tool in the tool group
;tool change to the current master tool holder (tool
holder 2)
N120 SETMTH(1) ;Change master tool holder
... ;Further blocks without T, M6, D
N130 D5 ;Offset with D5 of the tool that was loaded last on to
a;master tool holder (here T=7 on tool;holder 2) →
$P_TH_OF_D = 2

In a ProgEvent program, after a block search, the situation is to be established with regard to
tools and tool offset that would have existed without a block search.
After a block search on a block between N100 and N130, it is determined how the currently
active "D5" from block N30 is established. For this purpose, it must be recognized that "D5"
comes from the tool on tool holder 1. The last tool change on a main tool holder was performed
on block N20 on tool holder 1. This information is provided by system variable $P_TH_OF_D.
The variable $P_TH_OF_D specifies on which tool holder the tool is located that determines the
currently active D offset.
The variable $P_MTHSDC specifies on which tool holder the tool is located that determines the
offset at the next D programming.
$P_TH_OF_D = 0 means that currently no tool holder is defined to which the current tool offset
"D" refers. The active tool is then also T=0 and the active D no. =0.

6.9.19 GETACTT - Read the active internal T number

Function GETACTT returns the T number of the tool with status "active" and "was in use" via
parameter "TNo" from a tool group "name" (a tool becomes "active" immediately before it is
loaded into the tool holder)

Note
GETACCT cannot detect a tool that is positioned in the spindle for its first use.
The tool sequence in a group is not defined. GETACCT will read any random tool in the group
where the status bits "active" and "was in use" are set.

Syntax
status=GETACTT(Tno,name)

Meaning

GETACTT Returns the T number of the active tool

Data type: INT

Tool management
246 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Tno T number of the active tool

Data type: INT
name Name of the tool group
Data type: STRING
Return value
status Shows readout status
Data type: INT
0 Function successful; T No. contains the desired value
-1 No tool matching the specified identifier exists; T No.
contains value = 0
-2 The tool group does not contain a tool with the desired
status; T no. contains value = 0
-3 There are several tools with the desired status in the tool
group; T No. contains the value of the first tool with the
desired status

GETACTT can have several meanings! It is always conceivable that there may be several tools
in the tool group that have the same status. The command will only then meaningfully function
if the user ensures there is exactly one tool with the desired status in the tool group.
The command does not initiate a main run synchronization. It may be necessary to enter
STOPRE before the call.

Example
Tool group "Drills" contains three tools with the duplo numbers 1, 2, 3, and the T numbers 1, 2,
3:

Program code Comment

def int tNo, status ;Initially, there is no active tool in the
tool group "Drill"
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=-2, Tno=0
T="Drill" ;Preparation sets tool status to "active"
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=0, Tno=0
;the tool is active, but the identifier "was
in use" is not yet applied
M06 ;Change
T="Hugo" ;Preparation
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=-2, Tno=0
;the tool is active, but the identifier "was
in use" is still not yet applied
M06 ;Change
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=0, Tno=1
;Read job is performed
;Tool "Drill" is now assigned the status "was
in use" as it was removed and the "active" sta-
tus remains unchanged

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 247
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.20 SETMS - Set master spindle

Available with TMMO and TMMG.
Function SETMS declares the spindle specified in n to be the master spindle. A spindle can also
be defined as the master via a machine data.
When SETMS is programmed without a spindle name, the spindle programmed in the machine
data used instead.

Syntax
SETMS(n)

Meaning

SETMS Declares the spindle specified in n as the master spindle

Data type: -
n Number of spindle
Data type: INT

Reset behavior
The programmed values from SETMS can remain active beyond program end/RESET/START.

6.9.21 SETMTH - Set master toolholder number

The function SETMTH is made available with TMMG.
With function SETMTH, tool holder number n is declared the master tool holder.
Machine data MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER can be set to determine
whether a tool holder number can be assigned to define the location of the tool to be loaded
instead of a spindle number. It only makes sense to use this NC command if MD is > 0.

Note
SETMTH does not change the active tool. The new master tool holder definition cannot be
taken into account until the tool change is programmed.

Syntax
SETMTH(n)

Tool management
248 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Meaning

SETMSH Declares the tool holder in n as the master tool holder

Data type: -
n Number of the toolholder
Data type: INT

Example (1)
Programming example

Program code Comment

T="Mill" M06 ;No address extension programmed → this refers to the mas-
ter tool holder; i.e. tool holder 1 (value of machine data
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER).
The tool change is performed at the buffer location with
$TC_MPP5=1.
The path is corrected with the tool offsets.
...
T2="Drill" ..M2=6 ;Address extension for the secondary tool holder has been
programmed.
The tool change is performed at buffer location 2. The path
is not corrected.
...
SETMTH (2) ;Declare tool holder 2 as the master tool holder
T="Mill_2""M06 ;No address extension programmed → this refers to the mas-
ter tool holder; i.e. tool holder 2.
The tool change is performed at buffer location 2.
The path is corrected with the tool offset.
...
T1="Drill_1" M1=6 ;Address extension for the secondary tool holder has been
programmed.
The tool change is performed at the buffer location with
$TC_MPP5=1.
The path is not corrected.
...
SETMTH ;Declare the tool holder specified in TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL-
HOLDER as the master tool holder
T="Mill_3" M06 ;No address extension programmed → this refers to the mas-
ter tool holder; i.e. tool holder 1 (value of the
MD TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER).
Tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
The path is corrected with the tool offset.

Example (1)
The following applies:
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK = "H18041"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 249
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 2
After the end of program/RESET both the active tool offset and the programmed values for
SETMTH and SETMS remain active. The tool change still does not take place at the spindle, but
rather at the tool holder instead.

Program code Comment

T="Drill" M06 D2 ;Tool change change on master tool holder=2
SETMS(3) ;New master spindle=3
SETMTH(1) ;New master tool holder=1
T="Mill" M06 D1 ;Tool change on master tool holder=1
M17

After end of program or RESET, the following applies:

● Spindle no. = 3 is the master spindle
● Tool holder no. = is 1 the master tool holder
● Tool = "Mill" with offset D1 determines the path correction.
After Power On, the settings for the machine data take effect:
● Spindle no. = 1 is the master spindle
● Tool holder no = 2 is the master toolholder
The tool offset is derived from the lowest D number of the tool that is located in the master tool
holder; i.e. which is T="Drill" with D1
(Assuming that the tool has two D offsets D1, D2).

Example (2)
The following applies:
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK = "H41"
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0
After the end of program/RESET both the active tool offset and the programmed value for
SETMS remain active. The tool change takes place at the spindle which now becomes the tool
holder.

Program code Comment

T="Drill" M06 D2 ;Tool change on master tool holder = 1
SETMS(3) ;New master spindle = master tool holder = 3
T="Mill" M06 D1 ;Tool change on master tool holder = 3
M17

After end of program or RESET, the following applies:

● Spindle no. = 1 is the master spindle
● Tool = "Mill" with offset D1 (on spindle with no. = 3) determines the path correction.

Tool management
250 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

After Power On, the settings for the machine data take effect:
● Spindle no. = 1 is the master spindle / the master tool holder.
● The tool offset is derived from the lowest D number of the tool that is located in the master
tool holder; i.e. which is T="Drill" with D1 (assuming that the tool has two D offsets D1, D2).

Reset behavior
The programmed values from SETMTH can remain active beyond program end/RESET/
START.

6.9.22 POSM - Positioning the magazine

Function POSM positions a magazine to a particular location in an internal magazine (e.g.
spindle, tool holder, loading magazine), irrespective of the current assignment of the location
or the status of the tool it contains. The NC command includes parts of the OPI PI service
_N_TMPOSM.

Note
The NC command POSM(...) is terminated without waiting for acknowledgement from the PLC.

Syntax
POSM (p, m, ip, im)

Meaning

POSM Positions a magazine at a particular location

Data type: -
p Location number to which the magazine is to be positioned
Data type: INT
m Magazine number of the magazine to be moved (optional).
If m is not set, the location number refers to the magazine contained in the
distance table as the first magazine for the specified internal location.
The magazine (number m) must be linked by a distance relationship with the
selected loading or buffer-magazine location. Alarms are generated when
incorrect parameters are specified (e.g. undefined location numbers).
Data type: INT
ip Location number for the specified internal magazine (spindle location, loading
magazine, etc.)
This parameter is optional.
If ip is not specified, the positioning operation refers to the main spindle
location or the main tool holder location.
Data type: INT

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 251
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

in Magazine number of internal magazine in relation to location number ip to

which the magazine must be moved. An internal magazine is either a loading
or a buffer magazine.
This parameter is optional. If im is not specified, the command refers to the
buffer magazine.
Data type INT

Example
Specified configuration:
● Magazine (magazine number = 1),
● Spindle (buffer magazine = 9998, location 1),
● Loading magazine (loading magazine = 9999, location 2).

Program code Comment

N100 POSM(4, 1, 1, 9998) ; It is moved from magazine 1 of location
number 4 to the spindle.
N100 POSM(4, 1, 1, 9999) ; Command for traversing to loading maga-
zine

Example with result check

A magazine is specified as shown in the following diagram.
Location 12 is to be positioned at the change position and the program must not be continued
until positioning has been successfully completed (simplest case with only one magazine and
one defined change position).

7RROKROGHU
LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQHORFDWLRQ

7&B0'3>@ 

  

 

 

0DJD]LQH
 7&B0$3>@  

 

 

  

Figure 6-12 Magazine positioning with a check of the positioning operation result

Tool management
252 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

In this example, the magazine zero point is the location in front of tool holder 1. It is defined by
system variable $TC_MDP2. Tool holder 1 is assigned to the master spindle of the channel.

Program code Comment

N100 POSM(12) ;Moves location 12 to the change position, any non-pro-
grammed parameters are set internally to POSM (12, 1,
1, 9998)
N200 wait:
N300 G4 F1 ;Waiting time according to the conditions prevailing at
the machine (exit possibly necessary if reaction is re-
quired to positioning errors)
N400 if ( $TC_MAP8[1] <> ;goto wait
12 )
;After POSM(12) is executed, the current magazine posi-
tion must be equal to 12.

Multitool
The definition of function POSM remains unchanged. The magazine location to be positioned to
is programmed irrespective of whether the location is empty, contains a tool or a multitool.
The PI service _N_TMPOSM offers various options for programming magazine positions; for
instance, a tool can be programmed using its tool number or its name and duplo number. If this
tool is at a magazine location, the system positions to this magazine location. If the tool is in a
multitool, which in turn is at a magazine location, the system positions to this magazine location.
If, instead of a tool number, an MT number is programmed and the multitool is at a magazine
location, the system positions to this magazine location.

6.9.23 POSMT - position multitool on toolholder to location number

Function POSMT is available for TMMG.
Function POSMT positions a multitool that is located on a tool holder to the programmed MT
location number. At the time that the command is executed, it is not permissible that any tool
offset is active for the programmed tool holder, i.e. D0 must have been previously executed.
The complete command is: POSMT(state, MTlocno, THno)

Note
Selecting an offset or deselecting a possibly active tool offset is not linked with the command.
The command initiates an implicit STOPRE.

Syntax
state = POSMT(state, MTlocno, THno)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 253
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Meaning

POSMT Positions a multitool to a programmed MT location number

Data type: INT
MTlocnox MT location number of the MT, which is located on the programmed tool hold‐
er.
Data type: INT
THno Tool holder number on which the MT to be positioned is located. This param‐
eter is optional.
If THno is not programmed, the number of the master tool holder is automat‐
ically used.
Data type: INT
Return value
state Success status of command
Data type: INT
0 Successful execution of the command. Command suc‐
cessfully completed at the PLC. (PLC acknowledge‐
ment may still be pending.)
-1 Command cannot be used because TMMG and/or mul‐
titool function is not active.
-2 Function is not executed because of block search, pro‐
gram test.
-3 MT cannot be positioned, because a tool offset associ‐
ated with the programmed tool holder is (still) active.
-4 MT cannot be positioned, because the programmed tool
holder does not contain an MT, but a tool.
-5 MT cannot be positioned, because the programmed tool
holder neither contains an MT nor a tool.
-6 MTlocno has an invalid value.
-7 THno has an invalid value.

Example 1
The tool with the name "Tool1" / duplo number = 5 or T number = 33 is loaded in multitool 555
at MT location = 2. The MT has been created with 6 locations.

Program code Comment

DEF INT state = 0 ;

T="Tool1" M06 D1
;The PLC changes MT 555 on tool holder 1
and positions it on MT location 2
;The PLC acknowledges the change, axis
movements are programmed ...
D0 ;Deselect tool offset
POSMT(state, 5, 1)
;Position the MT on location 5

Tool management
254 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Program code Comment

;The previously active tool with T number
33 is still active (however, due to the
POSMT command is no longer in the machin-
ing position)
M17

The following is still configured - "activate tool of the tool holder and activate its offset D1".
With RESET (end of program) a tool change command is generated for the PLC, which has the
following initial data:
● Bring the multitool from tool holder 1 from the tool holder to tool holder 1 (i.e. the MT is
already located on the tool holder)
● Position the multitool at location 5
In the NC, after the input, the PLC end acknowledgement is initiated:
● Activate the tool with tool number 34 and select its offset D1
The multitool remains on the tool holder - and neither a tool nor D offset are active.

Example (2)
If, in example 1, POSMT is not programmed before the end of the program, but only the MT
position is set to the value 5 in the NC with $TC_MTP8, the command to the PLC - generated
in the init block - would specify this MT position and the PLC would have to position the MT
according to the position data. When acknowledging the MT position specified by the NC in the
init block, the PLC must not change this.

PLC
To process the command, NC command = 1 to the PLC is prepared, which is output via the tool
management interface. The PLC must handle and acknowledge this command, in order that it
can be correctly completed by the NC.
PLC acknowledgement
In the NC, the NC command generates the command for the PLC - and outputs the command
within the scope of executing the active block to the PLC. The active block is only considered
to have been executed if the end acknowledgement of the command is available from the PLC.
This can be PLC status = 3 or 5. Only then can a new block be loaded for execution.
Status = 5, "The sequence has been completed. The MT is in position." With regard to the MT
configuration, means "The sequence has been completed. The MT is in position."
Example of parameter settings
The following configuration applies:

Multitool MT No. = 5, MT locations 1, ...10,

The multitool has location coding
The tool with tool number = 4711 and tool name "4711" is at location 4
The tool with tool number 815 and tool name "815" is at location 7
There is no tool at location 8

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 255
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Tool holder Buffer magazine no. = 9998, location 1 is the master tool holder with no. = 3
The MT with MT No.=5 is on the tool holder
Tool 4711 is active, active D No.=0 (no offset active)
Buffer magazine no. = 9998, location 2 is tool holder with no. = 9
There is no tool and no MT at tool holder 9

At the start, the MT position is equal to 4 (tool with tool number=4711 from MT location 4 is the
active tool), this means that MT location 4 is in the machining position.
def int state
POSMT(state, 7, 3) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 7 (with
tool "815")
has the same contents as
POSMT(state, 7) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 7
The two commands are correctly programmed. The status value is state = 0.
The block remains active in the main run until the end acknowledgement from the PLC is
available.
Tool "815" with tool number=815 at location 7 does not become active with the positioning
To ensure that tool "815" becomes active (and an offset D),
● either a program must be started (and $MC_START_MODE_MASK appropriately set), or
● RESET executed ($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 14 = 1 and
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK appropriately set), or
● in the program after POSMT, the tool should be programmed to the positioned MT location
with a tool change command (T="815" M06 D1).
With
POSMT(state, 8, 3) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 8
the empty MT location is positioned to the machining position if a D offset is still not active. The
following init blocks are implicitly programmed with "T0 M06 D0" if the corresponding machine
data has been appropriately set.
The mechanical MT transport "MT from tool holder back into the magazine" is associated with
this.
Programming of
POSMT(state, 3, 9) ; position MT of tool holder 9 to location 3
Supplies the status value state=–5, as there is no MT and no tool holder at the programmed tool
holder 9.
POSMT(state, 77, 3) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 77
Supplies the status value state=-6, as MT location number=77 on tool holder 3 is not defined.

6.9.24 MVTOOL - NC command to move tool

Function MVTOOL is available for TMMG.

Tool management
256 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Function MVTOOL loads and unloads tools by NC programming only. It can also be used to
transport a tool from one magazine location to any other magazine location.
It is mandatory for a tool to be positioned at the source magazine location.
This NC command does not generate an alarm.
Whether MVTOOL was carried out with or without error(s) must be checked via the return value
of parameter "state".
The command can also be applied to multitools.

Syntax
MVTOOL (state, magFrom, locFrom, magTo, locTo)

Meaning

MVTOOL Loads and unloads tools

Data type: -
magFrom Magazine number of magazine in which the tool to be moved is located
Data type: INT
locFrom Location number of location in which the tool to be moved is located
Data type: INT
magTo Target magazine number of magazine to which the tool is to be moved. This
can be a loading magazine, buffer magazine or another real magazine.
This parameter is optional. If magTo is not programmed, the value from mag‐
From is used.
Data type: INT
locTo Target location number of location to which the tool is to be moved.
This parameter is optional.
If locTo is not programmed or the value = 0 is programmed, an empty loca‐
tion search is conducted in magazine magTo - if this is a real magazine. A
location search cannot be performed in an internal magazine. If magTo is the
number of an internal magazine and locTo is not programmed or program‐
med with a value=0, status=-8 is set.
Data type: INT
state Success status of command
Data type: INT
0 Execution was successful (PLC acknowledgement may
still be pending)
-1 Command cannot be used because TMMG is not active
-2 Function is not performed because of block search, pro‐
gram testing
-3 Tool cannot be moved (because e.g. tool status "being
changed" is set)
-4 No tool located in source location
-5 magFrom has invalid value
-6 locFrom has invalid value
-7 magTo has invalid value

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 257
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

-8 locTo has invalid value

-9 No distance relation defined (if exactly one magazine is
an internal magazine)
-10 No empty location found (if parameter locTo is not pro‐
grammed)
-11 Target location for tool occupied
-12 The parameter locTo must be programmed, as magTo
is an internal magazine

Note
The command MVTOOL always reserves the target location with "reserved for tool to be
loaded".
The command sets the tool status of the tool to be moved to "tool is being changed", bit value
"H20" from the command preparation to the command completion (acknowledgement with
status 1 or 3).
Command completion means the successful completion with PLC status = 1 or 10 - or the
command is interrupted with PLC status = 3.
If a tool is moved from a real magazine to an internal magazine (or vice versa), the respective
magazine distance relation must be defined.
If the programmed parameters are invalid or if a tool is not located at the source magazine
location, or if the programmed target location cannot be occupied by the tool, or if the empty
location search does not find a location because parameter locTo has not been programmed,
or if a magazine distance relation that is required has not been defined, the appropriate error
code is returned via state.
Deselecting an active tool offset is not linked with the command.

PLC
In the NC, the NC command generates the command for the PLC, outputs the command within
the scope of executing the active block to the PLC. The active block is only considered to have
been executed if the end acknowledgement of the command is available from the PLC. This
can be the PLC status = 1, 3, or 5. Only then can a new block be loaded for execution.

Examples
The following configuration exists:
● Magazine (Magazine no. = 5, locations 1, ...10),
● a spindle (buffer magazine no. = 9998, location 1),
● a loading point (loading magazine no. = 9999, location 1)
The magazine is linked to the spindle and the loading point via a distance relation (see
$TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2).

Tool management
258 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Example 1
The tool from loading location 9999/1 is to be loaded in magazine 5. The following is
programmed:

Program code Comment

def int state
$TC_MPP6[9999, 1] =123 ;place tool with internal T no.=123 onto
loading location
MVTOOL(state, 9999, 1, 5) ;search for a suitable empty location in
magazine 5
;If the tool is to be loaded onto precisely location 7:
MVTOOL(state, 9999, 1, 5, 7) ; before loading, a check is performed to
ensure location 7 is empty

Example 2
The tool with T No.=123 is to be loaded from the loading location to spindle 1 (magazine
No.=9998, location No.=1):

Program code Comment

$TC_MPP6[9999, 1] =123
MVTOOL(state, 9999, 1, 9998, 1)

Example 3
With the same configuration, a tool that is loaded on location 7 is to be moved to another
suitable location in the same magazine.

Program code Comment

MVTOOL(state, 5, 7, 5)
;or to location 3 in the same magazine
MVTOOL(state, 5, 7, 5, 3)
;to any location in magazine 11
MVTOOL(state, 5, 7, 11)

6.9.25 SETTA - Activate tool from wear group

Procedure SETTA sets all tools belonging to the wear group that are not disabled to active.
However, from a tool group, no more than one tool, with reference to a spindle or tool holder,
becomes active.
If, at the call instant, no wear groups have been defined or if the function "wear group" via
machine data has not been activated, the command can still be used. The call parameters must
then be set accordingly.
If the selection criteria of SETTA match several tools within a tool group, selection criterion
$TC_MAMP3, bits 12-13 is applied. If there is already an active tool that fulfills the criteria of
SETTA, no additional tool (relating to the same spindle) is activated.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 259
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

If SETTA is not parameterized, the active setting refers to all tools that are loaded, released, and
not blocked in the TO area.

Syntax
SETTA (STATUS, MNO, VNO, USEKT)

Meaning

SETTA Sets all tools belonging to the wear group that are not disabled to active
Data type: -
MNR Magazine number (optional)
Data type: INT
0 or Not specifying the parameter means that active set‐
ting applies to all magazines - irrespective of whether a
distance relation to a spindle location exists.
-1 All magazines with a distance relation to a spindle or tool
holder.
-2 An active tool from every tool group represented in the
magazine is set in the magazine of each spindle or each
tool holder (equivalent to calling SETTA several times
with the specific magazine numbers that are involved).
This means there can be, for example, 2 tool holders
with 1 magazine assigned to each. The tools of a group
can be distributed in any configuration among the two
magazines. If both magazines include tools of a group,
this means that two tools from the tool group are alloca‐
ted the active state.
If several magazines are addressed (MNR ≤ 0), the magazines are regarded as a unit and a tool from
the tool group is activated across all of the magazines that are being considered. Blocked magazines
($TC_MPP3, Bit 1=1) are not taken into account.
VNR Wear group number (optional)
Data type: INT
0 The active setting applies to the magazine locations that
are not assigned to a wear group.
-1 Active wear group ($TC_MAP9). If there is no active
wear group in any of the magazines, status -1 is re‐
turned and the status of the tools is not changed.
-2 or if the parameter is not specified, this means that ac‐
tive setting applies to the whole magazine. Especially
parameter VNR is not specified or set to -2 if the system
does not use the "wear group" function.
USEKT Tool subgroup (optional)
Data type: INT
0 or If the parameter is not specified, all tools in the group
are considered.
-1 The currently programmed value of $P_USEKT is used.

Tool management
260 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

STATUS Return parameter (optional)

Data type: REF INT
0 Procedure was correctly executed.
1 Procedure was executed, but another tool is active in
the group (e.g. an unloaded tool).
-1 Procedure was not executed because there is no active
wear group in the selected magazines.
-2 Procedure was not executed because the programmed
wear group number does not exist.
-3 Procedure was not executed because the programmed
magazine number does not exist.
-4 Procedure was not executed because the function
"wear group" is not enabled (MN_TOOL_MANAGE‐
MENT_MASK).
-5 Procedure was not executed for other reasons.

A search strategy can be set in parameter $TC_MAMP3 for the tool to be activated by SETTA.

Bit 12 = 0 Smallest possible duplo number (default)

Bit 12 = 1 Smallest possible magazine location
Bit 13 = 1 Smallest possible number contained in parameter $TC_TP10 (sequence of use)

Note
It is mandatory to set the wear group for the SETTA procedure.

Multitool
If SETTA is programmed for a multitool, instead of for a magazine, the following alarm is
generated: alarm 6462 "[Channel %1:] block %2 command %' can only be programmed for
magazines. '%4' means no magazine".

See also
SETTIA - Deactivate tool from wear group (Page 261)

6.9.26 SETTIA - Deactivate tool from wear group

Procedure SETTIA resets the status "active" in all tools. By parameterizing the NC command,
this can be either magazine-specific or wear group-specific.

Note
It is mandatory to set the wear group for the SETTIA procedure.

Syntax
SETTIA(STATUS, MNO, VNO,USEKT)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 261
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Meaning

SETTIA: Sets all tools belonging to the wear group that are not disabled to inactive
Data type: INT
MNR Magazine number (optional)
Data type: INT
0 The inactive setting is applied to all magazines irrespective of
any assignment to a spindle. In this case, the tools in the
buffer are also considered as well as the tool holder.
>0 Magazine number in which the inactive setting will be applied.
Tools in this magazine that are in the buffer are not consid‐
ered. This means that if these tools are placed back into the
magazine, they still have "active" status.
-1 All magazines with a distance relation to a spindle or tool
holder.
VNR Wear group number (optional)
0 The inactive setting applies to all tools that are not assigned to
a wear group. If no wear group is defined, the inactive setting
is applied to all tools in the magazine.
>0 Wear group number in which the active setting will be applied.
-1 Active wear group ($TC_MAP9).
USEKT Tool subgroup (optional)
0 All tools in the group are considered.
>0 The tools are considered that have a bit set in the value pro‐
grammed in USEKT in parameter $TC_TP11.
-1 The currently programmed value of USEKT is used.
STATUS Return parameter (optional)
Data type: REF INT
0 procedure was able to be executed correctly.
-1 Procedure was not executed because there is no active wear
group in the selected magazines.
-2 Procedure was not executed because the programmed wear
group number does not exist.
-3 Procedure was not executed because the programmed mag‐
azine number does not exist.
-4 Procedure was not executed because the function "wear
group" is not enabled (MN_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK).
-5 Procedure was not executed.

A search strategy can be set in parameter $TC_MAMP3 for the tool to be activated by SETTIA.
Multitool
If SETTIA is programmed for a multitool, instead of for a magazine, the following alarm is
generated: Alarm 6462 "[Channel %1:] block %2 command %3' can only be programmed for
magazines. '%4' means no magazine".

See also
SETTA - Activate tool from wear group (Page 259)

Tool management
262 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.27 RESETMON - NC command for setpoint activation

Procedure RESETMON sets the actual value of the tool to the setpoint.
The original maximum values, for example, set service life, and set workpiece count, are
reactivated and tool states such as "tool disabled" (prewarning limit reached) are reset.
This command is used for tools and multitools.

Syntax
RESETMON (state, t, d, mon, resetStates)

Meaning

RESETMON Sets the actual value of the tool to the setpoint

Data type: ...
state Return parameter, which can have the following values:
Data type: REF INT
0 Command was successfully executed
-1 The cutting edge with the specified D number d does not
exist.
-2 The tool with the specified T number t does not exist.
-3 There is no monitoring function defined for the specified
tool. This status is only possible if t has been specified
explicitly.
-4 Monitoring function is not active in the NC, i.e. the com‐
mand has not been executed.
t Internal T number
Data type: INT
t=0 All tools are handled.
t>0 Precisely this tool is handled.
t<0 The absolute value of t is formed and all replacement
tools of this tool are handled.
d D number of the tool (optional).
If the parameter is not specified at all or is assigned the value 0, all D numbers
or all cutting edges of the tool are handled.
Data type: INT
d>0 The command applies specifically to the specified D
number.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 263
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

mon Bit-coded parameters (optional)

If the parameter is either not specified at all or assigned the value 0, all actual
values of the active, tool-specific monitoring functions for the designated
edge(s) are set to the setpoints.

mon > 0 Precisely the actual value of the specified monitoring

type is handled.
Possible values are the positive values of the system
parameter $TC_TP9 (1, 2, 4, 8) or the corresponding bit
combinations when several monitoring types are activa‐
ted.
mon < 0 Precisely the actual value in the monitoring type speci‐
fied in "absolute value mon" is handled. There is no re‐
striction due to the system variable values $TC_TP9.
The values of non-activated monitoring types can also
be reset in this way too. In particular, it is also possible
to simultaneously reset the actual values of wear and
additive offset monitoring values.
resetStates Bit-coded parameters (optional)

Bit 0 Tool status "active" is deleted

Bit 1 Tool status "enabled" is set
Bit 2 Tool status "disabled" is reset if
● a) the monitoring data permit this
● b) parameter "mon" is set accordingly
Bit 3 Tool status "measure" is set
Bit 4 Tool status "prewarning limit" is reset if
● c) the monitoring data permit this
● d) parameter "mon" is set accordingly
Bit 5 Not permitted
Bit 6 Not permitted
Bit 7 Tool status "was in use" is deleted
Bit 8 Not permitted
Bit 9 Not permitted
Bit 10 Tool status "to unload" is deleted
Bit 11 Not permitted
Bit 12 Not permitted

The parameter resetStates allows selective modification of the tool status in addition to the
monitoring parameters. The bit coding for resetStates corresponds to that for the tool status
parameter $TC_TP8[x].
If this parameter is not specified, machine data $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK is accessed.
The bit coding for this data is identical to that for parameter "resetStates". With the analogous
PI service PI_TRESMO, this machine data is also effective.

RESETMON for multitools

Multitool

Tool management
264 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

The parameters of RESETMON are extended for a multitool.

Syntax for multitools

RESETMON (state, MTno, Dno, mon, resetStates)

Meaning of the parameters for multitools

state Return parameter, which can have the following values:

Data type: REF INT
0 Command was successfully executed
-1 The cutting edge with the specified number Dno does
not exist.
-2 The multitool with the specified number MTno does not
exist.
MTno Internal T number
Data type: INT
t=0 All tools are handled.
t>0 Precisely this tool is handled.
t<0 The absolute value of t is formed and all replacement
tools of this tool are handled.
Dno D number of the tool (optional).
If the parameter is not specified at all or is assigned the value 0, all D numbers
or all cutting edges of the tool are handled.
Data type: INT
Dno = 0 If the parameter is not specified, or if the tool is pro‐
grammed with 0, all cutting edges of the tools are han‐
dled in the multitool.
Dno > 0 The command refers precisely to the cutting edges of
the tools in the multitool with the specified D number.
mon mon applies to the tools in the multitool - see above
Data type: INT
resetStates resetStates applies, on one hand, to states of the individual tool, which
when reset to the setpoints, must be additionally changed, but here, for this
particular programming, also to the corresponding MT states, which are
changed if at least the same state has been changed in one of the tools loaded
in the multitool.
Bit Value Meaning
1= 0 Multitool status "enabled" remains unchanged
1 Multitool status "enabled" is set
2= 0 Multitool status "disabled" remains unchanged
1 Multitool status "disabled" is deleted if permitted by the
monitoring data and the 4th parameter is set accordingly

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 265
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Note
If the optional parameter resetstates is not programmed, the value of MD
$MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK is considered an implicit value.
Analogously to this, the MT number can be programmed for the parameter T number of the
corresponding PI service _N_TRESMO.
The MD $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK available to parameterize the RESETMON
command, with the description "behavior of the tool data for RESETMON", retains its effect on
the tools - even if they are located in a multitool and are reset using RESETMON.

The selectable state changes also affects the multitool, if this has been programmed and the
appropriate state has been defined.

T MT
Bit 0 Delete "active" status X -
Bit 1 Set the "enabled" status X X
Bit 2 Conditionally delete "disabled" status if monitoring data permit this X X
Bit 3 Set the "measured" status X -
Bit 4 Conditionally delete "Prewarning limit" status if monitoring data permit this X -
Bit 7 Delete "was in use" status X -
Bit 10 Delete "to unload" status x x

Multitool example (1)

The actual time monitoring value (4th parameter = 1) of the cutting edges with the D number 2
(3rd parameter) of all tools that have been loaded to the MT with the number 500, is reset to the
setpoint. As part of this, the state value of the tools whose time monitoring has been changed,
is changed in accordance with the settings of the last parameter.
As 500 is the number of a multitool, the state of this multitool is also changed in accordance with
the settings of the last parameter. Note that only the programmed bits 1, 2, 10 are relevant for
the MT state change.
The success of the command is indicated in the "state" reference parameter.
int state=0
RESETMON(state, 500, 2, 1, "H49F")
MT 500 in the example is equipped with three tools. Each tool has two cutting edges with D no.
= 1 and 2. Two are time-monitored and are disabled due to the time limit in the cutting edges
with D number = 2; the third tool is workpiece count-monitored and is also disabled because the
workpiece count limit has been reached in the cutting edge with the D number = 2. The two time-
monitored tools are now reset with RESETMON, the tool state "disabled" is canceled and the
MT state "disabled" is also canceled (although the workpiece count-monitored tool is still
disabled). The other programmed tool and MT states except "disabled" are changed according
to the definition.
If the following had been programmed:

Tool management
266 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

RESETMON(state, 500, 2, 0, "H49F")

all the monitoring actual values of all tools in the MT would have been reset to their setpoints
(4th parameter = 0) and all tools would have reset the "disabled" state and the MT would have
reset its "disabled" state. The other programmed states would also have been changed.

Multitool example (2)

The actual values of the time monitoring of all cutting edges and all tools are set to the setpoints
of the time monitoring.
The states of the tools are changed in accordance with the programming (last parameter =
"H405"; reset "disabled" state conditionally and reset states "active" and "to be unloaded"
unconditionally). The state of the multitool is also changed in accordance with the programming
(the MT state "disabled" conditionally, the state "to be unloaded" unconditionally).
int state=0
RESETMON(state, 0, 0, 1, "H405")

6.9.28 DELTC - Delete toolholder data record

The function "Tool holder orientation" must be active. The function can be additively
superimposed over the functions TMMO and TMMG.
The function DELTC deletes a tool holder data set.

Syntax
DELTC(n,m)

Meaning

DELTC Deletes a toolholder data set

Data type: -
n First number of the tool holder data area whose values are to be set to zero
(optional).
If n is not specified, all tool holder data sets are set to zero starting at the
lowest through to the highest number.
Data type: INT
m Last number of the tool holder data area the values of which are to be set to
zero (optional).
If m is not specified, the tool holder data set identified by n is set to zero. If m
is greater than the highest number of a tool holder data record in this channel,
those data sets up to the highest number are set to zero.
Data type: INT

The tool holder data sets are defined by the system variables $TC_CARRx. System variable
$TC_CARR1[0] is provided for setting all data sets to zero. With DELTC, a range of numbers for
the tool holder data from n to m can now be set to zero.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 267
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

In particular, the content of DELTC is equal to $TC_CARR1[0]=0= set all data sets to zero.
Parameters n, m have to be programmed with values larger than zero. Other values result in an
alarm.
Parameter n must be less than m. Other values result in an alarm.
Also, n must lie in the range of numbers permitted for tool holder data.
The selected range of numbers must include the range of numbers for the tool holder data sets
on the channel. Programming is otherwise rejected and an alarm is issued.
If the function "Tool holder data" is not activated ($MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER 0 0),
DELTC will also generate an alarm.

Example
In the TO unit, 14 tool holder sets with the numbers 1 to 14 are defined.

Program code Comment

DELTC(5,8) ;set the values of the data sets 5, 6, 7, 8 to zero
DELTC(5,20) ;set the values of the data sets 5, 6, 7, ...,14 to zero
DELTC(9) ;set the values of the data set 9 to zero
DELTC() ;set the values of the data sets 1, ..., 14 to zero
DELTC(0,1) ;error → alarm - n, m must be greater than zero
DELTC(0,-2) ;error → alarm - n, m must be greater than zero
DELTC(0) ;error → alarm - n must be greater than zero
DELTC(15,20) ;error → alarm - n must not be more than 14
DELTC(20) ;error → alarm - n must not be more than 14

6.9.29 TCA - tool selection/tool change irrespective of tool status

Function TCA is available for TMMO and TMMG.
The function TCA loads a tool irrespective of its status.
For certain routines (e. g. measuring cycles), it is necessary to load a specific tool onto the
spindle / the tool holder for tool change regardless of its status (e. g. a disabled tool).

Syntax
TCA("Tool name", duplo No., toolholder No.)

Meaning

TCA Loads a tool irrespective of its status.

Data type: -
Tool name Identifier of the tool to be loaded
Data type: STRING

Tool management
268 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Duplo no. Duplo number of tool to be loaded (optional).

If Duplono. is not specified, the tool with the lowest duplo number is loaded.
Data type: INT
Tool holder no. Tool holder or spindle on which the tool change is to be performed (optional).
If Tool holder no. is not specified, the tool change refers to the currently
set or programmed master spindle / master tool holder.
The following applies for TMMO without TMMG:
The parameter corresponds to the address extension of the T command.
(The setting for MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO is taken into ac‐
count.)
Data type: INT

TCA behaves like the T command in its alarm and command output.
If neither TMMG nor TMMO are active, an alarm is generated.
Any alarms occurring during programming are handled in the same way as the alarms during
T programming.

Note
Offset selection, in accordance with $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, acts in the same way
as for the T command. TCA and D must not be programmed in the same block.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 269
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Examples
1. Preparation and change with T command (i. e. $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0)
Configuration 1x turret, 1x tool holder
There are 2 tools with the identifier "Finish cutter" and duplo numbers 1 and 2.
TCA("Finish cutter", 1.1)
The tool "Finish cutter" with duplo number 1 is loaded onto tool holder 1.
With the machine configuration assumed above, the following programming would have the
same result:
TCA("Finish cutter")
The duplo number is not specified, this means that the tool with the lowest duplo number is
changed, i.e. duplo "1".
Tool holder not specified. Therefore, the change is effective for the current master tool
holder, i.e. "1".
2. Change with M06 ($MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1)
Configuration: 1x chain magazine, 2x spindles, spindle_1 is the master spindle. 4 tools are
loaded, "MILL_20MM", with duplo numbers 4, 5, 8 and 15.
"MILL_20MM", duplo "8" was disabled and must be measured. Measurement is taken on
spindle 2.
TCA("MILL_20MM",8,2)
M2=6
The tool "MILL_20MM", duplo "8" is prepared for spindle "2" and changed.
In this case, the following programming would lead to a different result:
TCA("MILL_20MM")
M06
Tool "MILL_20MM" with duplo "4" (lowest duplo number) is prepared for spindle "1" (this is
the master spindle) and changed with M06.
Note
The following special issues apply for TCA when compared to T commands:
● TCA and D cannot be programmed in the same block.
● TCA renders the set search strategies ($TC_MAMP2 and/or $TC_MAP10) ineffective
and ignores the programmed values of $P_USEKT.
● The tool must have status "enabled".
● The PLC interface signals "Transition to new replacement tool" and "Last replacement
tool of group" are not set.

PLC
The PLC is not allowed to reject a tool prepared with "TCA".
Notice: Currently the interface does not have any criteria as to whether a tool may be rejected
or not.
If this function is being used, an additional identifier must be used to indicate this to the PLC.

Program code Comment

$TC_VDITCP[2]=101 ("101" - identifier that the PLC is not allowed to reject)
TCA("Mill",1)

Supplement to the definition if the programmed tool is a multitool

Tool management
270 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

With function TCA, a specific tool with "tool name"/"duplo number" can be loaded into the tool
holder irrespective of the tool state. If this tool is a multitool, the state of the multitool as well as
the state of the tool is ignored for the command. This especially allows a tool to be selected and/
or swapped out from a disabled multitool.

Note
The command can only be programmed for tools - also those that are loaded in a multitool;
however it cannot be programmed for a multitool. If the programmed name is an MT name for
example, Alarm 6460 "[Channel%1: ] block %2 command %3 can only be programmed for
tools. %4 means no tool." is generated.

Note
A tool from a disabled magazine or magazine location cannot be loaded into the spindle or the
tool holder even with TCA.

See also
Replacement of the TCA command (Page 409)

6.9.30 TCI - Load tool from buffer into magazine

Function TCI is available for TMMG.
The function TCI loads the tools from the buffer locations back into the magazine Tool holder
locations are however excepted from this. Generally, applications are for complex machines
with several grippers.
The necessary empty location search is performed in the same way as for a programmed tool
change with T (see Section "Preparing a tool change via T command (Page 376)").

Note
TCI cannot be programmed together with M06 in one NC block. Tool change preparation and
execution are performed in one operation.
The TCI command cannot be substituted (T function replacement).

TCI(locNo, toolholder no.)

locNo Number of the buffer whose tool is to be returned to the magazine.

Since the locNo cannot be the location number of a tool holder, returning the tool has no effect on
active tool offset.
Tool holder no. This specifies the number of the tool holder from where the tool is to be removed. This parameter is
optional. If this parameters is not specified, the current master tool holder is automatically selected.

Alarm 6403 is generated if an invalid location number is programmed.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 271
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Syntax
TCI(locNo, toolholder no.)

Meaning

TCI Loads the tools from the buffer locations back into the magazine.
Data type: -
locNo Number of the buffer whose tool is to be returned to the magazine.
Since locNo cannot be the location number of a tool holder, returning the tool
has no effect on active tool offset.
Data type: INT
Tool holder no. Specifies the number of the tool holder from where the tool is to be removed
(optional).
If Tool holder no. is not specified, the current master tool holder is auto‐
matically selected.
Data type: INT

Alarm 6403 is generated if an invalid location number is programmed.

The location number locNo is invalid
● if locNo indicates a tool holder / spindle (alarm 6450)
● if locNo indicates a non-defined buffer location (alarm 6403)
● if locNo is not linked to the programmed tool holder or master tool holder by $TC_MLSR
(alarm 6454)
● if no distance table is defined either for the buffer locNo or for the tool holder / spindle (alarm
6454)
Alarm 6451 is generated if no buffer magazine has been defined.
Alarm 6452 is generated if the specified tool holder is not defined.
Alarm 6431 is generated if TMMG is not active.
To successfully program TCI, it is necessary for the specified location number locNo to be
assigned to the tool holder via $TC_MLSR. Empty locations are searched for in the magazines
defined in the distance table (defined by $TC_MDP2) of the buffer locNo or of the tool holder.
If both the buffer locNo and the tool holder have a distance table, the buffer distance table is
the one that is used. Alarm 6454 is generated if neither has a distance table.

Note
The command TCI contains as parameter, the number of a location (gripper, loader, transfer
point) of the buffer magazine. To use this NC command in your own cycle programs, the
location number can be identified using the system variable $P_MAGNREL, $P_MAGREL.

Examples
The following magazine configuration is present:
● Magazine 1

Tool management
272 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

The following is defined in the buffer magazine with 5 locations:

● Spindle 2 (location 1) with grippers 1 and 2 (locations 3 and 4 coupled with the spindle
through $TC_MLSR[3,1] = 0 and $TC_MLSR[4,1] = 0)
● Spindle 1 (location 2) with gripper 3 (location 5 coupled with the spindle through
$TC_MLSR[5,2] = 0)
The following is programmed:

Program code Comment

TCI(2) ;generates alarm 6450
TCI(5) ;returns the tool from location 5 (gripper 3) back to the
magazine
TCI(9) ;Alarm 6403 (buffer only has the numbers 1 to 5)

The user determines the sequence in which the buffer locations are cleared by programming.

PLC
TCI is executed in the PLC like the programming of T0 M06.
The buffer number transferred in the DB72 has to be evaluated.

Multitool
The TCI command also changes multitools from internal magazines into the magazine.

6.9.31 GETFREELOC - Search for empty location

Function GETFREELOC is available for TMMG.
The function GETFREELOC searches for an empty location for a given tool in those magazines
assigned to the specified loading location or the specified spindle / tool holder location by an
entry in the distance table. The strategy set by $TC_MAMP2 or $TC_MAP10 is used as the
search strategy. The search strategy can be programmed with:
Defined location type hierarchies are taken into consideration during a search for an empty
location by the PI service or in a programmed tool change.
Alarm 14020 is generated if fewer than three parameters are programmed.

Note
GETFREELOC only reserves the empty location found if the optional parameter withReserv
is programmed with "L" or "S".

GETFREELOC(magNo&, locNo&, T-No., refMag, refLoc, withReserv)

Find/check empty location for specified tool regarding specified loading / buffer magazine and
location number. Reserve the location found corresponding to the programming of the
parameter withReserve.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 273
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Syntax
GETFREELOC(magNo, locNo, T no., refMag, refLoc, withReserv)

Meaning

GETFREELOC Searches for a free space in the magazine for a given tool
Data type: -
mgNo Magazine number of the magazine; the parameter is both an input parameter
and a result parameter.
Data type: REF INT
Input value
>0 Magazine number of the magazine in which the search
is to be made. Note that only magazine numbers are
valid that can be reached from the programmed refer‐
ence location (parameter refMag/refLoc).
0 The magazine in which the search is to be made is not
specified. Search starts in the magazine that is the first
in accordance with the selected search strategy.
Output value
>0 Magazine number of the magazine where the empty lo‐
cation is found.
0 If no empty location is found.
-1 TMMG not active
-2 Invalid magazine number specified
-3 Invalid magazine location number specified.
The location number is also regarded as invalid when
the magazine number is invalid.
-4 Invalid T number tNo specified.
-5 Invalid letter for "refMag".
-6 If refMag = = "S", invalid tool holder number refLoc
specified.
If regMag = = "L", invalid load location number refLoc
specified.
-7 Parameter "withReserv" has an illegal value.
-8 Parameter withReserv = "reserved for new tool to be
loaded" cannot be programmed for tools that are in the
buffer (whatever the value of the owner magazine for
this tool).
-9 Parameter withReserv = "reserved for tools in the
buffer" is only possible for tools that are in the buffer.
-10 The value of parameter "withReserv" is not compati‐
ble with the programmed value of parameter refMag.
-11 First parameter has the value of a multitool number
(i.e. empty location search in the MT). Only three pa‐
rameters can be programmed.
-99 Other (unexpected) problem in the programming.

Tool management
274 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

locNo Magazine number of the location; The parameter both an input parameter and
a result parameter.
Data type: REF INT
Input value
>0 Magazine location number of the location that is to be
checked for receiving the specified tool.
If magNo=0 is programmed, a value locNo > 0 is ignor‐
ed.
0 No specification of the magazine location. Search starts
with the location that is the first according to the set
search strategy.
Result value
>0 Magazine location number of the empty location that
was found or checked.
0 If no empty location is found.
-1, -2, ..., -99 Have the same meaning as the error status values of
parameter magNo.
tNo T number of the tool for which an empty location is to be searched.
The searched location must be suitable for the tool size and the type of mag‐
azine location defined in the tool.
If an invalid T number is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo each return
the value -4.
refMag Reference magazine referred to for the empty location search (optional pa‐
rameter).
Data type: CHAR
"S" = buffer magazine
"L" = loading magazine
"-" = no reference magazine. Is used if a magazine definitely has to be speci‐
fied.
If a value not equal to "S", "L" is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo each
return the value -5. If the specified reference magazine is not yet defined,
parameters magNo, locNo also return the value -5.
refLoc Spindle number/tool holder number;
Data type: INT
If refMag equals "S", then the spindle number / tool holder number is speci‐
fied here for empty location search.
If an invalid tool holder number is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo
each return the value -6.
If refMag equals "L", the number of the location in the loading magazine is
specified for which a search will be made for an empty location.
If an invalid number is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo each return
the value -6.
This parameter is optional. If it is not programmed, the search for the master
tool holder is performed for refMag = "S".
When refMag = "L", the search is performed for location number = 1 in the
loading magazine.
When refMag = "-", the parameter is not taken into account.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 275
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

withReserv Reserved for the found/checked empty location in the real magazine.
Data type: CHAR
"L" = reserves the found/checked empty location in the real magazine with
"reserved for tool to be loaded" (this is in system parameter $TC_MPP4, the
bit value "H8).
The reservation is only set when the programmed tool has not been loaded
yet, i.e. the owner address of the tool is zero.
Otherwise, the status is set to the value = -8.
"S" = if the tool for the programmed T number is already located at a location
in the buffer: Reserve the found/checked empty location in the real magazine
with "reserved for tool in the buffer" (in system parameter $TC_MPP4, the bit
value "H4"; this is generally automatically set if the tool change is programmed
with T / M06).
If the owner magazine address of this tool is = 0 and the tool is located in a
magazine location (i.e. the current magazine address of the tool is not 0): Also
set this owner address to the value of the found/checked empty location.
If the tool already has an owner magazine address, this is replaced by the new
magazine address if the new address is different from the old address.
If the location of the old owner magazine address is reserved, the reservation
is canceled.
If a location is already reserved for the programmed tool, this reservation is
canceled before the new reservation is set. "-" = leaves the reserved status of
the found/checked empty location unchanged.
This parameter is optional. If it is not programmed, "-" is implicitly interpreted
as programmed; i.e. the reserved status remains unchanged.

Note
If several parameters are incorrect, the value of magNo, locNo will depend on which parameter
NC checks first.
If an empty location is sought for a tool with fixed coding, GETFREELOC always returns the
owner location of this tool.
Locations on internal magazines (loading magazine, buffer magazine) cannot be reserved.

If TMMG is not active, an alarm is generated.

Examples
There are two magazines with the magazine numbers 1 and 2 - each with five locations. There
are also two spindles (spindle numbers 1 and 2 with location numbers 1 an 2) and a gripper
(assigned location number 3, spindle number 1) in the buffer magazine and two loading
locations (location numbers 1 and 2) in the loading magazine.
Both magazines are linked to the locations of the buffer and the locations of the loading
magazine (via the distance relations). The following examples are independent of one another.

Empty location search / reservation for loading via loading location

def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo=44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined

Tool management
276 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2 )

; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 an empty location is sought for loading location 2.
; The suitable empty location is in magazine 2, location 5. The references magNo/locNo
; return the values 2/5.
; The state of the magazine location is not changed.
def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo=44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2, "L")
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 and emptly location is sought for loading location 2.
; The suitable empty location is in magazine 2, location 5. The references magNo/locNo
; return the values 2/5.
; The location 2/5 is reserved "for the tool to be loaded".
def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo=44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2, "S" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 regarding loading location 2, a search is made for an
empty location.
; The programming is illegal because for refMag = "L", the programming
; with Reserv = "S" is not defined
; The references magNo/locNo return the status values = -10 /-10 = the value of
; parameter "withReserv" is not compatible with the value of
; parameter "refMag".
def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo = 44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 ist definiert
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2, "e" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 regarding the tool holder with location no. = 1,
;a search is made for an empty location.
; The programming is illegal because parameter "withReserv" has been programmed
; with the wrong value.
; The references magNo/locNo ; return the status values = -7 / -7 = parameter "withReserv"
; has an illegal value.

Empty location search / reservation for loading via tool holder / spindle
def int magNo = 0, locNo = 0
def int tNo = 4 ;tool with T No. = 4 is defined
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S" )
or with the same function
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", "-" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 4, regarding the master spindle, a search is made for an
empty location.
; The suitable empty location is in magazine 1, location 3. The references
; magNo/locNo return the values 1/3.
; The state of the magazine location is not changed.
def int magNo = 2, locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 277
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, is on the tool holder and does not have an
; owner location in the magazine yet (is therefore not considered as loaded),
; or already has an owner location in a magazine (loaded)
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "L" )
; for the tool with T no. = 44, regarding the tool holder with location number1, a
; search is made for an empty location. The programming is illegal because an attempt is
made
; to set the reservation "reserved for new tool to be loaded" for a tool in the
; buffer. The references magNo/locNo return the status values -8 / -8 = "Parameter value
: cannot be programmed for tools that are in the buffer".
def int magNo, locNo
def int tNo = 44 ; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, is on the tool holder
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "S" )
; the same starting position applies as for the programming of the previous
; command. The suitable empty location is in magazine 2, location 5. The references
magNo/locNo
; return the values 2/5. Location 2/5 is reserved "for tool in the buffer".
def int magNo = 0, locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44
; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined and is in the gripper which is connected via $TC_MLSR with
; the tool holder of the location with number 1
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 3, "S" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44, regarding the tool holder with location number 1, a
; search is made for an empty location. The suitable empty location is in magazine 2,
location 5. The references magNo/locNo
; return the values 2/5.
; The location 2/5 is reserved "for tool in the buffer".
; (This state is retained during NC run-up if the reserving tool is still in the
; buffer at this time)
def int magNo = 0, locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44 ; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined and is not in the buffer
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 2, "S" )
; for the defined tool with T No. = 44, regarding the buffer location 2 a search is made for
an empty location
;.
; The programming is impermissible because an attempt is made to set the reservation
"reserved for
: tool in the buffer" for a tool search of the buffer.
; The references magNo/locNo return the status values -9 / -9 = "Parameter value is only
; possible for tools that are in the buffer".
def int magNo = 0, locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44 ; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, but not (yet) loaded.
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "S" )
; An empty location
is sought for the defined tool with T No. = 44 with tool holder no. 1.
; The suitable empty location is in magazine 2, location 5.

Tool management
278 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

; But because the tool cannot be loaded,

; the last parameter cannot be programmed with the value "S".
; The reference magNo/locNo return the status values -8 / -8 = "Parameter value cannot be
; programmed for tools that are in the buffer".
def int magNo = 0, locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44 ; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, but not (yet) loaded.
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "L" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44, regarding the tool holder with location number 1, a
; search is made for an empty location. The suitable empty location is in magazine 2,
location 5. The references
; magNo/locNo return the values 2/5.

6.9.32 DELMLRES - Delete location status "reserved for tool in the buffer"
Function DELMLRES is available for TMMG.
The function DELMLRES cancels the location reservation, type resType of the location with the
number magNo.

Syntax
state = DELMLRES (magNo, locNo, resType)

Meaning

delmlres Cancels location reservation

Data type: INT
magNo Magazine number of the magazine that contains the location.
Data type: INT
Unit:
Value range: MIN < x < MAX
locNo Magazine location number of the location whose reservation should be de‐
leted.
Data type: INT
resType Type of reservation to be deleted (optional).
● "L" Reservation for "tool to be loaded" ("L "= "Tool to be Loaded")
● "S" Reservation for "tool in the buffer" ("S" = tool in spindle" or generally
tool in buffer).
If resType is not programmed, the reservation that is set is deleted - either "L"
or "S". If no reservation is set, the command has no effect.
Return value
state Result of the command execution
Data type: INT
0 Command successfully executed (even if the location
was not reserved).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 279
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

-1 TMMG is not active

-2 Invalid magazine number specified
-3 Invalid magazine location number specified
-4 Invalid letter for resType

Example 1
For the oversize tool located in gripper 1 (magazine No. 9998, location No. = 4), the location
reservation, for tool in the buffer, is to be deleted.

Program code Comment

def int tNo, magNo, locNo ;
tNo = $TC_MPP6[ 9998, 4 ] ;
magNo = $A_MYMN[ tNo ] ; Owner magazine
locNo = $A_MYLN[ tNo ] ; Owner magazine location
that ; was
reserved
state = DELMLRES ( magNo, locNo, "s" ) ; the same meaning would be "DELMLRES(mag-
No, locNo)"
if (state < 0 ) gotof error
;To ensure that the location is also reserved for the tool that is intended to be
loaded on a tool change, the following additional check can be made:
if ( $TC_MPP66[ magNo, locNo ] GOTOF ERROR

Example 2
Load programmed tool via tool holder (magazine No. 9998, location No. = 2). The loading
operation is programmed using the commands GETFREELOC, MVTOOL.

Program code Comment

def int tNo, magNo, locNo ;
tNo = 3 ; this tool should be loaded
GETFREELOC (magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 2, "L") ; Empty location search with reser-
vation
if ( (magNo > 0) ans (locNo > 0)
and ( "something not as wanted") )
if ( state < 0 ) GOTOF ERROR
endif
MVTOOL( state, 9998, 2, magNo, locNo )

6.9.33 DELMLOWNER - Delete owner magazine location of the tool

Function DELMLOWNER is available for TMMG.
The function DELMLOWNER deletes the tool or the multitool in the buffer magazine - owner
magazine location.

Tool management
280 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Syntax
state = DELMLOWNER(t)

Meaning

DELMLOWNER>: Deletes the tool or the multitool in the buffer magazine - owner magazine
location.
Data type: INT
t T number of the tool in which the owner location is deleted
Data type: INT
Return value
state Result of the command execution
0 Command was successfully executed.
-1 TMMG is not active
-2 Tool with the T no. = t does not exist - not for t = 0 either
-3 The tool is not loaded (does not have an owner location)
-4 The tool is not in the buffer magazine

Examples
If the owner location is reserved for this tool, implicitly, the location reservation "for tool in buffer"
is also deleted.
The system parameters $A_MYMN [ t ] and $A_MYMLN [ t ] read, after the delete operation, the
value = 0.

Program code Comment

def int tNo ;
tNo = GETT( name, duplo ) ; if only the name and duplo number of the
tool are known
tNo = $TC_MPP&[ magNo, locNo ] ; if only the magazine location contain-
ing the tool is known
tNo = $TC_MPP&[ magNo, locNo ] ; if only the magazine location whose res-
ervation is to be deleted is known

Multitool
The function DELMLOWNER is also available for multitools.
state = DELMLOWNER(INT MTno)
● In multitool with number MTno, delete the owner magazine location in the buffer magazine
● Therefore, also delete the owner location of the tools - contained in the multitool - with
numbers Tnoi; i=1, ..., $P_MTOOLNT.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 281
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

After the deletion operation, system parameters $A_MYMN [MTno] / $A_MYMLN [MTno] and
$A_MYMN [Tnoi] / $A_MYMLN [Tnoi] read the value = 0.

Note
After the deletion, the system parameters $A_TOOLMTN [Tnoi], $A_TOOLMTLN [Tnoi] and
$A_MYMTN [Tnoi], $A_MYMTLN [Tnoi] still read the values of the multitool, of the MT location
on which the tool with T number Tnoi has been loaded.

Note
The command cannot be programmed with the T number of a tool, which is loaded in a
multitool. This programming is rejected with state = -5.

6.9.34 $P_USEKT - Tool change only with tools of subgroup

Overview
This function is only available for TMMO and TMMG.
This command selects a subset of tools of a tool group which is then taken into account for the
subsequent tool changes (tool technology group).
The subgroups are set via system variables $TC_TP11[t].

Name $P_USEKT
Meaning $P_USEKT is a bit-coded value. Only the contents of the bits 0 - 3 are of signifi‐
cance.
All tools having the parameter $TC_TP11 that have set one of the bits of
$P_USEKT are available in the following tool changes. The value 0 means that "all
bits are set".
An alarm is generated if there is no such tool in a tool group for which a tool change
was programmed.
Data type INT
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
x x - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

Machine data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 20 sets whether after a reset or end of program,
the last programmed value of $P_USEKT is retained or whether $P_USEKT is set to the value
entered in $MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE.

Behavior at NC reset
For a more precise definition of the behavior at NC reset and NC start, a further bit is defined
in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK:
The newly defined bit 20 = 1 together with bit 0 = 1 of the same machine data specifies that the
programmed $P_USEKT value is retained at NC reset.

Tool management
282 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

In the other three possible combinations of bit 0 and bit 20, the value is taken from MD
$MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE.

Behavior at NC start
The last set $P_USEKT value remains effective. As $P_USEKT can only be changed by an NC
program, the $P_USEKT that was set at the last NC reset is effective.
It is possible, for example, to program a desired value n in $P_USEKT by using ASUPs at the
program start (ProgEvents).
If the tool change is programmed with the function T="location", the $P_USEKT command can
also be used. However, it is then necessary that the tool has set at least one bit of the
programmed $P_USEKT value on the programmed magazine location in parameter
$TC_TP11. Otherwise, the tool of another magazine location is selected. The following still
applies for this setting: At NC start the value of $P_USEKT = 0 is pre-assigned, irrespective of
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and $MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE.

Note
The system variable $TC_TP11 was not evaluated in NC up to now. The value is automatically
assigned 0. A check should be made in existing data records whether the values included here
are suitable.
The programming $P_USEKT = 0 means that all tools of the tool group are considered in the
tool selection.
The value $TC_TP11[t] = 0 means "the tool belongs to all defined tool groups". This ensures
compatibility with existing data records.
If working with the function T=location, $P_USEKT cannot be programmed.

Overview of the behavior for various settings:

The value from $MN_USEKT_RESET_VALUE is 8.
The values from $P_USEKT results in the following programs
1st program:
N10 $P_USEKT=2
N20 M00
N30 M02
M02
2nd program:
N100 R0=$P_USEKT

Setting of $MC_RE‐ Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1 Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1

SET_MODE_MASK Bit 20 = 0 Bit 20 = 0 Bit 20 = 1 Bit 20 = 1
Sequence of actions
After run-up 8 8 8 8
For "N20 M00" (after setting 2 2 2 2
P_USEKT)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 283
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Setting of $MC_RE‐ Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1 Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1

SET_MODE_MASK Bit 20 = 0 Bit 20 = 0 Bit 20 = 1 Bit 20 = 1
Sequence of actions
After end of program 8 8 8 2
For "N100 M00" (after program start) 8 8 8 2

Bit coding makes it possible for a tool to belong to several tool subgroups. Maximum four
different tool subgroups can be implemented through the configuration of NC; i.e. only bits 0,
1, 2, 3 are taken into account – not only during the programming of $P_USEKT, but also for
$TC_TP11. Tools with $TC_TP11[ t ] = 0 do not count as a tool subgroup.

Example
The tool group "Mill_25" comprises four tools.
(The following applies: Tool_Change_Mode=1)

Mill_25 Duplo 1 T_No. 1 TP11=1

Mill_25 Duplo 2 T_No. 2 TP11=2
Mill_25 Duplo 3 T_No. 3 TP11=4
Mill_25 Duplo 4 T_No. 4 TP11=8
%MPF
…
T="Mill_25"

M06 Every tool in this group can be loaded, as no selection has been made.
The search strategy that has been set prevails.
…
$P_USEKT=2
…
T="Mill_25"
M06 "Mill_25", duplo 2 loaded at change
…
$P_USEKT=9
…
T="Mill_25"
M06 "Mill_25", duplo 1 or duplo 4 loaded at change (depending on the se‐
lected search strategy)
…
$P_USEKT=0
…
T="Mill_25"
M06 Every tool in this group can be loaded, as USEKT=0 has canceled the
selection. The search strategy that has been set prevails.
…

Tool management
284 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

$P_USEKT=15
…
T="Mill_25"
M06 Every tool in this group can be loaded, as all bits are set. The search
strategy that has been set prevails.

T=location, automatic tool selection

First the attempt is made to load the tool from the programmed magazine location,
independently of the value in $TC_TP11. With the selection of the tool, the TP11 value of this
tool is taken into $P_USEKT and is considered as programmed. This means that only tools of
this subgroup can be selected.
However, if the tool at the programmed location is disabled, then the $TC_TP11 value of the
tool at the programmed magazine location is considered in order to access the sister tool. Only
tools that have one of the bits of the disabled tool in $TC_TP11 can be replacement tools.

6.9.35 TOOLGNT/TOOLGT - Tool groups

Functions TOOLGNT and TOLLGT are available for TMMO and TMMG.
The abbreviation TOOLGNT means: TOOLGroupNumberOfTools - number of tools of the group.
The abbreviation TOOLGT means: TOOLGroupToolNumber - T no. of the i-th tool of tool group
with i = 1, ...TOOLNTG.
The NC commands allow information to be obtained about the tools in the tool group.
TOOLGNT("identifier")
TOOLGT("identifier", i)

Syntax
result = TOOLGNT("identifier")
result = TOOLGT("identifier", i)

Meaning

TOOLGNT Number of tools of the group

TOOLGT T number of the i-th tool of the tool group
Data type: INT
Identifier Name of tool
Data type: STRING
i Tool group; i = 1 TOOL0TNG
Data type STRING
Return value

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 285
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

result Result value

Data type: INT
>0 successful read access
0 i is a value outside of the permitted range
-1 Neither function TMMG nor function TMMO active
-2 No tool exists for the name "identifier"

The NC defines the sequence of the tools in the tool group and this changes during the
programmed tool change with tools from this group.

Example
The tools "Drill_6mm"/Duplo_1, "Drill_6mm"/Duplo_2 and "Drill_6mm"/Duplo_3 are available.
The number of tools of the group "Drill_6mm" is read-out first.

Program code Comment

R1=TOOLGNT("Bohrer_6mm") ; R1=3
;The T number of these tools are then determined.
R11=TOOLGT("Drill_6mm,1))
R12=TOOLGT("Drill_6mm,2)
R13=TOOLGT("Drill_6mm,3)

6.9.36 $P_TMNOIS - is number, T number, magazine number, or MT number

The system variable $P_TMNOIS is available with TMMO and TMMG.
The system variable $P_TMNOIS returns the number property. Individual tools, magazines as
well as multitools use the number range 1–32000 for numbering. As a consequence, a
distinction must be made as to what the number actually refers to. This system parameter does
this.

Syntax
result = $P_TMNOIS[ nr ]

Meaning

$P_TMNOIS Returns the number property of the specified number.

Data type: INT
nr Number to be checked
Data type: INT
Return value

Tool management
286 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

result Property of the number

Data type: INT
3 no is the number of a defined tool and the number of a
defined magazine
2 no is the magazine number of a defined magazine
1 no is the T number of a defined tool
0 no is the MT number of a defined multitool
-3 Invalid number. no is neither the number of a tool, a
magazine nor a multitool.

Examples
Checks what the number stands for, e. g. a T number, MT number, or an invalid number

Program code Comment

def int result ;
def int no=4711 ;

6.9.37 $P_TOOLEXIST - Determine existence of a tool

System variable $P_TOOLEXIST returns the information whether a tool exists for a T number.
$P_TOOLEXIST is parameterized with the internal T number. Either true or false is returned.
If the T no. that returns a multitool is $P_TOOLEXIST=false, the T no. that returns an existing
tool is $P_TOOLEXIST=true. $P_TMNOIS (Page 286) can be used as an alternative.

Syntax
$P_TOOLEXIST[t]

Meaning

$P_TOOLEXIST Returns the information as to whether a tool exists for a particular number.
Data type: BOOL
TRUE A tool with this number exists
FALSE A tool with this number does not exist.
t T number of the tool
Data type: INT

The two commands are each available in all function versions of the tool management. The
following still applies: the result value True from $P_TOOLEXIST is equivalent to the result
value 1 from $P_TMNOIS. Settings for the following examples:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 287
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Examples
Example 1: A new tool is to be created (with a T number which is not identical to that of a
multitool or an already existing tool).

Program code Comment

N1 DEF INT no=2 ; number to be checked
N5 if ( ( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 0 ) and ;
( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 1 ) )
N6 $TC_TP2[ no ] = "Tool_2" ;generate new TL
N7 endif

Example 2: Example 2: A new MT is to be created (with a T number that is not identical to that
of an already existing multitool, or an already existing tool, or an already existing magazine):

Program code Comment

N1 DEF INT no=2 ; number to be checked
N5 if ( ( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 0 ) and ;
( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 1 ) and
( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 2 ) )
N6 $TC_MTPN[ no ] = 5 ; new MT with 5 locations
N7 endif

Example 3: An explicit number is to be checked as to whether it belongs to a defined tool:

Program code Comment

N1 DEF INT no=2 ; number to be checked
N5 if ( $P_TOOLEXIST[ no ] == true ) ;
N6 $TC_TP9[ no ] = 1 ; define the type of tool monitoring
N7 endif

6.9.38 $A_TOOLMN - read magazine no. from tool

System variable $A_TOOLMN returns the magazine number of the tool with T number t.
TOOLMN stands for "toolmagazine number".

Syntax
$A_TOOLMN[t]

Tool management
288 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Meaning

$A_TOOLMN: Returns the magazine number

Data type: INT
0 The tool is not assigned to any magazine.
-1 The tool management function is not active.
-2 No tool with the specified T number exists.
If the T number is outside the value range, an alarm is output.
t T number of the tool
Data type: INT

6.9.39 $P_MTOOLN / $P_MTOOLMT- determine number of multitools / MT number

System variables $P_MTOOLN and $P_MTOOLMT are provided with TMMG.
The following system variables provide an overview of the defined multitools.

Syntax
result = $P_MTOOLN
result = $P_MTOOLMT[i]

Meaning

$P_MTOOLN Returns the number of multitools in this channel.

Data type: INT
Return value
result Result value
>0 Number of defined multitools
0 No multitool defined
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
$P_MTOOLMT Returns the multitool number of the i-th multitool
Data type: INT
i Number of the multitool
Return value
result Multitool number of the multitool
Data type: INT

Example

Program code Comment

def int number = 0

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 289
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Program code Comment

def int i = 0
def string[32] mtName
number = $P_MTOOLN
for i = 1 to number
r[i] = $P_MTOOLMT[i] ;write all MT numbers of the defined mul-
titool :in consecutive R parameters
endfor
mtName = $P_MTP2[$P_MTOOLMT[i]] ;write the name of the last multitool af-
ter mtName

6.9.40 $P_MTOOLNT / $P_MTOOLT - Number of tools in the multitool

System variables $P_MTOOLNT and $P_MTOOLT are made available with TMMG.

Note
Also refer to the analog tool-specific system parameters $P_TOOLNT, $P_TOOLT.

System variable $P_MTOOLNT returns the number of tools in the multitool.

System variable $P_MTOOLT returns the T number of the i-th tool of the multitool.

Syntax
result = $P_MTOOLNT[mt]
result = $P_MTOOLT[mt, i]

Meaning

$P_MTOOLNT Returns the number of tools in the multitool

Data type: INT
mt Multitool number
Data type: INT
Return value
result Result value
Data type: INT
>0 Number of tools in the multitool
0 No tool contained in the multitool with the number mt
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 mt is not the number of a defined multitool
$P_MTOOLT[mt, i] Returns the T number of the i-th tool
Data type: INT
mt Multitool number
Data type: INT

Tool management
290 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

i Index of multitools with 0 < i < $P_MTOOLNT

Data type: INT
Return value
result Result value
Data type: INT
>0 Number of the i-th tool in the multitool
0 i is a value outside of the permitted range
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 mt is not the number of a defined multitool

Example
Multitool with number 500 has 6 locations. 3 tools with the T numbers 11, 22, and 33 are loaded
to the locations 1, 2, and 5.

Program code Comment

def int number = 0
def int i = 0
number = $P_MTOOLNT[500] ;the number of tools is 3
for i = 1 to number ;Loop over 3 tools and not over 6 MT locations
r[i] = $P_MTOOLT [500, i] ;Write the T numbers of the loaded tools to succes-
sive R parameters
;r1=11, r1=22, r3=33
endfor

6.9.41 $A_TOOLMLN - Read magazine location No. of tool

Comment
TOOLMLN stands for = "toolmagazine location number".

Name $A_TOOLMLN[t]
Meaning Returns the magazine location number of the tool with T no.=t. If not assigned to
a magazine, 0 is returned. If the tool management function is not active, -1 is
returned. If there is no tool with T no.=t, -2 is returned.
An alarm is issued if the value range for the T number was violated.
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
The index specifies the T number 1-32000
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 291
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $A_TOOLMLN[t]
x - x -
Implicit prepro‐ x -
cessing stop

Comment: It is not possible that the following applies $A_TOOLMLN[t]==0 and

$A_TOOLMN[t]>0, or $A_TOOLMLN[t]>0 and $A_TOOLMN[t]==0.

6.9.42 $P_TOOLND - Read number of cutting edges for tool

Comment
TOOLND stands for = "tool number of Ds".

Name $P_TOOLND[t]
Meaning Returns the number of cutting edges for tool with T no.=t. A tool always has at least
one cutting edge.
Default: If there is no tool with T no.=t, -1 is returned.
The value 0 is rejected as index error.
Data type INT
Value range Default: 1 - 9
1 - "Machine data value for the maximum number of D numbers"
Indices Meaning Value range
The index specifies the T number 1-32000
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
x - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

6.9.43 $A_MONIFACT - factor for tool life monitoring

Overview
If different tool materials are to be machined with the same tool, it may be necessary to increase
or reduce the time intervals for monitoring in order to detect the varying degrees of tool wear.
The factor is set accordingly before the tool is used. The write operation is performed
synchronously with the main run.
A channel-specific parameter, used to multiply the actual time measurement, has been
defined.

Tool management
292 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Setting a value = 0 deactivates the time monitoring function for all tools used on the channel via
the part program.

Name $A_MONIFACT
Meaning Only relevant when time monitoring is active in the tool management.
Factor for influencing the time measurement for tracking time for time-monitored
tools.
Values < 1 and > 0 slow down time measurement (the clock "runs slower").
Values > 1 speed up the time measurement (clock "runs faster"). Value 1 is active
after the control has been powered up, after Reset and M30 (default) and corre‐
sponds to real time. Value 0 is also permitted and disables time measurement of
all time-monitored tools that are operated on a time-monitored spindle on this
channel.
Comment: You can get the monitoring time to "run backwards" by using negative
values.
Data type REAL
Value range Value range of type REAL
Indices Meaning Value range
-
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
x x x x
Implicit prepro‐ - x
cessing stop

Tool life counter on monitor

If system variable $A_MONIFACT is set accordingly, the tool life counter on the monitor can run
at a speed other than real time. The time values of OPI module TS and the internal NC time
values remain the same. Both are realtime values.
Read and write OPI
The time values are transferred without modification irrespective of the current value of
$A_MONIFACT.

Note
Tool life value on HMI
The real-time values are displayed on the HMI, not the converted tool life values.

Example
The current values are specified (units in real time).
Planned tool life: 10 minutes
Actual tool life: 2 minutes - in one minute, the pre-warning limit is reached
Prewarning limit: 1 minute

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 293
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

The values 10, 2, 1 are displayed on the screen.

$A_MONIFACT = 2 is programmed in the part program (clock runs faster). The planned tool life,
the actual tool life, and the prewarning limit displayed on the monitor are still shown in real time.
Planned tool life: 10 minutes
Actual tool life: 2 minutes - but the prewarning limit is reached in half a minute because the clock
is now running twice as fast.
Prewarning limit: 1 minute

6.9.44 $AC_MONMIN - Factor for tool search

General
The following is defined by the variable $AC_MOMIN:
Only consider those tools whose actual value is at least a factor $AC_MONMIN (0, ...1) of the
setpoint away from the limiting value.

Definition of lowest/highest actual value

Absolute lowest/highest actual values are, in accordance with the tool-search strategy "Search
for the tool with the lowest/highest actual value" used for the tool search exactly then when all
tools of a tool group have the same monitoring type defined (via $TC_TP9).
This means all tools of the tool group are either time-monitored or count-monitored, or are wear
or alternatively additive offset monitored.
Relative lowest/highest actual values are, in accordance with the tool-search strategies
"Search for the tool with the lowest/highest actual value" used for the tool search exactly then
when the tools of a tool group have different monitoring types defined in $TC_TP9.
This means one tool can be time-monitored, the other tool can be count-monitored. A third tool
could be both wear as well as time-monitored.

Lowest/highest actual value for exactly one monitoring type

This is the standard application.
Each lowest/highest actual value here of the monitored variable ($TC_MOP2, $TC_MOP4,
$TC_MOP6 for time, count, wear or additive offset) corresponds to lowest/highest actual value
of the tools in the tool group.
Example:
A tool group "Tool1" is defined. For example, $TC_MAMP2="H108" applies - lowest actual
value:

Duplo no. Actual value Setpoint Absolute

$TC_TP1 $TC_MOP2 $TC_MOP11 Lowest actual value = $TC_MOP2
1 9 10 9

Tool management
294 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

2 8 10 8
3 6 6 6 lowest actual value in the tool group

Therefore the order of tools for use is: Duplo no.= 3 → 2 → 1.

Lowest/highest actual value with several parallel monitoring types

Tools in a tool group can be monitored in different ways.
Or different types of tool monitoring can be defined for a tool. These situations are detected by
the NC and handled accordingly:
The definition of the lowest/highest actual value is determined for these cases by the quotient
of dividing actual value and setpoint; i.e.
Quotient (Q)= actual value / setpoint
The tool with the lowest quotient has the lowest actual value of the tools in the tool group.
The tool with the highest quotient has the highest actual value of the tools in the tool group.
Example 1:
Tool group "millers" has two tools with T Nos. =1 and 2 each with a cutting edge D1.
Time monitoring is active for T1; $TC_TP9[1]=1.
Workpiece count monitoring is active for T2; $TC_TP9[2]=2.
Q(T1) = $TC_MOP2[1,1] / $TC_MOP11[1,1] = 0.5
Q(T2) = $TC_MOP4[2,1] / $TC_MOP13[2,1] = 0.9
Therefore, T1 has the lower actual value.
Example 2:
A tool group "Tool1" is defined. For example, $TC_MAMP2="H108" applies - lowest actual
value:

Duplo no. Actual value Setpoint Absolute

$TC_TP1 $TC_MOP2 $TC_MOP11 Lowest actual value = $TC_MOP2
1 9 10 0.9
2 8 10 0.8 lowest actual value
3 6 6 1

Therefore the order of tools for use is: Duplo no.=2 → 1 → 3.

$AC_MONMIN
The above definition of the actual value applies for the actual value that is checked against the
setpoint where a factor of $AC_MONMIN has been applied.
The following check is made for the absolute actual-value comparison (time monitoring taken
here as the example):
$TC_MOP2 = $AC_MONMIN * $TC_MOP11.
This is the criterion for the usability of the tool.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 295
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

The following check is made for the relative actual value comparison (time monitoring taken
here as the example):
$TC_MOP2 / $TC_MOP11 = $AC_MONMIN
This is the criterion for the usability of the tool.
The result is the same in each case.

Note
The lowest of the actual values (both absolute as well as relative) of the cutting edges of a tool
is used for the comparison with the actual values of other tools.

Name $AC_MONMIN
Meaning Only when tool management is active
Gives the factor for the tool-search strategy "Only consider those tools whose
actual value is at least a factor $AC_MONMIN* of the setpoint away from the lim‐
iting value".
The programmed value is ignored if the tool status "disabled" shall be ignored
during the tool search. This can be initiated either by the command TCA, PLC
signal or machine data for start/reset.
See also the system variables $TC_MOPx, $TC_MAMP2.
Data type REAL
Value range 0-1
Indices Meaning Value range

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X X X
Implicit prepro‐ - X -
cessing stop

Boundary conditions
If different types of tool monitoring are selected for the tools of a tool group, then the decision
has to be made whether it is meaningful for the specific application to use the tool-search
strategy "Search tool with lowest or highest actual value" in this tool group.

Tool management
296 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Similar conditions apply when working with multiple-edge tools. Also, it is necessary to consider
whether it is meaningful to apply the tool search strategy "Search tool with lowest or highest
actual value" in this tool group.

Note
As for the other tool search strategies, that tool is preferred for use that is on the spindle or in
one of the assigned buffer at the time of the tool search; i.e. the tool search strategy is not
applied.
The PLC signal "Do not disable tool" renders the tool search strategy ineffective in accordance
with $AC_MONMIN.

Activation
The following must apply so that the tool-monitoring-specific tool search strategies can be
effective:
● The sub-function "Tool-monitoring function" must be active within the tool management
function
● The appropriate monitoring parameter values ($TC_MOP1, ....) must have been set for the
cutting edges of the tools
● The monitoring must be activated for the appropriate tool (system variable $TC_TP9)
● $AC_MONMIN can be programmed in the part program as well. The programmed value is
only meaningful if points 1, 2, and 3 are met.

6.9.45 $P_TOOLNG - Number of tool groups

This function is only available for TMMO and TMMG.

Name $P_TOOLNG
Meaning Number of defined tool groups that are assigned to the channel.
> 0: Successful read access
0: No tool group defined
(tool group is defined by writing the tool name)
-1: Neither function TMMG nor TMMO active
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 297
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.46 $A_MYMN / $A_MYMLN - Owner magazine/location of the tool

This function is available for TMMG.
System variables $A_TOOLMN and $A_TOOLMLN contain definitions which magazine/
magazine location the specified tool is currently located at. This can be a real or an internal
magazine.
The system variables $A_MYMN and $A_MYMLN indicate the magazine/magazine location
(real magazine only), at which the specified tool was loaded or from which a tool contained in
an internal magazine was loaded.

Name $A_MYMN[t] / $A_MYMLN[t]

Meaning Use:
$A_MYMN[t] - number of the owner magazine of the tool with the T no. = t
> 0: Tool is loaded
0: Tool is not loaded
-1: Function TMMG is not active
-2: Tool with the T no. = t does not exist - not for t = 0 either
$A_MYMLN[t] - number of the owner-magazine location of the tool with the T no. =
t
> 0: Tool is loaded
0: Tool is not loaded
-1: Function TMMG is not active
-2: Tool with the T no. = t does not exist - not for t = 0 either
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

1. The following applies for tools that are not loaded:

$A_MYMN = $A_MYMLN = $A_TOOLMN = $A_TOOLMLN = 0
2. The following applies for manual tools that were loaded or for tools newly loaded on tool
holders:
$A_MYMN = $A_MYMLN = 0
$A_TOOLMN 1 = 0, $A_TOOLMLN 1 = 0
3. The following applies for tools that have been loaded but are not in an internal magazine:
$A_MYMN = $A_TOOLMN > 0
$A_MYMLN = $A_TOOLMLN >0
For fixed-location-coded tools in buffers, the two parameters indicate where the respective
tool shall be brought when returning to the magazine.

Tool management
298 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.47 $A_MYMTN / $A_MYMTLN - $A_TOOLMTN / $A_TOOLMTLN - tools in multitool

System functions $A_MYMTN / $A_MYMTLN and $A_TOOLMTN / $A_TOOLMTLN (with same
content) specify in which multitool and location within the multitool the tool is located.
The following applies:
$A_MYMTN = $A_TOOLMTN
and
$A_MYMTLN = $A_TOOLMTLN.
This expresses that the tool remains permanently in the MT.

Syntax
result = $A_MYMTN [t]
result = $A_TOOLMTN [t]
result = $A_MYMTLN [t]
result = $A_TOOLMTLN [t]

Meaning

$A_MYMTN Returns the multitool number of the owner multitool of the tool with T number
$A_TOOLMTN t.
Data type: INT
t T number of the tool
Data type: INT
Tool Tno. t = 1, ...,32000 MYMultiToolNumber
Tool Tno. t = 1, ..., 32000 TOOLisOnMultiToolNumber
Return value
result Result value
Data type: INT
>0 The tool with the T number t is on the multitool with the
number result
0 The tool with Tno.= t is not in a multitool
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 Is not a tool T no. (outside of range, not defined, or it is
an MT no. or a magazine no.)
$A_MYMTLN Multitool number of tool t.
$A_TOOLMTLN Data type INT
t T number of the tool
Data type: INT
Tool Tno. t = 1, ...,32000 MYMultiToolLoactionNumber
Tool Tno. t = 1, ...,32000 TOOLisOnMultiToolLoactionNumber
Return value

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 299
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

result Result value

>0 The tool with the T number t is on the location with the
number result within a multitool
0 The tool with T number = t is not in a multitool
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 Is not a tool T no. (outside of range, not defined, or it is
an MT no. or a magazine no.)

6.9.48 $P_TOOLNT / $P_TOOLT - T numbers

This function is available for TMMG and TMMO.

Name $P_TOOLNT / $P_TOOLT[i]

Meaning These system variables enables an overview of the tools defined in NC.
$P_TOOLNT
Number of defined tools that are assigned to the channel.
> 0:Successful read access
0: No tool defined
$P_TOOLT[i]
i-th tool number T
> 0: T number
0: i is a value outside of the permitted range
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
N = number of tools that are assigned to the channel
i = i-th T no.; i=1, ..., $P_TOOLNT
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

The system variable $P_TOOLT returns value 1 for index i = 1 if at least one D offset has been
defined and returns value 0 for other values of i.

Tool management
300 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.49 $P_TOOLD - D numbers

This function is available for TMMG and TMMO.

Name $P_TOOLND / $P_TOOLD[t,i]

Meaning Determine the defined D numbers of a tool. The command can generally be pro‐
grammed.
i-th number of tool compensations D of the tool with the T no. = t
> 0: D number
0: i is a value outside of the permitted range
-2: t is the value of a non-defined tool
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
t = T number
i = i-th T no.; i=1, ..., $P_TOOLND
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

6.9.50 $P_TOOLNDL - Number of defined DL offsets

This function is available for TMMG and TMMO. The function "additive offset" must have been
activated via MD.

Name $P_TOOLNDL[t,d]
Meaning Determine the number of defined DL numbers of a D offset. The command can gener‐
ally be programmed.
Number of DL offsets for D offset provided by T no. = t, D no. = d
> 0: Number of DL offsets
0: No DL offsets for this D offset
-1: Additive offset function not active
-2: t is the value of a non-defined tool
-3: d is the value of a non-defined D offset
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
t = T number
d = D number
Access Read in part program Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram nous action nous action

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 301
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_TOOLNDL[t,d]
X - - -
Implicit pre‐ - - -
processing
stop

6.9.51 $A_USEDND - Workpiece counting

This function is available for TMMO.

Name $A_USEDND[s]
Meaning Number of different cutting edges used on tool holder s since the last workpiece
count including the currently used active cutting edge on s. Each tool used is in‐
cluded at least once. Index s means:
TMMG + TMMO
Spindle number / tool holder number
s = 0 means that the currently active master tool holder is selected.
TMMO active without TMMG
a) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE: s is not evaluated. It is not
possible to count the workpieces separately according to tool holders.
b) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE: Spindle number. s = 0 means
that the currently active master spindle is selected.
> 0: Number of cutting edges used
0: No more tools used since the last workpiece count
-1: TMMO is not active
-2: s is the value of a non-defined tool holder
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
s = 1, ...., MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN
s = 0 indicates the master tool holder
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "$A_USEDT - Workpiece counting (Page 303)".

Tool management
302 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.52 $A_USEDT - Workpiece counting

Overview
This function is available for TMMO.

Name $A_USEDT[i,s]
Meaning T number of the tool of the i-th cutting edge that has been used on tool holder s
since the last workpiece count or is still being used.
Example: For i=$A_USEDND, the T number of the first cutting edge or D offset is
obtained, which was selected on the programmed tool holder s since the last work‐
piece count. Index s means:
TMMG + TMMO
Spindle number / tool holder number
s = 0 means that the currently active master tool holder is selected.
TMMO active without TMMG
a) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE: s is not evaluated. It is not
possible to count the workpieces separately according to tool holders.
b) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE: Spindle number. s = 0 means
that the currently active master spindle is selected.
>0: T number (can also exist multiple times if different D offsets of the tool were in
use)
0: No more cutting edges used since the last workpiece count
-1: TMMO is not active
-2: s is the value of a non-defined tool holder
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
S = 1, ...., MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN
I = 1, ...., $A_USEDND
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example
Two tool holders are defined with numbers 1 and 2. Tool holder no. 1 is the master tool holder.
On tool holder 1, previously three tools with T numbers 10, 20, 30 were used; on tool holder 2,
one tool was used with T number 666. Each tool only has offset D1 defined.
The following program section is run in the status:

def int n1, n2, i, tNo

n1 = $A_USEDND[1] ;n1 = 3 same content would have been
$A_USEDND[0]
n2 = $A_USEDND[2] ;n2 = 1

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 303
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

for i = 1 to n1
tNo = $A_USEDT[1,i]
MSG ("T no. participating in workpiece machining =" << tNo
endfor
;The loop displays T numbers 10, 20, 30
T2=0 ;Bits 7, 8, 19 are set for synchronization
in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. (Automatic
read-in disable until tool change is
acknowledged with "End".)
setpiece(5,2)
if (n2 == 1) tNo = $A_USEDT[1,1]
;Sets tNo to value 0. Setpiece was
programmed since determination of n2. This
deletes the list of tools used and there is
currently no entry for the specified
Index1 in the list of tools used.

6.9.53 $A_USEDD - Workpiece count

This function is available for TMMO.

Name $A_USEDD[i,s]
Meaning D number of the i-th cutting edge that has been used on the tool holder s since the
last workpiece count or is still being used.
Example: For i=$A_USEDND, the D number is obtained for the first cutting edge or
D offset that was selected after the last workpiece count on the programmed tool
holder. Index s means:
TMMG + TMMO
Spindle number / tool holder number
s = 0 means that the currently active master tool holder is selected.
TMMO active without TMMG
a) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE: s is not evaluated. It is not
possible to count the workpieces separately according to tool holders.
b) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE: Spindle number. s = 0 means
that the currently active master spindle is selected.
>0: D number
0: No more tools used since the last workpiece count
-1: TMMO is not active
-2: s is the value of a non-defined tool holder
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
S = 1, ...., MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN
I = 1, ...., $A_USEDND

Tool management
304 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $A_USEDD[i,s]
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

6.9.54 $A_TOOLADAPT - Assignment of tool to adapter

Assigning a tool to an adapter

Name $A_TOOLADAPT
Meaning $A_TOOLADAPT[t]
Number of the adapter that is assigned to the magazine location on which the tool
or multitool with the T no. "t" is currently located.
● Result value = 0: No adapter on the magazine or tool is currently not loaded.
● Result value = -1: 'Adapter' function or tool management is not active.
● Result value = -2: No tool or multitool with the T no. t exists.
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
t: T number 1 - SLMAXTOOLNUMBER
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $A_TOOLMTADAPT
Meaning $A_TOOLMTADAPT[t]
Number of the adapter that is assigned to the multitool location on which the tool with the T no. "t" is
currently located.
● Result value = 0 No adapter on the multitool location or tool is not assigned to a multitool location.
● Result value = -1 'Adapter' function or TMMG function not active
● Result value = -2 = No tool with the T no. t exists.
● Result value = -3 Multitool function not active
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
t: T number 1 - SLMAXTOOLNUMBER
Access Read in part program Write in part program Read in synchronized Write in synchronized
action action

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 305
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $A_TOOLMTADAPT
X - - -
Implicit preprocessing - - -
stop

6.9.55 $TC_ADPTx - adapter description

Adapter description

Name $TC_ADPT_TYPE[n]
Meaning $TC_ADPT_TYPE[n]
Tool adapter type
0: No adapter with the number "n" is defined.
1: Adapter with the number "n" is of type 1
2: Adapter with the number "n" is of type 2 (angle head adapter)
The adapter is deleted with $TC_ADPT[n] = 0.
If other values are written on $TC_ADPT_TYPE, they are ignored (no alarm).
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Adapter number: 1 - SLMAXADATERNUMBER
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_ADPT_OFF[n]
Meaning $TC_ADPT_OFF[n,3,3]
Adapter of type 2
The offset is defined by 3 vector parameters.
The vector parameters describe the adapter elements.
All vector parameters have 3 coordinates.
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Adapter number: 1 - SLMAXADATERNUMBER
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Tool management
306 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $TC_ADPT_DIR[n]
Meaning $TC_ADPT_DIR[n,3,3]
Adapter of type 2: Direction of the rotary axis
The direction of the rotary axis is defined by 3 vector parameters.
The vector parameters describe the direction of the adapter rotary axes.
All vector parameters have 3 coordinates.
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Adapter number: 1 - SLMAXADATERNUMBER
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_ADPT_ANG[n,n]
Meaning $TC_ADPT_ANG[n,3]
Adapter of type 2: Angle
There are 3 angle parameters per adapter
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Adapter number: 1 - SLMAXADATERNUMBER
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_ADPT_ANG_CONST[n,n]
Meaning $TC_ADPT_ANG_CONST[n,3]
Adapter of type 2: Angle offset
There are 3 angle offset parameters per adapter
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Adapter number: 1 - SLMAXADATERNUMBER
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 307
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.56 $P_MAGNA / $P_MAGA - Tool adapter

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNA / $P_MAGA[i]

Meaning $P_MAGNA
Number of defined adapters that are assigned to the channel.
> 0 Successful read access
0 No adapter defined
-1 Function "Adapter" or TMMG is not active
$P_MAGA[i]
i-th adapter number
> 0 Successful read access
0 n is outside of the defined range
-1 Function "Adapter" or TMMG is not active
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
i = 1, ...., $P_MAGNA
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

$P_MAGNA1, $P_MAGNA2

Name $P_MAGNA1
Meaning $P_MAGNA1
Number of defined adapters of type 1 in the TO unit of the channel.
● >0 Successful read access
● 0 No adapters of type 1 defined
● -1 Function 'Adapter' or TMMG is not active
OPI block= T/TMV
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
i = 1, ...., $P_MAGNA1
Access Read in part program Write in part program Read in synchronized Write in synchronized
action action
X - - -
Implicit preprocessing - - -
stop

Tool management
308 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_MAGNA 2
Meaning $P_MAGNA2
Number of defined adapters of type 2 in the TO unit of the channel.
● >0 Successful read access
● 0 No adapters of type 2 defined
● -1 Function 'Adapter' or TMMG is not active
OPI block= T/TMV
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
i = 1, ...., $P_MAGNA2
Access Read in part program Write in part program Read in synchronized Write in synchronized
action action
X - - -
Implicit preprocessing - - -
stop

6.9.57 $P_MAGN / $P_MAG - Magazine

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGN / $P_MAG[i]

Meaning $P_MAGN
Number of defined magazines that are assigned to the channel.
> 0: Successful read access
0: No magazine defined
-1:TMMG is not active
$P_MAG
i-th magazine number
> 0: Successful read access
0: i is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
i = 1, ...., $P_MAGN
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 313)".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 309
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.58 $P_MAGNDIS / $P_MAGDISS / $P_MAGDISL - magazine distance tables

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNDIS[n,m] / $P_MAGDISS[l,i] / $P_MAGDISL[l,i]

Meaning $P_MAGNDIS[n,m]
Number of magazines that are linked to the internal magazine n by the location m
> 0: Successful read access
0: No magazine linked with the buffer
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: n is not the number of an internal magazine
-3: m is not the number of an internal magazine location
$P_MAGDISS[l,i]
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the buffer magazine.
> 0: Successful read access
0: i is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: m is not the number of a buffer location
-3: No buffer location defined
$P_MAGDISL[l,i]
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the loading magazine.
> 0: Successful read access
0: i is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: m is not the number of a loading magazine location
-3: No buffer location defined
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
i = 1, ...., $P_MAGNDIS
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 313)".

Tool management
310 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.59 $P_MAGNS / $P_MAGS - Toolholder

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNS / $P_MAGS[n]

Meaning $P_MAGNS
Number of spindle locations / tool holder locations in the buffer assigned to the
channel.
> 0: Successful read access
0: no spindle location defined
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: No buffer magazine defined
$P_MAGS[n]
n-th number of the spindle / tool holder in the buffer
> 0: Successful read access
0: n is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-3: No buffer magazine defined
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
n = 1, ...., max. tool holder number
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 313)".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 311
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.60 $P_MAGNREL / $P_MAGREL - Assigned buffer

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNREL[n] / $P_MAGREL[n,m]

Meaning $P_MAGNREL[n]
Number of buffers assigned to the spindle no. / tool holder no.
> 0: Successful read access
0: Spindle location has not been assigned buffer location
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: n is not the number of a spindle location
-3: No buffer magazine defined
$P_MAGREL[n,m]
m-th buffer number of the n-th spindle no. / tool holder no.
> 0: Successful read access
0: m is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: n is not the number of a spindle location
-3: No buffer magazine defined
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
m = 1, ...., $P_MAGNREL
n = 1, ...., max. tool holder number
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 313)".

Tool management
312 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.61 Example of magazine configuration system variables

Specifications
The magazine configuration selected in the following example is selected. Information about
the current magazine configuration can be obtained by reading the system variables described
here.

  
PDJD]LQHFHQWHU
 
,QILUVWLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH ,QVHFRQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH
ORDGLQJPDJD]LQH EXIIHUPDJD]LQH
 
7&B0'3>@ 
0DJD]LQH
 7&B0$3>@   *ULSSHU
/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ
/RFDWLRQ
/RFDWLRQ
 

7&B0'3>@ 
 
7&B0/65>@ 
   7&B0'3>@ 


6SLQGOH
 /RFDWLRQ
  7&B0'3>@ 
 

  7&B0/65>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 
0DJD]LQH
/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ  7&B0$3>@  
/RFDWLRQ
*ULSSHU
/RFDWLRQ
 

 7&B0'3>@ 


  

 

Figure 6-13 Magazine configuration

N10 def int noOfMag=0, noOfLoc=0, noOfDist=0, noOfRel=0,

noOfSpindles=0, spindeleNo=0
N20 def int i=0
; Total number of defined magazines

N100 noOfMag = $P_MAGN ;noOfMag is assigned value =4 - 2 real

magazines
;1, 2+2 internal magazines 9998, 9999

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 313
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

; Display all magazine numbers

N200 for i=1 to noOfMag

N220 MDG ("magazine no.="<<$P_MAG[i])
;Display numbers 1, 2, 9998, 9999
N240 endfor
; Total number of defined magazine locations

N300 for i=1 to noOfMag

N320 noOfLoc=noOfLoc + $TC_MAP7[$P_MAG[i]]
N340 endfor ;noOfLoc now contains value 16+16+3+2=37
; Number of magazines linked with Spindle 1

N400 noOfDist=$P_MAGNDIS[9998,3]
;; noOfDist is assigned value=2 - Mag.1, 2 are linked with
the spindle location
; Display the magazine numbers linked with Spindle 1 (=location 3)

N500 for i=1 to noOfDist

N520 MSG ("magazine no.=" << $P_MAGDISS[ i ] )
;Display numbers 1, 2
N540 endfor
; Number of magazines linked with Loading station 2

N410 noOfDist = $P_MAGNDIS[9999,1]

;noOfDist is assigned value=1 - Mag. 2 is
linked with loading station 2
; Display the magazine numbers linked with loading station 2 (=location 1)

N510 for i=1 to noOfDist

N530 MSG ("magazine no.="<< $P_MAGDISL[i] )
;Display number 2
N550 endfor
; Total number of defined spindles

N600 noOfSpindles= ;noOfSpindles contains value = 1

$P_MAGNS ;- one spindle location is defined
; Display the numbers of the spindles defined in the magazine configuration

N620 for i=1 to noOfSpindles

N640 MSG ("magazine no.="<< $P_MAGS[i])
;Display number 1
N660 endfor

Tool management
314 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

: Total number of buffer locations assigned to spindle 1

(=gripper in example)

N700 noOfRel=$P_MAGNREL[1]
;noOfRel contains value=2, grippers 1 and
2 are assigned to the spindle
; Display the numbers of the grippers of spindle no. 1 defined in the magazine configuration

N720 for i=1 to noOfRel

N740 MSG ("magazine no.="<< $P_MAGREL[1,i] )
;Display numbers 1, 2
N760 endfor

6.9.62 $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT / $P_MAGHLT - Location type hierarchies

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.
The system variables return the following information:
● Number of hierarchies
● Number of magazine location types each hierarchy.

Name $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT[n] / $P_MAGHLTn,m]

Meaning $P_MAGNH
Number of defined magazine location type hierarchies that are assigned to the
channel.
> 0; Successful read access
0; No location type hierarchies are defined.
-1; TMMG is not active
$P_MAGNHLT[n]
Number of the defined location types in the n-the defined hierarchy
> 0; Successful read access
0; Hierarchy "n" is outside of the defined range.
-1; TMMG is not active.
-2; n is outside of the defined range.
$P_MAGHLTn,m]
m-th location type of hierarchy n
> 0; Successful read access
-1; TMMG is not active.
-2; Hierarchy n does not have any defined location types.
-3; m is outside of the defined range.
Data type INT

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 315
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT[n] / $P_MAGHLTn,m]

Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
n = 1, ...., $P_MAGNH
m = 1, ...., $P_MAGNHLT
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example
The following three hierarchies are defined:
Hierarchy 1:
$TC_MPTH[0,0] = 12
$TC_MPTH[0,1] = 88
$TC_MPTH[0,2] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[0,3] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[0,4] = 9999
Hierarchy 2:
$TC_MPTH[1,0] = 55
$TC_MPTH[1,1] = 808
$TC_MPTH[1,2] = 45
$TC_MPTH[1,3] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[1,4] = 9999
Hierarchy 3:
$TC_MPTH[2,0] = 87
$TC_MPTH[2,1] = 21
$TC_MPTH[2,2] = 3
$TC_MPTH[2,3] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[2,4] = 62
Hierarchy 4:
$TC_MPTH[3,0] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[3,1] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[3,2] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[3,3] = 9999
$TC_MPTH[3,4] = 9999

Tool management
316 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Hierarchy 5:
$TC_MPTH[4,0] = 99
$TC_MPTH[4,1] = 124
$TC_MPTH[4,2] = 32
$TC_MPTH[4,3] = 7
$TC_MPTH[4,4] = 9999
The following example returns the total number of hierarchies that are defined and the number
of magazine location types in each hierarchy.

N10 def int noOfH, noOfTypes[8], locTypeNo

N100 noOfH=$P_MAGNH ;noOfH is assigned value = 5
N220 for i=1 to noOfH
N240 noOfTypes[i - 1]=$P_MAGNHLT[ i ]
;sets the values 2, 3, 5, 0, 4 in
the array
N260 endfor
The following example returns which magazine location types are defined in the 2nd hierarchy.

N310 for i=1 to noOfTypes[1]

N340 MSG ("magazine no.="<<$P_MAGHLT[2, i])
;shows values 55, 808, 45
N330 endfor
The following example returns which magazine location types are defined in the 3rd hierarchy.

N350 for i=1 to

noOfTypes[2]
N360 MSG ("magazine no.="<<$P_MAGHLT[3, i])
;shows the values 87, 21, 3, 9999, 62
N370 endfor
The following example returns which magazine location types are defined in the 5th hierarchy.

N400 for i=1 to noOfTypes[4]

N410 MSG ("magazine no.="<<$P_MAGHLT[5, i])
;shows values 99, 124, 32, 7
N420 endfor
The following example returns the location type of an undefined hierarchy level (beyond the end
of hierarchy 2).

N500 MSG ( " Magazine no. = " << $P_MAGHLT[ 2, 4 ] )

; shows the value –3

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 317
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

6.9.63 Additional language commands

Name $P_TOOLNO
Meaning Active tool number T0 to T32000 Generally, the command should not be used when
magazine management is active. When magazine management is active GET‐
TEXET should be used instead. For $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=0, the in‐
correct T number can be determined. If the programming was implemented after
programming D > 0, then it is also reliable
Data type Integer
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOLP
Meaning Tool number last programmed
Command is available for TMMO.
It is analogous to the TMMG-specific command GETSELT.
Data type Integer
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOL
Meaning Active tool cutting edge (Dx)
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Tool management
318 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_DLNO
Meaning Active additive offset number DL=0-DL=max;
max=value of $MN_MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
$P_DLNO is analogous to the already existing parameters $P_TOOL,
$P_TOOLNP and active D and T numbers.
Data type Integer
Value range 0-6
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOLL[n]
Meaning Active tool total length; n = 1...3
$P_TOOLL[1] to $P_TOOLL[3] correspond to the values in $TC_DP3[] to
$TC_DP3[], including the active tool offsets irrespective of the plane selection and
irrespective of setting data such as $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST etc.
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOLR
Meaning Active radius
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TC
Meaning Active tool holder
Data type Integer
Value range

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 319
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_TC
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TCANG[n]
Meaning Active angle of a tool holder axis; n = 1-2
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TCDIFF[n]
Meaning Difference between calculated and used angle of a tool holder axis for grid (Hirth
tooth system) of the angle
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_AD[n]
Meaning Active tool offset; n = 1...31
n=1-25 $TC_DP1 to $TC_DP25
n=26 $TC_DPCE (optional)
n=27 $TC_DPH (optional)
n=28 $TC_DPV (optional)
n=29 $TC_DPV3 (optional)
n=30 $TC_DPV4 (optional)
n=31 $TC_DPV5 (optional)
Data type DOUBLE
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range

Tool management
320 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_AD[n]
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_ADT[n]
Meaning $P_ADT[n] - transformed data of the active tool
When compensation parameters are read, this parameter returns transformed val‐
ues of the parameters controlled by the tool adapter transformation - if the active
tool is attached to an adapter.
n=1-25 $TC_DP1 to $TC_DP25
n=26 $TC_DPCE (optional)
n=27 $TC_DPH (optional)
n=28 $TC_DPV (optional)
n=29 $TC_DPV3 (optional)
n=30 $TC_DPV4 (optional)
n=31 $TC_DPV5 (optional)
Data type DOUBLE
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
n: Parameter numbers 1 to 31
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $AC_MSNUM
Meaning Master spindle, return value
0: No spindle configured
1...n: Number of master spindle
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ X - -
cessing stop

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 321
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_MSNUM
Meaning Master spindle
0: No spindle configured
1...n: Number of master spindle
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $AC_MTHNUM
Meaning Master tool holder
Value=0 no master tool holder defined
Value>0 number of the master tool holder
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ X - X -
cessing stop

Name $P_MTHNUM
Meaning Master tool holder
Value=0 no master tool holder defined
Value>0 number of the master tool holder
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_TP_MAX_VELO
Meaning Maximum tool speed
Data type REAL

Tool management
322 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $TC_TP_MAX_VELO
Value range [0, DBL_MAX]
Indices Internal T number Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_TP_MAX_ACC
Meaning Maximum rotary acceleration of the tool
Data type REAL
Value range [0, DBL_MAX]
Indices Internal T number Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_MPP_SP_MAX_ACC
Meaning Only relevant, if $MC_TOOLHOLDER_MANAGEMENT>0: Spindle no. which is
linked to the tool holder.
Data type Integer
Value range [0, MAXNUM_SPIND_PER_CHAN]
Indices Magazine no., magazine location no. Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_MTHSDC
Meaning Master tool holder no. or master spindle no. is determined with reference to the
active tool for the next D offset selection.
> 0 Successful read access
0 No master tool holder or no master spindle available.
The next D offset works with T0.
-1 TMMG not available
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN]
Indices Magazine no., magazine location no. Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 323
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_MTHSDC
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TH_OF_D
Meaning Tool holder or spindle on which the active tool is located that contains the active D
offset.
> 0 Successful read access
0 No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D offset
is active.
-1 Function is not available
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH
Meaning Master tool holder or master spindle before the block search or the test mode was
started.
>0: Successful read access
0: No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D
offset is active.
-1: Function is not available
If the block search or test mode is completed, this variable contains the same value
as $P_MTHNUM, as of the next D programming.
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Tool management
324 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Name $P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH
Meaning The active D offset before the block search or the test mode was started.
>0: Successful read access
0: No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D
offset was or is active.
-1: Function is not available
If the block search or test mode is completed, this variable contains the same value
as $P_TOOL, as of the next D programming.
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, 32000]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH
Meaning The active DL offset before the block search or the test mode was started.
>0: Successful read access
0: No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D offset was or is active
-1: Function is not available
If the block search or test mode is completed, this variable contains the same value as $P_DLNO, as
of the next D or DL programming.
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, 6]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part program Write in part program Read in synchronized Write in synchronized
action action
X - - -
Implicit preprocessing - - - -
stop

6.9.64 Variables for subroutine replacement technique

Tool management NC com‐ Functions

mand
$C_T Value of the programmed address T for cycle parameterization and T
function replacement
$C_T_PROG Address T is programmed in a block with cycle call of T function re‐
placement

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 325
NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Tool management NC com‐ Functions

mand
$C_TS For T or TCA replacement, returns the programmed tool identifier
($C_TS_PROG == TRUE).
$C_TS_PROG Supplies TRUE, if a tool identifier has been programmed for the T or
TCA replacement.
$C_TE Address extension for address T for subprogram call per T function
$C_D Value of the programmed address D in the ISO mode for cycle param‐
eterization
$C_D_PROG Address is programmed in a block with cycle call
$C_DL Value of the programmed address DL (additive tool offset) for a subpro‐
gram call per M/T function replacement
$C_DL_PROG Queries whether, for a subprogram call per M/T function replacement,
address DL (additive tool offset) was programmed
$C_TCA Supplies TRUE, if the TCA replacement is active
$C_DUPLO_PROG Supplies TRUE, if the duplo number for the TCA replacement has been
programmed
$C_DUPLO Supplies the value of the programmed duplo number for TCA replace‐
ment ($C_DUPLO_PROG == TRUE)
$C_THNO_PROG Supplies TRUE, if the tool holder / spindle number for the TCA replace‐
ment has been programmed
$C_THNO Supplies the value of the programmed tool holder / spindle number for
TCA replacement ($C_THNO_PROG == TRUE)

6.9.65 Variables for tool change in synchronized action

Tool management NC com‐ Functions

mand
$AC_TC_FCT Command number
-1: At the instant of reading, no tool management command is active
1: Move (load, unload,...)
2: Prepare change
3: Change ON
4: Change ON (turret, without M06)
5: Prepare change and change ON (with M06)
$AC_TC_STATUS Acknowledgement status of PLC FC8/FC6
$AC_TC_THNO Number of the tool holder or the spindle where the new tool shall be loaded
$AC_TC_TNO The internal T number of the tool to be loaded at change
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MFN Source magazine number of the new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_LFN Source location number of the new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MTN Target magazine number of new tool
0: There is no new tool

Tool management
326 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.9 NC language commands

Tool management NC com‐ Functions

mand
$AC_TC_LTN Target location number of the new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MMYN Owner magazine of new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_LMYN Owner location magazine of new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MFO Source magazine number of the old tool
0: There is no old tool
$AC_TC_LFO Source location number of the old tool
0: There is no old tool
$AC_TC_MTO Target magazine number of old tool
0: There is no old tool
$AC_TC_LTO Target location number of the old tool
0: There is no old tool
$AC_TC_CMDT Trigger variable to NC command output
Set for one interpolation cycle when NC outputs a new command.
$AC_TC_CMDC Counter for NC command output
This variable is incremented by 1 at each NC command output. Can also
be written (zero setting).
$AC_TC_ACKT Trigger variable to PLC command
Set for one interpolation cycle when PLC outputs a command to NC.
Command acknowledgement or independent message (asynchronous
transfer).
$AC_TC_ACKC Counter for PLC commands
This variable is incremented by 1 at each PLC command. Can also be
written (zero setting).

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Read in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ X -
cessing stop

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 327
NC programming
6.10 Definitions when programming data

6.10 Definitions when programming data

6.10.1 Tool change

Programming the tool selection

The tool change can be divided into 2 different steps:
1. Tool change preparation
2. Tool change execution
Steps 1-2 can be programmed separately or together in the NC program (see MD22550
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE).

Examples
● Tool change in one step: (turret)
– Tx; Make new tool x available and execute tool change.
● Tool change in two steps:
– Tx; Prepare tool change (select the tool)
– M06; Execute tool change

Note
If tool management is active, a tool can only be selected with the tool identifier (name). If a T
number is now programmed, then the number is used as the identifier (name). The tool must
then receive the T number as a name during loading.

● Tool change with identifier:

– T="DRILL"; A search is performed for tool with identifier "DRILL".
● Tool change with number as identifier:
– T="123"; A search is performed for tool with identifier "123". Alternatively, T123 can also
be programmed.

Tool management
328 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.10 Definitions when programming data

6.10.2 Cutting edge selection

Cutting edge selection after tool change

When a tool change has been completed, the tool cutting edge can be selected in one of the
following ways:
1. The offset number D is programmed.
2. The offset number D is not programmed and is specified by MD20270
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT:
= 0: No automatic cutting edge selection after M06.
> 0: Number of the cutting edge, which is selected in accordance with M06.
= -1 The cutting edge no. of the old tool remains valid and also selected for the new tool after
M06.
= -2 The offset of the old tool remains valid and also selected for the new tool after M06.

Examples:
Tool selection with the following cutting edge selection
Cutting edge selection always refers to the tool that is changed with command M06.

T1 M06 Tool change - no D programmed; therefore offset selection according to

MD 20270
T5 Tool preselection
X .. Y.. Z... Working with T1 and the offset from MD 20270
D2 Offset D2 from T1 !!!
M06 Tool change; T5 is loaded at change - offset selection according to MD
20270
T1 Tool preselection
X.., Y... Working with T5 and the offset from MD 20270
When programming tool commands, main spindles and secondary spindles are programmed
differently. Only tool offset values of the main spindle tool are taken into account by the
geometry because only one active offset can be processed per channel. Processing of tool
commands for a secondary spindle is only relevant for signal output to the PLC and the function
GETSELT(...).
Spindle no. 2 = main spindle:

T2 = "DRILL"
M2 = 06
T1 = "MILL" Select tool for secondary spindle
M1 = 06 Tool change: load tool in the secondary spindle
D1 Select cutting edge of "DRILL" (main spindle)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 329
NC programming
6.10 Definitions when programming data

Spindle no. 2 = main spindle:

T2 = "DRILL" Select a tool for the main spindle.

As an alternative, T= "DRILL" could also be specified.
T1 = x; Select a tool for a secondary spindle
M2 = 06 Tool change
As an alternative, M06 could also be specified.
D1 Select cutting edge of a tool with identifier "DRILL"

6.10.3 Tool transfer from program test

MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 3 can be used to define that the active tool and the
tool offset are imported as follows:
● Bit 3 = 1; from the test program which was last terminated in test mode.
or
● Bit 3 = 0; from the program which was last terminated before the program test was activated.
Precondition: Bits 0 and 6 must be set in MD20110.

$P_ISTEST
The system variable $P_ISTEST is for checking from the part program whether a program test
is active. The system variable returns the value TRUE when program testing is active.

Tool management
330 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.11 Programming T=location number

6.11 Programming T=location number

The function "Programming T=location number" is only available when tool management is
active. This type of programming is not only suitable for turrets, but for all other types of
magazine.
The programming type for tool selection is set using machine data MD20310
$TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK:
● MD20310 $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, Bit 16=0 (default setting) - Programming
via T = "Identifier".
– T = "x" with x as tool identifier, e.g. "drill"
● MD20310 $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, Bit 16=1 - Programming via T = "Location
number".
– Tx, with x as location number of the magazine containing the tool used for machining,
e.g. location number 4

7RROZLWKWKHQDPH'ULOOKDV
'ULOOGLVDEOHG
GLIIHUHQWGXSORQR
7

1 7KHUHLVQRWRRORQ IXQFWLRQV
6 2 VLPLODUWR7LQ1&

7XUUHW

5 3 7
4 'ULOOUHOHDVHG

7

'ULOODFWLYH 7LVLQWHUQDO7QR

Figure 6-14 Programming of T=location number

Explanation of the illustration:

When the function is active, T1 selects the tool in location number 1 instead of the tool with
identifier "1". The first magazine linked with the tool holder is accessed here. The identifier of
the tool in this location is then determined ("Drill").
The subsequent procedure is as if T="Drill" had been programmed. During the tool change
process it is determined which of the three tools from the "Drills" group shall be loaded first.
The set tool search strategy is taken into consideration:
● When the strategy "Take the first available tool from the group" is applied, T10 from location
3 is loaded ($TC_MAMP2 Bit0 = 0).
● When the strategy "Take the first tool with active status from the group" is applied, T1 is
"loaded" ($TC_MAMP2 bit0 = 1).
In so doing, it is assumed that tool T1 is also the replacement tool with the lowest duplo
number. If this is not the case, then for $TC_MAMP2 bit0 = 1, for a tool change, the tool with
the lowest duplo number is loaded.
The search strategy is set using system variables $TC_MAP10 (current search strategy of the
magazine) or $TC_MAMP2 (search strategy type). As preliminary setting, $TC_MAP10 uses
the values from $TC_MAMP2.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 331
NC programming
6.11 Programming T=location number

T15 on location no. 1 cannot be used, because it is disabled.

No alarm is generated if the programmed location does not contain a tool. The change is output
as usual, with T no.=0. In this way, for example, the turret can be positioned to an empty
location.
If more than one magazine is assigned to the tool holder, then the programmed location number
refers to the magazine that is the first magazine defined in the distance table.
If the tools of the tool group are located in different magazines of the tool holder, the search
procedure is the same as with the standard tool management.

Note
With the T=location function, alternatively T= "Drill" can also be programmed.
T=1; tool
T="Drill"; tool with identifier Drill

Tool management
332 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.12 Call multiple turrets with "T=location number"

6.12 Call multiple turrets with "T=location number"

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR

7RROKROGHU 7RROKROGHU


3DUWSURJUDP
7 0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHU  ORFDWLRQ
7 0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHU  ORFDWLRQ
7 
 
7 
   
7XUUHW 7XUUHW
   
 
 

Figure 6-15 T=location number as tool management function on turning machines

The programming option "T = location number" and several magazines can be used to work in
one channel or in one TO unit.
● The NC address T can be programmed with an address expansion T1 =...
● Tool management then interprets this as the spindle number or as the toolholder number.
● T without address extension then refers to the main spindle.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 333
NC programming
6.13 Programming examples

6.13 Programming examples

Action Program command Description

Create tool DEF INT DUPLO_NO Create new tool called Drill with duplo
DEF INT T_NO no.= 7. The automatically generated T
no. is stored in "T_NO".
DUPLO_NO = 7
T_NO=NEWT("DRILL",DUPLO_NO)
T_NO = GETT("DRILL", Determine the T number of tool "DRILL"
DUPLO_NO) with duplo no. 7 that has already been
or created.
$TC_TP2[1] = "DRILL" ; The T No is, however, also assigned
here by the programming.
$TC_TP1[1] = DUPLO_NO
Tool data $TC_DP1[GETT("DRILL", Write tool type for the 2nd cutting edge
read / write DUPLO_NO), 2] = 210 of the tool "Drill"/ DUPLO_NO
$TC_DP1[T_NO, 2] = 210 Write tool type for the 2nd cutting edge
of the tool "T number"
Tool T="DRILL" If there are several tools with this iden‐
selecting or: tifier, then the T no. is returned for the
first tool possible.
T=GETT("DRILL", DUPLO_NO)
Determines the T number for "DRILL"
or
with duplo number = DUPLO_NO and
Tx selects it.
Call with T No. e.g. T1,T2,T3,....
Delete tool $TC_TP1[T_NO,0]=0 Tool with T_NO is deleted
or Tool "DRILL"
DELT ( "DRILL", DUPLO_NO) DUPLO_NO is deleted
$TC_TP1[GETT("DRILL"),0]=0
or alternatively:
DELT("DRILL")

Tool management
334 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

6.14.1 Magazine data, directory

OPI block TMV

Calculation of line: Magazine number, if a field[ ] is present
Calculation of column: n.a.

NC identifier Designation OPI variable Type

None Number of magazines numActMags WORD
Number of the magazine magVNo[ ] WORD
Identifier of the magazine magVIdent[ ] String
Number of adapters numActAdapter WORD
Number of the adapter adaptVNo WORD
Adapter type AdaptVType WORD

6.14.2 Tool data, directory

OPI block TV
Calculation of line: Sequential no. of the tools, if [ ] present
Calculation of column: n.a.

NC identifier Designation OPI variables Type

None Duplo number nrDuplo[ ] WORD
Number of cutting edges numCuttEdges[ ] WORD
Number of tools in TO area numTools WORD
Last T number assigned for tool manage‐ TnumWZV WORD
ment
Tool identifier toolIdent[ ] String
Current magazine toolInMag[ ] WORD
Actual location toolInPlace[ ] WORD
T number toolNo[ ] WORD
Number of tool groups numToolsGroups WORD

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 335
NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

6.14.3 Parameterization, return parameters _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC

OPI block TF
Calculation of line: Refer to table
Calculation of column: n.a.

Designation OPI variables Calculation of line Type

Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTD Parameter index of block TD WORD
OPI block TD
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTO Parameter index of block TO DOUBLE
OPI block TO
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataToolId Parameter index of block TD String
OPI block TD entTD
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTS Parameter index of block TS DOUBLE
OPI block TS
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTU Parameter index of block TU DOUBLE
OPI block TU
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTUE Parameter index of block TUE DOUBLE
OPI block TUE
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTUS Parameter index of block TUS DOUBLE
OPI block TUS
Mask for search criterion of PI TSEARCH (OPI block TD) parMasksTD Parameter index of block TD WORD
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTO Parameter index of block TO WORD
OPI block TO
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTS Parameter index of block TS WORD
OPI block TS
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTU Parameter index of block TU WORD
OPI block TU
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTUE Parameter index of block TUE WORD
OPI block TUE
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTUS Parameter index of block TUS WORD
OPI block TUS
D number of cutting edge used resultCutting Number of cutting edges of WORD
EdgeNrUsed tool
Number of cutting edges used resultNrOfCut 1 WORD
EdgesUsed
Return: found tools resultNrOfToo 1 WORD
ls
Return: T numbers of found tools resultToolNr[ 1... WORD
] resultNrOfTools
T number of cutting edge used resultToolNr Number of cutting edges of WORD
Used tool

Tool management
336 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

6.14.4 Working offsets

OPI block AEV

Calculation of line: Cutting edge number if [ ] available
Calculation of column: n.a.

NC identifier Designation OPI VAR Type

None Number of D numbers in block numActDEdges WORD
D numbers Dno[...] WORD
Internal T number toolNo[...] WORD
Cutting edge number cuttEdgeNo[...] WORD
Tool identifier toolIdent[...] STRING
Duplo number duploNo[...] WORD
Magazine toolInMag[...] WORD
Location toolInPlace[...] WORD

6.14.5 PI services and language commands for tool management

Overview
FB4 (PI_SERV) or FB7 can be used to start program instance services (PI services) in the NC
area. A program section, which carries out a particular function (e.g. with tool management,
search for empty location in a magazine), is executed in the NC by making a request via the PI
service.

PI service Functions NC command

MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services
DELETO Delete tool DELT("Tool", Duplo)
DELECE Delete tool cutting edge $TC_DP1[t,d]=0
CREATO Generate tool NEWT("Tool", Duplo)
CRTOCE Create tool specifying cutting edge no. $TC_DPx[t,D]
$TC_DPCx[t,D]
$TC_DPCSx[t,D]
$TC_MOPx[t,D]
$TC_MOPCx[t,D]
TMCRTO Create tool $TC_TPx[t]
TMCRTC (not available in PLC) Create tool by specifying cutting edge no. $TC_DPx[t,d]
CREACE Create cutting edge $TC_DP[t,d]=value
CRCEDN Create new cutting edge $TC_DPx[t,d]
TMFDPL Empty location search for loading GETFREELOC(magNo, locNo,
T no., refMag, refLoc,
withReserv)
TMMVTL Prepare magazine location for loading, unload tool

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 337
NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

PI service Functions NC command

TMPCIT Set incremental value for workpiece counter, decre‐ SETPIECE(SpinNo,y)
ment count by y
TMPOSM Position magazine location or tool POSM(p,m,ip,im)
TMFPBP Empty location search acc. to properties
TSEARC Complex search using search screen forms User cycle program
TMRASS Reset active status
TMGETT Confirm T number for specified tool identifier with du‐ GETT("Tool", Duplo)
plo number
Read the preset T number GETSELT(SpinNo)
CHKDNO (not available in PLC) Check the uniqueness of D numbers of the tool data of status=CHKDNO (t1,t2,d)
TMCHKD (not available in PLC) the TO unit assigned to the executing channel. Pa‐
rameters t1, t2, d are optional.
DZERO (not available in PLC) Set D numbers for all tools of the TO unit assigned to DZERO
the channel to "invalid". On the OPI, such D numbers
are displayed with the value 0. The invalid D number is
generated NC-internally by assigning the value "old D
number" + 32000 to the D number.
For the offset number D=d, specify the associated in‐ status=GETACTTD (t,d)
ternal T no. = t of the tool. The tool that has the status
"active" and "was in use" is taken from the tool group.
Specify the D no. for tool t and its cutting edge ce d=GETDNO(t,ce)
Set the D no. of tool t and its cutting edge ce to value status=SETDNO (t,ce,d)
d
Read the active T no. and status status=GETACTT
(Tno,"Tool")
Delete command for all location-dependent/setup off‐ status=DELDL(t,d)
sets of a cutting edge or tool if d is not specified
SETTST (not available in PLC) Set tool status to "active" SETTA(Stat,m,vnr)
SETTST (not available in PLC) Set tool status to "not active" SETTIAStat,m,vnr)
CHKDM (not available in PLC) Check uniqueness of D nos. in magazine; m=Maga‐ status=CHKDM(m)
zine
Set tool holder no. (h=holder no.) SETMTH(h)
Set master spindle (s=spindle no.) SETMS(s)
TRESMO Tool life / quantity / wear setpoint activation RESETMON
TMAWCO (not available in PLC) Set a wear group to active $TC_MAP9
Location-dependent offsets, coarse $TC_EPx[t,d]
Technological grinding data $TC_TPGx[t]
Read the loaded T number GETEXET
NC command to move tool MVTOOL
Delete tool holder block DELTC
Tool deselection/tool change irrespective of tool status TCA
Delete the location status "reserved for tool in the buf‐ DELMLRES
fer"
Delete owner magazine location of the tool DELMLOWNER

Tool management
338 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

NC commands
NC states are read with the following NC commands.

Functions NC command
Active tool no. T $P_TOOLNO
Last programmed tool no. (without magazine management) $P_TOOLP
Active tool cutting edge $P_TOOL
Active total tool length; n=1-3 $P_TOOLL[n]
Active tool holder $P_TC
Active angle of a tool holder axis; n=1-2 $P_TCANG[n]
Difference between calculated and used angle of a tool holder axis $P_TCDIFF[n]
for Hirth gearing of the angle
Active tool radius; n=1-2 $P_TOOLR
Number of cutting edges for tool t; t=T number 1 32000 $P_TOOLND[t]
Tool with T number t exists $P_TOOLEXIST[t]
Active tool offsets D, n=1...31 $P_AD[n]
Active tool offsets; transformed; n=1-31 $P_ADT[n]
Active additive offset number $P_DLNO
T number of the tool (numerical) $C_T
Tool identifier (string) $C_TS
Bool variable that shows whether a T word is available in $C_T $C_T_PROG
Parameter for tool name as string $C_TS_PROG
Address extension of the T word $C_TE
Programmed D no. $C_D
Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D_PROG
$C_D
Programmed additive/setup offset $C_DL
Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL_PROG
$C_DL
Command number, specifies the required operation: $AC_TC_FCT
1: Move (load/unload, relocate...);
2: Prepare change;
3: Change On;
4: Change ON (turret, without M06);
5: Prepare change and change ON (with M06); -1 At the read instant,
no tool management command is active
Acknowledgement status of PLC FC8/FC6 $AC_TC_STATUS
Tool holder or spindle number onto which the new tool should be $AC_TC_THNO
loaded
Source magazine number of the new tool $AC_TC_MFN
Source location number of the new tool $AC_TC_LFN
Target magazine number of new tool $AC_TC_MTN
Target location number of the new tool $AC_TC_LTN
Source magazine number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_MFO
Source location number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_LFO

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 339
NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

Functions NC command
Source magazine number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_MTO
Target location number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_LTO
Returns the number of the actual master spindle $AC_MSNUM
Returns the number of the master spindle $P_MSNUM
Returns the number of the master tool holder $AC_MTHNUM
Trigger variable to output command of the NC (is set for one IPO) $AC_TC_CMDT
Trigger variable for acknowledgement of the PLC (is set for one IPO) $AC_TC_ACKT
Counter for the command output $AC_TC_CMDC
Counter for the acknowledgements $AC_TC_ACKC
Owner magazine of the new tool $AC_TC_MMYN
Owner location of the new tool $AC_TC_LMYN
Returns the number of the master tool holder $P_MTHNUM
Magazine number of tool t $A_TOOLMN[t]
Magazine location of tool t $A_TOOLMLN[t]
Number of the owner magazine $A_MYMN
Number of the owner magazine location $A_MYMLN
Number of defined magazines that are assigned to the channel $P_MAGN
Number of defined magazines, i-th magazine number $P_MAG[i]
Number of defined adapters that are assigned to the channel $P_MAGNA
Number of defined adapters, i-th adapter number $P_MAGA[i]
Number of magazines n that are linked to location n $P_MAGNDIS[m,n]
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the buffer $P_MAGNDISS[l,i]
magazine
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the load‐ $P_MAGDISL[l,i]
ing magazine
Number of defined magazine location type hierarchies $P_MAGNH
Number of the defined location types in the n-the defined hierarchy $P_MAGNHLT[n]
m-th location type of hierarchy n $P_MAGHLT[n,m]
Number of buffers assigned to the spindle numbers, tool holder $P_MAGNREL[n]
numbers n
m-th buffer number of the n-th spindle no., tool holder no. $P_MAGREL[n,m]
Number of spindle locations / tool holder locations in the buffer mag‐ $P_MAGNS
azine that are assigned to the channel
n-th number of the spindle / tool holder in the buffer $P_MAGS[n]
Determine the defined D numbers of a tool $P_TOOLD
Determine existence of a tool $P_TOOLEXIST
Number of DL offsets of the D offset given by T number T and D $P_TOOLNDL[t,d]
number D
Number of defined tool groups that are assigned to the channel $P_TOOLNG
Number of defined tools that are assigned to the channel $P_TOOLNT
i-th tool number T $P_TOOLT[i]
The following tool changes are available for all tools, whose param‐ $P_USEKT, $TC_TP11
eter $TC_TP11 have set one of the bits of $P_USEKT. The value
zero has the same contents as "all bits are set"

Tool management
340 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

Functions NC command
Factor for tool search $AC_MONMIN
Workpiece count $A_USEDND
Workpiece count $A_USEDT
Workpiece count $A_USEDD
Read factor for tool life monitoring $A_MONIFACT

Multitool and tool specifications in PI services

The following PI services refer to tools and multitools:

PI service Meaning
TMFDPL Empty location search for specified tool or multitool for loading or equipping. The empty location search in
the MT only makes sense for tools that have not been loaded, i.e. as part of the equipping of the MT with
tools.
TMFPBP Empty location search for specified tool or multitool. This service searches the magazine(s) specified in
the relevant parameters for an empty location, which meets the specified criteria (tool size and location
type).
TMMVTL Load or unload tool or multitool. It is not possible to program tools of a multitool for the move command.
It is also not possible to move a tool in an MT with the command.
TMGETT T number of the tool with the specified tool identifier / duplo number or the MT number of the multitool with
the specified identifier (multitool: the duplo number is programmed with the parameter value 00000)
TRESMO Reset monitoring values. If an MT number is programmed, only the tools of the multitool treated.
TMPOSM Position magazine on the specified magazine location, specified tool or multitool.

The following PI services are available functionally for tools and multitools, but with different
names:

PI service Meaning
Create
CREATO Create tool with specified T number
CRTOCE Create tool with specified T number and D number
TMCRTO Create tool with specified identifier / duplo number
TMCRTC Create tool with specified identifier / duplo number and D number
Delete
DELETO Delete tool with specified T number
TMDLTO Delete tool with specified identifier / duplo number

Note
If these tool-specific PI services are called with MT-specific names or MT numbers, the
respective PI service is aborted with error status.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 341
NC programming
6.14 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

The following PI services are defined functionally only for tools (i.e. there are no similar PI
services for multitools):

PI service Meaning
CHEKDM Check the D numbers for uniqueness
CHKDNO Check whether the tools have unique D numbers
DZERO Set all D numbers invalid with the "Unique D number" function
CRCEDN Create new tool cutting edge by specifying the D number
CREACE Create tool cutting edge
DELECE Delete tool cutting edge
SETTST Activate tool from tool group (set tool state "active")
TMRASS Reset active status
TMAWCO Set active wear group in a magazine
TMPCIT Set increment value for workpiece counter
TSEARC Complex search using search screen forms

The following PI services are defined for adapters:

PI service Meaning
TMCRAD Creating adapters with a given type
TMDLAD Deleting adapters with a given number

Note
During the search, the PI service only considers tools, also those contained in a multitool,
i.e. the PI service does not consider multitools. A "Complex multitool search" PI service is not
defined.
If the tool-specific PI services are called with MT-specific names or MT numbers, the PI service
is aborted with error status.

Tool management
342 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Description of functions 7
7.1 Magazines

7.1.1 Magazine configuration

Magazine configuration
With the magazine configuration, one or more real magazines (an actual magazine) for storing
tools can be grouped together by means of Operate, an NC program or ini files.
All the magazines of one configuration can be operated simultaneously in one channel. Several
magazine configurations can be defined but only one configuration can be active in one
channel at one time.
Magazine and tool data are stored in the NC in the so-called TO area.

+0,FRQILJXUDWLRQ $FWLYDWHFRQI 0DFKLQHGDWD

&RPPLVVLRQLQJ +0, 1&722/0$1

72BQ &KDQQHOQ

N P 

 
72B &KDQQHO


&KDQQHO
 72B

 0DJ &KDQQHO
5HDO FRQI
0DJ

5HDOPDJD]LQHV PPDJD]LQH P72XQLWVRQH QFKDQQHOV

NPDJD]LQHV FRQILJXUDWLRQV PDJD]LQHFRQI
SHU72BXQLW

Figure 7-1 Assignment of magazines to channels

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 343
Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

Relation between TO unit and magazine configuration

The individual TO ranges are specified by machine data. A TO unit is assigned to each channel
(channel1/TOA1, channel2/TOA2,etc.) as the default setting. Which channel or channels work
on which TO units can be defined in the machine data. Only one magazine configuration can
be active at any one time per TO unit. If several channels are assigned to a TO unit, then the
magazine configuration applies for all assigned channels. A TO unit (TOA unit) is an
independent area of the tool management. It is not linked to other TO units.
Up to 10 independent TO units may be created depending on the number of channels available.
Multiple channels can be assigned to one TO unit. However, one channel cannot be assigned
to multiple TO units. A subset of magazines, buffer locations and loading magazines can be
assigned to one TO unit.
The following figure shows the relationship between TO units and the magazine configuration.

1&WRROPDQDJHPHQW

72XQLW

72XQLW

0DJD]LQHGDWD
7&B0$3

1&FKDQQHOV
2QHPDJD]LQHFRQILJXUDWLRQ
IRUHDFK72XQLW

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO
0XOWLWRROGDWD
7&B073 0DFKLQHGDWD

7RROPDQDJHPHQW

7RROGDWD
7&B03

&XWWLQJHGJHGDWD
7&B'3

Figure 7-2 TO units

7.1.2 Magazine types

Different magazine types are defined so that the various tasks of tool management can be
performed:

Tool management
344 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

Real magazines
Real magazines are the magazines in which the tools are kept. Several real magazines can be
managed in the NC and grouped together into a magazine configuration.
Real magazines are, for example, turrets, chain or box magazines (magazine 1 ... n).

Turret Chain magazine Box-type magazine

Internal magazines
All of the positions at which a tool may be located are handled logically in the NC also as a
magazine (and magazine location). There are 2 internal magazines:
● The buffer magazine (magazine 9998)
● The loading magazine (magazine 9999)

7.1.3 Loading magazine

The loading magazine is the 1st internal tool magazine and always has magazine number
9999. The loading magazine contains loading locations.
These are sub-divided into:
● Loading locations
● Loading stations
Loading points and stations are provided for loading and unloading tools. The allocation of
locations is fixed, all other locations can be assigned freely. Location 1 in the loading magazine
is used for the fixed assignment.
Location 1 is reserved for loading/unloading in all spindles / tool holders, as well as to load and
replace manual tools (see Manual tools (adding tools during machining) (Page 468)). A loading
point is an open entry to the magazine where tools can be manually put into and taken directly
from the magazine.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 345
Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

/RDGLQJSRLQW
/RFDWLRQ
*ULSSHU





0DJD]LQH
6SLQGOH 
%XIIHU



 
*ULSSHU


Figure 7-3 Loading point

A loading station is viewed as an "external magazine location" which a gripper, for example, can
access to transport a tool to the magazine during loading.
The difference between a loading point and a loading station is as follows:
When loading a tool at a loading/unloading point, the tool is automatically removed from this
location, whereas when unloading to an unload station, it remains at the loading or unloading
location – it must then be removed from there by the application (HMI, NC cycle or PLC).

Definition of a loading magazine

A loading magazine can be defined as follows:
● In SINUMERIK Operate via the tool management (Define loading station (Page 47)).
● Via the magazine description data ($TC_MAP (Page 185)).

7.1.4 Buffer
A buffer involves the 2nd internal magazine. The magazine number is always 9998. The buffer
includes the spindle, tool holder, gripper, loader and transfer location. The locations are
numbered, just like a real magazine, ascending from 1-n. Every location has a location index.
Here, it is assigned as to which is the 1st spindle or the 1st gripper. Any numbering can be used.
However, transparency is improved if the locations of a location type (all spindles, all
grippers,...) are numbered in an ascending sequence. See also Section "Overview of magazine
data (Page 185)".
The NC only makes a differentiation between spindles or tool holders and grippers. Other
"location types" such as loaders or the transfer location are mapped on the gripper.

Tool management
346 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

*ULSSHU





0DJD]LQH
6SLQGOH 
%XIIHU



 
*ULSSHU


Figure 7-4 Buffer

Example: Assigning the locations in the buffer magazine

No. Name Type Index Assignment to Distances to

spindles magazine
1 Spindle_1 Spindle 1 0
2 Gripper_1 Gripper 1 0
3 Gripper_2 Gripper 2 0
4 Loader_1 Loader 3 0
5 Loader_2 Loader 4 0
6 Transfer_1 Transfer location 5 0

Definition of a buffer
A buffer can be defined as follows:
● In SINUMERIK Operate via the tool management (Define buffer locations (Page 46)).
● Via the magazine description data ($TC_MAP (Page 185)).

7.1.5 Box-type and chain magazines

Fundamentals
Chain and box-type magazines do not as a rule have any additional buffer available for
transportation between magazine and spindle. These additional buffers can temporarily
contain tools.
The command is distributed in the PLC using the basic program. In this case, DB72 is used as
the user interface. There is a separate interface area for each spindle in the interface. A new

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 347
Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

command from the NC is only then entered in the interface once the previous command has
been acknowledged with status values 1 to 7 via FC8/FC6.
1. The programming function T = identifier is implemented in the PLC in DB72. Bit "Prepare
tool" is set in the associated interface.
2. Programming function M06 is also implemented in DB72. In this instance, bit "Change tool"
is set in the activated interface. The bit "Prepare tool" from an earlier T command is not reset
here. If the bit "Prepare tool" shall no longer be set for the M06, then it is the task of the user
program to reset this bit as part of acknowledging the last T command.
3. Programming functions T and M06 in the same block set the "Prepare tool" and "Change
tool" bits simultaneously in the activated DB72 interface.
Exceptional cases which are mapped in the PLC identically to case 3 above are as follows:
● Initiation of a tool change after block search (last accumulated tool change for the active tool)
● Initiation of a tool change for initialization blocks (reset and start mode), if this was set via the
machine data.
Note
Special cases, box-type and chain magazines
In these exceptional cases, the subroutine (macro, cycle) in which M06 is normally
programmed is not executed.

Definition of box-type or chain magazines

Box-type or chain magazines can be defined as follows:
● In SINUMERIK Operate via the tool management (Set up magazine configuration
(Page 48)).
● Via the magazine description data ($TC_MAP (Page 185)).

Tool management
348 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

Example for machine tools with chain and box-type magazines

0DJD]LQH
 
 
*ULSSHU *ULSSHU
 

6SLQGOH 


&KDQJHSRVLWLRQIRU  
VSLQGOH
 











/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ
1R

Magazine 1 = number 1
Magazine 9998 = buffer
Magazine 9999 = loading magazine
Spindle 1 = magazine 9998 location 1
Gripper 1 = magazine 9998 location 2
Gripper 2 = magazine 9998 location 3
Figure 7-5 Machine tool with chain magazine

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 349
Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

*ULSSHU
0DJD]LQH
&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ
IRUVSLQGOH  
 
0DJD]LQH
*ULSSHU *ULSSHU
    

   6SLQGOH 


&KDQJHSRVLWLRQIRU 
   
VSLQGOH
 
*ULSSHU


/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ 
1R







/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ
1R

Magazine 2 = No. 2 Magazine 1 = No. 1

Magazine 9999 = all buffers
Magazine 9998 = all loading magazines
Spindle 1 = magazine 9998 location 1
Gripper 3 = magazine 9998 location 4 Gripper 1 = magazine 9998 location 2
Gripper 4 = magazine 9998 location 5 Gripper 2 = magazine 9998 location 3
Figure 7-6 Machine tool with chain and box-type magazine

The magazine zero point is defined by $TC_MDP2 (with value assignment of 0). The change
position (spindle) is normally assigned on this basis.

7.1.6 Circular magazine

Generally, turret magazines do not have any additional buffers through which tools are
transported from the magazine to the spindle. Turrets are generally used on turning machines,
on which the rotating spindle holds the workpiece and the turret holds the tools used for
machining.
So the tools are not physically carried to the spindle. They are moved into a defined position by
rotation of the turret so that machining can be performed with a further tool. The tool is only
transported to the spindle or holder in the software.
The method by which the tool is changed can be set for the turret in MD22550
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE. The setting is described in detail in Preparing a tool change via
T command (Page 376).

Tool management
350 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

The programming command T = identifier initiates the tool change. T = location can be
programmed as an alternative. If T = location, no tool need actually be stored in the location.
The command is distributed in the PLC using the basic program. In this case, DB73 is shown
as the interface for the user (if TOOL_CHANGE_MODE is set to 0). There is a separate
interface area for each turret. The turret numbers are assigned successively in ascending
sequence according to magazine numbers during commissioning. The permissible magazine
range is 1 ... maximum number of real magazines. A new command from the NC is only entered
in the interface when the previous command has been acknowledged via FC7 (alternatively
also via FC8/FC6).




① Spindle with workpiece

② Turret 1
③ Turret 2
④ Loading/unloading location
Figure 7-7 Double-slide turning machine with direct loading/unloading point in the turret

Definition of a turret
A loading magazine can be defined as follows:
● In SINUMERIK Operate via the tool management (Set up magazine configuration
(Page 48)).
● Via the magazine description data ($TC_MAP (Page 185)).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 351
Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

7.1.7 Other magazine types

In practice, there are other types of magazines in addition to the ones listed above. These are
e.g. disk-type, washer, pick-up, rack, cage magazines (and many more). Such types must be
mapped to the three types of magazines supported by the tool management.

7.1.8 Wear group

Fundamentals
Locations in a magazine are linked to form an area referred to as the wear group. In this way,
locations of a magazine can be reserved for particular machining operations.
A wear group number is assigned to each of these locations and the magazine is thereby
divided into several different areas. Only tools from one of the areas are then used for a specific
machining operation.
The wear group number for each magazine location is defined via system variable
$TC_MPP5[m,p] (m: Magazine number, p: Location number).
Values from -32000 to +32000 are possible.
Value > 0:
The specified number is assigned to the location (e.g. $TC_MPP5[1,3] = 2 assigns the third
location of magazine 1 to wear group number 2).
Value = 0:
The location is not assigned to a wear group, threfore the magazine locations are generally
included in tool searches.
Values < 0:
The wear group whose number corresponds to the absolute value of this number is disabled
(e.g. $TC_MPP5[1,3] = - -2 disables wear group number 2 of the magazine with number 1).
This applies even if there is only one disabled location in the wear group.

Note
Wear groups are only available for real magazines. The definitions for $TC_MPP5 do not affect
the status of tools.
Up to eight wear groups per magazine are possible.

Activate wear group

System variable $TC_MAP9 defines which wear group (magazine area) is active. To change
the active wear group, the corresponding number is set in this system variable, thereby defining
which wear group will be used to start the machining operation.
The default setting is 0.

Tool management
352 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

The wear group can also be set active internally by a tool change or by the user via NC
commands/OPI.

Disable wear group

If there is no longer any tool that is ready for use at the location of an active wear group, then
the system switches to the next wear group and the old wear group is disabled.
Machining is continued by activating the next group and searching for a suitable replacement
tool.
The wear group is also disabled if one of the locations has been disabled via system variable
$TC_MPP5 (negative value).

Activate (internally)
Bit 0 of system variable $TC_MAMP3 can be set to determine how internal activation of a wear
group will affect the status of the associated tools.
Value 0:
The tool status is not changed (preset).
Value 1:
When activated, one tool from each included tool group is set to "active". Tools already set
earlier as active are not reset.

Disable (internally)
Bit 1 of system variable $TC_MAMP3 can be set to determine how internal deactivation of a
wear group will affect the status of the associated tools.
Value 0:
The tool status is not changed (preset).
Value 1:
When a wear group is disabled all active tools are reset.

Note
For a tool search in the wear group, see Section "Tool search in wear group (Page 485)".

Enabling or disabling tools from a wear group

Tools can be enabled or disabled in a wear group via the NC language commands SETTA and
SETTIA:
● SETTA - Activate tool from wear group (Page 259)
● SETTIA - Deactivate tool from wear group (Page 261)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 353
Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

7.1.9 Background magazine

Background magazines are not directly supported by the tool management. However,
functions for background magazines can be activated by setting the system variable
selectively. System variable $TC_7 MAMP2, bit 7 can be used to set whether the tool search
begins in the magazine last used for tool replacement (bit 7 = 0) or whether the search is carried
out in the order defined by "Spindle to magazine" (bit 7 = 1).
Generally, this system variable is set when configuring the magazine. A change can be made
at any time via the part program or OPI.
The assignment of "spindle to magazine" is set via system variable $TC_MDP2[n,m]; the order
corresponds to the order in which this variable is written. This is also pre-assigned by the
magazine configuration.
Example for four magazines and one spindle:
$TC_MAMP2=385 (bits 0, 7 and 8 set).
$TC_MDP2[1,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[2,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[3,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[4,1]=0
... this assigns the first buffer (spindle) to magazines 1 to 4; a tool search would therefore start
in magazine 1, followed by magazine 2, etc. up to magazine 4.
You can modify this search order by setting this system variable as follows:
1. Deleting the assignment
$TC_MDP2[1,0]=9999
$TC_MDP2[2,0]=9999
$TC_MDP2[3,0]=9999
$TC_MDP2[4,0]=9999
2. Re-assigning in a different order
$TC_MDP2[2,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[3,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[4,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[1,1]=0
... resulting in the search order of magazine 2, 3, 4, 1
The trigger criterion for changing the order of assignment can be the information in the change
cycle that the new tool was found in another magazine. This can be read in the program via
$A_TOOLMN[t], whereby "t" is the internal T number of the tool. The new tool is obtained via
GETSELT. You must remember the previous foreground magazine.

Tool management
354 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

7.1.10 Consider adjacent location

Fundamentals
Consider adjacent location is used for oversized tools (see also Tool-related data $TC_TP
(Page 177)). When searching for empty locations (loading, relocating, changing) bits 4 to 11 are
evaluated in the magazine location parameter $TC_MPP4 (half location occupied/reserved).
As this function requires additional memory space, the default setting is 0.
To activate the function, set the following:
$MN_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 3 = 1
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 3 = 1
In addition, for every magazine location that is to be considered, parameter $TC_MPP3 = 1
must be set.
Two functions are available when the consider adjacent location is active.

Overlap disabled magazine locations

The function is activated by setting the magazine location parameter $TC_MPP4 bit 13 = 1. If
a location is disabled, it can now be "overlapped" by an oversized tool. This means the consider
adjacent location ignores the disabled state of this magazine location.

Example
Chain magazine, location 12 is disabled (e.g. the tool holder is defective). An oversized tool
(size 2/2/1/1) is loaded or is positioned in the spindle. The tool can now be stored at location 11
or 13.
The following can be selected as default setting:
As soon as a location is disabled, "Overlapping active" is automatically set or reset as soon as
the location is enabled.
This setting is made in machine data
$MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK, bit 4 = 1.

Overlapping magazine edge locations

This function is activated by setting the magazine description parameter $TC_MAP3, bits 8 to
11.
If these bits are set, the following conditions apply:
(Definition: smallest magazine location number is at the top left, the largest magazine location
number is at the bottom right).
Bit 8: Left edge location must not be covered.
Bit 9: Right edge location must not be covered.
Bit 10: Top edge location must not be covered.
Bit 11: Bottom edge location must not be covered.
The default setting for these bits is 0.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 355
Description of functions
7.1 Magazines

Example:
● A box-type magazine used.
● Due to the mechanical conditions, oversized tools can cover the edge at the top and on the
right.
The following must be set:
$TC_MAP3[magazine no.], bit 8 = 1
$TC_MAP3[magazine no.], bit 11 = 1

Examples
The following graphic shows a chain magazine, in which each tool occupies a half location on
the left and a half location on the right. The tool size for (1) and (2) is 2,2,1,1

 

Figure 7-8 Half locations in a chain magazine

The following graphic shows half locations in a box-type magazine. The tool size is 3,3,3,3.

Figure 7-9 Half locations in a box-type magazine

Tool management
356 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.2 Loading

7.2 Loading

7.2.1 Loading sequence

Overview
The "Loading" function generally involves transporting a tool from a loading point (location in
the loading magazine) into a real magazine. An owner location is assigned to the tool during
this. Only then, from the perspective of the NC, is the tool considered to have been loaded.
This means that a tool that was loaded onto the spindle – e.g. via SINUMERIK Operate – is
considered as not having been loaded.
The prerequisite is that magazines and loading points be configured in the tool management
(Page 45).

Assignment of the loading points

The loading point can be assigned via the machine data MD52274 ($MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_
STATION). If more than one loading point (Page 345) is defined, the following settings can be
made:
● $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_ STATION = 0; a prompt window in which the loading point is
defined appears in SINUMERIK Operate.
● $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_ STATION = 1; fixed loading point 1, permanently assigned as a
loading point of spindles/tool holders.
● $MCS_TM_TOOL_LOAD_ STATION = 2; fixed loading point 2
Loading points are also defined during SINUMERIK Operate configuration. More detailed
information is available at Define loading location (Page 47).

Example for loading a tool into a real magazine

/RDGLQJSRLQW
/RFDWLRQ
*ULSSHU
 

 6S6SLQGOH
%6ORDGLQJSRLQW
**ULSSHU
 **ULSSHU
0DJD]LQH %6ORDGLQJSRLQW
6SLQGOH 
%XIIHU



 
*ULSSHU


Figure 7-10 Load magazine

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 357
Description of functions
7.2 Loading

Loading sequence
1. The NC issues a "Load" order. The parameters are transferred to interface DB71. There is
a separate interface area in DB71 for each loading point.
2. The magazine moves the selected (empty) magazine location to the loading point
(DB71.DBW58/60).
3. The tool is loaded into the magazine (the tool is manually inserted in the example).
4. The "Load" order is acknowledged via the PLC with FC6/FC8.

Initiate loading via SINUMERIK Operate

The magazine locations for the change point for the spindle/gripper and the loading point are
marked with arrows in the tool magazine.
Loading is initiated in SINUMERIK Operate:
1. A tool is inserted at the end of the tool list as an unloaded tool with "New tool".
2. The "loading" of the tool at the magazine location is initiated via the softkey.

Load tool Selecting loading point

The individual steps are acknowledged via the user program in the PLC.

Note
SINUMERIK Operate automatically handles the loading. The tool data is completely generated.
The tool is placed at the loading point and tool transport initiated. This sequence does not
change, even if the tool is visually created in the magazine list via the user interface.

Note
If a tool is loaded directly onto the spindle, this does not lead to an offset selection.

Tool management
358 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.2 Loading

7.2.2 Function of the PLC when loading?

Loading sequence
The PLC is notified by the NC during the loading process about the magazine and location
numbers via the "Loading/unloading (DB71)" interface.
The following bytes in DB71 (Page 123) are filled during loading:
● DBB0.1; The interface defines the loading point. Interface 2 corresponds with loading point
2. Interface 1 with loading point 1 is assigned to the spindle.
● DBB(n+0).0; the parameter "n" contains the offset for the loading point. Thus, "34" for
example, for loading point 2.
● DBW(n+24); Number of the target magazine.
● DBW(n+26); Location number of the new tool in the target magazine.
These target addresses are communicated to FC8/FC6 via the following parameters:
● "NewToolMag" contains DB71.DBW(n+24)
● "NewToolLoc" contains DB71.DBW(n+26)
● "Status (Page 159)" conveys whether the loading has been successfully completed:
– Status=10; For loading and unloading, as well as for relocating, the acknowledgement
status = 10 is available. It has the same effect as status =1 (final acknowledgement),
however it does not change the magazine position ($TC_MAP8). For every final
acknowledgement (if the tools were moved) the magazine position is always aligned.
The parameters "OldToolMag", "OldToolLoc" are preset to 0 before loading. The number of the
active interface identifies the loading location.

Example of FC8/FC6 call when loading with FC150 (user program)

The loading process in the PLC goes as follows:
1. A request is sent to the PLC to load the tool. The information is transferred to the PLC in
DB71.
Example:
Data in DB71 when loading for the 2nd interface (location 1 in magazine 1 is to be loaded
from loading location 2)
2. The PLC should now move "Location 1" from "Magazine no. 1" (into which the tool must be
loaded) to "Loading location 2" and execute the loading operation.
3. When the tool is physically present in the magazine, FC8 must be called from the user
program and the loading operation acknowledged.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 359
Description of functions
7.2 Loading

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ
%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW
6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG
,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH
'%% 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

'%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66  66 1HZ7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUORDGLQJ
5HV 5HV 3RV -RE 3RV 5HOR 8QORD /RD
PXOWL IURP PDJD FDWLQJ GLQJ GLQJ 1HZ7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUORDGLQJ
WRRO 1& ]LQH
'%% 2OG7RRO0DJ  'XULQJORDGLQJ 
SURJ

2OG7RRO/RF  'XULQJORDGLQJ 
'DWDLQ 5HVHUYHG $FNQ
6WDWXV  2SHUDWLRQFRPSOHWHG
'% 6WDW
'%% 
2SHUDWLRQWHUPLQDWHGQR
FKDQJHRI7&B0$3

'%: ,GHQWLILHUIRUORDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQW IL[HGYDOXH

0XOWLWRRO/RF  'XULQJUHORFDWLRQ 
'%: 1RRIORDGLQJSRLQW

'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ
([DPSOH7RROORDGLQJRQORFDWLRQ
'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%:  
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%:  

Figure 7-11 Load - DB71

In this specific case, loading from location 1 into magazine 1, with the final acknowledgement
(status_1) the magazine position is set to 1 (possibly existing offsets are not taken into
consideration). However, this is not always desirable, e.g. when equipping a turret, as HMI
Operate derives this display from the actual magazine position.

Tool management
360 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.2 Loading

PLC sample programs

The following sample programs (description of DB150 (Page 119)) show the acknowledgement
of loading via interface 2. To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user block.

Sample program "Load magazine"

NETWORK TITLE = Acknowledgement loading interface 2
U E 86.0; //acknowledgement is done here via the terminal E 86.0
U DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 2 active
U DB71.DBX 34.0; //Loading active
FP M 150.0;
SPBN M100;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 2
L 0;
L DB71.DBW 58;
T DB150.DBW 1; //Target magazine for loading
L DB71.DBW 60;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target location for loading
L 0;
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M100: NOP 0;

Example of a transfer with FC6

NETWORK TITLE =Tool management status transfer
CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TaskID := DB150.DBB 0,
TaskIDNo := DB150.DBB 1,
NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 1,//Pos new tool
NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 1,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 0,//Pos old tool
OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 0,
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
Error := DB150.DBW 14);
U DB150.DBX 16.1; //Prompt ready
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
<>I ; //Evaluate error
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 361
Description of functions
7.2 Loading

Problems during loading

A tool cannot be loaded. Check the following:
● Is the location type correct?
● Is a suitable empty location available?
● Has the number of tools enabled in the NC (MD18082) been reached?
Alarms on the operator panel:
● No suitable empty location available
● The "Create tools" command cannot be output to NC.

See also
FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management (Page 155)

7.2.3 Loading by directly assigning the T number

By directly writing to parameter $TC_MPP6[magazine No.,location No.] = T, a tool can be set
to a magazine location (whether it is a real magazine, buffer or loading magazine).
For example, for oversized tools, the NC automatically reserves adjacent locations.
The NC checks whether the tool fits at this location (location type, free adjacent locations, ...),
if not, then an alarm is generated.
This does not involve an associated command output to the PLC.

7.2.4 Load tools via a part program

T number
The data required for a tool can also be loaded via a part program.
There are two possibilities to get the T number that addresses the data. You can:
● Assign the T number yourself or
● Allow the NC to assign the T number
(via the command NEWT (Page 230)).
The other data can be addressed by the T number determined in this way. Otherwise the T
number can be assigned by the user (refer to the following example):

Example
DEF INT TNo
TNo=NEWT("test",1)
$TC_TP3[TNo]=2 ;Size left

Tool management
362 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.2 Loading

$TC_TP4[TNo]=2 ;Size right

$TC_TP5[TNo]=1 ;Size top
$TC_TP6[TNo]=1 ;Size bottom
$TC_TP7[TNo]=2 ;Location type
$TC_TP8[TNo]=2 ;Tool status
$TC_TP9[TNo]=0 ;Type of monitoring
$TC_TP10[TNo]=0 ;Substitute tool strategy
$TC_TP11[TNo]=0 ;Tool info
$TC_DP1[TNo,DNo]=120 ;Tool type: (all of the offset data is provided here)
$TC_MPP6[MagNo,LocNo]=TNo ;Tool with the determined T number is written/loaded
to the location

The tool described here also occupies adjacent locations. The tool management automatically
assigns/reserves the adjacent locations.
It is also possible to delay assignment of a tool to a location, in which case the command
$TC_MPP6 is not required. After execution of the part program the tools are contained in the
tool list and can be loaded at a later time.

7.2.5 Retroload tool data

Procedure
When tool data is "reloaded" this means that the offset data is not entered or loaded until after
the tool loading operation.
● The tools are already located in the magazine, both physically as well as their data, i.e. the
"Tool ←→ Location" assignment has taken place
● There is either no tool offset data in the NC or it is no longer up to date.
The offset data is assigned via the part program, i.e. the existing data is overwritten. If not
already known, the internal T number of the particular tool first has to be determined in the
"retroload" program to do this.
The internal T number is the tool number that the NC works with. It is unique and describes a
tool. All parameters of this tool are addressed by this T number.
The T number can be assigned either by the operator when creating a tool or by the NC.
If the operator knows the T number (e.g. specified by the entries made at the measuring
station), then this number can be retrieved in the retroload program.
If the T number is not known, then it has to be determined for each tool to be retroloaded and
be supplied from a variable. This reduces the overhead for the user and also reduces the scope
for errors.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 363
Description of functions
7.2 Loading

Create the retroload program

The tool is measured at a measuring station and the measured data stored. For this purpose,
the tool must already be defined, i.e. by both an identifier ("Drill 12 mm" or "Miller 23" in the
following) and the relevant duplo number. (The combination of tool identifier and duplo number
uniquely defines the tool.) The internal T number of this tool is determined prior to the data
record using the command GETT("Identifier", duplo No.) and saved a variable ("T No." here).
The data required for the tool is written and then the entire program is transferred to the NC
where it is processed.
Only the variables for which data is entered have to be written. The first tool in the following
example contains all the data, the second tool only contains the relevant data.
The T number does not have to be determined in the retroload program if already specified
during loading because the data can then be assigned directly.
For example, for tool "1", writing length L1 looks like this:

$TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ;Tool type

$TC_DP3[1,1]=67.032 ;Length

Program for retroloading tool offset data

DEF INT Tno ;Definition of variable TNo

tl1:
TNo=GETT ("Drill 12mm",1)
if TNo==-1 goto tl2
$TC_DP1[TNo,1]=120 ;Tool type
$TC_DP2[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP3[TNo,1]=67.032 ;Length1
$TC_DP4[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP5[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP6[TNo,1]=24 ;Radius
$TC_DP7[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP8[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP9[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP10[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP11[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP12[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP13[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP14[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP15[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP16[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP17[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP18[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP19[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP20[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP21[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP22[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP23[TNo,1]=0

Tool management
364 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.2 Loading

$TC_DP24[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP25[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP1[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP2[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP3[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP4[TNo,1]=0
tl2: ;Next tool
TNo=GETT ("Miller23",2)
if TNo==-1 goto error ;Possible error routine if tool does not exist
$TC_DP1[TNo,1]=120
$TC_DP3[TNo,1]=82.51
$TC_DP6[TNo,1]=25
Fault: ;Error
:
:
M17

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 365
Description of functions
7.3 Unloading

7.3 Unloading

7.3.1 Unloading sequence

Unloading removes the tool from the magazine. It always involves transporting a tool from a real
magazine into the loading magazine. In so doing, the owner location of the tool as well as all
reservations made in the real magazine are deleted.

)5$(6(5B %6
*



%6  6S6SLQGOH
 %6ORDGLQJSRLQW
**ULSSHU
 **ULSSHU
0DJD]LQH %6ORDGLQJSRLQW
6S




*
  

Figure 7-12 Unloading the magazine

Unloading sequence
1. The NC issues an "Unload" order. The parameters are transferred to interface DB71. There
is a separate interface area in DB71 for each loading point.
2. The magazine moves the selected (loaded) magazine location to the loading point
(DB71.DBW58/60).
3. The tool is unloaded from the magazine (the tool is manually removed in the example).
4. The "Unload" order is acknowledged via the PLC with FC6/FC8.

Tool management
366 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.3 Unloading

Initiate loading via SINUMERIK Operate

Loading is initiated in SINUMERIK Operate:
1. The tool is selected in the magazine.
2. The "unloading" of the tool from the magazine is initiated via the softkey.

Figure 7-13 Unload tool

The individual steps are acknowledged via the user program in the PLC.

7.3.2 PLC function when unloading

Overview
The PLC is notified by the NC during the unloading process about the magazine and location
numbers via the "Loading/unloading (DB71)" interface.
The following bytes in DB71 (Page 123) are filled during unloading:
● DBB0.1; The interface defines the loading point. Interface 2 corresponds with loading point
2. Interface 1 with loading point 1 is assigned to the spindle.
● DBB(n+0).1; the parameter "n" contains the value for the loading/unloading point. Thus,
"34" for example, for loading point 2.
● DBW(n+24); Number of the source magazine.
● DBW(n+26); Location number of the tool to be unloaded.
These target addresses are communicated to FC8/FC6 via the following parameters:
● The ID of the unloading point contains DB71.DBW(n+16)
● The position number of the unloading point contains DB71.DBW(n+18)
● "Status (Page 159)" conveys whether the loading has been successfully completed:
The parameters "NewToolMag", "NewToolLoc" are preset to 0 during loading. The number of
the active interface identifies the loading location.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 367
Description of functions
7.3 Unloading

Example of FC8/FC6 call when unloading with FC150 (user program)

Unloading is controlled via DB71. The unloading sequence is as follows:
1. The PLC receives the command to unload the selected tool. The information is transferred
to the PLC in DB71. Example of the data in DB71 during unloading for the 2nd interface
Location 1 of magazine no. 1 must be unloaded at loading location 2.
2. The PLC positions "Location 1" from "Magazine No. 1" (from which should be unloaded) to
the "Loading/unloading point 2" and executes the unloading operation.
3. When the tool is removed from the magazine, FC8/FC6 must be called from the user
program and the unloading operation acknowledged.

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ
%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW
6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG
,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH
'%% 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

'%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66  66 1HZ7RRO0DJ  'XULQJXQORDGLQJ 
5HV 5HV 3RV -RE 3RV 5HOR 8QORD /RD
PXOWL IURP PDJD FDWLQJ GLQJ GLQJ 1HZ7RRO/RF  'XULQJXQORDGLQJ 
WRRO 1& ]LQH
'%% 2OG7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUXQORDGLQJ
SURJ

2OG7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUXQORDGLQJ

'DWDLQ 5HVHUYHG $FNQ
6WDWXV  2SHUDWLRQFRPSOHWHG
'% 6WDW
'%% 
2SHUDWLRQWHUPLQDWHGQR
FKDQJHRI7&B0$3

'%: ,GHQWLILHUIRUORDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQW IL[HGYDOXH

0XOWLWRRO/RF  'XULQJUHORFDWLRQ 
'%: 1RRIORDGLQJSRLQW

'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ ([DPSOH7RROXQORDGLQJIURPORFDWLRQ

'%'%: 
'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%:  
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%:  
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%: 

Figure 7-14 Unloading DB71

Example: Call FC8/FC6 when unloading

The PLC user program moves the magazine to the unloading point and executes the unloading
operation. If the tool comes via a buffer location (gripper, loader) to the unloading point or
station, then the NC is to be notified of each position change by means of the FC8/FC6 with
status 104, 105.
Status "1" is not set via FC8 until the tool is in the specified unloading point/station. This means
that the unload operation has been completed; the magazine position is also automatically
aligned.

Tool management
368 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.3 Unloading

PLC sample programs

The following sample programs (definition of DB150 (Page 119)) show the acknowledgement
of loading via interface 2. To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user block.

Sample program "Load magazine"

NETWORK TITLE = Acknowledgement of unloading interface 2
U E 86.0; //acknowledgement is done here via the terminal E 86.0
U DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 2 active
U DB71.DBX 34.1; //Loading active
FP M 150.0;
SPBN M100;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 2
L 0;
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
L DB71.DBW 50;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for unloading
L DB71.DBW 52;
T DB150.DBW 1; //Target location for unloading
L 0;
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M100: NOP 0;

Example of a transfer with FC6

NETWORK TITLE =Tool management status transfer
CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TaskID := DB150.DBB 0,
TaskIDNo := DB150.DBB 1,
NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
Error := DB150.DBW 14);
U DB150.DBX 16.1; //Ready prompt
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
<>I ; //Evaluate error
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 369
Description of functions
7.3 Unloading

Positioning for unloading (with SINUMERIK Operate)

This means that the HMI sends two tasks to the NC (and this in turn to the PLC). First
positioning (which is described in the following), then unloading.
When a magazine is being positioned at a loading magazine, the target address is stored in
DB71.DBW(n+16) and DBW(n+18). This target address is passed to FC8/FC6 as parameters
"NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" and "Status" = 1 once the magazine has been successfully
positioned. Parameters "OldToolMag", "OldTool-Loc" must be set to 0.
The magazine and magazine location to be positioned are stored in DB71.DBW(n+20) and
DBW(n+22). Positioning here only concerns magazine positioning a free location or a location
with a tool to a loading/unloading station. The number of the active interface identifies the
loading magazine (location No.).

Example: Positioning for unloading

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB 71 interface
TaskIdentNo 2 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9999 MAG. No. 9999
NewToolLoc 3 Loc. No. 3
OldToolMag 0 During positioning = 0
OldToolLoc 0 During positioning = 0
Status 1 Operation completed

See also
FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management (Page 155)

7.3.3 Unloading by deleting the T number from the magazine location

By directly writing to parameter $TC_MPP6[magazine No.,location No.] = 0, a tool can be
removed from this magazine location (whether it is a real magazine, buffer or loading
magazine). All reservations of the removed tool are automatically deleted.
This does not involve an associated command output to the PLC.

Tool management
370 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.1 Overview

Tool change - Overview

During a tool change, a tool is changed from a real magazine into the spindle or the turret is
rotated to the correct position. The used tool is changed from the spindle into a real magazine.
The tool can be changed using an intermediate magazine such as a gripper. Other options are,
for example, changing the tool using turrets (rotating the turret) and a manual tool change
(manual tool).
The following example shows a tool change in a chain magazine with a double gripper.

&KDQJHSRVLWLRQIRU
*ULSSHU VSLQGOH


  


0DJD]LQH
6SLQGOH  




*ULSSHU
  

Figure 7-15 Tool change with double gripper

All of the intermediate steps during a tool change must be programmed in the user program of
the PLC and acknowledged via the transfer blocks FC6, FC7 or FC8. In the example above, this
means:
● The tool is positioned at the change point of the magazine.
● ① The tool is loaded from the change point of magazine 1 into gripper 1.
● ① The tool is loaded from spindle 1 into gripper 2.
● ② The tool is loaded from gripper 1 into spindle 1.
● ② The tool is loaded from gripper 2 to the change point in magazine 1.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 371
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.2 General tool change sequence

Tool change sequence

The prompt for changing the tool is issued by the part program via T command or M command.
1. The tool-management function in NC searches in accordance with the tool search strategy
for a tool suitable for use (preparation) and, at the same time, searches for an empty location
for the tool to be exchanged.
2. The determined data is provided in DB72/73. The user program must react by making a new
tool available.
3. If machine data MD22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE is set to 1, with the "M06
command" in the part program, the PLC executes the tool change and signals the end of the
change operation.
If the machine data is set to 0, then by programming T, the tool is loaded. In both cases, the
PLC has the option of applying its own tool change strategy. It can choose its own empty
location for storing the old tool.
Note
The tool change is an NC-internal operation that is executed as an interaction with the PLC.
The HMI only has the task of displaying data and facilitating data input.

Tool management
372 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Tool change sequence

1& 3/&*3 3/&XVHU

3DUWSURJUDPFRPPDQG
3URFHVVDODUP
7 ,GHQW1&
GHWHUPLQHVORFDWLRQVRI 'LVWULEXWLRQLQ2%DIWHUFKHFN &RPPDQGLQ'%
WKHSDUWLFLSDWLQJWRROV ZKHWKHUWKHLQWHUIDFHLVIUHH ,QIOXHQFLQJRIFKDQQHO
VLJQDOVHJUHDGLQGLVDEOHG
:DLWF\FOH2%

7UDQVIHURIF\FOLF
$FWLRQVIRUSUHSDULQJ
VLJQDOVDQGWUDQVSRUW
HJPDJD]LQHV
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW
IRU7
)&
6WDWXV
)&
6WDWXV
3URFHVVDODUP 3URFHVVDODUP ,QLWLDWHDFWLRQVIRU
3URJUDPFRPPDQG0
&KDQJH
'LVWULEXWLRQLQ2%LI'%66LVIUHH
7UDQVSRUWDFNQRZOHGJH
PHQW0
F\FOH

)&
)URPWKLVSRLQWRQ 6WDWXV
PRWLRQEORFNVZLWK
DFWLYHFXWWLQJHGJHFDQ )&
&KDQJHH[HFXWHG
EHWUDYHUVHG 6WDWXV

Figure 7-16 Preparing and changing a tool

1& 3/&*3 3/&XVHU

&RPPDQGLQ'%
3URFHVVDODUP ,QLWLDWLRQRIDFWLRQVIRU
3URJUDPFRPPDQG 3URFHVVDODUP
&KDQJHSRVVLEOHLQIOXHQFLQJ
7 'HV7 /RFDWLRQ
'LVWULEXWLRQLQ2%LI'%66LVIUHH RIFKDQQHOVLJQDOVHJUHDGLQ
GLVDEOHG
7UDQVSRUWDFNQRZOHGJHPHQW7
F\FOH

)URPWKLVSRLQWRQPRWLRQ
EORFNVZLWKDFWLYHFXWWLQJ )& &KDQJHDFNQRZOHGJH
HGJHFDQEHWUDYHUVHG PHQWH[HFXWHG

Figure 7-17 Tool changing with T command

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 373
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Spindle and tool holder

Tool management can also be used for machines that have no spindle (e.g. punch presses or
turrets). In this case the term "spindle" is replaced by "tool holder";
This is defined in MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If MD > 0, then the
spindle numbers $TC_MPP5 are interpreted as tool holder numbers.

Fixed location coding

If fixed location coding is selected for a tool, the tool will always be returned to the same location
when it is replaced.

Variable location coding

Tools defined with variable location coding can be returned to any location for the appropriate
tool size and location type in the magazine.

Automatic tool return to real magazine

1. An automatic tool return is initiated by the TM only if the tool is transported via several
stations (status 105) after a T preparation command from the PLC and the T preparation
command is finally acknowledged positively with status 1.
The return of a preselected tool from the buffer can be suppressed by setting MD20310:
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 15 = 1.
2. If a tool change is interrupted because the control is switched off but the tool is already
located in a buffer location (gripper), the next tool change must either return the tool in the
buffer to the spindle or to the real magazine.
3. If several tools are located in the buffer the spindle tool is considered first. If there is no tool
on the spindle, the order for return is in accordance with system variable $TC_MLSR.

Example for the time sequence of a tool change

The following example shows a typical cut-to-cut sequence of operations for a tool change with
a tool changer and a fixed absolute tool change point on a milling machine.
Machining program

N970 G0 X = Y = Z ;Retraction from the contour

N980 T = "MILLING CUTTER" ;Tool preselection
N990 T_CHANGE ;Subprogram call without parameters
N1000 G90 G0 X= Y= Z= M3 S1000 ;Continue machining

Subprogram for the tool change

PROC W_WECHSEL
N10 SPOSA= S0 ;Spindle positioning
N20 G75 FP=2 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0; ;Approach tool change point
N30 M06 ;Change tool
N40 M17

Tool management
374 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

1 1
&XUUHQWORFDWLRQQXPEHU 1 1 1

,6)HHGGLVDEOH 

,67UDYHUVLQJFRPPDQG D[LV 
,6([DFWVWRSILQH D[LV

,6([DFWVWRSFRDUVH D[LV 

3/&1HZWRROORDGHG 

,65HDGLQHQDEOH 

,6([DFWVWRSILQH VSLQGOH E\0



3RVLWLRQLQJPRGHDFWLYH


6SLQGOHVSHHGLQUSP

7LPH
722/72722/7,0(

&8772&877,0(
W W W W W
Figure 7-18 Chronological sequence of tool change

t1 axes stationary, spindle rotating, start of the tool change cycle in N10
t2 Traverse axis with G75 in N20 to tool change point.
t3 Spindle reaches programmed position from block N10.
t4 Axes reach exact stop coarse from N20; N30 now starts.
M06 removes the previous tool from the spindle and loads and clamps the new tool.
t5 Tool changer swivels back to original position.
Then, in N1000 of the calling main program,
● the new tool offset can be selected,
● the axes returned to the contour.
● spindle accelerated.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 375
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.3 Preparing a tool change via T command

Fundamentals
A tool change is prepared via the part program with the "T" command and then executed via the
command "M06".
The tool change type is set using machine data 22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE.
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0
No separate T preparation, change with the T command.
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
Separate T preparation, the change is performed with M06 or the M function, which is set in
machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE.
This setting setting is independent of the magazine type. This means that also for a turret, T and
M06 can be programmed just the same as for a chain magazine only with a T command.

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0
T="Tool identifier" ;Tool preparation and tool change with an NC command (=
within an NC block)
;NC sends a command to the PLC

If an error is detected during tool preparation, then machining is stopped when the block T =
identifier is read-in.
After correction and NC Start, the block with T = identifier is interpreted again and program
processing is continued.

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1
● Within an NC block

T="Tool identifier" M06 ;Tool preparation and tool change from this programming
results in a command to the PLC

Program tool preparation and tool change in one block (T= "Tool identifier" M06), corresponds
to setting TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0.
● Distributed over two NC blocks

T="Tool identifier" ;Tool preparation

;NC sends a command to the PLC
M06 ;Tool change (the number of the M code can be set)
;NC sends a command to the PLC

Tool preparation and tool change are typically programmed in different blocks. Two commands
are transferred to the PLC.

Tool management
376 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.4 Execution of the tool change

Programming the tool change

A tool change is prepared via the part program with the "T" command and then executed via the
command "M06".
The change is initiated with M06.

Change in tool "MILLER1"

TEST_PROGRAM.MPF
N10
N20
N30 T="MILLER1" //Prepare tool change
N40
N50
N60 M06
N70
N80
N90 M30 end of program

An alarm is triggered if an error occurs in T="tool identifier". If the MD22562

TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE is set accordingly, the alarm is delayed until the associated
tool change command M06 is interpreted in the program sequence. Only then is the alarm
output. The operator can make corrections in this block.

Note
Offset selection or deselection is automatically made with the tool change command. In so
doing, machine data MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT is evaluated.
If the T/M function of the tool change is programmed with address extension, the address
extension specifies the spindle number for which the tool change is to take place:
Example: T3 = "Miller" M3 = 6
The tool with the "Miller" identifier is loaded into spindle 3.

Empty spindle
Program commands T0 and M06 remove the tool from the spindle and return it to the magazine.
The spindle is then empty.

Possible problems when programming T/M06

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0; tool change with T address

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 377
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The part program is executed through to the block T = "identifier". The following problems can
occur and are handled as follows:
● The tool data record is in the NC but not assigned to a magazine location. The tool must be
reloaded mechanically, if necessary, e.g. directly onto the spindle. The assignment of the
tool to the magazine location/the spindle takes place, e.g. with the function "Overstore";
$TC_MPP6[m,p] = T no., or by the HMI operation "Load (onto spindle)".
● The tool data record is not in the NC: Create data record, e.g. through HMI operation, in the
NC.
● Programming error in part program: Correct NC block with error in the part program.
● Alarm 22067:
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool group does not contain a "ready
to use" replacement tool which could be loaded. The tool monitoring function may have set
all potentially suitable tools to the "disabled" status.
The Start pushbutton is pressed once the operation has been completed. The NC block T="tool
identifier" is interpreted again and program processing is continued provided operator
intervention was correct. If not, the alarm will be generated again.

7.4.5 Tool change for chain and box-type magazines

7.4.5.1 PLC function during preparation (chain, box type)

Spindle/buffer DB72
The data block DB72 (Page 128) is responsible for changing tools in the spindle. This data
block also prepares the tool change. This data block has an interface for every spindle.
User data is available at each interface (sequence in accordance with the spindle number) as
for the loading and unloading points. Data are additionally available for the new tool to be
loaded at change. This data includes, for example, location type, sizes, tool status and the T
number internally assigned in the NC.
The buffer address of the spindle is contained in DB72.DBW(n+16) and DBW(n+18) as the
target for the new tool. This position is communicated as the target position of the new tool in
parameters "NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" when the tool change has been successfully
completed. The target position of the old tool (DB72.DBW(n+24) and DBW(n+26)) is
transferred to FC8/FC6 in parameters "OldToolMag, "OldToolLoc" together with parameter
"Status" = 1 after the change tool command has been executed.

Tool management
378 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Description of tool change operation in spindle

The tool in location 1, magazine 1 is to be loaded to the spindle (magazine no. 9998, location
1) and the tool in the spindle is to be returned to magazine 1 location 8.

 
 
*ULSSHU *ULSSHU
 


6SLQGOH 
0DJD]LQH
&KDQJH  
SRVLWLRQIRUVSLQGOH

 

 

 

Spindle 1 = magazine 9998 location 1

Gripper 1 = magazine 9998 location 2
Gripper 2 = magazine 9998 location 3
Figure 7-19 Tool change in the spindle

The tool change in the spindle is split into two steps (for TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1):
1. Prepare change:
Search for new tool and move to the change position
2. Execute change:
New tool into the spindle and old tool into the magazine at the correct location

1. Prepare change
Bit 2 is set in DB72.DBB n+0. In preparing for the change, the current positions of the tools are
communicated to FC8/FC6 in the associated parameters once the preparation step has been
completed. In this case, "Status (Page 159)" = 1 is parameterized for FC8. This means that the
"old tool" is still in the spindle and that the "new tool" is either still in the source magazine at the
same location or has been placed in a buffer.
The following information is passed to FC8/FC6:
● The new tool is in the change position, but is still located in magazine (NewToolMag = 1 and
NewToolLoc = 1).
● The old tool is still in the spindle (OldToolMag = 9998 and OldToolLoc = 1).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 379
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ
%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW
6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG
,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH
'%% 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

'%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66  66
1HZ7RRO0DJ '%'%: 6RXUFHPDJD]LQHIRUSUHSDUDWLRQ
7RRO 5H ,QVHUW 2OGWRRO 7 3UHSDUH ([HFXWH 2EOLJD
UHPDLQV SODFH PDQXDO LQ%/ FKDQJH FKDQJH WRU\ 1HZ7RRO/RF '%'%: 6RXUFHORFDWLRQIRUSUHSDUDWLRQ
LQ PDQXDO WRRO Q 0 FKDQJH
'%% VSLQGOH WRRO 2OG7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUSUHSDUDWLRQ

2OG7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUSUHSDUDWLRQ

'DWDLQ 5HVHUYHG $FNQ
'% 6WDW 6WDWXV  2SHUDWLRQFRPSOHWHG
'%% 
0XOWLWRRO/RF  0XOWLWRROORFDWLRQ

'%: %XIIHU,' IL[HGYDOXH

'%: /RFDWLRQLQEXIIHU

'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUQHZWRRO
([DPSOHH[FKDQJH ([DPSOHQRH[FKDQJH
'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUQHZWRRO '%'%:   '%'%:  
'%'%:   '%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUROGWRRO '%'%:  
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUROGWRRO '%'%:   '%'%:  
'%'%[  '%'%[ 
7RROVWDWXVIRUQHZWRRO
0DQXDO  0DVWHU 7REH 7REH EORFNHG ,'IRU
'%:
WRRO H[ WRRO ORDGHG XQORD WRRO
FKDQJH GHG

Figure 7-20 DB72 during preparation of the tool change

Tool management
380 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

PLC sample program

The following sample programs (description of DB150 (Page 119)) show the acknowledgement
of the preparation (positioning at the change point) via interface 1. To this end, the network is
programmed in an FC150 user block.

Sample program "Prepare magazine change"

NETWORK
TITLE =Prepare acknowledgement of change
U E 86.0;
U DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
UN DB72.DBX 4.1;
U DB72.DBX 4.2; //Preparation active
FP M 151.0;
SPBN M180;
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
L DB72.DBW 24;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine for preparation
L DB72.DBW 26;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location for preparation
L DB72.DBW 28;
OW W#16#0;
SPN M182; //Tool in spindle? Yes->
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
SPA M181;
M182: L DB72.DBW 20;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for preparation
L DB72.DBW 22;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for preparation
M181: L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M180: NOP 0;

7.4.5.2 PLC function during tool change (chain, box type)

Perform change
If the preparation command has been correctly acknowledged with status = 1, the "Change" bit
DB72.DBB n+0 bit 1 is set with the M06 command from the part program. The free parameters
are also transferred again. All other values remain unaffected by the "Change tool" operation.
Two tools are involved in the tool change procedure. The old tool is in the spindle and the new
tool is in the magazine. The tool transport is executed in this example with gripper 1 and gripper
2. Any change in the positions of the tools must be communicated to the tool management with
FC8/FC6. FC8/FC6 must be called twice for this purpose.
FC8/FC6 call with status 105 change in progress

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 381
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The tool with the dual gripper is withdrawn from the magazine and the spindle. The old tool is
now in gripper 2 at location no. 3 and the new tool in gripper 1 in location no. 2. This results in
the following FC8/FC6 call:

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ
%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW
6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG
,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH
'%% 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

'%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66  66
1HZ7RRO0DJ  6RXUFHPDJD]LQHRIWKHQHZWRRO
7RRO 5H ,QVHUW 2OGWRRO 7 3UHSDUH ([HFXWH 2EOLJD
UHPDLQV SODFH PDQXDO LQ%/ FKDQJH FKDQJH WRU\ 1HZ7RRO/RF  6RXUFHORFDWLRQRIWKHQHZWRRO
LQ PDQXDO WRRO Q 0 FKDQJH
'%% VSLQGOH WRRO 2OG7RRO0DJ  7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUQHZWRRO

2OG7RRO/RF  7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUQHZWRRO
'DWDLQ 5HVHUYHG $FNQ
'% 6WDW 6WDWXV  ,QWHUPHGLDWHORFDWLRQUHDFKHG
'%% 
0XOWLWRRO/RF  0XOWLWRROORFDWLRQ

'%: %XIIHU,' IL[HGYDOXH

'%: /RFDWLRQLQEXIIHU

'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUQHZWRRO
([DPSOHH[FKDQJH
'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUQHZWRRO '%'%:   
'%'%:   
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUROGWRRO 
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUROGWRRO '%'%:   
'%'%[ 
7RROVWDWXVIRUQHZWRRO
0DQXDO  0DVWHU 7REH 7REH EORFNHG ,'IRU
'%:
WRRO H[ WRRO ORDGHG XQORD WRRO
FKDQJH GHG

Figure 7-21 Tool change DB72 and FC6

Note
The operator uses FC8/FC6 to notify the tool management of the new positions of the
exchanged tools.
Tool management knows which is the new (called) tool and which is the old (spindle) tool.
The current positions are also known to the tool management. If these positions change, the
tool management is only informed about this through FC8/FC6.

Note
If T preparation and change signals are simultaneously present, then the tool call and the
change command (T and M) are programmed in one block. When calling FC8/FC6, in such a
case, only the change has to be acknowledged and not the selection.

FC8/FC6 call with status 1 tool change complete

While the gripper is moving the tools, the PLC can read the magazine location for the old tool
(from the spindle) from DB72.DBW (n+24) and (n+26) and move the magazine to the change

Tool management
382 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

position. This position is location 8 in magazine 1 in this example. The tool change can now be
mechanically ended by "inserting" the tools. Tool management shall be informed of this change
in tool positions by a FC8/FC6 call with status = 1. The new tool is placed in the spindle of
magazine No. 9998, location No. 1 and the old tool in magazine No. 1 at location 8.

Interim acknowledgement of tool change

The following sample program (definition of DB150 (Page 119)) shows the acknowledgement
of the tool change via interface 1. To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user
block.

NETWORK
TITLE =Interim acknowledgement M1 -> Gr1,Sp -> Gr2

U E 86.2; //Acknowledgement via terminal 86.2

U DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
U DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
U DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 152.0;
SPBN M200;
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
L DB72.DBW 24;
OW W#16#0;
SPN M204; //T0? No->
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
SPA M203;
M204: L 9998;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool 2;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
M203: L DB72.DBW 28;
OW W#16#0;
SPN M202; //Tool in spindle? Yes->
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
SPA M201;
M202: L 9998;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
L 3;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool
M201: L 105;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 105
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M200: NOP 0;

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 383
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.5.3 PLC sample programs tool change

Tool change via intermediate memory

If the dual gripper is to place the spindle tool in the magazine location of the new tool, the user
must ensure that the magazine location is of the same size and location type as the spindle tool.
Here too, a 1:1 exchange is supported through appropriate setting of the search strategy by the
tool management; in this case, the NC checks the location type, size, adjacent location
allocation,...
If this is the case, the transfer can be performed simultaneously (on the dual gripper in the
spindle and in the magazine location at the change position).
FC8/FC6 must be parameterized as follows:

,QWHULPDFNQRZOHGJHPHQW JULSSHU!VSLQGOHJULSSHU!PDJ 3HUIRUPFKDQJHDFNQRZOHGJHPHQWZLWK)&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ )& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ

6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG 6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG

7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH

7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

1HZ7RRO0DJ '%'%: 6RXUFHPDJD]LQHRIWKHQHZWRRO 1HZ7RRO0DJ '%'%: 6RXUFHPDJD]LQHRIWKHQHZWRRO

1HZ7RRO/RF '%'%: 6RXUFHORFDWLRQRIWKHQHZWRRO 1HZ7RRO/RF '%'%: 6RXUFHORFDWLRQRIWKHQHZWRRO

2OG7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUQHZWRRO 2OG7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUQHZWRRO

2OG7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUQHZWRRO 2OG7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUQHZWRRO

6WDWXV  ,QWHUPHGLDWHORFDWLRQUHDFKHG 6WDWXV  2SHUDWLRQFRPSOHWHG

 
0XOWLWRRO/RF  0XOWLWRROORFDWLRQ 0XOWLWRRO/RF  0XOWLWRROORFDWLRQ

Figure 7-22 Acknowledgement tool change FC6

Tool management
384 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Interim acknowledgement of tool change

The following sample programs (definition of DB150 (Page 119)) show the acknowledgement
of the tool change via interface 1. To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user
block.

NETWORK
TITLE =Interim acknowledgement Gr1 -> Sp, Gr2 -> M1
U E 86.3;
U DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
U DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
U DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 152.1;
SPBN M210;
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
L DB72.DBW 24;
OW W#16#0;
SPN M214; //T0? No->
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
SPA M213;
M214: L DB72.DBW 20;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
L DB72.DBW 22;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
M213: L DB72.DBW 28;
OW W#16#0;
SPN M212; //Tool in spindle? Yes->
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
SPA M211;
M212: L DB72.DBW 28;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
L DB72.DBW 30;
T DB150.DBW 8; /Target location for old tool
M211: L 105;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 105
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M210: NOP 0;

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 385
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Carry out acknowledgement of change

NETWORK
TITLE =Carry out acknowledgement of change

U E 86.4;
U DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
U DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
U DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 151.1;
SPBN M190;
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
L DB72.DBW 24;
OW W#16#0;
SPN M194; //T0? No->
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
SPA M193;
M194: L DB72.DBW 20;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
L DB72.DBW 22;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
M193: L DB72.DBW 28;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
L DB72.DBW 30;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
U DB72.DBX 5.7;
SPB M192;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SPA M191;
M192: L DB1072.DBW 10;
T DB150.DBW 12; //Multitool location
M191: SET ;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M190: NOP 0;

7.4.5.4 Example structure of the PLC program for a tool change

PLC example of an acknowledgement with FC6

Individual steps for a tool change via a double gripper.

NETWORK TITLE =Interim acknowledgement M1 -> Gr1,Sp -> Gr2

...

Tool management
386 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

NETWORK TITLE =Interim acknowledgement Gr1 -> Sp,Gr2 -> Mag

...

NETWORK TITLE =Carry out acknowledgement of change

...

Programming the transfer

The following example shows the programming of the FC6 via a data block DB150 (definition
of DB150 (Page 119)). To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user block.

NETWORK
TITLE =Tool management status transfer

CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block

Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TaskID := DB150.DBB 0,
TaskIDNo := DB150.DBB 1,
NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
Error := DB150.DBW 14);
U DB150.DBX 16.1; //Prompt ready
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
<>I ; //Evaluate error
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 387
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.6 Tool change with turret

Turret DB73
DB73 is responsible for "changing" tools in the turret. During this, the turret is rotated to the point
so that the desired tool is in the working position. This data block has an interface for every
turret. The turrets are numbered using ascending magazine numbers. User data are available
at each interface as for the loading and unloading point. Data are additionally available for the
new tool to be loaded at change. This data includes location type, sizes, tool status and the T
number internally assigned in the NC.

 

Figure 7-23 Tool change turret

Following completion of the tool-change operation, loading the new tool shall be acknowledged
by FC7. To this end, the parameter "ChgdRevNo" receives the turret number of the new tool
that has been inserted.

FC 7 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
ChgdRevNo 1 1st turret
Ready Feedback from FC8/FC6
Error Feedback from FC8/FC6

Tool management
388 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

DB73 for tool change with standard acknowledgement

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/& '% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 3/&!1&.

%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH ,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH

'%% '%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH ,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH

'%% '%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66
 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

5HV 0DQXDO 5HV 5HV 7 5HV 3HU 2EOLJD
WRRO IRUP WRU\
FKDQJH FKDQJH FKDQJH ([DPSOH&KDQJHWRWXUUHWSRVLWLRQ
'%%
WRRO
QXPEHU '%'%: 
'%'%: 
'%'%: 
'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ
'%'%: 

'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ

'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ

'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ

Figure 7-24 Tool change at a turret

Alternatively to the acknowledgement via FC7, the standard acknowledgement of DB73 can
also be used.

Sample program acknowledgment via DB73"

NETWORK TITLE =Acknowledgement of change with T no.
U E 86.0;
U DB73.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
FP M 150.0;
SPBN M200.1;
S DB73.DBX 0; //Acknowledgement Interface 1

7.4.7 Selecting a tool and a cutting edge

Precondition

Note
The T number and the M function are no longer transferred to the PLC as an auxiliary function
if tool management is activated.
Numbers are also valid tool names, e.g. "3" instead of T = "3" can be programmed more simply
than T3.
There must be a tool with the T number as the identifier available when working with the T
number.
Example: If you want to call a tool using T3, the tool must have the name "3". A tool CANNOT
be called with the internal T number managed by NC only.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 389
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Select/deselect tool offset for Reset

The following machine data can be used to control the behavior for RESET:
● MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 14
● MD20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME
● MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
● MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
● MD20132 SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE
You can determine whether to:
● deselect the active tool
● keep the active tool selected or
● set a particular tool (according to MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME).
If, in terms of its data, a new tool is selected that is not yet on the master spindle or the master
tool holder (or main spindle, main tool holder), then a tool change is executed for a RESET or
the end of the program. With this type of tool change (in a similar manner to block searches),
the PLC is not capable of influencing the selection of the tool.

Select a tool at start of program

The machine data
● MD20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 14
● MD20122: TOOL_RESET_NAME
● MD20112: START_MODE_MASK
● MD20130: CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
can be set to define whether:
● the tool on the main spindle or the main tool holder is selected again or remains selected.
● or a particular tool is selected (according to MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME).
If a new tool is selected which in the data is not yet specified as being on the spindle, a tool
change is performed when the program is started. For this type of tool change the PLC cannot
influence the selection of the tool, just as for block search.

Tool rejection by the PLC

With a block search, selection on reset or program start as well as the setting "Select tool in the
interpreter" ($MC_TOOL_Management_Mask bit 23=1), the tool is already selected during
preprocessing and the PLC can no longer reject the tool.

Note
If bit 4 of the machine data MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is set, then the PLC
usually has the possibility to again request preparation for a tool change, yet this time with
different parameters, i.e. to reject the tool.

Tool management
390 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Communication between PLC and tool management

The communication between PLC and NC during a tool change is via the VDI interface. Tool
change is triggered by the tool management in the NC. The tool management outputs
commands to the PLC which acknowledges them either positively or negatively depending on
the situation. The PLC also has the capability of independently (asynchronously) transferring
commands to the NC, e.g. communicating the magazine position, transport of a tool, etc.

7.4.8 Predecoding (preprocessing) and block execution (main run)

Sequence
The cutting edge geometry cannot be calculated until the tool management knows the tool that
is actually to be used. Only the identifier is stated in the part program for tool change. Generally,
the tool with the status "active" is then used. But if this is disabled, then one of the other sister
tools, i.e. the replacement tool, is used instead. The precoding delays selection of the new
offsets until it is clear which tool is to be used. Only then can precalculation of the blocks be
restarted.
Tool change must have been completed before the path can be traversed with the tool offset
of the new tool.
The block is split if the preprocessing run detects that a cutting edge of a new tool has been
selected for the first time and tool preparation has been initiated, but not yet completed.
The following synchronization points exist between predecoding and block execution:
Example:
Programmed NC block:
N1 D1 M06 Txx X100 Y100
Sequential blocks:
N1 Txx M06 end of block
N2 D1 X100 Y100

1. Interpreter detects an offset selection (D number)

2. It determines that a tool change was previously programmed which has not yet resulted in selec‐
tion of a tool.
3. Interpreter carries out "block splitting".
4. Output of block N1:
Block 1 receives a request from the execution blocks to output their collective blocks, and also if
programmed, M06, T numbers, ...
5. Output of block N2:
Block 2 receives the rest, in particular all travel information and any D numbers if programmed.
6. Tool management stops execution of the block during preprocessing until it is clear which tool is
to be used.
7. After receiving the tool preparation acknowledgement, execution of block 2 is continued, or first the
new T number is entered in the block and is used to calculate the contour again.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 391
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Tool change at the main spindle or master tool holder

The main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for transport acknowledgement.
1. Main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for end of acknowledgement (if bit 5
or bit 6 of MD20310 $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is set), or
2. After a tool change in the main run, the NC automatically synchronizes with the end of the
tool change in the block in which a cutting edge of the new tool was selected for the first time.
Note
The transport acknowledgement is an internal acknowledgement of an NC command. It
indicates to the NC that the output command was accepted. When a new command is
output to the PLC, the NC waits for the acknowledgement of the previous command.

Tool already in spindle

If the programmed tool is already in the spindle, by default no task is sent to the PLC. (The
response can be defined by the MD setting.)

Tool change at the secondary spindle or secondary tool holder

1. Main run does not wait. There is no synchronization.
2. Main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for transport acknowledgement.
3. Main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for end of acknowledgement.

Tool change preparation in a main spindle

1. In the main run, the tool management decides which tool is to be used. Until then, the
preprocessor waits at the point in the program at which the offset values of the new tool are
to be considered for the first time.
2. The PLC can also decide which tool is to be used. In this case, the PLC can reject the
recommended tool with a negative acknowledgement. If rejected by the PLC, the NC selects
a new, different tool (only if MD20300 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 4 = 1, see
also FC8/FC6-description).
3. Even if the function "GETSELT(...,x)" is programmed, the preprocessor again has to wait
until a decision has been made as to which tool is to be used.

Tool management
392 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Prepare to change tool in a secondary spindle

1. The main run does not wait. There is no synchronization
Note
During a synchronization operation where the new offset is used or allowed for by the
preprocessor, "block splitting" must be performed. This ensures that a preprogrammed tool
change T or M06 is actually performed and not collected in run blocks.
Unlike the STOPRE command, the preprocessor does not necessarily wait until all blocks
have been processed, but only waits if tool selection has not taken place by the appropriate
time. The appropriate time is when programming new offsets after tool change or when
programming GETSELT.

7.4.9 Traverse axes while tool is being changed

After the tool change command M06 the axes can continue travel without having to wait for the
tool change acknowledgement and, e.g., execute traversing blocks without tool offset. Travel
only stops in a block with an offset selected (D No.) until the PLC signals that a tool change has
been completed.
Precondition: MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT= 0 or = -2
Example: Traversing blocks between tool change and cutting edge selection

N10 T="Drill18" ;Tool change preparation

N15 D0 ;Offset deselection
N20 M06 ;Tool change
N25 G00 X100 Z200 ;Traverse machine axes
N30 Y150 M79 ;Traverse machine axes
N35 G01 D1 X10 ;Activate the tool offset.
;Check whether the tool has been changed. Preprocessing
stop until tool change preparations have been completed.
;Main run waits until tool change has been acknowledged
from PLC.

The preprocessing stop is maintained until the tool change preparations have been completed.
The main run waits at N35 (D1) until the tool change has been executed and acknowledged.

7.4.10 Special cases "T0", empty spindle, multiple T selection

T0: Empty spindle

DB72.DBX(n+0).3 indicates that T0 has been programmed. If the spindle is to be emptied using
T0, this can be identified by the fact that in DB72, DBW (n+20), DBW(n+22) data for new tool
have the value "0".
Then, values NewToolMag and NewToolLoc of FC8/FC6 must be set to "0".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 393
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

This applies to the preparation and to the change procedure.

Spindle is empty
A tool is to be loaded. This status is indicated by the fact that parameters OldToolMag and
OldToolLoc have the value "0".
In this case, FC8/FC6 parameters OldToolMag and NewToolLoc must be set to "0" for tool
preparation and change.

Multiple T selection
It can happen with multiple T selection that the program cannot be aborted by a RESET.
The abort response can be enhanced as follows:
● Cancel the read-in enable to prevent following blocks from being accepted in the main run.
● Then acknowledge with status 3 via FC8/FC6 (the tool command is rejected by the PLC).

7.4.11 Number of replacement tools

Machine data MD17500 MN_MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS can be set to select the
maximum number of replacement tools.
Once the set threshold for the number of replacement tools has been reached it is no longer
possible to:
● Create a new tool with this ID (alarm)
● Assign a tool by renaming an already fully assigned group (alarm).

Alarms
For operation via the HMI, alarm 17192 is output as an indication as soon as the defined limit
is violated.
If programming via a part program an additional interpreter alarm is triggered (e.g. 14020) if
NEWT fails.
For the setting $MN_MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS = 0, the data is not evaluated. This
is the factory setting.

Note
Machine data MD17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS has a maximum input value of
"32", i.e. a tool group then contains a maximum of 32 tools.

Tool management
394 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.12 Tool changing errors

If an error is detected by the NC in the programmed tool preparation (e.g. no tool available, no
free position in magazine) program processing is terminated with an alarm.
The operator can assess and rectify various problems without terminating the program.

The following problems can be solved:

● The tool data record is not or not entirely in the NC.
● The part program contains a programming error.
● No more replacement tools of the tool group in question are present or available (only
applies when tool management is active).
● Alarm 22067 or 22069 is output. The tool data record has been loaded into the NC but is not
assigned to a magazine location or the magazine of the tool is not accessible to the tool
search (only applies when tool management is active). The tool must be reloaded
"manually" (e.g. directly onto the spindle).
Note
The case of illegal "D number" can occur either if there is an error in the part program or the
data record for the D number is not in the NC.

Programming example

N10 ...
N100 T="Drill" ;NC detects an error
N110 ...
N200 M06 ;to the extent that the tool change is explicitly program-
med in the same program for tool preparation
N210 ...

Note
As a rule M06 is not programmed at the program level of tool preparation but rather in a
subprogram, cycle or macro.

Bit 0 of MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE is used to set at which block a stop

is to be made.
TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 0 = 0:

N10 ...
N100 T="Drill" ;NC detects an error, program stops at this block
N110 ...
N200 M06
N210 ...

TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 0 = 1:

N10 ...

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 395
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N100 T="Drill" ;NC detects an error

N110 ...
N200 M06 ;Program stops at this block
N210 ...

The error is detected during tool preparation, but is delayed by the NC. The program continues
and stops at M06. Tool preparation has been completed at this point in time for a regular
program run. In the event of an error, tool preparation with the correct data can be subsequently
repeated. In this situation, the language command GETSELT would supply the value "-1". With
this information, e.g. in a change cycle, a branch can be made to fault handling.
The programming error (in block 100 in this example) is corrected by adding the offset to the
tool change block:
N200 "T=Drill_1" M06
If a tool change (with M06 programming) is realized by means of a subprogram or cycle
program, then the error can be rectified by inserting an overstore block (in the example).

7.4.13 Monitoring the maximum speed of a tool

If the maximum permissible speed for a tool is exceeded, or the rotary acceleration, e.g. of large
tools, then this represents a danger for man and machine.
The appropriate limit values can be set for each tool via the following system variables:
● Speed limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<internal T number>]
● Rotary acceleration limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_ACC[<internal T number>]
This limits the speed and/or the rotary acceleration of the spindle into which the tool is loaded.
The dynamic response limitation is active for the following spindle functions:
● Spindle control mode
● Tapping with G331/G332
● Synchronous following spindle
● Spindle positioning mode
● constant cutting rate (G96, G961, G962)
● constant peripheral grinding speed
● Manual traversing of the spindle in JOG mode

Note
The function is only available when magazine management is active.

Tool management
396 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Displaying tool parameters on the user interface

In order that the tool parameters $TC_TP_MAX_VELO (speed limit value) and
$TC_TP_MAX_ACC (rotary acceleration limit value) are displayed on the user interface (read/
write), they must be configured accordingly. A detailed description can be found in:

Further information
● Configuring tool lists (Page 553)

The spindle is the tool holder

If the spindle number is also the number of the tool holder
($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0) (this is typical for milling machines), then
the following applies:
The extension when programming the tool change also refers to the spindle whose dynamics
should be limited.

Example: Extension = 3
T3="Miller_10" M3=6 S3=4000
A tool with the identifier "Miller_10" is loaded onto spindle S3. The speed of spindle S3 is limited
by the tool that is located on it.

Note
If an extension has not been programmed, then the tool change - as well as the programmed
speed - refers to the actual master spindle.

The tool holder is not a spindle

If the tool holder is rigid and the tool holder number is not a spindle
($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0) (this is typical for lathes), then there is no
assignment to a spindle.
However, for driven tools, it is necessary to assign the tool holder to a spindle. This is realized
using the magazine location parameter $TC_MPP_SP[buffermagazine No., location No.]. It is
only possible to change this parameter if there is no tool at this buffer magazine location.
If this assignment is not made, then the dynamics are not monitored and are not limited. As a
consequence, for example, it is not possible to limit the dynamics of the spindle of a lathe with
the fixed turning tool.

Example
Tools on tool holder 2 are driven by spindle 5:
(Buffer magazine no. = 9998, arbitrary location no. therein)
$TC_MPP5[9998,location no.]=2
$TC_MPP_SP[9998,location no.]=5
Programming:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 397
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

"T2="Drill_8" M2=6 S5=4000.

A tool with the identifier "Drill_8" is changed to tool holder 2. The speed of spindle S5 is now
limited by the tool in tool holder 2.

Note
If an extension has not been programmed (e.g. T="Drill" S=4000), then the tool change refers
to the actual master tool holder and the programmed speed on the actual master spindle.

Limitation becomes effective on tool change

The dynamic response limitation by the tool on the spindle is only active if the tool is on the
spindle as far as the NC data is concerned. To do this, the PLC acknowledgements are
evaluated.
When the tool has been changed on the spindle or the tool holder, the NC/PLC interface signal
"Tool with dynamic response limit active" (DB31, ...DBX85.0) is set.

Note
The NC/PLC interface signal "Tool with dynamic response limit active" (DB31, ...DBX85.0)
indicates that a tool with dynamic response limitation is in the spindle. The assignment state of
the spindles can be checked, especially if all tools have a maximum tool speed, which under
certain circumstances is very high so that there is no effective limiting.

Example: Tool change:

Assumptions:
● The tool with the internal T number = 6 with parameterized dynamic response limitation is
in the spindle (old tool, AWZ).
● The tool with the internal T number = 8 with parameterized dynamic response limitation,
"Miller" tool group is loaded into the spindle (new tool, NWZ).

Step No. NC program NC → PLC PLC → NC

1 N100 T1="Mill" --- ---
2 --- CMD=2 (tool preparation) ---
NWZ T-No=8: Mag./
mag.loc.1→ Sp1
AWZ T-No=6: Sp1 → Mag./
mag.loc.2
3 --- --- CMD=2, status=1
NWZ T-No=8: Mag./mag.loc.1→ Mag./
mag.loc.1
AWZ T-No=6: Sp1 → Sp1
4 N101 M1=6 --- ---

Tool management
398 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Step No. NC program NC → PLC PLC → NC

5 --- CMD=3 (tool change) ---
NWZ T-No=8: Mag./
mag.loc.1→ Sp1
AWZ T-No=6: Sp1 → Mag./
mag.loc.2
6 --- --- CMD=3, status=105
NWZ T-No=8: Mag./mag.loc.1→ Mag./
mag.loc.1
AWZ T-No=6: Sp1 → Mag./mag.loc.2
7 --- --- CMD=3, status=105
NWZ T-No=8: Mag./mag.loc.1→ Sp1
AWZ T-No=6: Mag./mag.loc.2 → Mag./
mag.loc.2
8 --- --- CMD=3, status=1
NWZ T-No=8: Sp1→ Sp1
AWZ T-No=6: Mag./mag.loc.2 → Mag./
mag.loc.2

CMD: PLC command

NWZ: New tool
AWZ: Old tool
Mag.: Magazine
Loc.: Location
Sp: Spindle
Up to step 6, the limits of the old tool are active.
In step 6, the PLC acknowledges the NC that the old tool was taken from spindle 1; this means
that there are no limits imposed by the tool.
In step 7, the PLC acknowledges the NC that the new tool has been loaded to spindle 1, i.e. the
limits of the new tool are active.
In step 8, the tool change is formally completed; no tool is moved.

Behavior when special events occur

Warm restart or abort of tool movements

The dynamic response limitation of a spindle by a tool depends on the tool, which, from the
perspective of the NC machine data, is in the particular spindle. If required, the data in the NC
should be aligned with the actual assignment of the spindles. This should be observed for a
warm restart or if tool movements are aborted.

Channel interchange
When the channel is interchanged, the spindle keeps the dynamic limits.

Note
The channel into which the spindle is changed, must work with the same TO unit.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 399
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Diagnostics

Determining the cause of the limitation

The cause of a limitation can be determined using the following system variables:
● Limitation of the spindle speed by the current tool in the spindle:
$AC_SMAXVELO_INFO[<n>] == 17, where n = spindle number
● Limitation of the spindle rotary acceleration by the current tool in the spindle:
$AC_SMAXVELO_INFO[<n>] == 12, where n = spindle number

Maximum values
The maximum values can be read via the following system variables:
● Speed: $AC_SMAXVELO[<n>]
● Rotary acceleration: $AC_SMAXACCEL_IDX[<n>]
n = spindle number

NC/PLC interface signals

The signal is set irrespective of whether the speed or the acceleration of the spindle is limited
by the current tool:
DB31, ... DBX85.0 == 1 (tool with dynamic response limitation)

Tool management
400 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Commissioning

Preconditions
● The "Tool monitoring for maximum speed/acceleration" option must be set.
● The tool is loaded into the spindle after setting the speed/acceleration limitation.
Note
A change of the speed limitation in TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<T number>] is not effective if the
tool is already in the spindle / tool holder.

● One TO unit can be assigned to several channels (MD $MC_TOA_UNIT). The spindle
number must also be unique across these channels and not only in the channels in which
it is configured for axis interchange. This is realized using the magazine location data
– $TC_MPP5[<buffer magazine no>., <location no.>] if the MD
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0.
– $TC_MPP_SP[<buffer magazine no>., <location no.>] if the MD
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0.

Note
The application itself must ensure that a spindle interchange in another channel is also
correspondingly taken into account for a tool change.
The PLC can check the synchronization of the tool assignment of the spindles with the data
management of the NC. Tools with a maximum tool speed set the PLC user interface signal
"Tool with dynamic limiting active". This signal can be compared with the assignment
sensors of the spindle.

Parameterization
● Speed limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<internal T number>] = <value>, with <value> > 0
● Rotary acceleration limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_ACC[<internal T number>] = <value>, with
<value> > 0

Note
The set values of $TC_TP_MAX_VELO and $TC_TP_MAX_ACC only take effect at the next
loading of the tool into the spindle / tool holder.

Data backup
After importing a data backup with tool data, from the data perspective, tools can be on spindles
or tool holders. The dynamic limit is correspondingly active. It is the task of the PLC user
program to adapt the actual assignment of the spindles to the NC data

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 401
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Interface assignment
Signals from the axis/spindle (NC-> PLC):

Syntax Description
DB31 - DB61.DBX85.0 "Tool with dynamic response limitation active"
=1; when option "Tool monitoring for maximum speed", tool data "TC_TP_MAX_VELO" >0
or "TC_TP_MAX_ACC">0 are set, and the affected spindle is not in axis mode.
DB31 - DB61.DBX85.1 Reserved for "Tool carrier with dynamic response limitation active"

Program example

Program code Comment

N10 $TC_TP[10]="Miller" ;T10 = "Miller"
N20 $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[10]=3500 ;Speed limitation from T10: 3500 rpm
...
N100 SETMS(1) ;Spindle 1 = master spindle
N110 M5 ;Spindle stop
N120 T="Miller" M6 ;Tool with T10 is loaded into spindle 1 ⇒
;DB31, ... .DBX85.0 = 1
N125 $AC_SMAXVELO[1]=3000 ;Spindle speed limitation: 3000 rpm
N130 S5000 M3 ;M3: 5000 rpm but limited to 3000 rpm

7.4.14 Tool changes in the NC using synchronized actions

Overview
At tool change and at loading/unloading it is often necessary to supply the NC cycles with the
data for the participating tools.
Usually this is done via the "fast data channel" (dual port RAM) using FC21.
The PLC user program checks the interface in DB71/72/73.
If a new command is pending, the data (new location, old location, T_number,...) are read, pre-
processed and supplied to the cycles via FC21. There they are (usually in synchronized
actions) read as variable $A_DBB[...] and, for example, magazine movements are derived from
them.
To reduce the overhead involved and create simpler mechanisms, most of the data of the tool
management interface was mapped onto the NC variables for read access.
This means that all information about the old tool and the new tool can be read directly in the
part program or in synchronized actions; the "detour" via the PLC is no longer needed.
The following variables are used for the mapping process:

$AC_TC_FCT Function no. (command no. of the NC)

$AC_TC_STATUS Acknowledgement status from the PLC
$AC_TC_THNO Tool holder or spindle no. on which the change was executed

Tool management
402 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

$AC_TC_TNO Internal T no. of the tool to be changed or prepared

$AC_TC_MFN Source new tool: Magazine number
$AC_TC_LFN Source new tool: Location number
$AC_TC_MTN Target new tool: Magazine number
$AC_TC_LTN Target new tool: Location number
$AC_TC_MFO Source old tool: Magazine number
$AC_TC_LFO Source old tool: Location number
$AC_TC_MTO Target old tool: Magazine number
$A_TC_LTO Target old tool: Location number
$AC_TC_CMDT Trigger variable to output command of the NC (is set for one IPO)
$AC_TC_ACKT Trigger variable for acknowledgement of the PLC (is set for one IPO)
$AC_TC_CMDC Counter for the command output
$AC_TC_ACKC Counter for the acknowledgements
$AC_TC_MMYN Owner magazine of the new tool
$AC_TC_LMYN Owner location of the new tool
Supplementary variables for multitool
$AC_TC_TOOLIS Transported tool of the type:
0 = Single tool
1 = Multitool with distance coding "location"
2 = Multitool with distance coding "distance"
3 = Multitool with distance coding "angle"
$AC_TC_MTDIST Distance of the MT location with the new tool from the reference point. If the
multitool has "length" as distance coding, the parameter contains the length in
the unit mm or inch as specified by the set dimension system.
$AC_TC_MTNLOC Number of locations in the MT of the new tool
$AC_TC_MTTN MT number of the MT location with the new tool
$AC_TC_MTLTN MT location number with the new tool

Note
The variables are read-only (exception $AC_TC_CMDC and $AC_TC_ACKC). The
acknowledgement mechanism remains unaffected (the PLC still continues to acknowledge all
commands from the NC via FC8/FC6 or FC7).

Method of operation
The variables are written:
1. With each command from the NC (CMD)
2. With each acknowledgement from the PLC (ACK)
3. With Power On all are set to value "-1"
The data is retained until it is overwritten by a new command. This means that with commands
of the same type, it is not possible to tell from the function number ($AC_TC_FCT) whether a
new task is present.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 403
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The exceptions are:

$AC_TC_TNO and $AC_TC_THNO
If, for example, the NC outputs a T preparation, both of these variables are set to "-1" with the
first PLC acknowledgement via FC8/FC6 (e.g. status 105).

Note
Scanning should only take place in synchronized actions. Depending on the application, this
can then trigger the variables $AC_TC_CMDT and/or $AC_TC_ACKT.

Example 1
Positioning a tool chain onto the old location
Assumption:
The tool chain has 36 locations, is defined as rotary and indexing axis, increments are 10
degrees therefore each graduation corresponds to one magazine location.
Tool_Change_Mode=1, Tool_Change_M-Mode=6
Ids=1 every(($AC_TC_CMDT==1)and(($AC_TC_FCT==2)or($AC_TC_FCT==5))) do
$R10=itor($AC_TC_LTO)
...
if ((R10>0)and($A_DBB[x]==5)) pos[U1]=cdc(R10)
endif
The trigger is sent to the command output of the NC and with command "2" (T preparation) or
command "5" (T/M06 in one block) the old location is read out and stored in R10
(itor=IntegerToReal - format conversion if the variable is stored in the R-variable in
synchronized actions).
Later in the program, when the enables from the PLC are present (for example as
$A_DBB[x]==5), the magazine axis is traversed to the saved position (old location=
$AC_TC_LTO).
A magazine movement could also be started as follows (shown here in simplified form):
Ids=1 every(((($AC_TC_FCT==2)or(AC_TC_FCT==5))and
($AC_TC_STATUS==105))and(($AC_TC_LTO>0))) do pos[U1]=cdc($AC_TC_LTO)
With commands "2" and "5" (T preparation or T/M06), with old location>0 and PLC
acknowledgement status "105" (serves as enable), the magazine axis is traversed.
Old location>0: If the spindle was empty, there is no old tool and the old location is 0. Therefore,
the magazine axis does not need to move.

Example 2
Swiveling a turret
Assumption:

Tool management
404 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Turret, 6 locations, the turret is defined as an indexing axis, 60 degree increment, corresponds
to one tool location, 1xSpindle, Tool_Change_Mode=0
Ids=1 every($AC_TC_CMDT==1)and($AC_TC_FCT==4)and($AC_TC_LFN>0) do
$R10=itor($AC_TC_LFN)
...
if ((R10>0)and($A_DBB[x]==5)) pos[B]=cac(R10)
endif
...
The NC is triggered with the command output and with command "4" (change with T command)
the new location is read out and saved in R10
(itor= IntegerToReal - format conversion if the variable is stored in the R-variable in
synchronized actions).
Later in the program, when the enables from the PLC are present (for example as
$A_DBB[x]==5), the turret is traversed to the saved position (new location=$AC_TC_LFN).
The logic operation $AC_TC_LFN>0 prevents a movement from taking place if, for example, T0
was programmed.

7.4.15 Replacing functions with subprograms

7.4.15.1 Function replacement

Overview
TCA, T, M, or D functions can be replaced with subprograms.
The function is available irrespective of tool management and is described in full in the "Basic
Functions" Function Manual.
The function is set using the following machine data:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Enter the M function that is to be replaced, e.g. "6"

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the M function, e.g. "L6"
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the T function, e.g. "T_Cycle"
$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the D function, e.g. "Offset"
$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the TCA command, e.g. also "T_Cycle"
The mode of operation will now be explained using a T function replacement as an example.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 405
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Example
If one of the auxiliary functions to be replaced has been programmed, e.g.
N10 G90 G00 Z-100 S3000 T="Mill_20mm" M65
then the NC executes a so-called block splitting and "splits" this NC block into 2 blocks
a) G90 G00 Z-100 S3000 M65
b) T="Mill_20mm"
The information "Mill_20mm" is transferred as parameter to the cycle.
If the T call is now again programmed in the replacement cycle, then no additional replacement
is made.
Machine data $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE is used to set whether the cycle is executed
at the block start or at the block end (or also at the start and end).
The offset handling type is also set: If an offset is programmed (e.g. D3) in the NC block, which
is to be split, then it can be set as to whether the offset selection is taken into account or is
transferred as parameter to the replacement cycle.

Transfer variables of the T replacement cycle

$C_T T number of the tool (numerical)

$C_T_Prog Bool variable that shows whether a T word is available in $C_T
$C_TS Tool identifier (string)
$C_TS_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an identifier is available in $C_TS
$C_TE Address extension of the T word
$C_TCA Bool variable that indicates whether the TCA replacement is active
$C_DUPLO_PROG Bool variable that indicates if the Duplo number for the TCA replace‐
ment has been programmed
$C_DUPLO For $C_DUPLO_PROG == TRUE, contains the value of the program‐
med duplo number
$C_THNO_PROG Bool variable that indicates if the tool holder / spindle number for the
TCA replacement has been programmed
$C_THNO For $C_THNO_PROG == TRUE, contains the value of the program‐
med tool holder / spindle number
$C_D Programmed D no.
$C_D_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D
$C_DL Programmed additive/setup offset
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in
$C_DL
$C_MTL_PROG Bool variable that shows whether a multitool location is available in
$C_MTL (multitool * T=location)
$C_MTL Programmed multitool position (for T=location)
Example of a T replacement cycle
;T replacement cycle
;
;Machine data to be set
;$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME="T_cycle"

Tool management
406 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

;$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME="T_cycle"
;
PROC T_SUB_PROG DISPLOF SBLOF
;
def string[32] Ident
def int T_No,Spi_No,T_prep,T_Spi,TH_No
;
;
;---------------------------------------------------
;--- T command output ---
;---------------------------------------------------
if(($C_T_PROG==1)or($C_TS_PROG==1)or($C_TCA==1))
if $C_T_PROG==1 ;T=numeric
if $C_T==0
if $C_T>=1
T[$C_TE]=0
else
T0
endif
else
if $C_TE>=1
if $C_MTL_Prog==true ;multitool T=location
MTL=$C_MTL T[$C_TE]=$C_T
else
T[$C_TE]=$C_T
endif
else
if $C_MTL_Prog==true
MTL=$C_MTL T=$C_T
else
T=$C_T
endif
endif
endif
endif
;
if $C_TS_PROG==1 ;T=string
if $C_TCA==1
if $C_DUPLO_PROG==1
if $C_THNO_PROG>=1
TCA($C_TS, $C_DUPLO, $C_THNO)
else
TCA($C_TS, $C_DUPLO)
endif
else
if $C_THNO_PROG>=1
TCA($C_TS, $C_THNO)
else
TCA($C_TS)
endif
endif
else

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 407
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

if $C_TE>=1
T[$C_TE]=$C_TS
else
T=$C_TS
endif
endif
endif
endif
;
;----------------------------------------------------
;Continuation of the T preparation (machine functions)
;----------------------------------------------------
;
;----------------------------------------------------
;----Tool offset----
;----------------------------------------------------
if (($MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE B_and 'B0')=='B0')
if $C_D_Prog==true
D=$C_D
endif
if $C_DL_Prog==true
DL=$C_DL
endif
endif
;
msg("")
M17
In the cycle, actions can now be easily executed to prepare the tool, scan the gripper, position
the magazine data transfer to the PLC, start auxiliary channels, etc.

Note
The TCI NC command cannot be replaced!

Transfer variables of the D replacement cycle

$C_D Programmed D no.

$C_D_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D
$C_DL Programmed additive/setup offset
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL

Transfer variables of the M replacement cycle

$C_T T number of the tool (numerical)

$C_T_Prog Bool variable that shows whether a T word is available in $C_T
$C_TS Tool identifier (string)
$C_TS_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an identifier is available in $C_TS

Tool management
408 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

$C_TE Address extension of the T word

$C_D Programmed D no.
$C_D_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D
$C_DL Programmed additive/setup offset
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL
$C_ME Address extension of the M word
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL
$C_M_PROG TRUE if M function was programmed for tool change
$C_M Value of substituted address M (integer)
There are two different cases:
1. The substitution subprogram for the tool change configured with
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR was called. $C_M then contains the value
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE [$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR].
2. In the case of a tool change with M code, only one substitution subprogram was configured
for the T and/or D/DL addresses. If the M code for the tool change is programmed together
with one of the addresses to be substituted, the value of $MN_TOOL_CHANGE_M_MODE
is transferred to the replacement program in $C_M.
If parameters are to be transferred to the M replacement cycle, then this must be set using
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR = 1
The default setting is "0", i.e. no parameters are transferred.
The parameter transfer refers exclusively to values, which are programmed in this NC block,
i.e. in that block where block splitting is performed.
This application is of interest if Tx M06 is always programmed in an NC block. This means that
the T selection, change as well as offset selection and deselection can be included in just one
single cycle.

Note
Only one function replacement is possible for each NC block.
If, for example, ...T="Mill_20mm" and M06 are programmed in the block, and a replacement
cycle applies to both, then this is rejected with an alarm.

Note
Parameters $C_T_PROG, $C_TS_PROG, $C_D_PROG and $C_DL_PROG act as trigger. If
these parameters have the value "TRUE" - but only then - the T no. D no. ... is valid.

Note
More detailed information on replacing NC language commands can be found in the "Basic
Functions Function Manual".

7.4.15.2 Replacement of the TCA command

With the TCA command, it is possible to select a tool by specifying the duplo number.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 409
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Substitution of the command is possible, a description of this can be found in Section "Function
replacement (Page 405)".
Up until then, it is only possible to substitute using the procedures predefined using the general
replacement function MD10712 $MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB.
In order to use the same replacement subprogram for the TCA and T replacement, the following
replacement is inserted for the TCA command – analogous to the T function:
With MD15710 $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME, the replacement of the TCA command can be
activated by specifying a program name. The parameters of the TCA command are transferred
to the replacement subprogram in the following system variables:

$C_TS Tool identifier (as in the existing T replacement)

$C_DUPLO Duplo number
$C_THNO Tool holder / spindle number
In addition, there are system variables, which can be used to query whether the substitution of
the TCA command is active and which parameters have actually been programmed:

$C_TCA TRUE: Replacement of the TCA command is active

$C_TS_PROG TRUE: $C_TS contains the programmed tool identifier
$C_DUPLO_PROG TRUE: $C_DUPLO contains the programmed duplo number
$C_THNO_PROG TRUE: $C_THNO contains the programmed tool holder / spindle num‐
ber
Behavior regarding other replacements:
In the TCA replacement subprogram, tool programming replacement is not carried out. All other
replacements are carried out. Conversely, no TCA replacement is carried out in a replacement
subprogram for tool programming.
If the TCA command is programmed when the tool management or tool monitoring is not active,
then the part program processing is interrupted with Alarm 6431 "Tool management or tool
monitoring not active" (this is the existing behavior). If TCA replacement is configured, then in
this case, part program processing is also aborted with alarm 6431.
Note regarding MD10712 $MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB:
If the TCA command is renamed, e.g. to "_TCA", by appropriately configuring MD10712, then
the TCA replacement is realized with the interpretation of the "_TCA" command.
Example with a common replacement cycle for T and TCA replacement:
Machine data:
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME = "T_SUB_PROG"
$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME = "T_SUB_PROG"
Replacement subprogram for T and TCA replacement:
N1000 PROC T_SUB_PROG DISPLOF SBLOF
;common part
...
;different tool selection:
N2000 IF ($C_TCA == 1)
N2010 ;TCA replacement active
N2020 IF ($C_DUPLO_PROG == 1) AND ( $C_THNO_PROG == 1)

Tool management
410 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N2030 TCA( $C_TS, $C_DUPLO, $C_THNO )

N2040 ELSE
N2050 IF ( $C_DUPLO_PROG == 1) AND
( $C_THNO_PROG == 0)
N2060 TCA( $C_TS, $C_DUPLO)
N2070 ELSE
N2080 IF ( $C_DUPLO_PROG == 0) AND
( $C_THNO_PROG == 1)
N2090 TCA( $C_TS, ,$C_THNO)
N2100 ELSE
N2110 TCA( $C_TS)
N2120 ENDIF
N2130 ENDIF
N2140 ENDIF
N2150 ELSE
N2160 IF ( $C_T_PROG == 1) OR ( $C_TS_PROG == 1)
N2170 ;T replacement active
N2180 IF ( $C_T_PROG == 1)
N2190 T[ $C_TE ] = $C_T
N2200 ELSE
N2210 T[ $C_TE ] = $C_TS
N2220 ENDIF
N2230 ENDIF
N2240 ENDIF
...
M17

See also
TCA - tool selection/tool change irrespective of tool status (Page 268)

7.4.16 Block search

Block search with calculation

On a block search, selection on reset or start, the tool is selected during preprocessing. In this
case the PLC is not allowed to reject the tool (see bit 4 in MD20310). Otherwise, an alarm is
output. The block search must then be repeated. Use of the active tool can only be prevented
from an external source (HMI, PLC).
In block search with calculation the program is generally put into a state where the selected
block can be executed. With respect to the tool management function, this means that the tool
that should be located in the spindle when the machining block is reached must now be loaded
to it.
If another tool is located in the spindle a "replace" command is initiated. In such a case, the
signals "Prepare change" (DB72.DBX(n+0).2 and "Execute change" (DB72.DBX(n+0).1 are
present at the same time since the auxiliary functions are output together.
Example: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 411
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Tool "Drill1" is loaded in the spindle. The new search target has T = "Drilling machine 2" as the
momentary tool programming.
NC initiates the tool change. PLC must not reject.

Note
Tool rejection by PLC: If bit 4 of MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is set, then the
PLC usually has the possibility to again request preparation for a tool change, yet this time with
different parameters, i.e. to reject the tool. This is not possible during block search. In this case,
the machine data setting is ignored.

Note
Because the tool change is frequently performed using cycles, a "replace command" generated
by the block search must be executed in an asynchronous subprogram (ASUP). Modal and
static motion-synchronization action is retained at the beginning of ASUP and is also effective
in the asynchronous subprogram. If the asynchronous subprogram is not continued with
Repos, the modified modal and static motion-synchronous actions in the main run remain
operative.
Alternatively, execution of the NC part program can be stopped by halting feed and read-in, and
a fault message "Wrong tool in spindle after the block search" can be generated.

Tool cannot be used

Alarm 22068 is output if the tool to be loaded at the search target cannot be used (it is not
available, disabled, ...), the program must be canceled using a reset.
In order that the block search is not canceled if the tool involved at the search target is not the
tool to be loaded, then an attempt is made to also permit any tool (and therefore also a disabled
or an unloaded tool) – assuming that it only has the "enabled" state and therefore has a defined
geometry. This is realized before the alarm is generated.
If an additional tool change is programmed, the tool that is underway that cannot be used is not
noticed and does not stop the operation. However, if an attempt is made to precisely load this
disabled/unloaded/.. Tool at the end of the block search after the first START, then this is
noticed in the NC and acknowledged with alarm 22067; this then no longer allows the program
to be continued. The PLC can permit a disabled tool to be selected (i.e. by setting the interface
signal "Tool disabled ineffective" in the channel DB). However, in a specific case, this must be
realized during the block search, i.e. before the NC outputs Alarm 22068 or 22067. If, for a block
search, tool programming is initiated in the NC, and there is neither a tool that can be used, nor
a disabled, unloaded or soon to be unloaded tool, then alarm 22068 is output, which then
terminates the block search.

Example of a block search with block splitting effect

N100 T="Tool1" M06 D1
N110 SETMTH(1) ;Tool holder1 becomes master tool holder
N120 T="ToolZ2" M06 D2 ;Target block: is not yet interpreted
N1000 IF($P_PROG_EVENT ==5) ;ASUP is started

Tool management
412 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

.............
N1020 SETMTH(2) ;Tool holder 2 becomes master tool holder
.............
N1040 ENDIF
N1099 REPOSA
N110 SETMTH(1) ;The interrupted main program is continued/started
after the last executable block before the search
target.
;Tool holder 1 becomes master tool holder again.

7.4.17 Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management

The block search has already been described. Here we shall deal with the specific features in
conjunction with active tool management.
The block search establishes the start position of the target block. Auxiliary functions
programmed in the block search are collected and output in action blocks at the end of the block
search.
For now this also applies to the T command and M06. This depends on the setting in machine
data 20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE
0 = Neither T preparation nor M06 are output.
1 = T preparation and M06 are collected and output (and must be acknowledged to end the
block search). Default setting.
The following example shows how to proceed with block search.
Configuration: Milling machine, one spindle
Settings:
$MC_Tool_Change_Mode=1, i.e. change with M06

Block search
Tool change should be subsequently executed:
Situation:
T="Face_80mm" is located in the spindle
Block search to N98 (block search with contour calculation)
Target:
In order to continue in the program:
a. Tool "1537" must be loaded
b. Tool "Drill_6mm" must be prepared

...
N10 T="1231" ;T no. 1
...

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 413
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N20 M06
...
N30 T="Face_80mm" ;T no. 2
...
N70 M06
...
N80 T="1537" ;T no. 3
N90 M06
...
N95 T="Drill_6mm" ;T no. 4
...
N98

Settings:
$MC_Tool_Change_Mode=1
$MC_Collect_Tool_Change=0
$MN_Search_Run_Mode bit 1=1
$MC_Collect_Tool_Change=0 means: No output of T and M06 after block search.
Procedure:
● Negative acknowledgement is not required in the PLC.
● The program "Prog_Event.SPF" is started with the last action block.
The change and preparation must be subsequently carried out.
Note
In order to start the Prog_Event after a block search, settings are required in the machine
data.

Prog_Event.SPF
…
def int T_Vor, T_Spi, T_active
…
GETEXET(T_active) The spindle tool is read from NC view (blocks N80 and N90)
_active=3
GETSELT(T_Vor) T preparation is read from block N95 T_Vor=4
T_Spi=$TC_MAPP6[9998,1] The actual spindle tool is read T_Spi=2
…
;Load correct tool
if ((T_Spi< >T_active)and(T_active>0))
T=$TC_TP2[T_active] Preparation of tool "1537"
L6 ;change cycle Load tool "1537"
Endif
…

Tool management
414 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

if T_prep< >T_active
if T_prep>0
T=$TC_TP2[T_prep] Preparation of tool "Drill_6mm" from block N95
Endif
If t_prep==0
T0
Endif
Endif

Note
If a change is output by the action blocks (in example block N80 and N90), it is always a
command "5", i.e. "Prepare change" and "Perform change" are pending in DB72 at the same
time.
If the correct tool is already placed in the spindle (i.e. in the block search example at block N70
and $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE=1 is set), the T preparation is issued (from block N30).
The setting for bit 12=0/1 in the MD $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK machine data is not
evaluated.
Difference between the commands GETEXET and $P_TOOLNO:
GETEXET
Reads the T no. of the spindle tool from the NC perspective.
Independent of the offset selection.
This has been specifically developed for the block search application.
$P_TOOLNO
Reads the T no. of the active tool.
This does not refer to the "active status" of the tool which is set via the T preparation, instead
it refers to the tool whose offset is being calculated. This view of the tools means that a tool
doesn't become an active tool until the offset is selected - which is what is read with
$P_TOOLNO. This means dependency on MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT,

Example:

...
N100 T="Countersink" ;T No. 5
N110 M06
N108 G90 G00 D1 X...
...
N200 T="Drill" ;T No. 32
N210 M06
N212 G90 G00 D1 X...

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 415
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Block search to block N200

1. Setting $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=-2
GETEXET = 5
$P_TOOLNO = 5
2. $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=1
GETEXET = 5
$P_TOOLNO = 5
Block search to block N212
1. Setting $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=-2
GETEXET = 32
$P_TOOLNO = 5
2. $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=1
GETEXET = 32
$P_TOOLNO = 32

7.4.18 System variables for state before block search

7.4.18.1 Description of the variables

The function is available with TMMO and TMMG.
To round off the "block search" function, the active tool offset must be available in an ASUP
before the block search or test mode when the target block of the block search is reached. In
this ASUP, the OEM can implement the steps necessary to place the tools in the state required
in the target block. The following system variables that describe the state in the reset state
before the block search are available for this functionality:

● $P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH Tool holder to which the offset refers. This is normally

the master tool holder.
● $P_D_BEFORE_SSL Active offset in the reset state
● $P_DL_BEFORE_SSL Active total and setup offset in the reset state
These system variables are available in the "without magazine management" and the "with
magazine management" versions.
The selected and loaded tools on the individual tool holders before the block search are
available with the extension of the NC commands GETSELT - Read the selected T number
(Page 237) and GETEXET - Reading of the loaded T number (Page 240).
In the "with magazine management" version, the essential information is already available
through the assignment of the tool holders or spindles in the buffer magazine, because the
magazine location assignment is not changed by the block search. However:
● The master tool holder
● The selected tool offset "D" and
● The selected insert offset "DL"
that were valid before the block search, are not available.

Tool management
416 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

In the "without magazine management" version, there is no information about the state before
the block search. As in this case the NC does not have any data about the location of the tools,
it can only draw conclusions about the tool location from the last instructions before the block
search.
The state before the block search is the reset state. This means:
● The settings made during the NC reset become the values of the system variables.
● With an NC reset, the master tool holder set during the NC reset determines the active tool
and thus the active offset.
● Therefore the settings from the init block are not included in the system variables at the start
of the block search.
After reaching the block search target, the system variables take on the values of the
corresponding system variables from the NC program, if a new value is set.
Overview of the available system variables for the reconstruction of the selected offset in a
ProgEvent program after a block search:

System variable for the state System variable for the state
before the block search during and after the block search
Without magazine management With magazine management
$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH $P_MTHNUM $P_MTHNUM
GETSELT(tNo,Th,"S") $P_TOOLP GETSELT(tNo,Th)
GETSELT(tNo,Th)
GETEXET(tNo,Th,"S") $P_TOOLNO $P_TOOLNO
GETEXET(tNo,Th) GETEXET(tNo,Th)
$P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH $P_TOOL $P_TOOL
$P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH $P_DLNO $P_DLNO

tNo: Tool number, Th: Tool holder

7.4.18.2 Example
The following settings are active:
● The tool change is performed with M6.
● Cutting edge default=-2
In the reset state, the following state is reached for the tool offsets:
● Master tool holder = 3
● Active T number on master tool holder = 5
● Active D offset = 2
● Programmed T number on master tool holder from last NC program = 6
This results in:
$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH =3
GETSELT(tNo1, 3) with tNo1=6
GETEXET(tNo2, 3) with tNo2=5

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 417
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

$P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH = 2
$P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH = 0 (The setup offset is not considered further and behaves in the
same way as the D offset selection.)
Sequence:
● The following NC program is to be processed in the block search up to block N220
● The old D offset is selected again in a ProgEvent ASUP in order to safely remove the tool
from the tool holder taking the old D offset values into account and
● The new tool is activated with the D offset in the target block
No new tool has been loaded on tool holder 3 up to the target block.
.....
N100 SETMTH(2)
N110 T8
N120 M6
N130 D3
N200 T9
N210 SETMTH(1)
N220 X10 G0
The meaning of the abbreviations used in the overview is as follows:
MTh: Value of master tool holder ($P_MTHNUM)
SelT(th): Return value of GETSELT for the tool holder "th"
ExeT(th): Return value of GETEXET for the tool holder "th"
DNo: Value of $P_TOOL
The ending S means the value of the corresponding variable "_BEFORE_SEARCH" or with the
optional third parameter "S".

MTh MThS SelT(2) SelTS(2 ExeT(2) Ex‐ SelT(3) SelTS(3 ExeT(3) Ex‐ DNo DNoS
) eTS(2) ) eTS(3)
Before N100
* 3 * * * * * 6 * 5 * 2
After N110 T8
2 3 8 * * * * 6 * 5 * 2
N120 T8
2 3 8 * 8 * * 6 * 5 * 2
N130 D3
2 3 8 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
N200 T9
2 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
N210 SETMTH
1 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2

Tool management
418 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

MTh MThS SelT(2) SelTS(2 ExeT(2) Ex‐ SelT(3) SelTS(3 ExeT(3) Ex‐ DNo DNoS
) eTS(2) ) eTS(3)
N220 X10 G0
1 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2

* Means that the value for this example is irrelevant or indeterminate.

The ProgEvent program has the following rough structure:
N1000 DEF INT TNO1, TNO2
N1010 DEF INT MTH_SAVE, D_NO_SAVE, SELTNO_SAVE, EXETNO_SAVE
N1020 DEF INT SELTNO1_SAVE, EXETNO1_SAVE, TH_OF_D_SAVE
; Save the currently reached state at the end of the block search
N1100 MTH_SAVE = $P_MTHNUM D_NO_SAVE=$P_TOOL TH_OF_D_SAVE =
$P_TH_OF_D
N1110 GETSELT( SELTNO_SAVE, $P_TH_OF_D)
N1120 GETEXET( EXETNO_SAVE, $P_TH_OF_D)
; Collect data on the state before the block search
N1150 GETSELT(TNO1,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH, "S")
N1160 GETEXET(TNO2,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH, "S")
N1170 GETSELT(SELTNO1_SAVE,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH)
N1180 GETEXET(EXETNO1_SAVE,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH)
; Select old offset again.
N1200 SETMTH($P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH)
N1210 T=TNO2
N1220 IF (EXETNO1_SAVE == TNO2)
; Old tool is still on the tool holder
N1230 M6 M=spec; additional information that M6 does not require a
tool change by PLC
N1240 D=$P_D_NO_BEFORE_SEARCH
N1250 X=x_safe Y=y_safe Z=z_safe G0 N1260 ELSE
....
N1300 ENDIF
; Load desired tool in accordance with target block
N1400 SETMTH(TH_OF_D_SAVE)
N1500 T=EXETNO_SAVE
N1510 M6
N1520 D=D_NO_SAVE
; Restore master tool holder in accordance with target block

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 419
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N1600 SETMTH(MTH_SAVE)
REPOS

MTh MThS SelT(2) SelTS(2 ExeT(2) Ex‐ SelT(3) SelTS(3 ExeT(3) Ex‐ DNo DNoS
) eTS(2) ) eTS(3)
Before N1200:
1 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
After N1200:
3 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
N1210:
3 3 9 * 8 * 5 5 * 5 3 2
N1230:
3 3 9 * 8 * 5 5 5 5 3 2
N1240:
3 3 9 * 8 * * 5 5 5 2 2
N1400:
2 2 9 * 8 * 5 5 5 5 2 2
N1500:
2 2 8 8 8 * 5 5 5 5 2 2
N1510:
2 2 9 9 8 8 5 5 5 5 2 2
N1520 D=D_NO_SAVE(=3)
2 2 9 9 8 8 5 5 5 5 3 3
N1600 SETMTH(MTH_SAVE)(=1)
1 1 9 9 8 8 5 5 5 5 3 3

* Means that the value for this example is irrelevant or indeterminate.

Note
It is the responsibility of the NC programmer to check whether the specified tool still exists.

7.4.19 Program test

Overview
The "program test" function can be used to traverse a program without axis motion.
All additional data is determined and taken into account. For tool management, this means that
the tools are searched and the appropriate values transferred to the PLC interface when the
tool is called.
The PLC must acknowledge these tasks without moving the magazine or changing a tool.
Special measures are therefore required on the PLC.

Tool management
420 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The tool management acts in exactly the same way as it would when a program is running. In
the case of tools without fixed location codes and acknowledgement, this can result in the PLC
data indicating different tool locations to the actual mechanical locations in the magazine. This
can be prevented by configuring FC 8 such that a fixed location is simulated for the duration of
the program test rather than the calculated empty location applied as a parameter.
The old location of the tool is stored in the function block which handles program testing and
returned again to this location in the software (data settings). Any existing spindle tool is also
returned to the spindle in the software at the end of the program test or on a reset. This ensures
that the magazine assignments in the software match the mechanical assignments after
program testing.
For testing programs involving manual tools, see Section "Manual tools (adding tools during
machining) (Page 468)".

Example of how to adapt the PLC in test mode

The following program example can be used as a template for adapting the PLC to the program
test mode. Only the first channel and a spindle are supported as tool change locations.
The tool is always changed directly into the spindle. The spindle is used as the change position
(DB72). Access to the NC-PLC interface (DB21, DB72) is symbolic. The standard UDTs (UDT
21, 72) are included for this purpose. These are part of the basic program and must be copied
to the project and subsequently compiled.
The following must be entered in the symbol table:

Symbol Address Data type Comment

Channel 1 DB21 UDT 21
SpChPos DB72 UDT 72
TC_VAR DB119 DB119 For testing the tool
change

All necessary variables are stored in the instance data block.

If program test mode is deselected, no action occurs. The target positions suggested by tool
management are confirmed by the PLC.
If program test mode is selected, the target positions are defined by the PLC. These correspond
to the source positions of the respective tools. The target position is only confirmed and saved
by tool management on the first tool change. It is thus possible to undo the first tool change after
program test mode is selected.
Two asynchronous transfers are required for this purpose. The first one returns any tool present
in the spindle to the magazine. The second asynchronous transfer is intended to return a tool
which was loaded in the spindle before program test mode back into the spindle.

Program test - extended

A setting can be selected with the machine data $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 20
such that the NC cannot issue any tool-changing commands to the PLC in the status "Program
test active". The NC outputs its own acknowledgement so that no further data-related tool
motion exists.
The default setting is that the Tool_change command is not output.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 421
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The following applies for the tool used during program test mode:
The tool status "active" can still be set and the tool status "was in use" is set. This does not have
any further detrimental effects since tool monitoring is not normally active in the test mode.
With bit 20, value 1, the generated commands are output to the PLC. Tool / magazine data can
be changed in the NC depending on the type of acknowledgement by the PLC. If the
acknowledgement parameters for the "target magazine" are set to the values of the "source
magazine", then the tool is not moved and the data therefore not altered in the NC.
Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in the test mode can take the status "active".

Note
It may not be derived – to the extent the setting "No tool change commands to PLC" is selected
– that the tool on the spindle or the tool holder during "Program test active" is the active tool.
The block search "SERUPRO" search (cross-channel block search) uses the program test.

7.4.20 Several spindles in one channel or TO unit

When using tool management and more than one spindle please note the following:

2 spindles in one channel

Only one tool offset can be active per channel. Spindle 1 defined as master spindle with
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1. Spindle 2 is a secondary spindle.

The master spindle is spindle no. 1 in each case.

2 channels each of which access the same TO memory have been set in the machine data. One
spindle is assigned to each channel. Two spindles are assigned to one magazine in the
magazine configuration.
The master spindle is spindle no. 1 for both channels. To be able to change a tool in spindle No.
2 as well, before the tool change in the 2nd channel, the 2nd spindle must be defined as master
spindle. In the TM system, the spindle number is sent to the PLC. This number is determined
from the extended address of T. If this is not programmed, the NC assigns the master spindle
number of the channel in which the program is running.

Each channel has its own master spindle

2 channels each of which access the same TO memory have been set in the machine data. One
spindle is assigned to each channel.
Two spindles are assigned to one magazine in the magazine configuration.
In each channel the assigned spindle is defined as the master spindle. Tool change is possible
without making any additional definitions in the program.

Tool management
422 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.21 Decoupling the tool management from the spindle number

The program must specify the location (spindle number on milling machines) at which the tool
is to be changed before the tool management can insert a tool.
Machine data MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER can be set to
determine whether a tool holder number can be assigned to define the location of the tool to be
loaded instead of a spindle number. Thus the appropriate designation (spindle number or tool
holder number) can be used in the event of use.
The following figures show which variable definitions you require for the following variants:
● Working with two spindles in one channel and one TO unit (standard functionality)
● Working with two spindles in one channel (standard functionality)
● Working with two tool holders in two channels (one TO unit)
● Working with two tool holders in one channel

Working with spindle numbers

&KDQQHO   &KDQQHO
 
7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

 

0DJD]LQ 
 7&B0$3>@ 

6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ   6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ

LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH
 
7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU
0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1'  0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1' 
 

 
Figure 7-25 Two spindles in two channels and one TO unit

Two channels operating with the data of one TO unit (with one magazine). One spindle is
defined in each channel.
Spindle 1 in channel 1 has been declared the master spindle with MD
SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND=1. Spindle 2 on channel 2 is the master spindle.
Both spindles must be assigned different numbers because the assignment of the spindle to the
second internal magazine (buffer magazine) must be unique.
This assignment is realized by $TC_MPP1 (spindle location) and by $TC_MPP5 (spindle
number).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 423
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ
LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU
0DVWHUVSLQGOHPDFKLQHD[LV$;  
 
7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

 

0DJD]LQ 
 7&B0$3>@ 

0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1'    6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ

LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH
0$B63,1'B$66,*1B72B0$&+$;>$;@ 
0$B63,1'B$66,*1B72B0$&+$;>$;@    7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU
6HFRQGDU\VSLQGOHPDFKLQHD[LV$;
 

 
Figure 7-26 Two spindles in one channel

Two spindles of a single channel are operating with one magazine.

Spindle 1 was defined as master spindle with SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1.
Spindle 2 is not a master spindle (secondary spindle).

Example of a part program (for a channel with two spindles)

(Requirement: CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=1; i.e. D1 is implicitly active with the tool change
M06):

T="Miller" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master spindle is addressed,
i.e. spindle 1 = value of machine data $MC_SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND.
;The tool change takes place in spindle 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller" tool.
...
T2="Drill" M2=6 ;Address extension for the secondary spindle has been programmed.
The tool change takes place in the PLC at the tool management inter‐
face for spindle 2.
;The path is still corrected with the offsets of the "Miller" tool
...
SETMS(2) ;Declares spindle no. 2 as master spindle
T="Miller_2" M06 ;No address extension programmed → the master spindle is addressed
(spindle 2).
;The tool change takes place in spindle 2.
;The path is now corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_2" tool
...

Tool management
424 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

T1="Drill_1" M1=6 ;Address extension for the current secondary spindle has been pro‐
grammed.
;The tool change takes place in spindle 1.
;The path is still corrected with values from tool T="Miller_2".
...
SETMS ;Declares the spindle defined by $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
as master spindle
T="Miller_3" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master spindle is addressed
(spindle 1).
;Value of machine data $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND). Tool
change takes place in spindle 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_3" tool.

Further example (starting conditions as above):

N10 SETMS ;Declare spindle no. 1 as master spindle

N20 T2=3
...
N50 M2=6 ;Address extension for the secondary spindle has been programmed. Tool
change takes place on the spindle.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of "Miller_3"
...
N70 D3 ;The path is corrected with the offsets of the active tool (that was activated
before block N10 - here in the example, "Miller_3")
N80 SETMS(2) ;Declare spindle no. 2 as master spindle
T3
M06
N90 D2 ;The path is corrected with the offset of tool "T3".

Note
SETMS does not change the active tool. The new master spindle definition cannot be
referenced until the subsequently programmed tool change.
The following applies: Offset selection is active for the last tool loaded onto a master spindle.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 425
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Working with tool holder numbers

&KDQQHO   &KDQQHO
 
7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

 

0DJD]LQH 
 7&B0$3>@ 

7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ   7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ

LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ   7&B033>@  PDFKLQLQJORFDWLRQ

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQXPEHU
722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5  722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5 

 

 
Figure 7-27 Two channels each with one tool holder and one TO unit

(The zero position is located at the change position of the tool holder 1).
Two channels operating with the data of one TO unit (with one magazine). Tool change no
longer requires that a spindle number be specified. The address extensions of T and M now
refer to the value of machine data MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
Instead of "spindle location" the general term "tool holder" (tool machining location) is used
(spindle is standard). If an address extension is not programmed, the address extension is
supplemented by the value of MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0
The previous function remains active (default).
A value greater than zero activates the new function.
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0
If a tool change is programmed to a buffer location of the type "Tool holder" with $TC_MPP5 =
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER, then the offset data defined for this tool corrects the
path.

722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5   
 
7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

 

0DJD]LQ 
 7&B0$3>@ 

7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ   7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ

LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH

7&B033>@  PDFKLQLQJORFDWLRQ   7&B033>@  PDFKLQLQJORFDWLRQ

7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQXPEHU 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQXPEHU
PDVWHUWRROKROGHU VHFRQGDU\WRROKROGHU
 

 
Figure 7-28 One channel with two tool holders

Tool management
426 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

(The zero position is located at the change position of the tool holder 1).
Two tool holders in a channel are operating with one magazine. Tool holder 1 has been
declared the master using TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 1. Tool holder 2 is thus
the secondary tool holder.

Programming example:
The language command SETMTH (tool holder number) is used to declare one or several tool
holders as the master tool holder.
The initial state after power on is defined using machine data
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER; the behavior at NC start and reset using the
machine data $MC_START_MODE_MASK and $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
SETMTH (tool holder number),

T="Miller" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master tool holder is addressed
(tool holder 1 - value of machine data $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER).
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller" tool.
...
T2="Drill" M2=6 ;Address extension for the secondary tool holder has been programmed.
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 2.
;The path is not corrected
...
SETMTH(2) ;Declares tool holder 2 as the master tool holder
T="Miller_2" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master tool holder is addressed
(tool holder 2).
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 2.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_3" tool.
...
T1="Drill_1" M1=6 ;Address extension for the secondary tool holder has been programmed.
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
;The path is not corrected!
SETMTH ;Declares the tool holder specified in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER as the master tool holder
T="Miller_3" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master tool holder is addressed
(tool holder 1 - value of machine data $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER).
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_3" tool

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 427
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Note
SETMTH does not change the active tool. The new master tool holder definition cannot be
referenced until the subsequently programmed tool change.
The following applies: Offset selection is active for the last tool changed into the active tool
holder.

7.4.22 Several spindles/toolholders

Overview
Tool management can work in one channel with more than one tool holder. If several channels
of one TO unit are supplied with data, then make sure that the tool holder numbers have
different (= unique) numbers in the magazine configuration ($TC_MPP5 of buffer locations of
the type ($TC_MPP1) "Spindle"). The spindle numbers of the channels must then be unique as
well (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER=0).

Example
This example is to show how to differentiate between active tools and programmed tools.
Spindles 1...4 are defined in channel 1; analog to this, spindle locations 1...4 in magazine
configuration 4.

SETMS (2)
T12 ;12 is a programmed tool
M06 D3 ;12 is an active tool, 3 is an active cutting edge
SETMS (4)
T22 ;12 remains an active tool, 22 becomes the programmed tool with
respect to spindle=4
T3=33 M3=6 ;T33 is loaded onto the secondary tool holder 3. The tool (T33)
is not active.
SETMS (1) ;Tool holder=1 becomes master spindle, T12 remains active, T22
remains programmed
D5 ;D5=active cutting edge; refers to the active tool, i.e. T12
M00

The following situation is given:

Tool holder number T number D number

1 master spindle - -
2 12 active 5 active
3 33 -
4 22 programmed -

Tool management
428 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.23 Several magazines in one channel or one TO unit

Address extension
The NC address T can be programmed with an address extension. The tool management
function interprets the programmed address extension as a spindle number or toolholder
number. The NC address T without programmed address extension then refers to the main
spindle (master spindle).

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ

7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR

7RROKROGHU 7RROKROGHU

'LVWDQFHUHODWLRQVKLS 'LVWDQFHUHODWLRQVKLS

 
   
0DJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH
   
 

3DUWSURJUDP

7 0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHUORFDWLRQ
7 0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHUORFDWLRQ
7 
7 

Figure 7-29 T="location" and several magazines in the same channel

The diagram shows the procedure for using more than one magazine in a channel (when
programming with T="location" this is usually a turret).

Note
The tool offset is only calculated for the toolholder that is assigned at that point in time to the
master spindle or the master toolholder.

7.4.24 Reset and start mode

Fundamentals
The tool offset selection/deselection can be set in the machine data for program end or reset
as well as for NC Start.
It is also possible to permanently preset the change for a specific tool, e.g. at NC Start.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 429
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The settings are made in the following machine data:

● MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
● MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK
● MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
● MD20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
The function and interaction of the machine data are displayed in the following diagram.

&KDQQHOVSHFLILFPDFKLQHGDWD
0&B722/B0$1$*(0(17B0$6.ELW 

0'0&B5(6(7B02'(B0$6.


%LW  0'0&B722/B5(6(7B1$0(


 0'0&B&877,1*B('*(B5(6(7B9$/8(


%LW  0'0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1'



%LW  0'0&B722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5

0'0&B67$57B02'(B0$6.



,IWRROGLVDEOHGRQ
%LW  VSLQGOH 0'0&B722/B&+$1*(B(5525B02'(

%LW  0'0&B722/B5(6(7B1$0(


 0'0&B&877,1*B('*(B5(6(7B9$/8(


)LJ  0'0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1'



)LJ  0'0&B722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5

Figure 7-30 Reset and start mode

Tool management
430 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK

Bit Val Meaning

ue
0 0 The offset remains unchanged, i.e. after end of part program and reset, the last programmed
offset remains active (behavior as with bit 0=1 and 6=1).
1 Reset mode, i.e. evaluation of bits 4 ... 11
2 1 Reset behavior (tool offset) with tool management not active. No effect if tool management
active
6 0 Reset behavior corresponds to MD $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME and $MC_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
1 Current setting for active tool length compensation is retained beyond reset/end of part pro‐
gram.
For active tool management, the tool that is located in the master spindle (general: master tool
holder) is selected.
If the tool on the spindle is disabled (but released), this state is ignored, there is no selection
of a sister tool! (Replacement tool with Start_INIT only).
Activation takes place on the master spindle defined in MD $MC_SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND, or on the master tool holder defined in $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER.
The tool in the last programmed master spindle or master tool holder can also be active. Bit
16 or 17 is used for this purpose.

Reset behavior for spindles

Bit Val Meaning

ue
16 0 The master spindle is the spindle defined in MD $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.
The settings in the machine data below refer to this data:
● $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
● $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● $MC_START_MODE_MASK
● $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
1 The spindle last programmed with SETMS(x) remains the master spindle after end of pro‐
gram and reset, regardless of the machine data setting.
This means that if bits 0/6=1, the offset remains active for the tool which is placed in the
spindle.
Power on behavior
The machine data setting is active after power on.
This means the offset for the tool which is placed in the spindles specified in MD
$TC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND becomes active; the offset value is that of the smallest
available D no. for this tool.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 431
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Reset behavior for tool holder

Bit Val Meaning

ue
17 0 The master tool holder is the tool holder specified in MD $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER.
The settings in the machine data below refer to this data:
● $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
● $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● $MC_START_MODE_MASK
● $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
1 The tool holder last programmed with SETMTH(x) remains the master tool holder after end
of program and reset, regardless of the machine data setting.
This means that if bit 0=1 and bit 6=1, the offset remains active for the tool which is positioned
in this tool holder.
The machine data setting is active after power on.
This means the offset for the tool which is positioned in the tool holder specified in
$MC_TOOL_MANGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER becomes active; the offset value is that of the
smallest available D no. for this tool

MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE

Bit Val Meaning

ue
3 0 Change command for a replacement tool is output.
1 The status of the disabled spindle tool is ignored. (Exception: un-released tools). The tool
becomes active with the last programmed offset.
4 0 Change command for a replacement tool is output.
1 The spindle tool is set down - "T0" is output.

MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
Identifier of tool to be loaded
This tool is either loaded when end of program is reached or at reset or Power On if the
associated setting is made in MD $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, or with NC Start if the
respective setting was made in MD $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
If there are no entries here ($MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME="") this corresponds to "T0".

MD20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
D number of tool which is to be loaded via $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME.
This means the tool becomes active with the offset set here.
If no entries are made in this machine data, the behavior corresponds to "D0".

Tool management
432 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
Specifies whether a tool holder number or spindle number is to be specified to define the
location of the tool to be loaded.

MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
Definition of master spindle in channel. The number of the spindle is set.

MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Bit 14 is used to activate the reset and start behavior. If bit 14 is not set, the settings in machine
data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and $MC_START_MODE_MASK which are specific to tool
management have no meaning.

MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK

Bit Val Meaning

ue
6 0 The last programmed offset remains active.
If the tool on the spindle is disabled, bits 3 and 4 are additionally evaluated in
MD $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE.
1 Start behavior (tool and offset selection) according to MD $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME and
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE

Start behavior for spindles

Bit Val Meaning

ue
16 0 The offset that was last selected remains active.
It does not matter whether the offset was selected in the part program or via settings in MD
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
The offset for the tool placed in the master tool holder that was last programmed can also be
active (see $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK)
1 The tool holder specified in MD $MC_Tool_Management_Toolholder becomes active.
This means an offset selection refers specifically to this tool holder.

Start behavior for tool holder

Bit Val Meaning

ue
17 0 The offset that was last selected remains active.
It does not matter whether the offset was selected in the part program or via settings in MD
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
The offset for the tool placed in the master spindle that was last programmed can also be
active (see $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK).
1 The spindle defined in MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND becomes active.
This means an offset selection refers specifically to this spindle.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 433
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Note
A power on always triggers a reset ⇒ The settings in MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
are active after a power on.

Example 1:
In this example, the tool on the spindle is to remain active after end of program (M02/M30) and
reset.
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2
The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 14=1 for reset and start behavior to be active

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 0=1, for the tool offset to remain active
Bit 6=1
$MC_START_MODE_MASK Bit 6=0 for the tool offset to remain active

NC program: %MPFxxx1

N110 T="MILLER_10"
N115 M06 ;Tool "MILLER_10" is loaded
N120 G90 G00 D2 X... ;Offset D2 becomes active
…
N850 M30 ;Offset D2 remains active

At the next program start tool "MILLER_10" is active with offset D2.
NC program: %MPFxxx2

N10 G90 G00 Z100 ;This block is executed with offset D2

Example 2:
The spindle tool is to be removed at the end of program and reset ("automatic T0").
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2
● One spindle

Tool management
434 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.bit 14 = Reset and start behavior is activated

1
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.bit 0 = 1 and bit Reset behavior:
6=0 ● TOOL_RESET_NAME
● CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME="" Name of the tool that should be loaded at
change with reset. If no name is entered here,
this has the same meaning as T0
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE = 0 The above mentioned tool becomes active
with this offset ("0" ≙ D0)
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.bit 6=0 The tool offset remains active. In the example:
D0

Example 3:
In this example, a specific tool is to be loaded at NC start, e.g. a probe.
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2
● One spindle
The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 14=1 Reset and start behavior is activated

$MC_START_MODE_MASK Bit 6=1 Start behavior
● TOOL_RESET_NAME
● CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME="Probe_1" Name of the tool that was loaded with reset/
start.
In the example: "Probe_1"
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE=1 The above mentioned tool becomes active
with this offset, here D1
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 6=0 Is not relevant for this example

Example 4:
In this example, the tool on the master spindle that was last programmed is to remain active
following end of program (M30/M02) and reset.
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 435
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

● Two spindles
● $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTERSPIND=1
The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.bit 14=1 Reset and start behavior is activated

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.bit 0=1 and bit Leave the tool offset active
6=1
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.bit 16=1 The last programmed master spindle remains
active.
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.bit 6=0 The current offset remains active.
NC program

Program code Comment

N05 SETMS(1) ;Spindle becomes master spindle (is also set via MD)
N10 T="Tool1"
N15 M06 ;Change to spindle 1
...
N80 SETMS(2) ;Spindle 2 becomes master spindle
N85 T="Tool2"
N90 M06 ;Change to spindle 2
N95 G90 G00 D2 Z...
...
N230 M30 ;It is active: Tool2 with offset D2 on spindle 2

Note
Using MD20310, bit 12 = 1 and the described settings, for each reset a preparation and change
command is output to the PLC and must be acknowledged by the PLC. The automatic positive
acknowledgement can also be used here.

Note
If a change is triggered by reset mode at POWER ON, the NC is stationary with "No NC ready"
until an end acknowledgment has been received for this change.

Tool management
436 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7.4.25 Repeating a tool change with the same tool identifier

Overview
The behavior for repeated tool changes with identical tool identifier is set using two bits of MD
20310 $MC_TOOLMANAGEMENT_MASK.

Bit 11 = 1 The tool preparation command is also output, if it was already output for the
tool. This setting is only effective as long as the prepared tool is still not located
on the requesting spindle or tool holder.
Bit 12 = 1 The tool preparation command is also output if the tool is already located in the
spindle / tool holder, however it is only issued just one more time.
The default setting (bit 11 and bit 12=0) is selected so that the preparation command is not
executed if the tool is already located in the spindle / tool holder – or the same preparation was
programmed a multiple number of times.
Exception: Block search
Here the preparation command is always issued even if the tool is already positioned in the
spindle.

Repeating the T preparation before loading

Bit 11 = 0 Bit 11 = 1
N10 T="Tool1" Tool preparation command is out‐ Tool preparation command is output to
put to the PLC the PLC
...
N20 T="Tool1" No output to the PLC (assuming Tool preparation command is output to
that the state of the tool is un‐ the PLC
changed)
N22 M06 Change command to the PLC Change command to the PLC
A typical application is providing a new tool (positioning a chain) and checking before the
change using the repeated T call.

New programming for the tool that is still able to be used on the tool holder

Example 1:

Bit 12 = 0 Bit 12 = 1
N10 T="Tool1" Tool preparation command to the Tool preparation command to the PLC
PLC
N12 M06 Tool change command to the PLC Tool change command to the PLC
N20 T="Tool2" Tool preparation command to the Tool preparation command to the PLC
PLC

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 437
Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N30 T="Tool1" No output to the PLC. This prepara‐ Tool preparation command to the
tion replaces the preparation from PLC. This preparation replaces (as for
block N20; it is identified that a tool, bit 12 = 0) the preceding T preparation
which can be used from group from N20. The checks on the NC side
"Tool1", has already been loaded. are identical. However, as a result of
the machine data setting, command
output is forced.
N32 M06 No change command to the PLC Tool change command to the PLC be‐
cause a tool preparation command
from block N30 was output.
If bit 12 = 0, the preparation command from block N30 is deleted in NCK. In the programming,
it appears as if N10, N12 and N32 were programmed. As the state of the tool "Tool1" on the tool
holder has not changed, M06 is not output to the PLC.
For this example, bit 11 has no significance.

Example 2:

Bit 12 = 0 Bit 12 = 1
N10 T="Tool1" Tool preparation command to the Tool preparation command to the PLC
PLC
N12 M06 Tool change command to the PLC Tool change command to the PLC
N20 T="Tool1" No output to the PLC Tool preparation command to the PLC
N30 T="Tool1" No output to PLC independently of bit Output to PLC dependent upon bit 11
11 (there is no command which could (bit 11 is considered within bit 12 = 1).
be output again)
N32 M06 No change command to the PLC Tool change command to the PLC be‐
cause a tool preparation command
from block N20 or N30 was output.
If bit 12 = 0, the preparation command from block N20 is deleted in NCK. In the programming,
it appears as if N10, N12 and N32 were programmed. As the state of the tool "Tool1" on the tool
holder has not changed, M06 is not output to the PLC.
Bit 12 is the higher-level setting and bit 11 only takes effect if something is to be output for bit
12 = 1.

New programming for the tool that can no longer be used on the tool holder
The time monitoring has, for example, set the tool to the "disabled" state.

N10 T = "Tool1" Tool preparation command to PLC

N12 M06 Tool change command to PLC
N20 T = "Tool2" Tool preparation command to PLC
N30 T = "Tool1" This tool preparation replaces the tool preparation from N20; tool man‐
agement detects that a tool from group "Tool1" is loaded but that the tool
can no longer be used. A replacement tool is searched for in the tool
group and the tool preparation command is output to the PLC.
N32 M06 The tool change command N32 is output to the PLC.
For this example, bit 11 and bit 12 have no significance.

Tool management
438 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.4 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Condition for processing a new tool preparation command in the NC

N10 T = "Tool1"
N20 T = "Tool2" A command is only processed in the main run if the preceding command
from the PLC was acknowledged with "End".
The does not apply if N20 is not output to the PLC. Then the "End" acknowledgement must be
present for a new tool preparation command to be output to the PLC.

Condition for processing a new tool change command in the NC

N10 T = "Tool1"
N12 M06 If bit 10=0 in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK:
A command is also processed in the main run if the preceding tool prep‐
aration command from the PLC has not yet been acknowledged with
"End".
If bit 10=1 in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK:
A command is only processed in the main run if the preceding tool prep‐
aration command from the PLC has been acknowledged with "End".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 439
Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

7.5.1 Relocating sequence

Basics
When it is relocated, a tool is transported from one magazine location to another. The relocation
takes place according to the following steps with DB71 (Page 123):
● The target address, the magazine, and the location for the tool to be relocated are
transferred via DB71.DBW(n+24) and DBW n+26.
● The origin of the tool is entered in DB71.DBW(n+20) and DBW(n+22).
● The target address is passed to FC8/FC6 as parameters "NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc"
and status = 1 when relocation has been successfully completed.
● The parameters "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc" must be set to zero because the tool
management knows the location of the old tool.
● All relocation tasks are generally handled via the 1st interface of DB71.
The following graphic schematically shows the process of relocating via a loading magazine.
Alternatively, a buffer (spindle or gripper) can also be used:

   
   

   

  


0DJD]LQ 0DJD]LQ

   
   

   

  


0DJD]LQ 0DJD]LQ


Figure 7-31 Relocate tool

Tool management
440 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

The process is started, for example, via the "Relocate" command in SINUMERIK Operate.

Relocate - select tool Relocate - execute

The following graphic shows an example of the parameterization of a relocation with DB71 and
FC6.

Example of relocating a tool

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ
%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW
6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG
,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH
'%% 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

'%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66  66 1HZ7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUUHORFDWLQJ
5HV 5HV 3RV -RE 3RV 5HOR 8QORD /RD
PXOWL IURP PDJD FDWLQJ GLQJ GLQJ 1HZ7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUUHORFDWLQJ
WRRO 1& ]LQH
'%% 2OG7RRO0DJ '%'%: 6RXUFHPDJD]LQHIRUUHORFDWLRQ
SURJ

2OG7RRO/RF '%'%: 6RXUFHORFDWLRQIRUUHORFDWLRQ

'DWDLQ 5HVHUYHG $FNQ
6WDWXV  2SHUDWLRQWHUPLQDWHG
'% 6WDW
'%% UHORFDWLRQZLWKLQPDJD]LQH 
2SHUDWLRQWHUPLQDWHG
UHORFDWLRQWRPDJD]LQHZLWK
ORFDWLRQUHVHUYDWLRQ
'%: ,GHQWLILHUIRUORDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQW IL[HGYDOXH
0XOWLWRRO/RF  'XULQJUHORFDWLRQ 
'%: 1RRIORDGLQJSRLQW

'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ
([DPSOH5HORFDWHWRROIURPORFDWLRQWR
'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%:  
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%:  

Figure 7-32 Relocate - DB71

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 441
Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

7.5.2 Relocation by the PLC

Task from PLC

The PLC can also issue a task to tool management to relocate a tool. This is done by notifying
a new location for the tool to the tool management. The FC8/FC6 block (TaskIdent := 4) is called
with the following parameters:
● Old magazine no. (OldToolMag)
● Old location no. (OldToolLoc)
● New magazine no. (NewToolMag)
● New location no. (NewToolLoc)

PLC sample programs

The following sample programs (definition of DB150 (Page 119)) show the acknowledgement
of loading via interface 1. To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user block.

Sample program "Load magazine"

NETWORK TITLE = Acknowledgement relocation interface 1
U E 86.0; //acknowledgement is done here via the terminal E 86.0
U DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 1 active
U DB71.DBX 4.2; //Loading active
FP M 150.4;
SPBN M140;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
L DB71.DBW 28;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Target magazine for relocation
L DB71.DBW 30;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target location for relocation;
L DB71.DBW 24;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Source magazine for relocation
L DB71.DBW 26;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Source location for relocation
L DB71.DBW 28;
L W#16#270E;
<>I ;
SPB M142; //Relocation in spindle? No->
L 6;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 6
SPA M141;
M142: L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
M141: L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SET ;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M140: NOP 0;

Tool management
442 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

Example of a transfer with FC6

NETWORK TITLE =Tool management status transfer
CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TaskID := DB150.DBB 0,
TaskIDNo := DB150.DBB 1,
NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
Error := DB150.DBW 14);
U DB150.DBX 16.1; //Ready prompt
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
<>I ; //Evaluate error
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start

Example 1
The tool in magazine No. 1, location No. 5 is to be relocated to magazine No. 2, location No. 17.
The PLC takes responsibility for ensuring that the location type is correct for the transfer. This
example for calling an FC8 does not take into consideration any checkback signal to tool
management for intermediate positions of tools.

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 2 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 17 New location No.
OldToolMag 1 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 5 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

Example 2
Example: The tool is to be relocated from mag. No. 1, location No. 5 via grippers 3 and 4 to mag.
No. 2, location No. 17.
FC8/FC6 must be called four times in this procedure. Only the important parameters are listed.
All other parameters are as for the example above.
The tool is transported in 4 steps:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 443
Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

1. From magazine 1, location 5 to gripper 3 (location no. 4)

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 9998 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 4 New location No.
OldToolMag 1 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 5 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

2. Moved from gripper 3 to transfer location 2, location no. 6.

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 9998 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 6 New location No.
OldToolMag 9998 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 4 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

3. Moved from transfer location 2, location no. 6 in gripper 4, location no. 5.

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 9998 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 5 New location No.
OldToolMag 9998 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 6 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

4. From gripper 4, location no. 5 to magazine 2, location 17

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 2 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 17 New location No.
OldToolMag 9998 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 5 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

Tool management
444 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

Note
TaskIdent 5 may be programmed only for a tool transfer (magazine → buffer location).
Otherwise an error message is output, even though the tool is transferred.

The reservation is automatically reset when the tool is transferred from the buffer back into the
magazine.

7.5.3 Positioning the magazine

Overview
When positioning, a traversing task is sent to the PLC by the tool management via DB71
(Page 123).
● Bit 3 is set in DB71.DBB(n+0) "Position to the loading point".
● The magazine No. and the location No. (as target) are transferred in the parameters
DB71.DBW(n+20) and (n+22) during positioning.
The PLC then moves this location to the loading point. The number of the loading point is
entered in DB71.DBW (n+18) or determined by the number of the interface. If the PLC has
moved the magazine location to the loading point, FC8/FC6 is called and the operation is
acknowledged with status 5, position change. For loading point 2, n = 34.

0,//,1*B722/B %6
*



%6  6S6SLQGOH
 %6ORDGLQJSRLQW
**ULSSHU
 **ULSSHU
0DJD]LQH %6ORDGLQJSRLQW
6S




*
  

Figure 7-33 Positioning a magazine location

Example:
Location 5 in magazine 1 (source) must be moved to the loading magazine 2 (target).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 445
Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ
%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW
6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG
,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH
'%% 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

'%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66  66 1HZ7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUSRVLWLRQLQJ
5HV 5HV 3RV -RE 3RV 5HOR 8QORD /RD
PXOWL IURP PDJD FDWLQJ GLQJ GLQJ 1HZ7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUSRVLWLRQLQJ
WRRO 1& ]LQH
'%% 2OG7RRO0DJ  'XULQJSRVLWLRQLQJ 
SURJ

2OG7RRO/RF  'XULQJSRVLWLRQLQJ 
'DWDLQ 5HVHUYHG $FNQ
6WDWXV  2SHUDWLRQFRPSOHWHG
'% 6WDW
'%% 
0XOWLWRRO/RF  'XULQJSRVLWLRQLQJ 
'%: ,GHQWLILHUIRUORDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQW IL[HGYDOXH

'%: 1RRIORDGLQJSRLQW ([DPSOH0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQSRVLWLRQLQJWRORDGLQJSRLQW

'%'%: 
'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%: 
'%'%: 
'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUXQORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ '%'%: 

'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ

'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUORDGLQJUHORFDWLQJSRVLWLRQLQJ

Figure 7-34 Positioning DB71

Parameters "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc" in FC8/FC6 are not required for positioning
because only the PLC requires the information for traversing the magazine. The values for
NewToolMag and NewToolLoc are from DB71(n+24 and n+26). The PLC has to execute the
positioning task and acknowledge it with the FC8/FC6 call.

Initiate positioning via Operate

The selected magazine location is moved to the loading point via the "Positioning" softkey.

Figure 7-35 Positioning a magazine location

Tool management
446 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.5 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

PLC sample programs (user program FC150)

The following sample programs (description of DB150 (Page 119)) show the acknowledgement
of loading via interface 2. To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user block.

Example program "Position magazine"

NETWORK TITLE = Acknowledgement positioning interface 2
U E 86.0; //acknowledgement is done here via the terminal E 86.0
U DB71.DBX 0.1; //Interface 2 active
U DB71.DBX 34.3; //Magazine pos. active
FP M 150.5;
SPBN M150;
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB71
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 2
L DB71.DBW 58;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Target magazine for positioning
L DB71.DBW 60;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Target location for positioning
L 0;
T DB150.DBW 6;
T DB150.DBW 8;
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 5
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M150: NOP 0;

Example of a transfer with FC6

NETWORK TITLE =Tool management status transfer
CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TaskID := DB150.DBB 0,
TaskIDNo := DB150.DBB 1,
NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
Error := DB150.DBW 14);
U DB150.DBX 16.1; //Prompt ready
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
<>I ; //Evaluate error
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 447
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

7.6.1 Brief description

Overview
With the TMMG function (magazine management) and when the "Multitools" function (MT) is
also activated, so-called multitools with a number of tools can be loaded into a magazine and
unloaded from a magazine like a tool.
A multitool is a mini turret with a number of tools that is loaded to a magazine and unloaded from
a magazine as one tool in the turning technology. The T selection in the part program also
detects and checks the tools of a multitool when searching for a tool.

Note
This function is supported in SINUMERIK Operate only.

Note
The following functions are not implemented in the current version:
● Manual tool (a multitool cannot be a manual tool)
● Magazine location adapter (a multitool can be located on an adapter, but adapters are not
permitted on multitool locations)

The T selection in the part program also detects and checks the tools of a multitool when
searching for a tool.
A multitool has a definable number of MT locations, where tools can be located. The
geometrical arrangement of the MT locations can either be defined using the MT location
number, an angle or via a distance.
The commands to select a tool and to change a tool sent to the PLC have additional information
regarding the distance reference point or the machining position:
● MT location number of the tool in the multitool, or
● Angle, or
● Distance of the tool within the multitool
This type of distance coding can be defined for each MT. The PLC then initiates the
corresponding machine handling, e.g. moving a positioning axis.
The acknowledgement block FC6 is provided in the PLC basic program. The block corresponds
to FC8. It only has one additional parameter "MultitoolPosition". The FC6 includes the complete
FC8 functionality, so that the FC6 can completely replace the FC8. Analogous to DB71, DB72
and DB73, data blocks DB1071, DB1072 and DB1073 are available as user interface. If,
for example, a multitool is changed, then the complete information of the "carrier tool" is
contained in DB72, and all the information about the individual tool in DB1072.

Tool management
448 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW


 




 


/RFDWLRQQXPEHUGHILQLWLRQIRUWKH07ORFDWLRQGLVWDQFH
07ORFDWLRQ 07ORFDWLRQ 07ORFDWLRQ 
Figure 7-36 Location number

The figure shows the distance coding of the locations in the multitool, i.e. the MT location
number of the particular MT location itself. This distance coding is especially suitable for
machines that operate with similar multitool geometries, e.g. only mini turrets.

'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW 'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW

˞ G

˞ G
 

G

 7RRO$ 7RRO$ 7RRO%
GXSOR GXSOR GXSOR

  
 
˞

$QJOHGHILQLWLRQ /HQJWKGHILQLWLRQ
IRUWKH07ORFDWLRQGLVWDQFH IRUWKH07ORFDWLRQGLVWDQFH
˞ ˞ $QJOHWRORFDWLRQ G G DQJOHWRORFDWLRQ

Figure 7-37 Angle and length

Typical geometries can be seen in this figure. Angle α and the lengths are output on the PLC.
This means, for example, that multitools can be used on a machine and handled by the PLC,
which have different geometries (MT locations are not symmetrically arranged: Although
multitools are inherently symmetrical, different multitools have different distances between the
MT locations).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 449
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

The distance reference point or the machining position is defined machine-specifically. The
assignment of the MT location numbers to the multitool locations must correspond to the
machine construction.
A multitool can contain tools from different tool groups, i.e. the names can be different.
Nothing changes when programming a tool change in the part program. Formally, the
commands are identical to existing commands; i.e. the tool change is programmed using T and/
or M06.
For the function T = turret location number, it is also necessary to define which tool of the turret
magazine is meant when the location contains more than one tool.

Note
Presently, SINUMERIK Operate supports the distance coding "angle" and "location number".

  
 

① Magazine: $TC_MAP...
② Magazine location: $TC_MAPP...
③ Multitool: $TC_MTP...
④ Magazine location adapter
⑤ Multitool location: $TC_MTPP...
⑥ Tool: $TC_TP.../$TC_DP...
Figure 7-38 Multitool shown in the magazine

The following machine data and NC commands are available for the "multitool" function:
Machine data
● $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 10
Activation of the MT function
● $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
Number of defined MT (limit values: 0-1500; max. 600 per channel)
● $MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
Max. number of tool locations per MT (limit values: 2-64)

Tool management
450 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

NC commands / system parameters

● $TC_MTP, $TC_MTPP
Data definition for MT and MT location
● $TC_MTPC, $TC_MTPPC
MT OEM data for tool management
● $TC_MTPCS, $TC_MTPPCS
MT OEM data for Siemens
● NEWMT, DELMT
Creating, deleting
● POSMT
Positioning MT on tool holder MT location number
● $P_TMNOIS
What type does the number refer to: Magazine, tool or MT
● $P_MTOOLN, $P_MTOOLMT
Number of multitools, MT number of the i-th MT
● $P_MTOOLNT, $P_MTOOLT
Number of tools in the multitool, T number of the i-th tool
● $A_TOOLMTN, $A_TOOLMTLN
Location of the tool in the multitool, MT number / MT location number
● Synchronized action access in the tool management PLC command
$AC_TC_MTTN, $AC_TC_MTLTN, $AC_TC_MTNLOC, $AC_TC_TOOLIS,
$AC_TC_MTDIST
NC commands
● RESETMON
Can reset the tool monitoring data of the tools in an MT to their setpoints
● GETT
Determines T no., MT no. for the name
● DELMLOWNER
Deletes the magazine owner location of the tool or MT
● MVTOOL
Moves tool or MT
● GETFREELOC
Searches for an empty location in the magazine for tool or MT, searches for an empty
location in the MT for tool

7.6.2 Programming

MT numbers
The multitool numbers originate from the same number space as the T numbers and the
magazine numbers.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 451
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Numbers 1-32000 are permitted for the T and magazine numbers. This allows multitools to be
handled just like simple tools (T number at the magazine location, T number as parameter in
the OPI PI service to load and unload tools, etc.). In addition, in some instances MT numbers
can be handled just like magazine numbers.
Users can explicitly enter T or MT numbers in the NC programming, if they want to create a tool
or multitool by programming $TC_TPx or $TC_MTPx. Explicitly programmed MT numbers must
not collide with already defined T numbers or magazine numbers. The programming is then
aborted with an alarm. However, if users create a new tool with the language command NEWT
– or for multitools with NEWMT – then the NC automatically allocates the T or MT numbers.
When automatically allocating an MT number, it is ensured that this is neither an already
defined tool nor an already defined magazine.
NC language commands or system parameters, which have a tool T number or magazine
number as parameter or index, and which are called using an MT number, generate an alarm
if the associated functionality for multitool is not explicitly defined.
The same number can be used for a tool and a magazine.
Example 1:
The magazine numbers 1, 2, 3, -, 5, -, -, - and the T numbers 1, -, 3, -, 5, 6, -, -, have already
been defined.
Then -, -, -, 4, -, -, 7, 8 are available for the MT numbers.
Example 2:
The magazine numbers 1, 2, 3, -, 5, -, -, - and the MT numbers -, -, -, 4, -, 6, 7, -, have already
been defined.
Then 1, 2, 3, -, 5, -, -, 8 are available for the T numbers.

MT names
Multitool names come from the same namespace as the tool names and magazine names.
Different multitools must have different names, i.e. a duplo number is not defined.
An MT name must not be the same as a tool name and not the same as a magazine name.
Hoever, a magazine name can be the same as a tool name.

7.6.3 Tool change with a tool from a multitool

Overview
A tool change for a multitool means, on the one hand, the change of the multitool itself and, on
the other hand, the change of the tool on the multitool.

Tool management
452 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

The programming of a tool change for a multitool is done via the commands "T=.." and M06.
The following programming selects an appropriate tool from the tool group "Mill_150" and loads
it:

T= "Miller_150"
M06
D1

If, corresponding to the tool search strategy, the tool found is located in a multitool, then this
does not play a role regarding activating the offset. The multitool is only involved when the data
for the tool change command is being compiled. The NC determines the distance value (–>MT
location number or $TC_MTPPL/$TC_MTPPA) and adds this to the PLC command. For the
tool change itself, the multitool (with its individual tools) is moved from the magazine to the tool
holder. Using the data "Multitool location distance" that the NC sends with the tool change data
to the PLC, the PLC program must appropriately initiate the machine so that the active tool
within the multitool can machine the workpiece.
The state of tools within the multitool in question, which are not involved in an MT motion
operation, tool selection, tool change, does not change.
If programmed
T="name" M06 D1
and the name is that of a multitool, then Alarm 6404 "Tool change not possible" is generated.

Tool change from a multitool to a tool holder - PLC request

Example 1:
A multitool with four locations is in magazine 1, location 10, and has the TNo = 23. Angle
distance coding has been selected for the multitool; i. e. $TC_MTP_KD[23] = 3
The setting is $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, i.e. tool changed with M06.
The data of the defined and loaded multitool looks like this:

$TC_MTPN[23]=4 Number of locations

$TC_MTP2[23]="Multitool_ Identifiers
0"
$TC_MTP3[23]=2 Number of half locations (right), i.e. the multitool is oversized
$TC_MTP4[23]=2 Number of half locations (left)
$TC_MTP5[23]=2 Number of half locations (top)
$TC_MTP6[23]=2 Number of half locations (bottom)
$TC_MTP7[23]=1 Location type
$TC_MTP8[23]=130 Tool status (enabled, was in use)
$TC_MTP_POS[23]=2 MT position (is not evaluated, if the tool is located in the
magazine)
$TC_MTP_KD[23]=3 Distance coding (3 = angle)
$TC_MTP_PROTA[23]="" Data for protection zone
$TC_MTPP2[23,1]=0 Location_1 - location type
$TC_MTPP4[23,1]=0 Location_1 - location state (occupied)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 453
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

$TC_MTPP6[23,1]=1 Location_1 - equipped with T-No.1 ("Tool1")

$TC_MTPP7[23,1]=0 Location_1 - adapter No.
$TC_MTPPA[23,1]=0 Distance-angular value
$TC_MTPP2[23,2]=0 Location_2 ...
$TC_MTPP4[23,2]=0
$TC_MTPP6[23,2]=2 equipped with T-No.2 ("Tool2")
$TC_MTPP7[23,2]=0
$TC_MTPPA[23,2]=90
$TC_MTPP2[23,3]=0 Location_3 ...
$TC_MTPP4[23,3]=0
$TC_MTPP6[23,3]=3 equipped with T-No.3 ("Tool3")
$TC_MTPP7[23,3]=0
$TC_MTPPA[23,3]=180
$TC_MTPP2[23,4]=0 Location_4
$TC_MTPP4[23,4]=0
$TC_MTPP6[23,4]=4 equipped with T-No.4 ("Tool4")
$TC_MTPP7[23,4]=0
$TC_MTPPA[23,4]=270
The following is programmed:
T="Tool3";
● Change tool or multitool from location 1/10 to the tool holder 9998/1
● Tool number 23 of the multitool is output.
● The T-number 3 of the selected tool in the multitool.
Tool is contained in Multitool; distance specification has the unit angle
The tool with the tool number = 3 in the multitool no. = 23 is put into the machining position on
location 3.
The PLC user interface looks like this:

DB72 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBB(n+4) 00000100 Prepare change
DBB(n+5) 10000000 Data available in the extended range (DB
1072)
...
DBW(n+20) 1 Source new tool (magazine)
DBW(n+22) 10 Source new tool (location)
DBW(n+24) 0 Target old tool (magazine)
DBW(n+26) 0 Target old tool (location)
DBW(n+28) 1 New tool: Location type
DBW(n+30) 2 New tool: Size left
...
DBW(n+36) 2 New tool: Size bottom

Tool management
454 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

DBW(n+38) 162 New tool: Status

(enabled, was in use, being changed)
DBW(n+40) 23 New tool: T number
The "Carrier tool" in which the preselected tool is loaded is transported. That it now involves a
multitool is indicated by setting DB72.DBB(n+1), bit7 "extended data available (DB1072)".
The data of the specifically preselected tool ("Tool3") is now in DB1072.

DB1072 DBW(n+0) 3 Distance coding (angle)

DBW(n+2) 4 Number of locations in the multitool
DBD(n+4) 180 Location distance (3rd location, corre‐
sponds to 180 degrees)
DBW(n+8) 23 New tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+10) 3 New tool: Location number in the multitool
→ it is mandatory that the PLC acknowl‐
edges this position
DBW(n+12) 0 Old tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+14) 0 Old tool: Location number in the multitool
DBW(n+16) 1 New tool: Location type
DBW(n+18) 1 New tool: Size left
...
DBW(n+24) 1 New tool: Size bottom
DBW(n+26) 42 New tool: Status
DBW(n+28) 3 New tool: T number
DBW(n+30) 1 New tool: Tool holder or spindle number
DBW(n+32) 1 New tool: Original magazine (is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+44))
DBW(n+34) 10 New tool: Original location (is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+46))
The FC6 can be parameterized as follows.
Assumption: the prepared tool or multitool is not moved and remains in the magazine.

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 1 Source for new tool: Magazine DB72.DBW(n+20) –
NewToolLoc 10 Source for new tool: Location DB72.DBW(n+22)
OldToolMag 0 Target for old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Target for old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Exit operation

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 455
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

MultitoolLoc xx Multitool position - DB1072.DBW(n+10) The position, in this case (tool remains
in the magazine), has no significance. It can be acknowledged with the position
from DBW(n+10), but also with "0" or "-1".
This also applies to intermediate acknowledgements. The NC only evaluates
the multitool position with the final acknowledgement of the change.
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

M06 ;
The signal DB72.DBB(n+0)Bit1 "Perform change" is set.
The FC6 can be parameterized as follows.
Assumption: The prepared tool or multitool was already transported and here, in the example,
only the final acknowledgement is programmed.

FC 6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 Target for new tool: Magazine = buffer
NewToolLoc 10 Target for new tool: Location = spindle
OldToolMag 0 Target for old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Target for old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Exit operation
MultitoolLoc 3 Multitool position - DB1072.DBW(n+10) must now be forcibly acknowledged
with the correct position from DBW(n+10).
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

D2 ; activate the offset of the tool with tool number = 3.

A new tool that is located in the same multitool is programmed:
T="Tool1" ;
The tool/multitool is already on the tool holder.
For the user interface this means:
● No transport task for the "carrier tool".

DB72 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBB(n+4) 00000100 Prepare change
DBB(n+5) 10000000 Data in the extended range (DB1072)
...
DBW(n+20) 9998 Source new tool (magazine)
DBW(n+22) 1 Source new tool (location)
DBW(n+24) 0 Target old tool (magazine)
DBW(n+26) 0 Target old tool (location)
DBW(n+28) 1 New tool: Location type
DBW(n+30) 2 New tool: Size left

Tool management
456 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

...
DBW(n+36) 2 New tool: Size bottom
DBW(n+38) 162 New tool: Status (enabled, was in use, be‐
ing changed)
DBW(n+40) 23 New tool: T number
● The relevant data for the new tool is located in DB1072.

DB1072 DBW(n+0) 3 Distance coding (angle)

DBW(n+2) 4 Number of locations in the multitool
DBD(n+4) 0 Location distance (1st location, corre‐
sponds to 0 degrees)
DBW(n+8) 23 New tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+10) 1 New tool: Location number in the multitool
→ it is mandatory that the PLC acknowl‐
edges this position
DBW(n+12) 23 Old tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+14) 3 Old tool: Location number in the multitool
DBW(n+16) 1 New tool: Location type
DBW(n+18) 1 New tool: Size left
...
DBW(n+24) 1 New tool: Size bottom
DBW(n+26) 42 New tool: Status
DBW(n+28) 1 New tool: T number
DBW(n+30) 1 New tool: Tool holder or spindle number
DBW(n+32) 1 New tool: Original magazine (is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+44))
DBW(n+34) 10 New tool: Original location (is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+46))
M06 ; generates the PLC command = 3.
The FC6 can be parameterized as follows.

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 Target for new tool: Magazine = buffer
NewToolLoc 1 Target for new tool: Location = spindle
OldToolMag 0 Target for old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Target for old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Operation completed
MultitoolLoc 1 Multitool position - DB1072.DBW(n+10) must now be forcibly acknowledged
with the correct position from DBW(n+10)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 457
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Ready Feedback from FC6

Error Feedback from FC6

D1 ; activate the offset of the tool with T-No. = 17

See also
Manual tools (adding tools during machining) (Page 468)
Preparing a tool change via T command (Page 376)
FC6: TM_TRANS2 - transfer block for tool management and multitool (Page 151)
FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management (Page 155)

7.6.4 Tool change and tool number for multitools

Tx - Tx programmed: Configuration of the tool selection

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 11 makes it possible to adjust the behavior when
repeatedly programming Tx – Tx. The setting is valid for the tool to be selected and also for the
MT itself.
Example:
Tool selection with T, tool change with M code. The following is programmed:
T="TOOL5"
T="TOOL5"
The second tool preparation command is a "superfluous" command, which as default setting
does not result in a command being output to the PLC. If "Tool5" is a tool belonging to a
multitool, then with the command, generally
● a) a transport task of the MT "from magazine to tool holder" is generated
● b) a positioning command of the MT location with the programmed tool.
If "Tool5" is in an MT, then two basic situations can exist for the MT:
1. The MT is already located on the tool holder.
– 1.1 The programmed tool has already been positioned.
– 1.2 The programmed tool is a different tool than the tool that was positioned.
2. The MT is not yet located on the tool holder.
For case 1.1, the data is
● a) "MT from tool holder to tool holder"
● b) "Position at the location of the tool "Tool5" that has already been positioned
For case 1.2, the data is
● a) "MT from tool holder to tool holder"
● b) "Position to the location of the tool that has still not been positioned "Tool5""

Tool management
458 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

For case 2, the data is

● a) "MT from magazine to tool holder"
● b) "Position to the location of the tool "Tool5""
The general criterion as to whether the second program command is a "superfluous" command
is whether the generated command data for the PLC is identical to that of the first command.
The second command is then not output to the PLC.
This command output can be forced using the bit value 1 of bit 11 from
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Tool change command canceled before the final acknowledgement

If, within the scope of a tool change, the MT has already been mechanically loaded, but the MT
has not been positioned, and the operation is interrupted in this state (fault, RESET,
EMERGENCY STOP, power off, power failure...), then before continuing, the PLC must ensure
that the previously pending MT positioning is carried out. The PLC must then make sure that
the NC is informed about the MT change (e.g. using an asynchronous transfer with
acknowledgement status 4 or 5. In so doing, the NC synchronizes the MT position with the
command data from the PLC). With an asynchronous transfer, the PLC can also communicate
the MT position to the NC.

Note
Init blocks for START and/or RESET
Especially if init blocks for START and/or RESET are generated via MD settings, with the
property "activate the tool on the tool holder", and the tool on the tool holder is an MT, then the
PLC must ensure that the MT is correctly positioned on the tool holder before the NC makes the
correction selection (i.e. before the RESET command is sent to the NC, the MT must have been
positioned).

T0 - tool deselection and return transport of the multitool into the magazine
T0 deselects the tool and loads the associated MT back into the magazine.
A T0 is output at the PLC user interface. The "tool carrier" must be removed from the tool holder.
It does not make any difference as to whether it involves an individual tool or a multitool.
DB72.DBB(n+1), bit 7 is not set, as there is no relevant data.
M06 ; generates the PLC command = 3.
If a tool from this multitool that has just been exchanged is again selected/loaded, then the
multitool is again loaded onto the tool holder.
It is not possible to program a T0 with the meaning to deselect the active tool, and at the same
time to keep the MT on the tool holder. T0 M06 D0 means, that after successful execution
- the correction is deselected
- there is no active tool
- there is no tool or MT on the tool holder.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 459
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

PLC acknowledgement status 2 and 7 in the FC6

The PLC acknowledgement status numbers 2 and 7 (FC6 (Page 151) and FC8 (Page 155))
refer to the respective tool within the multitool. This means that the tool is rejected, not the
multitool. If the newly selected tool is in another multitool, then the transport task data for the
multitool as well as for the newly selected tool contained in it, are newly determined and output
to the PLC. The following apply:
● Status=2:
The tool cannot be made available. The NC locks this tool and tries to repeat the tool
preparation with another tool. This status is permissible only in conjunction with a
preparation command.
● Status=7:
Analogous to status 2 – with the property that no tool is disabled (i.e. the same tool can be
selected again).

Tool change with "T=magazine location number" programming ("T=location")

With a multitool, there are three variants of T=location programming:
1. Specification of multitool location and magazine location, e.g. N100 MTL=2 T4
2. With MD20274 $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT
The magazine location is programmed, e.g. T4
The tool at the multitool location specified in the machine data is selected.
3. Via the current multitool position
The magazine location is programmed, e.g. T6
The tool at the multitool location specified in the multitool parameter $TC_MTP_POS is
selected.
In these three options, variant 1 has the highest priority and variant 3 the lowest.
The following examples illustrate this.

Example 1:
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0 applies (tool change only with the T command, i.e. the T
programming results in the output of command number 4 to the PLC).
Multitool with distance coding, location number, $TC_MTP_KD[500]=1, is in turret 1, location 4
and has the MT no. = 500; $TC_MPP6[1, 4] = 500. The MT position is
$TC_MTP_POS[500]=2.
The tool at magazine location 1/1 is loaded onto tool holder 9998/1. The MT on magazine
location 4 has 3 locations.
The following tools are loaded in the multitool:
"tool_1": $TC_MTPP6[500, 1] =11 MT distance $TC_MTPPA[500, 1] = 1
"tool_2": $TC_MTPP6[500, 1] =22 MT distance $TC_MTPPA[500, 2] = 2
– $TC_MTPP6[500, 1] =0 MT distance $TC_MTPPA[500, 3] = 3
There is no tool at location 3 of the multitool. $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=0 applies.
Tool selection and tool change are programmed with T. The "T=magazine location number"
function is used.

Tool management
460 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

The following command is then programmed:

;MT-Position $TC_MTP_POS[500]=2

T4 ;MT position $TC_MTP_POS[500] = 2

;at magazine location 4, in the multitool loaded there, select the tool,
;which is loaded at MT location 2 of the multitool and load the MT - if it is not disabled
- and
;activate the tool.
;If the tool at MT location 2 of the multitool is disabled, then a search is made for
;another matching tool with the name "tool_2", which under certain circumstances –
;depending on the tool –;search strategy, tool equipping –is at some location ;of an‐
other multitool ;or which is contained as individual tool on another
;turret location.
The resulting command to the PLC is as follows:
T4 programming with the result "Multitool 500 is at the programmed magazine location and at
the MT location selected (via the MT position), there is tool "tool_2" with the T no.=22" - supplies
the following (essential) data to the PLC.

No tool on MT location
For "T=magazine location" and "No tool on the magazine location", it is defined that a regular
tool change command to the PLC is output with the special property "T number of the new tool
= 0".
Similarly for "T=magazine location" and
"An MT is on the magazine location" and
"No tool is on the selected MT location"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 461
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

it is defined that a regular tool change command to the PLC is output with the special property:
● a) MT is in the magazine
T number of the tool that is to be moved on the tool holder is the MT number of the MT that
is on the magazine location and the T number of the new tool in the MT = 0.
With the information of the PLC command, the PLC can decide what is to be done in this
situation: Either position the MT on the empty MT location or issue an alarm "There is no tool
on the MT location".
– Example 2:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =3 applies, then the result in example 1 – the
multitool position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – is that
T0 is programmed with the programming T4 based on the effect (no new tool is available,
but the request to dispose of the old tool is issued nevertheless.
● b) MT is on the tool holder
T number of the tool that is to be moved on the tool holder is the MT number of the MT that
is already on the tool holder. The transport request "From → to" for the MT is "From tool
holder → tool holder" and the
T number of the new tool in the MT = 0.
With the information of the PLC command, the PLC can decide what is to be done in this
situation: Either position the MT on the empty MT location or issue an alarm "There is no tool
on the MT location".
– Example 3:
The preconditions are the same as in example 2 with the condition that the MT from
location 4 is already on the tool holder. Programming T4 has the same effect as if T0
were programmed (a new tool is not available, but the request for the offset deselection
is still issued; the old tool transport data is 0/0 → 0/0), the MT remains on the tool holder.

Tool change with "T=magazine location number MTL=MT location" programming

As an alternative to the programming described in the section above, the MT location can be
programmed with MTL=p in the multitool (p=location number).
The following applies for the programming:
● MTL is non-modal.
● MTL must be programmed in the NC block before the T command.
● The programmed value for MTL must correspond to an existing location number in the
multitool to be selected. Otherwise, an alarm is output.
MD $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT can be used to define the MT location number which is
used when MTL is not programmed. The MTL programming replaces the default defined with
$MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT.

Example 4:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =3 applies, this results in example 2 of the section above
– the multitool position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – that,
with the following programming, the value of $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=3 and the

Tool management
462 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

current MT position 2 are ignored, because MTL is explicitly programmed. This selects "tool_1"
with the tool number 11.

MTL=1 T4 ;affects precisely T4 in this block,

;which is programmed subsequently in the block.

Example 5:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =3 applies, this results in example 2 of the section above
– the multitool position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – that,
with the following programming, the programmed value MTL=1 remains without effect and the
value of $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=3 is used. There is no tool at MT location 3 and

MTL=1 ;does not affect following block T4 because this is non-modal

...
T4 ;the setting of the MD takes effect

Example 6:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =0 applies, this results in example 2 of the section above
– the multitool position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – that,
with the following programming, the programmed value MTL=1 remains without effect and the
value of $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=0 is used; i.e. the value of the MT position = 2. The
tool with tool number=22 is on the MT location 2.

MTL=1 ;does not affect following block T4 because this is non-modal

...
T4 ;the setting of the MD takes effect - that is now MT position=2

$C_MTL - transfer of the MTL_value to the replacement cycle

The programmed value for MTL can be read in an existing replacement cycle for T
with $C_MTL.

$C_MTL_PROG - MTL is programmed

If MTL has been programmed in the NC block, then this can be determined in an existing
replacement cycle for T with $C_MTL_PROG. $C_MTL_PROG==1 means that MTL has been
programmed. The programmed value can be queried with $C_MTL.

Example:
The multitool function and the function T=location have been configured.
N10 MTL=3 T=8
Then the replacement cycle contains T code of the type for the command:
N140 IF $C_T_PROG == 1
N142 IF $C_MTL_PROG == 1
N144 MTL=$C_MTL T[$C_TE]=$C_T
N146 ELSE
N148 T[$C_TE]=$C_T
N150 ENDIF

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 463
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

N152 ENDIF

Load/move multitool on tool holder and init block

If a multitool is loaded onto a tool holder other than through a tool change (loading operation,
movement command) and for the init block handling (if it is appropriately configured), the active
tool must be subsequently determined, then the following applies:
● If necessary: After loading/moving, set the MT position so that the requested tool can be
activated – or so that the MT position matches the mechanical MT position
● Always issue a tool change command to the PLC which contains the MT position of the tool
to be activated.
● Take the MT which is located on the master tool holder.
● Take the tool which is at the MT location with MT location number = "MT position" (=
$TC_MTP_POS), and select it.
● Activate the D offset of this tool with the lowest D number.
Irrespective of the value of bit 12 (bit value==1 corresponds to ’H1000’) of the MD
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, a command is output to the PLC if the activated tool
is not on the MT location which was output last for this tool holder or was contained in the
acknowledged tool change command.
Note
The MT position of the multitool on the tool holder must be synchronized to the mechanical
position of the multitool on the machine. If the MT position when loading does not already
match the MT loading position, then under certain circumstances the PLC can initiate this
synchronization with an asynchronous transfer before the RESET command to the NC (that
generates the init block).

Example
The init block generation is activated ($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 14 (bit
value==1 corresponds to ’H4000’)).
The part program is exited. The MT remains on the tool holder. The last tool change in the part
program was performed with regard to MT position = 3. The PLC acknowledged the MT tool
change command with MT position = 3.
The init block generated with the operator panel RESET determines the MT on the tool holder,
the tool on the MT location with the number of the MT position. The compensation of the
smallest D number is activated.
Positioning is now performed on a different location with the OPI PI _N_POSMT_. A tool
command with the number = 1 (move/position) is output to the PLC and acknowledged
accordingly. The MT now has a different position than at the time of the previous end of the
program. With the operator panel reset, the tool on this MT location is determined and the
compensation activated accordingly. There is no tool change command output to the PLC.
Only the data of the MT position is now changed (e.g. by a write command with
$TC_MTP_POS). Machine and NC data are now asynchronous. With the operator panel reset,
the tool on this MT location is determined and the compensation activated accordingly. A tool
change command is output to the PLC irrespective of the setting of bit 12 of

Tool management
464 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. After correct positioning, the machine and the NC data

are synchronous again.

Not possible to move the tool from or to the MT location

A tool cannot be transported to or from a multitool location. The PI service as well as the NC
command or asynchronous transfer are rejected with an error.
The multitool is considered to be an entity in its own right that is manually equipped, and which
is loaded, unloaded or transported as a whole. Movement of tools in the multitool have not been
realized.

Tool change - tool search

The tool search strategies are described in Section "Search for tool (Page 478)". They are
essentially also applied to the multitool.

NC identifier Description Format Preassignment

$TC_MAMP" Type of search strategy INT 0
$TC_MAP10 Bit 0 - 7 tool search strategy

Regarding tools in the multitool, the individual tool search strategies behave as follows:
Bit 0 = 1: Select the "active" tool.
If there is more than one suitable tool in the multitool with the "active" state, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.
Bit 1 = 1: Select the tool that can be reached over the shortest distance.
Within the multitool there is no "shortest distance" search. With shortest distance, the "shortest
distance within the magazine" is always meant. It does not make any difference whether a tool
or a multitool is at the particular magazine location.
Bit 2 = 1: Select the "active" tool. If there is no active tool available, then select the replacement
tool with the lowest number contained in $TC_TP10.
If there is more than one suitable tool in the multitool with the "active" state, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.
Bit 3 = 1: Lowest actual value (residual value) of the monitoring functions.
If there is more than one suitable tool with "lowest actual value" in the multitool, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.
Bit 4 = 1: Highest actual value (residual value ) of the monitoring functions.
If there is more than one suitable tool with "highest actual value" in the multitool, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.

Note
Further, the tool search is tool-oriented, i.e. the tool of a tool group is checked as to whether it
can be used corresponding to the actual configuration and search strategy.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 465
Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

The MT with suitable tool is already on the tool holder.

If an MT with a tool suitable for the programmed tool change command is already on the
programmed tool holder, then – irrespective of the defined tool search strategy – this tool is
selected or loaded.
Example:
The MT with number = 22 is on the tool holder / spindle with number = 1. The tool with T no. =
7 is active and is disabled. This tool is loaded to MT location = 1. A tool with the same name
"Tool_1" and the T no. = 8 is on MT location = 2. The tool change command with the tool name
of the tool that is disabled now selects the tool with T no. = 8:
Extract from NC program:
...
N600 T="Tool_1" M06 ; T no. = 7 is loaded
... ; tool is disabled (e.g. because of tool monitoring)
N700 T="Tool_1" M06 ; T no. = 8 is loaded
The MT itself remains at its location (from–>to addresses are 9998/1 –> 9998/1. Only a new MT
position must be assumed (MTPos value 1 –> 2)

Wear group and multitool

All tools within a multitool belong to the wear group of the multitool itself. The locations within
a multitool have the "wear group" property.

Manual tool and multitool

The "manual tool" function is also available for multitools. As far as this function is concerned,
the MT itself is the manual tool and not the programmed tool. If a tool is programmed which is
in an MT, but this MT is not loaded, then the MT is treated just like a manual tool.
Example:
The name of the multitool is "MT1", the name of the tool - programmed for tool holder 1 - is
"Tool4" with duplo number 5.
The following is programmed
T="Tool4" M06 D1.
This is then followed by the request to load with alarm 17212 "Load manual tool "Tool4", duplo
no. 5 to spindle / tool holder 1".
T0 M06 D0
then correspondingly generates alarm 17214 "Unload manual tool "Tool4" from spindle /tool
holder 1"
and correspondingly requests that the manual tool (that is an MT or is located in an MT) is again
removed from the tool holder.

Suppressing alarms 17212, 17214, 17215, 17216

The manual tool change request alarms can be suppressed using bit 16 in MD
$MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2. Then, using the tool change command data, the PLC
must correctly load and remove the manual tool.

Tool management
466 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.6 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Empty location search strategy - "replace old tool by new tool" and multitool
Just like tools, for an empty location search, multitools can use the search strategy - "replace
old tool by new tool" (1:1 exchange). The MT has the necessary defined data required for this
purpose - such as location type, tool size.

See also
Using manual tools (Page 468)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 467
Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

7.7 Using manual tools

7.7.1 Manual tools (adding tools during machining)

Manual tools are tools whose data is completely available in the NC, but are not loaded into the
magazine. The function is set with MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 1=1.
The automatically selected tool must be inserted in the machine manually and removed again
manually after machining.

Responsibility of the operator

The user must ensure that
● the data record of the tool positioned on the spindle is actually in the NC and
● that he places the tool that corresponds to the data record in the NC on the spindle.
Tools which are loaded manually during machining are referred to as "manual tools".

Note
The responsibility is on the users themselves to comply with the safety regulations via the PLC
program.

Unique identification of manual tools

Manual tools are characterized by the fact that they are not loaded in a magazine and the status
is set via $TC_TP8 Bit 15 =1.
This is then used to derive as to whether (within the scope of a change) it is loaded or removed
from the virtual magazine location 9999/1.
This also means that a tool which, for example, was loaded onto the spindle as a result of an
operator action at the HMI, is a manual tool. As a consequence, it cannot be placed in the
magazine using T0/M06.
The fact that a tool loses its owner location when being transported can be a legal state. This
means that it is no longer possible to reliably identify a manual tool.
If this state is set, a search is not made for an empty location in a magazine for the tool - and
this (old) tool is directly transported to the virtual magazine location 9999/1 when the tool is
changed. By moving this tool between the locations of the buffer magazine, independent of the
motion command that initiated this, the "manual tool" state no longer changes. (Exception: see
Section, resetting the "manual tool" state)

Note
As a consequence, a tool that was loaded onto the spindle, e.g. via SINUMERIK Operate, is
now not a manual tool. As a consequence, it is placed in the magazine using T0/M06.

Setting the "manual tool" state

Tool management
468 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

The "manual tool" state of a tool is set if the following condition are fulfilled:
● machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit1 is set
● as part of a tool change, an unloaded tool was selected. As a result, $TC_TP8 Bit 15 = 1 is
automatically set.
● Alternatively, the status can be explicitly set with $TC_TP8 Bit 15 = 1.
Resetting the "manual tool" state
The "manual tool" state of a tool is reset if the following occurs:
● The tool is unloaded, i.e. the tool no longer has a current magazine location.
This can especially occur as a result of:
– Unloading the old tool as part of the tool change
– Transporting a manual tool to a loading position (unloading as a result of an HMI operator
action)
– Writing $TC_MPP6[m,p]=0 to the location of the buffer magazine where the manual tool
is currently located. (m=magazine no., p=location no.)
● The command to select or load a manual tool was interrupted and the tool was still not
moved to a magazine location.
● An owner location is assigned to the tool. For example, this can be realized with the
extended NC language command "GETFREELOC" with a reservation of the location
(withReserv).
● The tool was brought to a location in a real magazine or the loading magazine.
● The identification as a manual tool is reset via $TC_TP8 Bit 15 = 0.

Boundary conditions for writing the status "Manual tool"

It is not possible to set the "manual tool" tool state, if
● machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit1 is not set. Otherwise, Alarm
17242 ( "Channel %1, block %2, manual tool cannot be set as the function is not active") is
issued.
● It is not possible to set the "manual tool" tool state, if the tool is located
- in a real magazine location,
- in a loading magazine,
- in a buffer magazine location and has an owner location.
If this is set, it is rejected with Alarm 17218 ("Channel %1, block %2, tool %3 cannot become
a manual tool").
If a tool, which is located in a magazine location, is to become a manual tool, then it must be
transported into the buffer or loading magazine (using asynchronous transfer, PI service or
MVTOOL language command). Then, using the NC language command "DELMLOWNER",
the reservation and the owner location can be deleted. Only then can the "manual tool" state
be set.
If the tool state "manual tool" is explicitly reset, then initially an empty location search is not
made for the tool and no reservation is made. It is also not allocated an owner location. Only in
subsequent operations can an empty location search be made - and real magazine locations
reserved.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 469
Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

The state "manual tool" can also be set and reset via the OPI interface (block T/TD, column 8).

Properties of the "manual tool" state

For a manual tool, when the tool is being changed, a search is not made for an empty location,
an owner location is not allocated and a reservation is not made. Also for other tool transport
types and search operations, for a manual tool, an empty location is not searched for -
exception, explicit reservation using the NC language command "GETFREELOC".
The command data set, which the NC sends to the PLC when a tool is being changed, always
contains as target address for a manual tool as old tool, the virtual magazine location 9999/1.
For manual tools, the empty location search strategy "1:1 replacement" is not effective, as the
"manual tool" property has priority, i.e.
● if the new tool is a manual tool and the old tool comes from a location in a real magazine,
then the transport task sent by the NC to the PLC is as follows: Old tool back into the real
magazine, new tool from virtual magazine location 9999/1.
● And vice versa: If the old tool is a manual tool and the new tool comes from a location in a
real magazine, then the transport task sent by the NC to the PLC is as follows: Old tool to
virtual magazine location 9999/1, new tool from the location of the real magazine.
The "manual tool" state is effective via a POWER ON.
When unloading a tool to the virtual magazine address 9999/1, the settings of MD
$MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK are not effective, i.e. the corresponding tool states are kept.

Note
Using the NC language command "GETFREELOC" or for the PI service "_N_TMFDPL" or
"_N_TMFPBP", a check is not made as to whether a manual tool is involved. If the NC command
"GETFREELOC" is parameterized in such a way that a buffer location is also reserved, the tool
loses its "manual tool" status.

Note
At POWER ON, the "manual tool" state for tools is reset, which
● are at a real magazine location or the loading magazine, or
● are at a buffer magazine location and have an owner location, or
● are not at any magazine location.

Note
If, when writing to $TC_MPP6[m,p] a manual tool is set at a magazine location, the "manual
tool" state is deleted, if
● "m" addresses a real magazine or the loading magazine, or
● "m" addresses the buffer magazine and the tool has an owner location.

Tool management
470 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

Note
If a manual tool should come to the unloading point magazine location 9999/1 for unloading
using an asynchronous transfer, the NC language command "MVTOOL" or the PI service
"_N_TMMVTL", then this location must be defined and also free. On the other hand, for
unloading operations for a manual tool, magazine location 9999/1 does not have to be defined
and does not have to be free.

Behavior, NC language commands "TCA", "TCI" and return transport for manual tools
If the language command TCA programs a specific tool, which is not located at a magazine
location (also not at an internal magazine location), then this tool is selected and changed in as
manual tool.
If the language command TCI is applied to a buffer location where there is a manual tool, then
the target location for the movement is the virtual magazine location 9999/1 (this means that the
TCI instruction does not bring the manual tool into a real magazine corresponding to the
definition of TCI for other tools). Alarm 17215 "Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual
tool %3 from buffer %2" is issued. This alarm is acknowledged by the tool change
acknowledgement from the PLC.
Users must themselves ensure that the safety regulations are maintained through their PLC
programs, such as when loading a manual tool.
The tool state "BACKTRANSFER" for a manual tool is evaluated in the form so that the virtual
magazine location 9999/1 is specified in the PLC command for the manual tool.
Alarm 17215 "Channel %1 tool management: Unload manual tool %3 from buffer location %3."
is issued. This alarm is acknowledged by the tool change acknowledgement from the PLC.
Users must themselves ensure that the safety regulations are maintained through their PLC
programs, such as when loading a manual tool.

Suppressing alarms 17212, 17214, 17215, 17216

The manual tool change request alarms can be suppressed using bit 12 in MD
$MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2. Then, using the tool change command data, the PLC
must correctly load and remove the manual tool.
Example 1
(milling machine, $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, 1 x spindle, 1 x chain-type magazine,
double gripper)

T=MILLER_120" Task to PLC: new tool from 9999/1 to 9998/1

old tool from 9998/1 to 1/10
"Manual tool" identifier is set
M06 Information alarm 17212 "...manual tool "MILLER_120"
Duplo number 00001 load onto spindle / tool holder 1"
The information alarm is acknowledged with the final acknowledgment from M06
...

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 471
Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

T0 Task to PLC: new tool from 0/0 to 0/0

old tool from 9998/1 to 9999/1
M06 Information alarm 17212 "...manual tool "MILLER_120"
Duplo number 00001 take from spindle / tool holder 1"
With the final acknowledgment from M06
a. The information alarm is acknowledged
b. The identifier "manual tool" is deleted
Example 2
(milling machine, $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, 1 x spindle, 1 x chain-type magazine,
double gripper)
The "FACE MILLER_120" tool is loaded directly onto the spindle (e.g. using an HMI operator
command) and is then loaded into the magazine using T0/M06.

Task to PLC: new tool from 9999/1 to 9998/1

Identifier "manual tool" is not set, no information alarm
T0 Task to PLC: new tool from 0/0 to 0/0
old tool from 9998/1 to 1/x
As this does not involve a manual tool, the NC performs an empty location search and
places the tool in the magazine.
M06 No information alarm, as it does not involve a manual tool.

Supplementary conditions
In conjunction with tool selection, tool change and offset selection, only problems associated
with the offset block technique can be rectified that have arisen because of programming errors
or incorrectly defined data in the NC.

7.7.2 Tool change with manual tools

Tool change sequence

If a tool change is initiated, the NC searches for the selected tool and detects that no suitable
tool is available in the magazine. After a suitable tool is not found in the magazine, then a search
is made in the other tools that are not loaded. The tool with the status "active" is selected from
these. If an active tool does not exist, a replacement tool – corresponding to the selected search
strategy – is selected.
If a suitable tool is found, then the manual tool can be loaded.
The following cases are possible during a tool change, for example:
● The manual tool is manually removed from the spindle and the new tool is manually
reinserted.
● The manual tool is manually removed from the spindle and the new tool is manually loaded
into the spindle via the magazine.

Tool management
472 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

The manual tool change from the spindle to the spindle then proceeds as follows:
1. The "Perform change" request is issued.
2. The old manual tool is removed from spindle 1.
3. The new manual tool is inserted into spindle 1
4. The "Perform change" request is acknowledged.

Note
If the manual tool is loaded, alarm 17212: "Channel %1, Manual tool %3, Duplo No. %2, load
to tool holder %4" is output. The alarm is confirmed by the tool-change acknowledgement from
the PLC.
The information alarms can be hidden ($MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2).

Note
It is not permissible that the PLC rejects a manual tool preselected from the NC (tool rejection,
also refer to MD20310 $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK).
The tool state "CHANGEACTIVE" is taken into account corresponding to the setting in
"$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK".
A manual tool is always inserted via the spindle change position in DB72, also for the setting
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0.

Magazine location 9999/1 for manual tools

For manual tools, magazine location 1 in Magazine 9999 has a special significance.
Typically, as a result of the magazine configuration that is created on the HMI, the magazine
with number 9999 is defined as loading magazine and has at least one magazine location,
which has the number 1. As a consequence, in most cases magazine 9999 has a magazine
location 1 with the property "loading point".
For the preparation and change command from the NC or its acknowledgment, normally only
locations associated with real magazines and tool holders are involved. However, if magazine
location 1 of magazine 9999 is specified as source location of the tool to be loaded or as target
location of a tool to be changed out, then it involves a "virtual magazine location address", which
under certain circumstances, has nothing to do with the actually available magazine location 1
in magazine 9999. This can then be identified in so much that
● a tool can be loaded into the actual magazine location without an error message being
output and
● a tool at magazine location 9999/1 - assuming that magazine 9999 is defined as a loading
magazine - is not found when selecting a tool.

Block search, program test

In a block search, there is no difference to a normal tool change. However, the corresponding
alarms are not generated.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 473
Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

No change commands are output to the PLC during the block search. If a manual tool needs to
be loaded when the NC is first started, then this can be achieved using magazine location 1 in
magazine 9999 and output of the corresponding alarm.
The data for the tools and magazines has to remain unchanged in the NC during the program-
test mode. A manual tool that has been loaded during program-test selection is therefore
removed in terms of its data from the tool holder and saved internally. The stored manual tool
is loaded back into the tool holder in response to PLC task "Return manual tool from magazine
9999, location 1".

Note
Several tool holders and manual tools can exist in the program test mode because of the
technology used for the internal storing.

Manual tools for circular magazines (change with T command)

Manual tools are loaded and removed via the spindle interface in the DB72 - with the exception
of a special case. The interface number is the number of the spindle / tool holder that was
assigned to the turret. The special case occurs if the tool in the spindle is a manual tool. A new
tool, which is located in the turret, is programmed. In this case, the command in DB73 is output
in the corresponding turret interface. In this case, the manual tool must first be removed. The
tool be loaded into the turret must be swiveled into the machining position. The command then
has to be acknowledged.

7.7.3 Role of the PLC for manual tools

Changing manual tools

The manual tools are identified in the interface to the PLC by the Magazine location no. 1 in
the magazine 9999. As a consequence, the basic PLC program interprets this as involving a
manual tool and sets the interface signals DB72.DBx(n) bit 5 and bit 6 "Replace or load manual
tool". The PLC user program must ensure that a safe state exists in order that the user can
perform the manual tool change.
The following bytes in DB72 (Page 128) are filled during a tool change:
● DBB0.0; The interface defines the loading point. Interface 1 with loading point 1 is assigned
to the spindle.
● DBW(n+24); Number of the source magazine.
● DBW(n+26); Location number in the source magazine.
● DBW(n+28); Number of the target magazine.
● DBW(n+30); Location number
These target addresses are communicated to FC8/FC6 via the following parameters:
● "NewToolMag" contains DB72.DBW(n+20)
● "NewToolLoc" contains DB72.DBW(n+26)

Tool management
474 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

● "OldToolMag" contains DB72.DBW(n+28)

● "OldToolLoc" contains DB72.DBW(n+30)
● "Status (Page 159)" conveys whether the tool change has been successfully completed.
The interface is then filled as follows (n = 4 for spindle 1)

'% /RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQWV 1&.!3/&

)& 3DUDPHWHUV 0HDQLQJ
%\WH %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW %LW
6WDUW 758( 7UDQVIHULVEHLQJVWDUWHG
,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH
'%% 7DVN,GHQW  '%LQWHUIDFH
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66

,QWHUIDFH 66 DFWLYH 7DVN,GHQW1R  ,QWHUIDFH

'%%
66 66 66 66 66 66 66  66
1HZ7RRO0DJ '%'%: 6RXUFHPDJD]LQHRIQHZWRRO
7RRO 5H ,QVHUW 2OGWRRO 7 3UHSDUH ([HFXWH 2EOLJD
UHPDLQV SODFH PDQXDO LQ%/ FKDQJH FKDQJH WRU\ 1HZ7RRO/RF '%'%: 6RXUFHORFDWLRQRIQHZWRRO
LQ PDQXDO WRRO Q 0 FKDQJH
'%% VSLQGOH WRRO 2OG7RRO0DJ '%'%: 7DUJHWPDJD]LQHIRUROGWRRO

2OG7RRO/RF '%'%: 7DUJHWORFDWLRQIRUROGWRRO

'DWDLQ 5HVHUYHG $FNQ
'% 6WDW 6WDWXV  2SHUDWLRQFRPSOHWHG
'%% 
0XOWLWRRO/RF  0XOWLWRROORFDWLRQ

'%: %XIIHU,' IL[HGYDOXH

'%: /RFDWLRQLQEXIIHU

'%: 0DJ1R6RXUFHIRUQHZWRRO
([DPSOH5HSODFHPDQXDOWRRO
'%: /RFDWLRQ1R6RXUFHIRUQHZWRRO '%'%:  
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUROGWRRO
'%'%:  
'%: 0DJ1R7DUJHWIRUROGWRRO '%'%:  

Figure 7-39 Change manual tool DB72

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 475
Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

PLC sample programs

The following sample programs (description of DB150 (Page 119)) show the acknowledgement
of loading via interface 1. To this end, the network is programmed in an FC150 user block.

Sample program "Load magazine"

NETWORK TITLE =Carry out acknowledgement of change
U E 87.7; //Signal for the acknowledgement
U DB72.DBX 0.0; //Interface 1 active
U DB72.DBX 4.1; //Change active
U DB72.DBX 4.2;
FP M 156.1;
SPBN M690;
L 2;
T DB150.DBB 0; //DB72
L 1;
T DB150.DBB 1; //Interface 1
L DB72.DBW 24;
OW W#16#0;
SPN M694; //T0? No->
T DB150.DBW 2;
T DB150.DBW 4;
SPA M693;
M694: L DB72.DBW 20;
T DB150.DBW 2; //Source magazine of new tool
L DB72.DBW 22;
T DB150.DBW 4; //Source location of new tool
M693: L DB72.DBW 28;
T DB150.DBW 6; //Target magazine for old tool
L DB72.DBW 30;
T DB150.DBW 8; //Target location for old tool
L 1;
T DB150.DBW 10; //Status 1
U DB72.DBX 5.7;
SPB M692;
L -1;
T DB150.DBW 12;
SPA M691;
M692: L DB1072.DBW 10;
T DB150.DBW 12; //Multitool location
M691: SET ;
S DB150.DBX 16.0; //Start FC6
M690: NOP 0;

Tool management
476 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.7 Using manual tools

Example of a transfer with FC6

NETWORK
TITLE =Tool management status transfer
CALL FC 6 (//Tool management transfer block
Start := DB150.DBX 16.0,//Start
TaskID := DB150.DBB 0,
TaskIDNo := DB150.DBB 1,
NewToolMag := DB150.DBW 2,//Pos new tool
NewToolLoc := DB150.DBW 4,
OldToolMag := DB150.DBW 6,//Pos old tool
OldToolLoc := DB150.DBW 8,
Status := DB150.DBW 10,//Status
MultitoolLoc := DB150.DBW 12,
Ready := DB150.DBX 16.1,
Error := DB150.DBW 14);
U DB150.DBX 16.1; //Prompt ready
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start
L DB150.DBW 14; //Error information
L 0;
<>I ; //Evaluate error
R DB150.DBX 16.0; //Reset start

Old tool manual tool, new tool magazine tool

The old tool can be removed from the spindle by hand and the new tool can be loaded into the
spindle from a real magazine. A tool change could go as follows:
1. "Execute change" job.
2. Remove tool from the spindle (interim acknowledgement spindle -> loading point)
3. New tool from magazine to gripper 1 (interim acknowledgement magazine -> gripper 1)
4. New tool from gripper 1 to spindle (interim acknowledgement gripper 1 -> spindle)
5. Acknowledge "Execute change" job.
In accordance with the individual steps, the DB72 and the individual interim acknowledgements
must be programmed in the user program via FC6/FC8.

See also
FC8: TM_TRANS - transfer block for tool management (Page 155)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 477
Description of functions
7.8 Search for tool

7.8 Search for tool

7.8.1 Strategies for tool searches

The tool search is initiated by the preparation command (T selection). The search begins for a
tool to load in the spindle.
In the default setting, tool searches are always performed on a magazine-specific basis,
i.e. with this setting for the search strategy, the search is performed in the magazine from which
the last change was carried out.

Tool group
The tools with the same identifier (name or Ident) but different duplo numbers are combined to
form one tool group. The tool identifier is programmed in the part program with the NC address,
i.e. only the tool group is specified during preparation.

Tool search
In order to move a tool from a physical magazine to a spindle it must have the following
characteristics:
● Tool status must be "enabled"
● Tool status must not be "disabled" (exceptions: NC command TCA as well as PLC interface
signal "Tool disable inactive")
● Tool status may not be "currently being changed"
● Tool must not already be used by a spindle other than the requesting spindle.
● Tool must be present in the magazine location (except for manual tools)
● This magazine must be linked to the requesting spindle via a distance relationship
($TC_MDP2)
● This magazine must not have the status "disabled".
The explicit tool is requested at the time of the tool call. The request is made for a special
spindle (general tool holder); this is the number of the address extension of T. At this point in
time, user interface DB72 is written for the relevant spindle and must be evaluated by the PLC
user program.
The tool search strategy is defined using the system variable $TC_MAMP2 for the TO area,
with the system variable $TC_MAP10[Mag_No] magazine-specific. With bit 0 to bit 1, a search
is made according to the criteria active tool and lowest duplo number. The "search criterion" for
tool wear uses bit 3 to bit 4. Bit 7 is used to set whether the tool search is made on a magazine-
for-magazine basis or across all linked magazines.
Setting bit 7=1 means that the search strategies defined using bits 0, 1, 2 start with the search
from the 1st magazine of the distance table. (The sequence in the distance table is defined
using the programming sequence of $TC_MDP2.) The standard setting is bit 7=0. The search
starts in the magazine from which the previous tool that was loaded was taken.

Tool management
478 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.8 Search for tool

Setting bit 6 means that a search is first made in the magazine currently being considered. This
is only effective in conjunction with bit 7=1. The strategies, where the search always starts in
the first magazine of the distance table are described in Section "Magazine blocks $TC_MAMP
(Page 197)".

Note
Bit 3 = 1 and bit 4 = 1 (search criterion "tool wear") are only significant when the monitoring
function is active (defined by $TC_TP9). Otherwise they have no effect on the suitability check.
The monitoring functions are essentially cutting edge-specific. This means that the wear values
of all cutting edges of the tool are regarded. Application of this search strategy is generally not
practical for multi-edge tools.

Note
The tool search strategies apply equally for all magazine types (chain, box-type and circular)
but not for the buffer magazine.

Search strategies for tool search ($TC_MAMP2 or $TC_MAP10)

$TC_MAMP2/$TC_ Search strategies Meaning

MAP10
Bit0=0 Search sequence Take the first available tool found in the tool group. The search starts
in the magazine from which the last change took place (default set‐
ting).
Bit0=1 Active tool in the magazine Select the "active" tool in the magazine of the previously changed
tool, otherwise search for replacement tool with lowest duplo number.
If no tool is found in this magazine, the search is continued in the other
associated magazines.
Bit1 Next tool Search for the next replacement tool at the shortest possible distance
from the current magazine position.
Bit2 Active tool Select the "active" tool, otherwise the replacement tool with the lowest
number contained in $TC_TP10 is searched for.
Bit3 Lowest actual value Search for tool in the group with the lowest actual value for the moni‐
tored quantity.
Bit4 Highest actual value Search for tool in the group with the highest actual value for the moni‐
tored quantity.
Bit5 Reserved
Bit6 Search current magazine First searches in the magazine currently being considered (this is only
effective in conjunction with bit 7=1)
Bit7=0 Starting point of the tool search The tool search starts in the magazine from which the last changed
tool came.
Bit7=1 Starting point of the tool search The tool search always starts in the 1st magazine in the distance table.

Note
Bit7=1 + bit0=1 or bit2=1, if an "active tool" is not found in the magazine, then - if available - the
active tool is selected from another magazine linked to the tool holder.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 479
Description of functions
7.8 Search for tool

Tool in disabled magazine location

Tools that are located in a disabled magazine location ($TC_MPP4, Bit 0=1) cannot, after a tool
change, be returned to the original magazine because that location is now disabled. With
machine data MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, you can set whether tools
located in disabled magazine locations will be included in the search:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Bit 8=0: Tools in disabled magazine locations are
not included in the search (factory setting).
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Bit 8=1: Tools in disabled magazine locations are
included in the search. With $TC_TP8 Bit 17=1, you can mark tools so that they can also be
placed in a disabled magazine location or adjacent location with $TC_MPP6, see also Tool-
related data $TC_TP (Page 177).

Tool with the status "to be unloaded"

The machine data MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE is used to set whether
tools with this status are to be taken into consideration during the tool search:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, Bit 9 = 0: A tool that has the status "to be
unloaded" ($TC_TP8, Bit 10 = 1) continues to be considered during the tool search. That is
the active default setting.
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, Bit 9 = 1: A tool that has the status "to be
unloaded" ($TC_TP8, Bit 10 = 1) is treated like a disabled tool, i.e. it is no longer taken into
consideration during a tool search and can no longer be selected within the scope of T
programming.

Example, tool search routine

A tool change at a spindle shall take place.
The search sequence for the correct tool is as follows:
1. The control checks whether the tool which is called is already located on the spindle.
2. If buffer locations are linked to the spindle (see $TC_MSLR), the control checks whether a
suitable tool is already located in one of these.
3. The tool search starts in the 1st magazine of the distance table ($TC_MDP2) according to
the selected search strategy.
(Applies only if bit 7 of $TC_MAMP2 = 1; otherwise, the search starts in the magazine from
which the last loaded tool was fetched.)
4. If no tool is found in the first magazine, the search is repeated in the next magazine of the
distance table.
5. If all the magazines that are linked to the spindle have been searched and no suitable tool
found, the search is terminated with an alarm (22069 or 22068).
6. If the function "manual tool" is active, after an unsuccessful search in the magazines - a
search is made in the TO unit for an unloaded tool, but a tool that can also be used. If none
is found, the search is terminated with an alarm.
Any suitable tool with the programmed identifier found (not disabled) in one of the stages
described above will be used.

Tool management
480 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

7.9 Empty location search

7.9.1 Empty location search for a tool – from spindle to magazine

With the T preparation command, a matching empty location is automatically searched for the
spindle tool. The location in which the new tool is stored is still occupied at this time and cannot
therefore be identified as an empty location, the 1:1 interchange is the exception.

Note
Generally, a search is made for an empty location in that magazine from which the current tool
in the toolholder was taken.

Fixed location coding

When searching for an empty location for fixed-location coded tools its previous location in the
magazine is usually retained.
If the search for an empty location for a fixed-location-coded tool is started with a specific
magazine number, that number is ignored. The old tool location is defined as an empty location.
If this number is however an internal magazine number (for a loading or buffer magazine), then
the number is explicitly taken into consideration and the fixed location coding is ignored. This
case arises when loading/unloading tools.
If a location search for a fixed location coded tool is initiated using a specific magazine number
and magazine location number, the fixed location coding is ignored and the specified location
checked as a suitable location for the tool. This is used in the HMI function "Relocating".

Variable location coding

Initially, the procedure for an empty location search is the same as that for a fixed location-
coded tool. If this check fails, the search for a free location is continued. The search is
performed according to the selected search strategy ($TC_MAMP2 / $TC_MAP10). If the
search cannot find an available location with the specified location type in this magazine, a new
search operation based on the location type hierarchy is started in the magazine. A location is
only then considered as a suitable type of location when it applies that "Location type of the
location" is larger than "Location type of the tool", whereby the "larger than" relationship is
defined by the location-type hierarchy. If no free location is found in this magazine, the search
is continued in the next magazine (search strategy).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 481
Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

7.9.2 Search strategy for empty locations

Search strategy
The strategy can be defined with the magazine configuration according to which the search is
made in magazines of TO units for an empty location. If it involves a box-type magazine, then
the search is executed according to the default strategy (forwards search starting at the first
location number).
Possible strategies are listed in the table.

$TC_MAMP2 Search strategies Meaning

Bit 8 = 1 Forwards search The search takes place from location No. 1 in ascending
256 order.
Bit 9 = 1 Forwards search The search takes place from the current location at the
512 change position in ascending order.
Bit 10 =1 Backwards search The search takes place backwards starting from the last
1024 location No.
Bit 11 = 1 Backwards search The search takes place from the current location at the
2048 change position backwards.
Bit 12 = 1 Symmetrical search The search starts at the current location number at the
4096 change position (1st location left, 1st location right,
2nd location left, 2nd location right, etc.).
Bit 13 = 1 1:1 exchange If the location type and size of the old and new tool are the
same, the magazine location of the "new" tool to be loa‐
ded is transferred to the "old" tool to be unloaded – and
vice versa.
The 1:1 interchange acts in addition to other selected
search strategies. If possible, the 1:1 exchange is treated
as a priority.
Bit 14 Magazine search strat‐ =0
egy First search the magazine with a search run across the
location types of the hierarchy of the tool type. If no loca‐
tion is found, then a search run is performed across the
magazines.
=1
Search the location type of the tool in the magazine. If
nothing is found, search run across the magazines. If a
location is still not found, then a search run is repeated
across all magazines with the next location type from the
type hierarchy.
See also Search strategy across magazines (Page 494).

Note
The empty location search strategy is set TO-specific using $TC_MAMP2, magazine-specific
using $TC_MAP10. If the magazine-specific search is not set, when the NC boots, it copies the
value from MAMP2 to MAP10.

Tool management
482 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

Definition of the current magazine position

The current magazine position at the change location is stored in magazine parameter (system
variable) $TC_MAP8. The value is automatically updated by the PLC acknowledgement of a
command, if the new tool is moved. If the magazine or tool is moved without a task from the NC,
the user must correct the actual position. An NC cycle or also the PLC can write to parameter
$TC_MAP8. Either by writing the OPI variable (selected with NCVAR selector block TM;
variable magNrPaces) or with the FC 8/FC 6 (with the parameters TaskIdent=4
TaslIdentNo=channel number, status=5, OldToolMag=9998,OldToolLoc=1). The current
position is parameterized (referred to spindle) in NewToolMag and NewToolLocspindle.

7.9.3 Search procedure for empty locations

The following apply as criteria for the empty location search:
● Location type must coincide with location type of tool. A hierarchy is taken into account.
● Check the tool size.
● Location must have the status "free".
● Location must not be "disabled".
● Magazine must not be "disabled".
The essential search criterion for the empty location search is the magazine location type. The
magazine location type must match the magazine location type entered in the tool-specific data
($TC_TP). The magazine is searched. Each location is checked. If a suitable location is found
the search is terminated.
If a matching location is not found, then a check is made whether there is a magazine location
type hierarchy for the magazine-location type that is entered in the tool. If there is none, the next
magazine is taken if there are further magazines available. If there is a defined hierarchy, then
the search routine is repeated starting at the magazine that has just been searched. If this
search is also unsuccessful, the search moves to the next magazine, assuming another one is
available.

Note
With oversized tools, the location types of the adjacent location are not considered.

7.9.4 Search strategy, 1:1 exchange (old for new)

With this search option, the magazine location of the "new" tool (tool to be loaded) is made
available as the empty location for the ’old’ tool (tool to be unloaded).
It is not assumed that the "new" tool is stored in the magazine location. It only needs to have
been loaded (it may be located on a gripper, for example). If the location in question is not
suitable for the "old" tool, then another appropriate empty location is sought.
Description of function

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 483
Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

The new search strategy for an empty location is preset in the already existing bit-coded system
variable $TC_MAMP2 with bit 13.
If 2 tools (new and old tool) are exchanged 1:1, then the two tools are marked. For this purpose,
bit 14 = 1 is set in tool status ($TC_TP8).
Boundary conditions
With this empty-location search strategy, the NC checks a magazine location that at the point
of time of making the check is normally identified as still occupied by the "new" tool or is still
"reserved for tool from buffer location". This location is defined as an empty location for the "old"
tool if the check gives a positive result.
If the new or old tool is coded as a fixed location tool or the tool size or the location type are not
identical, then the strategy is not used.

Note
The PLC program has to execute the tool transportation operations in the correct sequence for
the tool change:
Remove "new" tool from the magazine location.
Bring the "old" tool to the magazine location.
Otherwise damage may occur to the machine or tool.
The 1:1 exchange can be set as the only search strategy for the buffer magazine (9998).

The empty location search strategy is only effective within tool changes programmed in the part
program. PI services or language commands for an empty location search cannot use this.
Example
This strategy is especially suitable for use with double grippers and tools of the same type
(same size and same location type).
The already defined system variable $TC_MAMP2 includes an additional setting option for the
new empty-location search strategy.

Bit Value Meaning

0
... Tool search strategy
7
8

Tool management
484 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

... Search strategy for empty location

13 The magazine location for the "new" tool to be loaded is transferred to the "old"
tool to be replaced and vice versa.
Precondition is that the tool sizes and location types of the tools match or are
compatible in terms of location hierarchy.
The location of the "new" tool is detected as empty location for the "old" tool even
if the "new" tool is still positioned at this location at the time the check is per‐
formed.
The tool transport must be designed so that the "new" tool is first removed from
the magazine location before the "old" tool is taken to it.
Otherwise, depending on the sequence of the mechanical tool transport opera‐
tions, the machine could be damaged.
The type of empty location search is determined via the bits 8 through 12.
It is not possible for tool change to take place if the "old" tool does not have a
magazine location assigned to it. The tool search strategy is then determined via
bits 8 to 12.

7.9.5 Tool search in wear group

Overview
If "Wear group" function is used:
In the case of existing tool-search strategies, the search refers only to the active wear group,
i.e. only those tools are considered during a search within a tool group that are at magazine
locations of the active wear group.
Tools in magazine locations with wear group number 0 are also checked for suitability.
If there are no spare tools available, then all $TC_MPP5 parameters of the current groups are
negated and all locations are individually disabled by this. $TC_MAP9 is also negated (wear
group disabled). All active tools are reset if this response has been configured via $TC_MAMP3
(bit 1 = 1).
The next wear group is called ($TC_MAP9 is assigned the number of the next wear group that
can be activated).
If no further groups are available the search is terminated with an alarm. In such a case, the
disabled tools should be replaced, if necessary. In order to enable the wear groups again, the
wear group numbers of the magazine locations must be again set to values > 0.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 485
Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

Search strategies
There are two search strategies for finding the next available wear group that can be activated:
● Starting from the lowest magazine location number, the replacement tools are searched
through location by location according to the way they are sorted internally (time-optimized
search).
The wear group that is the subject of the search is found by searching for the first tool that
is assigned to a wear group that can be activated.
● A search is made for the wear group with the lowest enabled wear group number (the first
that can be activated).

Search in several magazines

The magazine definition for a machine defines whether the search is to be performed in one or
several magazines.
If the search is conducted in several magazines while several wear groups are being used,
always make sure that a wear group can only ever be assigned to one magazine.
The search is conducted according to the following priorities:
1. The search is performed in a magazine according to the configuration and strategy.
2. The search is performed in the active wear group.
3. The set tool-search strategy is taken into consideration.

Activation
In order to work with wear groups, the magazine locations must be assigned to wear groups via
system variable $TC_MPP5 and the function must be activated via the machine data.
In addition, the number of the wear group with which machining is to commence must be
assigned to system variable $TC_MAP9 of the magazine to be selected (value > 0).
For the configuration of the machine, it is defined by $TC_MAMP3 how the tool status shall
change when switching from one wear group to the next (defaulted is an unchanged tool status).

Note
The PLC signal "tool selection from disabled tools" has no effect when resetting the tool state.

Example: Tool search in wear group

$TC_MAMP3 = 3 - change "active" status of tools
Target
● The tools must be set to "active" when a wear group is activated.
● When a wear group is disabled all the tools contained in that wear group should also be
deactivated.

Tool management
486 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

Specifications
● Circular magazine number 1 (6 locations)
● The circular magazine is to be divided into two parts:
Locations 2 and 3 form wear group 1.
Locations 4, 5, 6 and 1 form wear group 2.
● $TC_MAP9 = 1 (wear group 1 is "active")
Assignment to the wear group is achieved by:
$TC_MPP5[1,2] = 1
TC_MPP5[1,3] = 1
$TC_MPP5[1,4] = 2
$TC_MPP5[1,5] = 2
$TC_MPP5[1,6] = 2
$TC_MPP5[1,1] = 2
The tools with T=10 and T=11 are assigned to wear group 1. As wear group 1 was activated,
tools T=10, 11 were therefore also set to "active" (via $TC_MAMP3, bit 0=1).

Note
NC command SETTA (see Section "SETTA - Activate tool from wear group (Page 259)") can
also be used to set these tools to active.

Tool assignment:

$TC_MPP6[1,2] = 10 ;T=10 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=1 tool state "ac-

tive"
$TC_MPP6[1,3] = 11 ;T=11 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=1 tool state "ac-
tive"
$TC_MPP6[1,4] = 12 ;T=12 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=2
$TC_MPP6[1,5] = 13 ;T=13 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=2
$TC_MPP6[1,6] = 14 ;T=14 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=3
$TC_MPP6[1,1] = 15 ;T=15 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=3

$TC_MAMP2 = 1
The active tool is to be searched for. If none is available, the next possible tool is to be located.
This tool search strategy includes a check for the number of the active wear group. That is, only
those tools are considered during the search for a tool with the status "active" that are at
magazine locations and that have the number of the currently activated wear group.
T="Tool2"
Tool group "Tool2" consists of tools
T=11, 13, 15.
T=11 is positioned in a location of the active wear group (No. 1) and is "active". The result of the
tool search is T=11.
Machining is continued. T=11 is "disabled" during machining.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 487
Description of functions
7.9 Empty location search

T="Tool1"
Wear group 1 is still active. T=10 is identified as active and suitable for use.
T="Tool2"
The tool group of identifier "Tool2" now has no active tool (has been disabled) and a new tool
has not yet been set to "active". This step is not taken until "Tool2" is reprogrammed. The tools
of the group are examined. In the locations of wear group 1, which is still active, there is no tool
with identifier "Tool2" or any other suitable tool.
This condition causes the next wear group (2) to be activated. Wear group 1 is now no longer
the active wear group. The status of the tools in wear group 1 has been reset (not "active"), as
configured by $TC_MAMP3, bit 1=1.
The tool search is now performed exclusively in wear group 2. Its tools were set to "active" when
the wear group was activated (one tool from each tool group in the wear group because setting
of $TC_MAMP3, bit 0=1).
The turret is now assigned as follows:

$TC_MPP6[1,2]=10 T=10 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=1 ;tool state "not active"
$TC_MPP6[1,3]=11 T=11 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=1 ;tool state "disabled"
$TC_MPP6[1,4]=12 T=12 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=2 ;tool state "active"
$TC_MPP6[1,5]=13 T=13 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=2 ;tool state "active"
$TC_MPP6[1,6]=14 T=14 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo No.=3
$TC_MPP6[1,1]=15 T=15 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo No.=3

In the example T=13 is now taken as the next available tool "Tool2".

Note
The tool search only then generates an alarm when no further spare tool available in the tool
group with the given identifier is found and no further wear group can be activated.

Control system response

Control behavior at Power On, mode group change, reset, block search and Repos is described
below.
Configuration $TC_MAMP3, bit 0=1 (activate internally)
At Power On, the NC checks whether the value of $TC_MAP9 > 0, i.e. whether a wear group
has been selected. In this case the tools of that wear group are checked again and the value
for $TC_MPP5 of each location in question is set to positive. In addition, the status of the tool
in the location is set to "active".
Configuration $TC_MAMP3, bit 1=1 (disable internally)
At Power On, the NC checks whether $TC_MAP9 is negative, i.e. a wear group has been
disabled. In this case the tools of the disabled wear group are checked again and the value for
$TC_MPP5 of the location in question is set to negative. The "active" status of the tool in the
location is reset.

Tool management
488 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

7.10 Location type hierarchies

7.10.1 Hierarchies of location types in magazines

Hierarchies of location types

If a tool is to be loaded into a real magazine, the location type of the tool decides which locations
are available in the magazines. The system variables $TC_TP7 and $TC_MPP2 must be
defined and match, i.e. $TC_MPP2 is of type 'match all'. The tools of any type fit into those
locations.
To optimize the assignment of locations in a magazine, hierarchies can be defined for the
magazine locations. The hierarchy level of the location type of the tool decides which locations
in a real magazine will be available for the tool.

Application example:
For example, by using location type hierarchies, you can ensure that heavy tools are stored at
the center of the magazine, but that the preferred storage location for light tools is in the outer
region of the magazine. If there are no vacant magazine locations in the outer region, magazine
locations at the center of the magazine can also be occupied by lighter tools. Several "weight
classes" can be defined, which are mapped onto the hierarchy levels.
When a tool search is started, a suitable magazine location is searched for, from the highest to
the lowest hierarchy level. The highest hierarchy level is equal to the location type of the tool
conducting the search and the lowest hierarchy level is equal to the location type "match all".
The next free location type with the highest hierarchy level is then selected.
It is possible to define several hierarchies. The valid hierarchy is then determined by the
magazine location type of the tool conducting the search.

Setting important machine data

When hierarchies are defined, the number of possible hierarchies and the number of entries in
a magazine location hierarchy must be defined.

Machine data Description

MD18078 In this machine data, you define the maximum possible number of hierarchies (up to 32)
MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERAR‐ in MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES. "0" means that the magazine location type hi‐
CHIES erarchy is not available.
MD18079 MM_MAX_HIERAR‐ In this machine data, you define the maximum possible number of location types in a
CHY_ENTRIES magazine location type hierarchy (up to 32) in MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 489
Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

Defining a hierarchy
The location types of a tool and magazine locations are specified by numbers. Accordingly, the
hierarchies are also specified by numbers, which are defined in system variable $TC_MPTH:

System variable $TC_MPTH

$TC_MPTH[hierarchyNo – 1, hierarchyLevel – 1]
hierarchyNo Number of the hierarchy if several hierarchies are defined
0 < hierarchy–no ≤ $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
hierarchyLevel Hierarchy level within a hierarchy
0 < hierarchy–level ≤ $MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES

For examples of hierarchy definitions, see also Magazine location type hierarchy $TC_MPTH
(Page 193).

Hierarchy types
Two hierarchy types are implemented. With system variable $TC_MAMP2, you define how a
matching location type will be searched for:
● $TC_MAMP2, Bit15=0: Conventional location type hierarchy
● $TC_MAMP2, Bit15=1: Alternative location type hierarchy

Note
Hierarchy will be deleted
If you move from one location type hierarchy to the other, alarm 17255 is output warning you
that all hierarchy definitions will be deleted ($TC_MPTH[x,y]=9999).

Definitions
● $TC_MPTH = “9999” is the default setting of the system variables and designates a non-
defined location type. If this value is contained in a hierarchy, it will be interpreted as non-
existent and the search will move to the next lowest hierarchy level.
● $TC_MPTH = “0” defines the location type "match all". This value must not be included in a
hierarchy table ($TC_MPTH) because it is always placed at the end as the lowest hierarchy
level.
● Tools with location type "0" can only be loaded into magazine locations with location type
"match all".
● The location types of locations in internal magazines must also match the tool.

Tool management
490 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

● Tools with a location type to which no hierarchy is assigned, are checked against a "mini
hierarchy". This mini hierarchy only consists of the highest hierarchy level (= location type
of the tool conducting the search) and the lowest hierarchy level (= location type "match all").
● The definition of the location type hierarchy always applies to one TO unit. This means that
the hierarchies and how they are selected are always defined with the cross-magazine
system variable $TC_MAMP2 and not with the magazine-specific system variable
$TC_MAP10. The relevant bits in $TC_MAP10 are defined by the corresponding bits in
$TC_MAMP2.

System variables
You can request information about the configured magazine location type hierarchies with the
following system variables:
● $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT / $P_MAGHLT - Location type hierarchies (Page 315)

7.10.2 Conventional location type hierarchy $TC_MAMP2, Bit15=0

Conventional location type hierarchy

For this hierarchy type, the location type of the tool conducting the search is searched for in the
table of system variable $TC_MPTH[m,n]. If the location type is found, this hierarchy is used
and evaluated from this level right to the end.

Example:
Example: Search for an empty location for a tool with location type "21".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 491
Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

+LHUDUFK\QXPEHU
    

    

+LHUDUFK\OHYHOLQGHFUHDVLQJRUGHU
+LHUDUFK\RI     
ORFDWLRQW\SHV

    

    

    

PDWFKDOO     

 ([DPSOHORFDWLRQ /RFDWLRQW\SH  /RFDWLRQW\SHQRW

W\SH PDWFKDOO GHILQHG

Figure 7-40 Conventional location type hierarchy

Location type "21" is found in hierarchy "3". The search for a free magazine location in hierarchy
"3" is performed according to the following scheme:
1. Search for location type "21", no hits?
2. Search for location type "3", no hits?
3. Search for location type "45", no hits?
4. Search for location type "match all" (="0")
The following applies to conventional location type hierarchies:
● In the system variable array $TC_MPTH, each location type must only exist once.
● The number of the hierarchy is not relevant to the hierarchy selection. This means:
hierarchies can be swapped and empty hierarchies (= all values of a hierarchy are "9999")
have no meaning.

7.10.3 Alternative location type hierarchy $TC_MAMP2, Bit15=1

Alternative location type hierarchy

In an alternative location type hierarchy, the location type of the tool for which a location is being
searched for directly determines the hierarchy in system variable $TC_MPTH[m,n].

Tool management
492 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

First, a free magazine location of the relevant location type is searched for (basic level of the
hierarchy). If the search fails, the hierarchy with the number of the location type is searched.
Finally, a location of location type "match all" (= "0") is searched for.

Example:
An empty location for a tool with location type "2" is searched for.

+LHUDUFK\QXPEHU
    

+LHUDUFK\OHYHOLQGHFUHDVLQJRUGHU
    

+LHUDUFK\RI     

ORFDWLRQW\SHV

    

    

    

PDWFKDOO     

 ([DPSOHORFDWLRQ /RFDWLRQW\SH  /RFDWLRQW\SHQRW

W\SH PDWFKDOO GHILQHG

Figure 7-41 Alternative location type hierarchy

A free magazine location is searched for as follows:

1. Search for a free magazine location of location type "2" if the search fails:
2. Search acc. to hierarchy 2:
– Search for a free magazine location of location type "55", no match?
– Search for a free magazine location of location type "808", no match?
– Search for a free magazine location of location type "45", again no match?
3. Search for a free magazine location of location type "match all" (= "0").
It thus follows that:
● the array of system variables $TC_MPTH can contain location types more than once (see
location type "808" in the above example).
● Hierarchies must not be swapped
● For tools with location type > $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES, the search is
performed with the "mini hierarchy".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 493
Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

7.10.4 Search strategy across magazines

Search strategy
The search within a magazine or across magazine boundaries can be defined as a search
strategy. The search strategy is set with Bit14 of system variable $TC_MAMP2.
The set search strategy also applies to the "mini hierarchy", which consists only of the location
type of the tool and the general location type "match all".

Example magazines:
Hierarchy is defined as follows: 87 - 21 - 3 - 9999 - 62 - 0

Magazine 1
$TC_MPP2[1,1]=0 $TC_MPP2[1,2]=62 $TC_MPP2[1,3]=9999
$TC_MPP2[1,4]=521 $TC_MPP2[1,5]=3 $TC_MPP2[1,6]=21
$TC_MPP2[1,7]=87 $TC_MPP2[1,8]=21 $TC_MPP2[1,9]=62
$TC_MPP2[1,10]=3 $TC_MPP2[1,11]=0

Magazine 2
$TC_MPP2[2,1]=0 $TC_MPP2[2,2]=62 $TC_MPP2[2,3]=9999
$TC_MPP2[2,4]=521 $TC_MPP2[2,5]=3 $TC_MPP2[2,6]=21
$TC_MPP2[2,7]=87

Search within a magazine has priority

An empty location for a tool is first searched for within one magazine before the search is
continued in the next magazine. This search method is performed with the
setting $TC_MAMP2, Bit14=0. See also Strategies for tool searches (Page 478).
A tool of location type "21" is searched for.

∎ Magazine 1 Magazine 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
87 x x
21 1 2 9
3 3 4 10
62 5 6 11
0 7 8 12
∎ x x x x

① = hierarchy level
② = Other magazine location types (9999)

Tool management
494 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

The search for an empty location is initially performed within magazine 1. If there were no empty
location in magazine 1, the search would continue in magazine 2. The numbers express the
priority of the matches.

Search with priority to hierarchy

An empty location search for a tool starts with the search for a free magazine location with the
highest hierarchy level across all suitable magazines. Then the search is continued with the
next lowest hierarchy level, again across all suitable magazines.
This type of search is performed with the setting $TC_MAMP2, Bit14=1.
A tool of location type "21" is searched for.

∎ Magazine 1 Magazine 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
87 x x
21 1 2 3
3 4 5 6
62 7 8 9
0 10 11 12
∎ x x x x

① = hierarchy level
② = Other magazine location types (9999)
The empty location search starts in magazine 1 with the highest hierarchy. The search for an
empty location then continues within the hierarchy from magazine to magazine.

7.10.5 Mini hierarchies

Properties of mini hierarchies

A mini hierarchy is created for a location type that does not belong to any hierarchy. It consists
only of the location type itself and location type "match all" (="0").
The following example shows a magazine with a mini hierarchy of location types "0" and "521".
An empty location is searched for a tool with location type "521".

Hierarchy level Magazine

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
521 1
0 2 3
Other x x x x x x x x

Search strategy "priority in magazine" in this case yields an empty location of location type
"521" at magazine location "4". In subsequent empty location searches, locations "2" and "3"
are found under location type "0".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 495
Description of functions
7.10 Location type hierarchies

Revoking a mini hierarchy

For compatibility reasons, it is possible to revoke a mini hierarchy with $TC_MAMP2 Bit16=1.
The empty location search then no longer differentiates between the general location type,
e.g."521", and location type "0" = match all. The search yields the next suitable location.
The empty location search then follows the setting in $TC_MAMP2 Bit14, see also Search
strategy across magazines (Page 494).

Tool management
496 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

7.11.1 Monitoring types

Quantity
The quantity monitoring, initiated by the NC command SETPIECE (Page 235), considers the
cutting edges of all of the tools that have been used. In this case, it must be observed that there
can be several spindles.

Service life
Tool life monitoring is only performed on the tool edge that is currently in use. As soon as the
path axes are moved (with the exception of G00), then monitoring time of the active cutting
edge is decremented. If the tool life for a cutting edge expires during machining, the tool is
disabled as a whole.

Wear
As is the case for the time and workpiece count (quantity) monitoring, the prerequisite for using
the wear monitoring function is that tool monitoring is enabled. In addition, wear monitoring
must be enabled using machine data (MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK; Bit 5=1). The wear
parameters of the cutting edge correspond to the local offsets (additive offset parameters), see
Section "Location of use-dependent offsets fine (additive offsets) $TC_SCP (Page 175)".

Service life, quantity

The monitoring value runs from a value greater than 0 to 0. The monitoring setpoint has no
affect on the monitoring, this value is only evaluated when reactivating a tool.

Tool life, workpiece count and wear

The monitoring type for the tools is generally set when creating or loading. You can change the
monitoring type at any time by changing the setting for system variable MD $TC_TP9.
The tool management monitors a tool for tool life, workpiece count, tool wear state or additive
offset with prewarning limit.
The monitoring counter triggering the tool status change depends on the system variable
$TC_TP9 (= type of monitoring):
● $TC_TP9 = 0 → No monitoring
● $TC_TP9 = 1 → Time-monitored tool
● $TC_TP9 = 2 → Workpiece count-monitored tool
● $TC_TP9 = 4 → Wear-monitored tool
● $TC_TP9 = 8 → Additive offset

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 497
Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Several monitoring types can be activated simultaneously for one tool. Of the monitoring types,
only wear monitoring and additive offset monitoring are mutually exclusive.
If the monitoring criterion (tool life/workpiece count and wear) for a tool that is currently located
in the spindle expires, it remains in use. Machining is not automatically interrupted to replace
the tool with a replacement tool. The tool is not disabled until the next time it is selected. Since
it is no longer "available", a search is made for a replacement tool and the replacement tool is
then loaded into the spindle. The tool change has to be organized by the PLC or come from the
NC cycle.

Prewarning limit
The prewarning limits are defined via the following system variables:
● $TC_MOP1 - prewarning limit for tool life
● TC_MOP3 - prewarning limit for workpiece count
● $TC_MOP5 - prewarning limit wear
The monitoring counters count from a set setpoint > 0 down to zero. If a cutting edge has
reached its prewarning limit, then the whole tool is set to the status "Prewarning limit reached"
($TC_TP8[i]=4).
At the same time a message is output that a replacement tool may be required.

Monitoring threshold
The monitoring counters count from a set setpoint > 0 down to zero. When a tool's cutting edge
(one of up to 12 cutting edges) has reached its limit value, the whole tool is set to status
"monitoring threshold reached".
The setpoints are defined via system variables:
● $TC_MOP11 - tool life setpoint
● $TC_MOP13 - workpiece count setpoint
● $TC_MOP15 - wear setpoint
In wear or additive offset monitoring, the actual values of the monitoring counters are compared
with a maximum value. If the values of one cutting edge exceed its particular monitoring limit
values, the whole tool is set to status "disabled" = SUSPENDED.

Resetting a status
Once the prewarning limit or monitoring limit is reached, a tool is set to the status
LIMITWARNING or status SUSPENDED.
The states are reset by the following operations (manufacturer cycle, PLC, user):
● Monitoring counter is set to a value > 0.
● Monitoring counter is set to a value > prewarning limit.
● A new initial value for the monitoring counter is set.
● Reactivate the tool (HMI user interface or NC command) (RESETMON - NC command for
setpoint activation (Page 263))

Tool management
498 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

The monitoring counters are the corresponding actual values:

● $TC_MOP2 - tool life - actual value
● $TC_MOP4 - workpiece count - actual value
● $TC_MOP6 - wear - actual value
The tool status changes automatically when the data changes. This means that the set status
is removed again when a limit is reached.
If the tool has several cutting edges, all of the cutting edges must be beyond the monitoring
limits.

Tool monitoring alarms

When the prewarning limit or the monitoring limit of a tool is reached, one of the alarms 6010,
6011, 6012, 6013 (cancel clear delete condition) is output for information purposes.

Note
Suppressing alarms
Alarms can be suppressed with machine data $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK and
$MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK2.

With the NC command SETPIECE(...) or PI command _N_TMPCIT (= other workpiece

counters) it is possible for several tools to reach a limit value and therefore result in multiple
alarms being issued.
No alarm is output if a limit value is reached as the result of changing data via variable service
(OPI).

Check monitoring status

A check can be made during program execution by issuing the programmed tool change
command (e.g. "M06" for milling) without a T call to see whether a monitoring function has
responded. If it has, tool life management will search for a replacement tool and a request for
a tool change issued.

Enable memory and function

In general, in machine data
● MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and
● MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
at least bits 0 and 1 must be set. This prepares the memory for the monitoring data and enables
the function.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 499
Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Enabling tool life monitoring

For the tool life monitoring, in addition, in the channel-specific MD20320
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK, the spindle (the tool holder) or the spindles must be
specified, for which a tool life check should be performed. This machine data is bit-coded.
Example: MD20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
● Value = 1, only spindle number 1
● Value = 2, only spindle number 2
● Value = 3, spindle numbers 1 and 2

7.11.2 Tool life monitoring

Monitoring of tool cutting edge

Tool life monitoring is only performed on the tool edge that is currently in use. The spindle (tool
holder) must have been activated beforehand (MD20320
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK = spindle no.).
If MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER is > 0, then for MD 20320, the tool
holder number is selected and not the spindle number.

Service life Counting or monitoring is performed in milliseconds.

Disabled If the remaining tool life is less than or equal to 0, the tool is set to "disabled".
After the next tool change it is no longer used.
Monitoring from the The residual tool life is decreased whenever one of the 3 path axes is traversed
NC at machining feedrate (e.g. G01). G00 traversing blocks are not "counted".
Monitoring from PLC You can start and stop time monitoring with PLC signal "Time monitoring active"
DB21-DB30 (channel). Machine data 20310 is used to select whether this con‐
trol type is active.
Prewarning limit Entered during loading or via part program. When the prewarning limit has been
reached, the tool is assigned the status "Prewarning limit reached" (display in
the magazine list).
Special case, limit val‐ The tool life of a tool expires while it is in use. A check is made as to whether this
ues disabled tool is re-programmed by a change operation (e.g. M06 without T
word), and whether the monitoring time has already elapsed. If yes, a replace‐
ment tool is located.

$A-MONIFACT factor
By entering a channel-specific factor which is set before a tool is used for the first time, it is
possible to monitor the different degrees of tool wear resulting from machining different types
of workpiece material. The value by which the time value of the cutting edge is decremented is
multiplied by the current time measurement (from $A_MONIFACT). The write operation is
performed synchronously with the main run.

Tool management
500 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Start and stop the tool life decrementation

Tool life monitoring runs when geometry axes are not traversed with G00 (default setting).
The user can start and stop the time monitoring using PLC signal "Time monitoring active"
(DB21 DBX1.3).
Which type of control is active is set via MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 17.
The default setting (bit 17=0) is standard; i.e. traversing blocks not equal to G00 will increment
the time counter. PLC signal "Time monitoring active" is activated with bit 17 = 1.

Time monitoring hierarchy

The combination of system variable $A_MONIFACT and function "Program test active"
produces the following nested time monitoring structure:
Machine data MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK defines the monitoring control
via G00 or via a PLC signal. Tools on spindles that are activated by machine data MD20320
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK, are time-monitored.
The VDI signal "Program test active" switches the momentarily valid time monitoring on or off;
i.e. "Program test active" has a higher priority than the actual time monitoring.
When time monitoring is active, the service life reduction (as defined by the internal clock) is
multiplied by the factor $A_MONIFACT and the result is subtracted from the current time count
of a tool edge mounted on the spindle.

7.11.3 Workpiece count monitoring

Changing the number of workpieces

The number of workpieces can be changed by:
● Operator action at the HMI
● With a part program command (SETPIECE)
● PI service (TMPCIT) by PLC or HMI-OEM

Workpiece counter per spindle

Every spindle has a "memory" for the cutting edges used on it. With program command
SETPIECE (1) the workpiece counter for the cutting edges that are used on the main spindle
is decremented by 1. The workpiece counter of each spindle can be addressed individually.
The workpiece counter must count all the tools that are used to produce a workpiece. Take into
account that the machine may have several spindles and that different tools can be used
simultaneously.
The cutting edge of a tool is only counted once per spindle.
The part program programmer who programmed SETPIECE can program the parameter as a
function of the material.
SETPIECE (factor * no. of workpieces)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 501
Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Like the factor for time monitoring, this function allows a workpiece count that depends on the
process, the workpiece material or other factors.
Workpiece count can be deactivated via the channel DB.DBX29.5.

Monitoring from the NC The workpiece counter is decremented each time that SETPIECE is
programmed. When the prewarning limit is reached, an information
alarm is output. When the counter reaches the value=0, the tool is
disabled and an alarm is output. The next time the tool is called, the
replacement tool is loaded at change.
Set workpiece counter Entered when creating or loading the tool or via the part program with
e.g. $TC_MOP4=500.
Decrement number of work‐ The number of workpieces must be decremented at the relevant point
pieces in the part program with the NC language command SETPIECE (x, y)
(e.g. SETPIECE(1) → workpiece counter for main spindle tools is de‐
cremented by 1).
The function for decrementing the workpiece count is activated from die
PLC program using a PI command (TMPCIT).
Disabled When the workpiece count has reached zero, the tool is disabled
Prewarning limit Entered when creating or loading the tool or via the part program with
e.g. $TC_MOP3=50. When the prewarning limit has been reached, the
tool is assigned the status "Prewarning limit reached".
Special case, limit values It is not possible to realize a workpiece count for any number of cutting
edges simultaneously! If the monitoring function has been enabled and
activated by machine data, then all spindles can be monitored together
at a time = "Number of cutting edges in the TO area" (= MD) for the
number of cutting edges.
An edge of a tool is only counted once per spindle.

7.11.4 Wear monitoring

The wear monitoring function is only available if the "Tool monitoring" system has been enabled
via machine data.
In addition, wear monitoring must be enabled using machine data (MD18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 5).

Definition
$TC_TP9 = 4; Wear monitoring is active for the tool.
$TC_TP9 = 8 can be set to select the "Additive offset" monitoring function if this is required.
$TC_TP9 = 4
The wear parameters for a tool edge are defined with system variables $TC_DP12, ...,
$TC_DP20.
These are assigned directly to the edge geometry values TC_DP3, ...,$TC_DP11.
$TC_DP10 and $TC_DP11 describe "angles". The other parameters stand for the tool edge
lengths and radii.

Tool management
502 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Only these values are included in the monitoring, i.e. wear parameters $TC_DP19 and
$TC_DP20, which are analogous to system variables $TC_DP10 and $TC_DP11, are not
taken into account.

Note
Wear monitoring is performed automatically by the NC when the user changes the cutting edge
offsets.

Note
Wear monitoring does not monitor every single value but rather only the largest absolute value
of each of these maximum seven wear parameters ($TC_DP12, ..., $TC_DP18).

$TC_TP9 = 8
Wear parameters (system variables) of the cutting edge can be found in the additive offset
parameters.
Analog to wear, the following system variables are monitored for the additional location-specific
offsets of the cutting edge:
● $TC_SCP12, ... $TC_SCP18
First additive offset for the cutting edge (if defined)
● $TC_SCP22, ... $TC_SCP28
Second additive offset for the cutting edge (if defined) etc. for the other additive offsets for
the cutting edge
Note
Wear monitoring does not monitor every single value but rather only the high contribution of
each of these maximum seven additive offset parameters * number of defined additive
offsets for the cutting edge ($TC_SCP12, …, $TC_SCP18, $TC_SCP22, …, $TC_SCP28,
…).

Most tool geometries are described by a subset of the named data records.
If a parameter is changed (written), the NC then checks whether the new value is higher than
any of the other parameters and, if necessary, this value is subtracted from the wear setpoint.
The result is the new actual value for the wear.
Analogous to other monitoring variables, the actual wear runs from the positive setpoint
towards zero.

Monitoring parameters (system variables)

$TC_MOP15 Wear setpoint or additive offset value

$TC_MOP5 Wear pre-warning limit or additive offset pre-warning limit
$TC_MOP6 Wear value or additive-offset setpoint
The physical quantity of the new monitoring parameters is "Length". The unit is the same as for
the wear values.
Wear monitoring can be deactivated via the channel DB.DBX29.6.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 503
Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

The signal only acts on changes in wear data that occur during execution of the NC program.
The PLC signal is suppressed if this data is changed via the OPI (e.g. during HMI operation).

Reset to setpoints
Resetting the actual values of wear and additive offset "fine" means that all the parameters for
wear offset and additive offset used for monitoring are set to zero.

Example
For the tool with T No.=3, the wear monitoring is active and it is

$TC_MOP5[3,1]=0.002 ;= Wear prewarning limit

$TC_MOP6[3,1]=0.003 ;= Wear actual value
$TC_MOP15[3,1]=0.007 ;= Wear setpoint

It was already set.

$TC_DP12[3,1]=0.004 ;= Wear component 1

$TC_DP13[3,1] =+0.00 ;= Wear component 2

Wear component 3 is now set.

$TC_DP14[3,1] := -0.006.
Thus the maximum absolute value is given for the wear components = 0.006.
The resulting new actual value is
$TC_MOP15[3,1] - 0.006 = 0.001 = $TC_MOP6[3,1].
The prewarning limit has been reached.
Note: The wear components can be negative or positive - or a mixture of each.

Note
The VDI signal "Activate program test" has no effect on wear monitoring since new wear values
are only entered during machining and not during the program test (provided that wear was not
changed by the machining program itself).

7.11.5 Signals to and from the PLC

Overview
Previously, an alarm message was output as soon as the prewarning limit or limit value was
reached. Alarms 6410 and 6411 are output when the prewarning limit is reached and 6412
and 6413 when the limit value is reached. Alarms 6410 and 6412 are triggered via the OP
interface and alarms 6411 and 6413 via the NC program. The alarm texts identify the affected
tool via the tool ID, duplo number and D number.

Tool management
504 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

The following information is returned to the channel interface for one OB1 cycle (internal T
numbers):
● Prewarning limit reached
● Limit reached
A strobe signal is set for one PLC cycle (DB channel.DBB344) which indicates that new data
is available.

VDI signal "Warning limit reached" channel DB.DBD348

If a tool reaches its prewarning limit with tool life, workpiece count or wear monitoring, the
internal T No. of the tool is entered here and the associated strobe signal is set.

VDI signal "Limit value reached" channel DB.DBD352

If the tool life, workpiece count or wear value has expired for a monitored tool, the internal T No.
of the tool is entered and the associated strobe signal is set.

Note
If machining is being performed with tools that are monitored for their workpiece count, it is
possible for several tools to reach their prewarning limit or limit value simultaneously
(SETPIECE is programmed at the end of program).
In this case, only the T No. of the tool that was last programmed is output.

VDI signal "T number of new replacement tool" - channel DB.DBD356

The transition to a new replacement tool is initiated by the tool status "was in use". This means
that when searching for a tool in the NC, if a (usable) tool was found that had still not been used,
then it is evaluated as being the first selection and the interface signal set.
This process state change is output to the PLC via the T number of the replacement tool.
The action of the operator changing the tool status does not cause any change to the signal.

VDI signal "Last replacement tool in the tool group" - channel DB.DBD360
If, during the tool change when searching for a tool in the NC a tool is found, and at this point
in time there are no further replacement tools available for the programmed spindle / tool
holder, then this is evaluated as the "Last replacement tool found in the tool group".
If there is only one tool (i.e. there is no replacement tool) it is also a tool group. When this tool
is programmed, the interface signal is set immediately.
This process state change is output to the PLC via the T number of the replacement tool.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 505
Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

The action of the operator changing the tool status does not cause any change to the signal.

Note
For tool groups containing many tools, the function increases the time required in the NC for the
main run when the tool is selected.
The function must be enabled MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 18=1.

Disable monitored tools - PLC-controlled by the VDI signal

In earlier versions, a tool assumed the status "disabled" as soon as the actual value of the active
monitoring function reached the value zero. A tool being used for machining that is set to
"disabled" remains operational until the next tool change takes place. After that the tool can no
longer be used.
The PLC can also determine when a disabled tool can no longer be used, i.e. when the
"disabled" status is taken into account in the tool search.
● With the VDI signal "Tool disable not active" = 1
(channel DB.DBX29.7 = 1) the NC does not take the tool status "disabled" into account
during the tool search.
● With the VDI signal "Tool disable not active" = 0
(channel DB.DBX29.7 = 0) the NC takes the tool status "disabled" into account during the
tool search.
The bit is channel-specific.

"Search for active tool" strategy

This search strategy can ensure, for example, that a machining operation is not performed with
different tools from the same tool group.
When the tool is disabled, a monitoring function and the set VDI signal "Tool disable not active"
mean that the status "active" is not canceled.
This tool is therefore assigned the status "active" and "disabled".
If the required machining operation is terminated without a tool change, the status of all
disabled tools must be checked. A PI service (_N_TMRASS, in PLC TMRASS) is provided for
this. This service can be used to cancel the status "active" for all tools that have been disabled
(e.g. by the PLC program at the end of the program).

The other tool-search strategies

A disabled tool can still be used with the other tool-search strategies when the VDI signal "Tool
disable not active" (channel DB.DBX29.7 = 1) is set. The tool selected solely depends on the
search strategy.
The search strategy therefore takes precedence over the VDI signal "Tool disable not active".
Both the last tool to be disabled or any other disabled tool can be selected.
Another tool which is not disabled might also exist, but is not selected because of the search
strategy!

Tool management
506 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.11 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

TO unit active in several channels

If a TO unit is assigned to several channels (tool and magazine data are "visible" in several
channels), then the setting of the channel-specific VDI signal "Tool disable" is effective in each
channel.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 507
Description of functions
7.12 Tool monitoring without active tool management

7.12 Tool monitoring without active tool management

7.12.1 Tool monitoring overview

General
The tool monitoring without active tool management is activated via the following machine data:
● MD18080 $MN_MMTOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 1=1
● MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 1=1

Note
The function "Monitoring without active tool management" (WZMO) is set by default.

The tool monitoring without active tool management function allows the following monitoring
types of the active cutting edge of the active tool:
● Monitoring the tool life
● Monitoring the workpiece count
● Monitoring the wear
● Monitoring the additive offset
The function allows tool identifiers to be used and it is also possible to use replacement tools.

Monitoring counter
Monitoring counters exist for each monitoring type. These count from a set value > 0 down to
zero. When a counter has decremented to a value of ≤0, the limit value is reached. A
corresponding alarm is issued. The same applies if a cutting edge of a tool has reached its set
prewarning limit.

State and type of tool monitoring

System parameter $TC_TP8 can be used to determine the state for the particular tool,
$TC_TP9 to determine the monitoring function type.

Tool management
508 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.12 Tool monitoring without active tool management

Contrary to the magazine management (see Section "Magazines (Page 343)"), in the tool
monitoring function without active tool management, only the following states are of
significance:
● $TC_TP8[t] - State of the tool with the number t
Bit 0 = 1: Tool is active
Bit 0 = 0: Tool is not active
Bit 1 = 1: Tool is enabled
Bit 0 = 0: Tool is not enabled
Bit 2 = 1 Tool is disabled
Bit 2 = 0: Tool is not disabled
Bit 3: Reserved
Bit 4 = 1: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 4 = 0: Prewarning limit not reached
● $TC_TP9[t] - Type of the monitoring function for the tool with the number t
= 0: No monitoring
= 1: Time-monitored tool
= 2: Workpiece count-monitored tool
= 4: Wear-monitored tool
= 8: Additive offset
Several monitoring types are possible for a tool. Wear and additive offset monitoring cannot be
simultaneously selected (only alternatively).

System variables for active tool

The active cutting edge of the active tool can be determined using an existing system/OPI
variable:
● $P_TOOL / actDNumber: Active tool offset D
● $P_TOOLNO / actTNumber: Active tool number T

7.12.2 Tool life monitoring

Overview
Tool life monitoring is done for the tool cutting edge that is currently in use (active cutting edge
D of the active tool T).
As soon as the path axes traverse (G1, G2, G3, ... but not for G00), the residual tool life
($TC_MOP2[t,d]) of this tool cutting edge is updated. If the remaining tool lifetime of a tool
cutting edge expires during a machining operation, an alarm is output. The tool changes to the

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 509
Description of functions
7.12 Tool monitoring without active tool management

"disabled" condition and cannot be programmed as long as the "disabled" condition is present.
The operator must intervene and ensure that an operational tool for machining is provided.

Note
As standard, the time is counted if the geometry axes are traversed - but not equal to G00. As
an alternative, using MD $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 17, the time monitoring can
be started and stopped from the PLC.
The channel-specific system parameter $A_MONIFACT allows the clock to be either run
slower or faster.

Time monitoring and reference to the spindle or to the tool holder

For MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE, only the time for the active tool is
counted whose programmed spindle number has a value that is set is by selecting the bit in MD
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK.
The value of MD $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK has no significance, if MD
$MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE. In this case, the time is counted and
monitored for each active cutting edge.

7.12.3 Workpiece count monitoring

General
The active cutting edge of the tool that has been loaded at change is monitored for the
workpiece count without reference to the spindle number (standard).
Monitoring the workpiece count registers all the tool edges that are used to produce a
workpiece. If the workpiece count is changed by an operator input, the monitoring data of all the
cutting edges that have become active since the last workpiece count is adjusted.
The workpiece count can be updated by the PLC, using the PI command _N_TMPCIT or from
the NC program using the language command SETPIECE.

Workpiece count monitoring and reference to the spindle or to the tool holder
If MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE is used, the address extension of T is
interpreted as spindle number. The workpiece counter monitoring is then realized separately
for the spindles; further, the SETPIECE command requires the "spindle number" parameter.
If MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE is used, the parameter "spindle
number" in SETPIECE and/or the analog PI service is ignored.
The workpiece count monitoring can be activated and deactivated by the PLC using an
interface signal.

Tool management
510 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.12 Tool monitoring without active tool management

7.12.4 Wear monitoring

The wear monitoring must be enabled using MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit
5. As default, the function is not activated.
The wear parameters for a cutting edge are defined with system variables $TC_DP12 ...20. The
highest value of parameter $TC_DP12 ...18 - responsible for the lengths and radii of the cutting
edge - is monitored.
The wear monitoring can be activated and deactivated by the PLC using an interface signal.

7.12.5 Monitoring the additive offset

When using the "additive offset" function, using $TC_TP9=8 for the wear monitoring, additive
offset monitoring can be selected. Instead of wear parameters $TC_DP12 ... 18, the additive
offset parameters $TC_SCP12 ...18 are monitored. This corresponds to a defined 1st additive
offset of the cutting edge. In turn, only the highest value of the additive offset parameter of all
defined additive offsets is monitored.

7.12.6 Working with replacement tools

If replacement tools are used, it is necessary to define the rules relating to the transition to the
replacement tool.
When changing a tool, only the name of the tool group is specified in the part program. This
comprises several tools, that differ by their duplo number. The NC selects, if available, the tool
with the "active" state. If there is no tool with the "active" state, the next tool that can be used
is selected whose value of the system variable $TC_TP10 regarding the other tools in the tool
group is the lowest. The user allocates the parameter values so that tools are used in the
required sequence. If values are not allocated, then the NC automatically selects some sort of
suitable tool.

7.12.7 Examples

Requirement
Specified setting:
MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x02
MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x02
Service life monitoring for tool 2, cutting edge 1 in the NC program

$TC_TP9[2,1]=1 ;Activation of the service life monitoring

$TC_MOP1[2,1]=100 ;Prewarning limit in minutes
$TC_MOP2[2,1]=245 ;Residual tool life in minutes
$TC_MOP11[2,1]=800 ; Reference service life in minutes

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 511
Description of functions
7.12 Tool monitoring without active tool management

Service life monitoring for the active tool with active D number in the NC program

$TC_TP9[$P_TOOLNO]=1 ;Activation of the service life monitoring

$TC_MOP1[$P_TOOLNO, $P_TOOL]=200 ;Prewarning limit in minutes
$TC_MOP2[$P_TOOLNO, $P_TOOL]=602 ;Residual tool life in minutes
$TC_MOP11[$P_TOOLNO, $P_TOOL]=700 ; Reference service life in minutes

7.12.8 NC language commands

General
The NC language commands, which apply for tool monitoring without tool management, are
only listed here. A detailed description is provided in this documentation under the appropriate
index entry.
● SETPIECE
Decrement workpiece counter.
● RESETMON
Language command for setpoint activation
● $A_MONIFACT
Read factor for tool life monitoring.
● NEWT
Create new tool.
● DELT
Delete tool.
● GETT
Read T number
● GETACTT
Read the active internal T No.
The associated PI commands can also be used:
● _N_TMCRTO
● _N_TMCRTC
● _N_TMGETT
● _N_TRESMO

Tool management
512 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.13 Variants of D-number assignments

7.13 Variants of D-number assignments

7.13.1 Free selection of D numbers for every T

D numbers can be freely assigned to tool edge numbers in systems with and without tool
management. A maximum of 12 cutting edges are possible for each tool "T". The upper limit for
the D numbers used is limited by the machine data.
This assignment option is an extension of the process to relative D numbers.
With this setting ($MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO >
$MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL) additional program commands can be used
that make a check for unambiguous assignment of D numbers to T numbers or identifiers
possible. With this setting, the cutting edge number $TC_DPCE[T-No,D-No] is also created.
The same D numbers shall be assigned in each case for the cutting edges for duplo tools (same
identifiers).

7
7
&( 7

 '[ 7\SH *HRPHWU\ :HDU %DVLV

 '\

 ']

 '[\

8QLTXH'QXPEHU
7RROHGJHQXPEHUWR

2QHPHPRU\ZLWKXSWRFXWWLQJHGJHVSHUWRRO

Figure 7-42 Structure of the tool offset memory

Note
Uniform system support is not available for this function.

Machine data for user (unique) assignment of D numbers

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO = Maximum permissible D number
Example:

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO=1 A maximum of 1 offset (D1) can be defined per

tool.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 513
Description of functions
7.13 Variants of D-number assignments

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO=9999 Tools can be assigned unique D numbers as

follows:
T1 with D1, D2, D3
T2 with D10, D20, D30
T3 with D100, D200, D300

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL =Assignment of tool edges per tool

Example:

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL=1 Only tools used with 1 cutting edge

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL=12 Up to 12 cutting edges per tool.

Check for uniqueness (CHKDNO)

The NC language command CHKDNO checks the D numbers assigned within the NC for
uniqueness. The D numbers of all tools defined within a TO unit may not occur more than once.
No allowance is made for replacement tools.

Check within the magazine (CHKDM)

Exactly like CHKNO, the NC language command CHKDM checks the D numbers assigned
within the NC for an activated tool management for uniqueness. This check function can be
restricted to individual magazines.

D number to T number (GETACTTD)

Using the NC language command GETACTTD if tool management is active, the T number in
which the D number occurs can be searched for.
Precondition for this is that the D numbers have been uniquely assigned in the TO unit being
considered.

GETDNO, SETDNO when re-equipping

The NC language commands GETDNO and SETDNO permit reading and writing the offset
number D for a specified cutting-edge number CE.
GETDNO (T, CE): Read the D number for the cutting edge CE of the tool T
SETDNO (T, CE, D): Set the D number for the cutting edge CE of the tool T
$TC_DPCE[T, D]=...: Assignment of tool edge number CE to offset number D

Tool management
514 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.13 Variants of D-number assignments

Example:
Rename cutting edge CE=3 from D2 to D17
● With initial situation:
Internal T number 1
D number: 2
Tool 1 cutting edge with:
$TC_DP2[1, 2]=120 ;tool radius T1, D2: 120 mm
$TC_DP3[1, 2]=5.5 ;tool radius T1, D2: 5.5 mm
$TC_DPCE[1, 2]=3 ;cutting edge number T1, D2: 3
(programming: T1,...D2)
● Using variable definition:
DEF INT DNoOld, DNoNew=17
DnOld=GETDNO (1, 3) ;value 2 is read in DnOld
SETDNO (1, 3, DNoNew) ;the new D no. is assigned to the cutting edge
● The new D value 17 is assigned to cutting edge CE=3
$TC_DP2[1,17]=120
$TC_DP3[1, 17]=5.5
$TC_DPCE[1, 17]=3

7.13.2 Location-dependent offsets (additive offsets)

Overview
Location-dependent offsets are a generalized form of wear. They are part of the cutting edge
data. The parameters of the additive offset refer to the geometrical data of a cutting edge.
Location-dependent offset can in general be used, i.e. with active/inactive tool management;
with flat D-number function.
To meet the requirements of special machine operating modes, the location-dependent offsets
can be subdivided into the following categories by setting the appropriate machine data:
● Location-dependent offset, fine
● Location-dependent offsets, coarse = setting-up offset
The purpose of the setting-up offset is to allow the operator to set values prior to the machining
operation. These values are stored in their own memory in the NC, the operator can access the
location-dependent fine offsets via the HMI. Location-dependent offsets "fine" and location-
dependent offsets "coarse" are added NC-internally and then act like the additive offset itself.
Several location-dependent offsets can be defined per D number. Machine data define the
absolute number of location-dependent offsets, the maximum number of location-dependent
offsets per cutting edge and specify which additive offsets are active after the end of program
or when the Reset key is pressed.
Applicable only when tool management is active:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 515
Description of functions
7.13 Variants of D-number assignments

MD18112 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCOR can be set to define which additive offset must be

operative if a tool is assigned the "active" status in the part program in the coarse of a
programmed tool change:
● Additive offset values "fine" of the tool cutting edges remain unchanged or
● Additive offset values "fine" of the tool cutting edges are set to the value 0
The function is enabled by setting bit 8 = 1 in machine data
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

DL - programming the additive/setting-up offset

Programming the additive offset is always relative to the active D number and is executed using
the command
DL ="n"
The additive offset with the relative number "n" with respect to the active D number is activated
by this. This means that the additive offset "n" is added to the wear of the active D number.
The additive offset is deselected with the command
DL = 0

Configuration of additive/setting-up offset

$MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=0
Corresponds to the default setting; only one data record of additive offset available per DL
number. In this case, the term "additive offset" merely refers to the data represented by
$TC_SCPx.

$GGLWLYHRIIVHW
7&B6&3>W@


'RIIVHW 7&B6&3>W@
7&B'3>W@

7&B'3>W@

7&B'3>W@ $GGLWLYHRIIVHW
 7&B6&3>W@
7&B'3>W@ 
7&B'3&(>W@ 
7&B6&3>W@

Figure 7-43 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=0

The data in the diagram is used when programming (the tool with T=t is active):

D2 ;Cutting edge offsets

;i.e. $TC_DP3,...$TC_DP11 + wear ($TC_DP12,...$DP29) + adapter dimen-
sion
...

Tool management
516 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.13 Variants of D-number assignments

DL=1 ;Additive offset 1 is added to the existing offsets of D2

;i.e. $TC_SCP13,...$TC_SCP21
...
DL=2 ;Additive offset 1 is no longer added to offset D2, but additive off-
set 2 instead
;i.e. $TC_SCP23,...$TC_SCP31
...
DL=0 ;Deselection of additive offset; only the data of D2 is still effec-
tive

$MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=1

Setting-up offsets are available. The general term "additive offset" refers to a combination of the
"fine" additive offset, represented by $TC_SCPx, and the additive offset, represented by
$TC_ECPx. There are two data records for one DL number. The additive offset equals the
product of the corresponding components $TC_SCPx + $TC_ECPx.

$GGLWLYHRIIVHWILQH
6HWXSRIIVHW 
7&B(&3>W@ 7&B6&3>W@
 
 
7&B(&3>W@ 7&B6&3>W@
'RIIVHW
7&B'3>W@

7&B'3>W@
 $GGLWLYHRIIVHWILQH
7&B'3>W@ 6HWXSRIIVHW
 7&B(&3>W@ 
7&B'3>W@  7&B6&3>W@
7&B'3&(>W@  
7&B(&3>W@ 
7&B6&3>W@

Figure 7-44 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=1

The data in the diagram is used when programming (the tool with T=t is active):

D2 ;Cutting edge offsets

;i.e. $TC_DP3,...$TC_DP11 + wear ($TC_DP12,...$DP29) + adapter dimen-
sion
...
DL=1 ;Additive offset 1 is added to the existing offsets of D2
;i.e. $TC_ECP13 + $TC_SCP13 ,...$TC_ECP21 + $TC_SCP21
...
DL=2 ;Additive offset 1 is no longer added to offset D2, but additive off-
set 2 instead
;i.e. $TC_ECP23 + $TC_SCP23,... $TC_ECP31 + $TC_SCP31
...
DL=0 ;Deselection of additive offset; only the data of D2 is still effec-
tive

The new NC language command DELDL can be used to delete location-dependent offsets
from cutting edges.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 517
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

7.14 Tool adapter

7.14.1 Machine data for setting adapters of type 1 and type 2

Setting machine data

To use angle head adapters of types 1 and 2, the following machine data must be set:
● Tool management with magazine management (TMMG)
– $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, Bit0=1
– $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, Bit0=1
● "Adapter" function
– $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, Bit7=1
● "Multitool" function (adapter type 2)
– $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, Bit10=1
● Number of angle head adapters specified
– $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER_TYP2 >= 0

7.14.2 Creating/deleting adapters

Two types of tool adapters are supported:
● Type 1 (Page 520) defines conventional adapters. These adapters can be assigned to any
location in the magazine.
● Type 2 (Page 532) defines angle head adapters in which the tool base position is angled.
This type is assigned to a multitool location.

Create adapter
An adapter is created by using the system variable $TC_ADPT_TYPE[n] to assign an adapter
type to an adapter with the number "n".
The data is saved in system variables for the two available types of adapters. The adapter types
are defined via the system variable $TC_ADPT_TYPE[n]:
● 0: No adapter with the number "n" is defined.
● 1: An adapter with the number "n" is of type 1 (conventional adapter)
● 2: An adapter with the number "n" is of type 2 (angle head adapter)
If the data of an adapter that was not set is written, then the command is declined with an alert.
Example:
$TC_ADPT_TYPE[1] = 2 creates an adapter of type 2.
See also $TC_ADPTx - adapter description (Page 306).

Tool management
518 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Number of possible adapters

The number of possible adapters is set via the machine
data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER_TYPE2 (Page 518).

Delete adapter
Adapters can be deleted via the system variable $TC_ADPT_TYPE[n] using the following
commands:
● $TC_ADPT_TYPE[n] = 0; the adapter with the number "n" is deleted.
● $TC_ADPT_TYPE[0] = 0; all adapters are deleted.

Note
Only adapters that are not assigned to a magazine location can be deleted.

Adapters of type "1" can be deleted using the command $TC_ADPTT[n]=-1 with n>0. This
command is not available for adapters of type "2".
With the NC language instruction "$TC_MAP1[0]=0", all of the magazine data of the TOA unit
of the channel is deleted and consequently all of the adapters as well. The exception to the rule
are adapters that are already assigned to a multitool.

7.14.3 Constraints for adapters

Constraints
Please note the following constraints:
● The option for "Angle head adapter" is set.
● The "Multitool" option is set for adapter type 2.
● The "Tool and magazine management" and "Adapters" functions are set.
● Adapter type 1 can only be assigned to a magazine location.
● Adapter type 2 (angle head) can only be assigned to a multitool location. The multitool has
only one magazine location.
● Adapters on a magazine location and multitool location cannot be cascaded.
– Exception: The adapter type 1 on the magazine location only has default values
$TC_ADPT1-3 =0 and $TC_ADPTT=1.

Note
Available tool types for adapter type 2
Only the tool types <400 and >=600 are possible, i.e. no turning or grinding tools.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 519
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Note
Observe multitool rules for type 2 adapters
Since the adapter type 2 is only permitted on multitool locations, the rules for multitools must be
observed, e.g. handling in the PLC, determination of the T no. of the spindle tool.

7.14.4 Managing adapter data

7.14.4.1 Managing adapter data for type 1 and type 2

Number of possible adapters

The number of possible angle head adapters is set via the machine data MD
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER_TYPE2.

Managing the adapter data from the NC program

The following properties can be determined from this via system variables from the NC
program.

System variable Description

$P_MAGNA Number of created adapters of type 1 and type 2 in total in the TO unit of the channel.
$P_MAGNA1 Number of created adapters of type 1 in the TO unit of the channel.
$P_MAGNA2 Number of created adapters of type 2 in the TO unit of the channel.
$P_MAGNA[i] i-th adapter number that is defined. The adapter numbers are sorted in ascending order.

7.14.5 Adapter type 1

7.14.5.1 Overview

Purpose
The standard dataset for the tool offsets gives you, via the system variables $TC_DP21,
$TC_DP22 and $TC_DP23, the capability of entering the dimensions (Length1, Length2 and
Length3) of an adapter.
If tool management is active the additional adapter data can also be assigned to specific
magazine locations.
This function is used for adapters that are fixed to a magazine location for a long period and
used by different types of tool.

Tool management
520 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

In individual cases, it is also possible to use identical adapters on several magazine locations.
To do this it makes sense to define and store the adapter data records separately from the
magazine locations.

'HIDXOWJHRPHWU\
1HXWUDOGHIDXOW 7UDQVIRUPHGWRRO
JHRPHWU\ JHRPHWU\

4:
6/ 7XUUHWORFDWLRQZLWK
DGDSWHU

 
/:   7RROOHQJWK
//
  
$GDSWHU   &XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ

/$

Figure 7-45 Adapter transformation

Adapter transformation
Adapter data "adapter transformation" allows fixed orientation of the tool on the adapter or
orientation of the adapter including its tool with reference to the machine.
If adapter data are used, system variables $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22 and $TC_DP23 have a
different reference and are therefore only formally part of the cutting edge data record in the NC.

7.14.5.2 Description of function

The adapter data function must be enabled via machine data (MD18104:
$MN_MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER).
In order to activate the setting, bit 7 must be set in MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Definitions
The machine data can be used to set two definition types of adapter data:
● One adapter data record is assigned to each magazine location as standard.
● Adapter data records can be defined independently of magazine locations. The magazine
locations are then assigned as an additional step.
The magazine location is the reference point for adapter and tool. Both are assigned to the
magazine location.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 521
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

The following points are realized when programming the D numbers in the part program:
● The offset is assigned to a real tool.
● The tool is assigned to a magazine location
● It is possible to assign an adapter to the magazine location, for which a transformation
(orientation) of the tool it contains can be defined.
Thus, the working offset can be clearly computed and the tool path accordingly adjusted.
If an additive offset is programmed, then its value refers to the active D offset.

7.14.5.3 Activation

Requirements
● In order to be able to use magazine location oriented adapter data, machine data MD18104
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER must have a value that is not equal to zero.
● Adapter data records must be defined.
● If the values of the machine data are > 0, the adapters must be linked to the magazine
locations or assigned to them (can be automated via the HMI or using a cycle).
As a result, the adapter data including the defined transformations are always taken into
account for the tool located on the magazine location in question. The working offset is
calculated including the transformation and the adapter data.
The offset data can then be displayed as follows:
● Geometrical data for the tool (system variable $TC_DP3,...DP11); designated as neutral
default geometry
● Non-transformed working offset (sum of the values from tool geometry, wear, additive
offset, tool base dimension or adapter)
● Non-transformed working offset (transformation of the sum of the values from tool
geometry, wear, additive offset) and tool base dimension of the adapter.
Machine data and setting data are used to define the sizes the transformation affects. The
mode of transformation of the additive offset can be set.

Magazine-location-related adapter data records

Create new
MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1:
One magazine location and one adapter data record are created. Default values are stored in
the adapter data record which is automatically linked to the magazine location.
It is not possible to create a new free adapter at this point. The adapter numbers are assigned
automatically (1 ... max. number of available magazine locations).
Delete

Tool management
522 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

If an adapter data record is linked to a magazine location (MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1),

it cannot be deleted.

Note
Only the setting $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1 is currently supported by HMI
Operate.
With this setting, freely creating adapter data sets and freely assigning them is not possible.
It is not permissible to change the automatic assignment and numbering of the adapter.

Free adapter data records

Create new
MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0:
The adapter data can be created freely. Adapter data can be created by the user with a write
operation to a non-existent data record.
$TC_ADPTi[n] = value; i = T, 1 2, 3, ..., n (number of the adapter)
If data record n does not yet exist and the maximum number of adapter data records that have
already been defined is less than the value of MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER, a
new adapter data record is created and assigned specific values.
The value "value" is assigned to parameter i. The following applies, 0 < n ≤ 3 2000. The index
value 0 is reserved.

Note
The adapters must be assigned explicitly to the magazine locations for
MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0.

- OR -
An adapter is created by using the system variable $TC_ADPT_TYPE[n] to assign an adapter
type to an adapter with the number "n". Example: $TC_ADPT_TYPE[1] = 1

Deleting an adapter of type 1

If, MD18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER has the value > 0, then the adapter data can be
deleted as required provided it is not assigned to a magazine location.
$TC_ADPTT[n] = -1
Adapter data record n is deleted and the memory becomes free again.
- OR -
$TC_ADPT_TYPE[n] = 0; the adapter with the number "n" is deleted.
Deleting an assigned adapter data record:
The assignment to the magazine location must be undone first. You can only do this if the
magazine location is empty. An alarm is issued if deletion fails.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 523
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Please proceed as follows:

● Remove the tool from the magazine location
(unload, relocate).
● Remove the adapter from the magazine location.
● Delete the adapter data record (with $TC_ADPTTi[n] = -1).
Adapter data record n is deleted and the memory becomes free again.

Deleting all adapter data records

For MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0, you can delete the adapter data if it is not assigned to a
magazine location:
$TC_ADPTT[0] = -1
All non-assigned adapter data of the TO units is deleted. If you want to delete assigned
adapters, you must first undo the assignment of those adapters to magazine locations. An
alarm is issued if deletion fails.
- OR -
$TC_ADPT_TYPE[0] = 0; all adapters are deleted.

Read/write adapter parameters

You can modify adapter data at any time even if an adapter is assigned to a magazine location
and/or a tool is located in the magazine location with the adapter.

Magazine location assignment/release

For MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0, an adapter record must be assigned to a magazine
location explicitly:
$TC_MPP7[m,p] = "adapter no."
Adapter number "adapter no." is assigned to magazine location p of magazine m. For "adapter
no." = 0 any previous assignment is removed.

Note
An assignment can only be established or released if no tool is assigned to the magazine
location.

Determination of the adapter

When determining the relevant adapter, a distinction is made between a turret and the other
magazines.
The following applies for a turret:

Tool management
524 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

The adapter is used on the owner location (i.e. the source location, whereby the tool only leaves
the magazine location in the data) of the selected tool.
The following applies for chain and box-type magazines:
The adapter of the current magazine location containing the tool (usually the spindle) is used.
Example:
A tool magazine is changed from Magazine_1/Location_1 into the spindle. The adapter from
Magazine_location_1 is not read now, but rather from the spindle location. This means that in
the change cycle, the adapter data from the magazine location must be copied to the spindle
location.

Example of an adapter transformation

A turning tool with lengths L and Q is described below.

7  LGHQWLW\ 7  7  7 

O O O
O O
O
O
O O
, 4 O /
O

7  7  7  7 
O O O 4
O
O O
O O O /
O O
O

Figure 7-46 The 8 defined transformations (T = 1...8) for the adapter with G 18 and for a turning tool.
The assignments of tool lengths I1, I2, I3 are shown on the geometry axes x, y, z.

Transformations for numbers 1 to 8 are defined. Number 1 is the identity: no transformation of

input data.
Other transformations can be implemented. The available transformations are designed
initially for turning tools. These are typically defined by Q=I1=$TC_DP3 and L=I2=$TC_DP4.
The transformation numbers correspond to the transformations shown in the table. In general:
Length1t, length2t, length3t = f(length1, length2, length3) = f(l1,l2,l3) = f(Q,L,l3)

Transformation GEO
number
X Y Z Turning tool with G18 transformation
1 +L1 +L3 +L2 -
2 +L1 -L3 -L2 ROT X 180
3 -L1 -L3 +L2 ROT Z 180
4 -L1 +L3 -L2 ROT X 180 Z 180

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 525
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

5 +L2 -L3 +L1 ROT Y 90 Z 180

6 -L2 +L3 +L1 ROT Y -90
7 +L2 +L3 -L1 ROT Y 90
8 -L2 -L3 -L1 ROT Y -90 Z 180

L1, L2 and L3 are working offsets of the tool prior to transformation with or without adapter
(depending on machine data settings). They are assigned to the geometry axes during
compensation.

Note
In turning, L and Q are also used to describe a tool. In the above table, l1 corresponds, for
example, to variable Q (or x direction) and l2 to variable L (or z direction), assuming the plane
G18 is selected (default setting for turning machines).

As standard, activation of an offset is calculated as follows:

Offset = D offset + xi(e.g. wear, additive offset)

Length1 $TC_DP3 + xi
Length2 $TC_DP4 + xi+1
Length3 $TC_DP5 + xi+2
Length4 $TC_DP6 + xi+3

The adapter transformation then acts on the transformed tool offset values and is added to the
transformed offset values.
The transformation number of the adapter causes a transformation of the tool (the cutting
edges) located in this adapter (orientation according to the transformation number).
Working offset = f(offset) + adapter dimension of the magazine location

aLength1 Length1t + $TC_ADPT1

aLength2 Length2t+ $TC_ADPT2
aLength3 Length3t + $TC_ADPT3
ARadius1 Radius1

Depending on the programmed plane selection G17, G18, G19, these values are added to the
geometry axes.

G17, G18, G19 - plane selection (declarations)

The following agreements (different for machining and milling tools) apply for assigning tool-
length parameters of the tools to the geometry axes:

Machining plane System variables for tool length description

$TC_DP3(I1) $TC_DP4(I2) $TC_DP5(I3)
G17 Milling Z Y X
Turning Y X Z

Tool management
526 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

G18 Milling Y X Z
Turning X Z Y
G19 Milling X Z Y
Turning Z Y X

Transformation of cutting edge position

The cutting edge position described by system variable $TC_DP2 is also transformed.
Transformations for the cutting edge position are performed as shown in the table below:

Transformation number Cutting edge position

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2 1 4 3 7 6 5 8 9
3 4 3 2 1 5 8 7 6 9
4 3 4 1 2 7 8 5 6 9
5 1 4 3 2 6 5 8 7 9
6 4 1 2 3 8 5 6 7 9
7 2 3 4 1 6 7 8 5 9
8 3 2 1 4 8 7 6 5 9

7&B'3
,RU4 3 7&B'3
,
7XUQLQJ 0LOOLQJ
7&B'3
6 6
5DGLXV

7&B'3 7&B'3
,RU/ ,

Figure 7-47 Turning and milling tools - relationship between cutting edge position and radius
compensation

Turning tool geometries (I1, I3 or L, Q) are described in terms of P, the point of approach at the
workpiece. However, the center point of cutting edge S with reference to the tool nose radius
must be known for radius compensation.
This center point can only be accurately calculated if the cutting edge position is known. Point
S can then be derived from point P.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 527
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

The position of the tool to the workpiece coordinate system is defined using the cutting edge
position (values 1 ... 8). Cutting edge position 9 corresponds to S = P.

Note
The cutting edge position is only used for turning tools because their geometry is described with
reference to P and not with reference to S as is the case for milling tools.

Adapter transformation for tools with three length components

The transformations defined here constitute a subset of all conceivable transformations. Only
certain discrete values are considered here - in particular those that meet the requirements for
turning tools (2 length components only).

System variables $TC_DP21 ... 23 and $TC_ADPT

If the function "Adapter" is active, then there is no further cutting-edge specific data for the
"Base adapter dimension".
In order to keep cycles that operate with adapter data compatible, the following rules apply:
If a tool is located at a magazine location with an adapter and the adapter data is accessed via
the system variable $TC_DP21...23, then the adapter parameters of the location can be read.

'RIIVHWV 7RRO
'QRG  ,QWHUQDO7QRW
&(QRFH G



7&B'3>WG@ 
7&B'3>WG@ 
GQ
0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQ
 7&B033>PS@ W
 7&B033>PS@ D

'RIIVHWV $GDSWHU
'QRGQ $GDSWHUQRD
&(QRFHQ
7&B$'37>D@
7&B'3>WGQ@ 7&B$'37>D@
7&B'3>WGQ@ 7&B$'37>D@
7&B$'377>D@

Figure 7-48 Fig. 3-30 $TC_DP21, ...23 - Contents for an active "Adapter" function

Specifications:
● Tool t
● Magazine location p
● Magazine m
● Adapter a
● Tool with D offsets d1, ... dn
The adapter is assigned to the magazine location. If, for example, the system variable
$TC_DP21[t,d1] is read in the part program, through programming the system variable

Tool management
528 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

$TC_ADPT1[a] of the adapter is actually accessed, i.e. the same machine data is accessed for
all d1, ... dn.
If the assignment of the tool to the magazine location is released or the adapter is removed from
the magazine location, no more data can be assigned to the parameters. A read operation
returns the value 0, a write operation does not change the data (nor does it generate an alarm).

Transformed and non-transformed offset values

The values included in the path offset are usually the transformed working offsets.
It can generally be said that the data that describes a tool is subject to transformation. The
transformation of the adapter is communicated to the tool (orientation in which it is positioned
in the adapter). The adapter data itself is not transformed.

Data transfer to the NC

You need to declare how the data is transferred to the NC.
● You can transfer the data via the part program by programming the system variable $TC_...
The parameters are defined as non-transformed values.
● The transfer can take place via the OPI using the variable services. In this case, the data can
be transferred either as transformed or non-transformed values.

3/& 1&. 23,

00&3/&
7QXPEHU 'DWDSHUFXWWLQJHGJH
'QXPEHU *HRPHWU\ QHXWUDOGHIDXOW *HRPHWU\
JHRPHWU\ :HDU
:HDUEDVHGLPHQVLRQ %DVHGLPHQVLRQ
6&QXPEHU $GDSWHU
(&QXPEHU $GGLWLYHRIIVHW $GGLWLYHRIIVHWILQH
6HWXSRIIVHW
1&SURJUDP $SSOLHGRIIVHW
7UDQVIRUPHGRIIVHW 5HSUHVHQWDWLRQ
7&B'3[ 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQRIVXPRI WUDQVIRUPHGRUQRW
7&B$'37[ HGJHVSHFLILFRIIVHWYDOXHV WUDQVIRUPHG
7&B6&3[ GHSHQGLQJRQ
7&B(&3[ GHILQLWLRQ
:RUNLQJRIIVHW
7UDQVIRUPHGRIIVHWYDOXHV
7KHV\VWHPSDUDPHWHUV DGDSWHUGDWDRUWUDQVIRUPHG
FRQWDLQQRQWUDQVIRUPHG RIIVHWDQGDGDSWHUGDWD
YDOXHV

Figure 7-49 Geometry of a tool edge and applied offsets

Constraints
When using the function (magazine-location-oriented) "adapter data" the user must ensure that
the old data records of all the data records with edge-specific adapter data are adapted to the
requirements of the new function.
However, using the described edge-specific adapter parameter definition (system variables
$TC_DP21,...23), it is possible that all old data is converted to the adapter data function by the
NC.
The function "Adapter data" excludes the existence of the cutting-edge specific data "base /
adapter dimension".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 529
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

The function "adapter data" is better suited to the applications of an adapter because it defines
the adapter as part of the magazine location and not as part of the tool or cutting edge.

Example 1
Specifications:
● MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1
● MM_NUM_MAGAZIN_LOCATION = 20
● One chain with 16 locations, magazine number = 1
● Two grippers
● One spindle
● One loading and unloading point
● Assignment
When creating the 20 locations in all, 20 adapters should be assigned, i.e. exactly one adapter
assigned to each location.

Note
It does not matter if the real locations are not actually fitted with an adapter. Preassigned
adapter locations have no effect on the offset. When equipping a location with a real adapter
make sure that the appropriate values are assigned to the adapter data.

The transformation number of the adapter in location 3 of the chain magazine (No. 1) is to be
changed to the new value 8:

$TC_ADPTT[$TC_MPP7[1,3]] = 8 ;$TC_MPP7 contains the number of the adapter at the new

magazine location

Once adapter data records have been automatically generated and assigned, operations such
as undoing an assignment, renewed definition of an assignment and deletion of an adapter
data record are possible.

Example 2
Specifications:
● MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = 4
● MM_NUM_MAGAZIN_LOCATION = 20
● One chain with 16 locations
● Two grippers
● One spindle
● One loading and unloading point

Tool management
530 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

There are 4 different adapter geometries in this case. Adapters must be configured for the chain
only.
Assignment
These locations (20 in total) are initially created without adapters. Locations 1 to 4 of the chain
are equipped with adapters of the same geometry (here adapter 1). 4 chain locations are to be
equipped with adapters with the same geometry.
First, you must define the 4 adapter data records. Now you assign them:

$TC_MPP7[1,1] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,13] = 4
$TC_MPP7[1,2] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,14] = 4
$TC_MPP7[1,3] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,15] = 4
$TC_MPP7[1,4] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,16] = 4
….

In this way you can assign one adapter data record to several magazine locations.

Note
If you want to delete an adapter data record with a multiple assignment you must make sure that
you first undo all the adapter assignments.

7.14.5.4 Adapter data $TC_ADPT

$TC_ADPTx[n]
If machine data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER is set to a value = -1 or > 0, the adapter
data is defined, deleted, read and written via the following variables
x: = Parameter 1...3, T
n: = Number of the adapter

Note

OPI block AD
Calculation of line: Length 1, 2, 3 = line 1, 2, 3, transformation = line 4
Calculation of column: Adapter number

Adapter data
Name Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_ADPT1 Double Adapter geometry: Length 1 adaptData REAL
$TC_ADPT2 Double Adapter geometry: Length 2 adaptData REAL

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 531
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Adapter data
Name Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_ADPT3 Double Adapter geometry: Length 3 adaptData REAL
$TC_ADPTT[n] Double Adapter transformation number adaptData REAL

The adapter geometry values act on the geometry values of the cutting edge in the same way
as system variables $TC_DP 21, $TC_DP 22 and $TC_DP 23. The parameters are available
only when the tool management is active.
Transformation numbers 1 to 8 can be programmed for the adapter transformation function.
The parameter is available only when the tool management is active.
$TC_MPP7[m,p]: Number of the adapter assigned to magazine location
Value=0 : No adapter assigned to location
Value>0 : Number of the assigned magazine

7.14.5.5 Transformed data of the active tool $P_ADT[n]

The system variable $P_ADT reads the offset parameters $TC_DP1,... etc. of the active tool
offset transformed according to the tool adapter. See also the system variable $P_AD (Section
"Additional language commands (Page 318)") that reads the non-transformed parameters.
Without the function "Tool adapter", $P_AD and $P_ADT have the same meaning - as a
subfunction of the function "Tool management magazine" (TMMG).
When the function "Tool adapter" is active, the $P_ADT provides transformed values, when the
offset parameters are read, of those parameters that are subject to the tool-adapter
transformation if the active tool is on a tool adapter when the parameters are read. The
parameters not subjected to the transformation still provide the same values during reading as
$P_AD.
When writing, the transformed parameter values subject to the tool-adapter transformation are
accordingly transformed back by the NC and are subsequently saved in a non-transformed
form in the NC. Non-transformed values are still written with $P_AD.

7.14.6 Adapter type 2 (angle head adapter) (option)

7.14.6.1 Assigning an angle head adapter

Assigning an angle head adapter and tool to a multitool

To ensure that the angle head adapter is calculated when the tool offsets are determined, it
must be assigned to a multitool location on which the tool to be used will be located.
To this end, first a multitool (Page 448) with one location is defined. An adapter of type 2 is then
assigned to this location:
$TC_MTPP7[n,m] = <AdapterNo>
n = multitool number

Tool management
532 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

m = multitool location number (= 1) because only one location is allowed.

<AdapterNo> = number of the defined adapter of type 2
For a detailed description of the adapter data, see$TC_MTPP - Multitool location data
(Page 216).
The angle head adapter is first set on a multitool location with $TC_MTPP7. Thereafter a tool
is set on the location with $TC_MTPP6.
For adapters of type 1, the system variables $TC_MPP7 and $TC_MPP6 are used.

System variables (type 1 and type 2)

The following system variables are available for processing adapters and tools:
$A_TOOLADAPT[tNo]: The variable provides the number of the adapter that is assigned to
the magazine location. If the tool is located on a multitool, the variable has the same value for
the tool ([tNo] and the multitool ([mtNo]).
$A_TOOLMTADAPT[tNo]: The variable provides the adapter number of the adapter that is
assigned to the multitool location on which the tool is currently located.
See also $A_TOOLADAPT - Assignment of tool to adapter (Page 305).

Assignment rules
● The adapter data are only taken into consideration if a tool is placed on a multitool location
with an adapter.
● The data of an adapter with an active tool can be changed.
● For a turret as the owner magazine, the calculation is done by the owner location with the
adapter.
● No adapter can be assigned to a multitool location on which a tool is already located.
● An existing adapter cannot be displaced by assigning an adapter to a magazine location.
The assignment with $TC_MPP7[magNo, locNo]=0 must first be resolved for this.
● An adapter can be used by several magazine locations/multitool locations, but each
magazine location/multitool location can only be assigned one adapter.

7.14.6.2 Angle head adapter - tool and adapter separate (type 2)

Angle head adapter - tool and adapter separate

Angle head adapter (type 2)

For angle head adapters of type 2, it is possible to describe the angle head and tool separately.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 533
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

The driven part of the adapter is called the "drive end". The part into which the tools are inserted
is called the "load side".

Angle head with rotation-symmetrical tool

Angle head adapter with rotation-dependent tool

① C axis
② A axis
③ C1 axis
The geometry of the angle head adapter can be described via a kinematic chain. The chain is
the default and cannot be changed. Only linear offsets and angle offsets can be entered.

Basic position of the angle head in case G17 without additional machine data
● The C axis is parallel to the positive Z axis
● The position C=0 is defined in such a way that the orientation of the following rotary axis
points in the direction of the positive X axis. The 2nd rotary axis is thus an A axis.
● In position A=0, the 3rd linear element points in the direction of the positive Z axis.
● The 3rd rotary axis C1 at the end of the 3rd linear element describes the non-rotation-
symmetrical "normal orientation" of the tool. The position C1 =0 is defined in such a way that
the orientation for C=0 and A=0 points in the direction of the positive X axis. This is irrelevant
for rotation-symmetrical tools (see above).

Tool management
534 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Kinematic chain of the angle head adapter

=
&


<
;
$


&

① Element 1 (L1): Offset of the vector 1

② Element 2 (L2): Offset of the vector 2
③ Element 3 (L3): Offset of the vector 3
④ Starting point of the kinematic chain
⑤ End point of the kinematic chain
Figure 7-50 Angle head geometry

Note
Orientation of the coordinate system
For milling tools, the orientation and order of the components are as follows: L1, L2 and L3.
The following order applies for a kinematic chain: 1st component in X direction, 2nd component
in Y direction and 3rd component in Z direction.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 535
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Expanded form of the angle head

In the expanded form, the direction of the rotary axes is generalized. In this way, additional
forms of tool attachments can be displayed and errors in direction axes can be compensated
for.

$
$








$

① Element 1 (L1): Offset of the vector 1

② Element 2 (L2): Offset of the vector 2
③ Element 3 (L3): Offset of the vector 3
④ Starting point of the kinematic chain
⑤ End point of the kinematic chain
+A1, +A2, +A3 Direction of rotation and orientation of the 3 rotary axes of the angle head

The 3 rotary axes that can be respectively rotated about the center of the axis in the direction
+A1, +A2 or +A3 are located at the end of the three vectors. The direction and rotation are
illustrated by the blue arrows.
The offsets and angles are defined by system variables, see Linear offsets and direction
vectors (Page 536).
The default settings of the 3 rotary axis directions are set in such a way that they correspond
to the simpler basic form (for G17 and $SC_TOOL_LENGH_CONST=default,
$SC_TOOL_LENGH_TYP=default) text:
1. Rotary axis direction (0,0, 1)
2. Rotary axis direction (1, 0, 0)
3. Rotary axis direction (0, 0, 1)
The values for the directions are always available if the angle head adapter function is active.

Linear offsets and direction vectors

Linear offsets
The 3 linear offsets are entered via the system variables $TC_ADPT_OFF[n,3,3].
The arrays describe 3 three-dimensional vectors, which describe the direction in space. An
offset can be assigned to each vector:

Tool management
536 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

$TC_ADPT_OFF[n,m,k] = "<offset>"

$TC_ADPT_OFF[n,m Linear offset of the element

,k] Data type: DOUBLE
Default value: "" (0.0)
<n> Number of the adapter
Data type: INT
Range of values: 1, 2, ... ( SLMAXADAPTERNUMBER)
<m> Number of the angle head element
<k> Coordinate index
Value range 0: L1
1: L2
2: L3

Orientations of the rotary axes

The orientations define the rotary axes for the rotation of the coordinate system about the
angles A1, A2 and A3.
The variable field $TC_ADPT_DIR[N,3,3] is available for defining the vectors.
The rules of the kinematic chain which are described in the Basic Functions Function Manual
apply for the offsets.
If the amount of a direction vector is < 10-6, it is viewed as an undefined direction vector. In this
case, the corresponding default vector from the simplified standard form is used. 1st rotary axis:
(0,0,1), 2nd rotary axis (1,0,0), 3rd rotary axis (1,0,0)
$TC_ADPT_DIR[n,m,k] = <offset>

$TC_ADPT_DIR[n,m,k] Direction vector (X; Y; Z)

Data type: DOUBLE
Value range Direction vector: 0.0 < |vector| ≤ max. REAL value
Default value: The default values are different for the three elements (1,0,0), (0,0,1) (1,0,0).
<n>: Number of the adapter
Data type: INT
Range of val‐ 1, 2, ... ( SLMAXADAPTERNUMBER)
ues:
m Number of the angle head element
Data type: INT
k Coordinate index
Data type: INT
Value range 0: L1
1: L2
2: L3

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 537
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Angle offsets of rotary axes

The angles of the rotary axes are made up of the angle which can be read on the angle scale
on the angle head adapter and an offset that compensates for the difference between the 0°
position of the angle head scale and the basic position defined above. The following two-
dimensional arrays are available:
$TC_ADPT_ANG_CONST[n,m] = <value>

$TC_ADPT_ANG [n,m] Angle of the angle head read on the scale

Data type: Real
Default value: 0.0
<n>: Number of the adapter
Data type: INT
Range of val‐ 1, 2, ... ( SLMAXADAPTERNUMBER)
ues:
m Angle numbers (correspond to A1, A2 or A3)
Data type: REAL

$TC_ADPT_ANG_CONST[n,m] = <offset>

$TC_ADPT_ANG_CONST[n, Offset which compensates for the deviation of the basic setting.
m] Data type: Real
Default value: 0.0
<n>: Number of the adapter
Data type: INT
Range of val‐ 1, 2, ... ( SLMAXADAPTERNUMBER)
ues:
m Angle numbers (correspond to A1, A2 or A3)
Data type: REAL

Tool management
538 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

&

3
4

① Zero position on the scale of the angle head adapter

② Angle offset between the zero position Angle head and the zero position Kinematic chain (deviation from the basic
position)
③ Angle offset between the value read on angle head and the C axis
④ Angle read on angle head adapter

The actual value of the angle offset is then calculated from the sum ② + ③.

7.14.7 Offset values

7.14.7.1 Base length for the adapter

Description
The base dimension (base length) for tools without an adapter function is contained in the
system variables $TC_DP21 - $TC_DP23. When an angle head adapter is used, the tool offset
gets an offset that is displayed in the base length ($TC_DP21 - $TC_DP23).
If an adapter is active, the data of the following system variables are used:

Without adapter Adapter type 1 Adapter type 2

$TC_DP21 $TC_ADPT1 $TC_DP21
$TC_DP22 $TC_ADPT2 $TC_DP22
$TC_DP23 $TC_ADPT3 $TC_DP23

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 539
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

The transformation of the basic orientation of a tool by the angle head adapter consists of the
rotations about the three adapter axes $TC_ADPT_DIR[n, 0 - 2, ] about the three angles of
rotation $TC_ADPT_ANG_CONST[n, 0 - 2] + $TC_ADPT_ANG[n, 0 - 2].
If the variables $TC_ADPT_DIR, $TC_ADPT_ANG_CONST and $TC_ADPT_ANG are not
defined, the values of the offset vectors are set to "zero". The direction vectors of the rotary axes
then have the values that were set in advance (default values):
● Rotary axis A1 has the direction of L1
● Rotary axis A2 has the direction of L3
● Rotary axis A3 has the direction of L1

7.14.7.2 Cutter radius compensations and setup offsets for adapters

Description
For the cutting edge parameters $TC_DP3 - $TC_DP11 there are the parameter sets for sum
offsets ($TC_SCPx3 - $TC_SCPxx1) and setup offsets ($TC_ECPx3 - $TC_ECPxx1).

Assignment table without adapter:

Cut parame‐ Description Location-dependent Location-dependent setup correction

ters wear correction
$TC_DP3 Wear length 1 $TC_SCP13, …, $TC_ECP13, …, $TC_ECP63
$TC_SCP63
$TC_DP4 Wear length 2 $TC_SCP14, …, $TC_ECP14, …, $TC_ECP64
$TC_SCP64
... ... ... ...
$TC_DP11 Angle $TC_SCP21, …, $TC_ECP21, …, $TC_ECP71
$TC_SCP71

Assignment table when an adapter (type 1 and type 2) is used:

Cut parame‐ Description Location-dependent Location-dependent setup correction

ters wear correction
$TC_DP3 Wear length 1 $TC_SCP13 $TC_ECP13
$TC_DP4 Wear length 2 $TC_SCP14 $TC_ECP14
$TC_DP5 Wear length 3 $TC_SCP15 $TC_ECP15

Only the specified parameters are provided corresponding to the adapter transformation
(blocks TOST and TOET). The remaining parameters are not affected by the adapter
transformation.

Tool management
540 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

7.14.7.3 Cutting edge data for the orientation type 2 adapter

Cutting edge data for the orientation (TC_DPVx and TC_DPVNx)

If an angle head adapter is active for a cutting edge, the cutting edge data has no significance
for the orientation ($TC_DPV, $TC_DPV3, $TC_DPV4, $TC_DPV5, $TC_DPVN3,
$TC_DPVN4, $TC_DPVN5).
The orientation is defined by the angle head.

Note
Value of the cutting edge data
The value of the cutting edge data in this case must be "0" ($TC_DPV = 0). If the value deviates
from "0", it is ignored. No error is output.

7.14.8 OPI block ADN

OPI block ADN

Adapter data is used to be able to describe the dimensions of an adapter per magazine location
and the direction of loaded tools. The transformation affects the processing of the tool cutting
edge data in the OPI blocks TOT, TOST and TOET if the tool is located on a magazine location
to which adapter data is assigned.
● Calculation of line: Adapter number if a field[ ] is available
● Calculation of column: Adapter parameters
The block T/ADN addresses the individual adapter via the line and the individual parameter via
the column.

Variable Description Adapter type Data type

adaptType Adapter type Type 1 and type 2 UWORD
adapt1 Adapter geometry: Length 1 Type 1 DOUBLE
adapt2 Adapter geometry: Length 2 Type 1 DOUBLE
adapt3 Adapter geometry: Length 3 Type 1 DOUBLE
adaptt Adapter transformation number Type 1 UWORD
adaptOff00 Offset: 1st element, 1st component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptOff01 Offset: 1st element, 2nd component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptOff02 Offset: 1st element, 3rd component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir00 1st direction component of the 1st rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir01 2nd direction component of the 1st rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir02 3rd direction component of the 1st rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptAng0 Angle between 1st and 2nd element of the angle head adapt‐ Type 2 DOUBLE
er

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 541
Description of functions
7.14 Tool adapter

Variable Description Adapter type Data type

adaptAngConst0 Angle offset between 1st and 2nd element of the angle head Type 2 DOUBLE
adapter
adaptOff10 Offset: 2nd element, 1st component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptOff11 Offset: 2nd element, 2nd component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptOff12 Offset: 2nd element, 3rd component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir10 1st direction component of the 2nd rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir11 2nd direction component of the 2nd rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir12 3rd direction component of the 2nd rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptAng1 Angle between 2nd and 3rd element of the angle head adapt‐ Type 2 DOUBLE
er
adaptAngConst1 Angle offset between 2nd and 3rd element of the angle head Type 2 DOUBLE
adapter
adaptOff20 3rd element, 1st component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptOff21 3rd element, 2nd component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptOff22 3rd element, 3rd component Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir20 1st direction component of the 3rd rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir21 2nd direction component of the 3rd rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptDir22 3rd direction component of the 3rd rotary axis Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptAng2 Angle after the 2nd element of the angle head adapter Type 2 DOUBLE
adaptAngConst2 Angle offset after the 2nd element of the angle head adapter Type 2 DOUBLE

Tool management
542 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Description of functions
7.15 Power failure while tool command is in progress

7.15 Power failure while tool command is in progress

If a power failure occurs during an action requested by tool management, defined strategies are
executed by the PLC or special part programs, in order to establish a defined and consistent
status on the machine and the tool management system. These strategies are machine-
specific. SINUMERIK control systems thereby support the following measures:

Buffered data
All tools, magazine data as well as all magazine assignments are buffered.

Data initialized for control "Power On"

The following data is set to zero:
● Tool status "Tool change in progress"
● Magazine status "Motion is active"
● Magazine location status "Reserved for tool to be loaded"
● The PI-command status with respect to magazine operations like e.g. "Motion is active"
● The tool status selected for 1:1 exchange

Task of the manufacturer's configuration

The PLC must send the last unacknowledged FC 7 or FC 8/FC 6 prior to power failure (READY
did not change to TRUE before power off) back to the NC when the power supply is restored.
The function "Asynchronous transfer" is used for tool transfer in FC 8/FC 6.
Without receiving the request from the tool management system, the PLC initiates a relocation
of tool data from one location to another. For example, relocation of tool data from gripper to
magazine if the tool needed to be returned manually to the magazine when the tool change
operation was aborted.
Changes in position of the tools involved must be communicated via FC 8. The NC then
updates the data for this tool in the tool management.
Further strategies may be necessary, e.g. if a tool change was interrupted. Tools stored in the
buffer must be returned to the magazine for this purpose.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 543
Description of functions
7.15 Power failure while tool command is in progress

Tool management
544 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
SINUMERIK Operate user interface 8
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Configurable settings
The following settings can be configured:
● General settings
● Configure the tool lists
● Configure the list parameters
● Configure the tool types
● Configure the "Additional Data" window
● Configure the "New Tool - Favorites" window
● Configure the "New Tool" window
● Configuring the "New Multitool" window
● Configuring the "New Tool from Code Carrier" window
● Configuring the "New Tool from File" window
● Configure the default values for new tools
● Configure the "Details" window
● Assign names for magazines and magazine locations
● Configuring the "Assign Tooltips for Multitool Locations" window
● Assign names for magazine location types
● Assignment of magazines and magazine locations to channels
● Assignment of magazines to coordinate systems
● Disabling the softkey depending on filters
● Configuring the "Load Station Selection" window
● Coolant and tool-specific functions
● Reason for the tool change when reactivating
● Configure the code carrier connection
● Configuring store to file
The following sections explain how you configure these adaptations.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 545
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Procedure
1. Open the directory: /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/cfg.
2. Copy the "oem_sltmlistconfig.xml" template file
3. Copy the file to the directory /oem/sinumerik/hmi/cfg
OR: /user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg.
4. Change the file name according to the set technology:

File name MD52200 technology MD52201 technology exten‐

sion
sltmlistconfig.xml Milling technology
sltmturninglistconfig.xml Turning technology
sltmmillturnlistconfig.xml Milling technology Turning technology
sltmcirculargrindinglistconfig.xml Cylindrical grinding technolo‐
gy
sltmsurfacegrindinglistconfig.xml Surface grinding technology
sltmplclistconfig.xml PLC tool management
"TRANSLINE 2000"

5. Remove the comments of the example in the template to create your specific configuration.

Configuration examples
Examples for all possible configurations are provided in the template oem_sltmlistconfig.xml,
which are described individually in the following sections:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"?>

- <CONFIGURATION>
<!-- ************************************************************-->
<!-- enter your configuration behind this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->

Configuration examples

<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- enter your configuration ahead this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->
</CONFIGURATION>

Enter your configuration using the following xml identifiers:

Identifier <tag> for the following setting:

<SETTINGS> General settings (Page 548)
<LISTCONFIGURATION> Configuring tool lists (Page 553)
<PARAMETERCONFIGURATION> Configuring list parameters (Page 567)
<TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION> Configure tool types (Page 573)
<MOREDATACONFIGURATION> Configuring the "Additional Data" window
(Page 575)

Tool management
546 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier <tag> for the following setting:

<NEWTOOLFAVORITECONFIGURATION> Configure the "New tool - favorites" window
(Page 577)
<NEWTOOLCONFIGURATION> Configuring the "New Tool" window (Page 578)
<NEWMULTITOOLCONFIGURATION> Configuring the "New Multitool" window
(Page 578)
<NEWTOOLIDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> Configuring the "New Tool from Code Carrier"
window (Page 579)
<NEWTOOLSAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION> Configuring the "New Tool from File" window
(Page 579)
<NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION> Configuring default values for new tools
(Page 580)
<DETAILSCONFIGURATION> Configuring the "Details" window (Page 584)
<MAGAZINEPLACENAMECONFIGURATION> Assigning a name for magazines and magazine
locations (Page 585)
<MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION> Configuring the "Assign Tooltips for Multitool Lo‐
cations" window (Page 587)
<PLACETYPECONFIGURATION> Assigning a name for magazine location types
(Page 588)
<CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT> Assignment of magazines and magazine loca‐
tions to channels (Page 589)
<COORDSYSMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT> Assignment between magazines and magazine
locations and coordinate systems (Page 591)
<FILTERCONFIGURATION> Disabling the softkey depending on filters
(Page 592)
<LOADSTATIONSHANDLEALLTOOLS> Configuring the "Load Station Selection" window
(Page 593)
<TOOLCHANGEREASON> Reason for the tool change when reactivating
(Page 597)
<IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> Configure the code carrier connection
(Page 601)
<SAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION> Configuring Save to file (Page 604)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 547
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.1 General settings

<SETTINGS> tag
The general settings for the tool management user interface are stored in the <SETTINGS> tag.

Entries Meaning
ReactivateWithMagPos True - reactivate with positioning of the tool to the tool mag‐
azine loading point.
False - default setting, reactivate without positioning the tool
magazine.
ReactivateAllMonitorModes True - the actual values of all the monitoring types set in the
NC are reset.
False - default setting, actual value of the active monitoring
type is reset.
ReactivateEnabled True - default setting, reactivation is enabled.
False - reactivation is disabled.
CreateNewToolDialog True - the "New Tool" window is displayed. In this window,
you can specify the tool name and the size of the tool (over‐
sized tool) before actually creating the tool. Other input op‐
tions can be defined by configuring the "New tool" window.
False - default setting, the "New Tool" window is not dis‐
played. Once the name has been entered, the tool will be
created directly in the tool list.
CreateNewMultiToolDialog True - default setting, the "New Multitool" window is dis‐
played. In this window, you can configure the following be‐
fore actually creating the multitool:
● Multitool names
● Number of multitool locations
● Type of clearance input
● Value of the location clearance for each multitool location
False - the "New Multitool" window is not displayed. Once
the name has been entered, the multitool will be created
directly in the tool list.
MagazineSelectionDialog True - a dialog box displaying the buffer, tool magazine and
NC memory is displayed. A mark can be added to or re‐
moved from each of these elements to indicate whether that
element appears in the list display. The "Go to" softkey can
be used to select an element directly in the list display.
False - no dialog box for magazine selection. The system
switches between the buffer, the tool magazines and the NC
memory.
If there is no MagazineSelectionDialog entry in the
<Settings> tag, the dialog box is automatically displayed
with more than one tool magazine (excluding the system
magazine) when magazine configuration is taking place. If
there is only one tool magazine, the switchover function is
used.

Tool management
548 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
NewToolFavoritesOnly Refers to the "New tool" function.
True - only those tool types that are configured as favorites
are listed.
False - default setting, all tool types are listed.
SortationInFirstEtcLevel True - the "Sorting" function is placed at the first softkey
level. The "Continue" function is omitted.
False - default setting, sorting at all softkey levels.
ToolBufferOnceOnTop True - default setting, buffer is displayed at the start of the
list.
False - buffer is displayed for each magazine. Only those
locations are displayed that are assigned to the magazine.
UnloadToolFromLoadPlaceEnabled True - a tool at the load station can be removed from the load
station using the "Unload" softkey.
False - default setting. The "Unload" softkey is not displayed
for a tool at the load position.
CreateNewToolWithCuttPos9Enabled True - cutting edge position 9 is offered in the cutting edge
position selection.
True - default setting, cutting edge position 9 is not offered in
the cutting edge position selection.
AutoHNumberDisplayEnabled Column of the cutting edge parameter "IsoHNoDPH - ISO H
number" depending on the machine configuration.
True - default setting, the column is automatically displayed.
False - the column is not automatically displayed.
AutoUniqueDNumberDisplayEnabled Column of the cutting edge parameter "UniqueDNo" de‐
pending on the machine configuration.
True - default setting, the column is automatically displayed.
False - the column is not automatically displayed.
AccessLevelDeleteAllDNos The following entry specifies the access level as of which the
"Delete all D numbers delete" function is offered.
Default setting: Access level 3 (user) - relevant only when
the "Unique D number" setting has been made.
MagazineNumberOfDCheckAndActivate Default setting: -2 - the tools of all magazines are considered
by the function "Check for unique D number and activate
tool."
>0 - The above function only considers the tools of the
named magazine.
AutoFixedPlaceDisplayEnabled Column of the tool parameter "ToolStateFixed" - tool status
- tool is fixed-location coded and acts dependent on the
magazine configuration.
True - default setting, the column is automatically hidden, if
all of the configured magazines are fixed location coded.
False - the column is not automatically hidden.
MagPlaceAdapterDisplayEnabled Columns of the magazine location adapter parameters are
displayed in the "Magazine" window.
False - default setting, parameters are not displayed.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 549
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
AdaptTransDataViewEnabled The magazine location adapter transformed display of the
cutting edge parameters is enabled. It can be switched on
and off in the settings dialog of the tool lists.
False - default setting, the magazine location adapter trans‐
formed display of the cutting edge parameters is not ena‐
bled.
ActiveCompensationsEnabled The "Working offsets" function is enabled. This function de‐
pends on the machine configuration. Unique D number,
magazine location adapter and magazine management
must be set.
False - default setting, the "Working offsets" function is not
enabled.
M2NLockEnabled Locking of an M to N switchover while a function of the tool
management is being executed.
True - default setting, switchover is locked.
SDToolLengthInListEnabled True - default setting, evaluation of SD42940, SD42942,
and SD42950 in axis name display in the tool lists.
False - the setting data are not evaluated in the axis name
display.
DisableMultiTools True - even though the Multitools function is set in the NC,
they are not offered in the tool lists.
False - default setting, if the Multitools function is set in the
NC, they are offered in the tool lists.
CursorPositionInfoEnabled True - information about the tool on which the cursor is posi‐
tioned is written to the SlCap local variable "/Hmi/TMHMI‐
CurData".
False - default setting, no information about the tool on
which the cursor is positioned is made available on an in‐
terface for the OA.
EnableMonAndBasisGrindingToolTypes True - enable switchover of grinding tool types in respect of
"with/without grinding-specific tool monitoring," "with/with‐
out consideration of the base dimension when calculating
the grinding wheel radius."
False - default setting, switchover not enabled.
ErrorMessageWithoutProgressBar True - error messages are output without a progress bar and
must be acknowledged via softkey.
False - default setting, error message is automatically
closed when the progress bar reaches the end.
ColumnZoomByResolution True - column width is adapted to the resolution of the HMI.
False - default setting, the column width is adapted to the
font size in the HMI. With this setting, with higher resolutions
more columns can be displayed next to each other without
needing to scroll.
AccessLevelReadDetailsAllParameter The following entry specifies the access level as of which the
"Further details" function is offered in the "Details" dialog.
Default setting: Access level 7 (keyswitch position 0) - can
be overlaid through the setting in MD51198.
FixNumberOfMultiToolPlaces Multitools are created with a fixed number of multitool loca‐
tions. There is no prompt when you create the multitool.

Tool management
550 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
FixKindOfDistInMultiTools Multitools are created with a fixed type of clearance input of
the multitool locations. There is no prompt when you create
the multitool.
Possible input value: 3 - clearance of the multitool locations
as an angle.
DlDisplayMode ● DisplayDistributed - default setting, the setup offsets EC
are displayed in the tool list and the additive offsets SC
are displayed in the tool wear list.
● EcInWearList - the setup offsets EC are displayed in the
tool wear list and the additive offsets SC are not dis‐
played.
CombinedToolMonitoring Specifies the combined monitoring types offered in the tog‐
gle field:
● Time/Count - tool life and workpiece count
● Time/Wear - tool life and wear monitoring
● Count/Wear - workpiece count and wear monitoring
● Time/WearDlSc - tool life and wear monitoring for addi‐
tive and setup offsets
● Count/WearDlSc - workpiece count and wear monitoring
for additive and setup offsets
● Time/Count/Wear - tool life, workpiece count and wear
monitoring
● Time/Count/WearDlSc - tool life, workpiece count and
wear monitoring for additive and setup offsets
FiltersCombinedWithOr Defines the filter criteria, which are linked in the filter window
using a logical OR. The default setting for all the filter criteria
is a logical AND. The possible entries are:
● "StandBy" - for tools that are ready for use
● "Active" - for tools with active identifier
● "Locked" - for locked tools
● "Prewarn" - for the prewarning limit
● "RemainingPieces" - for the remaining unit quantity
● "RemainingTime" - for the remaining tool time
● "MarkedToUnload" - for the unload identifier
● "MarkedToLoad" - for the load identifier
AddToGrindingSpindles Defines the spindle numbers that are to be offered in the
"GrindingSpindleNo" ($TC_TPG1) parameter when select‐
ing the grinding spindles. The numbers of the grinding spin‐
dles must be separated by a space, e.g. -1 8 9.
Default display: real NC spindles and 0
HideGrindingSpindles Defines the spindle numbers of the real NC spindles that are
not to be offered in the "GrindingSpindleNo" ($TC_TPG1)
parameter when selecting the grinding spindles. The num‐
bers of the grinding spindles must be separated by a space,
e.g. 1 3.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 551
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
MagazineMoveMessage True - "Magazine movement running" or "Magazine move‐
ment ended" message is displayed.
False - default setting, message is not displayed.
ToolLoadErrorMessage Refers to the output of the fault message due to a negative
PLC.
True - default setting, the fault message is displayed.
False - the fault message is not displayed.

The following settings refer to markings in the lists:

True - marking is displayed.
False - marking is not displayed (default setting).
If several markings apply to one location, the most important information is displayed. For
instance, if a tool is locked, and at the same time, the "Tool position" and the "Reference
direction holder angle" for this tool do not match, then a red cross is displayed for locked. The
yellow triangle for the conflict cannot be seen.

Entries Meaning
ShowSymbolActivePlace Marking of the magazine location at the machining position.
True - default setting applies for the "Turret" magazine type.
False - setting for all other magazine types.
ShowSymbolActiveMultiToolPlace Marking of the multitool location at the machining position. Is
only displayed when the multitool is located in the spindle or
the tool holder.
True - default setting.
ShowSymbolLoadPlace Selection of the magazine location at the loading position.
True - default setting applies for all magazine types (except
Turret is true).
False - setting for the "Turret" magazine type.
ShowSymbolChangeInSpindlePlace Marking of the magazine location at the change position.
True - default setting applies for all magazine types (except
Revolver is true).
False - setting for the "Turret" magazine type.
ShowSymbolActiveTool Marking of the active tool.
False - default setting.
ShowSymbolProgrammedTool Marking of the follow-on tool.
True - default setting.
ShowSymbolActiveDNo Marking of the active cutting edge.
False - default setting.
ShowSymbolActiveDNoInTool Marking of the active tool by marking the active cutting edge.
True - default setting for configuration without magazine
management.
False - setting for configuration with magazine management.
ShowSymbolAcitveDlNo Marking of the active DL number.
True - default setting.

Tool management
552 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
ShowConflictPositionAndDirection Marking of a conflict; tool position and cutting direction do not
match.
True - default setting.
ShowConflictActiveToolWarning Marking of a conflict; turret magazine type and the active tool
are not at the the machining position.
True - default setting.

Example
<SETTINGS>
<ReactivateWithMagPos value="false" type="bool" />
<MagazineMoveMessage value="false" type="bool" />
<CreateNewToolDialog value="true" type="bool" />
<MagazineSelectionDialog value="false" type="bool" />
<AccessLevelWriteDetailsAllParameter value="4" type="int" />
</SETTINGS>

8.1.2 Configuring tool lists

<LISTCONFIGURATION> tag
The entries used for configuring the following list views are located in the
<LISTCONFIGURATION> tag:
● "Tool List" window, identifier <SlTmToollistForm>, see the 1st example.
● "Tool Wear" window, <SlTmToolwearForm> identifier
● "Magazine" window, <SlTmToolmagazinForm> identifier
● "Tool Data OEM" window, <SlTmTooloemForm>identifier
This window is hidden in the default configuration. The window is only displayed when you
enable it with <Enabled>, see the 3rd example.
● "Tool Selection" window, <SlTmToolselectionForm> identifier: In order to select a tool
this window can be displayed in the program input screen.

Entry Meaning
Enabled True - window is displayed.
False - window is hidden.
CAPTION Definition of the list name.
Text Used as label/item below the "CAPTION" to define the heading text.
COLUMNX Column selection: X stands for the column number.
TOOLTYPE_ALL The column setting applies to all tool types.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 553
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entry Meaning
TOOLTYPE_ALL_XXX The column setting applies to all tool types of a group. XXX stands for the
group number of the tool types. The hundreds position is used as the
group number, for example, TOOLTYPE_ALL_100 or TOOL‐
TYPE_ALL_200 etc.
TOOLTYPE_XXX The column setting applies to a particular tool type. XXX stands for the
number of the tool type.
EMPTY_MAG_PLACE The column setting applies to an empty magazine location. Empty mag‐
azine locations appear in a list sorted according to magazine.
Item Identifier of the list parameter.
See example: The column in which the magazine location type is dis‐
played is created with the identifier "MagPlaceType."
Tool parameter identifiers (Page 557)
Cutting edge parameter identifiers (Page 559)
Monitoring parameter identifiers (Page 562)
Magazine location parameter identifiers (Page 564)
DELETE_COLUMN Delete column.
INSERT_COLUMN Insert column.

Note
Independent of their programming, the entries are effective in the following sequence:
1. COLUMNX
2. DELETE_COLUMN
3. INSERT_COLUMN

Note
The Enabled entry does not apply for the "Tool Selection" window. The other entries apply.

Example 1: Configuring the magazine list - magazine location and tool location type

Note
The columns of the list configuration cannot be taken from the display in the user interface in
all cases because some columns are automatically inserted and therefore not included in the
count of the configuration.

Variant 1
Column 10 and column 11 are overwritten. If column 10 and column 11 do not exist, the new
columns will be added to the existing columns.

<LISTCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Magazine list *** -->
<SlTmToolmagazinForm>

Tool management
554 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

<!-- **** Column 10 *** -->

<COLUMN10>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display magazine location type *** -->
<Item value="MagPlaceType" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</COLUMN10>
<!-- **** Column 11 *** -->
<COLUMN11>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display tool location type *** -->
<Item value="ToolPlaceSpec" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** For all multitools *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_9997>
<!-- **** Display for all multitool location types *** -->
<Item value="MultiToolPlaceSpec" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_9997>
</COLUMN11>
</SlTmToolmagazinForm>
</LISTCONFIGURATION>

Variant 2
The new columns are inserted in the standard configuration between the "Magazine location
locked" and "Oversized tool" columns.

<LISTCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Magazine list *** -->
<SlTmToolmagazinForm>
<!-- **** Insert column *** -->
<INSERT_COLUMN>
<!-- **** Column 7 *** -->
<COLUMN7>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display magazine location type *** -->
<Item value="MagPlaceType" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</COLUMN7>
<!-- **** Column 8 *** -->
<COLUMN8>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 555
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->

<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display tool location type *** -->
<Item value="ToolPlaceSpec" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** For all multitools *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_9997>
<!-- **** Display for all multitool location types *** -->
<Item value="MultiToolPlaceSpec" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_9997>
</COLUMN8>
</INSERT_COLUMN>
</SlTmToolmagazinForm>
</LISTCONFIGURATION>

Example 2: Configuring the magazine list - "Oversized tool" column is deleted

Note
The columns of the list configuration cannot be taken from the display in the user interface in
all cases because some columns are automatically inserted and therefore not included in the
count of the configuration.

<LISTCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Magazine list *** -->
<SlTmToolmagazinForm>
<!-- **** Delete column 7 *** -->
<DELETE_COLUMN>
<COLUMN7 />
</DELETE_COLUMN>
</SlTmToolmagazinForm>
</LISTCONFIGURATION>

Example 3: Enabling the OEM tool data list

<SlTmTooloemForm>
<Enabled value="true" type="bool" />
</SlTmTooloemForm>

Tool management
556 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Result
● The "OEM Tool Data" window is displayed. It automatically displays the columns shown in
the figure.
● The new "OEM tools" softkey appears and can be operated.

8.1.2.1 Tool parameter identifiers

Tool parameters
For the tool parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration file:

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

Empty Empty field -
ToolNo Number of the tool -
AdaptNo Adapter number assignment $TC_MPP8
DuploNo Duplo number $TC_TP1
DuploNoRW Duplo number, read and write access $TC_TP1
NumCuttEdges Number of cutting edges of tool $P_TOOLND
ToolIdent Tool name $TC_TP2
ToolIdentRO Tool name, read only access $TC_TP2
ToolInfo Tool information $TC_TP11
ToolInMag Magazine in which the tool is located $A_TOOLMN
ToolInPlace Magazine location containing the tool $A_TOOLMLN

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 557
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

ToolInMagInPlace Magazine number/Magazine location $A_TOOLMN /
$A_TOOL_MLN
ToolMonTCW Type of tool monitoring, tool life, workpiece $TC_TP9
count and wear. If wear monitoring has not been
enabled via the machine data, this parameter is
handled like ToolMonTC.
ToolMonTC Type of tool monitoring, tool life and workpiece $TC_TP9
count
ToolPlaceSpec Location type $TC_TP7
ToolPlaceSpecIdent Location type, if it is to be displayed as text. The $TC_TP7
precondition is that the text for the location type
was configured.
ToolSearch Tool search type for replacement tools $TC_TP10
ToolMyMag Owner magazine of the tool $A_MYMN
ToolMyPlace Owner magazine location of the tool $A_MYMLN
ToolSizeLeft Tool size left in half locations $TC_TP3
ToolSizeRight Tool size right in half locations $TC_TP4
ToolSizeUpper Tool size upper in half locations $TC_TP5
ToolSizeDown Tool size lower in half locations $TC_TP6
ToolOverSize Tool size as fixed setting - two half locations left, $TC_TP3 -
two half locations right, one half location top, $TC_TP6
one half location bottom
ToolState Tool status in the hexadecimal notation $TC_TP8
ToolStateActiv Tool status - tool active $TC_TP8, Bit0
ToolStateEnabled Tool status - tool released $TC_TP8, Bit1
ToolStateLocked Tool status - tool locked $TC_TP8, Bit2
ToolStateLockedRO Tool status - tool locked, only read access $TC_TP8, Bit2
ToolStateMeasured Tool status - tool measured $TC_TP8, Bit3
ToolStatePrewarn Tool status - tool has reached prewarning limit $TC_TP8, Bit4
ToolStatePrewarnRO Tool status - tool has reached prewarning limit, $TC_TP8, Bit4
only read access
ToolStateInChange Tool status - tool is being changed $TC_TP8, Bit5
ToolStateFixed Tool status - tool fixed place coded $TC_TP8, Bit6
ToolStateUsed Tool status - tool was in use $TC_TP8, Bit7
ToolStateAutoReturn Tool status - automatic return $TC_TP8
ToolStateIgnoreLocked Tool status - do not observe locked $TC_TP8, Bit9
ToolStateMarkedToUnload Tool status - tool is marked to unload $TC_TP8, Bit10
ToolStateMarkedToLoad Tool status - tool is marked to load $TC_TP8, Bit11
ToolStatePermanent Tool status - tool is permanent $TC_TP8, Bit12
ToolState1To1Exchange Tool status - one to one replacement $TC_TP8, Bit14
ToolStateHandTool Tool status - manual tool $TC_TP8, Bit15
ToolProtAreaFile File name of the tool description which is re‐ $TC_TP_PROTA
quired to define the protection zone
ToolMaxVelo Maximum speed $TC_TP_MAX_VE‐
LO

Tool management
558 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

ToolMaxAcc Maximum acceleration $TC_TP_MAX_AC
C
ToolInMultiTool Multitool in which the tool is located $A_TOOLMTN
ToolInMultiToolPlace Multitool location containing the tool $A_TOOLMTLN
ToolMyMultiTool Owner multitool of the tool $A_MYMTN
ToolMyMultiToolPlace Owner multitool location of the tool $A_MYMTLN
ToolAlarmIsExtended PLC tool status - function "extended alarm" ac‐ -
tive
ToolAlarmLimit PLC tool status - alarm limit reached -
ToolExtAlarmLimit PLC tool status - limit "extended alarm" reached -
ToolUser_1, ... ToolUser_10 OEM tool parameters 1 to 10 $TC_TPC1, ...
$TC_TPC10
ToolAppl_1, ... ToolAppl_10 Siemens application tool parameters 1 to 10 $TC_TPCS1, ...
$TC_TPCS10
*)
Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

Note
Tool name "ToolIdent"
The maximum length of tool names is 31 ASCII characters.
The number of characters is reduced for Asian characters or Unicode characters.
The following special characters are not permitted: | # "

8.1.2.2 Cutting edge parameter identifiers

For the cutting edge parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration file:

Identifier Parameter or property System

variable *)
EdgeNo D number -
EdgeNoIdx Cutting edge number -
ToolType Tool type, cutting edge parameter 1 $TC_DP1
CuttEdgePos Cutting edge position, cutting edge param‐ $TC_DP2
eter 2
GeoLength1 Length 1, cutting edge parameter 3 $TC_DP3
GeoLengthGeoAx1 Length of geometry axis 1, cutting edge $TC_DP3
parameter 3, e.g. length X
GeoLengthGeoAx1DiscDiameter Grinding wheel diameter in geometry axis $TC_DP3
1, cutting edge parameter 3
GeoLengthGeoAx1DresserDiameter Dressing tool diameter in geometry axis 1, $TC_DP3
cutting edge parameter 3
GeoLength Length, cutting edge parameter 3 $TC_DP3
GeoLength2 Length 2, cutting edge parameter 4 $TC_DP4

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 559
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System

variable *)
GeoLengthGeoAx3 Length of geometry axis 3, cutting edge $TC_DP4
parameter 4, e.g. length Z
GeoLengthGeoAx3DiscDiameter Grinding wheel diameter in geometry axis $TC_DP4
3, cutting edge parameter 4
GeoLengthGeoAx3DresserDiameter Dressing tool diameter in geometry axis 3, $TC_DP4
cutting edge parameter 4
GeoLength3 Length 3, cutting edge parameter 5 $TC_DP5
GeoLengthGeoAx2 Length of geometry axis 2, cutting edge $TC_DP5
parameter 5, e.g. length Y
GeoLengthGeoAx2DiscDiameter Grinding wheel diameter in geometry axis $TC_DP5
2, cutting edge parameter 5
GeoLengthGeoAx2DresserDiameter Dressing tool diameter in geometry axis 2, $TC_DP5
cutting edge parameter 5
GeoRadius Radius, cutting edge parameter 6 $TC_DP6
GeoOutsideRadius714 External radius for the star probe, tool type $TC_DP6
714, cutting edge parameter 6
GeoCuttEdgeRadius Tool nose radius, cutting edge parameter 6 $TC_DP6
GeoCornerRadius Corner radius, cutting edge parameter 7 $TC_DP7
GeoOutsideRadius Outside radius, cutting edge parameter 7 $TC_DP7
GeoBoomLength Cantilever length, cutting edge parameter $TC_DP7
7
GeoSlotWidth Slot width, for example, for slotting saw, $TC_DP7
cutting edge parameter 7
GeoRadius714 Ball radius for the star probe, tool type 714, $TC_DP7
cutting edge parameter 7
GeoLength4 Length 4, cutting edge parameter 8 $TC_DP8
PlateLength Cutting tip length, cutting edge parameter $TC_DP8
8
GeoProjection Protrusion, for example, for slotting saw, $TC_DP8
cutting edge parameter 8
GeoLength5 Length 5, cutting edge parameter 9 $TC_DP9
GeoWidth Width, cutting edge parameter 9 $TC_DP9
PlateWidth Cutting tip width, cutting edge parameter 9 $TC_DP9
GeoPitch Thread pitch, cutting edge parameter 9 $TC_DP9
BoreRadius Hole radius, cutting edge parameter 9 $TC_DP9
GeoAngle1 Angle 1, cutting edge parameter 10 $TC_DP10
HolderAngle Holder angle, cutting edge parameter 10 $TC_DP10
CorrectionAngle Correction angle to align the probe, cutting $TC_DP10
edge parameter 10
GeoAngle2 Angle 2, cutting edge parameter 11 $TC_DP11
AngleConicalMillTool Angle conical mill tools, cutting edge pa‐ $TC_DP11
rameter 11
CuttDirection Reference direction holder angle, cutting $TC_DP11
edge parameter 11
WearLength1 Wear length 1, cutting edge parameter 12 $TC_DP12

Tool management
560 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System

variable *)
WearLengthGeoAx1 Wear length of geometry axis 1, cutting $TC_DP12
edge parameter 12,
e.g. Δ length X
WearLength Wear length, cutting edge parameter 12 $TC_DP12
WearLength2 Wear length 2, cutting edge parameter 13 $TC_DP13
WearLengthGeoAx3 Wear length of geometry axis 3, cutting $TC_DP13
edge parameter 13,
e.g. Δ length Z
WearLength3 Wear length 3, cutting edge parameter 14 $TC_DP14
WearLengthGeoAx2 Wear length of geometry axis 2, cutting $TC_DP14
edge parameter 14,
e.g. Δ length Y
WearRadius Wear radius, cutting edge parameter 15 $TC_DP15
WearOutsideRadius714 Wear external radius for the star probe, $TC_DP15
tool type 714, cutting edge parameter 15
WearCuttEdgeRadius Wear tool nose radius, cutting edge pa‐ $TC_DP15
rameter 15
WearCornerRadius Wear corner radius, cutting edge parame‐ $TC_DP16
ter 16
WearSlotWidth Wear slot width, for example, for slotting $TC_DP16
saw, cutting edge parameter 16
WearLength4 Wear length 4, cutting edge parameter 17 $TC_DP17
WearProjection Wear protrusion, for example, for slotting $TC_DP17
saw, cutting edge parameter 17
WearLength5 Wear length 5, cutting edge parameter 18 $TC_DP18
WearAngle1 Wear angle 1, cutting edge parameter 19 $TC_DP19
WearAngle2 Wear angle 2, cutting edge parameter 20 $TC_DP20
AdaptLength1 Adapter length 1, cutting edge parameter $TC_DP21
21
AdaptLengthGeoAx1 Adapter length of geometry axis 1, cutting $TC_DP21
edge parameter 21, e.g. adapter length X
AdaptLength Adapter length, cutting edge parameter 21 $TC_DP21
AdaptLength2 Adapter length 2, cutting edge parameter $TC_DP22
22
AdaptLengthGeoAx3 Adapter length of geometry axis 3, cutting $TC_DP22
edge parameter 22, e.g. adapter length Z
AdaptLength3 Adapter length 3, cutting edge parameter $TC_DP23
23
AdaptLengthGeoAx2 Adapter length of geometry axis 2, cutting $TC_DP23
edge parameter 23, e.g. adapter length Y
ReliefAngle Relief angle, cutting edge parameter 24 $TC_DP24
PlateAngle Cutting tip angle, combination of cutting $TC_DP24 and
parameter 24 and cutting edge parameter $TC_DP10
10
NoseAngle Nose angle, cutting edge parameter 24 $TC_DP24
CuttRate Cutting rate, cutting edge parameter 25 $TC_DP25

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 561
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System

variable *)
SpindleDirection For rotating tools, direction of rotation of $TC_DP25 bit8
the tool spindle. For turning tools, direction and bit9
of rotation of the main spindle
Coolant1 Coolant 1 $TC_DP25 Bit10
Coolant2 Coolant 2 $TC_DP25 Bit11
MFunction1 M function 1 $TC_DP25 Bit0
MFunction2 M function 2 $TC_DP25 Bit1
MFunction3 M function 3 $TC_DP25 Bit2
MFunction4 M function 4 $TC_DP25 Bit3
IsoHNoDPH ISO H number $TC_DPH
OrientNo Cutting edge orientation $TC_DPV
OrientV1 Cutting edge orientation vector 1 $TC_DPV3
OrientV2 Cutting edge orientation vector 2 $TC_DPV4
OrientV3 Cutting edge orientation vector 3 $TC_DPV5
OrientVGeoAx1 Cutting edge orientation vector of geome‐ $TC_DPV3
try axis 1, cutting edge orientation param‐
eter 3, e.g. vector X
OrientVGeoAx3 Cutting edge orientation vector of geome‐ $TC_DPV4
try axis 3, cutting edge orientation param‐
eter 4, e.g. vector Z
OrientVGeoAx2 Cutting edge orientation vector of geome‐ $TC_DPV5
try axis 2, cutting edge orientation param‐
eter 5, e.g. vector Y
TeethCount Number of teeth, cutting edge parameter $TC_DPNT
34
BasicRotationAngle Clamping angle of tool, cutting edge pa‐ $TC_DPROT
rameter 35
UniqueDNo Unique D number $TC_DPCE
EdgeUser_1, ..., EdgeUser_10, OEM cutting edge parameters 1 to 10 $TC_DPC1, ...
$TC_DPC10
EdgeAppl_1, ..., EdgeAppl_10x Siemens application cutting edge parame‐ $TC_DPCS1, ...
ters 1 to 10 $TC_DPCS10
*)
Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

8.1.2.3 Monitoring parameter identifiers

For the monitoring parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration file:

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

SupWarning Warning limits, taking the current monitoring type -
into consideration
SupRemaining Actual value, taking the current monitoring type into -
consideration
SupDesired Setpoint, taking the current monitoring type into -
consideration

Tool management
562 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

SupWarningTime Tool life warning limit $TC_MOP1
SupRemainingTime Tool life actual value $TC_MOP2
SupWarningPieces Prewarning limit for workpiece count $TC_MOP3
SupRemainingPieces Actual value for workpiece count $TC_MOP4
SupDesiredTime Setpoint for tool life $TC_MOP11
SupDesiredPieces Setpoint for workpiece count $TC_MOP13
SupWarningWear Prewarning limit for wear $TC_MOP5
SupRemainingWear Actual value for wear $TC_MOP6
SupDesiredWear Setpoint for wear $TC_MOP15
SupExtendedAlarm PLC tool management: Extended alarm -
SupWarningPiecesIncre‐ PLC tool management: Prewarning limit for work‐ $TC_MOP13 -
mental piece count $TC_MOP3
SupActualPieces PLC tool management: Actual value for workpiece $TC_MOP13 -
count $TC_MOP4
EdgeSupUser_1, ... OEM cutting edge monitoring parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MOPC1, ...
EdgeSupUser_10 $TC_MOPC10
EdgeSupAppl_1, ... Edge‐ Siemens application cutting edge monitoring pa‐ $TC_MOPCS1, ...
SupAppl_10 rameters 1 to 10 $TC_MOPCS10
*)
Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

8.1.2.4 Grinding parameter identifiers

For grinding parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration file:

Identifier/parameter Meaning System variable *)

GrindingSpindleNo Spindle number $TC_TPG1
GrindingConnectionRule Chaining rule $TC_TPG2
MinimalDiscRadius Minimum grinding wheel radius $TC_TPG3
ActualDiscRadius Actual grinding wheel radius (read ac‐ -
cess only)
MinimalDiscWidth Minimum grinding wheel width $TC_TPG4
ActualDiscWidth Actual grinding wheel width $TC_TPG5
MaximalDiscSpeed Maximum grinding wheel speed $TC_TPG6
MaximalDiscPeripheralVelocity Maximum grinding wheel peripheral ve‐ $TC_TPG7
locity
AngleBevelDisc Angle of inclined wheel $TC_TPG8
ParamForRadiusCalculation Parameters to calculate the radius $TC_TPG9
DressingPath Directory path to the dressing program $TC_TPG_DRSPATH
DressingProgram Dressing program name $TC_TPG_DRSPROG
*)
Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 563
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

The following parameters are assigned to the cutting edges of the grinding tool:

Identifier/parameter Meaning
GrindingMonitoring Grinding-specific tool monitoring
GrindingUseBaseLength Taking into account the base dimension when calculating the
grinding wheel radius

8.1.2.5 Magazine location parameter identifiers

For the magazine location parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration
file:

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

MagPlaceKind Location kind $TC_MPP1
MagPlaceType Location type $TC_MPP2
MagPlaceTypeIdent Location type as text $TC_MPP2
MagPlaceTNo Tool number of the tool in this location $TC_MPP6
MagPlaceWatchNeighbour Consider adjacent location $TC_MPP3
MagPlaceStateLocked Magazine location locked $TC_MPP4, Bit0
MagPlaceStateEmpty Magazine location free $TC_MPP4, Bit1
MagPlaceStateResInterMag Reserved for tool in buffer $TC_MPP4, Bit2
MagPlaceStateResLoadTool Reserved for tool to be loaded $TC_MPP4, Bit3
MagPlaceStateOccupiedLeft Magazine location occupied, left half location $TC_MPP4, Bit4
MagPlaceStateOccupiedRight Magazine location occupied, right half loca‐ $TC_MPP4, Bit5
tion
MagPlaceStateOccupiedUpper Magazine location occupied, upper half loca‐ $TC_MPP4, Bit6
tion
MagPlaceStateOccupiedDown Magazine location occupied, lower half loca‐ $TC_MPP4, Bit7
tion
MagPlaceStateReservedLeft Magazine location reserved, left half location $TC_MPP4, Bit8
MagPlaceStateReservedRight Magazine location reserved, right half location $TC_MPP4, Bit9
MagPlaceStateReservedUpper Magazine location reserved, upper half loca‐ $TC_MPP4, Bit10
tion
MagPlaceStateReservedDown Magazine location reserved, lower half loca‐ $TC_MPP4, Bit11
tion
MagPlaceMagazineNo Magazine number -
MagPlaceTypeIdx Type index $TC_MPP5
MagPlaceWearGroup Wear group number $TC_MPP5
MagPlaceAdaptNo Adapter number $TC_MPP7
MagPlaceNo Magazine location number -
MagNoMagPlaceNo Magazine number/Magazine location number -
MagPlaceUser_1, ... MagPla‐ OEM magazine location parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MPPC1, ...
ceUser_10 $TC_MPPC10
MagPlaceAppl_1, ... MagPla‐ Siemens magazine location parameters 1 to $TC_MPPCS1, ...
ceAppl_10 10 $TC_MPPCS10

Tool management
564 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this
*)

parameter.

8.1.2.6 Magazine location adapter parameter identifiers

The following identifiers are used in the configuration file for the magazine location adapter
parameters:

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

MagPlaceAdapterLength1 Magazine location adapter length 1 $TC_ADPT1
MagPlaceAdapterLengthGeoAx1 Magazine location adapter geometry axis 1 $TC_ADPT1
MagPlaceAdapterLength2 Magazine location adapter length 2 $TC_ADPT2
MagPlaceAdapterLengthGeoAx3 Magazine location adapter geometry axis 3 $TC_ADPT2
MagPlaceAdapterLength3 Magazine location adapter length 3 $TC_ADPT3
MagPlaceAdapterLengthGeoAx2 Magazine location adapter geometry axis 2 $TC_ADPT3
MagPlaceAdapterTrafoNo Magazine location adapter transformation $TC_ADPT4
number
*)
Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this parameter.

8.1.2.7 Multitool parameter identifiers

For the multitool parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration file:

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

MultiToolNo Number of the multitool -
MultiToolNumberOfPlaces Number of multitool locations $TC_MTPN
MultiToolNumberOfPlacesRO Number of multitool locations, only read ac‐ $TC_MTPN
cess
MultiToolIdent Name of the multitool $TC_MTP2
MultiToolInMag Magazine in which the multitool is located $A_TOOLMN
MultiToolInPlace Magazine location containing the multitool $A_TOOLMLN
MultiToolInMagInPlace Magazine number/Magazine location $A_TOOLMN /
$A_TOOLMLN
MultiToolMyMag Owner magazine of the multitool $A_MYMN
MultiToolMyPlace Owner magazine location of the multitool $A_MYMLN
MultiToolPlaceSpec Location type $TC_MTP7
MultiToolPlaceSpecIdent Location type as text $TC_MTP7
MultiToolSizeLeft Multitool size to the left in half locations $TC_MTP3
MultiToolSizeRight Multitool size to the right in half locations $TC_MTP4
MultiToolSizeUpper Multitool size to the top in half locations $TC_MTP5
MultiToolSizeDown Multitool size to the bottom in half locations $TC_MTP6
MultiToolOverSize Multitool size as fixed setting - two half lo‐ $TC_MTP3 -
cations left, two half locations right, one half $TC_MTP6
location top, one half location bottom
MultiToolPosition Multitool position $TC_MTP_POS

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 565
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

MultiToolProtAreaFile File name of the multitool description which $TC_MTP_PROTA
is required to determine the protection zone
MultiToolKindOfDist Type of distance input of the multitool loca‐ $TC_MTP_KD
tions
MultiToolKindOfDistRO Type of distance input of the multitool loca‐ $TC_MTP_KD
tions, only read access
MultiToolDistAngle Type of distance input of the multitool loca‐ $TC_MTP_KD
tions as an angle
MultiToolDistAngleRO Type of distance input of the multitool loca‐ $TC_MTP_KD
tions as an angle, read only access
MultiToolState Multitool status in the hexadecimal notation $TC_MTP8
MultiToolStateEnabled Multitool status - multitool released $TC_MTP8, Bit1
MultiToolStateLocked Multitool status - multitool locked $TC_MTP8, Bit2
MultiToolStateLockedRO Multitool status - multitool locked, only read $TC_MTP8, Bit2
access
MultiToolStateInChange Multitool status - multitool is being changed $TC_MTP8, Bit5
MultiToolStateFixed Multitool status - multitool fixed location co‐ $TC_MTP8, Bit6
ded
MultiToolStateUsed Multitool status - multitool was in use $TC_MTP8, Bit7
MultiToolStateAutoReturn Multitool status - automatic return $TC_MTP8, Bit8
MultiToolStateIgnoreLocked Multitool status - do not observe locked sta‐ $TC_MTP8, Bit9
tus
MultiToolStateMarkedToUnload Multitool status - multitool is selected to be $TC_MTP8, Bit10
unloaded
MultiToolStateMarkedToLoad Multitool status - multitool is selected to be $TC_MTP8, Bit11
loaded
MultiToolStatePermanent Multitool status - multitool is a master tool $TC_MTP8, Bit12
MultiToolState1To1Exchange Multitool status - one to one replacement $TC_MTP8, Bit14
MultiToolStateHandTool Multitool status - manual tool $TC_MTP8, Bit15
MultiToolStateLockMtIfToolLock Multitool status - multitool is locked if a tool $TC_MTP8, Bit16
is locked in multitool
MultiToolUser_1, ... MultiToolUs‐ OEM multitool parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MTPC1, ...
er_10 $TC_MTPC10
MultiToolAppl_1, ... MultiToo‐ Siemens application multitool parameters $TC_MTPCS1, ...
lAppl_10 1 to 10 $TC_MTPCS10

Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this
*)

parameter.

8.1.2.8 Multitool location parameter identifiers

For the multitool location parameters, the following identifiers are used in the configuration file:

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

MultiToolDist Multitool location distance taking into account -
the actual type of distance input of the multitool
MultiToolPlaceDistLength Multitool location distance, length $TC_MTPPL

Tool management
566 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Identifier Parameter or property System variable *)

MultiToolPlaceDistAngle Multitool location distance angle, angle $TC_MTPPA
MultiToolPlaceType Location type $TC_MTPP2
MultiToolPlaceTypeIdent Location type as text $TC_MTPP2
MultiToolPlaceState Multitool status in the hexadecimal notation $TC_MTPP4
MultiToolPlaceStateLocked Multitool location locked $TC_MTPP4, Bit0
MultiToolPlaceStateEmpty Multitool location empty $TC_MTPP4, Bit1
MultiToolPlaceTNo Tool number of the tool in this multitool location $TC_MTPP6
MultiToolPlaceAdaptNo Adapter number $TC_MTPP7
MultiToolPlaceNo Multitool location number -
MultiToolPlaceUser_1, … Mul‐ OEM multitool location parameters 1 to 10 $TC_MTPPC1, …
tiToolPlaceUser_10 $TC_MTPPC10
MultiToolPlaceAppl_1, … Mul‐ Siemens application multitool location parame‐ $TC_MTPPCS1, …
tiToolPlaceAppl_10 ters 1 to 10 $TC_MTPPCS10

Parameter corresponds to the system variable or the system variable is the basis for this
*)

parameter.

8.1.3 Configuring list parameters

<PARAMETERCONFIGURATION> tag
In the <PARAMETERCONFIGURATION> tag, you have the following options:
1. Changing list parameters.
2. Creating new list parameters based on an existing parameter.

Changing list parameters

You can change all list parameters included in the system.
Tool parameter identifiers (Page 557)
Cutting edge parameter identifiers (Page 559)
Monitoring parameter identifiers (Page 562)
Grinding parameter identifiers (Page 563)
Magazine location parameter identifiers (Page 564)
Magazine location adapter parameter identifiers (Page 565)
Multitool parameter identifiers (Page 565)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 567
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Multitool location parameter identifiers (Page 566)

Entries Meaning
HeadLine Column header. Text entered is displayed as a header.
Example: Text "Radius" is displayed as a header (default).
Tooltip Text that is displayed in the tooltip.
Example: Text "Geometry radius" is displayed in the tooltip (default).
ShortText Text if the parameter is displayed in the "More Data" window.
Example: Text "Rad." is displayed in the "More Data" window (default).
DetailsText Text, if the parameter is displayed in the "Details" window.
Example: Text "Radius" is displayed in the "Details" window (default).
Width Column width in pixels in relation to a 640 x 480 resolution.
See example below: The default column width is changed to 53 pixels.
DisplayMode Values that the parameter is displayed with.
See example below: The default setting is changed to "DoubleMode".
The following values can also be accepted:
AnyMode All characters
IntegerMode Integers
UnsignedIntegerMode Unsigned integers
DoubleMode Values with decimal places
The number of decimal places is specified in "Dec‐
imalPlaces"
UnsignedDoubleMode Unsigned values with decimal places
The number of decimal places is specified in "Dec‐
imalPlaces"
Length Specified length
Angle Specified angle
LinearFeedPerTime Linear feed in mm/minute
LinearFeedPerRevolution Linear feed in mm/revolution
LinearFeedPerTooth Linear feed in mm/tooth
RevolutionSpeed Speed
ConstantCuttingSpeed Constant cutting rate
DecimalPlaces Number of decimal places if "DoubleMode" or "UnsignedDoubleMode" is selected
in the DisplayMode.
See example: Two decimal places are entered.
ItemType Field types in which a value is displayed.
TextField Input/output field for values and texts
TextFieldReadOnly Output field for values and texts
CheckBox Input/output field for states
CheckBoxReadOnly Output field for states
BitMask Bit mask for the display of a bit from a value. The bit mask is entered as integer
value. Bit 0 → 1, Bit 1 → 2, Bit 2 → 4
AccessLevel Value for the access level that is used for these parameters in the user interface.
Value range 1 to 7

Tool management
568 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
UpperLimit Upper input limit for these parameters in the user interface.
Only applies for numerically entered parameters.
LowerLimit Lower input limit for these parameters in the user interface.
Only applies for numerically entered parameters.

Example
In the following example, the <GeoRadius> parameter is used.
Only enter the modified data.

<PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>
<GeoRadius>
<Width value="53" type="int" />
<DisplayMode value="DoubleMode" type="QString" />
<DecimalPlaces value="2" type="int" />
</GeoRadius>
</PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>

Configuring new list parameters based on an existing list parameter.

Assign a new parameter name and enter only the changed data:

Entries Meaning
Assign new parameter name
See example 1: Text "NewGeoRadius"
Base Name of the parameter on which the new parameter is based.
See example 1: "GeoRadius" parameter is used as a template.
Also enter only the changed data here. All other data is taken from the existing
parameter.
See example 1: Column width changed to 46 pixels. Number of decimal places
changed to 1.

Example 1
<PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>
<NewGeoRadius>
<Base value="GeoRadius" type="QString" />
<Width value="46" type="int" />
<DisplayMode value="DoubleMode" type="QString" />
<DecimalPlaces value="1" type="int" />
</NewGeoRadius>
</PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 569
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Example 2

Entries Meaning
Assign new cutting edge parameter name
The name is "EdgeUser_1_Bit0" in the following example.
Base Name of the parameter on which the new parameter is based.
In the following example, the "EdgeUser_1" parameter is used as template.
Also enter only the changed data here. All other data is taken from the existing
cutting edge parameter.
The following entries are changed:
Field type: Input/output field for states
Value output: All characters
Bit mask: Bit 0
Column width changed to 17 pixels.
Header changed to "TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0"
Text in the tooltip changed to "TM_TT_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0"

<PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>
<EdgeUser_1_Bit0>
<Base value="EdgeUser_1" type="QString" />
<ItemType value="CheckBox" type="QString" />
<DisplayMode value="AnyMode" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="1" type="int" />
<Width value="17" type="int" />
<HeadLine value="TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0" type="QString" />
<ToolTip value="TM_TT_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0" type="QString" />
</EdgeUser_1_Bit0>
</PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>

Tool management
570 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.4 List of tool types

Coding of tool types for milling tools

Group with type 1xy (milling tool):

100 Milling tool according to CLDATA (DIN 66215)

110 Ballhead cutter (cylindrical die milling tool)
111 Ballhead cutter (tapered die milling tool)
120 End mill (without corner rounding)
121 End mill (with corner rounding)
130 Angle head cutter (without corner rounding)
131 Angle head cutter (with corner rounding)
140 Facing cutter
145 Thread cutter
150 Side mill
151 Saw
155 Bevel cutter (without corner rounding)
156 Bevel cutter (with corner rounding)
157 Tapered die-sinking cutter
160 Drill and thread milling cutter

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 571
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Coding of tool types for drills

Group type 2xy (drills):

200 Twist drill

205 Solid drill
210 Boring bar
220 Center drill
230 Countersink
231 Counterbore
240 Tap regular thread
241 Tap fine thread
242 Tap Whitworth thread
250 Reamer

Coding of tool types for grinding tools

Group type 4xy (grinding tools):

400 Grinding wheel circumference

410 Face grinding wheel
490 Dresser
494 Dressing roller for cylindrical grinding
495 Dressing roller for surface grinding
496 Dressing wheel for cylindrical grinding
497 Dressing wheel for surface grinding

Grinding tool types 401, 402, 403 as well as 411, 412, 413 are not listed as tool types that can
be selected. The grinding-specific tool monitoring - taking into account the basic dimension
when calculating the grinding wheel radius - is set using dedicated parameters. These
parameters act on the tool types in the usual form.

Coding of tool types for turning tools

Group type 5xy (turning tools):

500 Roughing tool

510 Finishing tool
520 Plunge cutter
530 Parting tool
540 Threading tool
550 Steel profile
560 Rotary drill (ECOCUT)
580 Orientated probe
585 Calibration tool

Tool management
572 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Coding of tool types for special tools

Group type 7xy (special tools):

700 Slotting saw

710 3D probe
711 Edge probe
712 Mono probe
713 L probe
714 Star probe
725 Calibration tool
730 Stop
731 Spindle sleeves
732 End support
900 Auxiliary tools

8.1.5 Configure tool types

<TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION> tag
The entries used for configuring the tool types are located in the
<TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION> tag:

Entries Meaning
TOOLTYPE_XXX XXX stands for the number of the tool type.
For the assignment of the tool type and number, please refer to Section
"List of tool types (Page 571)".
Tooltype Number (XXX) of the tool type
Name Text identifier of the tool name. The tool name is displayed in the following
windows:
● "New Tool - Favorites"
● "New Tool - Milling Cutter 100 - 199"
● "New Tool - Drill 200 - 299"
● "New Tool - Grinding Tool 400 - 499"
● "New Tool - Special and Auxiliary Tools 700 - 900"
See example: For the text identifier "TM_PAR_SHANK_END_CUTTER",
the name "End mill" appears on the user interface.
Shortname Text identifier of the tool name. Tool name is displayed in the tool list.
See example: For the text identifier "TM_PPTT_SHANK_END_CUTTER",
the name "MILLING CUTTER" appears on the user interface.
Tooltip Text identifier of the tool name. This tool name is displayed in the tooltip.
See example: For the text identifier "TM_TTTT_SHANK_END_CUTTER",
the name "End mill" appears on the user interface.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 573
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
Icon9 - for milling technology Icon representing the tool type.
The icons are displayed in the following windows:
● "Tool List" in the "Type" column
● "New Tool - Favorites" in the "Tool position" column
● "New Tool - Milling Cutter 100 - 199" in the "Tool position" column
● "New Tool - Drill 200 - 299" in the "Tool position" column
● "New Tool - Special Tool 700 - 900 in the "Tool position" column.
The icons are in ".png" format. They are stored according to image res‐
olution in the following directories:
/oem/sinumerik/hmi/ico/ico640, oder ico800, or ico1024
/user/sinumerik/hmi/ico/ico640, oder ico800, or ico1024
IconX - for the turning and Icon representing the tool type (see Icon9 - for milling technology)
grinding technologies Special feature - tool positions are supported in the turning and grinding
technologies.
X is for the tool position represented by the icon. Position 9 is an unde‐
fined position represented by a cross.
Icon9_2 Icon representing the tool type in cutting edge position 9. It is used when
cutting edge position 9 is to be treated as a valid cutting edge position.
(see <SETTINGS> - CreateNewToolWithCuttPos9Enabled, Chapter
"General settings (Page 548)")
Iconorder Order in which the tool positions, represented by icons, are switched.
DisableInNewToolDialog With this entry, the tool type in question is not offered when new tools are
created. If the tool list finds a tool of this type that already exists, it is
correspondingly displayed.
DELETE_TOOLTYPE All predefined tool types that are not to be supported in the tool lists.
GrindingTooltypes All tool types that are to be used as grinding tool types.

Example 1
<TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION>
<TOOLTYPE_120>
<Tooltype value="120" type="uint" />
<Name value="TM_PAR_SHANK_END_CUTTER" type="QString" />
<Shortname value="TM_PPTT_SHANK_END_CUTTER" type="QString" />
<Tooltip value="TM_TTTT_SHANK_END_CUTTER" type="QString" />
<Icon9 value="to_poly_shank_end_cutter_down.png" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_120>
</TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION>

Tool management
574 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Example 2
<TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION>
<DELETE_TOOLTYPE>
<TOOLTYPE_110 />
</DELETE_TOOLTYPE>
</TOOLTYPECONFIGURATION>

8.1.6 Configuring the "Additional Data" window

<MOREDATACONFIGURATION> tag
The entries used for configuring the "Additional Data" window are located in the
<MOREDATACONFIGURATION> tag. Various data items can be displayed for each tool type
in a number of rows and columns. Each data item to be displayed is specified by entering a list
parameter:
Tool parameter identifiers (Page 557)
Cutting edge parameter identifiers (Page 559)
Monitoring parameter identifiers (Page 562)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 575
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

A brief description of the parameter (ShortText) then appears in the window with the value itself
beside it. Configuring list parameters (Page 567).
If another description text is required in the "More Data" window, a text can also be entered in
a row or column. In the window, the width of the text is made to conform to that of the brief
description and value of a parameter.
Any number of rows and columns can be created. A scrollbar appears when the window
reaches a certain size.

Entries Meaning
TOOLTYPE_XXX Number of the tool type.
See example: Tool type 111 = Ball end mill (tapered die-sinking cutter).
ROWX_COLY Particular rowX_columnY.
If there is no entry after rowX and columnY, this field remains blank.
See example: In the "More Data" window, the first row is blank.
Item The following entries are possible:
● Parameter identifier
● Text
See example:
The header "Corner radius" appears in the second row of the window.
The text "Radius" and an input field for the value appear in the third row of the
window.
The fourth row is blank.
TOOLTYPE_ALL_XXX The setting applies to all tool types of a group. XXX stands for the group
number of the tool types. The hundreds position is used as the group num‐
ber, for example, TOOLTYPE_ALL_100 or TOOLTYPE_ALL_200 etc. (see
example).
WITHOUT_MORE_DA‐ Tool types of a tool group for which no "further data" are to be displayed can
TA be excluded with this identifier (see example).

Example 1
<MOREDATACONFIGURATION>
<TOOLTYPE_111>
<ROW1_COL1>
</ROW1_COL1>
<ROW2_COL1>
<Item value="TM_DGL_CORNER_RADIUS" type="QString" />
</ROW2_COL1>
<ROW3_COL1>
<Item value="GeoCornerRadius" type="QString" />
</ROW3_COL1>
<ROW4_COL2>
</ROW4_COL2>
</TOOLTYPE_111>
</MOREDATACONFIGURATION>

Tool management
576 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Example 2
<MOREDATACONFIGURATION>
<TOOLTYPE_ALL_500>
<ROW1_COL1>
<Item value="TM_DGL_LENGTH" type="QString" />
</ROW1_COL1>
<ROW2_COL1>
<Item value="GeoLengthGeoAx3" type="QString" />
</ROW2_COL1>
...
</TOOLTYPE_ALL_500>
<WITHOUT_MORE_DATA>
<TOOLTYPE_580 />
</WITHOUT_MORE_DATA>
</MOREDATACONFIGURATION>

8.1.7 Configure the "New tool - favorites" window

<NEWTOOLFAVORITECONFIGURATION> tag
In the tag <NEWTOOLFAVORITECONFIGURATION> you define the tool types that are most
frequently used. The specified tool types are displayed in the "New Tool - Favorites" window.

Entries Meaning
StaticTooltypes Numbers of tool types Enter the individual numbers, separated by blanks.
The following section describes the assignment of the tool type and num‐
ber: List of tool types (Page 571)

Example
<NEWTOOLFAVORITECONFIGURATION>
<StaticTooltypes value="120 140 200 220 710 711" type="QString"/>
<AdditionalStaticTooltypes value="" type="QString"/>
</NEWTOOLFAVORITECONFIGURATION>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 577
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.8 Configuring the "New Tool" window

<NEWTOOLCONFIGURATION> tag
You use the "New Tool" dialog to supply a new tool with specific tool data before creating the
tool or before loading the tool to a magazine location. These are typically the tool size and/or
the tool location type because these parameters can no longer be changed when the tool is
loaded. It is also useful to display the tool type and the tool names in this window.
Specify the parameters in the <NEWTOOLCONFIGURATION> tag that are to be displayed in
the "New Tool" dialog.

Note
The number of parameters is limited by the size of the window.

Entries Meaning
ItemX Entry of the identifier of the tool parameter. "X" specifies the order in which the pa‐
rameters are displayed in the window.
The identifier of the tool parameter can be found in Chapter:
Tool parameter identifiers (Page 557)

Example
<NEWTOOLCONFIGURATION>
<!-- The standard field "oversized tool" is removed and replaced by the fields -->
<!-- "tool location type", "tool size left" and "tool size right" -->
<!-- -->
<Item2 value="ToolPlaceSpec" type="QString"/>
<Item3 value="ToolSizeLeft" type="QString"/>
<Item4 value="ToolSizeRight" type="QString"/>
</NEWTOOLCONFIGURATION>

8.1.9 Configuring the "New Multitool" window

<NEWMULTITOOLCONFIGURATION> tag
You use the "New Multitool" dialog to supply a new multitool with specific multitool data before
creating the multitool or loading it into to a magazine location. Multitool data typically includes
the number of multitool locations and spacing between locations, as these parameters cannot
be changed once the multitool has been created. The same applies to the multitool size and/or
multitool location type as to the tool size and tool location type. These parameters, too, cannot
be changed once they have been loaded into the tool. It is also a good idea to display the
multitool name in this window.

Tool management
578 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

In the <NEWMULTITOOLCONFIGURATION>tag, specify the parameters that you wish to

have displayed in the "New Multitool" dialog.

Entries Meaning
ItemX Entry of the identifier of the multitool parameter. "X" specifies the order in
which the parameters will be displayed in the window.
The identifier of the multitool parameter can be found in Chapter:Multitool
parameter identifiers (Page 565)

8.1.10 Configuring the "New Tool from Code Carrier" window

<NEWTOOLIDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag
You use the "New Tool from Code Carrier" dialog to identify a new tool before creating it. It is
therefore a good idea to display the tool type and the tool name in this window. In addition, the
same rules apply as for configuration of the window "New Tool," Section "Configuring the "New
Tool" window (Page 578)."
In the <NEWTOOLIDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION>tag, define the parameters that
you wish to have displayed in the "New Tool of Code Carrier" dialog.

Entries Meaning
ItemX Entry of the identifier of the tool parameter. "X" specifies the order in which the pa‐
rameters are displayed in the window.
The identifier of the tool parameter can be found in Chapter:
Tool parameter identifiers (Page 557)

8.1.11 Configuring the "New Tool from File" window

<NEWTOOLSAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION> tag
You use the "New Tool from File" dialog to identify a new tool before creating it. It is therefore
a good idea to display the tool type and the tool name in this window. In addition, the same rules
apply as for configuration of the window "New Tool," Section "Configuring the "New Tool"
window (Page 578)."
Specify the parameters in the <NEWTOOLSAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION>tag that are
to be displayed in the "New Tool from Tile" dialog.

Entries Meaning
ItemX Entry of the identifier of the tool parameter. "X" specifies the order in which the pa‐
rameters are displayed in the window.
The identifier of the tool parameter can be found in Chapter:
Tool parameter identifiers (Page 557)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 579
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.12 Configuring default values for new tools

<NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION> tag
In the <NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION> tag, you can specify default values
for tools that you create via the user interface. These values can be configured depending on
the tool type and, if required, also depending on the cutting edge position:

Entries Meaning
TOOLTYPE_ALL The parameter setting applies to all tool types.
TOOLTYPE_XXX The parameter setting applies to a specific tool type. XXX stands for the
number of the tool type.
CUTTEDGEPOS_XXX The parameter setting applies to a specific cutting edge position. XXX
stands for the number of the cutting edge position.
Default Default value of the parameter.

Example
<NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION>
<!-- Initialize geometry length 1 for all tool types to 70.0 -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<GeoLengthGeoAx1>
<Default value="70.0" type="double" />
</GeoLengthGeoAx1>
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- Initialize tip angle of the twist drill to 120.0 -->
<TOOLTYPE_200>
<NoseAngle>
<Default value="120.0" type="double" />
</NoseAngle>
</TOOLTYPE_200>
<TOOLTYPE_500>
<!-- Initialize plate angle of the roughing tool to 82.0 -->
<PlateAngle>
<Default value="82.0" type="double" />
</PlateAngle>
<!-- Initialize holder angle of the roughing tool depending on the cutting edge position
-->
<HolderAngle>
<CUTTEDGEPOS_1>
<Default value="93.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_1>
<CUTTEDGEPOS_2>
<Default value="93.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_2>

Tool management
580 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

<CUTTEDGEPOS_3>
<Default value="93.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_3>
<CUTTEDGEPOS_4>
<Default value="93.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_4>
<CUTTEDGEPOS_5>
<Default value="49.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_5>
<CUTTEDGEPOS_6>
<Default value="49.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_6>
<CUTTEDGEPOS_7>
<Default value="49.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_7>
<CUTTEDGEPOS_8>
<Default value="49.0" type="double" />
</CUTTEDGEPOS_8>
</HolderAngle>
</TOOLTYPE_500>
<!-- Initialize coolant 2 of the plunge cutter to switched on -->
<TOOLTYPE_520>
<Coolant2>
<Default value="true" type="bool" />
</Coolant2>
</TOOLTYPE_520>
</NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION>

Default values when creating new tools

System variables Default value

Tool size
Size on left $TC_TP3 1
Size on right $TC_TP4 1
Size above $TC_TP5 1
Size below $TC_TP6 1
Magazine location type of the tool
Created outside of the magazine $TC_TP7 1
Created in a magazine location $TC_TP7 Location type of the magazine location
Tool status
released $TC_TP8 2

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 581
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

The following combinations between the cutting-edge position and the cutting direction result
dependent on the tool type. When creating the new tool, the operator selects a combination in
the "New Tool - Favorites" window.

Tool type $TC_DP1 Default values

Cutting edge $TC_DP2 Cutting direction $TC_DP11
Type 500 roughing tool 1 4
Type 510 finishing tool 2 3
Type 560 rotary drill 3 3
4 4
5 1
6 3
7 1
8 3
Type 520 plunge cutter 1 2
Type 530 cut-off tool 1 4
Grinding tool types 4 4
3 1
4 1
2 3
3 3
2 2
Type 540 threading tool 5 2
5 1
8 3
8 4
6 3
6 4
7 2
7 1

If the ShopMill/ShopTurn option is set, the direction of spindle rotation is preassigned:

Tool type $TC_DP1 Default value $TC_DP25 Direction of spindle rotation

Measuring tools
Type 580/585/710/712/713/725 Bit 8 = 0 Spindle stop
Bit 9 = 0
Turning tools dependent on SD54215 TM_FUNCTION_MASK_SET bit 1
SD54215 bit 1 = 0 Bit 8 = 1 Spindle right
Bit 9 = 0
SD54215 bit 1 = 1 Bit 8 = 0 Spindle left
Bit 9 = 1
Special tools

Tool management
582 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Tool type $TC_DP1 Default value $TC_DP25 Direction of spindle rotation

Type 730/731/732 Bit 8 = 0 Spindle stop
Bit 9 = 0
All other tool types
- Bit 8 = 1 Spindle right
Bit 9 = 0

Tool type $TC_DP1 Default value $TC_DP25 for switching direction

Type 712 mono probe Bit 17 = 1
Bit 20 = 1
Type 713 L probe Bit 17 = 1
Bit 21 = 1
Type 714 star probe Bit 16 = 1
Bit 17 = 1
Bit 18 = 1
Bit 19 = 1

Tool type $TC_DP1 Default value $TC_DP24 for tip angle

Type 200 twist drill 118
Type 220 centering tool 90

The plate angle rather than the clearance angle is displayed on the screen:
plate angle = 180 - holder angle - clearance angle

Tool type Default values

$TC_DP1 Cutting edge position Holder angle Clearance angle
$TC_DP2 $TC_DP10 $TC_DP24
Type 500 roughing tool 1 to 4 95 5
5 to 8 50 50
Type 510 finishing tool 1 to 4 93 32
5 to 8 62.5 62.5
Type 560 rotary drill - 90 2

Tool type $TC_DP1 Unit of measure‐ Default value $TC_DP8 for plate length
ment
Type 500 roughing tool metric 11
Type 510 finishing tool inch 0.4

For all grinding tools, the parameter for calculating the radius:
$TC_TPG9 = 3 (corresponds to length 1) applies

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 583
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.13 Configuring the "Details" window

<DETAILSCONFIGURATION> tag
In the tag <DETAILSCONFIGURATION>, you can make the settings for the "Details" window:

Entries Meaning
ShowToolNumber The tool number is displayed in the upper right field of the "Details" win‐
dow.
UseAxisNameInLength The tool length is displayed with axis identifiers, for example, Length X
instead of Length 1.
If no data is specified, then the setting is taken from the tool lists.
ShowBaseLength The basic length is displayed in the "Details" window (AdaptLength1,
AdaptLength2 and AdaptLength3).
If no data is specified, then the setting is taken from the tool lists.
ShowYAxis The Y axis is displayed in the "Details" window.
If no data is specified, then the setting is taken from the tool lists.
AutoDisplayAxisEnabled true Default setting
The selection of the displayed tool lengths is based on the
display of the tool lengths in the tool list.
false Several components of the tool length are displayed, even if
only one tool length is displayed in the tool list.
OrderOfAxis The order of display of the axes for all tool types in the window is "Details"
> "Cutting edge data".
The possible values are XYZ, XZY, YXZ, YZX, ZXY and ZYX.

Example 1

<DETAILSCONFIGURATION>
<ShowToolNumber value="true" type="bool" />
</DETAILSCONFIGURATION>

Example 2
<DETAILSCONFIGURATION>
<OrderOfAxis value="ZYX" type="QString" />
</DETAILSCONFIGURATION>

For all of the tools, the order of display in the details dialog is ZYX.

Example 3
If the entry OrderOfAxis is used as a tag, the order of display of the axes can be defined to
be tool type-specific.

<DETAILSCONFIGURATION>
<OrderOfAxis>

Tool management
584 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

<TOOLTYPE_130>
<Item value="ZYX" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_130>
<TOOLTYPE_131>
<Item value="ZYX" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_131>
</OrderOfAxis>
</DETAILSCONFIGURATION>

For angle heads (type 130 and 131), the order of display of the axes in the details dialog is ZYX.

Example 4
<DETAILSCONFIGURATION>
<OrderOfAxis>
<TOOLTYPE_130>
<Item value="ZYX" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_130>
<TOOLTYPE_131>
<Item value="ZYX" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_131>
<TOOLTYPE_ALL_500>
<Item value="ZXY" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL_500>
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<Item value="XYZ" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</OrderOfAxis>
</DETAILSCONFIGURATION>

For angle heads (type 130 and 131), the order of display of the axes in the details dialog is ZYX.
For all rotary tools (type 500 and ff.), the order of display of the axes in the details dialog is ZXY.
For all remaining tools, the order of display of the axes in the details dialog is XYZ.

8.1.14 Assigning a name for magazines and magazine locations

<MAGAZINEPLACENAMECONFIGURATION> tag
The entries to assign dedicated magazine location names are located in the
<MAGAZINEPLACENAMECONFIGURATION> tag. Magazine locations can be displayed with
texts. Instead of the identifier, e.g. 1/5 for the first magazine, location five, the configured text
is then output in the tool lists.

Entries Meaning
MAGAZINE_XXX XXX stands for the magazine number.
PLACE_XXX XXX stands for the location number.
Name Text identifier of the magazine location.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 585
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Example
<MAGAZINEPLACENAMECONFIGURATION>
<MAGAZINE_9998>
<PLACE_2>
<Name value="TM_SPECIAL_MAG_PLACE_1" type="QString" />
</PLACE_2>
</MAGAZINE_9998>
<MAGAZINE_1>
<PLACE_3>
<Name value="TM_SPECIAL_MAG_PLACE_2" type="QString" />
</PLACE_3>
</MAGAZINE_1>
</MAGAZINEPLACENAMECONFIGURATION>

Name for a magazine

Dedicated texts can also be allocated for magazines. The text or the text identifier is entered
into the magazine configuration file (ini file) of the NC. The system variable for the magazine
name is $TC_MAP2[magNo]. The magazine name is displayed at the top right in the tool lists.

Example
Magazine 1 should have the name "main magazine".

Tool management
586 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

$TC_MAP2[1]="main magazine"
If the "main magazine" text is to be output language-dependent, then the language-dependent
texts for the text identifier "main magazine" must be created.

See also
Please refer to the following section for the procedure to create language-dependent text:
Creating OEM texts (Page 606)

8.1.15 Configuring the "Assign Tooltips for Multitool Locations" window

<MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION> tag
You will find the entries for assigning tooltips in the tag
<MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION>. This is particularly useful if all the
multitools used on a turning machine have two locations and a fixed assignment between
multitool locations and the main spindle or the counter spindle exists, for example, location 1 -
main spindle location 2 - counter spindle. In this case, the tooltip for location 1 could be "Tool
Holder for Main Spindle."

Entries Meaning
PLACE_XXX XXX stands for the multitool location number.
Tooltip Text identifier of the magazine location.

Example
<MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION>
<PLACE_1>
<ToolTip value="TM_HOLDER_OF_MAIN_SPINDLE" type="QString" />
</PLACE_1>
<PLACE_2>
<ToolTip value="TM_HOLDER_OF_COUNTER_SPINDLE" type="QString" />
</PLACE_2>
</MULTITOOLPLACETOOLTIPCONFIGURATION>

See also
Please refer to the following section for the procedure to create language-dependent text:
Creating OEM texts (Page 606)

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 587
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.16 Assigning a name for magazine location types

<PLACETYPECONFIGURATION> tag
You can find entries to allocate your own location type identifiers in the tag
<PLACETYPECONFIGURATION>. Magazines and magazine location types can be displayed
with texts in the tool lists. Instead of identifier 2, e.g. for location type 2, the configured text is
then output in the tool lists.

Entries Meaning
PLACETYPEXXX XXX stands for the number of the location type.
Text Text identifier of the location type.
Tooltip Tooltip text identifier of the location type.

Example
<PLACETYPECONFIGURATION>
<PLACETYPE1>
<Text value="TM_PLACETYPE_1" type="QString" />
<Tooltip value="TM_TT_PLACETYPE_1" type="QString" />
</PLACETYPE1>
<PLACETYPE2>
<Text value="TM_PLACETYPE_2" type="QString" />
<Tooltip value="TM_TT_PLACETYPE_2" type="QString" />
</PLACETYPE2>
<PLACETYPE3>
<Text value="TM_PLACETYPE_3" type="QString" />
<Tooltip value="TM_TT_PLACETYPE_3" type="QString" />
</PLACETYPE3>
</PLACETYPECONFIGURATION>

Tool management
588 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

See also
Please refer to the following section for the procedure to create language-dependent text:
Creating OEM texts (Page 606)

8.1.17 Assignment of magazines and magazine locations to channels

Requirement
Turning technology or milling technology and technology extension turning have been set:
Name of the associated configuration file sltmturninglistconfig.xml or sltmmillturnlistconfig.xml.

Assignment between magazine and magazine locations and channel

With this setting, magazines and magazine locations can be assigned to channels. This makes
sense if the machine is configured so that several channels are assigned to one tool area (TOA
area). If each magazine is only used in one channel, it is possible to define this assignment
between the magazine or magazine locations and the channel here.
As a consequence of this configuration, the tool icons are output with reference to their position
depending on the channel. Every channel can be assigned a position using the channel
machine data MD52000 MCS_DISP_COORDINATE_SYSTEM. If a tool is at a magazine

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 589
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

location which is assigned a channel via this configuration, then the tool icon is output
depending on this position that has been set.
This setting option is only available in turning technology and in milling technology with the
technology extension milling. This can be especially helpful if, on a multi-channel machine, a
magazine is used before the turning center and another magazine after the turning center. This
means that the tools can be entered into the tool list in a position visible for the operator.
The assignment between magazine locations and channels is useful when instead of two
magazines, two tool holders/tool spindles exist that fetch their tools from a magazine. One tool
holder is used in front of the turning center and one is used behind the turning center, so that
different views onto the tool result.

<CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT> tag
In tag <CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT> , you will find the entries for the assignment
between the magazines or magazine locations and the channels.

Entries Meaning
CHANNELNO_XXX XXX stands for the channel number.
Magazines Number of magazines that are assigned to the channel.
MAGAZINE_XXX Number of the magazine whose locations will be assigned to the channel.
Places Number of magazine locations that will be assigned to the channel.

Example 1
The following assignment between magazine and channel should apply:

Magazine 1-3 Channel 1

Magazine 4 Channel 2
Magazine 5 Channel 3
Magazine 6 Channel 4

<CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT>
<CHANNELNO_1>
<Magazines value="1 2 3" type="QString" />
</CHANNELNO_1>
<CHANNELNO_2>
<Magazines value="4" type="QString" />
</CHANNELNO_2>
<CHANNELNO_3>
<Magazines value="5" type="QString" />
</CHANNELNO_3>
<CHANNELNO_4>
<Magazines value="6" type="QString" />
</CHANNELNO_4>
</CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT>

Tool management
590 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Example 2
Magazine location 1 of the buffer will be assigned to channel 1.
Magazine location 2 of the buffer will be assigned to channel 2.

<CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT>
<CHANNELNO_1>
<MAGAZINE_9998>
<Places value="1" type="QString" />
</MAGAZINE_9998>
</CHANNELNO_1>
<CHANNELNO_2>
<MAGAZINE_9998>
<Places value="2" type="QString" />
</MAGAZINE_9998>
</CHANNELNO_2>
</CHANNELMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT>

8.1.18 Assignment between magazines and magazine locations and coordinate systems

Requirement
Turning technology or milling technology and technology extension turning have been set:
Name of the associated configuration file sltmturninglistconfig.xml or sltmmillturnlistconfig.xml.

Assignment between the magazine or magazine locations and the coordinate system
With this setting, magazines and magazine locations can be assigned to coordinate systems.
This is useful if the machine is configured in such a way that a magazine or magazine location
does not match the position of the coordinate system set in the channel. The assignment
between magazine or magazine location and coordinate system can be defined here.
As a consequence of this configuration, the tool icons are output with reference to their position
depending on the coordinate system.
This setting option is only available in turning technology and in milling technology with the
technology extension milling.

<COORDSYSMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT> tag
In tag <COORDSYSMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT>, you will find the entries for the assignment
between magazines or magazine locations and coordinate systems.

Entries Meaning
COORDSYSNO_XXX XXX stands for the number of the coordinate system.
Magazines Number of the magazines that are assigned to the channel.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 591
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
MAGAZINE_XXX Number of the magazine whose locations will be assigned to the coordinate
system.
Places Number of magazine locations that will be assigned to the coordinate system.

Example
The following assignment between magazines or magazine locations and coordinate systems
is to apply:

Magazine 1,3, and 4 Coordinate system 34

Magazine 2 Coordinate system 33
Magazine 9998 location 2 Coordinate system 33

<COORDSYSMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT>
<COORDSYSNO_34>
<Magazines value="1 3 4" type="QString" />
</COORDSYSNO_34>
<COORDSYSNO_33>
<Magazines value="2" type="QString" />
<MAGAZINE_9998>
<Places value="2" type="QString" />
</MAGAZINE_9998>
</COORDSYSNO_33>
</COORDSYSMAGAZINEASSIGNMENT>

8.1.19 Disabling the softkey depending on filters

Tag <FILTERCONFIGURATION> in combination with Tag <SOFTKEYLOCK>

Some softkeys can be hidden depending on filter settings. For example, the "New Tool" softkey
is hidden if the filter "Only disabled tools" is set. This is not a good idea because the new tool
is not created as a disabled tool and is thus directly filtered out of the display. This means that
the new tool would not be displayed after being created.
Softkey identifiers of the softkey, which can be hidden:

Entries Meaning
NewTool New tool
Edges Cutting edges

Tool management
592 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
FirstEdge Filter "Only first cutting edge," default setting "Edges"
StandBy Filter "Only tools that are ready to use," default setting "NewTool"
Active Filter "Only tools with active code," default setting "NewTool"
Locked Filter "Only disabled tools," default setting "NewTool"
Prewarning Filter "Only tools that have reached the pre-alarm limit," default setting "New‐
Tool"
RemainingPieces Filter "Only tools with remaining quantity," default setting "NewTool Edges"
MarkedToUnload Filter "Only tools with unload identifier," default setting "NewTool Edges"
MarkedToLoad Filter "Only tools with load identifier," default setting "NewTool Edges"

Example
<FILTERCONFIGURATION>
<SOFTKEYLOCK>
<Locked value="NewTool Edges" type="QString" />
</SOFTKEYLOCK>
</FILTERCONFIGURATION>

8.1.20 Configuring the "Load Station Selection" window

<LOADSTATIONSHANDLEALLTOOLS> tag
For functions "Delete all," "Unload all," and "Load all," you must specify a load station if multiple
load stations are configured in the magazine configuration of the NC. The load station is defined
in a dialog called "Select Load Station" or via the load station configuration with tag
<LOADSTATIONSHANDLEALLTOOLS>.

Entries Meaning
DialogEnabled Offer window "Load Station Selection," default setting "true"
MAGAZINE_XXX Number of the magazine to which a load station will be assigned.
LoadStation Load station to be assigned to the magazine.

Example
<LOADSTATIONSHANDLEALLTOOLS>
<DialogEnabled value="true" type="bool" />
<MAGAZINE_1>
<LoadStation value="2" type="uint" />
</MAGAZINE_1>
<MAGAZINE_2>
<LoadStation value="1" type="uint" />

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 593
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

</MAGAZINE_2>
</LOADSTATIONSHANDLEALLTOOLS>

8.1.21 Coolant and tool-specific functions

Assigning coolant (ShopMill/ShopTurn)

In the tool management of ShopMill/ShopTurn, you can assign coolant and tool-specific
functions to each tool. These are activated when the tool is changed. You assign the coolant to
the corresponding machine functions (M functions) using the following machine data:

MD52230 $MCS_M_CODE_ALL_COOLANTS_OFF M code for all coolants OFF

MD52231 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_ON M code for coolant 1 ON
MD52232 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_2_ON M code for coolant 2 ON
MD52233 $MCS_M_CODE_COOLANT_1_AND_2_ON M code for both coolants ON

Tool-specific functions (ShopMill)

Tool-specific functions 1 ... 4 are intended for other M functions that can be activated for a tool.
For example, third coolant, speed monitoring, tool breakage etc.
Up to eight M functions can be programmed for the activation or deactivation of the tool-specific
functions. Definition is realized using the following machine data:

MD52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON[0...3] M code for tool-specific function ON

=-1

MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[0...3] M code for tool-specific function OFF

=-1

The M functions for the tool-specific functions are executed by the ShopMill cycles at the tool
change. If the checkbox is activated, the corresponding M code is generated from MD52281.
If the checkbox is not activated, the corresponding M code is generated from MD52282.
If you do not want to automatically execute additional M commands on a tool change, set the
associated machine data to -1 for the M commands of this tool-specific function. The
associated fields are also hidden in the tool list.
The default value of the machine data is -1 so that no M values are output for the corresponding
functions.

Technical procedure
The M functions for the tool-specific functions are generated by the ShopMill cycles in a set (up
to four M commands are possible).
The number and also the sequence of the M commands are dependent on the settings of the
machine data (MD52281 to MD52282) and the programming.

Tool management
594 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

If M functions less than 100 are used, the number and sequence of the M commands has no
significance. They are located in the user PLC in the decoded area (DB21.DBB194 to
DB21.DBB206), independent of the number and the sequence when programming.
However, if M functions from 100 and higher are used, then you must decode these yourself in
the user PLC. In this case, you must take into consideration the number and sequence (M
function 1 to M function 4).

JOG mode
In the JOG mode, no coolant and tool-specific functions are output to the interface. For a tool
change in the JOG mode, these functions can be initiated by the operator using the keys on the
machine control panel (implementation via the PLC user program).

Example: Machine data settings

MD52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON[0] = 90
MD52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON[1] = 92
MD52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON[2] = 94
MD52281 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_ON[3] = 96

MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[0] = 91
MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[1] =-1
MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[2] = 95
MD52282 $MCS_TOOL_MCODE_FUNC_OFF[3] = 97

As a result, fields 1 to 4 of the tool-specific functions are displayed in the tool list.
The following fields are activated:

Tool-specific function 1: On
Tool-specific function 2: Off
Tool-specific function 3: Off
Tool-specific function 4: Off
The M functions M90, M95 and M97 are generated by the ShopMill cycles at the tool change.
You can change the texts for "Coolant 1/2 on/off" and "Tool-spec. fct. 1, ..." (see section
Identifiers of the standard texts (Page 607)). So that the texts between the tool list and
program area machine functions match, please note the following section.

Creating user-specific texts for the "Machine Functions" window.

If you require an additional possibility of switching on or switching off coolant and tool-specific
functions, then you can program this in the "Program" operating area using the input window
"Machine Functions". You can create the texts and the tooltips for the tool-specific functions
which are used in this window.
Define the texts for the M functions in the file "slstepforms_xxx.ts".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 595
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

If you require the texts in additional languages, then you must create a separate file for each
language. The only difference in the files is that the file name has the language code "xxx". Use
only the specified language codes.
Further information
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate; Supported languages

File "slstepforms_xxx.ts "

Tag Meaning
source Text identifier for label: SlStepLabels
A maximum of up to four M functions can be defined:
T_LAB_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_1
T_LAB_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_2
T_LAB_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_3
T_LAB_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_4
Text identifier for tooltip: SlStepToolTip
There are 3 tooltips for every machine function x (1 - 4):
T_TT_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_x: standard tooltip if the machine function was not
selected.
T_TT_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_x _ON: Tooltip for activated machine function
T_TT_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_x_OFF: Tooltip for deactivated machine function
translation Text, which is displayed at the user interface.
Label texts: You can only enter texts on one line. The "lines" entry is not applicable.
Tooltip: You can enter multi-line texts. A line break is set using the "%n" character.
chars Text length
The maximum text length is 30 characters.
lines Number of lines
The maximum number of lines is three.
remark Own comment - entry is not displayed at the user interface.

Procedure
1. You can copy the sample file "oem_slstepforms_deu.ts" from the following
directory: /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/lng.
2. Save or create the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/lng or /user/sinumerik/hmi/lng directory.
3. Change the file name to "slstepforms_deu.ts".
If you require texts for additional languages, then a separate file must be created for each
language. Save the file with the appropriate language code in the file name.
4. Open the file and define the texts in the <message> and </message> areas.
5. Restart the system.
The file must still be converted into a binary format in order that the texts are displayed
during the program runtime. This data is only converted during power up.

Tool management
596 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Example of a file "slstepforms_deu.ts"

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE TS><TS>
<context>
<name>SlStepLabels</name>
<message>
<source>T_LAB_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_1</source>
<translation>tool-specific function 1</translation>
<chars>20</chars>
</message>
<context>
<name>SlStepToolTip</name>
<!-- tooltips of user machine function 1-->
<message>
<source>T_TT_USER_MACHINE_FUNC_1</source>
<translation>User%nMachine functions 1</translation>
<chars>25</chars>
<lines>3</lines>
</message>
</context
</TS>

8.1.22 Reason for the tool change when reactivating

Function
When reactivating a tool, you have the option of specifying the reason for the tool change, e.g.
to use this information for statistical purposes. The "Reason for Tool Change" selection window
is opened after pressing the "Reactivate" softkey. In a checkbox, you can select the reason for
the tool change. The tool change is entered in a tool parameter to be configured or in a local
variable of the SlCap service.

Tool change reasons

You can adapt or expand the tool change reasons as required. The operating software provides
the following pre-defined texts for the configuration:

Text identifier Text

TM_DGL_DESIRED_PIECES_ELAPSED Unit quantity setpoint (desired pieces) elapsed
TM_DGL_TOOL_BREAKAGE Tool breakage
TM_DGL_CUTTING_EDGE_DAMAGE Cutting edge damage
TM_DGL_PREMATURE_WEAR Premature wear

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 597
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Text identifier Text

TM_DGL_TYPE_REEQUIPPING Type reequipping
TM_DGL_TOOL_TRIAL Tool trial
TM_DGL_PREVENTIVE_CHANGE Preventive change

<TOOLCHANGEREASON> tag
You configure the function in the <TOOLCHANGEREASON> tag:

Parameter Designation
Enabled True - "Reason for tool change" selection window is displayed when
reactivating.
False - default value, selection window is not displayed.
OnlyOneReasonAllowed It is only permissible to select one tool change reason.
UseCapLocalParameter The reason for the tool change is entered into a local variable of the
SlCap service.
REASONXXX XXX stands for an internal number. The numbers for the tool change
reason must be clear and unique.
Text Text identifier of the tool change reason.
Parameter Parameter identifier of the parameter in which it is entered whether the
tool change reason was selected.
BitMask Bit mask to enter the reason for the change in the local variable of the
SlCap service. The bit mask is entered as integer value. Bit 0 → 1,
bit 1 → 2, bit 2 → 4

Local variable of the SICap service

The identifier of the local variables is called "/Hmi/ToolEdgeReplacementReason". The
variable is the string type.
The table below lists the most important arguments and their significance:

Argument Meaning
datetime Date and time of the event
containerNo Number of the management area
toaNo Number of the TO area
toolNo Tool number
edgeNo Cutting edge number
toolIdent Tool name
toolDuplo Replacement tool number
ncuName Name of the NCU
reactivationReason Reason for tool change
monitoringMode Monitoring type
remainingBefore Remaining unit quantity/tool lifetime before reactivation

Tool management
598 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Example 1
The following example uses the texts for the tool change reason, already prepared in the
operating software. In this example, the tool change reason is stored in parameters that still
have to be configured, e.g. the OEM tool data 1, bit 1 and following.

<TOOLCHANGEREASON>
<Enabled value="true" type="bool" />
<REASON1>
<Text value="TM_DGL_DESIRED_PIECES_ELAPSED" type="QString" />
<Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit1" type="QString" />
</REASON1>
<REASON2>
<Text value="TM_DGL_TOOL_BREAKAGE" type="QString" />
<Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit2" type="QString" />
</REASON2>
<REASON3>
<Text value="TM_DGL_CUTTING_EDGE_DAMAGE" type="QString" />
<Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit3" type="QString" />
</REASON3>
<REASON4>
<Text value="TM_DGL_PREMATURE_WEAR" type="QString" />
<Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit4" type="QString" />
</REASON4>
<REASON5>
<Text value="TM_DGL_TYPE_REEQUIPPING" type="QString" />
<Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit5" type="QString" />
</REASON5>
<REASON6>
<Text value="TM_DGL_TOOL_TRIAL" type="QString" />
<Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit6" type="QString" />
</REASON6>
<REASON7>
<Text value="TM_DGL_PREVENTIVE_CHANGE" type="QString" />
<Parameter value="ToolUser_1_Bit7" type="QString" />
</REASON7>
</TOOLCHANGEREASON>

Example 2
Also in this example, the prepared texts for the reason for the change are used. It is only
permitted to enter one reason for the change as a valid entry. The reason for the tool change
is saved in the local variable of the SlCap service.

<TOOLCHANGEREASON>
<Enabled value="true" type="bool" />

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 599
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

<OnlyOneReasonAllowed value="true" type="bool" />

<UseCapLocalParameter value="true" type="bool" />
<REASON1>
<Text value="TM_DGL_DESIRED_PIECES_ELAPSED" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="1" type="int" />
</REASON1>
<REASON2>
<Text value="TM_DGL_TOOL_BREAKAGE" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="2" type="int" />
</REASON2>
<REASON3>
<Text value="TM_DGL_CUTTING_EDGE_DAMAGE" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="4" type="int" />
</REASON3>
<REASON4>
<Text value="TM_DGL_PREMATURE_WEAR" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="8" type="int" />
</REASON4>
<REASON5>
<Text value="TM_DGL_TYPE_REEQUIPPING" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="16" type="int" />
</REASON5>
<REASON6>
<Text value="TM_DGL_TOOL_TRIAL" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="32" type="int" />
</REASON6>
<REASON7>
<Text value="TM_DGL_PREVENTIVE_CHANGE" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="64" type="int" />
</REASON7>
</TOOLCHANGEREASON>

See also
For configuring new parameters, see Configuring list parameters (Page 567).

Tool management
600 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.23 Configure the code carrier connection

Requirement

Software option
You require the "Access MyTool ID" option for this function (Tool Ident Con‐
nection).

<IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag
The entries used for configuring the code carrier connection in the tool list of the user interface
are located in the <IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag. The code carrier
connection is implemented via TDI Ident Connection.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 601
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

The following functions in the tool list are available:

1. Creating tools for the code carrier:

Figure 8-1 New tool from code carrier

The data of the tool are read from the code carrier tool and displayed in the "New Tool"
window. Click OK to create the tool in the NC and to initialize it with the code carrier data.
2. Unloading tools on the code carrier:
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool is written to the code carrier. The tool can also
be deleted using a setting (see below).
3. Deleting the tool on the code carrier:
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool is written to the code carrier. The tool is then
deleted from the NC. Using a setting (see below), the "On code carrier" softkey can also be
hidden for deleting a tool.
The following settings can be made:

Entries Meaning
Enabled true - code carrier connection is offered.
false - code carrier connection is not offered.
ShowInternalMessage true - internal messages for error analysis are also displayed.
false - default setting, no internal messages are displayed.
UnloadWithoutIdentconnection true - The "On code carrier" function is not offered during unload‐
ing. It is displayed during "Delete tool."
false - Default setting, the "On code carrier" function is offered
during unloading.

Tool management
602 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

Entries Meaning
UnloadWithDelete true - the tool is deleted when unloaded to the code carrier. The
"On code carrier" function is not offered for "Delete tool".
false - default setting, the tool is only unloaded for "unload to code
carrier" and remains in the NC memory.
OnlyInLoadStation true - default setting, on the one hand, only loaded tools are stored
"on code carrier", on the other hand, new tools "from code carrier"
can be created only directly in the magazine.
false - tools can be created independently of the "from code car‐
rier" magazine slot or deleted "on code carrier".
CreateNewToolWithDialog true - default setting, before creating the tool for code carrier, the
tool data is displayed in the "New Tool" window.
false - the tool is created directly in the tool list.
ForceSisterToolNumber true - The sister tool number specified by the code carrier data is
kept when the tool is created.
false - Default setting, the sister tool number is freely assigned.
UseDefaultData true - The new tool is initialized with the configured default data
before the code carrier data are applied (see tag <NEWTOOL‐
DEFAULTVALUECONFIGURATION> Section "Configuring de‐
fault values for new tools (Page 580)").
false - Default setting, the new tool is not initialized with the con‐
figured default data.
OrderFirstWriteThanUnload true - During unloading/deletion, first the data are written to the
code carrier and then the tool is unloaded or deleted.
false - Default setting, during unloading/deletion first the tool is
unloaded, then the data are written to the code carrier and finally,
if requested, the tool is deleted.

Example
<IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION>
<Enabled value="true" type="bool" />
<ShowInternalMessage value="false" type="bool" />
<UnloadWithDelete value="false" type="bool" />
<OnlyInLoadStation value="true" type="bool" />
<CreateNewToolWithDialog value="true" type="bool" />
</IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION>

Further information
Further information about tool management with code carrier can be found at Code carrier
connection - Tool Ident Connection (option) (Page 623).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 603
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

8.1.24 Configuring Save to file

<SAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION> tag
The entries used for configuring the functions "Save tools to file" or "Create tools from file" are
located in the <SAVETOOLDATACONFIGURATION> tag:
The following functions in the tool list are available:
1. Creating tools from file:

Figure 8-2 Tool from file

The data of the tool are read from a file and displayed in the "New Tool" window. Click OK
to create the tool in the NC and to initialize it with the data from the file.
2. Unloading tools into a file:
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool are written to a file. The tool can also be deleted
using a setting (see below).
3. Deleting the tool in a file:
The tool is unloaded and the data of the tool are written to a file. The tool is then deleted from
the NC. The softkey "In File" can be hidden while the tool is deleted by means of a setting
(see below).

Tool management
604 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.1 Configuring the user interface

The following settings can be made:

Entries Meaning
Enabled true - Tool from/in file is offered.
false - Tool from/in file is not offered.
UnloadWithDelete true - The tool is deleted when unloaded to a file. The "In File" function is
not offered for "Delete tool."
false - Default setting, on Unload to file the tool is only unloaded and is
kept in the NC memory.
CreateNewToolWithDialog true - Default setting, before the tool is created from a file, the tool data is
displayed in the "New Tool" window.
false - The tool is created directly in the tool list.
ForceSisterToolNumber true - The sister tool number specified by the code carrier data is kept
when the tool is created.
false - Default setting, the sister tool number is freely assigned.
UseDefaultData true - The new tool is initialized with the configured default data before the
data are taken over from the file (see tag <NEWTOOLDEFAULTVALUE‐
CONFIGURATION> Section "Configuring default values for new tools
(Page 580)").
false - Default setting, the new tool is not initialized with the configured
default data.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 605
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.2 Creating OEM texts

8.2 Creating OEM texts

Overview
This section describes how you create OEM texts in a particular language.
The texts are created in the "sltmlistdialog_xxx.ts" file.
A dedicated file must be created for each language. The file names differ by the language code.
For "xxx", set the appropriate language code.
Further information
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate; Supported languages

Creating texts
All OEM texts from the previous sections, such as the tooltip, can be made language-
dependent by using the OEM text as text identifier under the "source" tag. The translation of the
text in the particular language is entered under the "translation" tag.

Entries Meaning
source Text identifier
See 1. Example: Single-line text with new text identifier "MY_NEW_TEXT".
See 2. Example: Double-line text with new text identifier "MY_NEW_TEXT_2_LINES".
translation Text, which is displayed on the user interface.
You can enter single and multi-line texts. "%n" is used to indicate a line break.
See 1. Example: Single-line text "My new text" is displayed.
See 2. Example: Double-line text "My new - text" is displayed.
chars Text length
See 1. Example: Text length of 30 characters is specified.
See 2. Example: Text length of 10 characters per line is specified.
lines Number of lines
See 2. Example: The number of rows is 2.
remark Own comments - are not displayed.

Procedure
1. You can copy the sample file "oem_sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" from the following
directory: /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template/lng.
2. Save the file in the /oem/sinumerik/hmi/lng or /user/sinumerik/hmi/lng directory.
3. Change the file name to "sltmlistdialog_eng.ts".
If you wish to create texts for additional languages, then a separate file must be created for
each language. Save the file with the appropriate language code in the file name.
4. Open the file and define the texts in the <message> and </message> areas.
5. Restart the system.
The file must still be converted into a binary format in order that the texts are displayed
during the program runtime. This data is only converted during power up.

Tool management
606 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.2 Creating OEM texts

8.2.1 Identifiers of the standard texts

Identifiers of the standard texts

With the help of the identifiers, you can change the standard texts of OEM parameters, coolants
and tool-specific functions. This applies to the column header in the tool lists, the tooltip and, if
available, also the designation in the detail displays.
A list of the text identifiers is provided below:

OEM tool parameters

"ToolUser_1" to "ToolUser_10"
"ToolAppl_1" to "ToolAppl_10"

Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip

TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_TOOL_USER_1 to ...10
TM_HL_TOOL_APPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_TOOL_APPL_1 to ...10

Text identifiers in tool details Text identifiers in tool details - all parameters
TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1_DETAILS to ...10_DETAILS TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1_LONG to ...10_LONG
TM_HL_TOOL_APPL_1_DETAILS to ...10_DETAILS TM_HL_TOOL_APPL_1_LONG to ...10_LONG

OEM cutting edge parameters

"EdgeUser_1" to "EdgeUser_10"
"EdgeAppl_1" to "EdgeAppl_10"

Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip

TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_EDGE_USER_1 to ...10
TM_HL_EDGE_APPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_EDGE_APPL_1 to ...10

Text identifiers in tool details Text identifiers in tool details - all parameters
TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1_DETAILS to ...10_DETAILS TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1_LONG to ...10_LONG
TM_HL_EDGE_APPL_1_DETAILS to ...10_DETAILS TM_HL_EDGE_APPL_1_LONG to ...10_LONG

OEM monitoring parameters

"EdgeSupUser_1" to "EdgeSupUser_10"
"EdgeSupAppl_1" to "EdgeSupAppl_10"

Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip

TM_HL_EDGE_SUPUSER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_EDGE_SUPUSER_1 to ...10
TM_HL_EDGE_SUPAPPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_EDGE_SUPAPPL_1 to ...10

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 607
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.2 Creating OEM texts

Text identifiers in tool details Text identifiers in tool details - all parameters
TM_HL_EDGE_SUPUSER_1_DETAILS to ...10_DETAILS TM_HL_EDGE_SUPUSER_1_LONG to ...10_LONG
TM_HL_EDGE_SUPAPPL_1_DETAILS to ...10_DETAILS TM_HL_EDGE_SUPAPPL_1_LONG to ...10_LONG

OEM multitool parameters

"MultiToolUser_1" to "MultiToolUser_10"
"MultiToolAppl_1" to "MultiToolAppl_10"

Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip

TM_HL_MULTITOOL_USER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MULTITOOL_USER_1 to ...10
TM_HL_MULTITOOL_APPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MULTITOOL_APPL_1 to ...10

Text identifiers in tool details Text identifiers in tool details - all parameters
TM_HL_MULTITOOL_USER_1_DETAILS TM_HL_MULTITOOL_USER_1_LONG to ...10_LONG
to ...10_DETAILS
TM_HL_MULTITOOL_APPL_1_DETAILS TM_HL_MULTITOOL_APPL_1_LONG to ...10_LONG
to ...10_DETAILS

OEM magazine location parameters

"MagPlaceUser_1" to "MagPlaceUser_10"
"MagPlaceAppl_1" to "MagPlaceAppl_10"

Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip

TM_HL_MAGPLACE_USER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MAGPLACE_USER_1 to ...10
TM_HL_MAGPLACE_APPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MAGPLACE_APPL_1 to ...10

OEM multitool location parameters

"MultiToolPlaceUser_1" to "MultiToolPlaceUser_10"
"MultiToolPlaceAppl_1" to "MultiToolPlaceAppl_10"

Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip

TM_HL_MTPLACE_USER_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MTPLACE_USER_1 to ...10
TM_HL_MTPLACE_APPL_1 to ...10 TM_TT_MTPLACE_APPL_1 to ...10

Coolant and tool-specific functions

"Coolant1" and "Coolant2"

Tool management
608 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.2 Creating OEM texts

"MFunction1" to "MFunction4"

Text identifier of the column heading Text identifier of the tooltip

No column TM_TT_STATE_COOL_1 and ...2
TM_HL_MFCT1 to ...4 TM_TT_MFCT1 to ...4

8.2.2 Examples of OEM texts

Example 1 with a single-line and double-line text

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE TS><TS>
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- Definition of OEM texts
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<context>
<name>SlTmListForm</name>
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- enter your text behind this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- 1st example of a single-line text -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- <message>
<source>MY_NEW_TEXT</source>
<translation>My new text</translation>
<chars>30</chars>
</message>-->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- 2nd example of a double-spaced text -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- <message>
<source>MY_NEW_TEXT_2_LINES</source>
<translation>My new%n text</translation>
<remark>My comment to the text</remark>
<chars>10</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>-->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- enter your text ahead of this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
</context>
</TS>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 609
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.2 Creating OEM texts

Example 2
A new parameter is configured in the following example from Section Configuring list
parameters (Page 567):

<PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>
<EdgeUser_1_Bit0>
<Base value="EdgeUser_1" type="QString" />
<ItemType value="CheckBox" type="QString" />
<DisplayMode value="AnyMode" type="QString" />
<BitMask value="1" type="int" />
<Width value="17" type="int" />
<HeadLine value="TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0" type="QString" />
<ToolTip value="TM_TT_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0" type="QString" />
</EdgeUser_1_Bit0>
</PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>

The two texts under HeadLine and ToolTip should be output depending on the language. To do
this, the two text identifiers must be included in the sltmlistdialog_xxx.ts file:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<!DOCTYPE TS><TS>
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- Definition of OEM texts
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<context>
<name>SlTmListForm</name>
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- enter your text behind this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- Translate the text for the headline -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<message>
<source>TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0</source>
<translation>heavy %n tool</translation>
<chars>10</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<!-- Translate the text for the tooltip -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
<message>
<source>TM_TT_EDGE_USER_1_Bit0</source>
<translation>heavy tool</translation>
<chars>20</chars>
</message>

Tool management
610 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.2 Creating OEM texts

<!-- ************************************************************ -->

<!-- enter your text ahead of this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************ -->
</context>
</TS>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 611
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

8.3 Examples

8.3.1 Example: Configuring an OEM tool list

8.3.1.1 Adapting the configuration file

The following excerpt shows the contents of the configuration file:
● Milling technology: sltmlistconfig.xml
● Turning technology: sltmturninglistconfig.xml
The file in this example is stored in the "user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg" directory.
This example describes a configuration of the OEM tool list.
● OEM tool parameter 1 is displayed in column 6.
● A new "Coolant 3" parameter is inserted in column 7 that displays bit 0 from OEM tool
parameter 2.
● OEM cutting edge parameter 1 is displayed in column 8.

Example
"sltmlistconfig.xml" or "sltmturninglistconfig.xml" file:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"?>

<CONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Identifier for the configuration of the lists *** -->
<LISTCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** OEM tool list *** -->
<SlTmTooloemForm>
<!-- **** Enabling the OEM tool list *** -->
<Enabled value="true" type="bool" />
<!-- **** Columns 1 to 5 have already been assigned default values. *** -->
<!-- **** Column 6 *** -->
<COLUMN6>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display OEM tool parameter 1 *** -->
<Item value="ToolUser_1" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</COLUMN6>
<!-- **** Column 7 *** -->
<COLUMN7>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>

Tool management
612 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

<!-- **** Priority tool, own parameter *** -->

<!-- **** Display OEM tool parameter 2 bit 0 *** -->
<Item value="PriorTool" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</COLUMN7>
<!-- **** Column 8 *** -->
<COLUMN8>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display OEM cutting edge parameter 1 *** -->
<Item value="EdgeUser_1" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</COLUMN8>
</SlTmTooloemForm>
</LISTCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Identifier for the configuration of own parameter *** -->
<PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Change OEM tool parameter 1 *** -->
<ToolUser_1>
<!-- **** Column width *** -->
<Width value="36" type="int" />
<!-- **** Type change to unsigned integer *** -->
<DisplayMode value="UnsignedIntegerMode" type="QString" />
</ToolUser_1>
<!-- **** Identifier of own parameter *** -->
<!-- **** Priority tool *** -->
<PriorTool>
<!-- ** New parameter is based on OEM tool parameter 2**-->
<Base value="ToolUser_2" type="QString" />
<!-- **** Bit 0 is evaluated *** -->
<BitMask value="1" type="int" />
<!-- **** Text identifier of the headline *** -->
<HeadLine value="TMO_HL_PRIOR_TOOL" type="QString" />
<!-- **** Text identifier of the tooltip *** -->
<ToolTip value="TMO_TT_PRIOR_TOOL" type="QString" />
<!-- **** Column width *** -->
<!-- **** Recommended widths 640x480 - 19 pixels *** -->
<!-- **** 800x600 - 21, 1024x768 - 17 *** -->
<Width value="19" type="int" />
<!-- **** Display item of the parameter *** -->
<ItemType value="CheckBox" type="QString" />
</PriorTool>
</PARAMETERCONFIGURATION>
</CONFIGURATION>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 613
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

8.3.1.2 Adaptation of the customer text file

The following excerpt shows the contents of the "sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" customer text file.
The file in this example is stored in the "user/sinumerik/hmi/lng" directory.

Example
"sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" file:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<!DOCTYPE TS><TS>

<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- Definition of OEM texts -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->
<context>
<name>SlTmListForm</name>

<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- Enter your text behind this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- **** OEM tool parameter 1 headline *** -->

<!-- **** Weight *** -->
<message>
<!-- **** Text identifier *** -->
<source>TM_HL_TOOL_USER_1</source>
<!-- **** Text that is output *** -->
<translation>%nweight</translation>
<!-- **** Comment only for the translator *** -->
<remark>priority tool</remark>
<!-- **** Maximum line length in characters *** -->
<!-- **** only for the translator *** -->
<chars>7</chars>
<!-- **** Number of possible lines *** -->
<!-- **** only for the translator *** -->
<lines>2</lines>
</message>
<!-- **** OEM tool parameter 1 tooltip *** -->
<!-- **** weight *** -->
<message>
<source>TM_TT_TOOL_USER_1</source>
<translation>weight of the tool</translation>
<chars>35</chars>
<lines>2</lines>

Tool management
614 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

</message>
<!-- **** title for user's parameters *** -->
<!-- **** priority tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMO_HL_PRIOR_TOOL</source>
<translation>V</translation>
<remark>priority tool</remark>
<chars>1</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>
<!-- **** to for user's parameters *** -->
<!-- **** Priority tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMO_TT_PRIOR_TOOL</source>
<translation>priority tool, %nuse tool preferably< /translation>
<chars>35</chars>
<lines>3</lines>
</message>
<!-- **** OEM cutting edge parameter 1 headline *** -->
<!-- **** Maximum tool width *** -->
<message>
<source>TM_HL_EDGE_USER_1</source>
<translation>maximum%nwidth</translation>
<chars>8</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>
<!-- **** OEM cutting edge parameter 1 tooltip *** -->
<!-- **** Maximum tool width *** -->
<message>
<source>TM_TT_EDGE_USER_1</source>
<translation>maximum width%nof the tool%noverall</translation>
<chars>35</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>

<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- Enter your text ahead of this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->

</context>
</TS>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 615
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

8.3.2 Example: Configuring magazine location types with names

8.3.2.1 Adapting the configuration file

The following excerpt shows the contents of the configuration file:
● Milling technology: sltmlistconfig.xml
● Turning technology: sltmturninglistconfig.xml
The file in this example is stored in the "user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg" directory.
This example describes a configuration of the location types in the magazine list.
In this example, the magazine location type and the tool location type are to be displayed as a
toggle field with plain texts.
The assignment of the parameters to the columns of the list is made in the
"LISTCONFIGURATION" area. The magazine location type is displayed in column 10. The tool
location type is displayed in column 11.
The texts to the location types are assigned in the "PLACETYPECONFIGURATION" area. The
number of the location type is the number at the end of the "PLACETYPE" identifier.
A text identifier for a toggle box entry and a text identifier for a tooltip can be stored for each
location type.

Example
"sltmlistconfig.xml" or "sltmturninglistconfig.xml" file:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"?>

<CONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Configuration of the lists *** -->
<LISTCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Magazine list *** -->
<SlTmToolmagazinForm>
<!-- **** Column 10 *** -->
<COLUMN10>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display magazine location type *** -->
<Item value="MagPlaceTypeIdent" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>
</COLUMN10>
<!-- **** Column 11 *** -->
<COLUMN11>
<!-- **** For all tool types *** -->
<TOOLTYPE_ALL>
<!-- **** Display tool location type *** -->
<Item value="ToolPlaceSpecIdent" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_ALL>

Tool management
616 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

<!-- **** For all multitools *** -->

<TOOLTYPE_9997>
<!-- **** Display for all multitool location types *** -->
<Item value="MultiToolPlaceSpecIdent" type="QString" />
</TOOLTYPE_9997>
</COLUMN11>
</SlTmToolmagazinForm>
</LISTCONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Configuration of the magazine location types *** -->
<PLACETYPECONFIGURATION>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 1 *** -->
<PLACETYPE1>
<!-- **** Text identifier of the toggle box entry *** -->
<Text value="TMMP_ITEM_NORMAL_TOOL" type="QString" />
<!-- **** Text identifier of the tooltip *** -->
<Tooltip value="TMMP_TT_NORMAL_TOOL" type="QString" />
</PLACETYPE1>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 2 *** -->
<PLACETYPE2>
<Text value="TMMP_ITEM_HEAVY_TOOL" type="QString" />
<Tooltip value="TMMP_TT_HEAVY_TOOL" type="QString" />
</PLACETYPE2>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 3 *** -->
<PLACETYPE3>
<Text value="TMMP_ITEM_BIG_TOOL" type="QString" />
<Tooltip value="TMMP_TT_BIG_TOOL" type="QString" />
</PLACETYPE3>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 4 *** -->
<PLACETYPE4>
<Text value="TMMP_ITEM_SENSITIVE_TOOL" type="QString" />
<Tooltip value="TMMP_TT_SENSITIVE_TOOL" type="QString" />
</PLACETYPE4>
</PLACETYPECONFIGURATION>
</CONFIGURATION>

8.3.2.2 Adaptation of the customer text file

The following excerpt shows the contents of the "sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" customer text file.
The file in this example is stored in the "user/sinumerik/hmi/lng" directory.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 617
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

Example
"sltmlistdialog_eng.ts" file:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<!DOCTYPE TS><TS>

<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- Definition of OEM texts -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->
<context>
<name>SlTmListForm</name>

<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- Enter your text behind this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->
<!-- **** Magazine location type 1 item *** -->
<!-- **** Normal tool *** -->
<message>
<!-- **** Text identifier *** -->
<source>TMMP_ITEM_NORMAL_TOOL</source>
<!-- **** Text that is output *** -->
<translation>normal</translation>
<!-- **** Maximum line length in characters *** -->
<!-- **** only for the translator *** -->
<chars>9</chars>
</message>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 1 tooltip *** -->
<!-- **** Normal tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMMP_TT_NORMAL_TOOL</source>
<translation>normal tool,%nno restrictions</translation>
<chars>35</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 2 item *** -->
<!-- **** Heavy tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMMP_ITEM_HEAVY_TOOL</source>
<translation>heavy</translation>
<chars>9</chars>
</message>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 2 tooltip *** -->
<!-- **** Heavy tool *** -->
<message>

Tool management
618 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.3 Examples

<source>TMMP_TT_HEAVY_TOOL</source>
<translation>heavy tool</translation>
<chars>35</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 3 item *** -->
<!-- **** Big tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMMP_TT_BIG_TOOL</source>
<translation>big</translation>
<chars>9</chars>
</message>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 3 tooltip *** -->
<!-- **** Big tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMMP_TT_BIG_TOOL</source>
<translation>big tool</translation>
<chars>35</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 4 item *** -->
<!-- **** Sensitive tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMMP_ITEM_SENSITIVE_TOOL</source>
<translation>sensitive</translation>
<chars>9</chars>
</message>
<!-- **** Magazine location type 4 tooltip *** -->
<!-- **** Sensitive tool *** -->
<message>
<source>TMMP_TT_SENSITIVE_TOOL</source>
<translation>Notice: Tool can%nbe destroyed easily</translation>
<chars>35</chars>
<lines>2</lines>
</message>

<!-- ************************************************************** -->

<!-- Enter your text ahead of this comment -->
<!-- ************************************************************** -->

</context>
</TS>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 619
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.4 Working with two tool holders

8.4 Working with two tool holders

It is possible to work on a single turning machine with two tool holders, both of which are
mounted on an X axis. The tool holders may be revolvers, multifix, or a combination of both. As
both tool adapters are mounted on the same axis it is only possible to machine with one tool.
The workpiece is located between the two tool adapters.
All tools have the same reference point (on tool holder 1) irrespective of which tool holder they
are on. Consequently, the tool lengths of the second tool holder are always longer than the tool
lengths of the first tool holder. The main machining is performed in the negative X axis direction.

7RROKROGHU

[ :RUNSLHFHFRRUGLQDWH
V\VWHPZKHQ
/
VWWRROKROGHULVXVHG

/

/ 0'a/

]
:RUNSLHFHFRRUGLQDWH
V\VWHPZKHQ
QGWRROKROGHULVXVHG
[

7RROKROGHU

Tool holder definition

The MD52248 REV_2_BORDER_TOOL_LENGTH defines a tool length limit X so that the tools
can be assigned to the two tool holders automatically:
Tool length X < MD52248: Tool belongs to the 1st tool holder
Tool length X ≥ MD52248: Tool belongs to the 2nd tool holder

Additional parameter assignments

For the used mirrorings of the X and Y axes and the offsets of the C axis, the following machine
data has to be configured:

MD24006 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK Active system frames after RESET

Bit 4 = 1 System frame for workpiece reference remains active after RESET

Tool management
620 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.4 Working with two tool holders

MD24007 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_CLEAR_MASK Clear system frames after RESET

Bit 4 = 0 Do not clear system frame workpiece reference after RESET

MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK Setting-up system frames (SRAM)

Bit 4 = 1 Workpiece reference ($P_WPFRAME)

MD28083 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_DATAFRAME_MASK Setting-up data management, system

frames (SRAM)
Bit 4 = 1 Workpiece reference ($P_WPFRAME)

Due to the coordinate system being mirrored, the following machine/setting data must be set:

MD21202 $MC_LIFTFAST_WITH_MIRROR Lift fast with mirror

=1 For the determination of the lifting direction, it is also mirrored for active mirroring. The
mirroring of the lifting direction only refers to the direction components perpendicular to the
tool direction.

SD42900 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH Sign change, tool length when mirroring

=0 The signs of the tool length components are independent of system frames with mirroring.

SD42910 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR Sign change, tool wear when mirroring

=1 Inverting the sign mirrors the wear values of the tool length components whose associated
axes are mirrored.

Settings for ShopTurn programs

In ShopTurn, MD21202, SD42900, and SD42910 are automatically set for the necessary
mirroring.

Settings for G code programs

Additional settings must be made if the functions of the second tool holder with mirroring of the
X axis are also to be active for G code programs and tool calls from the T,S,M screenform:
MD10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME="F_T_REV2"
MD15710 $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME="F_T_REV2"

Note
The settings of MD10717 and MD15710 cannot be used if old G code programs are available
and will be used without modification for the second tool holder without mirroring of the X axis.

If transformation TRANSMIT is set up, the necessary mirroring can also be activated
automatically if programmed. For this, the TRANSMIT command must be replaced by a
subprogram (for example, in the manufacturer directory):

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 621
SINUMERIK Operate user interface
8.4 Working with two tool holders

MD10712 $MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB[0]="TRANSMIT"
MD10712 $MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB[1]="TRANSM"
Subprogram TRANSMIT.SPF:
PROC TRANSMIT(INT_NR)
F_T_REV2
TRANSM(_NR)
F_T_REV2
RET

Note
In the status display, TRANSM is now displayed instead of TRANSMIT.

General conditions
● The taper turning is not enabled for "working with two tool holders."
● The B-axis function (kinematics) is also not enabled for "working with two tool holders."

Tool management
622 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection
(option) 9
9.1 Installation

9.1.1 System requirements

Tool Ident Connection is intended for the SINUMERIK 840D sl target system with SINUMERIK
Operate.

Note
TooI Ident Connection is only available in conjunction with the SINUMERIK Operate operating
software as of SW 4.5 SP2.

PLC interface "ParamTM"

Assignment of the PLC interface for the Parameter area (Page 673)
Functional scope of the PLC interface (K codes) (Page 681)

NCU
● As of NCU 7x0.3
● SINUMERIK Operate as of SW 4.5 SP2

PCU
● PCU 50.5 or higher
● SINUMERIK Operate as of SW 4.5 SP2

Further information
A list of industrial PCs that are compatible with the PCU-Basesoftware can be found under:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 840D sl PCU-Basesoftware

Tool management
An active magazine management is required in order to use the Tool Ident Connection option.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 623
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.1 Installation

Expanding the DB19

If the PLC data block DB19 is not available via the PLC interface for "Tool Ident Connection",
then this must be expanded by "Tool Ident Connection" before commissioning the system for
the first time, see PLC interface in the DB19 (Page 668)

9.1.2 Installation of Tool Ident Connection

Note
We recommend that you backup your system before setting-up.
According to the system preconditions, if necessary, additional components must be first
installed.

The storage medium for software applications is a CompactFlash card with fixed directory
structure. The "Tool Ident Connection" application is stored within this structure in the "addon"
directory.

9.1.2.1 Activation of Tool Ident Connection

Configuration files
The following files are available to configure Tool Ident Connection:

Standard configuration files Directory: CompactFlash card

tdiidentcfg.xml /siemens/sinumerik/hmi/template\toolidentconnection
toolSpec.xml
wkonvert.mcx
DefToolDat.txt
wkonvert.mcc
systemconfiguration.ini
oem_sltmlistconfig.xml

Setup of the Tool Ident Connection option

The following entry must be made in the "systemconfiguration.ini" in the section [services] to set
up the software:
SVCxxx=name:=SlMcisTdiIdentConnectionService,
implementation:=slmcistdiidentconnectionservice.SlMcisTdiIdentConnec
tionService,

Tool management
624 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.1 Installation

process:=SlHmiHost1,

Note
The xxx in SVCxxx must be replaced by the free number of a service. Only numbers as of 200
can be used.

To adapt the Tool Ident Connection configuration function, the systemconfiguration.ini and, if
adapted, the configuration files (from the directory mentioned above) must be copied to the
following directory.
● CompactFlash card: /addon/sinumerik/hmi/cfg
The oem_sltmlistconfig.xml file must be renamed, depending on the technology. This is
explained in the Commissioning Manual IM9, Section "Tool management", Section
"Configuring the user interface".
An exhaustive description of the configuration options of the oem_sltmlistconfig.xml can be
found in Configure the code carrier connection (Page 601).
The files wkonvert.txt, DefToolDat.txt and wkonvert.mcc are configuration files. They must be
compiled after every change with the wkonvert wizard. The result of the compile action is a
wkoonvert.mcx. This must be copied to the appropriate target directory for the settings to take
effect.

9.1.2.2 Installation of Wkonvert wizard

The Wkonvert wizard PC application is available when creating the required conversion rules
for the Tool Ident Connection.
In order to be able to use the Wizard, the application must be installed on the configuring
computer.

Installation procedure
To install the Wkonvert wizard, execute the setup.exe which is on the SINUMERIK CNC
Software DVD.

Figure 9-1 Language selection dialog

The individual installation steps follow after selecting the installation language.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 625
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.1 Installation

Figure 9-2 Preparing setup

After reading the license agreement, this must be accepted. If you are not in agreement with the
license agreement, then setup is exited.

Figure 9-3 License agreement dialog

After acknowledging the license agreement, you are prompted for a user name and
organization.

Tool management
626 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.1 Installation

Figure 9-4 User information dialog

You can then select either a complete or a user-defined installation.

Figure 9-5 Setup type dialog

For a user-defined installation, you have the possibility of defining the target directory of the
application.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 627
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.1 Installation

Figure 9-6 Adapted setup dialog

Figure 9-7 Target directory selection dialog

If you have selected a complete installation, click "Next" or click "Next" in the component
selection dialog to begin the installation.

Tool management
628 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.1 Installation

Figure 9-8 Installation dialog

Now click "Install" to start the installation.

Figure 9-9 Installation dialog

When required, setup installs the windows components ".NET Framework" and "Windows
Installer 3.0".

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 629
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.1 Installation

Figure 9-10 Completing the installation

When you have successfully run through the setup procedure, the Wkonvert wizard can be
started via Start > Programs > MCIS > TDI > TDI Ident Connection Wizard.

Tool management
630 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

9.2 Configuration

9.2.1 Configuration schematic

The following figure displays the configuration scheme of Tool Ident Connection:

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQ 6O7P6HUYLFH

3/& '% '%[[[

1&.WRRO
PDQDJHPHQW

6,180(5,.'VO 6,180(5,.2SHUDWH

/'3

&RGHFDUULHU

Figure 9-11 Configuration principle of Tool Ident Connection

9.2.2 Configuration of the tool lists

<IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag
The entries used for configuring the code carrier connection in the tool list of the user interface
are located in the <IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag. The code carrier
connection is implemented via Tool Ident Connection.
For additional information on this topic, please refer to Configuring the code carrier connection
(Page 601).

9.2.3 TDIIdentCfg.xml
The following entry must be made in the "systemconfiguration.ini", in Section [services] to
activate the software:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 631
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

[services]
SVCxxx=name:=SIMcisTdiIdentConnectionService,
implementation:=slmcistdiidentconnectionservice.SIMcisTdiIdentConnec
tionService,
process:=SIHmiHost1, timeout:=5000, shutdowntime:=5000

Note
xxx in SVCxxx must be replaced by the free number of a service.

Tool Ident Connection is parameterized using a configuration file based on xml. This
configuration file allows the integration and parameterization of various read/write devices via
different communication technologies.

Structure
The configuration file is structured as follows:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTP-8"?>

<!-- SIEMENS AG 2010 - GER I IA&DT WEST TSS 7C APC MT - ZN Köln - All rights reserved -->
<!-- Configuration-File for MCIS TDI Ident Connection sl -->
<!-- E-Mail @ kulik.michael@siemens.com -->
<!-- Do not manipulate this file -->
<Configuration>
<Logging>
<ErrorFile size="3" enable="0">/var/tmp/TDIIdentLog.log</ErrorFile>
<TraceFile size="3" enable="0">/var/tmp/TDIIdentTrace.log</TraceFile>
<Logging>
<GlobalParam>
<InterfaceDB>19</InterfaceDB>
<InfaceOffset>250</InfaceOffset>
<DisableInface>false</DisableInface>
<TimeOut>1000</TimeOut>
<InputDB>19</InputDB>
<InputOffset>140</InputOffset>
<OutputDB>19</OutputDB>
<OutputOffset>198</OutputOffset>
</GlobalParam>
<!-- Parametrierung des ParamTM-Interface -->
<ParamTMInterface enable="1">
<InterfaceDB>19</InterfaceDB>
<InfaceOffset>256</InfaceOffset>
<ParamTMInterface>
<!-- Pfadangabe zur mcx-Datei und ToolSpec.xml -->
<Logic>
<!-- Aktivierung wenn TDI IdentConnection auf NCU -->
<mcxPath>/addon/sinumerik/hmi/cfg/wkonvert.mcx</mcxPath>
<specPath>/addon/sinumerik/hmi/cfg/ToolSpec.xml</specPath>
<!-- Aktivierung wenn TDI IdentConnection auf PCU 50.5 -->

Tool management
632 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

<mcxPath>C://Program Files/Siemens/MotionControl/addon/sinumerik/
hmi/cfg/wkonvert.mcx</mcxPath>
<specPath>C://Program Files/Siemens/MotionControl/addon/sinumerik/
hmi/cfg/wkonvert.mcx</specPath>
<Logic>
<MergeMode>
<LoadPlaceNo>1</LoadPlaceNo>
<UnloadPlaceNo>1</UnloadPlaceNo>
</MergeMode>
<!-- Parametrierung des Schreib-/Lesegerätes -->
<!-- Type = 1-> PLC Type = 2 -> USB Type = 3 -> RJ45 -->
<Device Type="1">
<Units>1</Units>
<Data Unit="1">
<DataDB>300</DataDB>
<Offset>0</Offset>
<MaxData>1138</MaxData>
<EOT>0*2F2F</EOT>
</Data>
</Device>
</Configuration>

Description

Note
Depending on whether Tool Ident Connection is activated on an NCU or on a PCU50.5, the
required program lines must be activated in the <Logic> area.

Note
Only the entries - described in the following table - can be changed/used to parameterize and
configure Tool Ident Connection.
Always generate a backup before making any change.

The configuration file can be changed using a text editor, e.g. notepad. It is sub-divided into
various nodes which contain different entries. The sections and their entries are described in
the following table.

Section Parameter Significance

GlobalParam InterfaceDB Data block information for the PLC interface
InfaceOffset Offset for the PLC interface
TimeOut Execution monitoring time
DisableInterface De/activation of the PLC interface
InputDB Data block for transfer parameters
InputOffset Offset for transfer parameters
OutputDB Data block for return parameters
OutputOffset Offset for return parameters

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 633
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Section Parameter Significance

Logic mcxPath File + path data to the configured mcx file
specPath File + path data to ToolSpec.xml
MergeMode LoadPlaceNo Default loading position
UnloadPlaceNo Default unloading position
Device Units Number of read heads used
Type="1" -> PLC DataBlock Data block of the read head
Offset Offset of the read head data
MaxDataBytes Maximum data of the read head in bytes
EOT End of the read head character string

If the execution of the PLC services for Tool Ident Connection is to be canceled because of a
timeout, a longer time can be defined using the "TimeOut" entry. A timeout can e.g. occur, if the
operator does not acknowledge a tool being loaded within the parameterized time window.
The default loading and unloading location number of the loading magazine can be changed
using the entries of "LoadPlaceNo" and "UnloadPlaceNo" using the "MergeMode" parameter.
The "Device" node has the "Type" attribute; the type of the read device being used is saved
there. The attribute defines the entries below this range. The parameters of the range contain
the configuration data of the read/write device.
Overview of the "Type" attribute of the "Device" parameter:

Type Designation
1 PLC read device → connection via PROFIBUS

9.2.4 Read/write device at the PLC

Configuration of the PLC connection

In the configuration for Tool Ident Connection, the "Type" attribute must be set to significance
"1" for a PLC read/write device. The following parameters must be supplied with valid values
below the node:

Parameter Data type Value range

Units int 1-4
DataBlock int 0-32767
Offset int 0-32767
MaxDataBytes int 0-32767
EOT string 10 characters

Tool management
634 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

"Device" extract from a configuration file (TDIIdentCfg.xml) with PLC connection:

<Device Type="1">
<Units>1</Units>
<Data Unit="1">
<DataDB>300</DataDB>
<Offset>0</Offset>
<MaxData>140</MaxData>
<EOT>0*2F2F</EOT>
</Data>
<Units>2</Units>
<Data Unit="1">
<DataDB>300</DataDB>
<Offset>0</Offset>
<MaxData>40</MaxData>
<EOT>0*2F2F</EOT>
</Data>
</Device>

9.2.5 Data conversion

The tool data is saved in the code carrier as a sequence of bytes. The PLC user program writes
the code carrier data to the previously defined data block (TDIIdentcfg.xml). The data
conversion accesses the data block and generates the tool data record and vice versa.
The following figure displays the scheme for the configuration of the conversion rules for Tool
Ident Connection:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 635
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

&RQILJXUDWLRQ3&

&RQYHUVLRQUXOHIURP :.219(57 0&,6&VRXUFHWH[WRIWKH

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ 7;7 FRQYHUVLRQUXOH
0&&

'HI7RRO'DWW[W

:NRQYHUWZL]DUG

:.219(57 &RQYHUVLRQUXOH
0&;

6,180(5,.'VO

:.219(57
0&;

7RRO,GHQW &RGHFDUULHU
&RQQHFWLRQ

7RROPDQDJHPHQW
6HUYLFH

Figure 9-12 Configuring the conversion rules

Generating conversion rules

As part of the commissioning of Tool Ident Connection, a conversion file must be created with
the Wkonvert wizard application on a configuration PC. The binary file wkonvert.mcx is created.
It contains the conversion rules and default tool data.

Tool management
636 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

The following conversion rules can be processed:

● Conversion rule from Tool Ident Connection
Files: wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt
Benefits: Guarantee of compatibility with earlier versions of Tool Ident Connection
Note
The structure of the wkonvert.txt file is described in Section Structure of the description file
wkonvert.txt (Page 639).
The structure of the DefToolDat.txt file is described in Section Tool data initialization file
DefToolDat.txt (Page 647).

● Conversion rule in the form of source text in the MCIS-C script language.
Benefits: Extended conversion functionality.
Note
If you want Siemens to create a customer-specific conversion rule for Tool Ident
Connection, please contact your Siemens sales partner.

9.2.5.1 Using the Wkonvert wizard

After installation, the Wkonvert wizard can be started via
Start > Programs > MCIS > TDI > TDI Wkonvert Wizard.

After executing the application, the basic screen form for this application is displayed:

Figure 9-13 Wkonvert wizard screen form

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 637
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

One of the following alternatives can be selected in the basic screen form of the application:
● "convert wKonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt"
Create conversion rule from Tool Ident Connection (files: wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt).
● "compile existing MCC-file"
Conversion rule is generated in the form of source text in the MCIS-C script language.
The target directory to output the result file wkonvert.mcx corresponds to the directory in which
the wkonvert.txt file is located.

Note
After creating the conversion rule, the mcx file must be copied to the "/addon/sinumerik/appl/"
directory. The operating software must be rebooted in order that the new conversion rule
becomes effective.

9.2.5.2 Messages of the Wkonvert wizard

Messages of the Wkonvert wizard application that can occur while interpreting the wkonvert.txt
and DefToolDat.txt or MCIS-C scripts, are described in this section.
All of the messages are displayed in the final dialog.

Figure 9-14 Final dialog

For error messages, the line as well as the source file, in which the error occurred, as well as
additional information on the error profile are displayed in a text box that can be scrolled. To
resolve the error, the error that has occurred must be removed in the source file.
The following table lists possible error messages:

ErrorCode ErrorMessage Meaning

200 File <abcd> could not be read! File: DefToolDat.txt; file cannot be read. Additional information is specified.
201 Unknown data type. File: DefToolDat.txt; for one item, no value has been assigned.
202 Line has no value. File: DefToolDat.txt; "=" missing.
203 Invalid line format. File: DefToolDat.txt; "[" or "]" missing.
100 File <abcd> could not be read! File: wKonvert.txt; file cannot be read. Additional information is specified
101 Error in value ‚DataLen’ File: wKonvert.txt; error when specifying the value 'DataLen'.
102 New block before BlockEnd File: wKonvert.txt; BlockEnd identification missing.
103 Missing block numer <xx> File: wKonvert.txt; Block <xx> missing.

Tool management
638 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

ErrorCode ErrorMessage Meaning

104 Line is empty File: wKonvert.txt; the specified line is empty.
105 No item number defined File: wKonvert.txt; the item has no number.
110 Missing item: act=<x>, File: wKonvert.txt; item numbering is incorrect.
last=<y>.
111 Finishing block number <xx> File: wKonvert.txt; block number is incorrect.

After a successful compilation of the source file(s), the following message is output:

Figure 9-15 MessageBox

9.2.6 Conversion files wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt

For Tool Ident Connection, the conversion rules are used for the files Wkonvert.txt and
DefToolDat.txt. There are also the code carrier data formats: REAL and DOUBLE.

9.2.6.1 Structure of the description file wkonvert.txt

The data on the code carrier is stored in a particular order. A conversion rule in the form of a
description file is provided so that the tool management can read or write this data flow.
This description file consists of correctly defined tool and cutting edge dialog data. Only this
dialog data can actually be processed by the tool management. All the other data on the code
carrier must not be assigned to any dialog variables; they will then not be processed by the
standard version.
Tool Ident Connection enables the connection of optional software components. These
components are used to adapt this special code carrier data to the SINUMERIK standard. This
means that customer-specific code carrier formats can be read and written by the tool manager;
also, special logic can be implemented in the transport operations of the tool data (e.g.
replacement tools can be taken into account in the NC, additional cutting edges can be created,
etc.).
The description file can be generated as an ASCII file using a standard text editor. This
description file is called wkonvert.txt. It represents the precise image of the data which is on the
code carrier.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 639
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Tool dialog data

The tool dialog data is defined as follows:

Table 9-1 Tool dialog data

Dialog variable Data type Designation Assignment $TC...

T1 String Tool name, max. 32 characters $TC_TP2
T2 Integer Duplo number $TC_TP1
T3 Integer Number of cutting edges $P_TOOLND[tno]
tno=tool number
T4 Integer Tool size to the left in half locations $TC_TP3
T5 Integer Tool size to the right in half locations $TC_TP4
T6 Integer Tool size upwards in half locations $TC_TP5
T7 Integer Tool size downwards in half locations $TC_TP6
T8 String Magazine location type $TC_TP7 1)
T9 Integer Tool status $TC_TP8
T10 Integer Type of tool monitoring $TC_TP9
T11 Integer Type of tool search $TC_TP11
T12 2)
Integer Magazine location type $TC_TP7
1)
The character string which is stored there, is an internal control location type that is assigned to the value in $TC_TP7. This
text is defined via the tool management start-up and stored in the database.
2)
This number corresponds to the string from T8 and should be used as an alternative to T8.

Cutting edge dialog data

Table 9-2 Cutting edge dialog data

Dialog variable Data type Designation Assignment $TC...

C1 Integer Subtype $TC_DP1
C4 Integer Cutting edge position $TC_DP2
Geometry tool length compensation
C5 Double Length 1 $TC_DP3
C6 Double Length 2 $TC_DP4
C7 Double Length 3 $TC_DP5
Geometry tool radius compensation
C8 Double Length 1 $TC_DP8
C9 Double Length 2 $TC_DP9
C10 Double Radius 1 $TC_DP6
C11 Double Radius 2 $TC_DP7
C12 Double Angle 1 $TC_DP10
C13 Double Angle 2 $TC_DP11
Wear tool length compensation
C14 Double Length 1 $TC_DP12
C15 Double Length 2 $TC_DP13

Tool management
640 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Dialog variable Data type Designation Assignment $TC...

C16 Double Length 3 $TC_DP14
Wear tool radius compensation
C17 Double Length 1 $TC_DP17
C18 Double Length 2 $TC_DP18
C19 Double Radius 1 $TC_DP15
C20 Double Radius 2 $TC_DP16
C21 Double Angle 1 $TC_DP19
C22 Double Angle 2 $TC_DP20
Base dimension/adapter dimension tool length
compensation
C23 Double Basic length 1 $TC_DP21
C24 Double Basic length 2 $TC_DP22
C25 Double Basic length 3 $TC_DP23
C26 Double Undercut angle $TC_DP24
C27 Integer Reverse insert $TC_DP25
C28 Integer Cutting edge number for addressing variables
C29 *) Integer Tool life in minutes $TC_MOP2
C30 *)
Integer Pre-warning limit for tool life in minutes $TC_MOP1
C31 *) Integer Unit quantity $TC_MOP4
C32 *)
Integer Prewarning limit unit quantity $TC_MOP3
C33 Double Setpoint tool life in minutes $TC_MOP11
C34 *)
Integer Setpoint unit quantity $TC_MOP13
C35 Double Pre-warning limit for wear $TC_MOP5
C36 Double Wear $TC_MOP6
C37 Double Setpoint wear $TC_MOP15
C38 *) Double Tool life in minutes $TC_MOP2
C39 *) Double Pre-warning limit for tool life in minutes $TC_MOP1
C40 *) Double Unit quantity $TC_MOP4
C41 *) Double Prewarning limit unit quantity $TC_MOP3
C42 *)
Double Setpoint unit quantity $TC_MOP13
A1 - A10 Double/String User tool data $TC_TPCx
U1 - U10 Double/String User cutting edge data $TC_DPCx
S1 - S10 Double/String User monitoring data $TC_MOPCx
*)
C38 and C39 can only be used as an alternative to C29 and C30; C40, C41 and C42 can only be used as an alternative to
C31, C32 and C34.
That data on the code carrier, which is not relevant for tool management, but which may not be
changed when writing to the code carrier, is shown in the description file with a hyphen ( - )
instead of the dialog variable (data gaps).

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 641
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Data types
The following data types are defined for dialog variables:
● Integer: Value range -32768 to +32767
● Double: Floating point - double the accuracy
● String: String made up of ASCII characters

Keywords
The code carrier description file is structured line-by-line, whereby each line starts with one of
the following keywords:
● Inverted comma
The apostrophe (') marks the beginning of a comment. The characters that follow up to the
end of the line are skipped. Example:
' This is a comment
● Datalen
DATALEN=CONST | VARIABLE 0x<delimiter>
The following data has a constant (CONST) or a variable (VARIABLE) data length. Data
with variable length is terminated with 0x<delimiter>. Example:
DATALEN=VARIABLE 0x0A ’ variable data length, delimiter LF
● Item
Item<n>=<line>
<n> := Consecutive number of the code carrier data, ascending from 1 without gaps
<line> := <(max.) Length in bytes> <code carrier data format> <dialog
variable>
<code carrier data format> : See table, Code carrier data formats
<dialog variable> : Assignment to the dialog variable, see table, Cutting edge dialog
data
Example:
Item1 32 ASCII T3 ’ tool identifier
Item2 3 BCD T2 ’ duplo number
● Bltem
BItem<n>=<line>
<n> := Consecutive number of the code carrier data, ascending from 1 without gaps
<line> := analog Item<n>
Conversion rule for code carrier data <n> within a block. If the code carrier data is assigned
a tool dialog data T<n>, the dialog data is assigned the first value of the code carrier data
in the block.
Example:
BItem1 1 BCD C1 ' subtype
BItem2 1 BCD C4 ' cutting edge position

Tool management
642 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

● Block
Block<n> <repetition rule>
<n> := Consecutive number of block, ascending from 1 without gaps
<repetition rule> := * Item<n>
A block of data BItem<n> follows (up to keyword End_Block<n>) which is stored on the
code carrier according to the <repetition rule>.
In the case of Block <n> * Item <n> Item <n> must be defined before Block <n> .
Example:
Block1 * Item6 ’ Block1 corresponds to repeating the value from
Item6
End_Block<n>
● End_Block
End_Block<n>
<n> := consecutive block number
End identifier for a data block defined with "Block".

Code carrier data formats - <code carrier data format>

The following code-carrier data formats (see Item / BItem) are supported:

Table 9-3 Code carrier data formats

Data format Explanation Value range

ASCII ASCII character set -
INT 16-bit integer (Intel format) -32768 to +32767
BCD Binary-coded decimal number (if necessary, with sign and decimal point): -
Non-relevant decades are preassigned the value 0, left-justified.
REAL 16-bit floating-point number (Intel format): Accuracy, 7 digits ±1.5×10-45 to ± 3.4×1038
DOUBLE 32-bit floating-point number (Intel format): Accuracy, 15-16 digits ±5.0×10-324 to ±1.7×10308
FPX2 Bit integer (SINUMERIK): Least significant byte at the higher order ad‐ -32768 to +32767
dress (inverse to the Intel format)

Assignment between code carrier data and dialog data - <dialog variable>
The conversion rule for Item<n> or BItem<n> also contains the assignment to none/one/
several dialog variables, if necessary with a conversion that is explained in detail in this section.

<dialog variable> := <dvar1>[=(<uv>)] [, <dvar2>[=(<uv>)]

[,<dvar3>[&<dvar4>]=(<uv>)]
[,dvarN>[=(<uv>)]
<dvar> := T<index> | C<index> | _
T = tool data
C = cutting edge data
index = index within tool / cutting edge dialog data
– = no assignment to a dialog variable
<dvar1>&<dvar2>= <uv>
Conversion rule applies to <dvar1> and <dvar2>

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 643
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

uv := <Tetn>
Tetn := nth tetrad in byte sequence
Byte1, = Tet1 and Tet2
Byte2, = Tet3 and Tet4
Example of the tetrad allocation of the code carrier variables (in BCD format) to dialog variables:
T4=(Tet1), T5=(Tet2), T6=(Tet3), T7=(Tet4)
If the code carrier variable has the value 0x1234, for example, dialog variable T4 is assigned
the value 1, dialog variable T7 the value 4.

9.2.6.2 Examples for the description files wkonvert.txt

After installation, the name of the file is "wkonvert.txt".

Table 9-4 Wkonvert.txt Items

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
Item1 32 ASCII T1 ’ Identifier
Item2 3 BCD T2 ’ Duplo
Item3 2 BCD T4=(Tet1), ’ Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom
T5=(Tet2),
T6=(Tet3),
T7=(Tet4)
Item4 32 ASCII T8 ’ Location type
Item5 2 BCD T9 ’ Status
Item6 1 BCD T3 ’ Qty. Cutting edges
Item7 1 BCD T10 ' Type of tool monitoring
Item8 1 BCD T11 ' Type of tool monitoring
’ Cutting edge data Block1 * Item6
BItem1 2 BCD C1 ’ Subtype, type
BItem2 3 BCD C4 ’ Cutting edge position
' Tool length compensation
BItem3 4 BCD C5 ' Length 1
BItem4 4 BCD C5 ' Length 2
BItem5 4 BCD C7 ' Length 3
' Tool radius compensation
BItem6 4 BCD C8 ' Length 1
BItem7 4 BCD C9 ' Length 2
BItem8 4 BCD C10 ' Radius 1
BItem9 4 BCD C11 ' Radius 2
BItem10 4 BCD C12 ' Angle 1
BItem11 4 BCD C13 ' Angle 2
' Wear length compensation
BItem12 4 BCD C14 ' Length 1

Tool management
644 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
BItem13 4 BCD C15 ' Length 2
BItem14 4 BCD C16 ' Length 3
' Wear radius compensation
BItem15 4 BCD C17 ' Length 1
BItem16 4 BCD C18 ' Length 2
BItem17 4 BCD C19 ' Radius 1
BItem18 4 BCD C20 ' Radius 2
BItem19 4 BCD C21 ' Angle 1
BItem20 4 BCD C22 ' Angle 2
' Basic dimension length compensation
Bltem21 4 BCD C23 ’ Basic length 1
Bltem22 4 BCD C24 ’ Basic length 2
Bltem23 4 BCD C25 ’ Basic length 3
Bltem24 4 BCD C26 ' Undercut angle
Bltem25 1 BCD C27 ' Reverse insert
Bltem26 2 BCD C29 ’ Tool life in minutes
Bltem27 2 BCD C30 ’ Pre-warning limit tool life
Bltem28 2 BCD C33 ’ Setpoint tool life in minutes
Bltem29 2 BCD C31 ’ Unit quantity
Bltem30 2 BCD C32 ’ Pre-warning limit unit quantity
Bltem31 2 BCD C32 ’ Setpoint unit quantity
End_Block1

Example with tool and cutting edge OEM data as well as data gaps:

Table 9-5 OEM data for Wkonvert.txt

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
Item1 32 ASCII T1 ’ Identifier
Item2 3 BCD T2 ’ Duplo
Item3 2 BCD T4=(Tet1), ’ Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom
T5=(Tet2),
T6=(Tet3),
T7=(Tet4)
Item4 32 ASCII T8 ’ Location type
Item5 2 BCD T9 ’ Status
Item6 1 BCD T3 ’ Qty. Cutting edges
Item7 1 BCD T10 ' Type of tool monitoring
Item8 1 BCD T11 ' Type of tool monitoring
Item9 5 ASCII - ‘ Tool data gap
Item10 4 BCD A1 ’ Tool OEM data 1
’ Cutting edge data Block1 * Item6

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 645
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
BItem1 2 BCD C1 ’ Subtype, type
BItem2 1 BCD C4 ’ Cutting edge position
' Tool length compensation
BItem3 4 BCD C5 ' Length 1
BItem4 4 BCD C5 ' Length 2
BItem5 4 BCD C7 ' Length 3
' Tool radius compensation
BItem6 4 BCD C8 ' Length 1
BItem7 4 BCD C9 ' Length 2
BItem8 4 BCD C10 ' Radius 1
BItem9 4 BCD C11 ' Radius 2
BItem10 4 BCD C12 ' Angle 1
BItem11 4 BCD C13 ' Angle 2
' Wear length compensation
BItem12 4 BCD C14 ' Length 1
BItem13 4 BCD C15 ' Length 2
BItem14 4 BCD C16 ' Length 3
' Wear radius compensation
BItem15 4 BCD C17 ' Length 1
BItem16 4 BCD C18 ' Length 2
BItem17 4 BCD C19 ' Radius 1
BItem18 4 BCD C20 ' Radius 2
BItem19 4 BCD C21 ' Angle 1
BItem20 4 BCD C22 ' Angle 2
' Basic dimension length compensation
Bltem21 4 BCD C23 ’ Basic length 1
Bltem22 4 BCD C24 ’ Basic length 2
Bltem23 4 BCD C25 ’ Basic length 3
Bltem24 4 BCD C26 ' Undercut angle
Bltem25 1 BCD C27 ' Reverse insert
Bltem26 2 BCD C29 ’ Tool life in minutes
Bltem27 2 BCD C30 ’ Pre-warning limit tool life
Bltem28 2 BCD C33 ’ Setpoint tool life in minutes
Bltem29 2 BCD C31 ’ Unit quantity
Bltem30 2 BCD C32 ’ Pre-warning limit unit quantity
Bltem31 2 BCD C32 ’ Setpoint unit quantity
Bltem32 4 BCD U1 ’ Cutting edge OEM data 1
Bltem33 3 BCD - ’ Cutting edge data gap
End_Block1

Tool management
646 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

9.2.6.3 Tool data initialization file DefToolDat.txt

The default data contained in the "DefToolDat.txt" file initializes the tool data that is not
available in the data source for the services of Tool Ident Connection. This situation can occur
when reading data from the code carrier from an import file or from the production host
computer. The data of a default tool with a cutting edge in the known NC-$ syntax is located in
this file.
The contents of "DefToolDat.txt" must be adapted by the user when configuring Tool Ident
Connection. By removing the comment character in front of the appropriate optional tool data,
its quantity should be adapted to the existing NC configuration. Also these values assigned to
the tool data in the file can be modified according to the users requirements.

Example of a description file DefToolDat.txt

; Example of a tool default data file.
; NOTICE: Certain data values may not be practical
in this example!
;
;Tool Data
$TC_TP1[1]=1 ; Duplo Number
$TC_TP2[1]=1 ; Tool Name
$TC_TP3[1]=1 ; Tool size left
$TC_TP4[1]=1 ; Tool size right
$TC_TP5[1]=1 ; Tool size up
$TC_TP6[1]=1 ; Tool size low
$TC_TP7[1]=1 ; Mag. location type
$TC_TP8[1]=2 ; Tool Status
$TC_TP9[1]=0 ; Watchdog type
$TC_TP10[1=0 ;
;
;OEM Tool Data
;$TC_TPC1[1]=1.0
;$TC_TPC2[1]=2.0
;$TC_TPC3[1]=3.0
;$TC_TPC4[1]=4.0
;$TC_TPC5[1]=5.0
;$TC_TPC6[1]=6.0
;$TC_TPC7[1]=7.0
;$TC_TPC8[1]=8.0
;$TC_TPC9[1]=9.0
;$TC_TPC10[1]=10.0
;
;Cutting Edge Data

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 647
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

$TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ; Tool Sub-Type

$TC_DP2[1,1]=0 ; Cutting Edge Orientation
$TC_DP3[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Length 1
$TC_DP4[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Length 2
$TC_DP5[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Length 3
$TC_DP6[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Radius 1
$TC_DP7[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Radius 2
$TC_DP8[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Length 1
$TC_DP9[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Length 2
$TC_DP10[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Angle 1
$TC_DP11[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Angle 2
$TC_DP12[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Length 1
$TC_DP13[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Length 2
$TC_DP14[1.1] =0.0 ; Wear Length 3
$TC_DP15[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Radius 1
$TC_DP16[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Radius 2
$TC_DP17[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Length 1
$TC_DP18[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Length 2
$TC_DP19[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Angle 1
$TC_DP20[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Angle 2
$TC_DP21[1,1]=0.0 ; Base Length 1
$TC_DP22[1,1]=0.0 ; Base Length 2
$TC_DP23[1,1]=0.0 ; Base Length 3
$TC_DP24[1,1]=0.0 ; Tool clearance angle
$TC_DP25[1,1]=0 ; Use of tool reversed
;
;OEM Cutting Edge Data
;$TC_DPC1[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_DPC2[1,1]=20.0
;$TC_DPC3[1,1]=30.0
;$TC_DPC4[1,1]=40.0
;$TC_DPC5[1,1]=50.0
;$TC_DPC6[1,1]=60.0
;$TC_DPC7[1,1]=70.0
;$TC_DPC8[1,1]=80.0
;$TC_DPC9[1,1]=90.0
;$TC_DPC10[1,1]=100.0
;
;Edge monitoring Data
$TC_MOP1[1,1]=0.0 ; Prewarning limit [min]
$TC_MOP2[1,1]=0.0 ; DownTime [min]
$TC_MOP3[1,1]=0 ; Prewarning limit [part]
$TC_MOP4[1,1]=0 ; Part countdown
$TC_MOP5[1,1]=0 ; Wear prewarning limit
$TC_MOP6[1,1]=0 ; Wear
$TC_MOP11[1,1]=0 ; Target service life [min]
$TC_MOP13[1,1]=0 ; Target number of parts
$TC_MOP15[1,1]=0 ; Target wear

Tool management
648 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

;OEM edge monitoring data

;$TC_MOPC1[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC2[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC3[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC4[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC5[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC6[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC7[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC8[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC9[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC10[1,1]=0
;
;Location-dependent additive cutting edge offsets
;$TC_SCP13[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP14[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP15[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP16[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP17[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP18[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP19[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP20[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP21[1,1]=0.0
M17

9.2.7 Conversion rule based on the MCIS-C script language

Tool Ident Connection enables conversion rules to be created for the code carrier based on the
MCIS-C script language. Using the script language, the user obtains additional functions to
interpret the data on the code carrier.
Complex code carrier formats can also be processed by using control structures (e.g. if) in
conjunction with relational operators (e.g. >, <).

9.2.7.1 Structure of the conversion rule

The conversion rule is generated as ASCII file with the MCC extension (MCIS-C). The file has
the following structure:

Line Program code

1 _VersionInfo := "Sample for WKONVERT-Logic";
2
3 TmTool Tool = new TmTool(); // Tool-Object
4 unsigned char ToolArray[0]; // Array-Object
5
6 void DecodeToolData()
7 {
8 Tool.TC_TP2 = readASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10 );
9 ...
10 }
11

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 649
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

12 void EncodeToolData()
13 {
14 writeASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10, Tool.TC_TP2 );
15 ...
16 }

Line 1: Using the construct _VersionInfo, users can save their own version information
within the conversion rule.
Line 3: A TmTool object is defined with the name Tool in this line. Using this object, it is
possible to access individual tool / cutting edge data of a tool.
Line 4: An array object with the ToolArray name is defined in this line. Using this object,
data on the code carrier can be accessed (reading or writing). Initially, the data
carrier size is pre-assigned 0. The actual size of the code carrier is determined
during the run time and can be read with the construct: ToolArray.ArraySize().
Individual bytes of the code carrier are accessed using the construct: ToolAr‐
ray[offset], whereby the value of the offset may assume values from 0 to ToolAr‐
ray.ArraySize()-1.
In addition to directly accessing the individual bytes of the code carrier, additional
help functions can be used. The help functions are always required if data is to be
read or written in a specific coding (e.g. readBCD() / writeBCD()).
Line 6: The function with the name DecodeToolData() is always called from Tool Ident
Connection if data has been read from the code carrier. When this function is
called, the array object contains: ToolArray where all of the code carrier data is
saved. The tool object: Tool initially does not contain any data and is "filled" with
data within these functions.
Line 8: This line represents as example the procedure within the DecodeToolData() func‐
tion. Here, the tool identifier – using the help function readASCII() – is read-out of
the code carrier data and assigned to the data element TC_TP2 of the tool data
set.
Line 12: Tool Ident Connection always calls the function with the name EncodeToolData()
if data is to be written to the code carrier. When this function is called, the array
object contains: ToolArray the actual data from the code carrier (this is initially
read each time before writing to the code carrier). The tool object contains data of
the tool, which should be written to the code carrier.
Line 14 This line represents as example the procedure within the EncodeToolData() func‐
tion. Here, the tool identifier TC_TP2 is written to the code carrier using the help
function writeASCII(). This line represents as example the procedure within the
EncodeToolData() function. Here, the tool identifier TC_TP2 is written to the code
carrier using the help function writeASCII().
The identifiers used: Tool, ToolArray, DecodeToolData, EncodeToolData must not be changed.

Tool management
650 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

9.2.7.2 Access to tool data

Within the conversion rule, individual tool data can be accessed reading and writing via the tool
object. All of the data elements that are available are listed in this section. The identifiers used
are oriented to the tool manager (e.g. Tool.TC_TP2 - tool identifier). The meaning of the
individual tool data should be taken from the description of the tool management in Section "NC
programming (Page 163)". Cutting edge-related data is accessed by specifying the cutting
edge number (e.g. Tool.TC_DP2[2] – cutting edge position of the cutting edge with cutting edge
number 2).

Identifier Designation MCIC-C

data type
Tool-related data
TC_TP1 Duplo number long
TC_TP2 Tool identifier string
TC_TP3 Size on left long
TC_TP4 Size on right long
TC_TP5 Size above long
TC_TP6 Size below long
TC_TP7 Magazine location type long
TC_TP8 Status long
TC_TP9 Tool monitoring method long
TC_TP10 Replacement change strategy long
TC_TP11 Tool information long
TC_TP_PROTA Name for the protection area string
TC_TP_MAX_VELO Maximum tool speed double
TC_TP_MAX_ACC Maximum tool acceleration double
Tool-related user data
TC_TPC1 OEM user data 1 double
... ... ...
TC_TPC64 OEM user data 64 (as a double) double
TC_TPC1Str OEM user data 1 (as a string) string
... ... ...
TC_TPC64Str OEM user data 64 (as a string) double
Cut parameters
TC_DP1 [EdgeNo] Tool type long
TC_DP2 [EdgeNo] Cutting edge position double
TC_DP3 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 1 double
TC_DP4 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 2 double
TC_DP5 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 3 double
TC_DP6 [EdgeNo] Geometry radius double
TC_DP7 [EdgeNo] Geometry - corner radius double
TC_DP8 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 4 double
TC_DP9 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 5 double
TC_DP10 [EdgeNo] Geometry - angle 1 double
TC_DP11 [EdgeNo] Geometry - angle 2 double

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 651
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Identifier Designation MCIC-C

data type
TC_DP12 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 1 double
TC_DP13 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 2 double
TC_DP14 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 3 double
TC_DP15 [EdgeNo] Wear - radius double
TC_DP16 [EdgeNo] Wear - rounding radius double
TC_DP17 [EdgeNo] Wear - projection double
TC_DP18 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 5 double
TC_DP19 [EdgeNo] Wear - angle 1 double
TC_DP20 [EdgeNo] Wear - angle 2 double
TC_DP22 [EdgeNo] Adapter - length 1 double
TC_DP23 [EdgeNo] Adapter – length 2 double
TC_DP24 [EdgeNo] Adapter – length 3 double
TC_DP25 [EdgeNo] Clearance angle double
TC_DPCE [EdgeNo] Cutting edge number CE long
TC_DPH [EdgeNo] H parameter double
TC_DPV [EdgeNo] Tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPV3 [EdgeNo] L1 component of the tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPV4 [EdgeNo] L2 component of the tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPV5 [EdgeNo] L3 component of the tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPVN3 L1 component of the orientation normals double
TC_DPVN4 L2 component of the orientation normals double
TC_DPVN5 L3 component of the orientation normals double
TC_DPNT Number of teeth of this cutting edge long
TC_DPROT Basic angle of rotation of cutting edge double
Note: The TDI Wkonvert-Wizard version 02.03.00.03 and higher is
used to access variable TC_DPROT
Cutting edge supplementary information
TC_DPC1 [EdgeNo] OEM cutting edge user data 1 double
... ... ...
TC_DPC10 [Edge‐ OEM cutting edge user data 10 double
No]
Cutting edge-related tool monitoring
TC_MOP1 [EdgeNo] Prewarning limit service life double
TC_MOP2 [EdgeNo] Residual tool life double
TC_MOP3 [EdgeNo] Prewarning limit unit quantity long
TC_MOP4 [EdgeNo] Residual unit quantity long
TC_MOP11 [Edge‐ Reference tool life double
No]
TC_MOP13 [Edge‐ Unit quantity reference long
No]
TC_MOP5 [EdgeNo] Wear prewarning limit double
TC_MOP6 [EdgeNo] Wear actual value double

Tool management
652 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Identifier Designation MCIC-C

data type
TC_MOP15 [Edge‐ Wear setpoint double
No]
User cutting edge monitoring
TC_MOPC1 OEM user cutting edge monitoring[1] long
... ...
TC_MOPC10 OEM user cutting edge monitoring[10] long
Help attributes
EDGE_NUM Number of cutting edges (read only) long
EDGE_NO [Edge‐ Cutting edge number (read only) individual
Idx] Supplies the cutting edge number of a cutting edge using the cut‐
ting edge index.
The cutting edge index is a value between 1 and
Tool.EDGE_NUM .
Example: Tool with three cutting edges:1, 3, 5
Tool.EDGE_NUM supplies 3
Tool.EDGE_NO[1] supplies 1
Tool.EDGE_NO[2] supplies 3
Tool.EDGE_NO[3] supplies 5
Tool.TC_DP2[5] cutting edge position of the cutting edge with cut‐
ting edge number 5.

9.2.7.3 Auxiliary functions for numerical coding

Tool data can be saved on the code carrier using various codings. The following auxiliary
functions are available when reading and writing this data within MCIS-C:

Note
Syntax
All of these functions always have as the first parameter, the array object: Array and an offset
within this array as second parameter. The offset can assume values between 0 and
ToolArray.ArraySize()-1. For data types with a variable length, the length of the data on the
code carrier is also transferred, (e.g. readASCII(array, offset, length)).

readASCII() / writeASCII()
string readASCII ( array, offset, length )
writeASCII ( array, offset, length, string [,precision] )

The functions allow ASCII strings to be read and written to. When writing, the string is aligned
"right justified". If the string that is written is longer than the parameter length, then the excess
characters are cut off. If the string is shorter, then the written range is filled with spaces. When
reading, leading spaces and spaces at the end of a line are ignored. The writeASCII() function
contains an optional "precison" parameter with which the number of decimal places can be

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 653
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

specified. If this parameter is not used, then the number of decimal places configured in
SINUMERIK is used.
Examples:

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5, "ABC" );

readASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "ABC"

Hex value 41 42 43 20 20
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5, "ABCDEFGH" );

readASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "ABCDE"

Hex value 41 42 43 44 45
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5, 3.94 );

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 5, 5, 3.94, 0 );
writeASCII ( ToolArray, 10, 5, 3.94, 1 );
readASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "3.94"
readASCII ( ToolArray, 5, 5 ); => "00004"
readASCII ( ToolArray, 10, 5 ); => "003.9"

Hex value 30 33 2E 39 34 30 30 30 30 34 30 30 33 2E 39
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readBCD() / writeBCD()
double readBCD ( array, offset, length )
writeBCD ( array, offset, length, val [,precision] )

The functions allow BCD numbers to be read and written.

Examples:

writeBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5, 3.11 );

readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "3.11"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 5, 5, -47.11 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "-47.11"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 10, 5, 4711 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 10, 5 ); => "4711"

Tool management
654 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Hex value B0 00 00 3E 11 D0 00 04 7E 11 B0 00 00 47 11
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5, -3.1234 );

readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "-3.12"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 5, 5, 1.2 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 5, 5 ); => "1.2"

Hex value D0 00 00 3E 32 B0 00 04 1E 20
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 4, 3.94 );

readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 4 ); => "3.94"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 4, 4, 3.94, 0 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 4, 4 ); => "4"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 8, 4, 3.94, 1 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 8, 4 ); => "3.9"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 12, 4, 3.94, 2 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 12, 4 ); => "3.94"

Hex value B0 00 3E 94 B0 00 00 04 B0 00 03 E9 B0 00 3E 94
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readINT() / writeINT()
int readINT ( array, offset )
writeINT ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow signed 16-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the S7
format (Big Endian).
Example:

writeINT ( ToolArray, 0, 1 );
readINT ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "1"
writeINT ( ToolArray, 2, 4711 ); // hex: 1267
readINT ( ToolArray, 2 ); => "4711"
writeINT ( ToolArray, 4, -300 ); // hex: FED4
readINT ( ToolArray, 4 ); => "-300"
writeINT ( ToolArray, 6, -1 ); // hex: FFFF
readINT ( ToolArray, 6 ); => "-1"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 655
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Hex value 00 01 12 67 FE: D4 FF FF

Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readDINT() / writeDINT()
long readDINT ( array, offset )
writeDINT ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow signed 32-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the S7
format (Big Endian).
Example:

writeDINT ( ToolArray, 0, 1234 ); // hex: 4D2

readDINT ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "1234"
writeDINT ( ToolArray, 4, -1234 ); // hex: FFFFFB2E
readDINT ( ToolArray, 4 ); => "-1234"

Hex value 00 00 04 D2 FF FF FB 2E
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readWORD() / writeWORD()
long readWORD ( array, offset )
writeWORD ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow unsigned 16-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the
S7 format (Big Endian).
Example:

writeWORD ( ToolArray, 0, 1 ); // hex: 1

readWORD ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "1"
writeWORD ( ToolArray, 2, 50000 ); // hex: C350
readWORD ( ToolArray, 2, ); => "50000"

Hex value 00 01 C3 50
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readDWORD() / writeDWORD()
unsigned long readDWORD ( array, offset )
writeDWORD ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow unsigned 32-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the
S7 format (Big Endian).

Tool management
656 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Example:

writeDWORD ( ToolArray, 0, 12345678 ); // hex: 075BCD15

readDWORD ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "12345678"
writeDWORD ( ToolArray, 4, 987654321 ); // hex: 3ADE68B1
readDWORD ( ToolArray, 4, ); => "987654321"

Hex value 07 5B CD 15 3A DE 68 B1
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readREAL() / writeREAL()
float readREAL ( array, offset )
writeREAL ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow 32-bit floating-point numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in
the S7 format (REAL).
Example:

writeREAL ( ToolArray, 0, 3.11f );

readREAL ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "3.11"
writeREAL ( ToolArray, 4, 08.15f );
readREAL ( ToolArray, 4, ); => "08.15"

Hex value 40 47 0A 3D 41 02 66 66
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Note
The notation 3.11f ensures that the constant 3.11 is interpreted as 32-bit floating-point number
(float). 64-bit (double) is used as default.

readDOUBLE() / writeDOUBLE()
double readDOUBLE ( array, offset )
writeDOUBLE ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow 64-bit floating-point numbers to be read and written. The data correspond
to the IEEE 754 standard.
Example:

writeDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 0, 3.11 );

readDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "3.11"
writeDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 8, 08.15 );
readDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 8, ); => "08.15"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 657
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Hex value 40 08 E1 47 AE 14 7A E1 40 20 4C CC CC CC CC CD
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ReverseByteOrder ()
ReverseByteOrder ( val )

The functions xxxINT(), xxxDINT(), xxxWORD() and xxxDWORD() read and write values in the
Big-Endian format. This corresponds to S7 formats. If values are to be read / written in the Little-
Endian format, then the function ReverseByteOrder() can be used for this purpose.
Example:

writeINT ( ToolArray, 0, 1 );
writeINT ( ToolArray, 2, ReverseByteOrder(1) );
ReverseByteOrder( readINT( ToolArray, 2 ) ); => "1"
writeDINT ( ToolArray, 4, 4711 );
writeDINT ( ToolArray, 8, ReverseByteOrder(4711L) );
ReverseByteOrder( readDINT( ToolArray, 8 ) ); => "4711"

Hex value 00 01 01 00 00 00 12 67 67 12 00 00
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Note
The notation 4711L ensures that the constant 4711 is interpreted as 32-bit constant. 16-bit (int)
is used as default.

PlaceTypeToString () / PlaceTypeFromString ()
The location type of a tool (TC_TP7) is always listed as a numeric value in SINUMERIK
Operate. In HMI Advanced, a string value is managed for the location type. The assignment
between the numerical value and the string value is realized in the database WZACCESS.MDB.
To guarantee the compatibility of code carrier formats between HMI-Advanced and
SINUMERIK Operate, the "ToolSpec.xml" configuration file is introduced in Tool Ident
Connection. This file must be saved in the control in the same directory as the mcx file.

Table 9-6 Example, ToolSpec.xml

<!--The following data structure is used to convert the location type
information ($TC_TP7) from a numeric value to a string value and vice versa.
The string comparison is case-sensitive in the conversion from text → code--
>

Tool management
658 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

<ToolSpecConversion>
<ToolSpec code="1" text="normal"/>
<ToolSpec code="2" text="large"/>
<ToolSpec code="3" text="small"/>
</ToolSpecConversion>

The ToolSpec.xml can be accessed within the conversion rule with the
PlaceTypeToString() and PlaceTypeFromString() auxiliary functions.

PlaceTypeToString ( NumType )
PlaceTypeFromString ( StrType )

Example:

PlaceTypeToString ( 1 ); ⇒ "normal"
PlaceTypeToString ( 2 ); ⇒ "large"
PlaceTypeToString ( 3 ); ⇒ "small"

PlaceTypeFromString ("normal" ); ⇒ 1
PlaceTypeFromString ("large" ); ⇒ 2
PlaceTypeFromString ("small" ); ⇒ 3

9.2.7.4 Configuration of ToolSpec.xml

PlaceTypeToString () / PlaceTypeFromString ()
The location type of a tool (TC_TP7) is always listed as a numeric value in SINUMERIK
Operate. A string value is used for the location type in the HM. The assignment between the
numeric value and the string value is performed in the WZACCESS.MDB database.
To guarantee the compatibility of code carrier formats between HMI-Advanced and
SINUMERIK Operate, the "ToolSpec.xml" configuration file is introduced in Tool Ident
Connection. This file must be saved in the control in the same directory as the mcx file.

Example 1:
<!--The following data structure is used to convert the location type
information ($TC_TP7) from a numeric value to a string value and vice
versa. The string comparison is case-sensitive in the conversion from
text → code-->
<ToolSpecConversion>
<ToolSpec code="1" text="normal"/>
<ToolSpec code="2" text="large"/>
<ToolSpec code="3" text="small"/>
</ToolSpecConversion>
The ToolSpec.xml can be accessed within the conversion rule with the
PlaceTypeToString() and PlaceTypeFromString() auxiliary functions.
PlaceTypeToString ( NumType )
PlaceTypeFromString ( StrType )

Example 2:
PlaceTypeToString ( 1 ); ⇒ "normal"
PlaceTypeToString ( 2 ); ⇒ "large"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 659
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

PlaceTypeToString ( 3 ); ⇒ "small"

PlaceTypeFromString ("normal" ); ⇒ 1
PlaceTypeFromString ("large" ); ⇒ 2
PlaceTypeFromString ("small" ); ⇒ 3

9.2.7.5 Error handling

Handling errors
The tool data can be checked within one conversion rule based on the MCIS-C script language.
If the tool data check proves negative (e.g.: tool diameter too large, wrong tool type, etc.),
the loading procedure can be aborted with an error message.
The error message appears in field "Error_Code" on the PLC interface.
(See also Table 9-7 Structure of the PLC interface (Page 668))
For the application case described here, the user can use Error_Code from value range 0x80
- 0xFF.
See also Table 9-24
Low byte (YY) of the function error code (Page 696) for error group 0B: Tool conversion error
group in the appendix.
To initiate the error handling described here within the conversion rule, the conversion rule
must be expanded to include the declaration of the Error_Code variable.

Example

Variable Error_Code = new variable<int>(); // error code

TmTool Tool = new TmTool(); // tool object
unsigned char ToolArray[0]; // data of the data
carrier

void DecodeToolData()
{
…
int EdgeCount = readBCD( ToolArray, 71, 1 );
if( EdgeCount > 4 )
{
Error_Code = 0xFF;
return;
}
…
}

Tool management
660 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

See also
Function call of the PLC interface (Page 668)
Error codes (Page 692)
PLC interface in the DB19 (Page 668)

9.2.7.6 Description of the MCIS-C script language

In this section, relevant MCIS-C specific subjects are discussed, which must be taken into
account when configuring logical functions.

Keywords
Keywords are reserved for the compiler as language elements and must not be used as names
of classes, variables and functions.

bool do if true
break double int unsigned
case else long void
char false return while
continue float string
default for switch

Data types
The following table lists all of the data types for the MCIS-C script language, which can be used
for programming:

Data type Variable Range of values

bool 1 bit true / false
char 8 bits -128 - 127
int 16 bits -32768 - 32767
long 32 bits -2147483648 - 2147483647
unsigned char 8 bits 0 - 255
unsigned int 16 bits 0 - 65535
unsigned long 32 bits 0 - 4294967295
float 32 bits 1.175494351e-38 - 3.402823466e+38F
double 64 bits 2.2250738585072014e-308 - 1.7976931348623158e+308
string up to 64KB Dynamic up to 64KB

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 661
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

Operators and special characters

The MCIS-C script language supports the following operators and special characters:

! * -= <= [ }
!= *= / = ] ~
% + /= == ^
%= ++ : > ^=
& += ; >= {
&& , < >> |
&= - << >>= |=
( -- <<= ? ||
) .

Special features of the "string" data type

Contrary to the programming language C, MCIS-C has a dynamic string-data type. The data
type is comparable with the string data type of the Java or C# programming languages. A
"string" type variable can include a character string of up to 64KB. Strings can be linked using
the ± operator. Assigning binary data types to a string variable means that the binary value is
converted into a string.
Example:

string s;

s = "Hello"; // s= "Hello"
s = s + " "; // s= "Hello "
s += "World!"; // s= "Hello World!"

9.2.7.7 Help functions in conversion specifications

Standard C++ type conversions

In addition to the script language commands for creating conversion specifications, there are
other standard C ++ commands available. The following commands convert, for example,
strings into numerical data types (Double):
● atof
● _atof_I
● _wtof
● _wtof_I
A detailed description of these commands can be found, for example, in the Microsoft
Knowledge Base.

Tool management
662 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

9.2.8 Examples

Overview
The following source code examples are based on the MCIS-C script language to create
conversion examples for Tool Ident Connection. These examples are included on the data
carrier of the Wkonvert wizard.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 663
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

SampleWkonvert.mcc

_VersionInfo := "SampleWkonvert.mcc: Example for WKONWERT logic";

TmTool Tool = new TmTool(); // tool object

unsigned char ToolArray[0]; // data of the data carrier

void DecodeToolData()
{

Tool.TC_TP1 = readWORD( ToolArray, 0 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01

Tool.TC_TP2 = readASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10); // tool name byte 02-11
Tool.TC_TP3 = ToolArray[12]; // size to the left byte 12
Tool.TC_TP4 = ToolArray[13]; // size to the right byte 13
Tool.TC_TP5 = ToolArray[14]; // size to the top byte 14
Tool.TC_TP6 = ToolArray[15]; // size to the bottom byte 15
Tool.TC_TP7 = readINT(ToolArray, 16 ); // location type byte 16-17

int EdgeCount = readINT(ToolArray, 18 ); // number of cutting edges byte 18-19

int EdgeIndex; // running variable for cutting edges

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

{
int EdgeOffset = 20 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset at the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

int EdgeNo = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0 ); // cutting edge number byte 20-21
Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2 ); // tool type byte 22-23
Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4 ); // cutting edge position byte 24-27
Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8 ); // geometry length 1 byte 28-31
Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12 ); // geometry length 2 byte 32-35
Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16 ); // geometry length 3 byte 36-39
Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20 ); // geometry radius byte 40-43
}
}

void EncodeToolData()
{
writeWORD ( ToolArray, 0, Tool.TC_TP1 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01
writeASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10, Tool.TC_TP2 ); // tool name byte 02-11

ToolArray[12] = Tool.TC_TP3; // size to the left byte 12

ToolArray[13] = Tool.TC_TP4; // size to the right byte 13
ToolArray[14] = Tool.TC_TP5; // size to the top byte 14
ToolArray[15] = Tool.TC_TP6; // size to the bottom byte 15

writeINT ( ToolArray, 16, Tool.TC_TP7 ); // location type byte 16-17

int EdgeCount = Tool.EDGE_NUM;

writeINT ( ToolArray, 18, EdgeCount ); // number of cutting edges byte 18-19

int EdgeIndex;

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

Tool management
664 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

{
int EdgeNo = Tool.EDGE_NO[EdgeIndex]; // cutting edge number
int EdgeOffset = 20 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset to the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0, EdgeNo ); // cutting edge number byte 20-21

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2, Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] ); // tool type byte 22-23
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4, Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] ); // cutting edge position byte 24-27
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8, Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 1 byte 28-31
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12, Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 2 byte 32-35
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16, Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 3 byte 36-39
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20, Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] ); // geometry radius byte 40-43
}
}

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 665
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

SampleToolSize.mcc

_VersionInfo := "SampleToolSize.mcc: Example for WKONWERT logic";

TmTool Tool = new TmTool(); // tool object

unsigned char ToolArray[0]; // data of the data carrier

void DecodeToolData()
{

Tool.TC_TP1 = readWORD( ToolArray, 0 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01

Tool.TC_TP2 = readASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10); // tool name byte 02-11
Tool.TC_TP7 = readINT(ToolArray, 12 ); // location type byte 12-13

int EdgeCount = readINT(ToolArray, 14 ); // number of cutting edges byte 14-15

int EdgeIndex; // running variable for cutting edges

int ToolSize = 1; // tool size in half locations

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

{
int EdgeOffset = 16 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset that the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

int EdgeNo = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0 ); // cutting edge number byte16-17

Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2 ); // tool type byte 18-19

Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4 ); // cutting edge position byte 20-23
Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8 ); // geometry length 1 byte 24-27
Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12 ); // geometry length 2 byte 28-31
Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16 ); // geometry length 3 byte 32-35
Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20 ); // geometry radius byte 36-39

double to radius = Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo];

if ( to radius > 30.0 && ToolSize < 4 ) ToolSize = 4;

else if ( tool radius >= 20.0 && ToolSize < 3 ) ToolSize = 3;
else if ( tool radius >= 10.0 && ToolSize < 2 ) ToolSize = 2;
}

Tool.TC_TP3 = ToolSize; // size to the left

Tool.TC_TP4 = ToolSize; // size to the right
Tool.TC_TP5 = ToolSize; // size to the top
Tool.TC_TP6 = ToolSize; // size to the bottom
}

void EncodeToolData()
{
writeWORD ( ToolArray, 0, Tool.TC_TP1 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01
writeASCII ( ToolArray, 2, 10, Tool.TC_TP2 ); // tool name byte 02-11
writeINT ( ToolArray, 12, Tool.TC_TP7 ); // location type Byte 12-13

int EdgeCount = Tool.EDGE_NUM;

writeINT ( ToolArray, 14, EdgeCount ); // number of cutting edges Byte 14-15

Tool management
666 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.2 Configuration

int EdgeIndex;

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

{
int EdgeNo = Tool.EDGE_NO[EdgeIndex] ; // cutting edge number
int EdgeOffset = 16 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset at the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0, EdgeNo ); // cutting edge number byte 16-17

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2, Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] ); // tool type byte 18-19
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4, Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] ); // cutting edge position byte 20-23
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8, Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 1 byte 24-27
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12, Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 2 byte 28-31
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16, Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 3 byte 32-35
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20, Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] ); // geometry radius byte 36-39
}
}

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 667
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

9.3.1 Structure
Tool Ident Connection has a parameterizable PLC interface with which defined services/
functions can be triggered or executed. Data for the services/functions is saved in a defined
data area of the PLC interface; the area for the return value of the services/functions is also
provided there.

'%





7UDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV

5HWXUQSDUDPHWHUV

3/&LQWHUIDFH

3DUDPHWHUVRSHUDWLQJDUHD





Figure 9-16 Structure of the PLC interface

9.3.2 Function call of the PLC interface

The interface occupies six bytes in the PLC, has a fixed structure and the following assignment
(the table refers to the default parameterization of the interface in DB19 with offset 250):

Table 9-7 Structure of the PLC interface

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DB19.DBX250.0 Request BOOL True,False Requesting the task
DB19.DBB251 K_Code BYTE 0…127 Command code
DB19.DBX252.0 Done BOOL True,False Task successfully completed
DB19.DBX252.1 Error BOOL True,False Task ended with error
DB19.DBX252.2 Active BOOL True,False Task is being processed
DB19.DBX252.7 Ident_Ready BOOL True,False Status for power up
DB19.DBB253 K_CodeError BYTE 0 ... 127 K-Code in case of an error
DB19.DBW254 Error_Code INT -3276 ... 32767 Error code

Tool management
668 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Note
The PLC interface can only function and accept tasks after the status bit Ident_Ready has been
set to "1".
If the request bit has already been set, it is reset and error code 0xFFFF is written into the
Error_Code word in the PLC.

9.3.3 Assignment of the PLC for transfer parameters

Various transfer parameters are required, depending on the command code, to execute certain
functions. The required transfer parameters are also stored in the PLC; this data area occupies
56 bytes and has the following fixed structure (the table refers to the default parameterization
of the interface in DB19 with offset 140):

Table 9-8 Assignment of the PLC for transfer parameters

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DB19.DBW140 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DB19.DBW142 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DB19.DBB144 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DB19.DBW178 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DB19.DBW180 Magazine location INT -1…32000 Magazine location number of the tool
DB19.DBW182 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Magazine location type of the tool
DB19.DBB184 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DB19.DBB185 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half locations
DB19.DBB186 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DB19.DBB187 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half locations
DB19.DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 Channel number of the tool
DB19.DBB189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading loca‐
tion
DB19.DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DB19.DBB192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Code carrier number
DB19.DBB193 NCU_Index BYTE 1…127 Name of the NCU
DB19.DBW194 FileIndex INT 0…32000 File index (Import/Export)
DB19.DBX196.0 Active Enable BOOL True, False Hide status bit "Tool active"
DB19.DBX196.1 Override BOOL True, False Overwrite file
DB19.DBX196.2 LoadTool BOOL True, False Load tool after being created
DB19.DBX196.3 DeleteTool BOOL True, False Delete tool after unloading

Note
The "NCU_Index" parameter is currently not evaluated by Tool Ident Connection.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 669
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

9.3.4 Assignment of the PLC for return values

To execute certain functions, various return parameters are supplied, depending on the
command code. They are also stored in the PLC; this data area occupies 50 bytes and has the
following fixed structure (the table refers to the default parameterization of the interface in DB19
with offset 198):

Table 9-9 Assignment of the PLC for return parameters

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBW 198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW 200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB 202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 236 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DBW 238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW 240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Magazine location type of the tool
DBB 242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB 243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half locations
DBB 244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB 245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half locations
DBW 246 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number of the tool
DBW 248 Magazine Place INT 0…32000 Magazine location number of the tool

9.3.5 Executing functions

9.3.5.1 General sequence when executing functions

The following chronological sequence is defined (positive execution) for executing functions for
the PLC interface:
PLC interface user:
1. Transfer parameters required are written in the PLC (DB19 – offset 140)
2. Command code is defined (DB19.DBB251)
3. Request bit is set (DB19.DBX.250.0)
Tool Ident Connection:
1. Reads out the command code (DB19.DBB251)
2. Checks whether the value read-out is valid
3. Sets the active bit (DB19.DBB251.2)
4. Request is executed
5. Writes the value "0" to the error code word (DB19.DBW253)
6. Sets the done bit (DB19.DBX251.0)

Tool management
670 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

PLC interface user:

1. Evaluates done bit or error bit and possibly the error code
2. Resets the request bit (DB19.DBX.250.0)
Tool Ident Connection:
1. Resets the done bit and error bit back to "0" (DB19.DBX251.0, DB19.DBX251.1)
2. Deletes the error code word (DB19.DBW253)

9.3.5.2 Pulse diagram for positive execution of a function

The following pulse diagram clearly shows the chronological sequence when executing a
function via the PLC interface:

5HTXHVW%LW '%'%; 

$FWLYH '%'%;


'RQH '%'%; 

 
(UURU '%'%;

① Function initiated by the user

● Before initiating, the user writes the required transfer parameters and the K code into the PLC
● When triggered, Tool Ident Connection evaluates the K code
② Feedback from Tool Ident Connection
● The active bit is set if the K code is valid
③ Processing period
● Tool Ident Connection reads the required transfer parameters and performs the desired operation / PI service
● Depending on the function, return parameters are written to the PLC
④ Feedback, processing
● After successful execution of the function, Tool Ident Connection writes "0" to the error code word and sets the
done bit
● Resets the active bit
⑤ User responds to the falling edge of the active bit
● The user evaluates the done bit or error bit and possibly the error code word, reads possible return parameters
and resets the request bit
⑥ Tool Ident Connection reacts to the falling edge of the request bit
● Sets the done bit and error bit to "0"
● Error code word is set to "0"

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 671
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Figure 9-17 Pulse diagram for positive execution

9.3.5.3 Pulse diagram when negative execution of a function

The following pulse diagram clearly shows the chronological sequence when executing a
function via the PLC interface with negative output:

5HTXHVW%LW '%'%; 

$FWLYH '%'%;


 
'RQH '%'%;


(UURU '%'%;

① Function initiated by the user

● Before initiating, the user writes the required transfer parameters and the K code into the PLC
● When triggered, Tool Ident Connection evaluates the K code
② Feedback from Tool Ident Connection
● The active bit is set if the K code is valid
③ Processing period
● Tool Ident Connection reads the required transfer parameters and performs the desired operation / PI service
● Depending on the function, return parameters are written to the PLC
④ Feedback, processing
● After unsuccessful execution of the function, Tool Ident Connection writes the returned error code to the error
code word and sets the error bit
● Resets the active bit
⑤ User responds to the falling edge of the active bit
● The user evaluates the error bit and error code word and resets the request bit
⑥ Tool Ident Connection reacts to the falling edge of the request bit
● Sets the done bit and error bit to "0"
● Error code word is set to "0"
Figure 9-18 Pulse diagram for negative execution

9.3.5.4 Pulse diagram "Ident_Ready" signal

The "Ident_Ready" signal serves as the ready signal of Tool Ident Connection. The PLC user
sets the parameter "Ident_Ready" (DB19.DBX252.7) in the PLC interface to the value "1".

Tool management
672 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Tool Ident Connection reacts to the rising edge of the "Ident_Ready" signal and resets the
significance of the parameter to the value "0".

,GHQWB5HDG\  

① Function initiated by the user

● The PLC user sets the PLC data "Ident_Ready" to a value of "1"
② Feedback from Tool Ident Connection
● Tool Ident Connection reacts to the rising edge and resets the significance of the PLC data
to "0".
Figure 9-19 Pulse diagram of the status signal Ident_Ready

9.3.6 PLC interface for the Parameter operating area

9.3.6.1 Assignment of the PLC interface for the Parameter area

ParamTM PLC interface

The "ParamTM" PLC interface is used in conjunction with the following functions:
● New tool from code carrier
● Unload tool/delete from code carrier

Configuration
In addition, this interface must be configured in the "tdidentcfg.xml" file in the
"ParamTMInterface" section.

Table 9-10 Structure of the "ParamTM-Interface" PLC interface

PLC address Identifier Type Range of values Significance

DB19.DBX256.0 Request BOOL True, False Requests the task
DB19.DBB257 Reserve BYTE
DB19.DBX258.0 Done BOOL True, False Task successfully completed
DB19.DBX258.1 Error BOOL True, False Task ended with error
DB19.DBX258.2 Active BOOL True, False Task is being processed
DB19.DBX258.3 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX258.4 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX258.5 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX258.6 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX252.7 Reserve BOOL

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 673
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

PLC address Identifier Type Range of values Significance

DB19.DBX259.0 Read BOOL True, False Read tool data from CT
DB19.DBX259.1 Write BOOL True, False Write tool data to CT
DB19.DBX259.2 Cancel BOOL True, False Operator has canceled read/write op‐
eration
DB19.DBX259.3 Write BOOL True, False Selective writing of CT data
DB19.DBX259.4 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX259.5 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX259.6 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX259.7 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBW260 Error_Code INT 32768 … 32767 PLC error code
Transfer parameters
DB19.DBW262 PMagazine INT 32768 … 32767 Magazine number
DB19.DBW264 PPlace INT 32768 … 32767 Magazine location number
DB19.DBW266 PTnumber INT 32768 … 32767 T number

9.3.6.2 Load the tool

"New tool from code carrier" function

The "New tool from code carrier" function is executed on the SINUMERIK Operate in the
"Parameter" area. As a consequence, the "Read" function is executed in the PLC interface.
The following pulse diagrams are shown in the following:
Sequence (Page 675)
Sequence when canceled by the PLC (Page 676)

Tool management
674 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

9.3.6.3 Sequence

Sequence
The following pulse diagram clearly shows an error-free sequence of the
"New tool from code carrier" function.

6,180(5,.2SHUDWH

5HDG '%'%;

5HTXHVW '%'%; 

3/&
$FWLYH '%'%; 


'RQH '%'%;

(UURU '%'%;

 

① Function initiated by the user

With the "New tool from code carrier" function, in the PLC interface, the signals are set to Read = 1" and Request = 1.
② Feedback from the PLC
The PLC then sets the signal to Active = 1".
③ Machining time
The PLC reads the tool data from the code carrier, and saves it in the configured data block.
④ Feedback, machining time
● If all of the tool data is in the data block, the PLC sets the following signals "Active = 0" and "Done = 1".
● SINUMERIK Operate then resets the "Read" and "Request" signals.
● The PLC also resets the "Done" signal.
⑤ Machining time
The HMI reads the tool data from the data block and the tool is loaded.
Figure 9-20 Pulse diagram for positive execution

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 675
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

9.3.6.4 Sequence when canceled by the PLC

Sequence
The following pulse diagram shows an incorrect sequence of the
"New tool from code carrier" function.

6,180(5,.2SHUDWH
5HDG '%'%;

5HTXHVW '%'%; 

3/&
$FWLYH '%'%; 

'RQH '%'%;

(UURU '%'%;

① Function initiated by the user

In the PLC interface, the signals "Read = 1" and "Request = 1" are set.
② Feedback from the PLC
The PLC sets the signal "Active = 1".
③ Machining time
The PLC reads the tool data from the code carrier, and saves it in the configured data block.
④ Feedback, machining time
If the code carrier was not read, then the following happens in the PLC interface:
● The error cause is written into the "Error_Code" element.
● The PLC sets the signals "Active = 0" and "Error = 1".
● SINUMERIK Operate then resets the "Read" and "Request" signals.
● The PLC also resets the "Error" and the "Error_Code" signal.

Figure 9-21 Pulse diagram when canceled by the PLC

Tool management
676 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

9.3.6.5 Unloading a tool

"Unload tool / delete on code carrier" function

The "Unload tool / delete on code carrier" function is executed on SINUMERIK Operate in the
"Parameter" area. As a consequence, the "Read" function is executed in the PLC interface, and
then the "Write" function is executed.
This sequence ensures that the content on the code carrier, which is not written to with the
current tool data as result of the conversion rule, is retained.
Please refer to the following sections for the sequence of the "Read" function.
The sequence of the "Write" function corresponds to the "Read" sequence, with the difference
that the "DB19.DBX259.1" signal is used.
Sequence (Page 675)
Sequence when canceled by the PLC (Page 676)

9.3.6.6 Diagnostics

Settings
The following settings must be made in order to set the diagnostics of the described sequences.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 677
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Procedure
1. Select the "Startup" operating area.
2. Press the "SINUMERIK Operate", "Diagnostics", and "Extended" softkeys.
3. Make the following settings:

Figure 9-22 Activate trace

Figure 9-23 Activate trace

Note
Diagnostics are only available when the manufacturer's password has been entered.
Within a conversion rule, using the print() command, the user can generate an output in the
diagnostics, e.g.: print( "Radius", Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo], " EdgeNo:=", EdgeNo, "\r\n");

Tool management
678 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

9.3.6.7 Restrictions
The following restrictions apply:
● The "Active (DB19.DBX258.2)" signal is optional. SINUMERIK Operate does not evaluate
the signal.
● The "Cancel (DB19.DBX259.2)" signal is not used. A function cannot be canceled by
SINUMERIK Operate.
● SINUMERIK Operate does not use the following transfer parameters:
– PMagazine
– PPlace
– PTnumber
● Several units can be configured in the "tdiidentcfg.xml" file. However, in the data block only
the "Unit = 1" is used.

9.3.6.8 Error messages

Error messages that are transferred in the PLC are displayed on the user interface in the form
of an error code, for example, Error_Code (DB19.DBW260)
Further, the following error codes can occur:

Error code Description

-602 The user initiates a new function, while an active function has still not been completed.
-603 The PLC interface is not ready.
The "Done" signal is present, and prevents a new function from being initiated.
-604 Invalid reader head number

9.3.7 PLC data types

The used PLC data types and how they are interpreted by "Tool Ident Connection" is described
in the following table.

Table 9-11 PLC data used

Data type Range of values Note

BOOL TRUE, FALSE Is used if individual bits should be set in the PLC.
(TRUE: Bit = 1, FALSE: Bit = 0)
BYTE -128...127 PLC byte

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 679
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Data type Range of values Note

INT -32768...32767 PLC word, whose first byte contains the high byte and the
second byte contains the low byte.
Example: PLC word 140 comprises the two PLC bytes 140
and 141 together and should be allocated the value 120.
Byte 140: 0 byte 141: 120
String xx character Strings occupy xx+2 bytes in the PLC as the first two bytes
contain the maximum length and the actual length of the
string. The actual string therefore does not start until the 3rd
byte. The individual characters are saved in the correspond‐
ing bytes as ASCII code.
PLC strings do not have to end with a zero because the actual
length is always specified in the 2nd byte of the string.
Example:
"Hello" should be saved in a string, which starts at PLC byte
144 and may only have a maximum length of 32 characters.
This results in the following assignment of the bytes:
Byte 144 = 32 max. length of the string
Byte 145 = 5 actual length of the string
Byte 146 = 72 H
Byte 147 = 97 a
Byte 148 = 108 l
Byte 149 = 108 l
Byte 150 = 111 o

Tool management
680 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

9.4 Command codes

9.4.1 Functional scope of the PLC interface (K codes)

Functional scope of the PLC interface

The PLC interface has a permanently defined range of functions. Every defined function/
service is assigned a unique command code (K code). Depending on the command to be
executed, before setting the request bit, various transfer parameters must be written to the
PLC.
The following functions can be executed via Tool Ident Connection using the PLC interface:

K code Description
0 Loading from the code carrier (K code = 0) (Page 682)
1 Unload to code carrier (K code = 1) (Page 683)
4 Loading of production host computer (K code = 4) (Page 684)
5 Unload to the production host computer (K code = 5) (Page 685)
7 Loading a tool from the tool list (K code = 7) (Page 686)
8 Unloading a tool in the tool list (K code = 8) (Page 687)
9 Empty location search (K code = 9) (Page 688)
10 Delete tool in NC (K code = 10) (Page 690)
14 Updating the code carrier (K code = 14) (Page 690)
15 Reading data from the code carrier (K code = 15) (Page 691)

The individual functions of Tool Ident Connection are described in detail in the following
sections. The optional and the mandatory transfer parameters are listed for each service.
There is also an overview of the return parameters supplied by Tool Ident Connection after the
successful execution of a command code.

9.4.2 Parameter description

Transfer parameters for the services

The terms of the transfer parameters are described in the following table:

Parameter Description
ActiveEnable Transfer of the tool status bit from the database in the NC (TRUE) / hiding the
status bit during the transfer (FALSE)
Channel Channel number
DeleteTool Delete tool after unloading (TRUE) / do not delete (FALSE)
Duplo Duplo number

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 681
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

Parameter Description
FileIndex Index of the file from which data is to be imported or to which data is to be
exported. The file name which is extended by the index can be specified in the
INI file.
Ident Tool name
LoadingPlace Number of the loading/unloading location in the loading magazine
LoadTool Load tool after reading (TRUE) / do not load (FALSE)
Magazines Magazine number
MagazinePlace Magazine location number of the tool
MagazinePlaceType Magazine location type
NCU_Index NCU index (parameter is presently not used)
Override Overwrite export file (TRUE) / extend (FALSE)
Subtype Subtype or type
TNumber T number
ToolSize_Down Tool size downwards in half locations
ToolSize_Left Tool size to the left in half locations
ToolSize_Right Tool size to the right in half locations
ToolSize_Upper Tool size upwards in half locations
ToolState Tool status
Unit Code carrier unit (read/write head) from which data is read or to which data
should be written. Depending on the unit: 1...4.

9.4.3 Loading from the code carrier (K code = 0)

Reads tool data from the code carrier; whose unit is specified with "Unit". The tool is then
created if it is not already available in the NC. It is also loaded if "LoadTool" has been set. The
number of the loading location (place) in the loading magazine from "LoadingPlace" is used
during this process, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. However, if "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, the value
from "LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as loading location (place) number.
The channel number (channel) and the number of the read head (unit) must be specified.
If the parameter "Magazine" is assigned with ">0" and "MagazinePlace" with "0", then an
attempt is made to load the tool into an appropriate empty location in the specified magazine.
If the values for "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" are > 0, then an attempt is made to load the
tool to this magazine location.
In all other cases, the tool is loaded into the magazine in which an empty location is found.

Table 9-12 PLC parameters for "loading from code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW180 Magazine location INT -1…32000 Magazine location number of the tool
DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBB189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading loca‐
tion

Tool management
682 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBB192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Code carrier number
DBX196.2 LoadTool BOOL True, False Load tool after being created
Return parameters
DBW198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW236 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DBW238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Magazine location type of the tool
DBB242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half locations
DBB244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half locations
DBW246 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number of the tool
DBW248 Magazine place INT 0…32000 Magazine location number of the tool

9.4.4 Unload to code carrier (K code = 1)

Unloads the tool that was parameterized using the transfer parameters. The channel number
and the number of the write head must be specified. If the "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace"
parameters are > 0, then an attempt is made to unload the tool, which is at this location.
Otherwise the tool is selected with the parameters "Duplo" and "Ident" or via the parameter
"TNumber".
In this case, the number of the unloading location in the loading magazine from "LoadingPlace"
is used, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. If "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, then the value from the
"LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as unload location number (loading point).
If "DeleteTool" is set, then the tool is also deleted from the NC after the unload operation.

Table 9-13 PLC parameters for "unload to the code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBW180 MagazinePlace INT 0…32000 Magazine location
DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBB189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading loca‐
tion
DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBB192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Code carrier number
DBX196.3 DeleteTool BOOL TRUE, FALSE Delete tool after unloading

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 683
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Return parameters
None

0DJD]LQH!
12
0DJD]LQH3ODFH!

12 71XPEHU! <(6

<(6
'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Figure 9-24 Flowchart to identify tools

9.4.5 Loading of production host computer (K code = 4)

Requests the data for the tool designated "Ident" from the production host computer and
creates it in the NC if it does not already exist. The NCU_Index, Channel, Ident, Duplo and
Magazine parameters must be assigned.

Note
This service can only be used in conjunction with Create MyInterface.

If the magazine number is specified as "0", the tool is loaded to the magazine that has an empty
location if LoadTool is set. The number of the loading location (place) in the loading magazine
from "LoadingPlace" is used during this process if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. However, if
LoadingPlace = 0 is set, the value of the LoadPlaceNo keyword in file TMS.INI is used as the
loading place number.

Tool management
684 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

If the value for "MagazinePlace" is > 0, an attempt is made to load the tool to this magazine
place.

PLC data Identifier Type Value range Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 1...32000 Duplo number
DBW144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW180 Magazine-Place INT 1...32000 Magazine location
number
DBW188 Channel BYTE 1...127 Channel number
DBB189 Loading-Place BYTE 1...127 Loading location num‐
ber
DBW190 Magazines INT 0...32000 Magazine number
DBB193 NCU_Index BYTE 0...127 Index of the NCU
DBX196.2 LoadTool BOOL TRUE, FALSE Load tool after creat‐
ing?
Return parameters
DBW198 Subtype INT 1...32000 Subtype
DBW200 Duplo INT 1...32000 Duplo number
DBB202 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW236 TNumber INT 0...32000 T number
DBW238 ToolState INT 0...32000 Status of tool
DBW240 Magazine-Place Type INT 0...32000 Magazine location type
DBB242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1...127 Tool size upwards in
half locations
DBB243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1...127 Tool size downwards
in half locations
DBB244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1...127 Tool size to the left in
half locations
DBB245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1...127 Tool size to the right in
half locations
DBW246 Magazines INT 0...32000 Magazine number
DBW248 Magazine-Place INT 0...32000 Magazine location
number

9.4.6 Unload to the production host computer (K code = 5)

Unloads the tool identified by "Ident" from the NC and transfers the data to the production host
computer. The NCU_Index, Channel, Ident, Duplo and Magazine parameters must be
assigned.

Note
This service can only be used in conjunction with Create MyInterface.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 685
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

If the magazine number is specified as "0", the tool is unloaded from any magazine and then
deleted, if DeleteTool is set.
If the value for "MagazinePlace" is > 0, an attempt is made to unload the tool from this magazine
place. In this case, the number of the unloading location in the loading magazine from
"loadingPlace" is used if "loadingPlace" is > 0. However, if "loadingPlace" = 0 is set, the value
of the "UnloadPlaceNo" keyword in file "TMS.INI" is used as the unloading location number.

PLC data Identifier Type Value range Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 1...32000 Duplo number
DBB144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW180 Magazine-Place INT 0...32000 Magazine location
number
DBB188 Channel BYTE 1...127 Channel number
DBB189 Loading-Place BYTE 1...127 Unloading location
number
DBW190 Magazines INT 0...32000 Magazine number
DBB193 NCU_Index BYTE 0...127 Index of the NCU
DBX196.3 DeleteTool BOOL TRUE, FALSE Delete tool after un‐
loading?
Return parameters
None

9.4.7 Loading a tool from the tool list (K code = 7)

Loading a tool from the tool list which was parameterized using the transfer parameters. The
tool can be selected with the parameters "Duplo" and "Ident" or via the parameter "TNumber".
To load, the number of the loading location (place) in the loading magazine from
"LoadingPlace" is used, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. However, if "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, the
value from "LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as loading location (place)
number. The channel number must be specified for the operation.
If the parameter "Magazine" is assigned with ">0" and "MagazinePlace" with "0", then an
attempt is made to load the tool into an appropriate empty location in the specified magazine.
If the values for "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" are > 0, then an attempt is made to load the
tool to this magazine location. In all other cases, the tool is loaded into the magazine in which
an empty location is found.

Table 9-14 PLC parameters for "Load tool - tool list"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 1…32000 Duplo number
DBB144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBW180 MagazinePlace INT 0…32000 Magazine location number
DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area

Tool management
686 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBB189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading loca‐
tion
DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
Return parameters
None

12 71XPEHU!

'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Figure 9-25 Flowchart to identify tools

9.4.8 Unloading a tool in the tool list (K code = 8)

Unloads the tool in the tool list that was parameterized using the transfer parameters. The
channel number must be specified for this operation.
If the "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" parameters are > 0, then an attempt is made to unload
the tool, which is at this location. Otherwise the tool is selected with the parameters "Duplo" and
"Ident" or via the parameter "TNumber".
In this case, the number of the unloading location in the loading magazine from "LoadingPlace"
is used, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. If "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, then the value from the
"LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as unload location number (loading point).
If "DeleteTool" is set, then the tool is also deleted from the NC after the unload operation.

Table 9-15 PLC parameters for "Unload tool - tool list"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 687
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBB189 LoadingPlace BYTE 0…127 Number of loading point
DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBW180 MagazinPlace INT 0...32000 Magazine location
DBX196.3 DeleteTool BOOL True, False Delete tool after unloading
Return parameters
None

0DJD]LQH!
12
0DJD]LQH3ODFH!

12 71XPEHU! <(6

<(6
'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Figure 9-26 Flowchart to identify tools

9.4.9 Empty location search (K code = 9)

For the tool specified with "TNumber" or with "Ident" and "Duplo", an empty location search or
target location check is performed. For "TNumber" = 0 an empty location is searched for the tool
specified using "Ident" and "Duplo"; for "TNumber" > 0 using the T number.
A valid value must be set for the "Channel" parameter in order to execute the function. Using
the specified loading point, an attempt is made to find an empty location in the magazines with
which the loading point is connected. To do this, the number of the loading point in the loading
magazine from "LoadingPlace" is used. However, if "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, the value from
"LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as loading location (place) number.
If "Magazine" =0, a search is made for an empty location in any magazine; if a magazine
number is specified, then a search is made in the corresponding magazine. If, in addition, a

Tool management
688 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

magazine location >0 is specified, then the function performs a target location check. This is
required for tools that are coded for specific locations.

Table 9-16 PLC parameters for "empty location search"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBB189 LoadingPlace BYTE 0…127 Number of loading point
DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBW180 MagazinPlace INT 0...32000 Magazine location
Return parameters
DBW198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW236 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DBW238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Magazine location type of the tool
DBB242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half locations
DBB244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half locations
DBW246 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number of the tool
DBW248 MagazinePlace INT 0…32000 Magazine location number of the tool

12 71XPEHU!

'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Figure 9-27 Flowchart to identify tools

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 689
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

9.4.10 Delete tool in NC (K code = 10)

Deletes the tool specified with "TNumber" or with "Ident" and "Duplo" in the NC if this is not
loaded.
If a T number > "0" is specified, an attempt is made to delete the tool with this number in the NC.
If "TNumber = 0" is set, an attempt is made to delete the tool with the specified "Ident" and
"Duplo" in the NC.

Table 9-17 PLC parameters for "Delete tool in the NC"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
Return parameters
None

12 71XPEHU!

'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Figure 9-28 Flowchart to identify tools

9.4.11 Updating the code carrier (K code = 14)

Updates the code carrier with the data of the tool, which was parameterized using the transfer
parameters.
The channel number and the number of the read head must be specified.

Tool management
690 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

If the "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" parameters are > 0, then an attempt is made to write
the data of the tool, which is at this location, to the code carrier. Otherwise the tool is selected
with the parameters "Duplo" and "Ident" or "TNumber".

Table 9-18 PLC parameters for "Update code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBW180 MagazinPlace INT 0...32000 Magazine location
DBB192 Unit BYTE 1...127 Number of the code carrier
Return parameters
None

0DJD]LQH!
12
0DJD]LQH3ODFH!

12 71XPEHU! <(6

<(6
'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Figure 9-29 Flowchart to identify tools

9.4.12 Reading data from the code carrier (K code = 15)

Reading tool data from the code carrier and writing return parameters into the PLC. The code
carrier is identified using "Unit".
It is then possible, for example, to read these two data from a code on which only the "Duplo"
number and the tool identifier are saved. The "Loading/unloading from the tool list" service can
then be called, for example.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 691
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

This means that also favorably-priced "read only" code chips can be used.

Table 9-19 PLC parameters for "Reading data from the code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBB192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Number of the read head
Return parameters
DBW198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Magazine location type of the tool
DBB242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half locations
DBB244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half locations

9.4.13 Error codes

The error codes that are saved in the PLC byte "K_CodeError" or PLC word "Error_Code" of the
PLC interface are in the hexadecimal format and refer to the location where the task execution
was canceled with an error.
If the error code is to be shown in the decimal notation, then this must be converted into the
hexadecimal format in order to determine the error cause from tables A-1 to A-8.
The error code in "K_CodeError" identifies the command code, where the error occurred.

Table 9-20 Command codes of the task in the case of an error

K_code error Service

00 No error
01 Load from the code carrier
02 Unload to the code carrier
03
04
05 Load from production host computer
06 Unload to the production host computer
07
08 Load tool
09 Unload tool
0A Empty location search
0B Delete tool in NC
0C
0D

Tool management
692 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

K_code error Service

0E
0F Update code carrier
10 Read data from code carrier
11
... Reserved

The error codes "Error_Code" comprise a high byte and low byte, which have a different
significance. The high byte (XX) identifies the error type group, in which the error occurred. The
low byte (YY) specifies the cause of the error, which is responsible for canceling the task.

Format of the Error_Code

;; <<

The contents of XX = 00 and YY = 00 mean that no error has occurred.

XX = 01: General group error

Table 9-21
Low byte (YY) of the function error code

Cause of the error

01 Error when reading parameter from DB19
02 Error when calling the internal service
03 Timeout when executing the service
04 Still no data determined
05 Error when executing the internal service
... Reserved
Transfer parameter error
10 Subtype
11 Duplo
12 Ident
13 TNumber
14 MagazinePlace
15 MagazinePlaceType
16 ToolSize_Upper
17 ToolSize_Down
18 ToolSize_Left
19 ToolSize_Right
1A Channel
1B Magazines
1C Unit
1D NCU_Index
1E FileIndex

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 693
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

Cause of the error

1F ActiveEnable
20 Override
21 LoadTool
22 DeleteTool
23 Length of Ident
... Reserved

XX = 02: Code carrier error group

Table 9-22
Low byte (YY) of the function error code

Cause of the error

01 No code carrier available
02 Error when reading code carrier
03 Reading interrupted as code carrier was removed
04 Error when writing to code carrier
05 Writing interrupted as the code carrier was removed
0C Command string unknown
0D Number of bytes illegal
0E Non-BCD characters found in the received write data
17 Invalid data
18 Device not available
19 Timeout
1A Hardware faults
1B Invalid head number
1C Read head not connected
1E Device is read only
1F General read error
20 General write error
28 Unknown error
68 Data carrier not recognized (reading/writing, first page)
69 Data carrier not recognized (reading/writing, following page)
6D Data carrier not recognized (writing, first page)
6E Data carrier not recognized (reading before writing)
6F Data carrier not recognized (writing the last page)
73 Non-BCD characters found in the received write data
74 Read BCD format: Non-BCD characters found on the data carrier
8D Data carrier access error
8E Data in the data carrier incomplete

Tool management
694 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

XX = 05: NC error group

Table 9-23
Low byte (YY) of NC error code

Cause of the error

00 Connection not established to the requested NCU
05 Reading the NC configuration unsuccessful
0A An invalid channel number was specified in the task
3C An invalid magazine number was specified in the task
3E An invalid magazine location number was specified in the task
3F An invalid cutting edge OEM monitoring parameter number was specified in the task
41 The MMC semaphore for the search/create tool is already assigned
46 The tool specified with ident and duplo was not found in the NC
47 The tool specified with the T number was not found in the NC
48 No tool was found in the specified magazine
49 No tool is loaded at the specified magazine location
4A The tool specified with ident and duplo was not able to be uniquely determined in the NC
4B Number of found tools was not able to be read in the NC
50 The tool specified with ident and duplo was not created in the NC
55 The specified tool is already loaded into the magazine
5A The tool cutting edge with the specified number has not been created in the NC
5B The tool cutting edge with the specified number has not been deleted in the NC
5C The specified cutting edge does not exist in the NC
5D The specified tool cutting edge number is not valid.
5E The specified cutting edge is already in the NC
5F Tool state was not able to be read in the NC
64 The MMC semaphore for the empty location search is already assigned
69 An empty magazine location was not able to be found when loading into the NC
6E Checking the specified magazine location to load negatively acknowledged
6F Tool deletion was exited with error
70 The empty location search was exited with error
71 Creating a tool was exited with error
72 Operation to relocate tools unsuccessful
73 The MMC semaphore for tool unloading/unloading already assigned
74 Alarm extension was exited with error
78 The magazine is disabled or has not been enabled for loading
7D Tool loading was exited with error
82 The magazine number of the tool was not able to be read in the NC
87 The specified tool is not loaded into the NC
8C The specified tool is loaded in a different magazine
8E The specified tool is loaded at a different magazine location
91 Magazine state not able to be read in the NC
96 Magazine not in the loading position or not enabled for unloading
9B The tool unload operation was exited with error

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 695
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

Cause of the error

A0 The tool was not able to be deleted in the NC
A5 The tool is active in the NC! The tool was not able to be deleted in the NC
D2 The specified tool is loaded into the NC! The tool was not deleted in the DB

XX = 0B: Tool conversion error group

Table 9-24
Low byte (YY) of the function error code

Cause of the error

01 1401 Error when opening the MCX file
02 1402 Error when reading the MCX file
03 1403 Error when reading the MCX file
04 1404 Error when reading the MCX file
05 1405 Error when reading the MCX file
06 1406 Error when reading the MCX file
07 1410 Error when reading the MCX file
08 1628 System error
09 1801 System error
0A 1803 System error
0B 1804 System error
0C 1805 Incorrect version of the MCX file
0D 1806 MCX file contains functions that are not supported
0E 1807 System error
0F 1808 Error when reading the MCX file
10 1809 System error
11 1810 System error
12 2401 System error
13 2402 System error
14 2501 System error
15 2502 System error
16 2503 System error
17 2701 System error
18 2702 System error
19 2703 Index error when accessing the array
1A 2801 System error ConvertFunctions::CheckAccess()
1B 2802 System error
1C 2803 Error in conjunction with the conversion functions readXXX()/writeXXX(). Basis type of
the array parameter must be 'unsigned char'.
1D 2804 Error in the function writeBCD(). The data length (val) exceeds the size of the target
range.
1E 2805 Error in the function PlaceTypeFromString(). ToolTypeText used is not defined in the
ToolSpec.xml.

Tool management
696 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.4 Command codes

Cause of the error

1F 2806 Error in the function PlaceTypeToString(). ToolTypeCode used is not defined in the
ToolSpec.xml.
20 2807 Error in the function writeREAL(). Data loss due to rounding.
21 2901 System error
22 2903 System error
23 2904 System error
24 2905 System error
25 2908 System error
26 2909 System error
27 2910 System error
28 2912 System error
29 2913 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2A 2914 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2B 2915 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2C 2917 Error when accessing SlTmService. rData().val()
2D 2918 Error when accessing SlTmService. rData().val()
2E 2919 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2F 2921 Error when accessing SlTmService. val()
30 2922 System error
31 2923 Error when accessing SlTmService. val()
32 2924 System error
33 7001 System error
34 7002 The conversion rule must contain an object with the 'Tool' name.
35 7003 The 'Tool' object must be the 'TmTool' type.
36 7004 The conversion rule must contain an object with the 'ToolArray' name.
37 7005 The 'ToolArray' object must be an array.
38 7006 The 'ToolArray' object must be an array, basis type 'unsigned char'.
39 7007 The 'DecodeToolData' function was not found in the conversion rule.
3A 7008 The object 'DecodeToolData' must be a function.
3B 7009 The 'DecodeToolData' function was not found in the conversion rule.
3C 7010 The object 'EncodeToolData' must be a function.
3D 7011 System error
3E 7012 System error
3F 7013 System error
40 7014 System error
41 7015 Error when reading ToolSpec.xml'
42 7016 Error when interpreting ToolSpec.xml
43 7017 The ToolSpec.xml. The document element should have the name: "ToolSpecConver‐
sion".
44 7018 Format error in the ToolSpec.xml. Attribute code="" or text="" are not included.
45 System error when converting data
80 - FF User-defined error from conversion rule (see Error handling (Page 660))

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 697
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.5 Examples

9.5 Examples

9.5.1 Loading the code carrier via PLC interface

In this case, the data of the imaginary tool "WZ_Test13" is read from a code carrier, the tool is
then created in the NC and loaded. The tool should be loaded into Magazine "1" of the standard
NCU in channel "1". The operation should be administered via loading location "1" of the
loading magazine.
The parameters required for this service are listed in the following table.
Before executing the service, the PLC writes a "0" into the command code byte (K_code) of the
PLC interface in data block DB19. This service is then started by setting the "Request" bit. If the
"Active" bit is reset and the "Done" bit was set, then the PLC can evaluate the "Error" byte. The
"Request" bit must then be reset again.

Table 9-25 Transfer parameters for "Loading from code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Value

DBW 180 MagazinePlace 0
DBB 188 Channel 1
DBB 189 LoadingPlace 1
DBW 190 Magazines 1
DBB 192 Unit 1
DBB 193 NCU_Index 0
DBX 196.2 LoadTool TRUE

Table 9-26 Return parameters from Tool Ident Connection for "Loading from the code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Value

DBW 198 Subtype 120
DBW 200 Duplo 1
DBB 202 Ident Tool_Test13
DBW 236 TNumber 289
DBW 238 ToolState 14
DBW 240 MagazinePlaceType 1
DBB 242 ToolSize_Upper 1
DBB 243 ToolSize_Down 1
DBB 244 ToolSize_Left 1
DBB 245 ToolSize_Right 1
DBW 246 Magazines 1
DBW 248 MagazinePlace 1

The sequence of the individual operations can be clearly seen in the following flowchart:

Tool management
698 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.5 Examples

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

+RWOLQNB'DWD&KDQJH

+RWOLQN
5LVLQJIDOOLQJ
HGJH

5LVLQJ
UHTXHVWELW! '%

5HDGRXWWKH.FRGHIURPWKH3/& '%'%;
UHTXHVWELW

9DOLG :ULWH '%'%%

.FRGH" 12 .FRGH
HUURUFRGH

'%'%;
<(6 6HWHUURUELW HUURUELW
6HWDFWLYHELW
'%'%:
HUURUFRGH
5HDG
WUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUVIURPWKH3/&
'%'%;
DFWLYHELW
3DUDPHWHUV
12 :ULWH
YDOLG"
HUURUFRGH
'%
<(6 2IIVHW
)DOOLQJ 7UDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
UHTXHVWELW! 5HDGRXWFRGHFDUULHUGDWD 6HWHUURUELW

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQPHUJLQJ

7ULJJHUWKHUHTXLUHG3,VHUYLFHV
YLDWKH6,7P6HUYLFHV '%

)HHGEDFN :ULWH
6,7P6HUYLFHV 12 HUURUFRGH
SRVLWLYH"

'%
6HWHUURUELW 2IIVHW
<(6 5HWXUQSDUDPHWHUV

'%'%;
:ULWHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV GRQHELW

6HWGRQHELW
5HVHW
GRQHELW HUURUELW
6HWHUURUFRGH 

Figure 9-30 Flowchart: Loading from the code carrier via the PLC interface

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 699
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.5 Examples

3/&XVHU 3/&LQWHUIDFH 7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

:ULWHVWUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
'%
2IIVHW
:ULWHV.FRGH! FUHDWH ORDG
'%'%
6HWVUHTXHVWELWWR
+RWOLQNWRUHTXHVWELW
'%'%;

5HDGVRXW.FRGH
'%'%%
&KHFNYDOLG.FRGH

6HWDFWLYHELWWR
'%'%%

'% 5HDGVRXWWUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
2IIVHW

&KHFNWUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV

5HDGRXWGDWDFDUULHUVWUHDP
'%

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQRIWKHVWUHDP

&UHDWHWKHWRROLQWKHWRROOLVWYLD
6,7P6HUYLFHV
5HWXUQRIWKH7QXPEHUV

:ULWHWKHWRROGDWDWRWKH1&

(PSW\ORFDWLRQVHDUFKWDUJHWORFDWLRQ
FKHFNYLD67,P6HUYLFHV
5HWXUQYDOXHPDJD]LQHDQGORFDWLRQ

/RDGWKHWRROYLD6,7P6HUYLFHV

:ULWHWKHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV
'%
2IIVHW
:ULWHHUURUFRGHZRUG
'%'%:
6HWGRQHELWWR
'%'%;
5HVHWDFWLYHELWWR
'%'%;

5HDGRXWGRQHELW
'%'%;
5HDGRXWHUURUFRGHZRUG
'%'%:

5HDGRXWWKHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV '%
2IIVHW
5HVHWVUHTXHVWELWWR +RWOLQNWRUHTXHVWELW
'%'%;

'%'%; 5HVHWHUURUELWDQGHUURUELWWR
'%'%;
:ULWHWRHUURUFRGHZRUG
'%'%:

Tool management
700 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.5 Examples

9.5.2 Unloading to the code carrier via PLC interface

The tool loaded in the previous example should be unloaded and the actual data written to the
code carrier. After unloading, the tool is deleted in NC. The procedure should be managed via
unload location "2" of the loading magazine.
The transfer parameters required for this are listed in the following table. The service does not
return any parameters, and as a result, there are no new values in the return parameters of the
PLC interface.
Before executing the service, command code "1" must be written to the corresponding PLC
byte (K code). The start of the service and the further procedure are equivalent to the procedure
in Loading the code carrier via PLC interface (Page 698).

Table 9-27 Transfer parameters for "Unloading from code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Value

DBW 142 Duplo 1
DBB 144 Ident Tool_Test13
DBW 180 MagazinePlace 1
DBB 188 Channel 1
DBB 189 LoadingPlace 2
DBW 190 Magazines 1
DBB 192 Unit 1
DBB 193 NCU_Index 0
DBX 196.3 DeleteTool TRUE

The sequence of the individual operations can be clearly seen in the following flowchart:

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 701
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
9.5 Examples

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

+RWOLQNB'DWD&KDQJH

+RWOLQN
5LVLQJIDOOLQJ
HGJH

5LVLQJ
UHTXHVWELW! '%

5HDGRXWWKH.FRGHIURPWKH3/& '%'%;
UHTXHVWELW

9DOLG '%'%%
12 :ULWHHUURUFRGH .FRGH
.FRGH"

'%'%;
<(6 6HWHUURUELW HUURUELW

6HWDFWLYHELW
'%'%:
HUURUFRGH
5HDG
WUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUVIURPWKH3/&

'%'%;
DFWLYHELW
3DUDPHWHUV
YDOLG" 12 :ULWHHUURUFRGH
'%
<(6 2IIVHW
)DOOLQJ 7UDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
UHTXHVWELW! 6HWHUURUELW
7ULJJHUWKHUHTXLUHG3,VHUYLFHV
YLDWKH6,7P6HUYLFHV

5HDGRXWWRROGDWDIURP1& 5HDGRXWFRGHFDUULHUGDWD

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQ '%

:ULWHWKHGDWD

:ULWHHUURUFRGH

)HHGEDFN 12
6,7P6HUYLFHV
SRVLWLYH" '%
6HWHUURUELW 2IIVHW
5HWXUQSDUDPHWHUV

<(6
'%'%;
:ULWHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV GRQHELW

6HWGRQHELW
5HVHW
GRQHELW HUURUELW
6HWHUURUFRGH 

Figure 9-31 Flowchart: Unloading from the code carrier via the PLC interface

Tool management
702 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Alarms 10
10.1 Overview

Alarm No. Brief description

6401 Tool change not possible, no free location in the magazine.
6402 Tool change not possible, magazine number does not exist.
6403 Tool change not possible, specified magazine location does not exist.
6404 Tool change not possible because the tool is not available or cannot be used.
6405 Command has invalid PLC acknowledgement parameter.
6406 PLC acknowledgement missing.
6407 Tool is to be set down at a location that does not meet the requirements for loading.
6410 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a prewarning limit.
6411 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a prewarning limit.
6412 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a monitoring limit.
6413 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a monitoring limit.
6421 No free location for tool in the magazine.
6422 Tool motion is not possible because the magazine has not been defined.
6423 Tool motion is not possible because no location in the magazine.
6424 Tool motion is not possible because tool not available or cannot be used.
6425 Tool motion is not possible because tool cannot be placed at the specified location in the magazine
6430 Workpiece counter: Overflow in table of monitored cutting edges.
6431 Function not permitted because TOOLMAN / TOOLMAN monitoring not activated.
6432 Function cannot be executed because there is no tool in the spindle.
6433 System variable not available for active tool management.
6436 The command cannot be programmed
6438 Inconsistent data change not permitted
6441 Writing of $P_USEKT not allowed.
6450 Tool change not possible because magazine-location number is not valid.
6451 No buffer magazine defined.
6452 Tool holder number / spindle number not defined.
6453 No relationship defined between tool holder number / spindle number and buffer magazine.
6454 Neither spindle nor buffer location has a distance relationship.
6460 Command can only be programmed for tools
6462 Command can only be programmed for magazines
6464 Command cannot be programmed for the actual multitool distance coding
6924 Tool data changed for program test.
17001 No more memory for tool magazine data.
17020 Illegal array index 1
17050 Impermissible value
17160 No tool selected.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 703
Alarms
10.1 Overview

Alarm No. Brief description

17180 Illegal D number.
17181 D no. not known.
17182 Illegal additive offset number.
17188 The D number specified in the channel TO unit is not unique.
17189 D number is not unique.
17191 Unknown tool identifier.
17192 No further replacement tools possible.
17193 The active tool is no longer in the tool holder
17194 No suitable tool found.
17200 Tool cannot be deleted
17202 Magazine data cannot be deleted.
17212 Manual tool must be changed.
17214 Remove manual tool from tool holder.
17215 Remove manual tool from buffer
17216 Manual tools must be changed.
17218 Tool cannot become a manual tool
17220 Tool does not exist.
17224 It is not possible on this system to select tool offsets for tools of the specified tool type.
17230 Duplo no. already assigned.
17240 Invalid tool definition.
17241 Illegal adapter definition
17242 Manual tool cannot be set, as the function is not active
17250 Invalid magazine definition.
17255 Magazine location hierarchies have been deleted
17260 Invalid magazine location definition.
17262 Incorrect tool-adapter assignment
20150 PLC terminates the interrupted command.
20160 PLC can terminate only incorrectly aborted commands.
22066 Tool motion not possible because specified tool is not in magazine.
22067 Tool change not possible because no tool ready for use in the tool group.
22068 No tool ready for use in the tool group.
22069 No tool ready for use in the tool group.
22070 Change tool into magazine. Repeat data backup.
22071 Tool has the status "active" in an "inactive" wear group.
400601 Incorrect configuration of loading points
400602 Incorrect spindle configuration
400603 Incorrect turret configuration
400604 Set change with M06 in machine data.
410141 Number of loading points too high
410142 Number of tool holders too high
410143 Number of turrets too high
410151 Magazine data for tool management missing in PLC.

Tool management
704 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.1 Overview

With machine dates MD11410 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK and MD11415

SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2 it can be defined bit by bit which alarms should be
suppressed.

Bit Alarm number with description

2 16924: Program test can change the tool/magazine data.
4 17189: D number of tools defined on magazine/location %3 and %4 defined.
5 22071: TO unit, tool, duplo no. are active but are not in the active wear group.
7 22070: Load a tool into the magazine. Repeat data back-up.
8 6411, 6413: Channel - tool has reached prewarning or monitoring limit.
9 6410, 6412: TO unit - tool has reached prewarning or monitoring limit.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 705
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6401 Channel %1 tool change not possible: No free location for tool %2 in magazine %4.
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine number
The tool cannot be moved into the selected tool magazine. There is no appropriate location available for
this tool. A suitable location is largely determined by the status. This must state that the location is free, not
disabled, not reserved, not occupied by an oversize tool. It is also important that the type of tool is com‐
patible with the type of possibly free magazine locations (e.g. if all magazine locations are type 'B' and if
these are all free, and if the tool is type 'A', then this tool cannot be set in this magazine).
Response Alarm display.
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether the magazine simply no longer has any space to accept an additional tool due to operator
actions.
Check whether a location type hierarchy is defined and whether it, for example, does not allow insertion of
a type "A" tool in a free location with type "B".
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Alarm No.
6402 Channel %1 tool change not possible because magazine no. %2 not available
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine number
The desired tool change is not possible. The magazine with the specified number is not available.
Response Alarm display.
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether the magazine is connected to the required spindle via a distance relationship.
The user PLC program may have supplied incorrect data to the NC.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Alarm No.
6403 Channel %1 tool change not possible because magazine no. %2 in magazine %3 not available
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine number, %3 = magazine location number
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified magazine location is not available in the specified
magazine.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm

Tool management
706 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
The user PLC program may have supplied incorrect data to the NC.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Alarm No.
6404 Channel %1 tool change not possible. Tool %2 not available or cannot be used
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier)
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool does not exist or cannot be used.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the part program is written correctly
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined
Check whether there is a replacement tool which can be used for the specified tool
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 707
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6405 Channel %1 command %2 has an invalid PLC acknowledgement parameter %3 identification %4
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = command no. %3 = PLC acknowledgement parameter, %4 = error identification
The specified command has been answered by the PLC with an invalid acknowledgement in the actual
combination. The following assignments are defined for command number:
1 Move tool, load or unload magazine
2 Prepare tool change
3 Execute tool change
4 Prepare tool change and execute with T command
5 Prepare tool change and execute with M command
7 Terminate interrupted tool command
8 Check tool motion with reservation
9 Check tool motion
0 Transport acknowledgement
Parameters 2 and 3 specify the PLC command and the status number of the acknowledgement.
Example:
Parameter 4 of the alarm message is =10. It is not defined for asynchronous tool motion, to reserve a buffer
location. In the example, the NC ignores the parameter. Additional possible reasons for the alarm: The tool
change defined by the command cannot be executed. The magazine location specified in the invalid
parameter does not exist in the magazine.
The error code (%4) defines the alarm in more detail:
0 Not defined
1 Status now not permitted, or non-defined status received from PLC
2 Source and/or target magazine no. / location no. not known
3 Not defined
4 Target magazine no. and/or target location no. for tool move command not final destination
5 Not defined
6 Source and/or target magazine no. / location no. not known for tool change
7 PLC command with inconsistent data: Either magazine addresses inconsistent in VDI or NC command
not the same as the PLC acknowledgement, or both
8 PLC command with inconsistent data: When lifting a tool, asynchronous tool to be rejected was unloaded.
NC cannot execute a new selection.
9 PLC command with inconsistent data: The command acknowledgements want to move a tool to a loca‐
tion where another tool is already located.
10 The asynchronous tool motion with reservation is only defined for movement from a magazine to a buffer.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Notify authorized personnel / service
Faulty PLC communication: Correct the PLC program
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Tool management
708 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6406 Channel %1 PLC acknowledgement for command %2 is missing
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = command no.
There is still no acknowledgement from the PLC for the tool change. The NC cannot continue processing
until it receives this acknowledgement for the specified command number. Possible command no. values
are described under alarm 6405
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Notify authorized personnel / service
Faulty PLC communication: Correct the PLC program.
It is possible to release NC from the wait condition with the PLC command 7. This aborts the waiting
command.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Alarm No.
6407 Channel %1 The tool %2 cannot be placed in magazine %3 on location %4. Invalid magazine definition!
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = magazine number, %4 = magazine location number
A tool change task or a verification task was issued to place the tool in a location whose definition does not
satisfy the prerequisites for filling.
The following causes for the error are possible:
Location is disabled or not free
Tool type does not match the location type
Tool possibly too large, adjacent locations are not free
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined (especially the location type)
Check whether the tool data is correctly defined (especially the location type)
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 709
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6410 TO unit %1 tool %2 with duplo no. %3 has reached tool prewarning limit with D=%4
Explanation %1 = TO unit, %2 = tool identifier (name), %3 = duplo number, %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached its
prewarning limit. If possible, specify the D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value 0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9). The
duplo no. specification
has no further significance if replacement tools are not being used. The alarm is triggered via the OPI
interface (HMI, PLC). The channel context is not defined. The TO unit is therefore specified (see
$MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT).
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6411 Channel %1 Tool %2 Prewarning limit reached with D=%4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = tool identifier (Name), %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached its
prewarning limit. If possible, specify the D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value 0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9).
The duplo no. specification has no additional significance if replacement tools are not being used.
Limit is detected in the context of the channel.
The alarm is caused while the NC program is being executed.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6412 TO unit %1 tool %2 with duplo no.%3 has reached tool monitoring limit with D=%4
Explanation %1 = TO unit, %2 = tool identifier (name), %3 = duplo number, %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached its
monitoring limit. If possible, specify the D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value 0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9).
The duplo no. specification has no additional significance if replacement tools are not being used. The
alarm is triggered via the OPI interface (HMI, PLC).
The channel context is not defined. The TO unit is therefore specified (see $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT).
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set

Tool management
710 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6413 Channel %1 Tool %2 has reached its monitoring limit with D=%4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = tool identifier (Name), %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached its
monitoring limit. If possible, specify the
D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value 0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9).
The duplo no. specification has no additional significance if replacement tools are not being used. The
alarm originates during NC program execution.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6421 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible. There is no empty location for tool %2 duplo no. %3 in magazine %4
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = duplo number, %4 = magazine number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
The tool cannot be moved into the specified tool magazine. There is no appropriate location available for
this tool.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is defined correctly (e.g. the magazine must not be disabled).
Check whether the tool data is correctly defined (e.g. the tool location type must match the permitted
location types in the magazine).
Check whether the magazine simply no longer has any space to accept an additional tool due to operator
actions.
Check whether a location type hierarchy is defined and whether it, for example, does not allow insertion of
a type "A" tool in a free location with type "B".
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 711
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6422 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible because magazine no. %2 not available!
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
The magazine with the specified number is not available.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
If the PLC issued the command for motion: check whether the PLC program is correct.
If the HMI issued the command for motion: check whether the HMI command was assigned correct pa‐
rameters.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6423 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible because magazine location no. %2 in magazine %3 not available!
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine location number, %3 = magazine number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
The specified magazine location is not contained in the specified magazine.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6424 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible. Tool %2 not available or cannot be used
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier)
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible. The state of the
specified tool does not permit the tool to be moved. The specified tool is not defined or is not permitted for
the command.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the tool state "being changed" is set. If yes, then initially the corresponding tool change
command from the PLC must be terminated. The tool should then be able to be moved.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether the move command has been correctly parameterized.
Check whether the tool is already loaded (if the alarm occurs when the tool is loaded).
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool management
712 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6425 Channel %1 The tool %2 cannot be placed in magazine %3 on location %4. Invalid magazine definition
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = magazine number, %4 = magazine location number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
Using a movement task, the tool is to be placed down at a location whose definition does not fulfill the
preconditions for loading a tool. The following causes for the error are possible:
Location is disabled or not free
Tool type does not match the location type.
Tool possibly too large, adjacent locations are not free.
If loading/unloading
- the loading/unloading location must be of type "loading point".
If loading/unloading
- is the relevant magazine linked with the loading/unloading location?
See $TC_MDP1, $TC_MDP2
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether the magazine simply no longer has any space to accept an additional tool due to operator
actions.
Check whether a location hierarchy is defined and whether it, for example, does not allow insertion of a type
"A" tool in a free location with type "B".
Check whether the relevant magazine is linked with the loading/unloading location or has a defined dis‐
tance.
Check whether the loading/unloading location is of type "loading point".
See also $TC_MPP1
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6430 Workpiece counter: Overflow in table of monitored cutting edges
Explanation No more cutting edges can be entered in the workpiece counter table. As many cutting edges can be noted
for the workpiece counter as a whole as the total number of cutting edges that are possible in the NC.
This means that if every cutting edge of each tool is precisely used for one workpiece, then the limit is
reached.
If several workpieces are machined simultaneously at several tool holders / spindles, then across all
workpieces, 18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA cutting edges can be noted for the workpiece
counter.
If the alarm is present, then this means that the cutting edges that will now be used are no longer monitored
from a workpiece number perspective; and more precisely, until the table is emptied again, e.g. using the
NC command SETPIECE or the corresponding task from the HMI, PLC (PI service).
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 713
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Have you forgotten to decrement the workpiece counter?
Then program SETPIECE in the part program or correctly insert the corresponding command in the PLC
program.
If the part program or the PLC program is correct, then more memory should be set for tool cutting edges
using machine data $MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA (this is only possible for those with the ap‐
propriate access authorization).
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6431 Function not allowed. Tool management/tool management monitoring not activated
Explanation Occurs when a data management function is called which is not available because tool management is
deactivated or tool monitoring is not available. For example, the NC commands GETT, SETPIECE, GET‐
SELT, NEWT, DELT.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department.
Verify how the NC control shall be configured. Is tool management or tool monitoring required, but not
activated?
Is a part program used that has been designed for NC control with tool management / tool monitoring?
Either run a part program on the suitable NC control or modify the part program.
Activate tool management / tool monitoring by setting the corresponding machine data. See
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Check whether the required option is set accordingly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6432 Function cannot be executed. There is no tool on the spindle
Explanation An attempt was made to perform an operation that requires a tool to be located on the spindle. This can be
the workpiece count monitoring function, for example.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Select another function, select another tool holder / spindle or locate a tool on the tool holder / spindle.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool management
714 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6433 Channel %1 block %2 variable %3 not available with tool management
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, Label, %3 = source symbol
The system variable specified in %3 is not available with active tool management.
The function GETSELT should be used with $P_TOOLP.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Change program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the delete key.
gram

Alarm No.
6436 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 cannot be programmed. Function %4 is not activated.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, %3 = command, %4 = function
The command cannot be programmed due to a missing function enable or activation.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6438 Channel %1 block %2 inconsistent data modification is not permitted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number
For example, in a defined multitool, after creating the multitool location it is not permissible to change the
distance coding $TC_MTP_KD.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6441 Writing of $P_USEKT not allowed.
Explanation An attempt was made to write the value from $P_USEKT. This is not possible because the programming
T="location number" with automatic setting of $P_USEKT is active.

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 715
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable in this channel
Remedy Verify how the NC control should be configured (bit 16 and bit 22 in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK).
Is a part program used that is configured for an NC control without T="location number" with automatic
setting of $P_USEKT? It is not possible to start this program on the NC control with T="location number"
with automatic setting of $P_USEKT.
Either run a part program on the suitable NC control or modify the part program.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6442 Channel %1 Function cannot be executed. No tool at the required magazine/location %2
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 magazine/location
It is probable that the PLC logic is incorrect. Tool change with reject tool is configured. Preparation com‐
mand present. Selected tool is unloaded from its location (e.g. from the PLC). PLC acknowledges prepa‐
ration command with "repeat tool selection" (e.g. status=7). NC does not find the tool in the magazine
location specified in the PLC command.
Or: Illegal operator intervention in a tool selection that is presently being executed (unloading the tool to be
selected) has taken place. This is the reason that the PLC acknowledgement was unsuccessful.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy PLC programmers must observe the following:
Ensure that the tool is not removed from the specified magazine location (e.g. PLC program incorrect).
Do not withdraw (=unload) the programmed tool change before a command has been finally acknowledged.
However, it is possible to change the location of the tool to be loaded. The alarm supplements alarm 6405,
if it contains the ID 8.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6450 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. Invalid magazine location number %2 in the buffer magazine
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 magazine location number
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified magazine location is a tool holder / spindle or is
empty.
Using the NC command TCI, only the buffer numbers may be programmed which are not tool holders /
spindles; i.e. the location number of a gripper is permitted.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MPP1) is correctly defined.
Check whether the programmed command that was the cause has been correctly parameterized - e.g. TCI.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Tool management
716 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6451 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. No buffer magazine defined.
Explanation %1 Channel number
The desired tool change is not possible. No buffer has been defined.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6452 Channel %1 block %2 tool change not possible. The tool holder no. / spindle no. = %3 is not defined.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 tool holder no. / spindle no.
The desired tool change is not possible. The tool holder number / spindle number is not defined.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the tool holder no. / spindle no. and magazine data is correctly defined. (See also the
system variables $TC_MPP1, $TC_MPP5 of the buffer magazine).
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6453 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. No assignment between tool holder / spindle no. = %2 and buffer
location %3
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 tool holder no. / spindle no. %3 buffer location
The desired tool change is not possible. No relationship has been defined between the tool holder / spindle
number and the buffer location LocNo.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MLSR) is correctly defined.
Check whether the program command causing the error (e.g. TCI) is programmed correctly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6454 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. There is no distance relationship available.
Explanation %1 Channel number
The desired tool change is not possible. Neither spindle nor buffer location has a distance relationship.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 717
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MDP2) is correctly defined.
Check whether the program command causing the error (e.g. TCI) is programmed correctly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6455 Channel %1 block %2 tool change not possible. Magazine location no. %3 not available in magazine %4
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 magazine location number %4 magazine
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified magazine location is not available in the specified
magazine.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MAP6 and $TC_MAP7 of the buffer magazine) is correctly de‐
fined.
Check whether the program command causing the error (e.g. TCI) is programmed correctly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6460 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 can only be programmed for tools. %4 means no tool
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 command parameter
The specified command can only be programmed for tools. The command parameter is not a T number or
not a tool name. If a multitool was programmed: The command cannot be programmed for multitools.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6462 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 can only be programmed for magazines. %4 means no tool
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 command parameter
The specified command can only be programmed for magazines. The command parameter is not a mag‐
azine number or not a magazine name. If a multitool was programmed: The command cannot be pro‐
grammed for multitools.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Tool management
718 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6464 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 cannot be programmed for the actual multitool distance coding %4.
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 command parameter
$TC_MTPPL can only be programmed, if $TC_MTP_KD has the value 2.
$TC_MTPPA can only be programmed, if $TC_MTP_KD has the value 3.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
6924 Channel %1 caution: Program test changes tool management data
Explanation %1 = channel number
Tool data is changed during program testing. You cannot automatically correct the tool data again on
termination of program test.
This alarm prompts you to create a backup of the tool data which must be loaded again when you have
finished testing the program.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department.
Save tool data on HMI and load again after "ProgtestOff".
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 719
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17001 Channel %1 block %2 no more memory for tool / magazine data
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
The number of following tool/magazine data variables in the NC is specified by machine data:
- number of tools + number of grinding data blocks: MD18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL
- number of cutting edges: MD18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Tools, grinding data blocks, cutting edges can be used independently of the tool management.
The memory for the following data is only available if the corresponding bit has been set in MD18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
- Number of monitoring data blocks: MD18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
- Number of magazines: MD18084 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
- Number of magazine locations: MD18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
The following variable is determined by the software configuration: Number of magazine distance data
blocks: P2 permits 32 such distance data blocks.
Definition:
- "Grinding data blocks": Grinding data can be defined for a tool of type 400 to 499. A data block of this type
occupies as much additional memory as that provided for a cutting edge.
- "Monitoring data blocks": Each cutting edge of a tool can be supplemented with monitoring data.
If the alarm occurs when writing from one of the parameters $TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2/$TC_MLSR, check
whether the machine data MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC / MD18076
$MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE has been set correctly.
MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC defines the number of different Index1 statements
that may be made for an Index2 value.
MD18076 $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE defines the number of different buffer locations that
may be named in Index2.
If a multitool is to be created - or its locations - then the alarm indicates that either more multitools are to be
created than is permitted in MD18083 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL - or if the alarm is generated when
creating the multitool locations, then the alarm indicates that more multitool locations are to be created than
permitted via MD18085 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department
Change machine data
Change NC program, i.e. reduce the number of rejected variables
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Tool management
720 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17020 Channel %1 block %2 illegal array index 1
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number
General:
A read or write access was programmed to a field variable with invalid 1st field index. The valid field indices
must be within the defined field size and the absolute limits (0 - 32 766).
[DPA]: PROFIBUS I/O:
[DPA]: When reading/writing data, an invalid slot / I/O range index was used.
[DPA]: Cause:
[DPA]: 1.: Slot / I/O range index >= max. available number of slots / I/O ranges.
[DPA]: 2.: Slot / I/O range index references a slot / I/O range that is not configured.
[DPA]: 3.: Slot / I/O range index references a slot / I/O range that is not released for system variables.
[DPA]: The following specifically applies: If the alarm occurs when writing from one of the parameters
$TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2/$TC_MLSR,
[DPA]: then it must be checked as to whether MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC has
been set correctly
[DPA]: MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC defines the number of different Index1
statements that may be made for an Index2 value
If an MT number is programmed, then the value can collide with an already defined T number or an already
defined magazine number.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the data relating to the field elements for the access instruction corresponding to the defined size.
When using an SPL in Safety Integrated, additional restrictions can apply to the field index via the option
data.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 721
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17050 Channel %1 block %2 impermissible value
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number
A value has been programmed that exceeds the value range or a limit value of a variable or a machine data
item.
For example
- In a string variable (e.g. GUD or LUD), a string needs to be written that exceeds the agreed string length
in the variable definition.
- If an illegal value is to be written to a tool or magazine management variable (e.g. illegal cutting edge
number in $TC_DPCE[x,y] or illegal magazine location number in $TC_MDP2[x,y]).
- An illegal value is to be written to $P_USEKT or $A_DPB_OUT[x,y].
- An illegal value is to be written to a machine data (e.g. MD10010 $MN_AS‐
SIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP[0] = 0).
- When accessing an individual frame element, a frame component other than TRANS, ROT, SCALE or
MIRROR was addressed or the CSCALE function was assigned a negative scale factor.
A multitool number has been programmed that collides with a previously defined T number or a previously
defined magazine number.
When programming DELMLOWNER: The command cannot be programmed with the T number of a tool
that is part of a multitool.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Only address frame components with the keywords intended for the purpose; program a scale factor within
the limits 0.000 01 to 999.999 99.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Alarm No.
17160 Channel %1 block %2 no tool selected
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt has been made to access the current tool offset data via the system variables:
$P_AD[n]: Contents of parameter (n: 1 - 25)
$P_TOOL: Active D number (cutting edge number)
$P_TOOLL[n]: Active tool length (n: 1 - 3)
$P_TOOLR: Active tool radius
although no tool was previously selected.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable

Tool management
722 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Program or activate a tool offset in the NC program before using the system variables.
Example:
N100 G.. ... T5 D1 ...LF
The channel-specific machine data:
22550: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
new tool offset for M function
22560: TOOL_CHANGE_M_MODE
M function for tool change
is set to define whether activating a tool offset in the block is carried out with the T word or whether the new
offset values are only computed with the M word for the tool change.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Alarm No.
17180 Channel %1 block %2 illegal D number
Explanation %1 = channel number %2 = block number, label
In the displayed block, access is made to a D number (tool edge number) that is not defined and therefore
not available.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Check tool call in the NC part program:
Correct cutting edge number programmed? If a cutting edge number is not specified, then the D number
D1, set using machine data $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT is automatically active.
Tool parameters defined (tool type, length, …)? The dimensions of the tool cutting edge must have been
previously entered in the NC either from the operator panel or using a tool data file.
Description of the system variables $TC_DPx[t,d] as to how they are contained in a tool data file, x ...offset
parameter number P, t ... associated tool number T, d ...tool offset number D
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Alarm No.
17181 Channel %1 block %2 T no.= %3, D No.= %4 does not exist
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = T number, %4 = D number
A D number has been programmed that the NC does not recognize. As standard, the D number refers to
the given T number.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 723
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy In case of a programming error, eliminate the error with a correction block and continue the program run.
If the data record is missing, then load the NC with a data record for the specified T/D values (via HMI, with
overstore) and continue program.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17182 Channel %1 block %2 illegal additive offset number
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to access a non-defined additive offset of the current tool edge.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Access the additive offset memory with $TC_SCP, $TC_ECP, check the additive offset selection DLx or
tool selection Ty or offset selection Dz.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17188 Channel %1 D number %2 defined in tool T No. %3 and %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = D number, %3 = T number for first tool, %4 = T number for second tool
The specified D number %2 in the TO unit of channel %1 is not unique. The specified T numbers %3 and
%4 each have an offset with number %2. If tool management is active, the following also applies: The
specified T numbers belong to tool groups with different identifiers.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Ensure uniqueness of the D numbering within the TO units.
Do not use the command that caused the problem if uniqueness is not needed in the following - CHKDNO.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is for information purposes. You can suppress the alarm output by setting bit 4 in MD $MN_SUP‐
gram PRESS_ALARM_MASK.

Alarm No.
17189 Channel %1 D number %2 of tools defined on magazine/location %3 and %4
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = D number, %3 = magazine no./ magazine location no. – "/" as separator, %4 =
magazine no. / magazine location no. – "/" as separator
The specified D number %2 in the TO unit of channel %1 is not unique. The tools in the specified magazine
locations %3 and %4 each have an offset with the number %2. If tool management is active, the following
also applies: The specified T numbers belong to tool groups with different identifiers.
Response Alarm display
Set interface signals

Tool management
724 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Ensure the uniqueness of the D numbering within the TO unit, e.g. by renaming the D numbers
If the uniqueness is not required, do not use the command that caused the problem.
The alarm is for information purposes. It can be suppressed by setting bit 4 of MD 11410 SUP‐
PRESS_ALARM_MASK.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17191 Channel %1 block %2 T= %3, does not exist, program %4
Explanation A tool identifier which the NC does not recognize was programmed.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy If the program pointer is at an NC block that contains the specified T identifier:
If the program is incorrect, resolve the error with a correction block and continue the program.
If the data record is missing, then create a data record. I.e. load the data record of the tool with all defined
D numbers to the NC (via HMI, with overstore), then continue the program.
If the program pointer is at an NC block that does not contain the specified T identifier:
The error already occurred earlier in the program when programming T, the alarm is however is only output
with the change command.
If the program is incorrect, e.g. T5 is programmed instead of T55, then the actual block can be corrected
with a correction block; i.e. if only M06 is there, then the block can be corrected to become T55 M06. The
incorrect T5 line remains in the program until it is terminated by a RESET or end of program.
In complex program structures with indirect programming, it may not be possible to correct the program.
Then, it is only possible to provide help locally using an overstore block - in the example with T55.
If the data record is missing, then create a data record. I.e. load the data record for the tool with all defined
D numbers to the NC (via HMI, with overstore), program T with overstore and then continue the program.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17192 TO unit %1 invalid tool name of %2, duplo no. %3. No further replacement tools in %4 possible
Explanation %1 = TO units number, %2 = tool identifier, %3 = duplo number of the tool to be renamed, %4 = group
identifier
The tool with the specified tool identifier, duplo number cannot accept the group identifier.
Reason:
The maximum number of permitted replacement tools has already been defined.
By allocating a name for the tool, a new allocation or reallocation of the tool takes place in a tool group,
which already has the maximum permitted number of replacement tools for this machine.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 725
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Define fewer replacement tools.
Unload replacement tools that are no longer required and delete their data in the NC.
Contact the machine manufacturer and request that the maximum number should be modified.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17193 Channel %1 block %2 the active tool is no longer on tool holder no. / spindle no. %3, program %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = tool holder no., spindle no., %4 = program name
The tool on the specified tool holder / spindle on which the last tool change was performed as the master
tool holder or master spindle, has been replaced.
Example:N10 SETHTH(1)
N20 T="Tool1" ;tool change to master tool holder 1
N30 SETMTH(2)
N40 T1="Tool2" ;tool holder1 is only adjacent tool holder.
;Exchanging the tool does not result in the offset being deselected.
N50 D5 ;New offset selection. There is currently no active tool to which D can refer.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Change program:
Set the required spindle as the main spindle or the tool holder as the master tool holder.
Then reset any possible main spindle or master tool holder.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17194 Channel %1 block %2 no suitable tool found
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to access a tool which has not been defined
The specified tool does not permit any access
A tool with the required properties is not available
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Check access to tool:
Is the NC command parameterization correct?
Does the state of the tool prevent access?
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Tool management
726 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17200 Channel % 1 block % 2 tool data cannot be deleted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt has been made to delete the tool data for a tool currently being used for machining from the part
program. Tool data for tools involved in the current machining operation may not be deleted. This applies
both for the tool preselected with T or that has been changed in place of another, and also for tools for which
the constant grinding wheel peripheral speed or tool monitoring is active.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Check access to tool offset memory by means of $TC_DP1[t,d] = 0 or deselect tool.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17202 Channel %1 block %2 magazine data cannot be deleted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
You have attempted to delete magazine data that presently cannot be deleted. It is not possible to delete
a magazine that currently has the state "Tool is moving". A tool adapter currently assigned to a magazine
location cannot be deleted. A tool adapter cannot be deleted if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER has the value -1.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy If an attempt to delete a magazine is rejected
$TC_MAP1[m]=0 ; Delete magazine with m=magazine no.
$TC_MAP1[0]=0 ; Delete all magazines
$TC_MAP6[m]=0 ; Delete magazines and the tools contained in them,
make sure that the magazine does not have the "Tool is moving" state when the magazine is called.
If an attempt to delete a tool adapter is rejected
$TC_ADPTT[a]=-1 ; Delete adapter with the number a
$TC_ADPTT[0]=-1 ; Delete all adapters,
then it has to be removed from the magazine location or the magazine locations by clearing the data.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17212 Channel %1 tool management: Load manual tool %3, duplo no. %2 onto spindle / tool holder %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = duplo number, %3 = tool identifier, %4 = spindle / tool holder number
Indicates that the specified manual tool must be brought to the specified tool holder or spindle before the
program is continued. A manual tool is a tool whose data is registered in the NC, but which is not assigned
to a magazine location. As a result, it is not fully accessible for the purpose of automatic tool changes by
the NC and generally speaking, also the machine.
The specified manual tool can also be a tool in a multitool. Then, the MT should be loaded.
Response Alarm display

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 727
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Ensure that the specified tool is placed on the tool holder. The alarm is automatically canceled once the tool
change ON command has been acknowledged by the PLC.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17214 Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual tool %3 from spindle / tool holder %2.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = tool holder number %3 = tool identifier,
Indication that the specified manual tool must be removed from the specified tool holder or spindle before
the program is continued. A manual tool is a tool whose data is registered in the NC, but which is not
assigned to a magazine location. As a result, it is not fully accessible for the purpose of automatic tool
changes by the NC and generally speaking, also the machine.
The specified manual tool can also be in a multitool. Then, the MT should be removed.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Ensure that the specified tool is removed from the tool holder. The alarm is automatically canceled once the
tool change ON command has been acknowledged by the PLC. Manual tools can only be used efficiently
if appropriately supported by the PLC program.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17215 Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual tool %3 from buffer %2.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = buffer location %3 = tool identifier,
Indication that the specified manual tool must be removed from the specified buffer before the program is
continued. A manual tool is a tool whose data is registered in the NC, but which is not assigned to a
magazine location. As a result, it is not fully accessible for the purpose of automatic tool changes by the NC
and generally speaking, also the machine.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Ensure that the specified tool is removed from the tool holder. The alarm is automatically canceled once the
tool change OFF command has been acknowledged by the PLC. Manual tools can only be used efficiently
if appropriately supported by the PLC program.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17216 Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual tool from tool holder %4 and load manual tool %3, duplo
no. %2.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = duplo number, %3 = tool identifier, %4 = tool holder (spindle) number
Indicates that the specified manual tool must be loaded in the specified tool holder or spindle before the
program is continued and that the manual tool located there must be removed. A manual tool is a tool whose
data is registered in the NC, but which is not assigned to a magazine location. As a result, it is not fully
accessible for the purpose of automatic tool changes by the NC and generally speaking, also the machine.
Response Alarm display

Tool management
728 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Make sure that the manual tools are exchanged. The alarm is automatically canceled once the tool change
ON command has been acknowledged by the PLC. Manual tools can only be used efficiently if appropri‐
ately supported by the PLC program.
Program contin‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
uation required.

Alarm No.
17218 Channel %1 block %2 tool number %3 cannot become a manual tool.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, %3 = tool number
The specified tool has an owner location or there is a location in a real magazine reserved for this tool. As
a consequence it cannot become a manual tool.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Correct the NC program
By programming "DELRMRES" ensure that there is no reference to a real magazine location
Program contin‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
uation

Alarm No.
17220 Channel %1 block %2 tool does not exist
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
If an attempt is made to access a tool using a T number, the tool name or the tool name and duplo no. that
has not (yet) been defined, e.g. if tools are to be placed at magazine locations by programming $TC_MPP6
= "toolNo". This is possible only when both the magazine location and the tool specified by "toolNo" have
been defined.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program
gram

Alarm No.
17224 Channel %1 block %2 tool T/D=%3 - tool type %4 is not permitted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = contested T/D number, %4 = contested tool type
It is not possible on this system to select tool offsets for tools of the specified tool type. The multitude of tool
types can be restricted by the machine manufacturer or by the individual control models.
Only use tool types permitted for this system. Check whether an error occurred when defining the tool.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 729
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Correct NC program or tool data
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17230 Channel %1 block %2 duplo no. already assigned
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
The attempt was made to write the duplo number of a tool using a duplo number that has already been
assigned to another tool (different T number).
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17240 Channel %1 block %2 illegal tool definition
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to change tool data, which would subsequently destroy the data consistency or would
result in a contradictory definition.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17241 Channel %1 block %2 illegal adapter definition
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
Possible causes of the error:
● For a tool adapter of the type 1, parameters that belong to the adapter type 2 cannot be written.
● For a tool adapter of the type 2, parameters that belong to the adapter type 1 cannot be written.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization

Tool management
730 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy ● For a tool adapter of the type 1, only write those parameters that belong to type 1.
● For a tool adapter of the type 2, only write those parameters that belong to type 2.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17242 Channel %1 block %2 manual tool cannot be set as the function is not active
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
The manual tool function is not active. The tool cannot accept the state "manual tool" ($TC_TP8[Tool-No],
bit 15=1 or "H8000"). The "manual tool" function is activated using machine data
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 1.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17250 Channel %1 block %2 illegal magazine definition
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to change magazine data, which would subsequently destroy the data consistency
or would result in a contradictory definition.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17255 %?C(channel %1) block %2 magazine location hierarchies have been deleted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
If $TC_MAMP2, bit 15 is changed, any existing hierarchies are changed because of the change in meaning.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Redefine magazine location hierarchies
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 731
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17260 Channel %1 block %2 illegal magazine location definition
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number
An attempt was made to change magazine location data, which would subsequently destroy the data
consistency or would result in a contradictory definition.
Example:
If parameter $TC_MPP1 (= location type) is written with "spindle / tool holder location", then a conflict is
possible with the adjacent machine data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS. In this case, the remedy is
either – if the control model permits it – to increase the value of $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS, or to
correct the magazine definition.
A tool must not be in two different magazine locations simultaneously - and a tool must not be contained in
a multitool and a magazine location simultaneously.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17262 Channel %1 block % illegal tool-adapter operation
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
Meaning of the error causes:
1: Another adapter is already located on the magazine or multitool location provided.
Note: If MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1 is set, each magazine location is assigned an
adapter of type 1 from the start.
2: A tool is already located on the magazine or multitool location provided.
3: The adapter cannot be removed from the location because a tool is still on the location.
4: An attempt is made to put a non-existent adapter on a magazine or multitool location.
5: The adapter cannot be deleted because it is still assigned to a location.
21: On a location with an adapter of the new type (type 2), grinding tools (type 4xx) and turning tools (type
5xx) are not permitted.
22: A tool adapter of the old type (type 1) cannot be assigned to a multitool location yet.
23: A tool adapter of the new type (type 2) cannot be assigned to a magazine location yet.
24: If a multitool with an adapter is placed on a magazine location with an adapter, only an adapter of type
1 with the default setting can be on the magazine location.
($TC_ADPT1[n]= 0.0, $TC_ADPT2[n]= 0.0, $TC_ADPT3[n]= 0.0, $TC_ADPTT[n]= 1)
25: An adapter of type 2 can only be on a multitool location with one location for now
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization

Tool management
732 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy ● Assign a maximum of one adapter to a magazine location.
● For MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1, only write adapter data already connected to
the magazine locations.
● There must be no tool on the magazine location when assigning an adapter to a magazine location.
● There must be no tool on the magazine location when removing an adapter from a magazine location.
● Only put existing adapters on a magazine or multitool location.
● Only place permitted types of tools on a location with an adapter of the new type (type 2).
● Only assign a tool adapter of the old type (type 1) to a magazine location.
● Only assign a tool adapter of the new type (type 2) to a multitool location.
● Do not cascade adapters on a magazine location and multitool location.
● Set up a multitool with only one magazine location for an adapter of type 2.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
20150 Channel %1 tool management: PLC terminates interrupted command
Explanation %1 = channel number
Indication that the PLC has terminated an interrupted command (with alarm output) from the tool man‐
agement - "tool change".
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
20160 Channel %1 tool management: PLC can only terminate incorrectly canceled commands
Explanation %1 = channel number
Indication that the PLC wanted to cancel an active command from the tool management (tool change); or
that there is no command active to be canceled. NC rejects because the channel status is either "active"
(cancel is then not allowed), or "reset" (then there is nothing to cancel).
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 733
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
22066 Channel %1 tool management: Tool change not possible because tool %2 with duplo no. %3 is not in
magazine %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = duplo number, %4 = magazine number
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool is not contained in the specified magazine. (NC
cannot contain tools that are not assigned to a magazine. No operations (movement, change) can be
performed with these tools).
Response NC start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department.
Ensure that the specified tool is contained in the required magazine - or program a different tool, which
should be changed.
Check whether machine data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, $MC_START_MODE_MASK - and in turn the
coupled machine data $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME - match the actual definition data.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
22067 Channel %1 tool management: Tool change not possible because no tool ready for use in tool group %2
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = string (identifier)
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool group does not contain a "ready to use" re‐
placement tool which could be loaded. The tool monitoring function may have set all potentially suitable
tools to the "disabled" status.
Response NC start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC stop for alarm
Remedy At the time of the requested tool change, ensure that there is a tool that can be used in the specified tool
group.
This can be achieved, e.g. by replacing disabled tools, or by manually releasing a disabled tool.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined. Have all intended tools in the group been defined
with the specified identifier and loaded?
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Tool management
734 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
22068 Channel %1 tool management: No tool ready for use in tool group %3
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = string (identifier)
The specified tool group does not contain a "ready to use" replacement tool which could be loaded. The tool
monitoring function may have set all potentially suitable tools to the "disabled" status. The alarm can occur
in conjunction with alarm 14710 (error when generating the INIT block). In this special situation, for in‐
stance, the NC attempts to replace the disabled tool located in the spindle by an available replacement tool
(which in this particular error case is not available).
The operator must resolve this conflict, for instance by removing the tool located in the spindle using a
movement command from the spindle (e.g. with an operator action via the HMI).
Response NC start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy At the time of the requested tool change, ensure that there is a tool that can be used in the specified tool
group.
This can be achieved, for example, by replacing disabled tools, or by manually releasing a disabled tool.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined. Have all intended tools in the group been defined
with the specified identifier and loaded?
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
22069 Channel %1 block %2 tool management: No tool available in tool group %3, program %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = string (identifier), %4 = program name
The specified tool group does not contain a "ready to use" replacement tool which could be loaded. The tool
monitoring function may have set all potentially suitable tools to the "disabled" status. Parameter %4 =
program name facilitates the identification of the program containing the programming command (tool
selection) that caused the error. This can be a subprogram or cycle, etc., which can no longer be identified
from the display. If the parameter has not bee specified, then it is the currently displayed program.
Response Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy At the time of the requested tool change, ensure that there is a tool that can be used in the specified tool
group, e.g. by
replacing disabled tools, or by manually releasing a disabled tool.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined. Have all intended tools in the group been defined
with the specified identifier and loaded?
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 735
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
22070 TO unit %1 Please load tool T= %2 into magazine. Repeat data backup
Explanation %1 = TO unit, %2 = T number of the tool
Only issued if tool management is active.
A data backup of the tool/magazine data has been started. The system has detected that the buffer mag‐
azine still contains one or more tools. During backup, these tools lose the information assigning them to a
magazine and a location in the magazine. Therefore, it makes sense that all tools have been loaded the
magazine at the time the data backup is performed.
If this does not apply, when re-importing data, the magazine locations have the "reserved" status. You may
have to reset this status manually.
In the case of tools with a fixed-location coding, the loss of information about their location in the magazine
is equivalent to a general empty location search on any subsequent change back to the magazine.
Response Interface signals are set.
Alarm display.
Remedy Make sure that there are no tools stored in the buffer magazine before you start to back up data. Repeat
the data backup after removing the tools from the buffer magazine.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
22071 TO unit %1 tool %2 duplo no. %3 is active but not in the current wear group
Explanation %1 = TO units, %2 = T number of the tool, %3 = duplo number
The "Wear group" function is active. In addition, the "Set tool to active status" setting is applied if a new wear
group is activated. This setting can also be programmed with NC command SETTA or started via similar
functions on the OPI.
It has been detected that more than one tool from the tool group has the "active" status. The tool which has
the "active" status in an "inactive" wear grouping is named in the alarm.
The alarm is for information purposes. It can be suppressed by setting bit 5 of MD 11410 SUP‐
PRESS_ALARM_MASK.
Response Alarm display
Set interface signals
Remedy Before you start the machining operation, make sure that the "active" status is not set for any of the tools
in the magazine. You can do this by programming command SETTIA.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
400601 Incorrect configuration of loading points
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Power-down the control and power-up again
gram

Tool management
736 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
400602 Incorrect spindle configuration
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Power-down the control and power-up again
gram

Alarm No.
400603 Incorrect turret configuration
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Power-down the control and power-up again
gram

Alarm No.
400604 Set change with M06 in machine data
Explanation Change is possible only with M06 for the magazine type used (box-type, chain). Check for invalid settings
when using turret magazines.
Response Alarm display
Remedy In the channel-specific data 22550: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE should be set to the value 1.
Continue pro‐ Internal
gram

Alarm No.
410141 Number of loading points too high
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB 4 does not match the NC configuration
Response Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Switch control system OFF and ON again
gram

Alarm No.
410142 Number of tool holders too high
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB 4 does not match the NC configuration
Response Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Switch control system OFF and ON again
gram

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 737
Alarms
10.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
410143 Number of turrets too high
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB 4 does not match the NC configuration
Response Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Switch control system OFF and ON again
gram

Alarm No.
410151 Magazine data for tool management missing in PLC
Explanation No magazine data available in the PLC. Commissioning has not been completed although tool manage‐
ment option has been activated.
Response Alarm display
Remedy Press the "Create PLC data" softkey via SINUMERIK Operate when commissioning tool management.
Continue pro‐ Internal
gram

Tool management
738 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Appendix A
A.1 List of abbreviations

ASUB Asynchronous subroutine

OPI Operator Panel Interface
CC Compile cycle or OEM or user area
CUTOM CUTter radius cOMpensation: Tool Radius Compensation
DB Data Block in the PLC
DBB Data Block Byte in the PLC
DBW Data Block Word in the PLC
DBX Data Block Bit in the PLC
DDE Dynamic Data Exchange: Dynamic Data Exchange
DW Data Word
ENC Encoder: Actual value encoder
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory: erasable, electrically program‐
mable read-only memory
FB Function Block
FC Function Call: Function block in the PLC
GUD Global User Data: Global user data
HEX Abbreviation for hexadecimal number
HMI Human Machine Interface
MSD Main Spindle Drive
IBN Commissioning
INC Increment: Increment
INI Initializing Data: Initializing data
IPC Industrial PC
ISO code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always even
K1 ... K4 Channel 1 to channel 4
C Bus Communication bus
MD Machine Data
MDI Manual Data Input: Manual input
Machine Machine coordinate system
NCK Numerical Control Kernel
OA Open Architecture
OB Organization Block in the PLC
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer: Manufacturer whose products are marke‐
ted under a different name
OP Operator Panel: Operating equipment
PI Program Invocation: Programming Instance
PLC Programmable Logic Controller: Interface control

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 739
Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

PLC Programmable logic controller

TCA ToolChangeAbsolute
TCI ToolChangeIntermediateLocation
TO Tool Offset: Tool offset
TOA Tool Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for tool offsets
TOOLGNT ToolGroupNumber OfTools
TOOLGT TOOLGroupToolNumber
USEKT UserKindOfTools
VDI Virtual Device Interface: Virtual interface
V.24 Serial interface (definition of the exchange lines between data terminal equip‐
ment and data communication equipment)
Work Workpiece coordinate system
T Tool
TLC Tool Length Compensation
TRC Tool Radius Compensation
TO Tool offset
TMBF Tool Management Basic tool function (basic function)
TMMO Tool monitoring function or monitor
TMMG Tool magazine management
TM Tool management

Tool management
740 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Appendix
A.2 Documentation overview

A.2 Documentation overview

You will find extensive documentation on the functions of SINUMERIK 840D sl from version 4.8
SP4 at 840D sl documentation overview (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109766213).

You can display the documents or download them in PDF or HTML5 format.
The documentation is divided into the following categories:
● User: Operating
● User: Programming
● Manufacturer/Service: Configure
● Manufacturer/Service: Commissioning
● Manufacturer/Service: Functions
● Safety Integrated
● SINUMERIK Integrate / MindApp
● Information and training

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 741
Appendix
A.3 Available IPCs

A.3 Available IPCs

IPCs recommended for SINUMERIK

Panel IPC
IPC 477E 22" Win 7 6AV7241-3YA04-0FA0
IPC 477E 24" Win 7 6AV7241-5SB04-0FA0
IPC 477E 15" Win10 6AV7241-1WA07-0FA0
IPC 477E 19" Win10 6AV7241-3XB07-0FA0
IPC 477E 22" Win10 6AV7241-3YA07-0FA0
IPC 477E 24" Win10 6AV7241-5SB07-0FA0

Box IPC
IPC 427E (Standard) Win7 6AG4141-1AA14-0FA0
IPC 427E (High) Win7 6AG4141-5AB14-0FA0
IPC 427E (Standard) Win10 6AG4141-1AA17-0FA0
IPC 427E (High) Win10 6AG4141-5AB17-0FA0

Tool management
742 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
Index
$MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM, 69
$MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM, 74
$ $MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM, 67
$MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM, 68
$A_MONIFACT, 292
$MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA, 70
$A_MYMLN, 298
$MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC, 60
$A_MYMN, 298
$MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE, 59
$A_TOOLADAPT, 305
$MM_NUM_MAGAZINE, 63
$A_TOOLMLN, 291
$MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION, 64
$A_TOOLMN, 288
$MM_NUM_MULTITOOL, 63
$A_TOOLMTADAPT, 305
$MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS, 63
$A_USEDD, 304
$MM_NUM_SUMCORR, 73
$A_USEDND, 302
$MM_NUM_TOOL, 62
$A_USEDT, 303
$MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER, 71
$AC_MONMIN, 294
$MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER_TYPE2, 70
$AC_MSNUM, 321, 340
$MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER, 64
$AC_MTHNUM, 322, 340
$MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS, 59
$A-MONIFACT, 500
$MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, 61
$MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE, 83
$MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ, 58
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, 88
$MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM[n], 65
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE, 84
$MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM[n], 66
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE, 87
$MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM[n], 69
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES, 85
$MM_TYPE_CC_MTLOC_PARAM, 75
$MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT, 96
$MM_TYPE_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM, 74
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, 78
$MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM[n], 67
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND, 77
$MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM[n], 68
$MC_START_MODE_MASK, 79
$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME, 102
$MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT, 89
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, 98
$MC_SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE, 84
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME, 99
$MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO, 77
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR, 101
$MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE, 83
$MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL, 53
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, 93
$MN_MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS, 53
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE, 93
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE, 101
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE, 92
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME, 100
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, 89
$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME, 98
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER, 82
$MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER, 56
$MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE, 81
$MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK, 55
$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME, 81
$MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK, 54
$MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE, 80
$MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK, 53
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK, 92
$MN_TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED, 57
$MC_TRAFO_RESET_VALUE, 84
$P_AD[n], 320, 321
$MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE, 82
$P_ADT[n], 321
$MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, 73
$P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH, 325
$MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO, 72
$P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH, 325
$MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL, 72
$P_DLNO, 319
$MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES, 61
$P_ISTEST, 330
$MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES, 61
$P_MAGA, 308
$MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE, 73
$P_MAGDISL, 310
$MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM, 65
$P_MAGDISS, 310
$MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM, 66

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 743
Index

$P_MAGHLT, 315 $TC_MPTH[n,m], 193

$P_MAGNA, 308 $TC_MTPCx[t], 220
$P_MAGNA1, 308 $TC_MTPPCx[t], 221
$P_MAGNA2, 308 $TC_SCPx[t,D], 175
$P_MAGNDIS, 310 $TC_TP1 and $TC_TP2, 179
$P_MAGNH, 315 $TC_TP3 to TP6, 179
$P_MAGNHLT, 315 $TC_TP7, 179
$P_MAGNREL, 312 $TC_TP8, 180
$P_MAGNS, 311 $TC_TPCx[t], 183
$P_MAGREL, 312 $TC_TPGx[t], 183
$P_MAGS, 311 $TC_TPx[t], 177
$P_MSNUM, 322, 340
$P_MTHNUM, 322, 340
$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH, 324 A
$P_MTHSDC, 323, 324
Access protection, 32
$P_TC, 319, 320
Acknowledgement
$P_TCANG[n], 320
Simplified, 115
$P_TCDIFF[n], 320
Activate (internally)
$P_TH_OF_D, 324
Wear group, 353
$P_TOOL, 318
Activate wear group, 352
$P_TOOLD, 301
Adapter transformation, 521
$P_TOOLL[n], 319
Adding tools during machining, 468
$P_TOOLND, 292
Angle head adapter, 533
$P_TOOLNDL, 301
Cutter radius compensations, 540
$P_TOOLNG, 297
Cutting edge orientation, 541
$P_TOOLNO, 318
Setting-up offsets, 540
$P_TOOLNT, 300
Asynchronous transfer, 110
$P_TOOLP, 318
$P_TOOLR, 319
$P_TOOLT, 300
$P_USEKT, $TC_TP11, 282
B
$P_VDITCP[x], 222 Background magazine, 354
$TC_ADPT_ANG, 307 Block execution, 391
$TC_ADPT_DIR, 307 Block search, 411, 413
$TC_ADPT_OFF, 306 Block search with calculation, 411
$TC_ADPT_TYPE, 306 Block search, program test, 473
$TC_DPCx[t,D], 172 Block splitting, 391
$TC_DPx[t,D], 170 Buffer, 346
$TC_MAMPx [n], 197
$TC_MAP10, 187
$TC_MAP3, 187 C
$TC_MAP8, 187
Chain and box-type magazines, 347
$TC_MAPCx[n], 188
Changing the acknowledgement data, 113
$TC_MDPx[n,m], 194
CHKDM, 225, 514
$TC_MLSR[x,y], 204
CHKDNO, 514
$TC_MOPCx[t,D], 174
Code carrier data
$TC_MOPx[t,D], 173
Data conversion, 635
$TC_MPP1, 190
Code carrier data formats, 643
$TC_MPP5, 191
Code carrier data, dialog data
$TC_MPP6, 191
Assignment, 643
$TC_MPPCx[n,m], 192
Code carrier description file, 642
$TC_MPPx[n,m], 188
Commissioning, 106

Tool management
744 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Index

Configuring the tool change reason, 597

Consider adjacent location, 355
Coolant E
Assigning, 594
Editing the tool and magazine management, 42
Identifier, 608
Empty spindle, 393
CRCEDN, 337
End acknowledgement, 111
CREACE, 337
CREATO, 337
CRTOCE, 337
Cutting edge parameters
F
Identifiers, 559 Failure search strategy, 480
OEM identifier, 607 FC6 TM_TRANS2, 151
Cutting edge selection after tool change, 329 FC7 TM_REV, 152
FC8 TM_TRANS, 155
Free adapter data records, 523
D Free selection of D numbers for every T, 513
D numbers of replacement tools, 224
Data, 22
DB 1071, 106
G
DB 1072, 106 G-code program, 621
DB 1073, 106 GETACTT, 246
DB 71, 106 GETACTTD, 226, 514
DB 72, 106 GETDNO, 514
DB 73, 106 GETEXET, 240
DB10, 150 GETFREELOC, 273
DB1071, 139 GETSELT, 237
DB1072, 140, 141 GETT, 234
DB1073, 144 Grinding parameters
DB21-30, 148 Identifiers, 563
DB4, 149
DB71, 123
DB72, 128, 129 H
DB73, 134, 135
HMI
Decoupling the tool management from the spindle
Overview, 25
number, 423
DefToolDat.txt, 624, 647
DELDL, 229
DELECE, 337
I
DELETO, 337 IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION, 631
DELMLOWNER, 280 Identifier, 22, 26
DELMLRES, 279 Coolant, 608
DELMT, 232 Cutting edge parameters, 559
DELT, 232 Grinding parameters, 563
DELTC, 267 Magazine location adapter parameters, 565
Disable (internally) Magazine location parameters, 564
Wear group, 353 Monitoring parameters, 562
Disable monitored tools, 506 Multitool location parameter, 566
Disable wear group, 353 Multitool parameters, 565
DL - Programming, 516 OEM cutting edge parameter, 607
Duplo number, 23, 26 OEM magazine location parameters, 608
DZERO, 228 OEM monitoring parameters, 607
OEM multitool parameters, 608

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 745
Index

OEM tool parameters, 607

Tool parameters, 557
Tool-specific functions, 608 N
Internally assigned T number, 26
NC
Overview, 25
NEWMT, 230
L NEWT, 229
List parameters
Changing, 567
Creating new, 569 O
Loading locations, 345
oem_sltmlistconfig.xml, 624
Loading magazine, 345
Operator panels, 22
Loading stations, 345
OPI, 163
Location coding, 374
OPI block AD, 531
Location type hierarchy
OPI block ADN, 541
Alternative, 492
OPI block C/S, 238, 241
Conventional, 491
OPI block MTUD, 221
Location-dependent offsets, 175
OPI block MTUP, 221
Location-dependent offsets, coarse, 175
OPI block TD, 177
OPI block TG, 183
OPI block TM, 185
M OPI block TMC, 197, 204
Machine function, defining texts, 595 OPI block TMV, 335
Magazine configuration, 343 OPI block TO, 170, 173
Magazine location adapter parameters OPI block TOE, TOET, 176
Identifiers, 565 OPI block TOS, 175
Magazine location parameters OPI block TP, 189
Identifiers, 564 OPI block TPM, 194
OEM identifier, 608 OPI block TS, 173
Magazine-location-related adapter data records, 522 OPI block TT, 193
Magazines OPI block TU, 184
Real, 343 OPI block TUM, 188
Main spindle, 392 OPI block TUP, 192
Manual tools, 468 OPI block TUS, 174
Manufacturer's configuration, 543 Overview of data blocks, 106
MCIS-C script language, 649
Mini hierarchy, 495
MMCSEM, 337 P
Monitoring parameters
ParamTM, 673
Identifiers, 562
PI services, 337
OEM identifier, 607
PLC
Monitoring status, 499
Overview, 25
Monitoring types, 497
PLC - NCK interfaces, 30
Multiple T selection, 393
PLC at unloading, 367
Multitool location parameter
PLC in test mode, 421
Identifiers, 566
PLC sample program, 119
Multitool parameters
PLC services, 119
Identifiers, 565
Positioning, 445
OEM identifier, 608
POSM, 251
MVTOOL, 256
POSM (Multitool), 253
POSMT, 253

Tool management
746 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0
 Index

Predecoding, 391 Special cases

Prepare to change tool in a secondary spindle, 393 Empty spindle, 393
Preparing and changing a tool, 373 Multiple T selection, 393
Prewarning limit, 498 Spindle number, 423
Program test, 420 Spindle/buffer DB 72, 378
Programming data SSL, 413
Tool and cutting edge data, 168 Subprogram replacement technique, 325
Programming T/M06, 377 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK, 705
Programming the tool selection, 328 Synchronization, 111
Protection levels, 32 Synchronized actions, 402
System variables, 163
systemconfiguration.ini, 624, 631
Q
Quantity, 497
T
T number
R Internal, 23
T=location, 460
Relocating, 441
T=location number, 331
Relocation by the PLC, 442
T=location, automatic tool selection, 285
Replace tool search strategy, 483
TC_VAR, 421
Replacement tool, 391
TCA, 268
Replacement tools, 394
TCI, 271
RESETMON, 263
TDIdentCfg.xml, 632
RESETMON (multitool), 264
tdiidentcfg.xml, 624
Retroload program, 364
Time monitoring, 501
TMCRTC, 337
TMCRTO, 337
S TMFDPL, 337
Search for tool, 478 TMFPBP, 338
Search procedure for empty locations, 483 TMGETT, 336, 338
Search strategies, 478 TMMVTL, 337
Search strategy, 494 TMPCIT, 338
Search strategy for empty locations, 482 TMPOSM, 338
Secondary spindle, 393 TMRASS, 338
Service life, 497 TO unit, 344
SETDNO, 228, 514 Tool change, 376
SETMS, 248 Programming, 328
SETMTH, 248, 427 Tool change at the secondary spindle, 392
SETPIECE, 235, 501 Tool change in the spindle, 378
SETTA (Multitool), 261 Tool change of the main spindle, 392
SETTIA, 261 Tool change preparation in a main spindle, 392
SETTIA (multitool), 262 Tool change with turret, 388
Setting-up offset, 515 Tool changes in the NC using synchronized
Setting-up offsets, 175 actions, 402
Several magazines in one channel or one TO Tool changing errors, 395
unit, 429 Tool changing with T command, 373
Several spindles / tool holders, 428 Tool command
Several spindles in one channel or TO unit, 422 Power failure., 543
ShopMill Tool group, 478
Tool-specific functions, 594 Tool holder, 374, 620
Tool holder numbers, 426

Tool management
Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0 747
Index

Tool Ident Connection TRANSMIT command, 621

Configuration, 632 Transport acknowledgement, 111
PLC connection, 634 Traverse axes while tool is being changed, 393
Tool identifier, 26 TSEARC, 336, 338
Tool life decrementation, 501 Turret DB 73, 388
Tool life monitoring, 500 Turret magazine, 350
Tool list
List views, 553
Tool management V
Enable functions, 38
VDI signal, 505
Graphical tool/magazine display, 40
Grinding technology, 546
Manual tool, 41
MD settings, 33
W
MD settings for diameter / cutting edge radius, 38 Wear group, 352
Milling technology, 546 Wear monitoring, 502
Opening a function, 42 Wkonvert wizard
PLC,TRANSLINE 2000, 546 Installation, 625
Tool wear, 40 wkonvert.mcc, 624, 664
Turning technology, 546 wkonvert.mcx, 624
Turning technology on milling machine, 546 wkonvert.txt
With magazine management, 34 Description file, 639
Without magazine management, 33 Workpiece count monitoring, 501
Tool Management
Assignments, 50
Buffer locations, 46
Editing the management, 43
Loading locations, 47
Magazine configuration, 48
Tool unit, 46
Tool parameters
Identifiers, 557
OEM identifier, 607
Tool return transport, 374
Tool search, 478, 480
Tool search in wear group, 485
Tool types
Drill, 572
Grinding tools, 572
Milling tool, 571
Special tools, 573
Turning tools, 572
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER, 423
TOOLGNT, 285
TOOLGT, 285
Tool-related data, 177
ToolSize.mcc, 666
toolSpec.xml, 624
ToolSpec.xml
Configuration, 659
Tool-specific functions
Identifier, 608

Tool management
748 Function Manual, 12/2019, 6FC5397-1HP40-0BA0